ValiHelp PDF

VALI 4.
12
VALI Help
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
Revisions may be issued to advise of such changes and/or additions.
VALI 4.12 Belsim
VALI Help
Table of Contents
CHAPTER .......................................................................................................
1: WHAT'S NEW 23
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
1: USER'S GUIDE ORGANISATION 23
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
2: NEW FEATURES IN RELEASE VALI 4.12 24
INSTALLATION
...................................................................................................... 24
UPGRADING
......................................................................................................
MODELS FROM RELEASE VALI 4.11 TO RELEASE VALI 4.12 24
KNOWN
......................................................................................................
ISSUES 24
COMPATIBILITY
...................................................................................................... 25
NEW
......................................................................................................
FEATURES IN VALIMODELLER AND VALIENGINE 26
NEW
......................................................................................................
FEATURES IN VALISCHEDULER AND VALISERVICE 26
CHAPTER .......................................................................................................
2: INTRODUCTION TO VALI 29
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
1: DVR PRINCIPLES 29
INTRODUCTION
...................................................................................................... 29
WHAT
......................................................................................................
IS VALI ? 29
WHAT
......................................................................................................
ARE THE BENEFITS OF DVR ? 30
THE......................................................................................................
BASICS OF DATA VALIDATION AND RECONCILIATION 30
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
2: VALIMODELLER ENVIRONMENT 32
VALIMODELLER
......................................................................................................
COMPONENTS 32
THE......................................................................................................
MODEL FILE (BLS) AND OTHER FILES 32
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
3: VALI OBJECTS 34
PFD...................................................................................................... 34
UNIT
...................................................................................................... 35
STREAM
...................................................................................................... 35
THERMOD
...................................................................................................... 36
REACTION
...................................................................................................... 36
COMPOUND
...................................................................................................... 36
TAG
...................................................................................................... 37
AN ......................................................................................................
EXAMPLE: THE LIQUID-VAPOUR SEPARATOR 38
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
4: PROCESS UNIT EQUATIONS 40
CONTROLLING
......................................................................................................
THE SET OF GENERATED EQUATIONS 41
BLACK
......................................................................................................
BOXES AND MIXERS: BBXVAL, NETVAL, EFFVAL, CUTVAL 44
HEAT-EXCHANGERS:
......................................................................................................
EEXVAL, HEXVAL, PRHVAL, SATVAL, WALVAL, ECOVAL 46
The information contained in this document is proprietary to BELSIM s.a. The information in this
document is not to be reproduced. It is provided to C ustomers under a special license agreement. 3
VALI Help Belsim VALI 4.12
VALI Help
COMPRESSORS
......................................................................................................
AND TURBINES: COMVAL AND TURVAL 49
PUMPS:
......................................................................................................
PUMVAL 49
CHEMICAL REACTORS: BATVAL, BWHVAL, RCTVAL, RLVVAL, RKPVAL, RKIVAL,
CND-HNO3,
......................................................................................................
HEX-HNO3, RCT-HNO3 50
SEPARATORS:
......................................................................................................
LVEVAL, LLEVAL, LLVVAL, WLEVAL, WLVVAL 51
DISTILLATION, ABSORPTION AND STRIPPING COLUMNS: COLVAL, DISVAL,
CRUVAL
...................................................................................................... 51
STORAGE
......................................................................................................
TANKS: TNKVAL 52
USER DEFINED EQUATIONS AND CONTROLLERS: OPXVAL, FLXVAL, VARVAL,

EQUVAL
...................................................................................................... 52
VALVES
......................................................................................................
AND PRESSURE DROP: DPVAL, PIPEVAL 53
ON/OFF
......................................................................................................
PROPAGATION 53
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
5: PROCESS MEASUREMENTS 55
MEASUREMENT
......................................................................................................
INACCURACY (OR UNCERTAINTY) 55
COVARIANCE
......................................................................................................
BETWEEN MEASUREMENT ERRORS 56
MEASUREMENT
......................................................................................................
REDUNDANCY 57
HANDLING
......................................................................................................
PRESSURE MEASUREMENTS 57
AVAILABLE
......................................................................................................
STREAM MEASUREMENTS 58
AVAILABLE
......................................................................................................
UNIT MEASUREMENTS 65
EFFECT
......................................................................................................
OF BOUNDS 66
VALIDATED
......................................................................................................
ACCURACY AND COVARIANCE 67
GROSS
......................................................................................................
ERROR DETECTION AND ELIMINATION 67
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
6: PETROLEUM REFINING APPLICATIONS 69
THE......................................................................................................
CONCEPT OF PSEUDO-COMPOUND 69
DATA
......................................................................................................
VALIDATION OF DISTILLATION CURVES 69
USING
......................................................................................................
THE CRUVAL UNIT 70
USING
......................................................................................................
DISTILLATION CURVES MEASUREMENTS 70
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
7: COMPATIBILITY WITH VDI-2048 72
THE......................................................................................................
VDI-2048 GUIDELINE 72
THE......................................................................................................
VDI MODE OF VALI 72
COMPLIANCE
......................................................................................................
TO THE VDI-2048 GUIDELINE 72
CHAPTER .......................................................................................................
3: THERMODYNAMIC CALCULATION METHODS 75
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
1: INTRODUCTION 75
4 document is not to be reproduced. It is provided to C ustomers under a special license agreement.
VALI 4.12 Belsim
VALI Help
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
2: BELSIM CALCULATION METHODS 76
FUGACITY
......................................................................................................
CALCULATION METHODS FOR THE VAPOUR PHASE 77
FUGACITY
......................................................................................................
CALCULATION METHODS FOR THE LIQUID PHASE 77
CALCULATION
......................................................................................................
METHODS FOR ENTHALPY AND ENTROPY 79
CALCULATION
......................................................................................................
METHODS FOR MOLAR VOLUME 80
CALCULATION
......................................................................................................
METHODS FOR THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY 81
CALCULATION
......................................................................................................
METHODS FOR VISCOSITY 81
CALCULATION
......................................................................................................
METHODS FOR SOLID COMPOUNDS 82
PHASE
......................................................................................................
EQUILIBRIUM CALCULATIONS 82
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
3: FUNDAMENTAL PROPERTIES OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS 84
AVAILABLE
......................................................................................................
DATA BASES 84
DATA
......................................................................................................
NEEDED FOR LIQUIDS AND VAPOURS 86
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
4: INTERACTION PARAMETERS 94
EQUATIONS
......................................................................................................
OF STATE 95
VIRIAL
......................................................................................................
EQUATION OF STATE 95
NRTL
......................................................................................................
AND UNIQUAC METHODS 95
QUADRATIC
......................................................................................................
HEAT OF MIXING 97
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
5: CALCULATION METHODS FOR TYPICAL MIXTURES 98
WATER
...................................................................................................... 98
NONPOLAR
......................................................................................................
HYDROCARBON MIXTURES WITH OR WITHOUT WATER 98
OXYGENATED
......................................................................................................
COMPOUND MIXTURES 100
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
6: REFERENCES 102
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
7: FLUIDS DATA BASE 105
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
8: SOLIDS DATA BASE 142
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
9: USER-DEFINED COMPOUNDS 169
STARTING
......................................................................................................
NEWCOMP.EXE 169
ADDING
......................................................................................................
A NEW COMPOUND 170
DELETING
......................................................................................................
A COMPOUND 171
EDITING
......................................................................................................
COMPOUND DEFINITION 171
EDIT
......................................................................................................
COMPOUND DATA 172
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
10: USING CO-COMPLIANTTHERMODYNAMIC PLUGS 174
THE
......................................................................................................
PRINCIPLES 174
VALI Help
DEFINING
......................................................................................................
A CAPE-OPEN COMPLIANT THERMOD IN THE MODEL FILE 174
REVIEWING
......................................................................................................
THE PROPERTIES OF A CO COMPLIANT THERMOD 175
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
11: UNCERTAINTY OF THERMODYNAMICS 177
INTRODUCTION
...................................................................................................... 177
CALCULTATION
......................................................................................................
PROCEDURE 177
CHAPTER.......................................................................................................
4: HOW TO BUILD YOUR DATA VALIDATION MODEL 183
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
1: INTRODUCTION 183
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
2: HOW TO BUILD A VALIDATION MODEL 184
PRELIMINARY
......................................................................................................
WORK 184
DEFINING
......................................................................................................
THE MODEL WITH VALIMODELLER 187
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
3: INTRODUCING VALIMODELLER 188
WINDOWS
......................................................................................................
STANDARD 188
INFORMATION
......................................................................................................
COHERENCY 189
STARTING
......................................................................................................
VALIMODELLER 190
THE
......................................................................................................
BROWSE TREE 191
MENU
......................................................................................................
ITEMS 193
EDIT
......................................................................................................
MODE 196
TOOLBAR
......................................................................................................
AND KEYBOARD SHORT-CUTS 196
SHOWING
......................................................................................................
UNIT AND STREAM NAMES AND RESULT BOXES 198
CHANGING
......................................................................................................
CONFIGURATION OPTIONS 198
MODEL
......................................................................................................
MEASUREMENTS PAGE 204
THE
......................................................................................................
FIND FACILITY 204
RENAMING
......................................................................................................
OBJECTS 205
SELECTING
......................................................................................................
OBJECTS 206
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
4: THE MODEL FILES 207
CONTENTS
......................................................................................................
OF A MODEL FILE 207
CREATING
......................................................................................................
A NEW MODEL FILE 207
IMPORTING
......................................................................................................
MODELS FROM AN OTHER MODEL FILE 208
MODEL
......................................................................................................
VERSIONING AND DOCUMENTATION 210
THE
......................................................................................................
DEFAULT PLANT 211
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
5: THE PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAMS (PFD) 213
CREATING
......................................................................................................
A NEW VALI PFD 213
VALI 4.12 Belsim
VALI Help
OPENING
......................................................................................................
A PFD 214
RENAMING
......................................................................................................
A PFD 214
DELETING
......................................................................................................
A PFD 214
MOVING
......................................................................................................
A PFD TO ANOTHER PFD 215
CHANGING
......................................................................................................
THE STATUS OF A PFD (ON, OFF, OUT) 215
USING
......................................................................................................
EXTERNAL PFDs 216
ZOOMING
......................................................................................................
A PFD 217
PRINTING
......................................................................................................
A PFD 217
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
6: THE UNITS 218
UNIT
......................................................................................................
STATUS : ON/OFF/OUT 218
UNIT
......................................................................................................
NOTEBOOK 218
CREATING
......................................................................................................
A UNIT 226
MOVING
......................................................................................................
AND SIZING UNITS 228
DELETING
......................................................................................................
UNITS 228
RENAMING
......................................................................................................
UNITS 229
CREATING
......................................................................................................
A FLEX PROGRAM FROM AN EXTERNAL FILE 229
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
7: THE STREAMS 230
STREAM
......................................................................................................
NOTEBOOK 230
CREATING
......................................................................................................
A STREAM 235
REDRAWING
......................................................................................................
AND RECONNECTING STREAMS 236
DELETING
......................................................................................................
STREAMS 237
RENAMING
......................................................................................................
STREAMS 238
NAVIGATING
......................................................................................................
BETWEEN PFDs 238
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
8: THE TAGS 239
SETS
......................................................................................................
OF VALUES ASSOCIATED TO A TAG 240
CREATING
......................................................................................................
NEW TAGS 242
EDITING
......................................................................................................
TAGS 243
COPYING
......................................................................................................
TAGS FROM EXISTING OBJECTS 246
MOVING
......................................................................................................
TAGS FROM EXISTING OBJECTS 248
VIEWING
......................................................................................................
AND EDITING MEASUREMENTS VALUES 249
USING
......................................................................................................
CONTROL STRINGS 257
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
9: THE THERMODS 261
VALI Help
ACCESSING
......................................................................................................
THE THERMODS NOTEBOOKS 261
MODIFYING
......................................................................................................
THERMODS 262
CREATING
......................................................................................................
THERMODS 263
RENAMING
......................................................................................................
THERMODS 264
DELETING
......................................................................................................
THERMODS 264
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
10: THE COMPOUNDS 265
ADDING
......................................................................................................
COMPOUNDS TO A MODEL FILE 266
REMOVING
......................................................................................................
COMPOUNDS FROM A MODEL FILE 267
RENAMING
......................................................................................................
COMPOUNDS IN A MODEL FILE 268
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
11: THE REACTIONS 269
ACCESSING
......................................................................................................
REACTIONS NOTEBOOK 269
MODIFYING
......................................................................................................
THE STOICHIOMETRY OF REACTIONS 270
MODIFYING
......................................................................................................
THE KINETICS OF REACTIONS 271
CREATING
......................................................................................................
REACTIONS 273
RENAMING
......................................................................................................
REACTIONS 273
DELETING
......................................................................................................
REACTIONS 273
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
12: HANDLING PHYSICAL UNITS 274
CHANGING
......................................................................................................
PHYSICAL UNITS 274
CREATING
......................................................................................................
NEW PHYSICAL UNITS 275
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
13: RESULT BOXES 276
RESULT
......................................................................................................
BOXES NOTEBOOK 276
CREATING
......................................................................................................
RESULT BOXES 278
DELETING
......................................................................................................
RESULT BOXES 278
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
14: A PRACTICAL EXAMPLE 279
THE
......................................................................................................
EXAMPLE : A GAS TURBINE 279
PRELIMINARY
......................................................................................................
WORK 280
DEFINING
......................................................................................................
THE MODEL WITH VALIMODELLER 282
CHAPTER.......................................................................................................
5: HOW TO RUN YOUR DATA VALIDATION MODEL 293
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
1: INTRODUCTION 293
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
2: RUNNING THE MODEL 294
STARTING
......................................................................................................
VALIENGINE FROM VALIMODELLER GUI 295
INTERACTING
......................................................................................................
WITH VALIENGINE 299
VALI 4.12 Belsim
VALI Help
BROWSING
......................................................................................................
RESULT FILES 300
LOADING
......................................................................................................
VALI RESULTS BACK IN VALIMODELLER GUI 304
USING
......................................................................................................
VALI IN BATCH MODE 305
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
3: USING TAG FILES 307
GENERAL
......................................................................................................
SYNTAX OF A TAG FILE 307
TAG
......................................................................................................
DEFINITION 308
CONTROL
......................................................................................................
STRINGS 309
DEFINING
......................................................................................................
DUMMY TAGS 309
EXAMPLE
......................................................................................................
OF A TAG FILE 309
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
4: USING MEASUREMENTS FILES 310
SYNTAX
......................................................................................................
OF A MEASUREMENTS FILE 310
CHANGING
......................................................................................................
VALUES OF TAGS 315
DESCRIPTIVE
......................................................................................................
INFORMATION ABOUT THE RUN 317
SETTING
......................................................................................................
THE REFERENCE ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE 317
DEFINING
......................................................................................................
BOUNDS ON TAGS 317
DEFINING
......................................................................................................
BOUND CONTROL 318
DEFINING
......................................................................................................
FILTER SETTINGS 318
DEFINING
......................................................................................................
COMPENSATION SETTINGS 320
DEFINING
......................................................................................................
COVARIANCES BETWEEN TAGS 321
UNIT
......................................................................................................
PARAMETERS AND INITIAL VALUES OF VARIABLES 321
PRODUCT
......................................................................................................
ATTRIBUTES 322
PRODUCT
......................................................................................................
BALANCES AND IMBALANCES 323
COMMENTS
......................................................................................................
OF OBJECTS 325
SETTING
......................................................................................................
UNITS, STREAMS OR PRODUCT "OFF" 326
SETTING
......................................................................................................
UNITS OR PRODUCTS "OUT" 327
THERMOD
......................................................................................................
BINARY PARAMETERS 327
COMPOUND
......................................................................................................
DATA 328
ELECTRO-NEUTRALITY
......................................................................................................
CONSTRAINTS 328
OUTPUT
......................................................................................................
AND ARCHIVE FILES 328
WRITING
......................................................................................................
TAG VALUES IN THE REPORT 331
WRITING
......................................................................................................
VARIOUS INFORMATION ITEMS IN THE REPORT 332
WRITING
......................................................................................................
UNIT, STREAM, COMPOUND AND THERMOD VALUES 333
VALI Help
WRITING
......................................................................................................
TABLES 336
USING
......................................................................................................
IOFILE.EXE TO PROCESS MEASUREMENT FILES 345
USING
......................................................................................................
IOFILE.EXE TO CHANGE DEFAULT VALUES 345
EXAMPLE
......................................................................................................
OF MEASUREMENT FILES 347
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
5: THE SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS 349
PRELIMINARY
......................................................................................................
REMARKS 350
REPORTS
......................................................................................................
OF THE SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS 350
HOW
......................................................................................................
TO PERFORM A SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS 355
THEORETICAL
......................................................................................................
BACKGROUND 359
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
6: TRICKS AND TIPS 369
HOW
......................................................................................................
TO INITIALIZE A MODEL ? 369
SOLVING
......................................................................................................
CONVERGENCE PROBLEMS 370
HOW
......................................................................................................
TO CHECK THE COHERENCE OF A MODEL ? 371
HOW
......................................................................................................
TO DEAL WITH CLOSED LOOPS ? 371
DEALING
......................................................................................................
WITH NEGATIVE FLOW RATES 371
HOW
......................................................................................................
TO SWITCH BETWEEN OPERATING POINTS? 371
CUSTOMIZING
......................................................................................................
REPORTS 372
USER-DEFINED
......................................................................................................
PHYSICAL UNITS 372
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
7: VALI ERROR MESSAGES 375
VALI
......................................................................................................
ERROR HANDLING FACILITY 375
ERRORS
......................................................................................................
PRODUCED IN THE "MODEL ANALYSIS" PHASE 377
ERRORS
......................................................................................................
PRODUCED IN THE "MODEL RESOLUTION" PHASE 381
CHAPTER.......................................................................................................
6: DATA VALIDATION UNITS 387
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
1: SELECTING UNIT TYPES 387
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
2: ATMOPRES: SETTING ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE 390
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
3: BATVAL: REACTOR WITH ATOMIC BALANCES 391
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
4: BBXVAL: BLACK BOX WITH MOLAR BALANCES 397
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
5: BNDVAL: DEFAULT BOUNDS ON VARIABLES 404
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
6: BWHVAL: EQUILIBRATED REACTOR WITH ATOMIC BALANCES 407
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
7: CND-HNO3: NITROUS GAS CONDENSER 413
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
8: COLVAL: DISTILLATION COLUMN 418
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
9: COMVAL: GAS COMPRESSOR 426
VALI 4.12 Belsim
VALI Help
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
10: CRUOPT: OPTIONS FOR CRUDE FRACTIONS IDENTIFICATION 430
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
11: CRUVAL: CRUDE FRACTIONS IDENTIFICATION 434
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
12: CUTOFF: OPTIONS FOR GENERIC CUTOFF 445
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
13: CUTVAL: TEAR UNIT FOR LOOPS 447
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
14: DISVAL: TRAY-BY-TRAY DISTILLATION COLUMN 452
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
15: DPVAL: PRESSURE DROP (VALVE) 457
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
16: ECOVAL: BOILER ELEMENT 468
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
17: EEXVAL: HEAT EXCHANGER 469
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
18: EFFVAL: EFFICACITY AND LOSSES 475
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
19: EQUVAL: COMPOSITION EQUALITY 477
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
20: FLXVAL: USER DEFINED EQUATIONS 482
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
21: FLEXLIB: USER DEFINED FUNCTIONS 488
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
22: GROSSERR: GROSS ERRORS ELIMINATION 489
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
23: HEX-HNO3: NITROUS GAS COOLER 494
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
24: HEXVAL: RIGOROUS HEAT EXCHANGER 499
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
25: LLEVAL: LIQUID-LIQUID-SEPARATOR 512
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
26: LLVVAL : LIQUID-LIQUID-VAPOR SEPARATOR 516
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
27: LOFUNIT (PFD): LIST OF UNITS 520
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
28: LVEVAL : LIQUID-VAPOR SEPARATOR 521
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
29: NETVAL : PIPES NETWORK FOR MASS BALANCE 526
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
30: OPTVAL : VARIOUS VALI PARAMETERS 532
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
31: OPXVAL : USER DEFINED EQUATIONS 539
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
32: PIPEVAL : PIPELINES AND WELLS 544
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
33: PRECIS: PRECISION OF CALCULATIONS 558
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
34: PRHVAL : PREHEATER WITH CONDENSATION 564
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
35: PUMVAL : LIQUID PUMP 573
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
36: RCT-HNO3 : NH3 OXIDATION 581
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
37: RCTVAL : REACTOR WITH DEFINED REACTIONS 585
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
38: REPVAL : REPORT SETTINGS 591
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
39: RKIVAL : REACTOR WITH KINETICS 603
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
40: RKPVAL : EQUILIBRATED REACTIONS 608
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
41: RLVVAL : REACTOR IN L/V EQUILIBRIUM 615
VALI Help
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
42: SATVAL : SATURATION UNIT 618
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
43: SPLVAL : SPLITTER 623
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
44: TNKVAL : STORAGE TANK 626
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
45: TURVAL : TURBINE 635
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
46: VARVAL : USER DEFINED VARIABLES 640
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
47: WALVAL : HEAT LOSSES THROUGH UNIT WALLS 641
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
48: WLEVAL : WATER-LIQUID ORGANIC SEPARATOR 646
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
49: WLVVAL : LIQUID-LIQUID-VAPOR SEPARATOR 649
CHAPTER.......................................................................................................
7: FLEX LANGUAGE DESCRIPTION 655
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
1: INTRODUCTION 655
WHAT
......................................................................................................
YOU CAN DO WITH FLEX 655
INTERPRETED
......................................................................................................
OR COMPILED 656
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
2: FLEX LANGUAGE OBJECTS 657
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
3: LANGUAGE ELEMENTS 658
SEPARATORS
...................................................................................................... 658
CONSTANTS
...................................................................................................... 658
VARIABLES
...................................................................................................... 659
OPERATORS
......................................................................................................
AND INTERNAL FUNCTIONS 661
OPERATIONS
......................................................................................................
EXECUTION ORDER 662
RESERVED
......................................................................................................
KEYWORDS 663
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
4: EXECUTABLE INSTRUCTIONS 665
AFFECTATION
...................................................................................................... 665
READ
...................................................................................................... 665
WRITE
...................................................................................................... 665
WHILE
......................................................................................................
BLOCK 666
UNTIL
......................................................................................................
BLOCK 666
IF......................................................................................................
BLOCK 667
END
...................................................................................................... 667
RETURN
...................................................................................................... 667
SYNTAX
......................................................................................................
OF EXECUTABLE INSTRUCTIONS 668
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
5: FLEX FUNCTIONS 669
USING
......................................................................................................
FLEX FUNCTIONS 669
VALI 4.12 Belsim
VALI Help
FLEX
......................................................................................................
INTERNAL FUNCTIONS 670
USER-DEFINED
......................................................................................................
FUNCTIONS 672
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
6: EXAMPLE OF A FLEX PROGRAMME 674
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
7: VALI IMPLEMENTATION OF FLEX 675
INTRODUCTION
...................................................................................................... 675
USER
......................................................................................................
DEFINED MEASUREMENTS 676
FLEX
......................................................................................................
FUNCTIONS TO SELECT VARIABLES AND DATA 678
FLEX
......................................................................................................
FUNCTIONS FOR THERMODYNAMIC CALCULATIONS 688
FLEX
......................................................................................................
FUNCTIONS USED IN FILTERING 692
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
8: USING FLEX FOR DEFINING KINETICS 695
CHAPTER.......................................................................................................
8: SIMULATION UNITS 699
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
1: COL010 : DISTILLATION COLUMN 699
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
2: CTL010 : SINGLE VARIABLE CONTROLLER 702
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
3: CTL020 : MULTI-VARIABLES CONTROLLER 707
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
4: CUT010 : UTILITY TO CUT STREAMS 711
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
5: FUR010 : FURNACE 713
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
6: HTX010 : HEAT TRANSFER 717
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
7: HTX040 : HEAT EXCHANGER 722
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
8: HTX050 : FURNACE TO HEAT UP A GAS 726
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
9: HTX060 : BOILER WITH ASSOCIATED DRUM 731
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
10: HTX070 : SHELL AND TUBES HEAT EXCHANGER 735
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
11: HTX100 : HEAT EXCHANGER (ONE SIDE) 740
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
12: HTX110 : STREAM STATE TOOLBOX 743
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
13: INCREM : LOOP CONTROLLER 746
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
14: MAT010 : CONVERGENCE PROMOTER 750
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
15: MAT020 : CONVERGENCE PROMOTER 754
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
16: MEC010 : GAS COMPRESSOR 757
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
17: MEC030 : TURBINE 759
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
18: MEC050 : LIQUID PUMP 761
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
21: MIS010 : UTILITY MODEL 773
VALI Help
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
22: MIX010 : MATERIAL STREAMS MIXER 774
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
23: MIX020 : MECHANICAL/THERMAL STREAMS MIXER 776
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
24: PERMEA : PERMEATOR 777
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
25: OPT070 : OPTIMIZER 781
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
26: RCT010 : CHEMICAL REACTOR 785
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
27: RCT110 : NH3 SYNTHESIS REACTOR 790
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
28: RCT141 : FURNACE TYPE CHEMICAL REACTOR 793
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
31: RCT300 : INTEGRAL PLUG FLOW REACTOR 809
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
32: RCT320 : COOLED PLUG FLOW REACTOR 815
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
33: RCT400 : FLUID BED REACTOR 823
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
34: RCT420 : FLUID BED REACTOR 824
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
35: RCT500 : CSTR REACTOR 832
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
36: REPORT : REPORT FILE CONTROLLER 838
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
37: SEP010 : SPLITTER 840
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
38: SEP020 : LIQUID - VAPOUR SEPARATOR 842
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
39: SEP030 : BLACK BOX SEPARATOR 845
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
40: SEP050 : SPLITTER 849
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
41: SEP060 : LIQUID/LIQUID SEPARATOR 851
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
42: SEP070 : THREE PHASE SEPARATOR (L/L/V) 853
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
43: SEP080 : SOLID/FLUID PHASE SEPARATOR 856
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
44: SIMFLX : USER-DEFINED CALCULATIONS 858
DEFINING
......................................................................................................
THE FLEX PROGRAM 858
DEFINING
......................................................................................................
WHEN THE CODE MUST BE EXECUTED 860
FLEX
......................................................................................................
DECLARATIONS OF VARIABLES 861
FLEX
......................................................................................................
ROUTINE TO SELECT THERMODYNAMIC MODEL 862
FLEX
......................................................................................................
SUBROUTINES TO SELECT VARIABLES 863
FLEX
......................................................................................................
SUBROUTINES FOR THERMODYNAMIC CALCULATIONS 866
CHAPTER.......................................................................................................
9: VALIREPORT 873
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
1: INTRODUCTION 873
WHAT
......................................................................................................
CAN YOU DO WITH THIS APPLICATION? 873
VALI 4.12 Belsim
VALI Help
REQUIREMENTS
...................................................................................................... 874
SPECIAL
......................................................................................................
FEATURES AND CONVENTIONS 874
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
2: HANDLING VALIREPORT WORKBOOKS 875
CREATING
......................................................................................................
A VALIREPORT WORKBOOK 875
OVERVIEW
......................................................................................................
OF VALIREPORT 877
MOVING
......................................................................................................
AND COPYING A VALIREPORT WORKBOOK 879
WORKING
......................................................................................................
IN READ-ONLY MODE 879
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
3: HANDLING DATABASES 880
ACCESS
......................................................................................................
DATABASE 880
SQL-SERVER
......................................................................................................
DATABASE 880
DATABASE
......................................................................................................
STRUCTURE 882
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
4: WORKING RUN BY RUN 884
LOAD
......................................................................................................
RUN DATA FILES INTO VALIREPORT 884
STORE
......................................................................................................
RUN DATA INTO A DATABASE 886
AUTOMATICALLY
......................................................................................................
STORE RUNS INTO A DATABASE 887
RETRIEVE
......................................................................................................
RUN STORED IN THE DATABASE 888
REMOVING
......................................................................................................
RUNS FROM THE DATABASE 889
GROUPING
......................................................................................................
TAGS BY UNITS 889
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
5: TABLES AND CHARTS 891
CREATING
......................................................................................................
A TABLE 891
CREATING
......................................................................................................
A CHART 892
UPDATING
......................................................................................................
TABLES AND CHARTS 892
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
6: FLOW-SHEETS AND REPORTS 893
CREATING
......................................................................................................
A NEW FLOW-SHEET 893
DRAWING
......................................................................................................
THE FLOW-SHEET 893
INSERTING
......................................................................................................
TAG REFERENCES: FSTAG 895
INSERTING
......................................................................................................
AGGREGATED TAG REFERENCES: BLSTAGC 896
MODIFYING
......................................................................................................
TAG REFERENCES 898
DELETING
......................................................................................................
TAG REFERENCES 898
CHANGING
......................................................................................................
COLOURS AND THRESHOLD VALUE 898
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
7: WORKING DIRECTORY 900
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
8: VALIDBLOADER APPLICATION 901
VALI Help
INI
......................................................................................................
FILE FOR AN ACCESS DATABASE 902
INI
......................................................................................................
FILE FOR A SQL SERVER DATABASE 903
ADDITIONAL
......................................................................................................
SECTIONS IN THE INI FILE 903
VALIDBLOADER
......................................................................................................
STATUS 905
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
9: RUNNING VALI 906
CHAPTER.......................................................................................................
10: VALIANALYTICS 913
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
1: INTRODUCTION 913
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
2: INTEGRATION IN VALISUITE 916
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
3: GENERALITIES 917
TOOLBAR
...................................................................................................... 917
STATUS
......................................................................................................
BAR 918
GENERAL
......................................................................................................
FUNCTIONALITIES 919
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
4: GLOBAL VIEW 921
GLOBAL
......................................................................................................
TAGS TABLE 924
GAIN
......................................................................................................
DISTRIBUTION CHART 926
GENERAL
......................................................................................................
INFORMATION 927
GAIN
......................................................................................................
IN UNCERTAINTY BY MEASUREMENT TYPE 929
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
5: INDIVIDUAL VIEW 931
GLOBAL
......................................................................................................
TAGS TABLE 935
TAG
......................................................................................................
CHART 936
PRECEDENTS/DEPENDENTS
......................................................................................................
TABLES 939
PRECEDENTS
......................................................................................................
CHARTS 944
CHAPTER.......................................................................................................
11: LICENSEMANAGER 953
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
1: INTRODUCTION 953
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
2: BELSIM LICENSE SERVER 954
LICENSING
......................................................................................................
PHILOSOPHY 954
USERS
......................................................................................................
RIGHTS 955
HANDLERS
......................................................................................................
AND TIME-OUT 956
TAGS
...................................................................................................... 956
PLANTS
...................................................................................................... 957
ValiManager
......................................................................................................
and ValiPerformance 957
SUB-LICENSES
...................................................................................................... 957
VALI 4.12 Belsim
VALI Help
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
3: BELSIM LICENSEMANAGER 961
STARTING
......................................................................................................
LICENSEMANAGER 961
THE
......................................................................................................
GENERAL PAGE 963
THE
......................................................................................................
VALIMANAGER PAGE 964
THE
......................................................................................................
VALIPERFORMANCE PAGE 967
THE
......................................................................................................
TAG PAGE 969
THE
......................................................................................................
PLANT PAGE 971
THE
......................................................................................................
USER PAGE 972
THE
......................................................................................................
MAINTENANCE PAGE 975
THE
......................................................................................................
HANDLER PAGE 976
CHAPTER.......................................................................................................
12: VALIPERFORMANCE 979
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
1: VALI Software Suite 979
ValiPerformance
...................................................................................................... 979
VALI
......................................................................................................
modules 980
CHAPTER.......................................................................................................
13: VALILINK 985
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
1: INTRODUCTION 985
USING
......................................................................................................
VALILINK TO GET DATA 986
USING
......................................................................................................
VALILINK TO WRITE DATA 988
TAGNAMES
......................................................................................................
VERSUS DBNAMES 988
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
2: RUNNING VALILINK 990
STARTING
......................................................................................................
VALILINK 990
SPECIFYING
......................................................................................................
THE VALIDATION TIME WINDOW 990
VALILINK
......................................................................................................
STATUS 991
SECTION
.............................................................................................................
3: CONFIGURING VALILINK - VALILINKBUILDER 992
STARTING
......................................................................................................
VALILINKBUILDER 992
GENERAL
......................................................................................................
SETTINGS 995
READING
......................................................................................................
AND WRITING ACTIONS 1000
FIELDS
......................................................................................................
RECAPITULATIVE TABLE 1009
.............................................................................................................
SECTION 4: INPUT AND OUTPUT FILES FORMAT 1019
COMMON
......................................................................................................
FORMATTING CONVENTIONS 1019
FORMAT
......................................................................................................
OF THE INPUT FILES 1019
FORMAT
......................................................................................................
OF THE OUTPUT FILES 1019
VALI Help
.............................................................................................................
SECTION 5: CONTENTS OF THE LOG FILE 1021
.............................................................................................................
SECTION 6: PLUGS TECHNICAL INFORMATION 1022
PI
...................................................................................................... 1022
IP21
...................................................................................................... 1023
PLANTCONNECT
...................................................................................................... 1028
MS-SQL
...................................................................................................... 1028
ORACLE
...................................................................................................... 1029
PHD
...................................................................................................... 1033
MATRIKON
......................................................................................................
OPC HDA SERVER 1034
CHAPTER
.......................................................................................................
14: VALIFILTER AND VALIEVENT 1039
.............................................................................................................
SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION 1039
.............................................................................................................
SECTION 2: VALIFILTER 1040
FILTERING
......................................................................................................
TAGS 1040
DEFINING
......................................................................................................
THE FILTERS USING VALIMODELLER 1040
DEFINING
......................................................................................................
THE FILTERS USING MEA FILES 1042
INTERACTION
......................................................................................................
WITH CUTOFF AND CONTROL STRINGS 1043
REPORTS
...................................................................................................... 1044
ADVANCED
......................................................................................................
FILTERING STRATEGIES 1045
.............................................................................................................
SECTION 3: VALIEVENT 1046
OPERATION
...................................................................................................... 1046
STARTING
......................................................................................................
VALIEVENT 1046
CONFIGURING
......................................................................................................
VALIEVENT 1048
CHAPTER
.......................................................................................................
15: VALI ONLINE ENGINE 1053
.............................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................
SECTION 2: RUNNING VALIONLINEENGINE 1054
STARTING
......................................................................................................
VALIONLINEENGINE 1054
VALI
......................................................................................................
INFORMATION FILE (pc.vif) 1054
RUN
......................................................................................................
STATUS 1055
.............................................................................................................
SECTION 3: RUNNING VALISCHEDULER 1056
STARTING
......................................................................................................
VALISCHEDULER 1056
GENERAL
......................................................................................................
PAGE 1057
ACQUISITION
......................................................................................................
PAGE 1071
VALI 4.12 Belsim
VALI Help
RECONCILIATION
......................................................................................................
PAGE 1072
STORAGE
......................................................................................................
PAGE 1075
EVENT
......................................................................................................
PAGE 1076
BACKUP
......................................................................................................
PAGE 1077
LOG
......................................................................................................
FILE PAGE 1078
EMAIL
......................................................................................................
PAGE 1080
.............................................................................................................
SECTION 4: VALISERVICE 1083
INTRODUCTION
...................................................................................................... 1083
VALISERVICE
......................................................................................................
ENGINE 1083
PROCESS
......................................................................................................
QUEUE LIST 1084
CONFIGURATION
......................................................................................................
OF VALISERVICE 1087
CHAPTER
.......................................................................................................
16: VALIPRODUCTION 1091
.............................................................................................................
VALI
......................................................................................................
SOFTWARE SUITE 1091
VALIPRODUCTION
...................................................................................................... 1091
INFORMATION
......................................................................................................
FLOW 1092
SYNERGY
......................................................................................................
BETWEEN VALIPRODUCTION AND VALIPERFORMANCE 1093
VALIPRODUCTION
......................................................................................................
INTEGRATION 1093
VALIPRODUCTION
......................................................................................................
WORK-FLOW 1095
VALIMANAGER
......................................................................................................
APPLICATION 1096
.............................................................................................................
SECTION 2: CONFIGURING A VALIPRODUCTION APPLICATION 1098
A......................................................................................................
FLEXIBLE CLIENT/SERVER SCHEME 1098
USER
......................................................................................................
RIGHTS 1099
APPLICATION
......................................................................................................
DIRECTORY STRUCTURE AND PROCESSING 1099
CREATING
......................................................................................................
A NEW VALIPRODUCTION APPLICATION 1100
CONFIGURING
......................................................................................................
THE WORKFLOW 1105
TRACK
......................................................................................................
CHANGES 1111
.............................................................................................................
SECTION 3: USING VALIMANAGER 1112
STARTING
......................................................................................................
VALIMANAGER 1112
RUNS
......................................................................................................
OVERVIEW 1112
DIGGING
......................................................................................................
INTO RUNS 1120
STARTING
......................................................................................................
RERUN 1121
VALI Help
CHAPTER
.......................................................................................................
17: VALIFORMS 1127
.............................................................................................................
VALIFORMS
......................................................................................................
OBJECTIVES 1127
USING
......................................................................................................
VALIFORMS IN A VALIPRODUCTION APPLICATION 1130
USING
......................................................................................................
VALIFORMS IN A VALIPERFORMANCE APPLICATION 1130
.............................................................................................................
SECTION 2: CONFIGURING VALIFORMS 1131
USING
......................................................................................................
VALIFORMSBUILDER 1131
.............................................................................................................
SECTION 3: USING VALIFORMS 1175
STARTING
......................................................................................................
VALIFORMS 1175
USING
......................................................................................................
VALIFORMS IN INTERACTIVE MODE 1176
CHAPTER
.......................................................................................................
18: THERMO 1181
.............................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................
SECTION 2: USING THERMO 1183
STARTING
......................................................................................................
THERMO 1183
OVERVIEW
......................................................................................................
OF THERMO 1184
MENU
......................................................................................................
BAR 1185
TOOLBAR
...................................................................................................... 1186
TABS
......................................................................................................
VIEW 1186
STATUS
......................................................................................................
BAR 1187
OPEN
......................................................................................................
MODEL FILES 1187
THERMODYNAMIC
......................................................................................................
PROPERTIES CALCULATION 1188
CHANGING
......................................................................................................
PHYSICAL UNITS 1191
SAVE
......................................................................................................
RESULT IN THE MODEL FILE 1193
EXPORT
......................................................................................................
TO EXCEL 1193
DRAWING
......................................................................................................
LIQUID – VAPOR EQUILIBRIUM 1195
DRAW
......................................................................................................
CUSTOMIZED CHART 1197
GRAPH
......................................................................................................
TAB 1200
WHITE
......................................................................................................
EQUILIBRIUM 1206
SAVING,
......................................................................................................
LOADING AND COMPARING RESULTS 1207
CHAPTER 1
WHAT'S NEW
I
VALI 4.12 Belsim CHAPTER 1
SECTION 1: USER'S GUIDE ORGANISATION

The ValiModeller user's guide is divided in 6 parts.
INTRODUCTION TO VALIMODELLER: presentation of some important concepts of

BELSIM environment and of data validation principles. Being familiar with these concepts
is essential to be able to use ValiModeller
THERMODYNAMIC CALCULATION METHODS: presentation of the various

thermodynamic methods to calculate liquid-vapor equilibrium, enthalpies, etc., and list of
available compounds
HOW TO BUILD YOUR DATA VALIDATION MODEL: description of the different steps
required to build a validation model of a process, introduction to the use of ValiModeller to
define and maintain your model. Finally a practical example is used to show the major
steps of a model development
HOW TO RUN YOUR DATA VALIDATION MODEL: explanation of how to run ValiEngine
from ValiModeller, presentation of various features like the ValiEngine runtime options,
the TAG and MEA files to import and export information to and from a model, the
customization of the reports and the sensitivity analysis. It gives some Tips and Tricks
and lists error messages issued by ValiEngine
DATA VALIDATION UNITS: detailed information on the different types of Units that can
be used in a data validation model. Some practical examples are shown. Each Unit type
has its own section
FLEX LANGUAGE DESCRIPTION: details of the FLEX language that can be used to enter
user-defined constraints and measurements
SECTION 2: NEW FEATURES IN RELEASE VALI 4.12

This Section summarizes the new features of Release 2016 of Vali 4.
Release VALI 4.12 is upward compatible from Release VALI 4.11, but not backward. Files created or
modified using Release VALI 4.12 will not be readable with previous Releases.
2.1 INSTALLATION
The installation procedure uses the classical Windows Installation engine. See the installation guide
(Installation Guide.pdf) for detailed installation guidelines and latest information on the software.
2.2 UPGRADING MODELS FROM RELEASE VALI 4.11 TO

RELEASE VALI 4.12
Each model should first be opened and saved with ValiModeller before being processed by a VALI
engine.
2.3 KNOWN ISSUES
VALIMODELLER
You can experience some troubles using ValiModeller on Operating Systems with Asian display
languages. The font size of ValiModeller tabular Notebooks can appear bigger or smaller than
expected. This display issue differs depending on your Operating System version (Windows 7, 8, 10
...).
A workaround has been developed to adapt the font size and the display. In the "others" section of
Belsim.ini configuration file (located in the VALI installation folder, under "..\Belsim\dat\"), you can
define and customize the FontFactorX and FontFactorY parameters (expressed in percentages). These
parameters will adapt the rendering (height and width) of the tabular Notebooks.
As an example, the recommended parameters for Korean Operating Systems are:
FontFactorX = 105
FontFactorY = 99
VALIREPORT
Depending on the various .NET frameworks installed on your machine, you may experience some
problems while starting ValiReport. Contact Belsim support if you experience some troubles.
In Office 2007, you may experience issues with the format of the date displayed by "rundate" tag in
the run sheet. This can result in wrong date format when manually inserting runs in the
ValiDatabase, leading to wrong date interpretation.
ValiReport is NOT compatible with MS Office 2010, 2012 and 2013 64bits. Make sure you use a 32bits
version of MS Office to be able to use ValiReport.
2.4 COMPATIBILITY
VALI suite is compatible with Windows 7 and Windows 8, provided screen resolution is set to 100%
for font size. If you experience display troubles in ValiModeller, check this parameter.
2.5 NEW FEATURES IN VALIMODELLER AND VALIENGINE
USER-DEFINED DIGITS NUMBER IN MAIN.ARC FILE

By default, ValiEngine prints Tag values in the Archive file with 6 significant digits. The number of
decimals in the main.arc file can be defined by the user. Refer to Output and Archive Files for more
details.
PRODUCT IMBALANCE FLAGGED AS ERROR

In Production Accounting applications, ValiEngine may identify product imbalances, despite the fact
that we force the balance to be closed.
These product imbalances are reported as errors ("ERS") in the r1v.html log file, in addition to the
r5v.html "Suspected Tags" report. Refer to Browsing result files for more details about HTML reports
generated by ValiEngine.
COMPATIBILITY WITH CHINESE AND KOREAN ENVIRONMENTS

ValiModeller and ValiEngine are now compatible with Chinese and Korean environments. That
means the VALI solution will behave properly in these specific environments. Nevertheless, English
remains the only supported language (character set) within ValiModeller interface.
2.6 NEW FEATURES IN VALISCHEDULER AND VALISERVICE
NEGATIVE TIME DELAY IN REAL TIME APPLICATIONS

For real time applications with a long time step (e.g. weekly applications), a negative time delay
parameter can be defined.
This way, the user does not have to wait a full time step (e.g. a week) to retrieve the results of the
previous period.
Refer to section Starting Real Time for more details about real time applications in ValiScheduler.
CHAPTER 2
INTRODUCTION TO
VALI II
SECTION 1: DVR PRINCIPLES

1.1 INTRODUCTION
This Chapter presents the basic concepts you should be familiar with in order to use VALI.
Section 2 pre se nts the principle s of DVR (Data Validation and Re conciliation)
Section 3 de scribe s VALI Environme nt
Section 4 introduce s the obje cts to be use d in orde r to build a VALI mode l
Section 5 shows which e quations are ge ne rate d by the diffe re nt type s of units
Section 6 de als with me asure me nts unce rtainty and re dundancy. It also give s the list
of me asure me nts that can be de fine d
Section 7 pre se nts some conce pts spe cific to Pe trole um Re fining applications
Section 8 discusse s compatibility issue s with the VDI-2048
1.2 WHAT IS VALI ?
VALI is an equation-based data validation and reconciliation (DVR) software. It uses information
redundancy and conservation laws to correct measurements and convert them into accurate and
reliable information. VALI is used in upstream, refinery, petrochemical, chemical plants as well as
power plants including nuclear power stations. VALI detects faulty sensors and pinpoints
degradation of equipment performance (heat rate, compressor efficiency, etc.)
The plant measurements, including lab analyses, are reconciled in such a way that mass (on a
component per component basis) and heat balances are satisfied. When necessary, L/V equilibrium
and performance constraints can be added. Unmeasured values are calculated and VALI also
quantifies the precision of reconciled values. Its sensitivity analysis tool shows the interdependence
between the measurements. VALI can be used on-line or off-line and has been integrated in various
control systems.
1.3 WHAT ARE THE BENEFITS OF DVR ?
There are a large number of benefits due to data validation and reconciliation, and they include:
improvement of measurement layout
decrease of number of routine analyses
reduced frequency of sensor calibration; only faulty sensors need to be calibrated
on-line optimization tools work with more accurate information
systematic improvement of process data
early detection of sensors deviation and degradation of equipment performance
correct plant balances for accounting and performance follow-up
quality at process level
1.4 THE BASICS OF DATA VALIDATION AND RECONCILIATION
To understand the basic principles of DVR, one must first recognise that plant measurements
(including lab analyses) are not 100% error free. When using these measurements without correction
to generate plant balances, one usually gets incoherence in these balances.
Some sources of errors in the balances directly depend on sensors themselves:
intrinsic sensor precision
sensor calibration
sensor location
A second source of error when calculating plant balances is the small instabilities of the plant
operation and the fact that samples and measurements are not exactly taken at the same time. Using
time averages for plant data partly reduces this problem. However, lab analyses cannot be averaged.
Finally, one must also realise that in some cases too many measurements are available whereas in
some other cases some measurements are missing and must be back calculated from other
measurements. The aspect of data redundancy is here an essential factor. It is because too many
measurements are available that one can prove the fact that the measurements are somewhat
inaccurate. For example, measuring all inlet and outlet flow rates of a plant (or of part of a plant),
usually leads to some imbalance between the total inputs and total outputs.
The main idea of DVR is to use the data redundancy of the system as the source of information to
correct the measurements. In fact, each measurement is corrected as slightly as possible but in such a
way that the corrected measurements matches all the constraints (or balances) of the process.
Mathematically, this can be expressed as:
subject to
where : is the validated value of measurement i
is the measured value of measurement i
is an unmeasured variable j
is the measurement uncertainty or confidence interval
corresponds to the process equality constraints
corresponds to the process inequality constraints
The term is called the penalty of measurement i
SECTION 2: VALIMODELLER ENVIRONMENT

2.1 VALIMODELLER COMPONENTS
ValiModeller is a multi-purpose modelling tool intended to develop and maintain one or several
process models. ValiModeller can be used for offline validation and engineering studies.
It contains the following modules:
Vali.exe: ValiEngine, which will validate and reconcile the measurements of your process
ValiModeller.exe: the graphical user interface GUI of VALI; allows you to create and
maintain your DVR models
Iofile.exe: a stand alone application that can be used to process measurement files (and
reports) independently of ValiModeller
Sensiv.exe: the sensitivity analysis tool of ValiModeller and analyses the

interdependencies between measurements and process variables
2.2 THE MODEL FILE (BLS) AND OTHER FILES
ValiEngine and ValiModeller GUI work with the information stored in a file called the Model file (e.g.
model.bls). This file contains the description of the models as well as their data and their results.
FIGURE 1 - VALI ENVIRONMENT
ValiModeller allows you to develop your DVR model and to visualise, after a run, the state of the
process by looking at the units and streams data. The data are read from the model file and are
written back in it as well.
The measurements can be defined either within the model file, using ValiModeller, or in one or
several TAG files, using for example NotePad or WordPad text editor. A TAG file is a simple ASCII
file where each line defines one measurement by giving it a name, indicating the variable it relates to,
and defining a default value and precision.
Example:
TI-001 Stream Feed T 120 5 C
You can also have MEA files that give, line by line, the current values of the measurements. Typically
in an on-line environment, these files would come from the process control computer and from the
LIMS (Laboratory Information Management System).
Example:
TI-001 98 C
The MEA files can also be used to modify the model, like changing various Units parameters or
specifying that parts of a model must be ignored or are currently shutdown.
Finally, MEA files can be used to generate dedicated reports or transfer information to the outside
world for archiving, reporting or integrating in other applications.
VALI reads the model description from the model (bls file) and the measurements definitions and
values from the TAG and MEA files. It creates a number of report files (r1v, r2v,..., r6v) with various
messages and results and optionally output MEA files with validated values of selected
measurements.
In addition, when the run is successful, all the model data are saved in the model file.
VALI can also generate ARC files with all data related to tags (among which measured, filtered,
validated values,) as well as some information on the run (total penalty, penalty by PFD, number of
filtered and eliminated tags, etc.). This file can be loaded into ValiDatabase through ValiDBLoader
application.
ValiEngine is described in a section "How to run your data validation model".
SECTION 3: VALI OBJECTS

Within the VALI graphical user interface (GUI), various objects are used to describe the process and
problem.
The objects available are:
PFD: ske tch of the proce ss, graphically showing the units and the ir inte rconne cting stre ams.
Whe n ne e de d, comple x proce sse s can be divide d in se ve ral diffe re nt PFDS
UNIT: a pie ce of e quipme nt of the proce ss, like a pump, a he at e xchange r or a re actor
STREAM: conne ction be twe e n units
THERMOD: list of che mical compounds and the rmodynamic me thods. Each mate rial STREAM
has an associate d THERMOD indicating to VALI what compounds can be pre se nt in this mate rial
STREAM and what me thods must be use d to compute its the rmodynamic prope rtie s
REACTION: che mical re action de fine d by its stoichiome try
COMPOUND: che mical compound, like H2O or BENZENE with its the rmodynamic prope rtie s
TAG: me asure me nt point associate d to a mode l variable , like a stre am te mpe rature , and by
assigning a name and an accuracy to it
Each object must have a name of 32 characters maximum. These names must be unique within each
class. UNITS and PFDS are however considered as being of the same class. A UNIT and a PFD can
therefore not bear the same name.
For COMPOUNDS, only the first 30 letters are significant and should be unique, although 32 letters
are defined and kept.
When a tagname is automatically built by ValiEngine, its length may be up to 48 characters.
For example, a movement with submovement tagname may be written in the *.arc file as:
ZONE_PRODUCT_MOVEMENT_SUBMOVEMENT_MEASUREMENT,
each part being maximum 8 characters long + 4 underscores = 44 maxi, rounded to next multiple of 8.
3.1 PFD
Process Flow Diagrams are organised recursively, in a very similar way as directories under
Windows operating system: any PFD can contain other PFDs. The main PFD, called by default MAIN,
can only contain other PFDs, but no UNITS (process equipment). The other PFDs can contain:
PFDs
UNITS, which describe the pieces of equipment of the process
STREAMS which connect the UNITS
For coherency, any UNIT and any PFD can appear in only one PFD. Similarly, any stream can connect
a maximum of two different UNITS. However, these two UNITS can be located in two different PFDs.
When running VALI you will indicate what PFD must be validated. All units and sub-PFDs of this
PFD will then be part of the model.
3.2 UNIT
The various types of UNITS are gathered into categories: heat exchangers, reactors, etc. For each
category, one or several different types are available with various capabilities. For example, a heat
exchanger can be modelled by different types of units like EEXVAL, HEXVAL, SATVAL, WALVAL
(see "Process unit equations" for more information on the various types of units).
UNIT DATA defines the operation of the UNIT. In addition to a MODE parameter, which defines the
type of balances to perform, several other parameters further describe the current operation of the
unit: pressure drops, extents of reactions, etc.
3.3 STREAM
Objects called Streams represent the connections between process Units. They describe what flows
from one equipment to another.
There are three types of streams:
MATERIAL: a stream of chemical compounds
THERMAL: heat flow
MECHANICAL: mechanical power transfer
MATERIAL STREAMS
A MATERIAL STREAM gathers all the information on a particular stream: pressure, temperature,
enthalpy, rate and composition. Each STREAM has a state indicator, that determines the phases that
can be present:
Liquid: liquid only
Vapour: vapour only
Liquid/Vapour: liquid and/or vapour
Liquid/Liquid: up to two liquid phases can appear
Water/Liquid: one water phase (assumed to be pure) and on liquid phase can appear
Water/Liquid/Vapour: a water, a liquid and a vapour phase can occur
Liquid/Liquid/Vapour: two liquid and one vapour phases can appear
For example, a stream indicated as LV can be in liquid state, in vapour state or can be a mixture of
these two phases. However, only one of these two phases can happen to be present.
On the contrary, setting a stream as L will force VALI to consider the stream as a liquid, even when
its validated composition, pressure and temperature would correspond to a vapour state.
Attention: for STREAMS where the saturation state is specified, like the outlet streams of a liquid/
vapour separator, it is recommended to set the states of the streams accordingly: liquid for the
saturated liquid and vapour for the saturated vapour. This significantly improves the convergence
of the resulting model.
THERMAL AND MECHANICAL STREAMS

The heat flow supplied to a unit is normally defined as an inlet THERMAL STREAM, while the heat
produced by a unit should be defined as an outlet THERMAL STREAM. However, you do not
imperatively have to follow up this rule. Negative values would then be obtained for the heat load.
The same rule applies for MECHANICAL STREAMS.
3.4 THERMOD
The VALI object THERMOD represents the set of information required to calculate the
thermodynamic properties of a STREAM:
the names of the Compounds which can appear in the STREAM
the names of the methods to use to calculate its thermodynamic properties
binary interaction parameters (if necessary)
3.5 REACTION
The object called REACTION contains the information related to a chemical reaction:
the COMPOUNDS involved in the reaction
their stoichiometric coefficients
3.6 COMPOUND
A COMPOUND object identifies a chemical component involved in the process and contains all its
basic properties. There are three types of compounds:
EPIC: chemical compound defined by its formula. The compound must be in the liquid
and/or vapour phase
SOLID: chemical compound defined by its formula. The compound must be in the solid
phase
PETFRA: petroleum fraction that is in the liquid and/or vapour phase. The chemical
formula and properties of the compound are estimated from its density and its boiling
temperature
VALI handles compounds of type PETFRA exactly as usual EPIC compounds. The only difference is
the way their properties are generated.
On the contrary, SOLID compounds are handled differently. They constitute a distinct phase and
cannot melt or vaporise and become a liquid or a vapour. In separators, SOLIDS can be entrained
with the gas phase and/or with the liquid phase. Solids can be involved in chemical reactions as
other compounds.
Attention: it is possible to model phase changes to and from the solid state by defining a (pseudo)
chemical reaction, where a SOLID compound is transformed into its corresponding liquid/gas
compound, with the same molecular formula.
3.7 TAG
TAGs define the properties of measurements.
The definition of a measurement contains its location (on a STREAM or a UNIT), its name, its value
and its accuracy. Optionally, it is possible to associate to each tag:
bounds: warning, error and solver
filter settings (ValiFilter licence required)
compensation settings
control strings, to generate warning messages and to update the measured value or its
precision, depending on the measured value
In a model, four sets of values and precisions are attached to each tag:
the default value and its precision, which are the values as defined in the model (or in the
tag file) by the user
the measured value and its precision, which are initially set to the default values but can
be overwritten by values coming from measurement files (MEA files) by ValiEngine
the used value and its precision, which are the values actually used during the
reconciliation step. They are initialized to the measured values but can be overwritten by
filters, compensation algorithms or control strings
the reconciled value and its precision as validated by ValiEngine
FIGURE 2 - THE TAG VALUES
In addition, ValiEngine will calculate for each tag:
the apparent penalty: calculated on the basis of the measured value:
the penalty: calculated on the basis of the used value, can be selected (through the
mathematical unit OPTVAL) as being either the measurement penalty, the correction
penalty or the measurement impact:
Impact = decrease in total penalty when setting the measurement OFF
the gain: which expresses the accuracy improvement and is calculated on the basis of the
reconciled and the used accuracies:
3.8 AN EXAMPLE: THE LIQUID-VAPOUR SEPARATOR
Figure below represents the VALI objects that describe a liquid-vapour separator.
The process unit consists in a single UNIT named D. The three streams connected to the separator are
S1, S2 and S3. A single THERMOD named TMOD, attached to each STREAM, represents the set of
information necessary to calculate their thermodynamic properties. The compounds, listed in the
THERMOD, describe the chemical compounds CHEM1, CHEM2 and CHEM3.
FIGURE 3 - THE LIQUID-VAPOUR S EPARATOR
SECTION 4: PROCESS UNIT EQUATIONS

The set of equations used to validate the measurements is built up on basis of equations subsets,
written by VALI for each unit of the process. Among these process units you may find:
black boxes
splitters
mixers
heat exchangers
compressors
turbines
pumps
chemical reactors
separators (liquid/vapour, liquid/liquid, etc.)
distillation, absorption and stripping columns
controllers
storage tanks
valves
Each unit used to model these pieces of equipment will generate a number of equations:
the mass balance for each chemical compound
the energy balance of the unit
phase equilibrium equations
performance equations
pressure drop equations
When validating composition and flow rate measurements, only mass balances are necessary.
When temperature measurements are available, you can use energy balance equations. This will not
only validate these measurements but can also improve the accuracy of the compositions and flow
rates measurements.
Moreover, when streams are involved in a phase change phenomenon, as for example in liquid/
vapour separator, the liquid-vapour equilibrium relationships or the saturation equations can help
to improve the accuracy of the composition and pressure measurements.
For some units, it is also possible to consider performance equations. This allows you, for example, to
avoid temperature crossings in heat exchangers or non-feasible efficiencies in rotating equipment.
According to the type of equipment you want to model, one or several VALI unit types are available,
with various capabilities. Each UNIT type has a six to eight-letter name, which usually ends by VAL
and where the first characters indicate the type of unit, like BBXVAL for a Black box.
The first paragraph hereafter explains the way to control what equations are generated by each unit.
The following paragraphs explain how to select the appropriate VALI UNIT type in different
situations. They also describe what equations are generated.
4.1 CONTROLLING THE SET OF GENERATED EQUATIONS
The equations that are generated obviously depend on the type of UNIT you will select. In addition,
the UNITS have various parameters that allow you to further define the equations generated:
the MODE parameter controls energy, phase equilibrium and performance equations
the MODEDP and REFDP parameters controls pressure drop equations
specific unit parameters are sometimes available
The set of equations can also change depending on the status of streams and units.
A UNIT (or a complete flow-sheet) can be specified as OUT. The model is handled as if the UNIT (or
PFD) had never been defined.
A STREAM can be set OFF, meaning that no flow rate is present. All measurements on that stream
are deactivated, its variables are removed from the equations system and its rate is set to zero.
Similarly, a UNIT (or even a complete PFD) can be set OFF. All the STREAMS connected to the UNIT
are then set OFF.
A propagation algorithm checks whether the fact that a STREAM is off does automatically entrain
that a UNIT should be set OFF as well. For example if the inlet material STREAM of a pump is set
OFF, then the pump must be set OFF as well. See sub-section "ON/OFF propagation" for more
information.
MASS BALANCES AND STREAM RATES SHARING

In order to reduce the number of variables and equations, VALI uses a feature called Stream Rates
Sharing allowing streams having the same composition to share the same partial rates variables.
This unique feature is totally automatic and transparent to the user. It can however be useful to
understand how this feature works, given that it affects the way units generate their equations.
For example, in a pump, the inlet and outlet streams obviously have the same composition. Rather
than duplicating the partial rates of the inlet stream for the outlet stream, VALI will instead use the
rates of the inlet stream for the outlet stream. If the inlet stream involves 10 compounds, this avoids
generating 10 extra variables and extra equations.
This concept is further generalized to the case where a stream is split up in several streams of the
same composition. In this case, an additional variable, the rates (mixture) fraction (MIXF) is
generated for each of the outlet streams. The actual flow rates of the outlet streams are obtained by
the product of their rates fraction by the flow rate of the split stream.
VOLUME BALANCES
When dealing with global material balances of plants without any tracking of the stream
composition, volume balances can be added to the mass balances of some of the units. The advantage
of using volume balances is that this increases the redundancy of the model and thus improves the
accuracy and robustness of the validated values. Of course, volume balances should only be used for
the units where volume will be conserved, like most blending units or cold storage tanks.
To activate volume balances, you must introduce the keyword CONVDENS in the unit COMMENT
and provide density measurements (CONVDENS measurements) on the streams. This feature only
works on units of type BBXVAL, NETVAL, COLVAL and TNKVAL.
Example:
see model convdens.bls in the directory "\examples\convdens".
Attention: Volume balances should not be used when dealing with thermodynamic-based models,
that is models including a detailed representation of the chemical compounds. Indeed the density
of the streams is in this case linked to the stream composition and thus adding volume balances
would artificially and incorrectly increase the redundancy of the model.
IMBALANCES
In ValiProduction applications, it is sometimes necessary to act an imbalance, for example when an
unidentified loss has occurred. The corresponding imbalance can be acted on a storage tank (See unit
TNKVAL) or on a product (see unit NETVAL).
USING THE PARAMETER MODE

Most units have a parameter called MODE that enables you to control whether energy, phase
equilibrium or performance equations must be generated by the unit or not. Note that mass balances
are always generated.
Depending on the Unit type, different MODE values can be defined, like for example:
MODE=0: all unit equations are generated
MODE=1: only mass balances are generated
MODE=2: only energy and mass balances are generated
MODE=3: only phase equilibrium and mass balances are generated
USING PARAMETERS MODEDP AND REFDP

To control whether pressure drop equations are generated, you use the parameters MODEDP.
Depending on the Unit type, different MODEDP values can be defined, like for example:
MODEDP=0: no pressure drop equation will be generated
MODEDP=1: a pressure drop equation will be generated
MODEDP=2: a pressure drop equation will be generated and the pressure drop will be a
function of the mass flow rate according to an equation having the following form:
DP = CFDP * DPX * ( Massf / MassfX )²
where :
CFDP is a measurable parameter that accounts for the deviation from the calculated
value (typically measured at 1 with a precision of 20% to 30%)
DPX is the nominal pressure drop
MassfX is the nominal flow rate
Massf is the actual flow rate

Attention:
1. Units accepting only one outlet material stream have only on set of parameters DP,CFDP, etc.
whereas units which can handle several outlet streams have several pressure drop parameters
called DP1, DP2, …, CFDP1, CFDP2, etc.
2. To simplify the modelling it is possible to specify (see parameter PRESMODE of unit OPTVAL)
that pressure and/or pressure drops will be considered as constant when not measured. This
feature must not be used when using equations relating pressure drops and rates.
When a unit mixes several inlet streams, you can control whether the inlet streams pressures are
related or not with the REFDP parameter, which can be:
'All Inlet': all inlet streams have the same pressure
<stream>: inlet stream pressures are not related. If pressure drops equations are
generated, then the stream indicated by REFDP is taken as reference for pressure drop
calculations
By default REFDP points to the first inlet stream.
If the stream referred by the REFDP parameters is OFF, then the next stream in the list is taken as
reference and an error message is generated.
OTHER EQUATIONS
Some units can generate other types of equations, like saturation state or performance equations.
Specific parameters are then available.
ELECTRO-NEUTRALITY
When dealing with ions, you can add on selected streams the constraint that the total electric charge
of positive and negative ions must be in balance.
Whe re :
Xi is the partial molar flow rates of compound (ion) i
Electro i is the ionic charge of compound (ion) i
The electric charges of the compounds (ELECTRO) and the streams for which the constraint must be
generated are defined through measurement files (see " Electro-Neutrality Constraints").
4.2 BLACK BOXES AND MIXERS: BBXVAL, NETVAL, EFFVAL,

CUTVAL
Four different types of UNITs are available:
BBXVAL: general black-box, allowing to mix a number of inlet streams and split their
contents in a number of outlet streams of varying pressure, temperature and composition.
THERMAL and MECHANICAL STREAMS can also be specified as inlet and outlet streams
of a BBXVAL
NETVAL: dedicated to the modeling of complex networks of product lines in overall mass
balance models
EFFVAL: mixing of a number of thermal or mechanical streams in two outlet streams: a

main outlet and losses
CUTVAL: to break the material or pressure loops that can appear when dealing with
closed cycles (e.g. water cycle in power plant)
BBXVAL
A BBXVAL unit ensures the global mass and energy balances to be satisfied, allowing you to model
mixers, distillation, absorption or stripping columns and feed drums, but sometimes, also entire
parts of a process. No reactions can occur in a BBXVAL.
A BBXVAL unit can also represent shafts linking compressors, turbines and pumps.
Depending on the unit parameters, the unit generates:
a mass balance equation for each chemical compound
an energy balance around the black box. If vaporisation or condensation occurs, the heat
involved in this phase change is, of course, taken into account. When inlet and outlet
pressures are not equal, the energy balance takes the expansion and compression works
into account
equalities between the temperature of all outlet streams
equality between the temperature of all outlet streams and the first inlet stream
pressure drop equations
NETVAL
The NETVAL unit has been primarily designed to simplify the modelling of tank farms where the
storage tanks can be used to store different types of products in function of time.
Rather than having to change the structure of the model by reconnecting streams from and to the
different tanks, the streams are given an ATTRIBUTE that defines their product type. The streams
coming from or going to the process units and the tanks are all connected to units of type NETVAL,
all units of this type being considered as part of a single global network of pipes. The NETVAL units
will generate as many balances as there are attributes and for each of them will include all the
streams of the corresponding attribute.
Attention: NETVAL units can only be used in mass (or mass and volume) balance mode.
EFFVAL
An EFFVAL unit generates the heat balance between all inlet streams and the two outlet streams.
Any combination of thermal and mechanical streams can be used for the inlet and outlet streams.
The yield of the unit can be expressed as a loss fraction or as efficiency.
This unit is particularly suited for modelling motors, generators or turbine shafts.
CUTVAL
The type CUTVAL is a "black-box" UNIT ensuring energy and optionally pressure balances but no
mass balance. It is useful in close loops where the mass balances can create singular matrix.
SPLITTERS: SPLVAL
A Splitter splits a stream in up to ten outlet streams having the same composition.
using the Stream Rates Sharing concept, a global mass balance equation linking the Rates
fractions of the outlet streams to that of the inlet stream
one equation for each outlet stream, to determine the split fraction versus the inlet stream
an energy balance
one pressure drop equation. With the parameter DP, you can specify (or measure) the
pressure drop between the inlet stream and all outlet streams
Attention:
1. The outlet streams of a SPLVAL are always set at the same pressure, even if a pressure drop is not
specified.
2. All streams must be set in the same State (L,V,LV, etc.).
4.3 HEAT-EXCHANGERS: EEXVAL, HEXVAL, PRHVAL, SATVAL,

WALVAL, ECOVAL
You can model heat exchangers by using six different types of units:
EEXVAL: a ve ry fle xible mode l that can have from 1 up to 10 inle t and outle t mate rial stre ams as
we ll as the rmal stre ams. Any he at e xchange can occur provide d that the global he at balance of
the e xchange r is satisfie d
HEXVAL: de dicate d to co- and counte r-curre nt e xchange rs, with 2 inle t and 2 outle t mate rial
stre ams, and take s a he at e xchange surface are a and transfe r coe fficie nt (conve ction and/or
radiation) into account. Saturation constraints can be adde d to any outle t stre am (saturate d
liquid or vapour). The he at transfe r coe fficie nt and the pre ssure drops can be re late d to the flow
rate s
PRHVAL: pre he ate rs whe re a stre am is he ate d up by a vapour that is de supe rhe ate d,
conde nse d and subcoole d. An optional drain inle t allows conne cting a third (conde nse d) inle t
stre am
SATVAL: se t the vapour fraction of one outle t stre am
WALVAL: e stimating he at losse s through the walls of ve sse ls
ECOVAL: accurate ly mode l HRSG (He at Re cove ry Ste am ge ne rators) e le me nts
EEXVAL
global mass balance equations linking the Rates fractions of the outlet streams to that of
the corresponding inlet streams, using the Stream Rates Sharing concept
an overall energy balance. If condensation or vaporization occurs, the enthalpy of the

phase change is taken into account
one pressure drop equation per outlet material stream. With the parameter DPi, you can
specify (or measure) the pressure drop between the corresponding inlet and outlet streams
HEXVAL
The HEXVAL unit type allows you to consider the heat exchanger performance and to avoid
temperature crossings in the exchanger. Contrary to the EEXVAL type, an HEXVAL can only handle
heat exchange between 2 pairs of inlet/outlet streams. In addition to the heat and mass balances, this
unit type can generate a performance equation linking the exchanger load to the temperature
difference between the hot and cold streams.
The default method is based on DTLN concept:
Where :
DTSIDE1 and DTSIDE2 are the temperature differences on each side of the heat exchanger
σ is the constant of Boltzmann (5.667 10-8 W/m2K4)
Thot is the outlet temperature of the hot stream
Tcold is the outlet temperature of the cold stream
Uglob is the heat transfer coefficient
A is the heat transfer surface area
CORDTLN is a correction factor that accounts for the deviation from true counter-
configuration (only for multi-passes exchangers)
Alternatively, a method based on the concept of Number of Transfer Units (NTU) can also be used to
model convective heat transfer. This method is recommended when the difference of temperature
between the hot and cold streams is small on one or both sides of the exchanger.
The NTU method is based on the notion of efficiency, the efficiency being defined by the ratio between
the actual heat load of the exchanger and the maximum heat load achievable assuming an infinite
heat transfer surface area.
EFF = LOAD / LOADMAX
The efficiency is calculated on basis of the number of transfer unit NUT according to various
formulas (see description of unit HEXVAL) depending on the exchanger configuration and operation
mode.
EFF = F(NUT, C)
NUT = Uglob * A /Cmin
C = Cmin/ Cmax
Where :
Cmax and Cmin are the total heat capacities of the streams (Massf * Cp)
With both methods (DTLN or NTU), you can define measurements on temperature differences
(DTSIDE1, DTSIDE2), heat load (LOAD), heat exchange area (A) and heat exchange coefficients (by
convection Uglob and by radiation G). Among these three latest variables (A, Uglob and G), at least
two of them must be, either measured, or set constant.
Alternatively the heat transfer coefficient Uglob can be calculated in function of the flow rates of the
streams according to the following formula:
1/Uglob = FF + 1/(CFH.Uclean)
Where :
FF is a fouling factor
CFH is a tuning parameter
Uclean is the clean heat transfer coefficient calculated from:
1/Uclean = (1/U1 + RTUB + 1/U2)
Where :
U1 is the film heat transfer coefficient on shell side
RTUB is the tubes thermal resistance
U2 is the film heat transfer coefficient on tubes side
U1 and U2 can either be introduced as pseudo-measurements or can be calculated from reference

conditions:
Ui = ReferUi * (Massf i/ MassfUi)0.7
Where :
ReferUi is the film heat transfer coefficient at nominal conditions
Massfi is the actual flow rate
MassfUi is the flowrate at nominal conditions
The HEXVAL unit type also allows you to impose a saturation state (saturated liquid or vapour) of
the outlet streams with the VFRACi parameter.
PRHVAL
The PRHVAL unit type is similar to a HEXVAL unit but allows you to split up the heat exchange into
three regions (desuperheating, condensing and subcooling) with different heat transfer coefficients.
Note that radiation is not taken into account.
In addition to the heat and mass balances, this unit type generates three performance equations (one
for each zone):
Where:
DTSIDE1 and DTSIDE2 are the temperature differences on each side of the three regions
SATVAL
This unit allows you to set the saturation state of the outlet stream: any vapour fraction between 0
and 1 can be set. It is also possible to specify vapour super-heating or liquid sub-cooling by defining
the difference between the saturation state and the stream temperature.
WALVAL
This unit allows estimating the heat losses to the ambient air in function of the wall temperature and
surface area. Different equations are used for vertical and horizontal walls.
ECOVAL
This type of UNIT is dedicated to the detail modelling of tube layers in heat recovery steam boilers
(HRSG). It includes predictions of heat transfer coefficients and pressure drop on fumes and steam
side. The same UNIT type can be used for the modelling of economisers, vaporisers and super-
heaters.
Attention: ECOVAL unit is not part of the VALI standard installation. It is sold as an add-on to VALI
under a separate license agreement.
4.4 COMPRESSORS AND TURBINES: COMVAL AND TURVAL
The mass balances of compressors and turbines are generated, by using the stream rates sharing
algorithm. A mechanical stream must be connected as inlet of the compressor or outlet of the
turbine.
In addition to the mass balance, two types of equations are generated: the heat balance and the
efficiency equations involving the isentropic or polytropic efficiencies.
The isentropic or the polytropic efficiency parameter can be introduced as a pseudo-measurement.
When the pressure balance equation is activated, the pressure ratio of the machine is computed as
well.
For turbines a Stodola parameter can be defined in order to link the flow rate going through the unit
to the driving pressure drop.
4.5 PUMPS: PUMVAL
The mass balance of a pump is generated by using the stream rates sharing algorithm. A mechanical
stream must be connected as inlet of the pump.
In addition to the mass balance, two equations are generated: the heat balance and the volumetric
efficiency equation involving the efficiency of the pump.
In the latter case, the volumetric efficiency parameter can be introduced as a pseudo-measurement.
When the pressure balance equation is activated, the pressure ratio of the machine is computed as
well.
Eventually, performance curves can also be introduced:
efficiency curve versus volumetric flow rate
pump head versus volumetric flow rate
The distance from the performance curves is given as measurable parameters.
4.6 CHEMICAL REACTORS: BATVAL, BWHVAL, RCTVAL, RLVVAL,

RKPVAL, RKIVAL, CND-HNO3, HEX-HNO3, RCT-HNO3
Different types of reactors are available:
BATVAL: any reaction can occur. The unit generates atomic balances
BWHVAL: any reaction can occur. The unit generates atomic balances and an equilibrium
equation based on the minimisation of Gibbs Energy
RCTVAL: only the selected reactions can occur
RLVVAL: only the selected reactions can occur. The unit has two outlet streams: one in
gas phase and one in liquid phase. These streams are in physical (liquid/vapour)
equilibrium
RKPVAL : only the selected reactions can occur. Some of these reactions can be specified as
chemically equilibrated
RKIVAL: only the selected reactions can occur. The conversions are calculated on basis of a
user-defined kinetic model
CND-HNO3: specific model for modelling nitric acid condensers
HEX-HNO3: specific model for modelling nitrous gas coolers
RCT-HNO3: specific model for modelling ammonia oxidation
These units will generate:
mass balances in accordance with their reaction scheme
an energy balance
optionally, depending on the MODEDP parameter, a pressure drop equation
for the RLVVAL unit, physical equilibrium equations between the vapour and liquid
outlet streams
for the BWHVAL and RKPVAL units, chemical equilibrium equations
for the RKIVAL, conversion calculations based on the kinetics
for CND-HNO3 and HEX-HNO3, the Bodenstein kinetics are used
for RCT-HNO3, the oxidation to NO and N2 is adjusted via a Selectivity parameter
Attention: When the energy and/or the equilibrium equations of a RLVVAL unit are activated, this
unit also generates equalities between outlet streams pressures and temperatures.
4.7 SEPARATORS: LVEVAL, LLEVAL, LLVVAL, WLEVAL, WLVVAL
Five different types of units allow you to handle physical separation of up to two liquid and one
vapour phases:
LVEVAL: Liquid/Vapour separator
LLEVAL: Liquid/Liquid separator
LLVVAL: Liquid/Liquid/Vapour separator
WLEVAL: Water/Liquid separator
WLVVAL: Water/Liquid/Vapour separator
According to the unit parameters, the unit generates:
one mass balance equation for each chemical compound
an energy balance
one (or two) equilibrium equation for each component present in the outlet streams
optionally, one pressure drop equation. With the parameter DP, you can specify (or
measure) the pressure drop between the inlet stream and all outlet streams
when the energy or the equilibrium equations are activated, these units also generate
equalities between outlet streams pressures and temperatures
Attention:
1. If some of the partial flow rates or compositions are measured as zero with a standard deviation
equal to zero in one of the outlet streams, the related liquid-vapour equilibrium relationship is
not considered by VALI. This can be useful when some chemicals are practically non-existent in
the liquid or vapour phase.
2. The outlet streams must be in a state compatible with their function. For example, a vapour outlet
stream should be set as V.
3. No assumption is made about the destination of solids that would be present in the inlet streams.
Composition measurements (or information coming from the downstream balances) should
define whether solids are going with the liquid or vapour phase.
4. In Water/Liquid and Water/Liquid/Vapour, the water is assumed to be pure. The solubility of

water in the organic phase is based on the solubility in kerosene.
4.8 DISTILLATION, ABSORPTION AND STRIPPING COLUMNS:

COLVAL, DISVAL, CRUVAL
Distillation columns can be modelled by using units of type BBXVAL (see Black boxes), COLVAL,
DISVAL or CRUVAL:
COLVAL: generates the same equations as a BXXVAL, but in addition, it allows you to
specify a saturation state (saturated liquid or vapour) for each outlet stream
DISVAL: generates equilibrium equations for a number of theoretical trays. Distance from
equilibrium can be set though a Murphree efficiency
CRUVAL : is dedicated to refining applications. It allows identifying pseudo-compounds

used to model petroleum cuts
4.9 STORAGE TANKS: TNKVAL
Storage tanks can be modelled using units of type TNKVAL. Only the material balance of the tank is
taken into account. The heat balance is not taken into account.
Typically, storage tanks models are most often used in daily production balance models. In such a
case, the recommended approach is to use as initial inventory (measured as constants) the validated
inventory of the preceding period (usually day).
Different modelling options are available enabling to apprehend various situations and operation
modes:
the inventories can be expressed on mass, volume or level (using a strapping table) basis
the composition of the tank can be made variable or kept constant over the validation time
period
a temporary imbalance can be activated to act a product loss or surplus
4.10 USER DEFINED EQUATIONS AND CONTROLLERS: OPXVAL,

FLXVAL, VARVAL, EQUVAL
Three units are available to enter your own equations and measurements: OPXVAL, FLXVAL and
VARVAL. In addition, you can add Flex code to generate additional constraints on all equipment
units.
An OPXVAL unit allows you to define up to 9 simple equations involving two variables:
VARi = X1 # Xi+1
Where:
X1 and Xi+1 are any STREAM or UNIT variables, referenced through tags
the symbol # is one of the four operators: + - * /
VARi is one of the parameters of the OPXVAL unit and is dimensionless
For example, selecting as X variables the temperatures of two streams and - as the operator, you can
calculate the temperature difference between two streams. By defining a measurement on, the VARi
parameter, you can measure this temperature difference.
Whenever you want to consider more sophisticated relationships, you can use units of type FLXVAL
or add a Flex code to any equipment units. This allows you to write equations with a FORTRAN-like
programming language. Access to the thermodynamic data bank is enabled by dedicated
procedures.
Virtually, any relationship can be added. For example, the relationship between temperature,
pressure, composition and viscosity would allow you to enter viscosity measurements.
The VARVAL unit provides up to nine variables which can be referenced in any Flex code (on the
VARVAL unit itself or on any other unit).
Attention: All variables of units OPXVAL, FLXVAL and VARVAL are expressed as a dimensionless
number or %. In addition, you can define your own physical units for these variables.
The EQUVAL unit ensures the equality of composition between 2 streams.
4.11 VALVES AND PRESSURE DROP: DPVAL, PIPEVAL
The DPVAL unit allows you to take into account the pressure drop through lines or valves. The
pressure drop can be related to the stream flow rate and conditions. Several different equations are
available.
The PIPEVAL is a more detailed unit enabling to calculate the pressure drop through wells and lines
according to various correlation equations (Colebrook, Von Karman, Blasius, etc.). Heat Transfer to
an external media can also be taken into account.
4.12 ON/OFF PROPAGATION
The ON/OFF propagation system of VALI is a quite powerful system enabling to run a model in
different operation modes by automatically detecting parts of the process which are not operated at
a given time.
The final status of a stream or unit depends on the following succession of mechanisms.
The status is set according to the status of the PFD, Unit or Stream in the model file.
This status is then modified according to ON/OFF settings in the measurement files.
Combining the syntax UNIT/STREAM/PFD/PRODUCT name ON or OFF, and the @IF/
THEN/ELSE keywords you can activate or deactivate parts of the model depending on the
measured value of any tag (see Measurement files).
The CUTOFF commands is designed to set OFF a material Stream when its measured rate,
temperature or pressure is below a given threshold value. The CUTOFF can be set globally
for all measurements of a given type (either through the CUTOFF unit or through
Measurement files) or can be set tag by tag via control strings (see Using control strings) or
ValiFilter.
The STATUS measurement can also set OFF any material Stream via an external binary
tag.
The propagation algorithm will then propagate the OFF status through Units and Streams
according to the following rules:
if a Unit is OFF, then all its inlet and outlet Streams are set OFF
if all the inlet (or outlet) material Streams of a Unit are OFF then the Unit is OFF
if only thermal and mechanical Streams are connected to a Unit, it will be set OFF as
soon as less than two Streams remains ON
On a heat exchanger, if an inlet (or outlet ) Stream is OFF then its corresponding outlet
(or inlet) Stream is set OFF
By exception to the above rules, the TNKVAL unit remains active independently of the
status of the connected Streams
Flex FILTER functions can be used to set OFF units and streams depending on user-
defined rules
Attention:
1. Objects can be set ON until step 2. Starting from step 3, objects can only be set OFF.
2. The CUTOFF always uses the raw measured value, except when the measured value is filtered
with the FILTERED syntax in a mea file. In the latter case the FILTERED value of the mea file is
used
3. If a tag is OFF or set OFF via a Filter, then the CUTOFF is not executed.
SECTION 5: PROCESS MEASUREMENTS

Measurements are the essential source of information of VALI (in addition to process topology) and
cover all information coming either from the plant (temperatures, pressures, rates, on-line analyses,
etc.) or from the laboratory (GC, densities, etc.).
The concept of measurement is generalised into pseudo-measurement that represents any numerical
information that can be given about the process in addition to actual measurements. For example,
turbine efficiencies can be given as pseudo-measurement, although this information comes rather
from design data than from a real measurement.
Measurements can be given on streams (e.g.: T, p, rates) or on units (e.g.: pressure drops). They are
defined via TAGS, a TAG being a unique name given to a process variable. When needed several tags
can be associated to the same variable. Tags are defined either directly in the model or in separate
TAG files. Their values can further be changed via MEA files. Finally "control strings" attached to the
tag can further modify its value or its accuracy depending on some user defined conditions on the
measured value of the tag.
This section covers the following points:
measurement inaccuracy (or uncertainty)
measurement redundancy
handling pressure measurements
available stream measurements
available units measurements
effect of bounds
validated accuracy
gross error detection
5.1 MEASUREMENT INACCURACY (OR UNCERTAINTY)
The measurement inaccuracy reflects the confidence given to a measurement value. It indicates the
expected range of deviation of the measurement.
Sources of inaccuracies are:
intrinsic precision of the sensor
imprecision due to the calibration
improper location of the sensor
noise due to small instabilities of operation
etc.
By assuming a Gaussian distribution of the sensor error, the measurement inaccuracy can be
numerically defined on basis of the standard deviation of the distribution. The probability that the
real value will be distant from the measured value by less than twice the deviation is about 95 %.
Values outside this range will be flagged by VALI as unlikely.
Finding the right combination of the inaccuracies is partly a trial and error procedure. Starting
values for the inaccuracies can be the intrinsic imprecision of the sensor as specified by the
manufacturer. Some typical values are also proposed in the following sections of this chapter.
In VALI, measurement accuracy is defined on an absolute or a relative basis. In the latter case, the
accuracy will be proportional to the measured value and calculated as a percentage of this value, as
expressed in the native physical units of VALI. For example a precision of 1% on a temperature of
20C corresponds to 1% of 293.15 K, which is 2.93 K (or C). Take care that relative precision introduced
via a TAG file or a MEA file, must be specified as a negative value (-2 meaning 2%).
Some values have a special meaning for VALI:
0: the measurement is considered perfect and no correction will be applied to its value
any value above 10 10 : the measurement is considered as not available. Setting the
accuracy to 1010 has exactly the same effect as removing the measurement from the list of
measurements
VALUE SIGNIFICATION
0 pe rfe ct me asure me nt
% (GUI) or <0 (MEA file ) re lative de viation (in pe rce ntage )
>0 absolute de viation
>1010 me asure me nt is ignore d
TABLE 1 - MEAS UREMENT INACCURACIES
Attention: The accuracy of the tags can be made dependant of the measurement range. (See section
"Using Control Strings"). It can also be modified though ValiFilter.
5.2 COVARIANCE BETWEEN MEASUREMENT ERRORS
In some cases, the errors on several different measurements are not totally independent. This can
happen for example when the same sensor is used to measure the temperature of several different
streams.
In such a case, the measurements errors are not stochastically independent, which is one of the main
assumptions underlying the concept of DVR. To overcome this problem, one can introduce an
additional element: the covariance between measurement errors.
This covariance is introduced as a correlation coefficient between the measurement errors, defined
as:
The value of this correlation coefficient is, on a theoretical basis, bounded between -1 and +1. Positive
values indicate that the two measurements will be partly affected by the same errors whereas
negative values indicate that part of the error on one measurement affect the other one with the
opposite sign.
5.3 MEASUREMENT REDUNDANCY
The redundancy is an essential concept of VALI and is the source of information it uses to correct
measurements.
The easiest way to understand the concept of redundancy is to consider an example where only a
mass balance is concerned.
If the rate of the stream IN only is measured, then there is not enough information to describe the
state of the system, as nothing can determine the quantity going through each outlet lines OUT1 and
OUT2. The redundancy is negative.
If the inlet rate and one of the outlet rates is known, then we have just enough information to
describe the system and the redundancy level is zero.
Finally, if both outlet rates are measured in addition to the inlet rate, than we have more information
than what is necessary to describe the system. We have a redundancy of level one.
The level of redundancy is the number of measurements, which come in addition to the set of
measurements needed to be able to calculate the system.
This level is calculated by VALI and when it is negative (sometimes only in a sub-region of the
complete flow sheet), VALI will propose a set of measurements, which could be added.
If it is not possible to add any measurement to the system (because of economical constraints for
example), another way of avoiding negative redundancy is to group some units as a more global
black box.
5.4 HANDLING PRESSURE MEASUREMENTS
Due to their specific nature, pressure measurements and variables are handled by VALI somewhat
differently than other measurements.
The reason for this special treatment comes from the fact that in many cases, pressure measurements
cannot be validated because they are not interdependent with other state variables of the streams.
For example, for liquid streams, the pressure has no influence on the stream enthalpy. Therefore, the
pressure will not be of any influence on the heat and mass balances that are generated by VALI.
For gas streams (vapour only), the effect of pressure on the enthalpy is non-zero but is, in most cases,
very low. Here again, trying to validate pressure measurements on basis of heat and mass balances
is difficult if not impossible.
Therefore, it is in most cases only meaningful to validate pressure measurements when pressure
drop or pressure equalities equations are available. VALI will therefore request additional
measurements when unmeasured pressure variables do not appear in such equations.
Three different ways of handling pressure variables can be specified through the parameter
PRESMODE of the OPTVAL unit:
PRESMODE=0: unit pressure drops (DP) are considered constant when they are not
measured
PRESMODE=1: stream pressure and Unit pressure drops (DP) are considered constant
when they are not measured
PRESMODE=2: stream pressure and Unit pressure drops are considered variable when not
measured. (This is the default behaviour )
Pressure measurements can be specified in absolute (bar, atm, Pa, etc) or relative - to atmospheric
pressure - basis (barg, MPag., etc.). The reference atmospheric pressure is 1.0 bar by default. This
value can be overwritten using ATMOPRES syntax in a measurement file (see "How to run your data
validation model").
5.5 AVAILABLE STREAM MEASUREMENTS
The tables below indicate for each type of stream what variables can be measured. Some typical
values are proposed for measurement uncertainty.
THERMAL STREAMS (THRSTRM)
NAME PHYS. DESCRIPTION TYPICAL REMARKS

ACCURACY
UNITS
LOAD kW He at load 5 - 20 %
FRACIN - Fraction of e ne rgy carrie d

out by an inle t stre am with
re spe ct to all inle t the rmal
and me chanical stre ams
of a unit

ACCURACY
UNITS
FRACOUT - Fraction of e ne rgy carrie d

out by an outle t stre am
with re spe ct to all outle t
the rmal and me chanical
stre ams of a unit
MECHANICAL STREAMS (MECSTRM)

ACCURACY
UNITS
POWER kW Me chanical powe r 1-5%
RPM RPM Rotations pe r minute s (1)
FRACIN - Fraction of e ne rgy carrie d

out by an inle t stre am with
re spe ct to all inle t the rmal
and me chanical stre ams
of a unit
FRACOUT - Fraction of e ne rgy carrie d

out by an outle t stre am
with re spe ct to all outle t
the rmal and me chanical
stre ams of a unit
(1): RPM variable will only be taken into account if it appears in a Flex code, for example by linking
the flow rate through the rotating equipment to its rotation speed and pressure drop.
MATERIAL STREAMS (FLOW)
Pressure and temperature related measurements

ACCURACY
UNITS
T C Te mpe rature 1-5K re lative pre cision is re lative

to the absolute te mpe rature
(in K)
P bar Pre ssure 1-5%

ACCURACY
UNITS
H kJ/kmol Molar e nthalpy OFF
HW kJ/kg We ight e nthalpy OFF
SMOL kJ/kmol.K Molar e ntropy OFF
VAPF - Vapour fraction 1-3% Valid only for single

compound stre ams
HUMIDITY(1) Stre am humidity (0-100%) 1-3% H2O must be pre se nt in the

stre am
Z - Compre ssibility factor OFF
Gamma - Ratio of spe cific he ats (Cp/ OFF

Cv)
A kJ/kmol Exe rgy OFF
(1):
whe re :
PH20 is the ratio of the molar flowrate of H20 to the total molar flowrate of the stre am;
P_Stre am is the pre ssure of the stre am;
PSAT is the saturate d pre ssure (at the te mpe rature of the stre am).
He re is the formula of the saturate d pre ssure :
PSAT = e xp(66.9403 - 7469.33/T + 0.474867e -5*T² - 8.03256*ln(T))
whe re T is the te mpe rature of the stre am (in Ke lvin).
Flow rate measurements

ACCURACY
UNITS
MOLF(4) kmol/s Total molar flow rate 5 - 10 %
MASSF(4) kg/s Total mass flow rate 5 - 10 %
GMOLF kmol/s Total dry molar flow rate 5 - 10 %
GMASSF kg/s Total dry mass flow rate 5 - 10 %

ACCURACY
UNITS
COLDVOLF(1) m3/s Cold liquid volume tric flow 5 - 10 %

(4) (15C)
CONVVOLF m3/s Cold liquid volume tric flow 5 - 10 %

(2) base d on the conve ntional
de nsity (CONVDENS)
VOLF(4) m3/s Volume tric flow rate at 5 - 10 %

flow conditions
HFLOW (3) kW Enthalpy flow (by OFF

re fe re nce to liquid or
HFLOWTOT
vapour compound at 25C)
(3)
LFLOWTOT(3)
(1): MASSF (kg/s) = 1000 COLDVOLF (m3/s) . COLDDENS(kg/l)
(2): MASSF (kg/s) = 1000 CONVVOLF (m3/s) . CONVDENS(kg/l)
(3): The e nthalpy flow (e xpre sse d in kW) is de fine d as the e nthalpy carrie d by a stre am by re fe re nce to the
te mpe rature of 25 C and pre ssure of 1 atm. For e ach compound, the re fe re nce e nthalpy will be e ithe r the
liquid (or the vapour) if its boiling point is above (or be low) 25C. HFLOWTOT (kW) = HFLOW (kW) + MOLF
(kmol/s) . UHVMOL (kJ/kmol). LFLOWTOT (kW) = HFLOW (kW) + MOLF (kmol/s) . LHVMOL (kJ/kmol).
(4): The flow rate can be give n for the total flow or for se le cte d phase s of the stre am (V, L, W, or WL)
Compounds related measurements

ACCURACY
UNITS
MRxxx kmol/s Partial molar flow rate of OFF

compound xxx
WRxxx kg/s Partial we ight flow rate of OFF

compound xxx
MFxxx - Molar fraction of

compound xxx
accuracy
de pe nds on
WFxxx - We ight fraction of
fraction:
compound xxx
> 10%: 1 - 5
MGxxx - Dry molar fraction of
compound xxx 1 - 10%: 0.1
.. 0.5

ACCURACY
UNITS
WGxxx - Dry we ight fraction of < 1%: 5 - 20

compound xxx %
ppm(s): 20-
CCxxx - Conce ntration of
30 %
compound xxx, in g/l (or
kg/m3) of liquid at 15°C
MCxxx - Conce ntration of

compound xxx, in g/l (or
kg/m3) of liquid at flow
conditions
LFxxx - Liquid volume fraction of

compound xxx
LGxxx - Dry liquid volume fraction

of compound xxx
Attention:
1. If a compound fraction is measured as 0, then its accuracy is automatically set to zero (perfect
measurement).
2. Specifying a fraction of 100% as a measurement is only allowed if the measurement is set

constant and all the other compounds are either not measured or set to zero.
3. If a compound only appears as traces (ppm), then setting it to zero is usually preferred (as it will
not affect the balance). The compound should only be considered if it is necessary for an
adequate modelling of the downstream part of the process.
Density measurements

ACCURACY
UNITS
DENSITY kg/m3 De nsity at flow conditions 1%
COLDDENS D15/4 Liquid Gravity at ambiant 1 %

conditions
(can be 15C/4C, 25C/4C or

60F/60F)
API API API Gravity 1%

ACCURACY
UNITS
CONVDENS D15/4 Conve ntional Liquid 1 %

Gravity (similar to
COLDDENS but
inde pe nde nt of
composition)
MOLW kg/kmol Mole cular we ight 1%
Distillation curve measurements

ACCURACY
UNITS
TBPVxxx C TBP curve : te mpe rature at 3 K

xxx vol%
TBPWxxx C TBP curve : te mpe rature at 3 K

xxx wt%
D86Vxxx C D-86 curve : te mpe rature 3 K

at xxx vol%
D86Wxxx C D-86 curve : te mpe rature 3 K

at xxx wt%
D60Vxxx C D-1160 curve : te mpe rature 3 K

at xxx vol%
D60Wxxx C D-1160 curve : te mpe rature 3 K

at xxx wt%
Heating value measurements

ACCURACY
UNITS
LHVWT kJ/kg Lowe r he ating value on a 1 %

we ight basis
LHVMOL kJ/kmol Lowe r he ating value on a 1 %

molar basis
UHVWT kJ/kg Uppe r he ating value on a 1 %

we ight basis

ACCURACY
UNITS
UHVMOL kJ/kmol Uppe r he ating value on a 1 %

molar basis
Specific measurements for oil and gas production
In the below table, standard conditions are defined as 15 C and 1 bar.

ACCURACY
UNITS
QOIL m3/s Oil flow rate at standard OFF

conditions
QGAS m3/s Gas flow rate at standard OFF

conditions
QWATER m3/s Wate r flow rate at OFF

standard conditions
QLIQ m3/s Liquid flow rate at OFF

standard conditions
GOR - Gas to oil ratio at standard OFF

conditions
CGR - Conde nsate to gas ratio at OFF

standard conditions
WCT - Wate r to liquid ratio at OFF

standard conditions (wate r
cut)
GLR - Gas to liquid ratio at OFF

standard conditions
GVF - Gas volume fraction at OFF

flow conditions
WLR - Wate r to liquid ratio at OFF

flow conditions
DENSG kg/m3 De nsity of the gas phase 5 kg/m3

at flow conditions
DENSO kg/m3 De nsity of the oil phase at 5 kg/m3

flow conditions

ACCURACY
UNITS
DENSW kg/m3 De nsity of the wate r phase 5 kg/m3

at flow conditions
Miscellaneous tags

ACCURACY
UNITS
STATUS Stre am ON/OFF status Enable s to se t a stre am OFF

via a binary tag
1,OPEN,OPN,OUVERT,
Ouve rt => ON
0,CLOSED,CLSD,FERME,
Fe rme => OFF
PRODID Product ID that de fine s the The list of products IDs and
product associate d to the code s must be made
stre am available in a DICTIONARY
se ction through a me a file
Attention: User-defined measurements can also be used on streams by registering them as a "model
measurement" and defining the way to calculate them through a Flex code. (See "Model
measurements page" and "User-defined stream measurements")
5.6 AVAILABLE UNIT MEASUREMENTS
Many UNIT parameters can be introduced as measurement. Table below lists some of the most used
unit measurements. Refer to the unit's description for more information.
NAME DESCRIPTION TYPICAL UNIT TYPES

ACCURACY
DPi Pre ssure drop 10 - 30 % All units fe aturing pre ssure drop e quations
CFDPi Pre ssure drop corre ction 5-10 %

factor
EXTENTi Re action e xte nsion RCTVAL, RLVVAL, RKPVAL
DTEQi De lta te mpe rature from BWHVAL, RKPVAL

e quilibrium
EFFIC Ise ntropic e fficie ncy 2 - 10 % COMVAL, TURVAL
Volume tric Efficie ncy PUMVAL
POLYEFFI Polytropic e fficie ncy 2 - 10% COMVAL, TURVAL
A He at e xchange are a 0 HEXVAL, PRHVAL, ECOVAL
U He at e xchange coe fficie nt 5 - 20 % HEXVAL, PRHVAL, ECOVAL

(conve ction)
G 5 - 20 % HEXVAL
He at e xchange coe fficie nt
(radiation)
LOAD He at load 2 - 10 % HEXVAL, PRHVAL, ECOVAL
5.7 EFFECT OF BOUNDS
THE SOLVER BOUNDS

Each variable used in a VALI model has at least one lower and one upper bound, called the solver
bounds.
These solver bounds have a default value which depends on the type of value (temperature, pressure,
etc) and the optimiser used to solve the DVR problem (SOLDOG or SQP-IP). For SOLDOG, which has
not been designed for handling bounds, the bounds are quite large while for SQP-IP, somewhat
restrictive values are used. In addition, a special mode (activated through the OPTVAL unit) allows
SOLDOG to accept negative values for partial flow rates when the corresponding streams are not
involved in thermodynamic calculations.
These default values can be overwritten by using a special mathematical unit of type BNDVAL
where the user can enter its own lower and higher bounds for temperatures, pressures, etc. These
user bounds can be more or less restrictive than the default bounds.
BOUNDS DEFINED ON TAGS

When defining the measurements through their tags, bounds are also defined on the corresponding
variables.
Three levels are considered for both low and high bounds:
Warning (L -> H): a warning message will be issued if the measured or the validated
values are outside this range
Error (LL -> HH): an error message will be issued if the measured or the validated values
are outside this range. These bounds are also used by ValiFilter
Solver (SL -> SH): a fatal error occurs if the measured value is outside this range. The
validated value will be kept between these bounds. Solver bounds must always be within
the default bounds (possibly modified by a BNDVAL unit)
At convergence, a detail analysis is performed by VALI to determine which variables are on their
bounds. Each variable can be in three states:
one of its solver bounds (either High or Low) is active. This type of bound is reported as
Solver bounds in the report. Changing the value of the bound will change the results of the
model. In some cases, several bounds are related and redundant, for example, several
related flow rates might go to zero simultaneously. The redundant bounds are flagged.
its value is close to one of the bounds, i.e. the distance from the bound is lower than its
validated accuracy multiplied by a factor (which is 1 by default and can be overwritten
through the OPTVAL unit). It means that there is a significant probability that the actual
value would be on its bound. If the validated accuracy is large, it might indicate a lack of
information for determining the actual value of the variable.
its value is not influenced by the bounds.
BOUNDS CONTROL
The activation of solver bounds may in some cases lead to model instability and/or to numerical
singularities due to degenerated equations. The mechanism of bound control keeps the variable at an
adequate distance from the bounds avoiding any instability or singularity. This mechanism can be
used with any of the two solvers.
Attention: When using SOLDOG solver together with bounds control mechanism it is recommend
to set the parameter CONSTR of unit OPTVAL to 1.000001, to avoid staying to much away of the
controlled bound, which would inhibit the bound control mechanism.
5.8 VALIDATED ACCURACY AND COVARIANCE
At convergence of the validation problem and after linearization, the validated values of the
measured and unmeasured variables are expressed as a linear combination of the measured values.
Using error propagation computation, it is then possible to evaluate the validated accuracy of the
validated values on basis of these coefficients and of the accuracy of the measurements.
Variables (either measured or unmeasured) which are activating their bounds are considered as
constants when calculating the validated accuracy of the other variables.
In practice, the validated accuracy (in absolute value) is always lower or equal to the accuracy of the
related measurement. If the two values are equal, than it indicates a variable which in fact cannot be
validated.
The covariance between the validated values is calculated through a separate tool, the sensitivity
analysis. This covariance expressed as a correlation factor indicates measurements for which the
errors are related.
5.9 GROSS ERROR DETECTION AND ELIMINATION
On basis of the redundancy level of the DVR problem, statistical tests enable the detection of possible
gross errors using the Chi-square test value and optionally an additional individual test.
The Chi-square test (or Chi2) value depends on the number of redundancies of the system, active
bounds being considered as adding new levels of redundancy, and on the statistical certainty of the
test, typically 95% (see equation 126 of VDI-2048). If the weighted sum of penalties is higher than the
Chi-square test value, than there is a significant suspicion that gross errors exist.
Attention: The Quality of a run is defined as the ratio between the weighted sum of penalties and
the Chi2 value. The Quality should thus be less or equal to 1.
The individual test is based on the penalty associated to each of the measurement. If this penalty is
above a given threshold, which again depends on the statistical certainty of the test, then again the
measurement may be in gross error. The individual test can be based on:
the penalty of the measurement, as calculated in the objective function: measurement

correction weighted by the measurement uncertainty
the penalty of the correction, as recommended by the VDI-2048: measurement correction

weighted by the correction uncertainty
the impact of the measurement, which is the decrease of the total penalty when removing
the corresponding measurement
The latest test is the most accurate in detecting the existence and the location of gross errors.
If any of the two tests is positive, all results obtained with the model are to be used with care:
validated values, identified performance factors and their validated accuracy.
The automatic procedure of elimination of gross errors of VALI can be activated by adding the
mathematical unit GROSSERR in the main PFD. This unit allows controlling the procedure by which
suspect measurements are progressively eliminated from the set of data until the statistical tests
indicate that no gross errors are present.
The selection of the tags to be eliminated can be based on any of the three individual tests listed here
above.
The Highest Impact procedure is the most powerful method. It detects the impact on the total sum of
penalties of removing each of the measurements. This impact is then weighted (by simple
multiplication) by the Failure probability factor associated to each measurement. The measurement
with the highest weighted impact is then removed and the procedure is iterated until the Chi2 test is
satisfied or, depending on the user choice, until the individual test is satisfied as well.
Eliminated tags are flagged by a distinctive colour in ValiModeller GUI PFDs as well as in the reports.
A pseudo-penalty is calculated based on the precision of the measurement (or of the correction in
VDI compliant mode).
The parameters of unit GROSSERR enable to select various detection/elimination strategies, but as
said above, the Highest Impact procedure is recommended in all cases.
More information is given on the Gross Error Elimination procedure in the description of unit
GROSSERR.
SECTION 6: PETROLEUM REFINING APPLICATIONS

The data validation of processes involving petroleum cuts involves two steps:
step 1: identification of pseudo-compounds, using only mass balances
step 2: complete heat and mass balance of the process
6.1 THE CONCEPT OF PSEUDO-COMPOUND
Crudes and petroleum cuts are mixtures of an incalculable number of chemical compounds. Their
composition can therefore not be based on fractions of well-identified chemical compounds.
Specific analyses are available to describe these cuts, among which the distillation curves and the
density are the most important. In addition, a breakdown of some chemical compounds is
sometimes available for the light-ends (typically C1 to C5). Today, such a breakdown also covers
heavier compounds (up to C8 or C10) more and more, but compounds of the same family and
number of carbons are then lumped together.
On the modelling side, it is common practice to model such streams by representing them as a
mixture of a limited numbers of so-called petroleum fractions or pseudo-compounds.
These pseudo-compounds are defined by their boiling point and by their density. According to the
crude type and origin, different pseudo-compounds must be used to get an accurate representation.
The usual way of doing this is to select a number of compounds with given boiling point and to
identify their fraction and their density in order to match the stream distillation curve and density.
When the boiling point and the density of the compounds are known, their other thermodynamic
properties (like their critical properties or specific heat) can be calculated using standard correlations
as proposed for example by American Petroleum Institute (API).
On basis of this identification, it is then possible to perform various heat and mass balances and
other thermodynamic calculations.
Pseudo-compounds are available in the library CRUDE by step of 5 C. A typical Thermod named
CRUDE is defined in the Refining.bls file with a typical mix of pseudo-compounds.
6.2 DATA VALIDATION OF DISTILLATION CURVES
When several petroleum cuts are involved in a distillation process, the inlet and outlet streams of the
column must obviously use the same pseudo-compounds. This problem can be expressed as a DVR
system involving:
as variables, the pseudo-compounds densities and their fractions in each stream
as equations, the mass balances of the distillation column for each pseudo-compound
as measurements, the densities and distillation curves of the streams
Having solved this system of equations, one can then estimate the other thermodynamic properties
of the pseudo-compounds. Having identified these properties it is then possible to use these
compounds in more general DVR problems, involving heat balances and liquid/vapour equilibrium
laws.
6.3 USING THE CRUVAL UNIT
The CRUVAL unit has been developed to solve this kind of problem. Several CRUVAL units can
appear in a model and they can be combined with other DVR units (BBXVAL, SPLVAL, etc.).
When the pseudo-compounds identification is activated (IDENT=1), only mass balances are
performed and some of the pseudo-compounds properties become variables of the system and are
therefore identified. At the end of the run the other pseudo-compounds properties are identified and
saved in the model file.
Attention: When in identification mode, you should only work with mass balances. The use of
reactors is also prohibited.
When the pseudo-compounds identification is deactivated (IDENT=0), these pseudo-compounds

properties are considered as constant. There is then no limitation in the use of the CRUVAL unit in
combination with any other VALI unit.
6.4 USING DISTILLATION CURVES MEASUREMENTS
Information on the densities and distillation curves of the streams is given as usual measurements.
These measurements can be combined with composition measurements, for example to specify light
ends.
Three types of distillation curves are available: TBP, ASTM D-86 and ASTM D-1160. Each of them can
be expressed on a weight basis (TBPW, D86W and D60W) or on a volume basis (TBPV, D86V and
D60V). Each point is given as a separate measurement:
Example:
TBPW005: defines the measurement of the 5 wt% point temperature
D86V050: defines the measurement of the 50 vol% point temperature
When at least three points of a distillation curve are given for a stream, VALI will do the following:
if not given the initial (0 %) and final (100 %) TBP points are extrapolated
the partial rates of compounds which fall out of this boiling range are set equal to zero,
except if a composition measurement is already defined
some additional constraints are added so as to keep the TBP curve as smooth as possible
the TBP and D86 curves will be added to the usual Stream report in the <model>.r4v file
The measurements of densities and distillation curves should be kept in both steps
More information is given on this topic in the description of unit CRUVAL.
Attention: Distillation curves of different types ( e.g. TBP and D86) cannot be defined as
measurements on the same stream. By defining a dummy black box with one inlet and one outlet
stream, you can however define one type of distillation curve on the inlet and a second type on the
outlet.
SECTION 7: COMPATIBILITY WITH VDI-2048

7.1 THE VDI-2048 GUIDELINE
The VDI 2048 guideline (October 2000 edition, available form Beuth Verlag GmbH, 10772 Berlin)
defines the fundamentals of "Uncertainties of measurement during acceptance tests on energy-
conversion and power plants". Its objective is "(…) to give instructions (…) for the evaluation of
acceptance measurements in terms of an informative comparison of guaranteed characteristics in
consideration of the special conditions in energy-conversion and power plants".
7.2 THE VDI MODE OF VALI
Although the mathematical principles of VALI are in total conformity with the recommendations of
the VDI-2048 guideline, a number of differences do exist between the formulation of VDI-2048 and the
default operating mode of VALI.
These differences concern:
the definition of the accuracy, based on the standard deviation s in VALI and on the 95%
confidence level in VDI (1.96σ)
the definition of the penalty of individual measurements, which is based on the measured
accuracy for VALI and on the correction accuracy for VDI
the way reports are generated. The common reports on units and streams are replaced by
the mass and energy balance of the units and a more specific report for the streams (file
r4v)
To overcome these differences, a number of settings have been added to the list of options (units
OPTVAL and REPVAL) so that VALI strictly conforms to the guideline.
A global runtime option (-VDI) automatically activates all these settings in one shot.
Chapter 6 (assessment of the fulfilment of a guarantee) of the VDI 2048 can be fulfilled by introducing
additional equations via the FLEX language (see Flex Language description chapter). Values
calculated via Flex language will be presented in the standard reports of VALI (r4v, r6v, etc.).
7.3 COMPLIANCE TO THE VDI-2048 GUIDELINE
VALI, when operated in its VDI mode, is fully compliant with the VDI-2048. This compliance has
been officially stated by VDI representatives.
CHAPTER 3
THERMODYNAMIC
CALCULATION
METHODS
III
SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION
The methods depend on the chemical compounds involved, also on process temperature and
pressure ranges. The following values can be calculated for liquid and vapour phases : fugacities,
enthalpies and entropies, volumes, thermal conductivities, viscosities.
Solid chemical compounds may be considered, though they cannot be involved in phase changes.
Section 2 de scribe s the calculation me thods.
When considering mass balances only, the default ideal methods proposed by VALI are
recommended.
When the data validation also involves phase equilibrium, appropriate methods must be selected for
fugacity calculations. This is because VALI determines phase equilibrium by equalising the fugacities
of each chemical compound in both phases.
When considering energy balances, appropriate methods must be selected, for enthalpy calculations
and for phase equilibrium calculations if phase changes occur.
Section 3 de scribe s the fundame ntal prope rtie s of che mical compone nts available in
the data-base s de live re d with VALI
FLUIDS for liquid-vapour che mical compounds
SOLIDS for solid che mical compounds
PETROL for pse udo-compounds use d to mode l pe trole um fractions
FUELS for pse udo-compounds use d to mode l fue l-oil and coal
Section 4 de scribe s the inte raction parame te rs use d in the calculation me thods
available in the BELSIM e nvironme nt.
Section 5 shows how to choose the appropriate me thods for some typical mixture s and
give s advice on this subje ct.
Section 6 lists the re fe re nce s.
Sections 7 and 8 give the list of fluids and solids compounds.
Section 9 indicate s how to handle use r-de fine d compounds.
Section 10 de scribe s how to use third partie s the rmodynamic package s compliant with
the GCO standard.
Section 11 discusse s about the unce rtainty of the rmodynamic me thods.
SECTION 2: BELSIM CALCULATION METHODS

Methods are available to calculate:
the fugacity of a chemical compound in the liquid and vapour phase (This property is used
to calculate phase equilibrium)
the e nthalpy and e ntropy of liquid and vapour mixture s
the molar volume of liquid and vapour mixture s
the the rmal conductivity of liquid or vapour mixture s
the viscosity of liquid or vapour mixture s
Attention: Methods are not available to calculate the thermal conductivity or the viscosity of bi-
phasic mixtures (liquid plus vapour).
Thermodynamic properties calculation methods are selected from the method page of the Thermod
Notebook:
FIGURE 1 - THE METHOD PAGE OF A THERMOD NOTEBOOK
2.1 FUGACITY CALCULATION METHODS FOR THE VAPOUR

PHASE
For the vapour phase, the simplest calculation method corresponds to a mixture of perfect gases
whose compound fugacities are equal to their partial pressures: VIDEAL (default method)
For the vapour phase, methods based on the equation of state are available:
LASSC
LEE-KESLER
PENG-ROBINSON
REDLICH-KWONG
SOAVE
VIRIAL
These methods consider the effects of binary interactions between identical and different molecules.
Except for the REDLICH-KWONG method, the interaction parameter values must be provided, or
the default values provided will be used. Refer to section "Interaction parameters" for more
information.
For pure water three special methods are available :
IAPWS-IF97: steam tables according to norm 97 of IAPWS
VDI:base d on VDI table s (Ve re in De utsche r Inge nie ure )
NBS: e quation of state of the National Bure au of Standards
2.2 FUGACITY CALCULATION METHODS FOR THE LIQUID

PHASE
For the liquid phase, the simplest calculation method is the LIDEAL (default method)
It corresponds to an ideal liquid mixture whose compound fugacities are calculated by the Raoult
law. The fugacity of supercritical compounds is calculated by the following LYCKMAN empirical
function :
Where:
Tc and Pc are respectively the critical temperature (K) and pressure (bar) of the pure
component
T is the temperature (K)
f is the fugacity (bar)
Some methods are based on the liquid phase equation of state:
LASSC
LEE-KESLER
PENG-ROBINSON
SOAVE
REDLICH-KWONG
These methods consider the effects of binary interactions between identical and different molecules.
The interaction parameters values must be provided or the default values will be used. Refer to
section "Interaction parameters" for more information.
Other methods are based on the principle of corresponding-states :
BRAUN K10
CHAO-SEADER
GRAYSON-STREED
These methods do not require interaction parameters values and are mostly used for hydrocarbon
mixtures.
Another group of methods is based on free energy expressions for the liquid mixture :
NRTL
UNIQUAC
For these, it is a must to provide interaction parameters values.Refer to section "Interaction

parameters" for more details. The activity coefficients of each compound are calculated from these
free energy expressions. The fugacity is then obtained by multiplying them by the Poynting
correction for pressure effect, by the pure compound reference fugacity and by the molar fraction.
The solubility of gases in a liquid mixture may also be considered but information must be provided
to calculate infinite dilution activity coefficients.
UNIFAC
This method is similar to UNIQUAC but there is no need to provide numerical interaction
parameters. The interaction parameters are defined by the model from structural information about
pure components (group contributions) : it is just necessary to define the list of typical groups
associated with each component.
For pure water use :
IAPWS-IF97 or NBS or VDI
2.3 CALCULATION METHODS FOR ENTHALPY AND ENTROPY
For the vapour phase, the simplest calculation method is the VIDEAL (default method)
This method is based on the ideal gas heat capacity. When water is present in the vapour mixture,
this method considers the real properties of water to calculate the mixture enthalpy and entropy.
The PTC4 and PTC42007 methods are dedicated to fumes.
For the liquid phase, two simple calculation methods are:
LIDEAL (default method)
LIDEAL2
QUADRAT1
QUADRAT2
The LIDEAL method calculates the liquid enthalpy by subtracting the vaporisation enthalpy
calculated by the Watson method from the vapour enthalpy of the mixture calculated with the
VIDEAL method.
The LIDEAL2 method calculates the liquid enthalpy by subtracting the vaporisation enthalpy, at the
normal boiling point, from the vapour enthalpy of the mixture calculated with the VIDEAL method,
then calculating the temperature effect with the liquid heat capacity expression.
When water is present in the liquid mixture, the above mentioned methods consider the real
properties of water to calculate the mixture enthalpy and entropy.
QUADRAT1 and QUADRAT2 calculates a deviation from respectively LIDEAL and LIDEAL2 methods
by adding a quadratic mixing enthalpy calculated as:
Where:
ijENTH is the binary parameter, expressed in kJ/kmol
xi and xj are the molar fractions of the chemical compounds i and j in the liquid phase
For pure water the IAPWS-IF97, NBS and VDI methods are available.
For liquid and vapour phases, a group of methods, based on the equation of state, is applicable:
LASSC
LEE-KESLER
PENG-ROBINSON
SOAVE
REDLICH-KWON
The interaction parameters for enthalpy and entropy calculations are the default values proposed,
unless customised values were entered previously and the same method as for fugacity calculations
is used. In this case VALI will use the interaction parameters entered for fugacity calculations.
For nonpolar hydrocarbon mixture and for both phases, the method CURL-PITZER may be used . It is
based on the principle of corresponding-states.
Attention: For ALL methods of ENTHALPY calculations (except VDI and IAPWS-IF97, for which
liquid state at 0 C is the reference), the reference state is the ideal gas at 298.15 K. Because of the
difference of reference state, streams based on VDI or IAPWS-IF97 cannot be mixed with other
streams in most units. The only exception is the BBXVAL unit where a mixing can be carried out
with the following limitation: all inlet OR outlet streams must have the same reference state.
2.4 CALCULATION METHODS FOR MOLAR VOLUME
For liquid or vapour phases, the simplest methods are respectively :
GUNN-YAMADA:Liquid phase (default method)
IDEAL: Vapour phase (default method)
They are based respectively on the Gunn and Yamada correlation and on the perfect gas law.
Methods based on the Wuithier correlation are also available for hydrocarbon mixtures In these
methods the mixture density is calculated on basis of its "cold density" (density at 15°C) and its
actual temperature.
Wuithier colddens: the density of the mixture at 15°C is calculated on basis of the
composition and the compounds density (COLDDENS property)
Wuithier convdens: the density of the mixture at 15°C is calculated on basis of a

conventional density which must be measured (CONVDENS)
Methods based on equations of state are also available .
For both liquid and vapour phases :
LASSC
LEE-KESLER
PENG-ROBINSON
SOAVE
REDLICH-KWONG
Attention: The LASSC equation of state method is recommended, since it is more accurate than the
other methods.
For the vapour phase: VIRIAL.
The interaction parameters for molar volume calculations are the default values, unless customized
values were entered previously and the same method as for fugacity calculations is used. In this case
VALI will use the interaction parameters entered for fugacity calculations.
For nonpolar hydrocarbon mixtures, you can use, for both phases, the CURL-PITZER method, which
is based on the principle of corresponding-states.
2.5 CALCULATION METHODS FOR THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY
For the vapour phase, two methods may be used :
PEDERSEN
STIEL-THODOS (default method)
The first applies the principle of corresponding-states and is valid for nonpolar hydrocarbon
mixtures.
The second one is based on the Stiel and Thodos correlation associated to the Wassiljewa mixing rule.
For the liquid phase, three methods may be used :
PEDERSEN
POLYNOM (default method)
ROBBINS-KINGREA
The first, based on the principle of corresponding-states, is valid for nonpolar hydrocarbon mixtures.
The second is based on empirical regression coefficients.
The third one, based on the Robbins and Kingrea correlation, is used for any reduced temperatures
lower than 1.0. It is associated to the mixing rule of Li.
2.6 CALCULATION METHODS FOR VISCOSITY
For the vapour phase, you have a choice of two methods :
CHAPMAN-ENSKOG (default method)
PEDERSEN
The first method applies the correlation of Chapman and Enskog associated to the mixing rule of
Brokaw. You can use it for polar and nonpolar chemical compounds mixtures.
The second one is based on the principle of corresponding-states and is valid for nonpolar
hydrocarbon mixtures.
For the liquid phase, three methods may be used :
LETSOU-STIEL
PEDERSEN (default method)
VAN-VELZEN
The first, based on the Letsou and Stiel correlation, is used for all reduced temperatures to avoid
discontinuities at 0.75, even though this correlation is really only applicable for reduced
temperatures between 0.75 and 1.
The second method, based on the principle of corresponding-states, is applicable for nonpolar
hydrocarbon mixtures.
The third applies the correlation of Van Velzen, Cardozo and Langenkamp, which is normally valid
for reduced temperatures lower than 0.75. To avoid discontinuities in the liquid viscosity calculation,
the correlation is extrapolated up to the critical temperature.
The logarithmic mixing rule is used for the first and the third method.
2.7 CALCULATION METHODS FOR SOLID COMPOUNDS
Solids may be present in a mixture but they cannot participate in phase changes. Their enthalpies
will automatically be calculated by heat capacity coefficients. The viscosity calculation of mixtures
containing solids does not take their presence into account. The solid contribution to the molar
volume and the thermal conductivity is simply added to the mixture property.
2.8 PHASE EQUILIBRIUM CALCULATIONS
Phase equilibrium calculations are realised by equalising the fugacities of each chemical compound in
each phase. The number and types of phases that VALI has to take into account has to be specified.
This is done by the means of the Stream State parameter which can take one of the following values :
L: when the mixture is liquid. There will be no phase equilibrium calculation,
V: when the mixture is vapour. There will be no phase equilibrium calculation
S: when the mixture is solid. There will be no phase equilibrium calculation
LV: when the mixture can be liquid and/or vapour. Liquid-vapour phase equilibrium
calculations are systematically performed to check the thermodynamic state of the
mixture
LLV: when two liquid phases and a vapour phase can coexist. Liquid-liquid-vapour phase
equilibrium calculations are systematically performed to check the thermodynamic state
of the mixture
LL: when two liquid phases can co-exist. Liquid-liquid phase equilibrium calculations are
systematically performed to check the thermodynamic state of the mixture
WLV: when one hydrocarbon liquid phase (without water), one aqueous liquid phase and
a vapour phase can co-exist, Liquid-liquid-vapour phase equilibrium are systematically
calculated to check the thermodynamic state of the mixture
WL: when one hydrocarbon liquid phase (without water) and one aqueous liquid phase
can co-exist. Liquid-liquid phase equilibrium are systematically calculated to check the
thermodynamic state of the mixture
Using a multiphase "Stream State" parameter means that VALI must check their existence but does
not mean that these phases exist.
For instance, with the "Stream State" set to "LV", VALI will conclude that the mixture :
is in the liquid state if its temperature is below the bubble point
is in liquid-vapour state if its te mpe rature lie s be twe e n the bubble and the de w point
is in the vapour phase if its te mpe rature is highe r than its de w point
Attention: With the "Stream State" set to "LV", VALI will never check for the existence of two liquid
phases.
It is essential that you specify properly this "State" parameter during Stream definition.
The enthalpy of a multiphase mixture is the weighted sum of the phase enthalpies, the weight factors
being obtained from the phase equilibrium calculation. The same rule applies for the entropy and the
volume.
When a solid is present in the mixture, it is considered in the liquid phase and contributes to the
enthalpy, entropy and volume of the liquid phase.
SECTION 3: FUNDAMENTAL PROPERTIES OF

CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS
Several BELSIM standard data bases are delivered with VALI: FLUIDS, SOLIDS, PETROL and FUEL.
During the definition of a Compound, ValiModeller copies the fundamental properties from the
BELSIM standard data base into the Process Data Base. When some data are missing, default values
are generated.
3.1 AVAILABLE DATA BASES
THE FLUIDS DATABASE

This BELSIM database contains the fundamental properties needed to describe the behaviour of
about 830 chemical compounds in the liquid and/or vapour state.
The available data includes:
the critical coordinates
the he at capacity coe fficie nts of the ide al gas
the saturation curve coe fficie nts
e tc.
THE SOLIDS DATABASE

The BELSIM standard data base contains the fundamental properties necessary to describe the
behaviour of about 650 chemical compounds in the solid state.
The available data include :
the heat capacity coefficients for the solid phase
the coe fficie nt of the sublimation curve
e tc.
THE PETROL DATABASE

This data base contains the definitions of Petroleum fractions with boiling points increasing by steps
of 5 C.
These pseudo-compounds can be used in combination with other compounds. Their properties can
be identified to match cut densities, by using a unit of type CRUVAL.
THE FUELS DATABASE

This data base contains the properties of pseudo-compounds used to model fuel-oil and coal. For fuel-
oil, , 4 compounds can be mixed to adjust the Sulphur, the Hydrogen and the Water contents,
whereas for coal, you can in addition adjust Oxygen, Nitrogen and Ashes contents:
Fuel-oil: C-FUEL, H-FUEL, S-FUEL, H2O-FUEL
Coal: C-COAL, H-COAL, S-COAL, H2O-COAL, N_COAL, O_COAL, ASH_COAL
Typical compositions are presented in the table below.
C H S H2O N O ASH LHV DENSITY
WT% WT% WT% WT% WT% WT% WT% KJ/KG KG/M3
Light Fue l Oil 86.65 13.13 0.23 0.00 42803 852
He avy Fue l Oil 86.17 11.32 1.14 1.37 40634 945
Coal 1 86.07 4.93 1.0 8.0 0 0 0 34199
Coal 2 89.14 4.86 1.0 5.0 0 0 0 35121
Coke 97.61 0.79 1.0 0.6 0 0 0 32999
TABLE 1 - TYPICAL COMPOS ITIONS OF FUELS
Compound properties can be reviewed in the Data page of the Compounds Notebook.
FIGURE 2 - THE DATA PAGE OF THE COMPOUNDS NOTEBOOK
3.2 DATA NEEDED FOR LIQUIDS AND VAPOURS
FUGACITY CALCULATIONS
Table below presents, for each listed calculation method, the set of fundamental properties, whose
values are required for each chemical compound of the mixture.
The critical coordinates are always needed to estimate starting values for the phase equilibrium
calculations.
P P G A
A A Y S
R R D R S
O L S I A O R
M A P V O P D C Q
E S V S L O I P V
T T P V G S A A U L U A D
B C C C A C P T B M S R W
VIDEAL
LIDEAL X X X
VIRIAL X X X X X
PENG-ROBINSON X X X
LASSC X X X X X
SOAVE X X X
REDLICH-KWONG X X
LEE-KESLER X X X X
CHAO-SEEDER X X X X X
GRAYSON-STREED X X X X X
BRAUN K10 X X X
NRTL X X X X X
UNIQUAC X X X X X X
UNIFAC X X X X X X
PROPERTY DESCRIPTION
TB Normal boiling te mpe rature (K)
TC Critical te mpe rature (K)
PC Critical pre ssure (bar)
VC Critical volume (m3)
PARLASSC Parame te r for LASSC e quation of state
OMEGA Ace ntric factor
PVAP Boiling curve coe fficie nts
VSAT Molar volume at re fe re nce te mpe rature TREF
PARSOLUB Solubility parame te r of Hilde brand
DIPOLM Dipole mome nt
GYRADIUS Gyration radius
ASSOCPAR Associative parame te r
RQVDW Van de r waals parame te rs
TABLE 2 - DATA NEEDED FOR FUGACITY CALCULATIONS OF LIQUIDS AND VAPOURS
For the UNIFAC method, it is also necessary to introduce structural information about components:
interaction parameters are defined from structure of each component of the mixture.
ENTHALPY AND ENTROPY CALCULATIONS

Table below presents, for each listed calculation methods, the set of fundamental properties, whose
values must be present in the model file for each chemical compound of the mixture.
Formation data is used to calculate reaction heats or reaction free energy variations when chemical
reactions are to be taken into account.
H A
0 R
F O L D
M A H P C V
G E S V V C P S
0 T T P V G S A A P I A
F B C C C A C P P L D T
VIDEAL X X
LIDEAL X X X X X X X
LIDEAL2 X X X X X X
QUADRAT1 X X X X X X X
QUADRAT2 X X X X X X
PENG-ROBINSON X X X X X
LASSC X X X X X X X
SOAVE X X X X X
LEE-KESLER X X X X X X
CURL-PITZER X X X X X
H0F G0F Enthalpy and fre e e ne rgy of formation
DHVAP Vaporisation e nthalpy at TB
PVAP Boiling curve coe fficie nts
CPL Liquid he at capacity coe fficie nts
CPID Ide al gas he at capacity coe fficie nts
TABLE 3 - DATA NEEDED FOR ENTHALPY AND ENTROPY CALCULATIONS OF LIQUIDS AND VAPOURS
VOLUME CALCULATIONS
Table below presents, for each listed calculation method, the set of fundamental properties whose
P G A
A Y S
R D R S D
O L I A O 6
M A V P D C 0
E S S O I P /
T P V G S A L U A 6
C C C A C T M S R 0
VIDEAL
VIRIAL X X X X X
GUNN-YAMADA X X X X X
PENG-ROBINSON X X X
LASSC X X X X
SOAVE X X X
LEE-KESLER X X X X
CURL-PITZER X X X
WUITHIER COLDDENS X
GYRADIUS Gyration radius
ASSOCPAR Associative parame te r
D60/60 De nsity 60/60
TABLE 4 - DATA NEEDED FOR VOLUME CALCULATIONS OF LIQUIDS AND VAPOURS
VISCOSITY AND THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY CALCULATIONS

Table below presents, for each listed calculation method, the set of fundamental properties, whose
O D I C
M M C H P V V O
O E P V O S I N
L T T P G I A L A S D
W B C C A D P M T L L
PEDERSEN X X
VANVELZEN X
LETSOU-STIEL X X X X
STIEL-THODOS X X X
POLYNOM X
ROBBINS-KINGREA X X X X
CHAPMAN-ENSKOG X X X X
MOLW Mole cular we ight
CPID Ide al gas he at capacity coe fficie nts
DHVAP Vaporisation e nthalpy at TB
VISL Liquid viscosity coe fficie nts
CONDL Liquid the rmal conductivity coe fficie nts
TABLE 5 - DATA NEEDED FOR VIS COS ITY AND THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY CALCULATIONS OF LIQUIDS AND
VAPOURS
SECTION 4: INTERACTION PARAMETERS

Many calculation methods contain binary interaction parameters that can be specified. When not
specified, default values are used instead. These interaction parameters may be found in the
literature or may be obtained by parameter identification.
The parameter identification is an iterative procedure as follows :
calculate the phase compositions for given values of interaction parameters
compare the m to e xpe rime ntal data
calculate ne w parame te r value s, which re duce the de viations
A separate program allows you to estimate these parameters.
In state equations, identical parameters are used for both phases.
When state equations are used to calculate vapour or liquid enthalpies and entropies, VALI uses the
default values of the interaction parameters.
Binary parameters can be entered and edited in the Binary Parameters page of the Thermod
Notebook.
FIGURE 3 - THE BINARY PARAMETERS PAGE OF A THERMOD NOTEBOOK
4.1 EQUATIONS OF STATE
There is one set of interaction parameters for each pair of chemical compounds present in the
mixture. These parameters are involved in the mixing rules used to calculate the mixture's equation
of state coefficients.
Table below gives their names and their default values in the BELSIM environment.
CALCULATION METHOD NAME DEFAULT

VALUE
SOAVE DELTA 0.0
PENG-ROBINSON DELTA 0.0
LEE-KESLER K 1.0
LASSC DELTA 0.0
TAU 1.0
TABLE 6 - INTERACTION PARAMETERS FOR EQUATIONS OF S TATE
4.2 VIRIAL EQUATION OF STATE
The calculation of the second virial coefficients of the pure chemical compounds considers the effects
of the dipole moment and of the associative character of the chemical compounds.
When the association parameter is higher than 4.5 (as with carboxylic acids), the chemical
compounds are found as monomers and dimeres. This effect is automatically considered in the
calculation of the virial coefficients.
Interactions between different chemical compounds are calculated from the solvation parameters,
which can be identified by a separate program.
Table below shows the name and the default values of the VIRIAL interaction parameters.

VALUE
VIRIAL ETA 0.0
TABLE 7 - VIRIAL EQUATION, INTERACTION PARAMETERS
4.3 NRTL AND UNIQUAC METHODS
These equations calculate the activity coefficients of liquid chemical compounds in non-ideal
mixtures.
The NRTL model contains six parameters: ijC0 ijCT jiC0 jiCT ijA0 ijAT
The se are involve d in the re lationships:
( gij-gjj ) / R= ijC0 + ijCT * T K
( gji-gii ) / R= jiC0 + jiCT * T K
Aij= ijA0 + ijAT * T
Where:
gij, gji, gii, gjj and Aij are the coefficients from the NRTL equation for the free energy and R
is the perfect gas constant
The UNIQUAC model contains four parameters: Aij Bij Aji Bji.
The se are involve d in the re lationships:
( Uij - Ujj ) / R = Aij + Bij / T
( Uji - Uii ) / R = Aji + Bji / T
Where:
Uij, Ujj, Uji and Uii are the coe fficie nts from the UNIQUAC e quation for fre e e ne rgy
When supercritical compounds are present in the mixture, you must provide the coefficients to
calculate their activity at infinite dilution:
Ln gam = isGAM0 + isGAMT / T .
Table below shows the names of these interaction parameters in the BELSIM environment.

VALUE
NRTL ijA0 0.0
ijC0 0.0
jiC0 0.0
ijAT 0.0
ijCT 0.0
jiCT 0.0
isGAM0 0.0
isGAMT 0.0
UNIQUAC Aij 0.0
Aji 0.0

VALUE
Bij 0.0
Bji 0.0
isGAM0 0.0
isGAMT 0.0
TABLE 8 - NRTL AND UNIQUAC INTERACTION PARAMETERS
4.4 QUADRATIC HEAT OF MIXING
QUADRAT1 and QUADRAT2 calculates a deviation from respectively LIDEAL and LIDEAL2 methods
by adding a quadratic mixing enthalpy calculated as:
Where:
ijENTH is the binary parameter, expressed in kJ/kmol
xi and xj are the molar fractions of the chemical compounds i and j in the liquid phase

VALUE
QUADRAT1/QUADRAT2 ijENTH 0.0
TABLE 9 - QUADRATIC MIXING ENTHALPY, INTERACTION PARAMETERS
SECTION 5: CALCULATION METHODS FOR TYPICAL

MIXTURES
This section, shows several types of mixtures and proposes methods to calculate their properties.
The types of mixtures which will be analysed are :
pure water
nonpolar hydrocarbon mixture s with or without wate r
oxyge nate d compounds mixture s
5.1 WATER
The Thermod STEAM present in Emty.bls file is recommended.
Use the IAPWS-IF97, NBS or VDI methods for all the pure water. Note that IAPWS-IF97 and VDI
methods must be used for all properties together. You cannot combine IAPWS-IF97, VDI and other
methods.
Note also that you in most units you cannot mix streams using IAPWS-IF97 or VDI methods with
other streams, because the reference conditions for enthalpy are different. Only BBXVAL units enable
to mix streams using IAPWS-IF97 or VDI methods.
5.2 NONPOLAR HYDROCARBON MIXTURES WITH OR WITHOUT

WATER
TYPICAL THERMODS
The file Empty.bls contains the following Thermods:
Gas: natural gas: N2, H2, H2S, CO2, C1, C2, C3, I-C4, N-C4, N-C5
Fuel: fuel-oil: C_FUEL, H_FUEL, S_FUEL, H2O_FUEL
Coal: coal: C_COAL, H_COAL, S_COAL, H2O_COAL
Air: air: O2, N2
Fumes: fumes: O2, N2, CO2, H2O, SO2
The models use Ideal methods and are recommended for Power Plants applications.
The file Refining.bls contains in addition:
SOAVE: Empty thermod based on SOAVE methods
P-R: Empty thermod based on Peng-robinson methods
CRUDE: Typical thermod to be used to model Crudes and petroleum cuts
You can derive your own models by using these models as starting point.
If water is present in the mixture and could form a separate water liquid phase, use one of the
following strings for the Stream State parameter :
Water/Liquid/Vapour
Water/Liquid
In other cases, use one of the following strings for this parameter :
Liquid
Vapour
Liquid/Vapour
CALCULATION OF FUGACITIES
At low and medium pressures, WITHOUT light chemical compounds, choose between the following:
VIDEAL and LIDEAL calculation methods for vapour and liquid phases
REDLICH-KWONG for vapour phase and CHAO-SEADER for liquid phase
VIDEAL for vapour phase and BRAUN K10 for the liquid phase for mixture s of he avy
hydrocarbon compounds
any of the e quations of state : SOAVE, PENG-ROBINSON, LASSC
With the first three pairs of methods, there are no interaction parameters to provide.
For the equations of state, use the default values for the interaction parameters.
When light compounds are present in the mixture, choose any of the equations of state, but in this
case, we advise you to identify the interaction parameters between the light compounds and the
heavier compounds using experimental data of solubilities. A separate program can help you to
perform this identification.
If the light compounds are H2 and CH4, the methods of REDLICH-KWONG and GRAYSON-STREED
may be respectively used for the vapour and liquid phases.
CALCULATION OF ENTHALPIES AND ENTROPIES

Several methods are available to calculate the enthalpy and entropy of nonpolar hydrocarbon
mixtures.
Choose among the following :
LIDEAL2 for the liquid phase
VIDEAL for the vapour phase
CURL-PITZER for both phase s
LEE-KESLER for both phase s
The pressure and mixing corrections on enthalpy and entropy are only calculated in the CURL-
PITZER and LEE-KESLER methods.
CALCULATION OF MOLAR VOLUMES

Choose among the following :
GUNN-YAMADA for the liquid phase
Whuithie r for the liquid phase of hydrocarbon mixture s
CURL-PITZER for both phase s
with a preference for the LASSC equation when interaction parameters are available. Volume
predictions by equations of state are rarely accurate.
CALCULATION OF THERMAL CONDUCTIVITIES AND VISCOSITIES

For thermal conductivities and viscosities, use the PEDERSEN method for both phases.
5.3 OXYGENATED COMPOUND MIXTURES
Select one of the following strings for the Stream State parameter :
Liquid
Vapor
Liquid-Vapor
Liquid-Liquid
Liquid-Liquid-Vapor
CALCULATION OF FUGACITIES
At low and medium pressures, even for polar chemical compounds, choose between the following:
VIDEAL and LIDEAL for vapour and liquid phases
VIRIAL and NRTL for the vapour and liquid phase s
VIRIAL and UNIQUAC for the vapour and liquid phase s
VIRIAL and UNIFAC for the vapour and liquid phase s
For the second and third methods, interaction parameters for both phases have to be identified from
liquid-vapour equilibrium data. A separate program may help you to identify these parameters.
The last method is equivalent to UNIQUAC, but interaction parameters are defined from structure of
each molecule : it is based on group contributions (list of groups is defined with pure component
properties).
When supercritical compounds are present in the mixture, you must provide their activity
coefficient at infinite dilution.
CALCULATION OF ENTHALPIES AND ENTROPIES

Several methods are available for the calculation of enthalpies and entropies of vapour and liquid.
You can choose from amongst the following methods :
LIDEAL2 for the liquid phase
LEE-KESLER e quation of state for both phase s
Neither mixing enthalpies, nor pressure corrections can be taken into account, except with the
method of LEE-KESLER.
CALCULATION OF MOLAR VOLUMES

For the calculation of molar volumes of vapour and liquid phases, several methods are available :
GUNN-YAMADA for the liquid phase
with a preference for the LASSC equation when the interaction parameters are available. Volume
predictions by equations of state are generally poor.
CALCULATION OF THERMAL CONDUCTIVITIES

For the calculation of thermal conductivities, the following methods may be used :
STIEL-THODOS for the vapour phase
ROBBINS-KINGREA for the liquid phase
CALCULATION OF VISCOSITIES
For the calculation of viscosities, the following methods are available :
CHAPMAN-ENSKOG for the vapour phase
VAN-VELZEN for the liquid phase
SECTION 6: REFERENCES
Statistical Thermodynamics of Liquid Mixtures : A New Expression for the Excess Gibbs Energy of Partly or
Completely Miscible Systems
Abrams D.S. and Prausnitz J.
AIChEJ 116, Vol 21, No 1, 1975.
A General Correlation of Vapour-liquid Equilibria in Hydrocarbon Mixtures
Chao K. C. and Se ade r J. D.
AIChE Journal, pg. 598, De c. 1961.
Vapour liquid equilibria of high temperature, high pressure systems
Grayson H. G. and Stre e d G. W.
6th world pe trole um congre ss, We st Ge rmany, June 1963.
NBS/NRC Steam tables, thermodynamic and transport properties and computer programs for vapour and
liquid states of water in SI units
Haar L., Gallaghe r J.S. and Ke ll G.S.,
He misphe re Publishing Corporation (1984)
Equations for the viscosity and thermal conductivity coefficient of Methane
Hanle y H.J.M., McCarty R.D., Hayne s W.M.
Cryoge nics p413 (1975)
A Generalized Method for Predicting Second Virial Coefficients
Hayde n J.G. e t O'Conne l J.P.
Ind. Eng. Che m., Proc. De s. De v. 14(1) : 209 (1975)
Contribution à l'étude de la thermodynamique des systèmes non idéaux sous pressions élevées
He ye n G.
Thè se , Unive rsité de Liè ge , Be lgique . (1982)
A modified Benedict-Webb-Rubin Equation of State for Methane using recent experimental Data
McCarty R.D.
Cryoge nics p277 (1974)
Generalized Correlation for Fugacity Coefficients in Mixtures at Moderate Pressures. Application of Chemical
Theory of Vapour Imperfections
Nothnage l K-H, Abrams D.S. e t Prausnitz J.M.
Ind. Eng. Che m., Proc. De s. De v. 12(1) : 25 (1973)
Prediction of transport and Surface Properties
Pe de rse n K.S., Fre de nslund A.
Che m. Eng. Fund., XVIII Congre ss, 1987, p 299.1
Viscosity of Crude Oils
Pe de rse n K.S., Fre de nslund A., Christe nse n P.L., Thomasse n P.
Che m. Eng. Sci, Vol.39, N°6, p1101 (1984)
A Corresponding States Model for the Thermal Conductivity of Gases and Liquid
Che m. Eng. Sci, Vol.35, p871 (1980)
An Improved Corresponding States Model for the Prediction of Oil and Gas Viscosities and thermal
Conductivity
Che m. Eng. Sci. Vol.42, N°1; p182 (1987)
A new Two-Constant Equation of State
Pe ng D.Y. e t Robinson D.B.
Ind. Eng. Che m., Fundame ntal 15(1) : 59-64 (1976)
Calculation of high-pressure vapour-liquid equilibria from a corresponding states correlation with emphasis on
asymmetric mixtures
Plocke r U., Knapp H, Prausnitz J.,
Ind. Eng. Che m., Proc. De s. De v. 324, vol.17, n3, 1978.
The properties of gases and liquids
Re id R. C., Prausnitz J.M. e t She rwood T.K.
Third Edition 1977 McGRAW-HILL BOOK COMPANY
Calcul sur ordinateur des équilibres liquide-vapeur et liquide-liquide
Re non H., Asse line au L., Cohe n G., Raimbault C.
1971, Te chnip.
Equilibrium constants from a modified Redlich-Kwong equation of state
Soave G.
Che mical Engine e ring Scie nce , 27:1197 (1972)
Méthodes appliquées aux raffinages
Vidal J.
Publications de l'Institut Français du Pé trole ,
Editions te chnip, 1974
Properties of Water and Steam- The Industrial Standard IAPWS-IF97 for the Thermodynamic Properties and
Supplementary Equations for Other Properties
Wagne r W., Kruse A.,
Springe r-Ve rlag, Be rlin 1998
Curl R.F., K.S. Pitze r K. S.
Ind. Eng. Che m., 50,265 (1958)
Cajande r B.C., Hipkin H.G., Le noir J.M.,
J. Che m. Engr. Data, 5, 251 (1960)
SECTION 7: FLUIDS DATA BASE

The FLUIDS compounds are gathered in families:
Acetylenes, Acids, Alcohols, Aldehydes, Amides, Aromatics, Esters, Ethers, Halogenated derivatives,
Isocyanates, Ketones, Miscellaneous, Naphtenes, Nitrogen derivatives, Olefins, Oxides, Paraffins,
Sulfur derivatives.
The properties stored for each compound are listed in the following table.
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION PHYSICAL

UNITS
H0F Standard e nthalpy of formation kJ/kmol
G0F Gibbs s std. e ne rgy of formation kJ/kmol
MOLW Mole cular we ight kg/kmol
TB Boiling te mpe rature K
TC Critical te mpe rature K
PC Critical pre ssure bar
VC Critical volume m3/kmol
OMEGA Pitze r's ace ntric factor -
CPLA, CPLB, CPLC, CPLD Liquid He at Capacity

kJ/kmol/K
CPL = A + B*T+ C*T² + D*T³
TMIN(PV)
Te mpe rature range for vapour pre ssure K
TMAX(PV)
PVAPA, PVAPB, PVAPC, PVAPD, PVAPE, Vapour pre ssure bar

PVAPF,
ln(PVAP) = A + B/(T+C) + D*T + E*T² + F*ln(T) +
PVAPG, PVAPH G.TH
CPIDA, CPIDB, CPIDC, CPIDD Ide al gas he at capacity kJ/kmol/K
CPID = A + B*T + C*T² + D*T³
DHVAP(B) Vaporisation e nthalpy at TEB kJ/kmol
DIPOLM Dipolar mome nt De bye s
VMOLREF Saturate d liquid molar volume TREF m3/kmol
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION PHYSICAL

UNITS
VISL1, VISL2 Liquid viscosity

N.s/m2
log(VISL) = VISL1*(1/T - 1/VISL2)
EN.CARAC Characte ristic e ne rgy K
COLDIAM Collision diame te r m
THCNDPAR The rmal conductivity parame te r (Robbins-

Kingre a)
GYRADIUS Gyration radius m
ASSOCPAR Association parame te r -
CONDL1, CONDL2, CONDL3 Liquid conductivity
CONDL= CONDL1 + CONDL2*T + kJ/m/K

CONDL3*T²
TMELT Me lting te mpe rature K
DHMELT Me lting e nthalpy kJ/kmol
SURFTEN1, SURFTEN2 Othme r's surface te nsion

N/m
SURFTEN=SURFTEN1*(Tc-T)**SURFTEN2
TREF(VM) Re fe re nce te mpe rature for VMOLREF K
TMIN(CL)
Te mpe rature range of CPL K
TMAX(CL)
TMIN(CG)
Te mpe rature range of CPID K
TMAX(CG)
KLASSC, MLASSC, TETLASSC, NLASSC, PARAMETERS FOR LASSC'S EQUATION

NHTLASSC OF STATE
RVDW Van de r Waals volume -
QVDW Van de r Waals suface are a -
PARSOLUB Hilde brand solubility parame te r (kJ/m3)**(1/2)
D60/60 De nsity 60/60
UNUSED57
KLASSC, MLASSC, TETLASSC, NLASSC, PARAMETERS FOR LASSC'S EQUATION

NHTLASSC OF STATE
UNUSED58
UNUSED59
UNUSED60
LHV Lowe r He ating Value kJ/kmol
UHV Uppe r he ating Value kJ/kmol
UNUSED63
UNUSED64
UNUSED65
UNUSED66
UNUSED67
UNUSED68
UNUSED69
UNUSED70
The list of compounds available in this library is shown below.
ACETYLENES
LONG NAME FORMULA SHORT NAME
Ace tyle ne C2H2 C2=
Propyne C3H4 C3=
1-Butyne C4H6 1C4=
2-Butyne C4H6 2C4=
Butadiyne C4H2 C4==
1-Pe ntyne C5H8 C5=
ACIDS
Ace tic Acid C2H4O2 HAC
Acrylic Acid C3H4O2 HACRYL
Be nzoic Acid C7H6O2 HBZ
Formic Acid C1H2O2 HFORMIC
I-Butyric Acid C4H8O2 I-HBUTYR
N-Butyric Acid C4H8O2 N-HBUTYR
Nitric Acid H1O3N1 HNO3
N-Vale ric Acid C5H10O2 N-HVALER
Propionic Acid C3H6O2 HPROPIO
Succinic Acid C4H6O4 HSUCCIN
Sulfuric Acid H2O4S1 H2SO4
Trifluoroace tic Acid C2H1O2F3 HTFAC
ALCOOLS
Me thanol C1H4O1 C1OL
Ethanol C2H6O1 C2OL
Ethyle ne Glycol C2H6O2 C2-2OL
Allyl Alcohol C3H6O1 ALLOL
1-Propanol C3H8O1 1C3OL
2-Propanol C3H8O1 2C3OL
12-Propane diol C3H8O2 12C32OL
13-Propane diol C3H8O2 13C32OL
Glyce rol C3H8O3 GLYCEROL
N-Butanol C4H10O1 NC4OL
2-Butanol C4H10O1 2C4OL
I-Butanol C4H10O1 IC4OL
Te rt-Butanol C4H10O1 TC4OL
1,3-Butane diol C4H10O2 12C4OL
2,3-Butane diol C4H10O2 23C4OL
1,2,3-Butane triol C4H10O3 123C4OL
1-Pe ntanol C5H12O1 1C5OL
2-Me thyl-1-Butanol C5H12O1 2M1C4OL
22-Dime thyl-1-Propanol C5H12O1 22DMPOL
1,5-Pe ntane diol C5H12O2 15C5OL
3-Me thyl-1,3-Butane diol C5H12O2 3M13C4OL
2,3,4-Pe ntane triol C5H12O3 234C5OL
Cyhe xanol C6H12O1 CYC6OL
Phe nol C6H6O1 PHENOL
13-Dihydroxybe nze ne C6H6O2 13DHB
14-Dihydroxybe nze ne C6H6O2 14DHB
12-Dihydroxylbe nze ne C6H6O2 12DHBZ
1-He xanol C6H14O1 1C6OL
2-Me thyl-1-Pe ntanol C6H14O1 2M1C5OL
2-Ethyl-1-Butanol C6H14O1 2E1C4OL
2,2-Dime thyl-1-Butanol C6H14O1 22M1C4OL
2-Me thyl-2,4-Pe ntane diol C6H14O2 2M24C5OL
1,2,6-He xane triol C6H14O3 126C6OL
Be nzylalcohol C7H8O1 BZOL
O-Cre sol C7H8O1 O-CROL
M-Cre sol C7H8O1 M-CROL
P-Cre sol C7H8O1 P-CROL
Guaiacol C7H8O2 GUAIACOL
1-He ptanol C7H16O1 1C7OL
2-Me thyl-2-He xanol C7H16O1 2M2C6OL
3-Ethyl-3-Pe ntanol C7H16O1 3E3C5OL
2,3-Dime thyl-3-Pe ntanol C7H16O1 23M3C5OL
2,4-Dime thyl-3-Pe ntanol C7H16O1 24M3C5OL
2-Be nzofuranol C8H6O2 BZFROL
O-Ethylphe nol C8H10O1 O-EPHOL
M-Ethylphe nol C8H10O1 M-EPHOL
P-Ethylphe nol C8H10O1 P-EPHOL
Phe ne tole C8H10O1 PHNTOL
23-Xyle nol C8H10O1 23XYOL
2-Phe nyle thylalcohol C8H10O1 2PHEOL
4-Me thylguaiacol C8H10O2 4MGCOL
1-Octanol C8H18O1 1C8OL
2-Ethylhe xanol C8H18O1 2EC6OL
2-Me thyl-1-He ptanol C8H18O1 2M1C7OL
4-Indanol C9H10O1 4INDANOL
N-Propylphe nol C9H12O1 NPPHENOL
N-Nonanol C9H20O1 NC9OL
1-Napthol C10H8O1 1NPHTOL
2-Napthol C10H8O1 2NPHTOL
P-Te rt-Butyphe nol C10H14O1 BPHNOL
P-Ethyl-B-Phe nyle thanol C10H14O1 P-EPEOL
O-Ethyl-B-Phe nyle thanol C10H14O1 O-EPEOL
1-De canol C10H22O1 1C10OL
1-Dode canol C12H26O1 1C12OL
He ptade canol C17H36O1 C17OL
1-Octade canol C18H38O1 1C18OL
1-Eicosanol C20H42O1 1C20OL
ALDEHYDES
Formalde hyde C1H2O1 C1AL
Ace talde hyde C2H4O1 C2AL
Propionalde hyde C3H6O1 C3AL
Me thylal C3H8O2 METHYLAL
N-Butanal C4H8O1 N-BUTAL
I-Butanal C4H8O1 I-BUTAL
Furfural C5H4O2 FURFURAL
Vale ralde hyde C5H10O1 VALERAL
Be nzalde hyde C7H6O1 BZAL
N-He xanal C6H12O1 N-C6AL
N-He ptanal C7H14O1 N-C7AL
N-Octanal C8H16O1 N-C8AL
N-Nonanal C9H18O1 N-C9AL
N-De canal C10H20O1 N-C10AL
AMIDES
Me thylamine C1H5N1 MA
Me thylhydrazine C1H6N2 C1-HZINE
Ethylamine C2H7N1 EA
Dime thylamine C2H7N1 DMA
Monoe thanolamine C2H7O1N1 MEA
Ethyle ne diamine C2H8N2 C2-DA
Dime thylformamide C3H7O1N1 DMF
N-Propylamine C3H9N1 N-PA
I-Propylamine C3H9N1 I-PA
Trime thylamine C3H9N1 TMA
Morpholine C4H9O1N1 MORPHLIN
N-Butylamine C4H11N1 N-BA
I-Butylamine C4H11N1 I-BA
Die thylamine C4H11N1 DEA
Pyridine C5H5N1 PYRIDINE
Aniline C6H7N1 ANILINE
4-Me thylpyridine C6H7N1 4MPYR
13-Be nze ne diamine C6H8N2 13BZDA
2-Me thyl-Pipe ridine C6H13N1 2MPIPER
Dipropylamine C6H15N1 DPA
Trie thylamine C6H15N1 TEA
23-Dime thylpyridine C7H9N1 23DMPYR
24-Dime thylpyridine C7H9N1 24MPYR
2-Ethylpyridine C7H9N1 2EPYR
Me thylphe nylamine C7H9N1 MPHA
O-Toluidine C7H9N1 O-TOLUID
M-Toluidine C7H9N1 M-TOLUID
P-Toluidine C7H9N1 P-TOLUID
67-Dihydro-5h-1-Pyridine C8H9N1 671PYRID
67-Dihydro-5h-2-Pyridine C8H9N1 672PYRID
N-Ethylaniline C8H11N1 N-EANILI
236-Trime thylpyridine C8H11N1 236MPYR
246-Trime thylpyridine C8H11N1 246MPYR
2-Me thyl-5-Ethylpyridine C8H11N1 2M5EPYR
24-Dime thylaniline C8H11N1 24MANILI
2-Ethylaniline C8H11N1 2EANILIN
23-Dime thylaniline C8H11N1 23DMANIL
35-Dime thylaniline C8H11N1 35DMANIL
4-Ethylaniline C8H11N1 4EANILIN
Nn-Dime thylaniline C8H11N1 NN-DMA
2-C1-5-C2-Pipe ridine C8H17N1 2M5EPIPE
Dibutylamine C8H19N1 DBA
1-Naphthylamine C10H9N1 1NPHA
N-Butylaniline C10H15N1 N-BANILI
2-Phe nylpyridine C11H9N1 2PHPYR
Tributylamine C12H27N1 TBA
AROMATICS
Be nze ne C6H6 BZ
Tolue ne C7H8 TOLUENE
Styre ne C8H8 STYRENE
O-Xyle ne C8H10 O-XYL
M-Xyle ne C8H10 M-XYL
P-Xyle ne C8H10 P-XYL
Ethylbe nze ne C8H10 EBZ
Inde ne C9H8 INDENE
Indan C9H10 INDAN
Alpha-Me thylstyre ne C9H10 AMSTY
M-Me thylstyre ne C9H10 MMSTYR
O-Me thylstyre ne C9H10 OMSTYR
P-Me thylstyre ne C9H10 PMSTYR
N-Propylbe nze ne C9H12 NPBZ
I-Propylbe nze ne C9H12 IPBZ
1-Me thyl-2-Ethylbe nze ne C9H12 1M2EBZ
123-Trime thylbe nze ne C9H12 123TMBZ
Naphthale ne C10H8 NAPHT
1-Me thylinde ne C10H10 1MINDENE
1,2-Dihydronaphthale ne C10H10 DHNAPHTA
1234-Te trahydronaphtale n C10H12 1234HNPH
Dicyclope ntadie ne C10H12 DCYC5=
1-Me thylindan C10H12 1MINDAN
N-Butylbe nze ne C10H14 N-BBZ
I-Butylbe nze ne C10H14 I-BBZ
Se c-Butylbe nze ne C10H14 S-BBZ
Te rt-Butylbe nze ne C10H14 T-BBZ
1-Me thyl-2-I-Propylbe nzn C10H14 1M2PBZ
14-Die thylbe nze ne C10H14 14DEBZ
1245-Te trame thylbe nze ne C10H14 1245BZ
1234-Te trame thylbe nze ne C10H14 1234TMBZ
1235-Te trame thylbe nze ne C10H14 1235TMBZ
2-Ethyl-M-Xyle ne C10H14 2EMXYL
2-Ethyl-P-Xyle ne C10H14 2EPXYL
3-Ethyl-O-Xyle ne C10H14 3EOXYL
4-Ethyl-O-Xyle ne C10H14 4EOXYL
12-Die thylbe nze ne C10H14 12DEB
13-Die thylbe nze ne C10H14 13DEB
O-Propyltolue ne C10H14 OPTOLU
M-Propyltolue ne C10H14 MPTOLU
P-Propyltolue ne C10H14 PPTOLU
1-Me thylnaphthale ne C11H10 1MNAPHT
2-Me thylnaphthale ne C11H10 2MNAPHT
23-Dime thylindan C11H12 23MINDAN
2-Me thyl-Te tralin C11H14 2MTTLIN
6-Me thyl-Te tralin C11H14 6MTTLIN
5-C2-124-Tric1-Be nze ne C11H16 5E124MBZ
2-C2-135-Tric1-Be nze ne C11H16 2E135MBZ
5-Propyl-M-Xyle ne C11H16 5PMXYL
Pe ntame thylbe nze ne C11H16 5MBZ
3-Propyl-O-Xyle ne C11H16 3POXYL
2-Propyl-M-Xyle ne C11H16 2PMXYL
2-Propyl-P-Xyle ne C11H16 2PPXYL
23-Dime thylcume ne C11H16 23MCUM
24-Die thyltolue ne C11H16 24ETOLU
35-Die thyltolue ne C11H16 35ETOLU
Diphe nyl C12H10 DPHNYL
Ace naphthe ne C12H10 ACNAPHT
12-Dime thylnaphthale ne C12H12 12MNAPHT
1-Ethylnaphthale ne C12H12 1ENAPHT
2-Ethylnaphthale ne C12H12 2ENAPHT
2a345-Te tra-H-Ace naphte n C12H14 TACNAPHT
Cyhe xylbe nze ne C12H16 CYHXBZ
12-Di-I-Propylbe nze ne C12H18 12IPBZ
1-Phe nylhe xane C12H18 1PHC6
C-Bicyhe xyl C12H22 CBCYHXYL
T-Bicyhe xyl C12H22 TBCYHXYL
Ace naphthyle ne C12H8 ACNPHTYL
Fluore ne C13H10 FLUORENE
Diphe nylme thane C13H12 DPHC1
23dihyd-1h-Be nz(E)Inde ne C13H12 BZINDENE
3-Me thyl-Biphe nyl C13H12 3MBPHNYL
1-N-Propylnaphthale ne C13H14 1NPNAPHT
2-N-Propylnaphthale ne C13H14 2NPNAPHT
He xahydro-Furane ne C13H16 HHFURA
Anthrace ne C14H10 ANTHRA
Phe nanthre ne C14H10 PHANTH
35-Dime thyl-Biphe nyl C14H14 35MBPHNL
34-Dime thyl-Biphe nyl C14H14 34MBPHNL
33-Dime thylbiphe nyl C14H14 33DMBP
1-N-Butylnaphthale ne C14H16 1BNAPHT
2-N-Butylnaphthale ne C14H16 2BNAPHT
Te trade cahydroanthrace ne C14H24 TDHANTHR
Te trade cahydrophe nantre n C14H24 TDHPHNTR
1-Me thylanthrace ne C15H12 1MANTHRA
Guaiazule ne C15H18 GUAIAZ
Pyre ne C16H10 PYRENE
Fluoranthe ne C16H10 FLANTHEN
Chryse ne C18H12 CHRYSENE
Be nz(A)Anthrace ne C18H12 BZANTHRA
Naphthace ne C18H12 NPHTCN
Triphe nyle ne C18H12 TPHENE
3,4-Be nzo(C)Phe nanthre ne C18H12 34BPT
1,2,4-Trie thylbe nze ne C18H12 123TEB
1,3,5trie thylbe nze ne C18H12 135TEB
O-Te rphe nyl C18H14 OTPHNYL
M-Te rphe nyl C18H14 MTPHNYL
P-Te rphe nyl C18H14 PTPHNYL
1-C1-7-I-C3-Phe nanthre ne C18H18 PHENANTH
Octade cahydrochryse ne C18H30 ODHCHRYS
Be nzo(A)-Pyre ne C20H12 BZPYRENE
7,12-Dime t.Be nz.(A)Anthr C20H16 712DMBA
9-Cy.He xylte trahyd.Anthr C20H34 9CYHTHA
Corone ne C24H12 CORONENE
ESTERS
Me thyl Formate C2H4O2 MC1AT
Ethyl Formate C3H6O2 EC1AT
Me thyl Ace tate C3H6O2 MC2AT
Vinyl Ace tate C4H6O2 VC2AT
Propyle ne Carbonate C4H6O3 PCARBOAT
Dime thyl Oxalate C4H6O4 DMOXAT
Me thyl Acrylate C4H7O2 MACRYLAT
Ethyl Ace tate C4H8O2 EC2AT
Me thyl Propionate C4H8O2 MC3AT
N-Propyl Formate C4H8O2 N-PC1AT
Ethyl Acrylate C5H8O2 EACRYLAT
I-Butyl Formate C5H10O2 I-BC1AT
N-Propyl Ace tate C5H10O2 N-PC2AT
Ethyl Propionate C5H10O2 EC3AT
Me thyl N-Butyrate C5H10O2 MN-C4AT
Me thyl I-Butyrate C5H10O2 MI-C4AT
N-Butyl Ace tate C6H12O2 N-BC2AT
I-Butyl Ace tate C6H12O2 I-BC2AT
Ethyl N-Butyrate C6H12O2 EN-C4AT
Ethyl I-Butyrate C6H12O2 EI-C4AT
N-Propyl Propionate C6H12O2 N-PC3AT
N-Butyl Acrylate C7H12O2 BACRYLAT
Me thyl Be nzoate C8H8O2 MBZAT
Ethyl Be nzoate C9H10O2 EBZAT
Butyl Be nzoate C11H14O2 BBZAT
Dibutyl-O-Phthalate C16H22O4 DBPHTAT
Butyl Ste arate C22H44O2 BSTEARAT
ETHERS
Ethyle ne Oxide C2H4O1 C2OX
Dime thyle the r C2H6O1 DME
Propyle ne Oxide C3H6O1 C3OX
Vinylme thyle the r C3H6O1 VME
Me thyle thyle the r C3H8O1 MEE
Die thyle the r C4H10O1 DEE
12-Dime thoxye thane C4H10O2 12DMOE
Die thyle ne Glycol C4H10O3 DEG
Furan C4H4O1 FURAN
2,5-Dihydrofuran C4H6O1 25DHF
Te trahydrofuran C4H8O1 THF
Vinyle thyle the r C4H8O1 VEE
12-Butyle ne Oxide C4H8O1 12C4OX
Te trahydropyran C5H10O1 THP
Ethylpropyle the r C5H12O1 EPE
Pyran C5H6O1 PYRAN
Dihydropyran C5H8O1 DHP
Ethylbutyle the r C6H14O1 EBE
Diisopropyle the r C6H14O1 DIPE
Dipropyle the r C6H14O1 DPE
Me thylphe nyle the r C7H8O1 MPE
Dibutyle the r C8H18O1 DBE
Be nzofuran C8H6O1 BZFURAN
Pyrogallol C8H6O3 PYROGALL
2-Me thylbe nzofuran C9H8O1 MBZFURAN
57-Dime thylbe nzofuran C10H10O1 57MBZF
Diphe nyle the r C12H10O1 DPHE
Dihe xyle the r C12H26O1 DHE
Naphthol(12.B)Furan C12H6O1 NAPHFU
Dibe nzofuran C12H8O1 DBZFURAN
HALOGENATED DERIVATIVES
1112-Te trachloroe thane C2H2CL4 1112CLC2
111-Trichloroe thane C2H3CL3 111CLC2
111-Trifluoroe thane C2H3F3 C2F3
1122-Cl4-12-F2-Ethane C2CL4F2 C2F2CL4
1122-Te trachloroe thane C2H2CL4 1122CLC2
112-Trichloroe thane C2H3CL3 C2CL3
11-Cl2-1222-F4-Ethane C2CL2F4 11C2F4CL
11-Dichloroe thane C2H4CL2 1C2CL2
11-Dichloroe thyle ne C2H2CL2 11CLC2-
11-Difluoroe thane C2H4F2 1C2F2
11-Difluoroe thyle ne C2H2F2 C2-F2
122-Cl3-112-F3-Ethane C2CL3F3 C2F3CL3
123-Trichloropropane C3H5CL3 C3CL3
12-Cl2-1122-F4-Ethane C2CL2F4 12C2F4CL
12-Dichloroe thane C2H4CL2 2C2CL2
12-Dichloropropane C3H6CL2 C3CL2
1-Chlorobutane C4H9CL1 1C4CL
1-Cl-11-F2-Ethane C2H3CL1F2 C2F2CL
2-Chlorobutane C4H9CL1 2C4CL
Ace tyl Chloride C2H3O1CL1 C2OCL
Allyl Chloride C3H5CL1 ALLCL
Boron Trichloride CL3B1 CL3B
Boron Trifluoride F3B1 F3B
Bromobe nze ne C6H5BR1 BRBZ
Bromochlorodifluorome tha C1BR1CL1F2 BRCLF2C1
Bromoe thane C2H5BR1 C2BR
Bromome thane C1H3BR1 C1BR
Bromotrichlorome thane C1BR1CL3 BRCL3C1
C-12-Dichloroe thyle ne C2H2CL2 C12CLC2-
Carbon Te trabromide C1BR4 CBR4
Carbonic Bromide Fluorid C1BR1F1O1 BRFCARB
Chlorobe nze ne C6H5CL1 CLBZ
Chlorodifluorome thane C1H1CL1F2 C1F2CL
Chloroe thane C2H5CL1 C2CL
Chloro-I-Propane C3H7CL1 I-C3CL
Chlorome thane C1H3CL1 C1CL
Chlorope ntafluoroe thane C2CL1F5 C2CLF5
Chloropre ne C4H5CL1 CLPRENE
Chloropropane C3H7CL1 C3CL
Chlorotrifluoroe thyle ne C2CL1F3 CF3CL
Chlorotrifluorome thane C1CL1F3 C1F3CL
Cyanoge n C2N2 C2N2
Cyanoge n Bromide C1N1BR1 C1NBR
Cyanoge n Chloride C1N1CL1 C1NCL
Cyanoge n Iodide C1N1I1 C1NI
Dibromome thane C1H2BR2 C1BR2
Dichlorodifluorome thane C1CL2F2 C1F2CL2
Dichlorome thane C1H2CL2 C1CL2
Dichloromonofluorome than C1H1CL2F1 C1CL2F
Ethyl Iodide C2H5I1 C2I
Fluorobe nze ne C6H5F1 FBZ
Fluoroe thane C2H5F1 C2F
Fluorome thane C1H3F1 C1F
He xachloroe thane C2CL6 HCLC2
He xachloropropyle ne C3CL6 C3CL6
He xafluorobe nze ne C6F6 HXFBZ
He xafluoroe thane C2F6 C2F6
Hydroge n Bromide H1BR1 HBR
Hydroge n Chloride H1CL1 HCL
Hydroge n Fluoride H1F1 HF
Hydroge n Iodide H1I1 HI
Iodobe nze ne C6H5I1 IBZ
Iodome thane C1H3I1 C1I
M-Dichlorobe nze ne C6H4CL2 M-DCLBZ
Nitroge n Trifluoride N1F3 NF3
Nitrosyl Chloride O1N1CL1 CLNO
Octafluoropropane C3F8 C3F8
O-Dichlorobe nze ne C6H4CL2 O-DCLBZ
P-Dichlorobe nze ne C6H4CL2 P-DCLBZ
Pe ntachloroe thane C2H1CL5 PCLC2
Pe rfluoro-23-Dime thylc4 C6F14 PFDMC4
Pe rfluoro-2-Me thylpe ntan C6F14 PF2MC5
Pe rfluoro-3-Me thylpe ntan C6F14 PF3MC5
Pe rfluorocyhe xane C6F12 PFCYC6
Pe rfluorome thylcyc6 C7F14 PFMCYC6
Pe rfluoro-N-He ptane C7F16 PFNC7
Pe rfluoro-N-He xane C6F14 PFNC6
Phosge ne C1O1CL2 COCL2
Phosphorus Trichloride CL3P1 PCL3
Silicon Te trachloride CL4SI1 SICL4
Silicon Te trafluoride F4SI1 SIF4
Sulfur He xafluoride F6S1 SF6
T-12-Dichloroe thyle ne C2H2CL2 T12CLC2-
Te rt-Butyl Chloride C4H9CL1 TC4CL
Te trachlorodiphe nyl C12H6CL4 TCLDPHYL
Te trachloroe thyle ne C2CL4 C2CL4
Te trachlorome thane C1CL4 CCL4
Te trafluoroe the ne C2F4 C2F4
Te trafluorome thane C1F4 CF4
Trichloroe thyle ne C2H1CL3 C2-CL3
Trichlorofluorome thane C1CL3F1 C1CL3F
Trichlorome thane C1H1CL3 C1CL3
Trifluorobromome thane C1F3BR1 C1F3BR
Trifluorome thane C1H1F3 CF3H
Vinyl Chloride C2H3CL1 VCL
Vinyl Fluoride C2H3F1 VF
Vinyl Formate C3H4O2 VFORMAT
ISOCYANATE
Me thylisocyanate C2H3O1N1 C1NCO
KETONES
Ke te ne C2H2O1 C2ONE
Ace tone C3H6O1 C3ONE
Gamma-Butyrolactone C4H6O2 GBUTYONE
2-Butanone C4H8O1 2C4ONE
Cype ntanone C5H8O1 C5ONE
2-Pe ntanone C5H10O1 2C5ONE
3-Me thyl-2-Butanone C5H10O1 3MC4ONE
3-Pe ntanone C5H10O1 3C5ONE
Cyhe xanone C6H10O1 CYC6ONE
4-Me thyl-2-Pe ntanone C6H12O1 42C5ONE
Me thylphe nylke tone C8H8O1 MPK
MISCELLANEOUS
Argon AR1 AR
Bromine BR2 BR2
Carbon C1 C
Chlorine CL2 CL2
Chlorine (Atomic) CL1 CL
De ute rium D2 D2
Fluorine F2 F2
He lium 4 HE1 HE
Hydroge n H2 H2
Iodine I2 I2
Krypton KR1 KR
Ne on NE1 NE
Nitroge n N2 N2
Oxyge n O2 O2
Ozone O3 O3
Radon RN1 RN
Sulfur S2 S2
Sulfur (S6) S6 S6
Sulfur (S8) S8 S8
Wate r H2O1 H2O
Xe non XE1 XE
13-Dioxopropadie ne C3O2 C3O2
14-Dioxane C4H8O2 DIOXANE
Ace tic Anhydride C4H6O3 ACANH
Anisole C7H8O1 ANISOLE
Ethylce llosolve C4H10O2 ECSLVE
Male ic Anhydride C4H2O3 MLANH
Oh Radical H1O1 OH•
Phthalic Anhydride C8H4O3 PHTANH
NAPHTENES
Cypropane C3H6 CYC3
Cybutane C4H8 CYC4
Cype ntane C5H10 CYC5
Cyhe xane C6H12 CYC6
Me thylcype ntane C6H12 MCYC5
Cyhe ptane C7H14 CYC7
11-Dime thylcype ntane C7H14 11CYC5
C-12-Dime thylcype ntane C7H14 C12CYC5
T-12-Dime thylcype ntane C7H14 T12CYC5
Ethylcype ntane C7H14 ECYC5
Me thylcyhe xane C7H14 MCYC6
11-Dime thylcyhe xane C8H16 11CYC6
C-12-Dime thylcyhe xane C8H16 C12CYC6
T-12-Dime thylcyhe xane C8H16 T12CYC6
Ethylcyhe xane C8H16 ECYC6
112-Trime thylcype ntane C8H16 112CC5
113-Trime thylcype ntane C8H16 113CC5
C-C-T-124-Trime thylcyc5 C8H16 CCTCC5
C-T-C-124-Trime thylcyc5 C8H16 CTCCC5
1-Me thyl-1-Ethylcype ntan C8H16 11ECYC5
N-Propylcype ntane C8H16 NPCYC5
I-Propylcype ntan C8H16 IPCYC5
N-Propylcyhe xane C9H18 NPCYC6
I-Propylcyhe xane C9H18 IPCYC6
C-De calin C10H18 C-DECA
T-De calin C10H18 T-DECA
N-Butylcyhe xane C10H20 NBCYC6
I-Butylcyhe xane C10H20 IBCYC6
Se c-Butylcyhe xane C10H20 SBCYC6
Te r-Butylcyhe xane C10H20 TBCYC6
N-He xylcype ntane C11H22 NHXCC5
N-He ptycype ntane C12H24 NHPCC5
N-Octylcype ntane C13H26 NOCYC5
N-Nonylcype ntane C14H28 NNCYC5
N-De cylcype ntane C15H30 NDCYC5
N-De cylcyhe xane C16H32 NDCYC6
N-Dode cylcype ntane C17H34 NDDCYC5
N-Tride cylcype ntane C18H36 N3DCC5
N-Te trade cylcype ntane C19H38 N4DCC5
N-Pe ntade cylcype ntane C20H40 N5DCC5
N-He xade cylcype ntane C21H42 N6DCC5
NITROGEN DERIVATIVES
Ammonia H3N1 NH3
Hydrazine H4N2 N2H4
Hydroge n Cyanide C1H1N1 HCN
Nitrome thane C1H3O2N1 C1NO2
Ace tonitrile C2H3N1 C2N
Ethyle ne Imine C2H5N1 EIMINE
Nitroe thane C2H5O2N1 C2NO2
Acrylonitrile C3H3N1 C3N
Acrole in C3H4O1 ACROLEIN
Propionitrile C3H5N1 PROPN
1-Nitropropane C3H7O2N1 1C3NO2
2-Nitropropane C3H7O2N1 2C3NO2
Pyrazine C4H4N2 PYRAZINE
Allyl Cyanide C4H5N1 ALLCN
Pyrrole C4H5N1 PYRROLE
Butyronitrile C4H7N1 BUTN
Pyrrolidine C4H9N1 PYRRODIN
Pipe ridine C5H11N1 PIPERIDI
2-Me thyl-Pyrazine C5H6N2 2MPYRAZN
N-Me thyl-Pyrrole C5H7N1 NMPYRR
Nitrobe nze ne C6H5O2N1 BZNO2
Phe nylhydrozine C6H8N2 PHHYDRZN
25-Dime thyl-Pyrrole C6H9N1 25MPYRR
Be nzonitrile C7H5N1 BZN
O-Tolunitrile C8H7N1 O-TOLN
Indole C8H7N1 INDOLE
M-Cyanotolue ne C8H7N1 MCYATOLU
P-Cyanotolue ne C8H7N1 PCYATOLU
Quinoline C9H7N1 QUINOL
I-Quinoline C9H7N1 I-QUINOL
2-Me thylindole C9H9N1 2MINDOLE
1234-Te trahydroquinoline C9H11N1 1234THQ
Nn-Dime thyl-O-Toluidine C9H13N1 NNDTOL
2-Me thylquinoline C10H9N1 2MQUINOL
Quinaldine C10H9N1 QUINAL
Le pidine C10H9N1 LEPIDINE
7-Me thylquinoline C10H9N1 7MQ
1-Me thyl-I-Quinoline C10H9N1 1M-I-Q
3-Me thyl-I-Quinoline C10H9N1 3M-I-Q
Caprylonitrile C10H19N1 CAPN
24-Dime thylquinoline C11H11N1 24DMQ
26-Dime thylquinoline C11H11N1 26DMQ
Carbazole C12H9N1 CARBAZOL
246-Trime thylquinoline C12H13N1 246TEQ
Acridine C13H9N1 ACRIDINE
OLEFINS
Ethyle ne C2H4 C2-
Propadie ne C3H4 C3--
Propyle ne C3H6 C3-
Vinylace tyle ne C4H4 VACTL
12-Butadie ne C4H6 12C4--
13-Butadie ne C4H6 13C4--
1-Bute ne C4H8 1C4-
C-2-Bute ne C4H8 C-2C4-
T-2-Bute ne C4H8 T-2C4-
I-Butyle ne C4H8 I-C4-
13-Cype ntadie ne C5H6 13CYC5-
Cype nte ne C5H8 CY-C5-
12-Pe ntadie ne C5H8 12C5--
1-T-3-Pe ntadie ne C5H8 1T3C5--
14-Pe ntadie ne C5H8 14C5--
2-Me thyl-13-Butadie ne C5H8 2MC4--
3-Me thyl-12-Butadie ne C5H8 3MC4--
1-Pe nte ne C5H10 1C5-
C-2-Pe nte ne C5H10 C-2C5-
T-2-Pe nte ne C5H10 T-2C5-
2-Me thyl-1-Bute ne C5H10 2M1C4-
13-Cyhe xadie ne C6H8 13CYC6-
1-Me thyl-Cype nte ne C6H10 1MCC5-
3-Me thyl-Cype nte ne C6H10 3MCC5-
15-He xadie ne C6H10 15C6-
Cyhe xe ne C6H10 CYC6-
1-He xe ne C6H12 1C6-
C-2-He xe ne C6H12 C-2C6-
T-2-He xe ne C6H12 T-2C6-
C-3-He xe ne C6H12 C-3C6-
T-3-He xe ne C6H12 T-3C6-
2-Me thyl-2-Pe nte ne C6H12 2M2C5-
3-Me thyl-C-2-Pe nte ne C6H12 3MC-2C5-
3-Me thyl-T-2-Pe nte ne C6H12 3MT-2C5-
4-Me thyl-C-2-Pe nte ne C6H12 4MC-2C5-
4-Me thyl-T-2-Pe nte ne C6H12 4MT-2C5-
23-Dime thyl-1-Bute ne C6H12 231C4-
1-Me thyl-Cyhe xe ne C7H12 1MCC6-
4-Me thyl-Cyhe xe ne C7H12 4MCC6-
1-He pte ne C7H14 1C7-
233-Trime thyl-1-Bute ne C7H14 233C4-
14-Dime thylcyhe xe ne C8H14 14MCC6-
1-Octe ne C8H16 1C8-
T-2-Octe ne C8H16 T2C8-
1-None ne C9H18 1C9-
1-De ce ne C10H20 1C10-
1-Unde ce ne C11H22 1C11-
1-Dode ce ne C12H24 1C12-
1-Tride ce ne C13H26 1C13-
1-Te trade ce ne C14H28 1C14-
1-Pe ntade ce ne C15H30 1C15-
1-He xade ce ne C16H32 1HC10-
1-Octade ce ne C18H36 1C18-
1-Eicose ne C20H40 C20-
OXIDES
Carbon Dioxide C1O2 CO2
Carbon Monoxide C1O1 CO
De ute rium Oxide O1D2 D2O
Dinitroge n Trioxide O3N2 N2O3
Hydroge n Pe roxide H2O2 H2O2
Nitric Oxide O1N1 NO
Nitroge n Dioxide O2N1 NO2
Nitroge n Dioxide (N2o4) O4N2 N2O4
Nitroge n Oxide N2o2 O2N2 N2O2
Nitroge n Pe ntoxide O5N2 N2O5
Nitroge n Trioxide O3N1 NO3
Nitrous Oxide O1N2 N2O
Sulfur Dioxide O2S1 SO2
Sulfur Trioxide O3S1 SO3
PARAFFINS
Me thane C1H4 C1
Ethane C2H6 C2
Propane C3H8 C3
N-Butane C4H10 N-C4
I-Butane C4H10 I-C4
N-Pe ntane C5H12 N-C5
2-Me thylbutane C5H12 2MC4
22-Dime thylpropane C5H12 22DMC3
N-He xane C6H14 N-C6
2-Me thylpe ntane C6H14 2MC5
3-Me thylpe ntane C6H14 3MC5
22-Dime thylbutane C6H14 22DMC4
23-Dime thylbutane C6H14 23DMC4
N-He ptane C7H16 N-C7
2-Me thylhe xane C7H16 2MC6
3-Me thylhe xane C7H16 3MC6
22-Dime thylpe ntane C7H16 22DMC5
3-Ethylpe ntane C7H16 3EC5
223-Trime thylbutane C7H16 223MC4
N-Octane C8H18 N-C8
2-Me thylhe ptane C8H18 2MC7
22-Dime thylhe xane C8H18 22DMC6
3-Ethylhe xane C8H18 3EC6
223-Trime thylpe ntane C8H18 223MC5
2-Me thyl-3-Ethylpe ntane C8H18 2M3EC5
3-Me thyl-3-Ethylpe ntane C8H18 3M3EC5
N-Nonane C9H20 N-C9
223-Trime thylhe xane C9H20 223MC6
33-Die thylpe ntane C9H20 33DEC5
2233-Te trame thylpe ntane C9H20 2233C5
N-De cane C10H22 N-C10
335-Trime thylhe ptane C10H22 335MC7
2233-Te trame thylhe xane C10H22 2233C6
2255-Te trame thylhe xane C10H22 2255C6
N-Unde cane C11H24 N-C11
N-Dode cane C12H26 N-C12
N-Tride cane C13H28 N-C13
N-Te trade cane C14H30 N-C14
N-Pe ntade cane C15H32 N-C15
N-He xade cane C16H34 N-C16
N-He ptade cane C17H36 N-C17
N-Octade cane C18H38 N-C18
N-Nonade cane C19H40 N-C19
N-Eicosane C20H42 N-C20
2,3-Dime thyloctade cane C20H42 23MC18
2,4-Dime thyloctade cane C20H42 24MC18
2-Me thylnonade cane C20H42 2MC19
2,4,6-Trime thylhe ptade ca C20H42 246C17
2,3-Dime thylnonade cane C21H44 23MC19
2,4-Dime thylnonade cane C21H44 24MC19
2-Me thyle icosane C21H44 2MC20
2,4,6-Trime thyloctade can C21H44 246C18
N-Une icosane C21H44 N-C21
Docosane C22H46 N-C22
Tricosane C23H48 N-C23
Te tracosane C24H50 N-C24
Pe ntacosane C25H52 N-C25
He xacosane C26H54 N-C26
He ptacosane C27H56 N-C27
Octacosane C28H58 N-C28
Nonacosane C29H60 N-C29
Triacontane C30H62 N-C30
Untriacontane C31H64 N-C31
Dotriacontane C32H66 N-C32
Tritriacontane C33H68 N-C33
Te tratriacontane C34H70 N-C34
Pe ntatriacontane C35H72 N-C35
He xatriacontane C36H74 N-C36
He ptatriacontane C37H76 N-C37
Octatriacontane C38H78 N-C38
Nonatriacontane C39H80 N-C39
Te tracontane C40H82 N-C40
Pe ntacontane C50H102 N-C50
He xacontane C60H122 N-C60
He ptacontane C70H142 N-C70
Octacontane C80H162 N-C80
Nonacontane C90H182 N-C90
He ctane C100H202 C100
SULFUR DERIVATIVES
Hydroge n Sulfide H2S1 H2S
Carbonyl Sulfide C1O1S1 COS
Carbon Disulfide C1S2 CS2
Me thane thiol C1H4S1 C1SH
Ethane thiol C2H6S1 C2SH
Dime thylsulfide C2H6S1 DMS
Me thyle thylsulfide C3H8S1 MES
Ethyle ne Sulfide C2H4S1 C2S
Dime thyl Disulfide C2H6S2 C2S2
Thia-Cybutane C3H6S1 THCYC4
Thiophe ne C4H4S1 THIOPH
11-Diox-Te trahydrothioph C4H8O2S1 11DTHTPH
3-Me thyl-Thiacybutane C4H8S1 3MTB
Te trahydrothiophe ne C4H8S1 THTHIOPH
Die thylsulfide C4H10S1 DES
Die thyldisulfide C4H10S2 DEDS
2-Me thylthiophe ne C5H6S1 2MTIOPH
3-Me thylthiophe ne C5H6S1 3MTIOPH
Te trohydro-Thiopryan C5H10S1 THTPRYAN
2-Me thyl-Thia-Cype ntane C5H10S1 2MTCYC5
3-Me thyl-Thia-Cype ntane C5H10S1 3MTCYC5
Cype ntane thiol C5H10S1 CYC5TH
Be nze ne thiol C6H6S1 BZTHIOL
3-Ethyl-Thiophe ne C6H8S1 3ETHIOPH
23-Dime thyl-Thiophe ne C6H8S1 23MTHIOP
1-Cype nthyl-1-Thiae thane C6H12S1 1CYP1TT
3-Me thyl-Thia-Cyhe xane C6H12S1 3MTCYC6
Cyhe xane -Thiol C6H12S1 CYC6THOL
1-Phe nyl-1-Thiae thane C7H8S1 1P1TT
2-Me thyl-Be nze ne thiol C7H8S1 2MBTHIOL
4-Ethyl-2-Me thylthiophe n C7H10S1 42THIOPN
5-Ethyl-2-Me thylthyophe n C7H10S1 52THIOPN
Be nzothiophe ne C8H6S1 BZTHIOP
1-Thiaindan C8H8S1 1THIAIDN
23-Dihydro-Be nzothiophe n C8H8S1 23DHBTH
Be nzylme thylsulfide C8H10S1 BMS
2-Thiate tralin C9H10S1 2THTTLIN
2-Ethyl-1-Thiainde ne C10H10S1 2E1THIAI
12-Dicype nthyldisulfide C10H18S2 DCYPS2
Dibe nzothiophe ne C12H8S1 DBZTHIOP
Phe nylsulfide C12H10S1 PHSULFD
SECTION 8: SOLIDS DATA BASE

The properties stored for each compound are listed in the following table.
The characteristics of the solids are defined with regards to a quantity of solid ("unit") specified by
the user and of which the weight is given by the parameter UNITW (kg/unit). In fact, UNITW
corresponds to the molecular weight for chemical compounds that are perfectly determined.
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION PHYSICAL UNITS
H0FS Standard e nthalpy of formation kJ/unit
G0FS Gibbs standard e ne rgy of kJ/unit

formation
UNITW Mass of se le cte d solid unit kg/unit
CRIST Cristal Type -
1 : triclinic 2 : monoclinic
3 : orthorhombic 4 :
rhombohe dral
5 : quadratic 6 : he xagonal
7 : simple cubic 8 : face

ce nte re d cubic
9 : cubic with T>T(Curie ) 10:

ce nte re d cubic
11: ce nte re d cubic with T>T

(Curie )
TMIN(PS) Te mpe rature range for

K
TMAX(PS) sublimation pre ssure
PSA, PSB, Sublimation pre ssure

bar
PSC, PSD ln(PS) = A + B/(T +C) + D*T
TMIN(CS) Te mpe rature range for he at

K
TMAX(CS) capacity
CSA, CSB He at capacity

kJ/K/unit
CSC, CSD CS = A + B*T + C*T² + D/T²
TMIN(VS)
Te mpe rature range for volume K
TMAX(VS)
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION PHYSICAL UNITS
VSA, VSB, VSC Unit volume

m3/unit
VS = A + B*T + C*T²
TMIN(CT) Te mpe rature range for he at

K
TMAX(CT) conductivity
CONDS1, CONDS2, CONDS3 He at conductivity

KW/m/K
CONDS = S1 + S2*T + S3*T²
The list of compounds available in this library is shown be low.
Aluminum AL1 AL
Coppe r CU1 CU
Gold1 AU1 AU_1
Alpha1 Iron FE1 A_FE
Silve r1 AG1 AG_1
Mangane se Hydroxyoxyd MN1O2H1 MNO2H
Alpha-Cobalt CO1 A_CO
Be ta1 Cobalt CO1 B_CO
Gamma1 Cobalt CO1 G_CO
Cobalt Silicide CO1SI1 COSI
Be ta Cobalt Oxide CO1O1 B_(CO)O
Alpha Cobalt Oxide CO1O1 A_(CO)O
Coppe r(I) Chloride CU1CL1 CUCL
Coppe r(II) Chloride CU1CL2 CUCL2
Coppe r(II) Oxide CU1O1 CUO
Coppe r(I) Oxide CU2O1 CU2O
Nicke l1 NI1 NI_1
Nicke l Sulfate NI1S1O4 NISO4
Alpha Nicke l Monosulfide NI1S1 NIS
Silve r Fluoride AG1F1 AGF
Silve r Chloride AG1CL1 AGCL
Silve r Bromide AG1BR1 AGBR
Alpha Silve r Iodide AG1I1 A_AGI
Be ta Silve r Iodide AG1I1 B_AGI
Silve r Oxide AG2O1 AG2O
Alpha Silve r Sulfide AG2S1 A_AG2S
Be ta Silve r Sulfide AG2S1 B_AG2S
Gamma Silve r Sulfide AG2S1 G_AG2S
Alpha Silve r Sulfate AG2S1O4 A_2AGSO4
Be ta Silve r Sulfate AG2S1O4 B_2AGSO4
Alpha Silve r Se le nide AG2SE1 A_SEAG2
Be ta Silve r Se le nide AG2SE1 B_SEAG2
Alpha Silve r Te lluride AG2TE1 A_TEAG2
Be ta Silve r Te lluride AG2TE1 B_TEAG2
Trisilve r Antimonide AG3SB1 AG3SB
Silve r Carbonate AG2C1O3 AG2CO3
Alpha Silve r Nitrate AG1N1O3 A_AGNO3
Be ta Silve r Nitrate AG1N1O3 B_AGNO3
Silve r Tungstate AG2O1.W1O3 WO3.AG2O
Alpha1 Aluminum Fluoride AL1F3 A_ALF3
Be ta Aluminum Fluoride AL1F3 B_ALF3
Aluminum Chloride AL1CL3 ALCL3
Aluminum Bromide AL1BR3 ALBR3
Aluminum Iodide ALI3 ALI3
Alpha1 Aluminum Oxide AL2O3 A_AL2O3
Gamma Aluminum Oxide AL2O3 G_AL2O3
Al Oxide Monohydrate AL2O3.H2O1 H2O.AL2O
Al Oxide Trihydrate AL2O3.H6O3 H6O3.AL2
Aluminum Hydroxide AL1O3H3 AL(OH)3
Aluminum Sulfate AL2S3O12 AL2S3O12
Aluminum Nitride 1 AL1N1 ALN
Te traaluminum Tricarbide AL4C3 AL4C3
Aluminum Disilicate AL2O3.SI2O4 SI2.AL2O
Al Disilicate Dihydrate AL2O3.SI2O4.H4O2 AL.SI2.H
Al Silicate : Andalusite AL2O3.SI1O2 ANDLSITE
Al Silicate : Kyanite AL2O3.SI1O2 KYANITE
3-Al 2-Si: Mullite 2 AL6O9.SI2O4 MULLITE2
Al Silicate : Sillimanite AL2O3.SI1O2 SILLIMAN
2-Al Titanum 5-Oxide AL2O3.TI1O2 TI.AL2O3
As Trioxide Claude tite AS2O3 CLAUDETI
As Trioxide Arse nolite AS2O3 ARSENOLI
Arse nic Pe ntoxide AS2O5 AS2O5
Arse nic AS1 AS
1-Ca 1-S 2-H2o: Gypsum CA1S1O4.H4O2 GYPSUM
Gold Trifluoride AU1F3 AUF3
Gold Monochloride AU1CL1 AUCL
Gold Trichloride AU1CL3 AUCL3
Gold Bromide AU1BR1 AUBR
Gold Monoiodide AU1I1 AUI
Gold Diantimonide AU1SB2 AUSB2
Gold Monostannide AU1SN1 AUSN
Boron1 B1 B_1
Boron: Amorphous B1 B(AMRPH)
Boron Oxide B2O3 B2O3
Alpha Boron Nitride B1N1 A_BN
Te traboron Monocarbide B4C1 B4C
Boron2 B1 B_2
Be ta Boron Nitride B1N1 B_BN
Alpha Barium BA1 A_BA
Barium BA1 BA
Barium Fluoride BA1F2 BAF2
Alpha Barium Chloride BA1CL2 A_BACL2
Be ta Barium Chloride BA1CL2 B_BACL2
Barium Bromide BA1BR2 BABR2
Barium Iodide BA1I2 BAI2
Barium Oxide BA1O1 BAO
Barium Sulfate BA1S1O4 BASO4
Alpha Barium Carbonate BA1C1O3 A_BACO3
Be ta Barium Carbonate BA1C1O3 B_BACO3
Gamma Barium Carbonate BA1C1O3 G_BACO3
Silve r Bromate AG1BR1O3 AGBRO3
Silve r 1.64-Te lluride 1 AG1.64TE1 AG.TE1
Silve r Diphosphide AG1P2 AGP2
Silve r Triphosphide AG1P3 AGP3
Silve r Chromate AG2CR1O4 AG2CRO4
Aluminum Hydride AL1H3 ALH3
Aluminum Oxychloride AL1O1CL1 ALOCL
Al Chloride He xahydrate AL1CL3.H12O6 H.ALCL3
Aluminum Sulfide AL2S3 AL2S3
Aluminum Se le nide AL2SE3 AL2SE3
Aluminum Te lluride AL2TE3 AL2TE3
Aluminum Monophosphide AL1P1 ALP
Alpha Aluminum Phosphate AL1P1O4 A_ALPO4
Be ta Aluminum Phosphate AL1P1O4 B_ALPO4
Gamma Aluminum Phosphate AL1P1O4 G_ALPO4
Aluminum Arse nide AL1AS1 ALAS
Aluminum Antimonide AL1SB1 ALSB
Kaolinite AL2O3.SI2O4.H4O2 KAOLNITE
Aluminum Diboride AL1B2 ALB2
Aluminum 12-Boride AL1B12 AL12-B
18-Al 4-Boron 33-Oxide AL18O27.B4O6 AL18.B4
4-Al 2-Boron 9-Oxide AL4O6.B2O3 AL4.B2O3
Arse nic Iodide AS1I3 ASI3
Arse nic Monosulfide AS2S2 AS2S2
Arse nic Sulfide AS2S3 AS2S3
Arse nic Se le nide AS2SE3 AS2SE3
Arse nic Te lluride AS2TE3 AS2TE3
Gold Oxide AU2O3 AU2O3
Alpha Au Monose le nide AU1SE1 A_AUSE
Be ta Au Monose le nide AU1SE1 B_AUSE
Gold Dite lluride AU1TE2 AUTE2
2-Au Triphosphide AU2P3 AU2P3
Gold 2-Le ad AU1PB2 AUPB2
Boron Sulfide B2S3 B2S3
Boron Monophosphide B1P1 BP
Barium Pe roxide BA1O2 BAO2
Barium Hydroxide BA1O2H2 BA(OH)2
Barium Sulfide BA1S1 BAS
Barium Te lluride BA1TE1 BATE
Barium Nitride BA3N2 BA3N2
Barium Nitrate BA1N2O6 BA(NO3)2
2-Barium Tin BA2SN1 BA2SN
Barium 3-Tin BA1SN3 BASN3
2-Barium Le ad BA2PB1 BA2PB
Barium 3-Le ad BA1PB3 BAPB3
Barium Tungstate BA1O1.W1O3 WO3.BAO
Barium Uranate BA1O1.U1O3 UO3.BAO
Barium Me tazirconate BA1O1.ZR1O2 ZRO2.BAO
Barium Hafnate BA1O1.HF1O2 HFO2.BAO
Barium Me ta Silicate BA1O1.SI1O2 SIO2.BAO
Barium Orthosilicate BA2O2.SI1O2 SI.BA2O2
Ba 2-Aluminum 4-Oxide BA1O1.AL2O3 BAO.AL2
3-Ba 2-Aluminum 6-Oxide BA3O3.AL2O3 AL2.BA3O
Alpha Ba Ti 3-Oxide BA1O1.TI1O2 A_TI.BAO
Be ta Ba Ti 3-Oxide BA1O1.TI1O2 B_TI.BAO
2-Ba Ti 4-Oxide BA2O2.TI1O2 TI.BA2O2
Ba Molybde num 4-Oxide BA1O1.MO1O3 MO.BAO
Be ryllium1 BE1 BE_1
Alpha Be ryllium Fluoride BE1F2 A_BEF2
Be ta Be ryllium Fluoride BE1F2 B_BEF2
Be ryllium Chloride BE1CL2 BECL2
Be ryllium Bromide BE1BR2 BEBR2
Be ryllium Iodide BE1I2 BEI2
Alpha1 Be Oxide BE1O1 A1_BEO
Alpha2 Be Oxide BE1O1 A2_BEO
Be ta Be ryllium Oxide BE1O1 B_BEO
Alpha Be Hydroxide BE1O2H2 A_BEOH2
Be ta Be Hydroxide BE1O2H2 B_BEOH2
Alpha Be Sulfate BE1S1O4 A_BESO4
Be ta Be Sulfate BE1S1O4 B_BESO4
Gamma Be Sulfate BE1S1O4 G_BESO4
Alpha Be Nitride BE3N2 A_BE3N2
Be ryllium Carbide BE2C1 BEC
Be Ortho-Si : Phe nacite BE2O2.SI1O2 BE2.SI02
Tribe ryllium Diborate BE3O3.B2O3 BE3.B2O3
Be 2-Aluminum 4-Oxide BE1O1.AL2O3 AL2.BEO
Be 6-Aluminum 10-Oxide BE1O1.AL6O9 AL6.BEO
Be ryllium Tungstate BE1O1.W1O3 WO3.BEO
Be ryllium Monosulfide BE1S1 BES
Be Sulfate Dihydrate BE1S1O4.H4O2 BESO4.H4
Bismuth BI1 BI
Bismuth Fluoride BI1F3 BIF3
Bismuth Chloride BI1CL3 BICL3
Bismuth Bromide BI1BR3 BIBR3
Alpha Bi Monoiodide BI1I1 A_BII
Be ta Bi Monoiodide BI1I1 B_BII
Bismuth Sulfate BI2S3O12 BI2SO43
Bismuth Te lluride BI1TE3 TE3BI
Alpha Bismuth Oxide BI2O3 A_BI2O3
Be ta Bismuth Oxide BI2O3 B_BI2O3
Bismuth Sulfide BI2S3 BI2S3
Bismuth Se le nide BI2SE3 BI2SE3
Alpha2 Aluminum Oxide AL2O3 A2_AL2O3
3-Al 2-Si: Mullite 2 AL6O9.SI2O4 MULLITE2
Aluminum Nitride 2 AL1N1 2ALN
Aluminum Nitride 3 AL1N1 3ALN
Silve r2 AG1 AG_2
Alpha2 Aluminum Fluoride AL1F3 ALF3
Gold2 AU1 AU_2
Boron3 B1 B_3
Be ryllium2 BE1 BE_2
Alpha Calcium CA1 A_CA
Be ta Calcium CA1 B_CA
Gamma Calcium CA1 G_CA
Calcium Hydride CA1H2 CAH2
Alpha Calcium Fluoride CA1F2 A_CAF2
Be ta Calcium Fluoride CA1F2 B_CAF2
Calcium Chloride CA1CL2 CACL2
Calcium Bromide CA1BR2 CABR2
Calcium Iodide CA1I2 CAI2
Calcium Oxydichloride CA1O1CL2 CAOCL2
Calcium Oxyde CA1O1 CAO
Calcium Pe roxyde CA1O2 CAO2
Calcium Hydroxide CA1O2H2 CA(OH)2
Calcium Sulfide CA1S1 CAS
Calcium Sulfite CA1S1O3 CASO3
Calcium Sulfate CA1S1O4 CASO4
Alpha 1-Ca 1-S 1/2-Hydra CA1S1O4.H1O0.5 CA.HYDRA
Calcium Se le nide CA1SE1 CASE
Calcium Te lluride CA1TE1 CATE
Tricalcium Dinitride CA3N2 CA3N2
Calcium Nitrate CA1N2O6 CAN2O6
Tricalcium Diphosphide CA3P2 CA3P2
Alpha Ca Orthophosphate CA3P2O8 A_CA3P2
Be ta Ca Orthophosphate CA3P2O8 B_CA3P2
Alpha Ca Pyrophosphate CA2P2O7 A_CA2P2
Be ta Ca Pyrophosphate CA2P2O7 B_CA2P2
Cadmium CD1 CD_1
Cadmium Sulfide CD1S1 CDS
Cadmium Carbonate CDC1O3 CDCO3
Cadmium Hydroxyde CD1O2H2 CD(OH)2
Carbon: Graphite C1 C_1
Carbon: Graphite C1 C_2
Carbon: Diamond C1 C_3
Be ta2 Cobalt CO1 B2_CO
Gamma2 Cobalt CO1 G2_CO
Cobalt Dichloride CO1CL2 COCL2
Cobalt(2,3) Oxide CO3O4 CO3O4
Cobalt Hydroxyde CO1O2H2 CO(OH)2
Cobalt(Ii) Sulfate CO1S1O4 COSO4
Cobalt Carbonate CO1C1O3 COCO3
Cobalt 0.89-Sulfide CO1S0.89 COS0.89
Cobalt 1.333-Sulfide CO1S1.333 COS1.333
Coppe r Hydroxide CU1O2H2 CU(OH)2
Coppe r Carbonate CU1C1O3 CUCO3
Coppe r(Ii) Sulfide CU1S1 CUS
Iron(Ii) Carbonate FE1C1O3 FECO3
Alpha2 Iron FE1 A2_FE
Gamma Iron FE1 G_FE
De lta Iron FE1 D_FE
Fe (Iii) Oxide : He matite FE2O3 FE2O3
Be ta Iron(Iii) Oxide FE2O3 B_FE2O3
Gamma Iron(Iii) Oxide FE2O3 G_FE2O3
Iron(Ii) Hydroxide FE1O2H2 FE(OH)2
Iron(Iii) Hydroxide FE1O3H3 FEO3H3
Alpha Iron Monosulfide FE1S1 A_FES
Be ta Iron Monosulfide FE1S1 B_FES
Gamma Iron Monosulfide FE1S1 G_FES
Magne sium MG1 MG
Magne sium Oxide MG1O1 MGO
Magne sium Hydroxide MG1O2H2 MG(OH)2
Magne sium Carbonate MG1C1O3 MGCO3
Alpha1 Mangane se MN1 A1_MN
Alpha2 Mangane se MN1 A2_MN
Be ta Mangane se MN1 B_MN
Gamma Mangane se MN1 G_MN
De lta Mangane se MN1 D_MN
Mangane se (Ii) Oxide MN1O1 MNO
Alpha Mn(Iv) Oxide MN1O2 A_MNO2
Mangane se Monosulfide MN1S1 MNS
Mangane se (Ii) Carbonate MN1C1O3 MNCO3
Sodium NA1 NA
Alpha Sodium Hydroxide NA1O1H1 A_NAOH
Be ta Sodium Hydroxide NA1O1H1 B_NAOH
Disodium Monosulfide NA2S1 NA2S
Alpha Sodium Carbonate NA2C1O3 NA2CO3
Be ta Sodium Carbonate NA2C1O3 NA2CO3
Nicke l2 NI1 NI_2
Nicke l3 NI1 NI_3
Nicke l4 NI1 NI_4
Nicke l5 NI1 NI_5
Nicke l6 NI1 NI_6
Be ta Nicke l Monosulfide NI1S1 NIS
Nicke l Carbonate NI1C1O3 NICO3
Le ad PB1 PB
Le ad Sulfide PB1S1 PBS
Alpha Sulfur S1 A_S
Be ta1 Sulfur S1 B1_S
Be ta2 Sulfur S1 B2_S
Silicon SI1 SI
Alpha Si Dioxide : Quartz SI1O2 A_QUARTZ
Be ta Si Dioxide : Quartz SI1O2 B_QUARTZ
Alpha Si 2-O :Cristobali SI1O2 A_CRISTO
Be ta Si 2-O: Cristobalit SI1O2 B_CRISTO
Vanadium1 V1 V_1
Vanadium2 V1 V_2
Vanadium3 V1 V_3
Zinc ZN1 ZN
Zinc Oxide ZN1O1 ZNO
Zinc Sulfide : Sphale rite ZN1S1 ZNS(SPH)
Zinc Sulfide : Wurzite ZN1S1 ZNS(WRZ)
Zinc Carbonate ZN1C1O3 ZNCO3
Alpha Zirconium ZR1 A_ZR
Be ta Zirconium ZR1 B_ZR
Ca Monohydroge n Phosphat CA1H1P1O4 CAHPO4
Calcium Antimonide CA3SB2 CA3SB2
Calcium Bismuthide CA3BI2 CA3BI2
Alpha Calcium Dicarbide CA1C2 A_CAC
Be ta Calcium Dicarbide CA1C2 B_CAC
Ca Carbonate : Aragonite CA1C1O3 ARGNITE
Ca Carbonate : Calcite CA1C1O3 CALCITE
Ca Mg Carbonate :Dolomite CA1C1O3.MG1C1O3 DOLOMITE
2-Calcium Silicon CA2SI1 2-CASI
Calcium Silicon CA1SI1 CASI
Calcium 2-Silicon CA1SI2 CA2-SI
Alpha Ca Me ta-Si: Wollas CA1O1.SI1O2 A_WOLLAS
Be ta Ca Me ta-Si: Wollast CA1O1.SI1O2 B_WOLLAS
Ca Me tasilicate :Pse udowo CA1O1.SI1O2 PSEU_WOL
Gamma Ca Orthosilicate CA2O2.SI1O2 G_ORTHSI
Be ta Ca Orthosilicate CA2O2.SI1O2 B_ORTHSI
Epsillon Ca Orthosilicat CA2O2.SI1O2 E_ORTHSI
Alpha Ca Orthosilicate CA2O2.SI1O2 A_ORTHSI
Tricalcium Silicate CA3O3.SI1O2 CA3.SI
3-Ca 2-Si: Frankinite CA3O3.SI2O4 CA3.2SI
Ca Orthosi 7/6-Hydrate CA2O2.SI1O2. CA2.H2SI

H2.33O10.166
3-Ca 2-Si 3-Hydrate CA3O3.SI2O4.H6O3 CA3.H6SI
4-Ca 3-Si 3/2-Hydrate CA4O4.SI3O6.H3O1.5 CA4.H3SI
6-Ca 6-Si Hydrate CA6O6.SI6O12.H2O CA6.H2SI
5-Ca 6-Si 3-Hydrate CA5O5.SI6O12.H6O3 CA5.H6SI
5-Ca 6-Si 11/2-Hydrate CA5O5.SI6O12.H11O5.5 CA5.H11
5-Ca 6-Si 21/2-Hydrate CA5O5.SI6O12.H21O100.5 CA5.H21
Ca 2-Si 2-Hydrate CA1O1.SI2O4.H4O2 CA1.H4SI
2-Ca 3-Si 5/2-Hydrate CA2O2.SI3O6.H5O2.5 CA2.H5SI
Alpha 1-Ca 1-Ti 3-Oxide CA1O1.TI1O2 A_CA.TI
Be ta 1-Ca 1-Ti 3-Oxide CA1O1.TI1O2 B_CA.TI
3-Ca 2-Ti 7-Oxide CA3O3.TI2O4 CA3.TI2
4-Ca 3-Ti 10-Oxide CA4O4.TI3O6 CA4.TI3
Calcium Me taborate CA1O1.B2O3 CA.B2O3
Calcium Te traborate CA1O1.B4O6 CA.B4O6
Alpha 2-Ca 3-B 5-Oxide CA2O2.B2O3 A_CA2.B2
Be ta 2-Ca 2-B 5-Oxide CA2O2.B2O3 B_CA2.B2
3-Ca 2-B 6-Oxide CA3O3.B2O3 CA3.B2O3
Ca 2-Al 4-Oxide CA1O1.AL2O3 CA.AL2O3
Ca 4-Al 7-Oxide CA1O1.AL4O6 CA.AL4O6
12-Ca 14-Al 33-Oxide CA12O12.AL14O21 CA.AL14
3-Ca 2-Al 6-Oxide CA3O3.AL2O3 CA3.AL2
3-Ca 2-Al 6-O 6-Hydrate CA3O3.AL2O3.H12O6 H.CA3.AL
4-Ca 2-Al 7-O 13-Hydrate CA4O4.AL2O3.H26O13 H.CA4.AL
2-Ca Aluminosilicate CA2O2.AL2O3.SI1O2 CA2.AL.S
Calcium Dimagne side CA1MG2 CAMG2
Ca Magne sium Dioxide CA1O1.MG1O1 CA.MGO
Diopside CA1O1.MG1O1.SI2O4 DIOPSIDE
Montice llite CA1O1.MG1O1.SI1O2 MONTICEL
Ake rmanite CA2O2.MG1O1.SI2O4 AKERMANI
Tre molite CA2O2.MG5O5.SI8O16. TREMOLIT

H2O
Me rwinite CA3O3.MG1O1.SI2O4 MERWINIT
Anorthite CA1O1.AL2O3.SI2O4 ANORTHIT
Ca-Al Pyroxe ne CA1O1.AL2O3.SI1O2 PYROXENE
Ge hle nite CA2O2.AL2O3.SI1O2 GEHLENIT
Grossular CA3O3.AL2O3.SI3O6 GROSSULA
Sphe ne CA1O1.TI1O2.SI1O2 SPHENE
2-Calcium Tin CA2SN1 CA2SN
Calcium Tin CA1SN1 CASN
2-Calcium Le ad CA2PB1 CA2PB
Calcium Le ad CA1PB1 CAPB
Calcium 2-Aluminum CA1AL2 CA2-AL
Calcium 4-Aluminum CA1AL4 CA4-AL
Calcium Zinc CA1ZN1 CAZN
Calcium 2-Zinc CA1ZN2 CA2-ZN
Calcium Uranate CA1O1.U1O3 CAO.UO3
Calcium Hafnate CA1O1.HF1O2 CAO.HFO2
Ca Molybde num Te traoxide CA1O1.MO1O3 CAO.MOO3
Calcium Tungstate CA1O1.W1O3 CAO.WO3
3-Ca Tungste n 6-Oxide CA3O3.W1O3 CA3.WO3
Calcium 2-Iron 4-Oxide CA1O1.FE2O3 CAO.FE2
2-Ca 2-Iron 5-Oxide CA2O2.FE2O3 CA2.FE2
Calcium Me tavanadate CA1O1.V2O5 CAO.V2O5
Calcium Pyrovanadate CA2O2.V2O5 CA2.V2
3-Ca Orthovanadate CA3O3.V2O5 CA3.VE
Calcium Me tazirconate CA1O1.ZR1O2 CAO.ZRO2
Cadmium Fluoride CD1F2 CDF2
Cadmium Chloride CD1CL2 CDCL2
Cadmium Bromide CD1BR2 CDBR2
Alpha Cadmium Iodide CD1I2 A_CDI2
Be ta Cadmium Iodide CD1I2 B_CDI2
Cadmium Oxide CD1O1 CDO
Cadmium Sulfate CD1S1O4 CDSO4
Cadmium Se le nide CD1SE1 CDSE
Cadmium Se le nite CD1SE1O3 CDSEO3
Cadmium Te lluride CD1TE1 CDTE
Cadmium Arse nide CD3AS2 CD3AS2
Cd Monoantimonide CD1SB1 CDSB
Cadmium Me tasilicate CD1O1.SI1O2 CDO.SIO2
Cadmium Aluminate CD1O1.AL2O3 CDO.AL2O
Cd Gallium Te traoxide CD1O1.GA2O3 CDO.GA2O
Cadmium Tungstate CD1O1.W1O3 CDO.WO3
Cadmium Titanate CD1O1.TI1O2 CDO.TIO2
Gamma1 Ce rium CE G1_CE
Gamma2 Ce rium CE G2_CE
De lta Ce rium CE D_CE
Ce rium Dihydride CE1H2 CEH2
Ce rium Fluoride CE1F3 CEF3
Ce rium Chloride CE1CL3 CECL3
Ce rium Bromide CE1BR3 CEBR3
Ce rium Iodide CE1I3 CEI3
Ce rium Oxide CE2O3 CE2O3
Ce rium 1.72-Oxide CE1O1.72 CEO1.72
Ce rium 1.83-Oxide CE1O1.83 CEO1.83
Ce rium Dioxide CE1O2 CEO2
Ce rium Monosulfide CE1S1 CES
Trice rium Te trasulfide CE3S4 CE3S4
Ce rium Sulfide CE2S3 CE2S3
Ce rium Sulfate CE2S3O12 CE2S3O12
Ce rium Monote lluride CE1TE1 CETE
Ce rium Nitride CE1N1 CEN
Dice rium Tricarbide CE2C3 CE2C3
Ce rium Dicarbide CE1C2 CEC2
Ce rium 2-Silicon CE1SI2 CESI2
Ce rium He xaboride CE1B6 CEB6
Ce rium 2-Aluminum CE1AL2 CEAL2
Ce rium 4-Aluminum CE1AL4 CEAL4
Monoce rium Aluminate CE1AL1O3 CEALO3
Cobalt Difluoride CO1F2 COF2
Cobalt Trifluoride CO1F3 COF3
Cobalt Dibromide CO1BR2 COBR2
Cobalt Diiodide CO1I2 COI2
Cobalt Disulfide CO1S2 COS2
Cobalt Se le nite CO1SE1O3 COSEO3
Tricobalt Nitride CO3N1 CO3N
Dicobalt Phosphide CO2P1 CO2P
Cobalt Monophosphide CO1P1 COP
Cobalt Triphosphide CO1P3 COP3
Cobalt 0.98-Antimonide CO1SB0.98 COSB0.98
Cobalt Diantimonide CO1SB2 COSB2
Cobalt Triantimonide CO1SB3 COSB3
Cobalt Orthosilicate CO2O2.SI1O2 SI.CO2O2
Cobalt Titanate CO1O1.TI1O2 COO.TIO2
2-Cobalt Titanum 4-Oxide CO2O2.TI1O2 TI.CO2O2
Dicobalt Boride CO2B1 CO2B
Cobalt Monoboride CO1B1 COB
Cobalt Tin CO1SN1 COSN
Cobalt Aluminum CO1AL1 COAL
2-Cobalt 5-Aluminum CO2AL5 CO2AL5
Cobalt 3-Aluminum CO1AL3 COAL3
2-Cobalt 9-Aluminum CO2AL9 CO2AL9
Alpha Cobalt Tungstate CO1O1.W1O3 A_COO.WO
Be ta Cobalt Tungstate CO1O1.W1O3 B_COO.WO
Cobalt 2-Iron 4-Oxide 1 CO1O1.FE2O3 1_COFE2O
Co Dichromium Te traoxide CO1O1.CR2O3 COO.CR2O
Cobalt Hydroxyd CO_O1O2H2 COO(OH)2
Chromium1 CR1 CR_1
Chromium2 CR1 CR_2
Chromium Dichloride CR1CL2 CRCL2
Chromium Trichloride CR1CL3 CRCL3
Chromium(3) Oxide CR2O3 CR2O3
Chromium Dioxide CRO2 CRO2
5-Chromium 12-Oxide CR5O12 CR5O12
8-Chromium 21-Oxide CR8O21 CR8O21
Chromium Trioxide CR1O3 CRO3
Chromium Sulfate CR2S3O12 CR2S3O12
Coppe r(1) Sulfate CU2S1O4 CU2SO4
Coppe r(2) Sulfate CU1S1O4 CUSO4
Iron(2) Chloride FE1CL2 FECL2
Iron(3) Chloride FE1CL3 FECL3
Iron Oxychloride FE1O1CL1 FEOCL
Wue stite 1 FE0.947O1 1_WUESTI
Wue stite 2 FE0.947O1 2_WUESTI
Iron(2) Oxide FE1O1 FEO
Iron(2,3)Oxide 1(Magne tit FE3O4 1_FE3O4
Iron(2,3)Oxide 2(Magne tit FE3O4 2_FE3O4
Iron Trioxide Hydrate FE2O3H2O1 H.FE2O3
Iron(2) Sulfate FE1S1O4 FESO4
Iron(3) Sulfate FE2S3O12 FE2S3O12
Magne sium Chloride MG1CL2 MGCL2
Magne sium Hydroxide Chlo MG1O1H1CL1 MGOHCL
Magne sium Sulfate MG1S1O4 MGSO4
Magne sium Nitrate MG1N2O6 MGN2O6
Mangane se (2) Chloride MN1CL2 MNCL2
Mangane se (2,3) Oxide 1 MN3O4 MN3O4
Mangane se (2,3)Oxide 2 MN3O4 MN3O4
Mangane se (3) Oxide MN2O3 MN2O3
Mangane se (2) Sulfate MN1S1O4 MNSO4
Nicke l Chloride NI1CL2 NICL2
Nicke l Monoxide 1 NI1O1 1_NIO
Le ad Chloride PB1CL2 PBCL2
Trile ad Te traoxide PB3O4 PB3O4
Le ad Dioxide PB1O2 PBO2
Le ad Sulfate 1 PB1S1O4 1_PBSO4
Le ad Sulfate 2 PB1S1O4 2_PBSO5
Le ad Carbonate PB1C1O3 PBCO3
Vanadium Dichloride V1CL2 VCL2
Vanadium Trichloride V1CL3 VCL3
Vanadium Monoxide V1O1 VO
Vanadium Trioxide V2O3 V2O3
Vanadium Dioxide 1 V1O2 1_VO2
Vanadium Dioxide 2 V1O2 2_VO2
Vanadium Pe ntoxide V2O5 V2O5
Tungste n2 W1 W_2
Tungste n1 W1 W_1
Tungste n Dichloride W1CL2 WCL2
Tungste n Te trachloride W1CL4 WCL4
Tungste n Pe ntachloride W1CL5 WCL5
Tungste n He xachloride 1 W1CL6 WCL6
Tungste n Dioxide Dichlor W1O2CL2 WO2CL2
Tungste n Monoxide Te trac W1O1CL4 WO1CL4
Tungste n Dioxide W1O2 WO2
Tungste n 2.72-Oxide W1O2.72 WO2.72
Tungste n Trioxide 1 W1O3 WO3
Tungste n Trioxide 2 W1O3 WO3
Tungste n Carbonyl W1C6O6 WC6O6
Zinc Chloride ZN1CL2 ZNCL2
Zinc Sulfate 1 ZN1S1O4 ZNSO4
Zinc Sulfate 2 ZN1S1O4 ZNSO4
Zinc Sulfate Monohydrate ZN1S1O4H2O1 H.ZNSO4
Zinc Sulfate Dihydrate ZN1S1O4H4O2 2H.ZNSO4
Zinc Sulfate He xahydrate ZN1S1O4H12O6 6H.ZNSO4
Zinc Sulfate He ptahydrat ZN1S1O4H14O7 7H.ZNSO4
Zinc Oxide Sulfate ZN1O1ZN1S1O4 ZNOZNSO4
Zirconium Dichloride ZR1CL2 ZRCL2
Zirconium Trichloride ZR1CL3 ZRCL3
Zirconium Te trachloride ZR1CL4 ZRCL4
Zirconium Dioxide 1 ZR1O2 1_ZRO2
Zirconium Dioxide 2 ZR1O2 2_ZRO2
Ce sium CS CS
Ce sium Chloride 1 CS1CL1 CSCL
Ce sium Oxide CS2O1 CS2O
Ce sium Trioxide CS2O3 CS2O3
Ce sium Dioxide CS1O2 CSO2
Ce sium Sulfate 1 CS2S1O4 1_CS2SO4
Ce sium Sulfate 2 CS2S1O4 2_CS2SO4
Ce sium Carbonate CS2C1O3 CS2CO3
Gallium GA1 GA
Gallium Chloride GA1CL3 GACL3
Gallium Oxide GA2O3 GA2O3
Ge rmanium1 GE1 GE_1
Ge rmanium Te trachloride GE1CL4 GECL4
Ge rmanium Dioxide 1(Te tra GE1O2 1_GEO2
Ge rmanium Dioxide 2(Te tra GE1O2 2_GEO2
Ge rmanium Dioxide (He xag GE1O2 3_GE1O2
Hafnium1 HF1 1_HF
Hafnium2 HF1 2_HF
Hafnium Dichloride HF1CL2 HFCL2
Hafnium Trichloride HF1CL3 HFCL3
Hafnium Te trachloride HF1CL4 HFCL4
Hafnium Dioxide 1 HF1O2 HFO2
Hafnium Dioxide 2 HF1O2 HFO2
Me rcury(1) Chloride HG2CL2 HG2CL2
Me rcury(2) Chloride HG1CL2 HGCL2
Me rcury(1) Sulfate HG2S1O4 HG2SO4
Me rcury(2) Sulfate HG1S1O4 HGSO4
Indium IN1 IN
Indium Monochloride 1 IN1CL1 INCL
Indium Monochloride 2 IN1CL1 INCL
Indium Dichloride IN1CL2 INCL2
Indium Trichloride IN1CL3 INCL3
Indium Oxide 1 IN2O3 IN2O3
Indium Oxide 2 IN2O3 IN2O3
Indium Sulfate IN2S3O12 IN2S3O12
Iridium1 IR 1_IR
Iridium2 IR1 2_IR
Iridium Trichloride IR1CL3 IRCL3
Iridium Dioxide IR1O2 IRO2
Palladium1 PD1 PD_1
Plladium2 PD1 PD_2
Palladium3 PD1 PD_3
Palladium Chloride PD1CL2 PDCL2
Palladium Oxide PD1O1 PDO
Prase odymium1 PR1 PR_1
Prase odymium Chloride PR1CL3 PRCL3
Prase odymium Oxide PR2O3 PR2O3
Prase odymium 1.72-Oxide PR1O1.72 PRO1.72
Prase odymium 1.83-Oxide PR1O1.83 PRO1.83
Prase odymium Dioxide PR1O2 PRO2
Platinum PT1 PT
Platinum Dichloride PT1CL2 PTCL2
Platinum Trichloride PT1CL3 PTCL3
Platinum Te trachloride PT1CL4 PTCL4
Potassium K1 K
Potassium Chloride K1CL1 KCL
Potassium Oxide K2O1 K2O
Potassium Pe roxyde K2O2 K2O2
Potassium Dioxide K1O2 KO2
Alpha Potassium Sulfate K2S1O4 A_K2SO4
Be ta Potassium Sulfate K2S1O4 B_K2SO4
Alpha Potassium Nitrate K1N1O3 A_KNO3
Be ta Potassium Nitrate K1N1O3 B_KNO3
Potassium Carbonate K2C1O3 K2CO3
Ce sium Chloride 2 CS1CL1 CSCL
Lithium LI1 LI
Lithium Chloride LI1CL1 LICL
Dilithium Monoxide LI2O1 LI2O
Lithium Pe roxide LI2O2 LI2O2
Lithium Sulfate 1 LI2S1O4 1_LI2SO4
Lithium Sulfate 2 LI2S1O4 2_LI2SO4
Lithium Carbonate 1 LI2C1O3 1_LI2CO3
Rubidium RB1 RB
Rubidium Chloride RB1CL1 RBCL
Rubidium Oxide RB2O1 RB2O
Rubidium Carbonate RB2C1O3 RB2C1O3
Titanium1 TI1 TI_1
Titanium2 TI1 TI_2
Titanium Dichloride TI1CL2 TICL2
Titanium Trichloride TI1CL3 TICL3
Titanium Monoxide 1 TI1O1 1_TIO
Titanium Monoxide 2 TI1O1 2_TIO
Dititanium Trioxide 1 TI2O3 1_TI2O3
Dititanium Trioxide 2 TI2O3 2_TI2O3
Trititanium Pe ntoxide 1 TI3O5 1_TI3O5
Trititanium Pe ntoxide 2 TI3O5 2_TI3O5
Titanium Dioxide (Rutile ) TI1O2 RUTILE
Titanium Dioxide (Anatase TI1O2 ANATASE
Thallium1 TL1 TL_1
Thallium2 TL1 TL_2
Thallium Chloride TL1CL1 TLCL
Thallium Trichloride TL1CL3 TLCL3
Thallium Oxide TL2O1 TL2O
Dithallium Trioxide TL2O3 TL2O3
Thallium Sulfate 1 TL2S1O4 1_TL2SO4
Thallium Sulfate 2 TL2S1O4 2_TL2SO4
Thulium1 TM1 TM_1
Thulium2 TM1 TM_2
Thulium Chloride TM1CL3 TMCL3
Thulium Oxide TM2O3 TM2O3
Uranium1 U1 U_1
Uranium2 U1 U_2
Uranium3 U1 U_3
Uranium Trichloride U1CL3 UCL3
Uranium Te trachloride U1CL4 UCL4
Uranium Pe ntachloride U1CL5 UCL5
Uranium He xachloride U1CL6 UCL6
Uranium Dioxide U1O2 UO2
4-Uranium 9-Oxide U4O9 U4O9
3-Uranium 8-Oxide U3O8 U3O8
Uranium Trioxide U1O3 UO3
Uranium Trioxide Monohyd U1O3H2O1 UO3H2O
Uranium Disulfate U1S2O8 US2O8
Sodium Chloride NA1CL1 NACL
SECTION 9: USER-DEFINED COMPOUNDS

9.1 STARTING NEWCOMP.EXE
NewComp.exe is used to create new compounds that can be used in your VALI models.
The application NewComp.exe is located in the directory \bin of Belsim installation. It can be started
directly from vali3 folder of the windows Taskbar.
User-defined compounds properties are stored in a user library called user.bls while the list of
compounds is stored in the file user.all. Both files are located in the directory \usr of Belsim
installation.
These two files should be copied and restored in the \usr directory at each new installation of Belsim
software.
When delivered to the client, the user library contains one compound named H2O_USER that is
simply a copy of the compound H2O from Belsim library.
FIGURE 4 - THE NEWCOMP MAIN WINDOW
9.2 ADDING A NEW COMPOUND
To add a compound:
press the Add button.
fill in the form :
Name: short name of the compounds in 8 characters maximum, without any space
Formula: compact chemical formula listing the total amounts of each element (ex:
C3H5CL3)
Long Name: this long name is used for documentation only.
Family: free field used to categorize the compounds when displaying the list of
compounds in ValiModeller.
EPIC: internal index number.
Abstract number: introduced as a single number of 8 digits maximum containing only

numbers from 0 to 9.
Type: Fluid or Solid
press the OK button

Attention:
1. The modifications will only be made permanent after the OK key has been hit in the main
notebook of the application.
2. The compound will be added after the selected compound in the main notebook
3. The compounds can be moved up and down with the [Up] and [Down] buttons.
Example for the trichloropropane:
FIGURE 5 - ADDING A NEW COMPOUND
9.3 DELETING A COMPOUND
To delete a compound
select the compound to be deleted from the list of substances of the main notebook
press the Delete button
9.4 EDITING COMPOUND DEFINITION
Edit definition allows the user to change the Long Name, the Family and the Abstract Number of the
selected compound. The other fields are not accessible once the compound has been created.
FIGURE 6 - EDITING THE COMPOUND DEFINITION
9.5 EDIT COMPOUND DATA
Edit data allows the user to access the whole set of parameters used to define the behaviour of the
selected compound. At this point, one has to mention that for mass balance only, the sole parameters
required are:
the chemical formula
the molecular weight (automatically computed from the chemical formula)
To perform mass and energy balance, the user will have to adjust the parameters required by the
thermodynamic methods he plans to use. At this time, there is no estimation method (based on the
group contributions,...) embedded in this tool to approximate the parameters required to carry out
energy balance.
The values provided by the Rough Evaluation come from simplistic correlations just based on the
molecular weight.
In any case, these estimations are not to be used for mass and energy balance.
FIGURE 7 - EDITING THE COMPOUND DATA
SECTION 10: USING

CO-COMPLIANTTHERMODYNAMIC PLUGS
10.1 THE PRINCIPLES
VALI has a Cape-Open (CO) compliant thermo-socket that enables thermodynamic calculations to be
carried-out through thermodynamic packages made available by other software vendors in the form
of CO compliant thermo plugs.
The implementation of the thermodynamic socket is compliant with CO-THRM-1 Version 1.0.
The use of third party plugs has been made as transparent and easy to use as possible and is done in
two steps:
installing the thermodynamic package on the computer where VALI is running
creating a CAPE_OPEN thermodynamic model that will reference that package
10.2 DEFINING A CAPE-OPEN COMPLIANT THERMOD IN THE

MODEL FILE
To define the CO thermod:
select the Edit|Add Thermod command
enter the Thermod name and select the type CAPE-OPEN 1.0
press OK
FIGURE 8 - CREATING A CO COMPLIANT THERMOD
Attention:
1. Compound names must unique across all Thermods (either native or Cape-Open compliant)
2. Compound names can not contain blank characters
3. You can mix streams with different Thermods through BBXVAL units. The correspondence
between compounds is carried out according to their CAS number. When performing heat
balances, take care that the same temperature and pressure is used as reference for enthalpy
between all Thermods.
The list of Thermodynamic packages and systems that are installed on the computer is displayed.
FIGURE 9 - S ELECTING A CO COMPLIANT PACKAGE
Select the package you want to use and press Select.
10.3 REVIEWING THE PROPERTIES OF A CO COMPLIANT

THERMOD
When editing a CO compliant Thermod, the ValiModeller native Thermod notebook is replaced by a
window that displays the properties of the CO compliant package.
FIGURE 10 - PROPERTIES OF A CO COMPLIANT THERMOD
SECTION 11: UNCERTAINTY OF THERMODYNAMICS

11.1 INTRODUCTION
Physical characteristics and fluids properties are calculated through various thermodynamic
methods which are subject to unmeasurable and hence random errors.
By default, these uncertainties are neglected by VALI. The parameter UNCTHER of the OPTVAL unit
enables to activate these uncertainties.
At present time, such uncertainties are available and have been implemented for the steam tables
(IAPWS methods).
11.2 CALCULTATION PROCEDURE
When thermodynamics uncertainties are taken into account, the following procedure is applied:
a first run is performed without thermodynamics uncertainties (the random errors are set
to zero)
the the rmodynamics unce rtaintie s are the n re laxe d and covariance factors are introduce d
be twe e n the de viations for points which are close to e ach othe r (in te rms of p and T) and a
se cond run is pe rforme d
the re ports are the n ge ne rate d on basis of the se cond run
For each link between stream variables and thermodynamic properties, an equation of the following
form is generated (similarly to equation 91 of VDI-2048):
x = x (p, T) + DxTABy
whe re : DxTABy is the unknown approximation de viation,
x is any the rmodynamic prope rty like e nthalpy, e ntropy, volume ,
y de signate s the phase type (L or V or S if prope rty for saturation).
These variables will appear in the tables of :
'TAGS DEFINITION' with the initial definition of the tags
'CORRELATION FACTORS' with the values of correlation factors between tags
'TAGS OF THE SYSTEM' with the table of initial and validated values and accuracy
At present time, values for the uncertainties are only available for the IAPWS method. The standard
deviations for H-S-V are defined from the values found in the table 43 p 40 of the "Release on the
IAPWS Industrial Formulation 1997 for the Thermodynamic Properties of Water and Steam":
REGION 1/3 REGION 2/3 REGION 2/5
Dv / % 0.002 0.007 0.001
Dh / (kJ kg-1) 0.014 0.073 0.012
Ds / (J kg-1 K-1) 0.022 0.094 0.025
Concerning the uncertainties on the saturated Pressure and Temperature, we have adopted values
found in table 44 p 42 of the same document are used:
T<623.15 K 623.15<T K
Dps / % 0.0033 0.0015
DTs / % 0.0003 0.0002
Attention: It can happen that some tags associated with thermodynamic uncertainties will be kept
constant in the case they are associated with a non-existing phase. This can happen if a stream is
defined as LV, but the final state is corresponding to pure L or V. In that case, only the variable
associated with the existing phase will be relaxed and taken into account.
The calculation of correlation factors is based on the formula 102 on page 50 of the VDI 2048
guideline:
The suitable values for the parameters are extracted from the reference [18] of the VDI 2048 guideline.
The kp and kt parameters are found from the following relationships:
PHASE DT / (K) DP / (BAR)
Vapour 200 400
Liquid 200 10000
The correlation factors are generated between variables belonging to the same regions, there is never
correlation coefficients between measurements associated to different regions.
For this reason, it is impossible to have correlation factors between Liquid and Vapour properties for
example. This is also not possible for saturation pressure if they are on both sides of the value of
623.15 K (which is the limit between regions 1 and 3).
The problem is then rerun with the values found without thermodynamic uncertainties as initial
values.
The statistics about the size of the mathematical problem will be refreshed (except if there is no
change) and the calculation of the a posteriori covariance matrix will start after identification of the
active bounds which will be considered as additional constraints to the system.
Attention: If the second run is not successful, the solution found during the first run is restored and
a special exitcode is issued.
CHAPTER 4
HOW TO BUILD
YOUR DATA
VALIDATION
IV
MODEL
Building a validation model requires the following information:
a flow-sheet of the process you want to validate
the location of measurements that are available including sample analyses (on-line and
off-line)
one (or many) sets of measurements
although this is not strictly necessary, having a design heat and mass balance of the
process is recommended for complex processes
The complete development of a model can be, somewhat arbitrarily divided in two parts:
creating the model: defining the UNITS, STREAMS, measurements
converging the model on a few cases and reviewing it: checking the model conformity to
the actual process, adjusting the precision of the measurements, etc.
The creation of a model can be carried out in several ways. The sequence of operations proposed here
is certainly one of the best methods when creating a new model. Other schemes are of course
possible.
Better KISS than KICC: "Keep It Simple Stupid" is better that "Keep It Crazy Complicated".
Determine what you really want to validate and limit your model to this. Avoid complicating your
model with unnecessary UNITS and STREAMS. If needed, you can easily add additional details
afterwards.
Section 2 explains the different steps needed to build a validation model.
Sections 3 to 13 show how to use ValiModeller to build the model.
Section 14 shows a practical example of building a model.
SECTION 2: HOW TO BUILD A VALIDATION MODEL

2.1 PRELIMINARY WORK
The preliminary phase consists in answering some basic questions about the data validation model:
what thermodynamic methods and chemical COMPOUNDS must be used ?
what chemical REACTIONS have to be considered ?
what validation UNITS will be used to model each equipment ?
Having answered these questions you can then set up the flow-sheet of the data validation model.
This flow-sheet is generally similar to the process flow-sheet although some differences are
sometimes observed. In some cases for example, several process UNITS can be modelled as one
validation UNIT, whereas in some other cases, several validation UNITS will be necessary to model
one process UNIT.
THE THERMODYNAMIC METHODS AND THE COMPOUNDS.

The choice of the compounds and thermodynamic methods depend on the scope of the data
validation model.
REFINING, CHEMICAL AND PETROCHEMICAL PLANTS
For an overall mass balance, where only the total rates transferred between the UNITS is of
importance, defining only one component (whatever it is) can be sufficient. The default
thermodynamic methods will be sufficient.
For a mass balance on a component per component basis, the different chemical components must
be defined. The default thermodynamic methods will be sufficient.
For a heat and mass balance of a chemical plant, the different chemical components must be defined.
According to the system, and especially for strongly non-ideal systems, some more sophisticated
thermodynamic methods might be necessary.
POWER PLANTS
For water and steam STREAMS (H2O only), the IAPWS-IF97 method is recommended. The NBS or
VDI method are also a good choice.
If combustion is involved, separate THERMODS should be used for the combustion air, the fuel and
the fumes. Adequate THERMODS are available by default in the Empty model file (Empty.bls). Using
default thermodynamic methods is usually sufficient for such STREAMS.
CHEMICAL REACTIONS
If chemical REACTIONS (including fuel combustion) are involved in the process, you can:
either define the REACTION scheme by writing the different REACTIONS that can occur in
the reactors and reference them in the UNIT (type RCTVAL, RLVVAL, RKPVAL, RKIVAL)
modelling the reactor
or allow any REACTION to occur, provided that atomic balances are satisfied. In such a
case a UNIT of type BATVAL or BWHVAL must be used
In the first case, you must carefully select your REACTIONS, in such a way that on a given reactor, all
REACTIONS are linearly independent. Failing to do so will induce singularities in the mathematical
system and prohibit its solution.
SELECTING THE UNITS MODELS

The type of a UNIT determines what type of equipment is modeled and what equations are
generated:
clack-box/mixer:
BBXVAL: mixes up to 10 STREAMS and splits them into up to 10 STREAMS of different

compositions
CUTVAL: breaks material or pressure loops of closed cycles
EFFVAL: mechanical/thermal STREAM efficiency box
NETVAL: network of pipes where STREAMS are mixed and split up on basis of a
product code
column:
COLVAL: saturation state of outlet STREAMS (saturated liquid or vapor) can be

specified
DISVAL: tray by tray distillation column calculation model
CRUVAL: same as BBXVAL but petroleum fractions can be identified
compressor:
COMVAL: includes isentropic efficiency equation
controllers (user-equations):
ATMOPRES: specifies atmospheric pressure (used a reference for pressure gauges)
EQUVAL: equality of composition between 2 streams
FLEXLIB: user-defined functions
FLXVAL: user-defined equations
OPXVAL: simple equations involving 2 variables
VARVAL: additional variables
heat exchanger:
ECOVAL: detailed simulation of a heat exchange section in an HRSG
EEXVAL: can model any heat exchange, no performance equation
HEXVAL: heat exchange between two STREAMS with performance equation
PRHVAL: heat exchange between a vapor that is condensed and a cold stream
SATVAL: allows you to set any saturation state on a STREAM
WALVAL: estimation of heat losses through walls of vessels
pump:
PUMVAL: useful if one wants to identify pump power or if its power is known or
related to another equipment (driven by a turbine). In many case, pumps are not
modeled
reactor:
BATVAL: any REACTION can occur (atomic mass balance)
BWHVAL: as BATVAL but with chemical equilibrium
CND-HNO3: Nitrous Gas Condenser
HEX-HNO3: Nitrous Gas Cooler
RCT-HNO3: NH3 Oxidation
RCTVAL: the possible REACTIONS are specified
RKIVAL: as RCTVAL but based on kinetics
RKPVAL: as RCTVAL but some reactions can be at (some distance of) chemical
equilibrium
RLVVAL: as RCTVAL but with 2 outlet STREAMS in L/V equilibrium
Separator:
LLEVAL: Liquid/Liquid equilibrium
LLVVAL: Liquid/Liquid/Vapor equilibrium
LVEVAL: Liquid/Vapor equilibrium
WLEVAL: Water/Liquid equilibrium
WLVVAL: Water/Liquid/Vapor equilibrium
splitter:
SPLVAL: splits a STREAM into up to 10 STREAMS of identical composition
storage:
TNKVAL: mass, volume and/or composition balances of storage tank (involves

accumulation and de-accumulation)
turbine:
TURVAL: includes isentropic efficiency equation
valves:
DPVAL: pressure drop in valves (can be function of rate)
PIPEVAL: pressure drop in line
2.2 DEFINING THE MODEL WITH VALIMODELLER
Defining a model involves the following steps:
STEP 1: CREATING OR SELECTING A MODEL FILE

The model file is a collection of models that are related. The way they are exactly related is up to the
user. All models of a given process can be, for example, grouped together.
STEP 2: DEFINING THE THERMODS AND COMPOUNDS

When needed, select the additional chemical compounds and create the THERMODS that are
necessary.
STEP 3: DEFINING THE CHEMICAL REACTIONS

Create the REACTIONS needed to describe your process.
STEP 4: DEFINING THE PROCESS : PFDS, UNITS, STREAMS

Create new PFDs (Process Flow Diagrams)
in each PFD: define the UNITS one by one and connect them with STREAMS. Review the
various UNIT and STREAM parameters
STEP 5: DEFINING THE MEASUREMENTS

The measurements can be defined in two different ways:
in the model file, through ValiModeller
in a separate text file called a TAG file, which you handle through any text editor, like
NotePad or WordPad. Using a spread-sheet application (like Excel, Lotus, etc.) is also
pretty well indicated for such a task. You must however export the spread-sheet in a text
form (ASCII file) so that ValiEngine can read it
When using a separate TAG file, the tags defined in the model are ignored.
SECTION 3: INTRODUCING VALIMODELLER

3.1 WINDOWS STANDARD
ValiModeller follows Windows standards for most if not all of its operations:
click an object to select it
double-click the object to Open it. Double clicking a PFD opens the corresponding flow-
sheet, while double-clicking any other object (units, streams, thermods, etc.) opens its
Notebook
right-click an object to activate the Object menu, which presents the different operations
you can perform with that object
Notebooks are associated with the following objects : PFDs, UNITS, STREAMS, THERMODS,
REACTIONS, COMPOUNDS and Result Boxes. These Notebooks gather in different pages all the
information of the corresponding object.
Notebooks are activated by double-clicking the object or by right-clicking the object and selecting the
Data option in the Object menu.
The data are presented mainly through Tables. Cells with grey background are not editable. Only
cells with white background are editable values.
FIGURE 1 - COPY FROM TABLES TO CLIPBOARD
Tables are handled as follows
use the arrow keys of your keyboard or mouse to navigate between the different cells of a
table
a little arrow on the right side of the active cell indicates a combo box
to edit the contents of a cell, double-click on the cell or press "Enter" or the "Spacebar" key.
Alternatively, you can directly enter a value to replace the existing value of in the cell
using the mouse, you can select a range of cells or the entire table. Use CTRL-C to copy the
selected range to the clipboard for exporting to external applications like Excel or Word
3.2 INFORMATION COHERENCY
With ValiModeller you can add new elements to your models but you can also review the data of
existing elements. A word of caution is here necessary: the validated data of the objects are only
coherent with respect to the last successful run of the model. Incoherence in the validated data can
therefore result from the following causes:
any change made to a model can result in data incoherence: addition or deletion of a UNIT
or of a STREAM, but also change of any parameter of a UNIT or of a STREAM
as ValiModeller allows you to run parts of models, the parts that have not been considered
in the last run, are of course not necessarily coherent with the rest of the model
The UNITS and STREAMS data must therefore always be considered with great care.
After running ValiEngine (or when any other application has changed the model file), ValiModeller
will propose:
to reload the results: only the data are read from the file, assuming the model structure has
not changed. This operation is quicker but might fail if some structural changes have been
made to the model by the external application
to take no action: the results are not loaded and the next run will restart form the initial
point presented by ValiModeller
The last option allows you to first look at the results before loading them. Depending on these results
you can decide later on to load the results back in ValiModeller and use the calculated results as a
new initial point for the next run, through the command Application |Load Results (or its
corresponding button ).
Attention:
1. When running ValiEngine, the results are saved in the file only if the run is successful.
2. Even if the run is successful, a runtime option allows you to suppress the saving of the results by
ValiEngine.
3. In both cases, the Application|Load results command will restore the starting point as it was
before the last run.
3.3 STARTING VALIMODELLER
To start ValiModeller, you can use one the following methods.
use the ValiModeller option in the Belsim | Vali4 Programs Start Menu
click on the corresponding Belsim model file in Windows Explorer
Alternatively, you can create a short-cut to ValiModeller.exe on your desktop.
If you started ValiModeller without specifying a model file, you will get an empty window.
FIGURE 2 - VALIMODELLER EMPTY S CREEN
Use:
or File|Open to open an existing model
or File|New to create a new model

When opening an existing model, ValiModeller will open the main PFD (named by default MAIN) in
View Mode.
Attention: if you upgraded from an earlier version of VALI, the model will be converted
automatically when reading it.
3.4 THE BROWSE TREE
The Browse Tree can be activated or deactivated using the Browse Tree Button , the Option|
Browse Tree Menu command or the short-cut Ctrl+B. The Browse Tree gives a global overview of
the model structure. It is by default located on the left side of the screen but it can be moved as a
toolbar anywhere in application area.
FIGURE 3 - VALIMODELLER MAIN PFD OPENED IN VIEW MODE
THE LEFT SIDE: BROWSE TREE

On the left side, appear successively, for each open model, the common objects (Physical units,
COMPOUNDS, THERMODS, REACTIONS and Mathematical UNITS) followed by the list of PFDs.
Clicking on a will expand the tree with more information about the corresponding item while
clicking on a will collapse this information. For example expanding a PFD will display its contents:
UNITS, STREAMS and sub-PFDs.
Clicking on an PFD selects that PFD in the PFD View. Clicking on a UNIT or a STREAM, activates the
corresponding object in the current PFD and highlights its symbol in yellow in the PFD View.
Double-clicking an object opens its Notebook, except for PFDs which are opened when double-
clicking them.
Right-clicking an object opens its Object Menu.
THE RIGHT SIDE: PFD VIEW

Clicking on an PFD, STREAM or UNIT selects it.
Double-clicking a PFD opens it in the PFD View. Double-clicking a UNIT or a STREAM opens its
Notebook.
Right-clicking an object opens its Object Menu.
THE STATUS BAR

The status bar presents the following information:
Server: name of Belsim License Server
User: name of the user
Engine: version of ValiEngine used during last run
Edit mode: status (ON/OFF) of the edit mode (see page 20)
RunDate: date/time of the last dataset used
Quality: Penalty/Chi2 of the last run
Penalty: weighted sum of penalties of the last run
PFD: name of the PFD used during the last run
3.5 MENU ITEMS
The menu bar presents the following items:
File
New: to create a new file
Open: to open an existing file
Close File <file>: to close the current file (file)
Import Tag File: to import tags defined in a TAG file model
Save: to save the current file
Save As: to save the current file under a new name
Print…: to print the current PFD
Print to File…: to print the current PFD as an emf file (enhanced metafile)
Preview: to preview before printing
Print All Pfds: to print all PFDs of the current model
Print Setup…: to select the printer and some other printer settings
Fit to Page: toggle to Fit the printing to the page size. The drawing will be scaled so
that it fits on a single page
Exit: to close the application
Edit
Edit|Add PFD: to add a PFD (Process Flow Diagram)
Add Unit: to add a UNIT
Add Stream: to add a STREAM
Add Thermod: to add a THERMOD
Add Compound: to add a COMPOUND
Add Reaction: to add a REACTION
To Clipboard: to copy the active PFD to the clipboard
View
Zoom In: to zoom in the current PFD
Zoom Out: to zoom out the current PFD
Full Fit: to zoom out the current PFD until it fits the View area
Toolbar: to activate the toolbar
Find: to activate the FIND facility
Hide Stream names: to hide the STREAM names
Hide Unit names: to hide the UNIT names
Hide Results: to hide the Result boxes
Tools
Measurements: to edit the values of the Tags defined in the model
Replace Tags Default Value: to replace all the tags default values by the measured
values
Physical Units: to handle the Physical units
Plants: to handle the Plants
Highlight: to control the colour highlighting in function of tags
None: no colour highlighting
All Measurements: highlights all objects on which a Tag is defined
Active Measurements: highlights all objects on which a Tag is defined an active
Filtered: highlights all objects on which a Tag contains a filter activated by

ValiFilter
Penalty: highlights all objects according to the penalty of its tags
Display: to display UNITS and STREAMS status and select which tags values are
displayed in the notebooks (a combo-box is also available on the toolbar)
None: UNITS and streams status is not displayed
Default: display UNITS and STREAMS status as set from GUI for the next run
Measured: display UNITS and STREAMS status as set after mea files reading
Used: display UNITS and STREAMS status finally used by ValiEngine (including
filtering, OFF propagation…)
Application
Calculate: to launch ValiEngine and perform the calculations
LicenseManager: to launch Belsim LicenseManager
ValiAnalytics: to launch ValiAnalytics
Results: to display ValiEngine Result files
Html Report: Complete html report
Log File (r1v): Summary of the run with warning and error messages
Runtime Messages (r2v): Messages that are usually sent to the screen (This file is
created only when running with -R2S option (Don't show summary of events)
Mathematical Details (r3v): List of equations and variables, trace of the convergence
algorithm.
Full Report (r4v): Main report file
Suspected tags (r5v): List of measurements that are eliminated or flagged as

suspicious
Tags Report (r6v): Tags report and summary of the results
Load Results: to load the results of the last run
Options
Edit mode: to toggle the Edit mode
Browse Tree: to toggle the Browse Tree
Add Multiple Objects: to toggle the Multiple UNITS/STREAMS creation option,

allowing to create several UNITS and STREAMS in a row.
History: to activate the project history window
Configure: to edit other options
Windows
Cascade: to cascade the already opened PFDs
Tile Horizontal: to tile horizontally the already opened PFDs
Tile Vertical: to tile vertically the already opened PFDs
Maximize current PFD: to maximize the current PFD
Minimize current PFD: to minimize the current PFD
Restore window: to restore current PFD to its previous size
<file> -> <PFD>: list of the opened PFDs
Help
Help Topics: to activate the Help facility
About ValiModeller: to display the About Belsim window
The toolbar provides instant access to the most useful commands.
3.6 EDIT MODE
ValiModeller can be operated in two modes: Edit mode ON or Edit mode OFF.
In Edit mode OFF you can review the model and update the UNITS and STREAMS data.. All
operations on the structure of a model are disabled : creation or deletion of objects (PFDs, UNITS,
STREAMS, REACTIONS, THERMODS, COMPOUNDS, Measurements, Result boxes) but also any
operation related to the Graphical representation of the model: symbols of UNITS (including their
position and size), drawing of STREAMS, etc. The background of PFDs is set in light grey.
To enter any structural or graphical change to a model you must activate Edit mode through the
Options|Edit mode ON command or the Edit Mode button . The background of PFDs is set in
white.
Attention: when loading a model for which some tags are not registered in the LicenseServer or
when loading a model which has been modified by a non-commercial license, the Edit Mode is set
to OFF and cannot be reset to ON (Read Only Mode).
3.7 TOOLBAR AND KEYBOARD SHORT-CUTS
The toolbar presents the most useful commands of the menu:
New: to create a new file
Open: to open an existing file
Help Topics: to activate the Help facility
Save: to save the current file
Print…: to print the current PFD
Backup Model: to create a backup of the model (in ModelBackup directory). When
clicking this button, a comment can be entered to describe the backup:
Restore Model: to restore a previously created back-up of the model. When clicking this
button, the model is closed, and a window prompts for choice of a backup, displaying
comments:
Edit mode: to toggle the Edit mode
Browse Tree: to toggle the Browse Tree
Zoom In: to zoom in the current PFD
Zoom Out: to zoom out the current PFD
Full Fit: to zoom out the current PFD until it fits the View area
Calculate: to launch ValiEngine and perform the calculations
Load Results: to load the results of the last run
Find: to activate the FIND facility
Measurements: to edit the values of the Tags defined in the model
LicenseManager: to launch Belsim LicenseManager
ValiAnalytics: to launch ValiAnalytics
Some keyboard short-cuts are also available:
F1: opens the Help facility
CTRL+F: opens the Find window (View|Find)
CTRL+R: runs ValiEngine (Application|Calculate)
CTRL+M: opens the View Measurements window (Tools|Measurements)
CTRL+E: toggles Edit mode ON/OFF (Options|Edit Mode On/Off)
CTRL+B: toggles Browse Tree ON/OFF (Options|Browse Tree On/Off)
CTRL+O: opens an other file (File|Open)
CTRL+P: calls the Print facility (PFD|Print)
CTRL+S: saves current file (File|Save)
3.8 SHOWING UNIT AND STREAM NAMES AND RESULT BOXES
The View|Hide STREAM Names command allows you to suppress the display of these names on
the flow-sheets. Similarly the command View|Hide UNIT Names allows to hide the UNIT Names in
the flow sheet and the command View|Hide Results allows to hide the result boxes.
You can save these settings in your user profile through the Options|Configure notebook.
3.9 CHANGING CONFIGURATION OPTIONS
The Option|Configure command opens a notebook where various options can be edited in different
pages:
Options: various editing, display and printing options
Prefix names: defines the default names for units and streams
Model Button: user-defined buttons giving access to external applications
Model Measurements: user-defined stream measurements
Attention: The settings of the first two pages can be saved in the user profile by clicking the Set as
Defaults button so that they will be automatically used during the next session. The user settings are
saved in a file called after the name of the user (<user>.ini) in the directory usr of Belsim installation.
OPTIONS PAGE
FIGURE 4 - THE OPTIONS PAGE OF THE CONFIGURATION NOTEBOOK
EDIT MODE
Edit Mode: to enable/disable model edition
Add Multiple Objects: to automatically add several UNITS or STREAMS in one shot
Auto-Rename Tags: to automatically rename tags when renaming a unit or stream

(provided the tag name is on basis of the object name followed by the a "_")
CONFIRM DELETION
You can specify here whether ValiModeller should ask a confirmation before actually deleting an
object.
Attention: REACTIONS, THERMODS and COMPOUNDS can only be deleted if they are not
referred by another object (e.g. you cannot delete a REACTION that appears in the list of
REACTIONS of a UNIT).
USE PREFIX NAMES
When creating a new object, a name is created on basis of an optional prefix and of a number which
is automatically incremented. The options of this section enable to specify whether or not to use the
prefix.
For units and streams, a different prefix can be configured for each unit and stream type, as defined
in the page Prefix names of the Configuration notebook.
For THERMODS and REACTIONS, the prefix is respectively THER and REAC.
PRINTING
You can specify here:
whether the drawing should be scaled down in order to fit in on page
which additional information should be included on the printed page
CURRENT DISPLAY
This part corresponds to the Menu commands Tools|Highlight and Tools|Display. It also enables
to activate/deactivate the Browse Tree and the coloring of objects according to their penalty.
Object Status corresponds to the current display status:
None: UNITS and STREAMS status is not displayed
Default: display UNITS and STREAMS status as set from GUI for the next run
Measured: display UNITS and STREAMS status as set after mea files reading
Used: display UNITS and STREAMS status finally used by ValiEngine (including filtering,
OFF propagation, etc.)
Tags Data Set option corresponds to the set of tags values shown when you open a notebook (Default,
Measured or Used). If the check-box is not checked, this setting is ignored and the set of tags values is
selected on basis of the Object Status setting.
AFTER RELOAD DISPLAY
This part corresponds to the Objects status shown after a reload of the file (typically after a run).
HIDE
These settings enable to hide:
the UNIT and STREAM names in the PFDs
the Result boxes in the PFDs
the History window when saving a model
PENALTY
These settings specify which colors must be used for the tags highlighting system. You can also
specify the threshold values for suspicious and significant deviations.
MISCELLANEOUS
You can specify here:
values shown in the notebooks will be displayed with the number of decimals specified
according to the physical units
when checked, the details are hidden in the measurements window to expand the size of
the measurements table
PREFIX NAMES PAGE

In the Prefix Names page you can control the auto-naming facility. Each unit and stream type can
have its own prefix, which will be used as basis for generating the names at creation time.
Attention: You can click on the fields of the table header to change the sorting order of the list of
units.
FIGURE 5 - THE PREFIX NAMES PAGE OF THE CONFIGURATION NOTEBOOK
MODEL BUTTON PAGE

The Model Button page defines personalized buttons visible in the toolbar allowing you to launch
external applications. For each model, you can define up to 10 buttons as follows:
Application path: path of the executable file to be launched when the button is clicked
(mandatory)
Start in: path of the directory where the external application will be launched. If not
specified, the application will start in the directory of the application
Icon: path of the ".ico" file displayed in the toolbar. If not specified, the Belsim icon is used
ToolTip: text displayed when the cursor moves over the button
Arguments: list of arguments that are used by the application. Clicking on the button
"List" shows a list of predefined arguments
Run Vali: when checked, ValiEngine is run before or/and after the application
FIGURE 6 - THE MODEL BUTTON PAGE OF THE CONFIGURATION NOTEBOOK
FIGURE 7 - THE LIS T OF ARGUMENTS OF THE MODEL BUTTON PAGE
3.10 MODEL MEASUREMENTS PAGE
The Model Measurements page lists user-defined stream measurements. To create a new
measurement, press Add button. Once a new measurement type is created, the model needs to be
closed an reopened.
FIGURE 8 - US ER S TREAM MEAS UREMENT TYPES
Once a user measurement is available in the model, it has to be defined using FLEX code.
3.11 THE FIND FACILITY
The View|Find command (or the button) opens the Find window where you can list the PFDs,
UNITS, STREAMS, TAGS, THERMODS, COMPOUNDS, REACTIONS and RESULT BOXES. The top field
allows restricting the number of objects that are shown in the table. Clicking the OK button opens
the notebook of the selected object.
If you deactivate the Close on Ok check box then the Find window will remain open after opening
any object, until you press the Cancel button. Checking Stay on top, will maintain the window on
top of the other windows.
FIGURE 9 - THE FIND WINDOW
3.12 RENAMING OBJECTS
Renaming objects is only possible in Edit Mode. The Rename Object window can be activated
through the Object Menu (right-click) of each object. It can also be activated via the Rename button of
the notebooks.
FIGURE 10 - RENAMING OBJECTS
For UNITS, STREAMS and COMPOUNDS the Auto rename tags check box enable to rename the tags
belonging to the object, when the tag name is built on basis of the object name.
3.13 SELECTING OBJECTS
You can select objects either from the Browse Tree or from the PFDs viewing and editing area.
Selected objects are highlighted in yellow in the PFDs.
When a PFD is open in Edit mode you can also select several objects (PFDs, UNITS, STREAMS,
RESULT BOXES) by drawing a rectangle around them. Once the objects are selected you can move
them together or delete them all with the DEL key (a confirmation of the delete will always be asked).
FIGURE 11 - S ELECTING OBJECTS BY DRAWING A RECTANGLE
In an opened PFD you can also select several objects by clicking them one by one while maintaining
the CTRL key pressed. In that case you can move the objects only with the arrows keys not with the
mouse.
SECTION 4: THE MODEL FILES

Models developed with ValiModeller are saved in model files with the extension "bls". A file can
contain one or several models and some parts of a given model can be in the different BLS files.
4.1 CONTENTS OF A MODEL FILE
All the information relative to a model is stored in the model file:
PFDS
UNITS
STREAMS
THERMODS
COMPOUNDS
REACTIONS
TAGS
RESULT BOXES
HISTORY
User defined PHYSICAL UNITS
TAGS can also be defined through one or several TAG files (see Using TAG Files). In such a case the
TAGS defined in the model file will be ignored.
The data associated to the UNITS and STREAMS correspond to the last run of ValiEngine, except if
you modify them with ValiModeller. It is also possible to change UNITS and STREAMS values
though measurement files. These data are used as starting points for the next run.
An empty model file called Empty.bls is delivered as a default file for the creation of your models. It
contains the compounds and thermodynamic models needed for the modelling of a power plant. The
file Refining.bls contains thermodynamic models relevant for refining applications.
4.2 CREATING A NEW MODEL FILE
To create a new (completely) empty MODEL FILE, use the File|New command or the button. This
will drive you through the following steps:
define a name for the model (like with File|Save As)
select a default plant name for the model
load COMPOUNDS to be used in the model
define a THERMOD (THERMODynamic model) on basis of the selected compounds
A first PFD (named PFD1) will automatically be created in the main PFD.
If you want to reuse parts of already existing models, you can also:
open (File|Open) any exiting file you want to use as basis of your new model
save the file (File|Save As) with a new name
It is also possible to import existing models (or part of models) as described below.
Attention: Several example files are distributed with VALI (see the examples directory on the
distribution CD). They contain typical COMPOUNDS and THERMODS.
4.3 IMPORTING MODELS FROM AN OTHER MODEL FILE
To import models or part of models into another model file, you must open both files at the same time
and activate the Browse Tree.
Select the PFD or the UNIT you want to copy from the source file and drag it into one of the PFDs of
the target file.
You can use the same approach to copy THERMODS, REACTIONS and COMPOUNDS between two
models. These objects will only be copied if their data and name are different. For example, copying
the compound H2O into a model which already refers to this compound will not create a second copy
of H2O.
FIGURE 12 - IMPORTING A PFD
The Rename Conflicting Objects window is then used to resolve naming conflicts between imported
and existing objects. The objects are listed by class and the Duplicates attribute is shown in front of
the classes for which conflicts exist. You can list the conflicting objects by checking the
corresponding radio button.
Conflicts must be resolved by renaming the conflicting objects. This renaming can be done for
several objects at a time by entering only the first letters of the names in the field Mask and entering
a new prefix for these objects in the field New Name.
The renaming can also be totally automatic by checking the Auto rename option. In such case the
conflicting objects will be renamed according to the default prefixes. If you uncheck in addition the
Rename duplicates only option, then all objects will be renamed, not only the conflicting ones.
FIGURE 13 - THE RENAME CONFLICTING OBJECTS WINDOW
Attention:
1. to import several PFDs in one shot, move first all the PFDs you want to import into a single PFD
and import the latter.
2. the MAIN PFD can not be imported into another model.
3. in place of importing a model, you can also define a link from an empty PFD of a model to a PFD
defined in another model file. At execution time the corresponding model is then included in the
global model. (see paragraph Using external PFDs in the following section)
4.4 MODEL VERSIONING AND DOCUMENTATION
The model versioning and documentation is designed for keeping track of changes made to a model.
When saving the model after any change has been made to it , the Project History window is
displayed. The history window can also be displayed through the Options|History menu command.
The model is identified by a version number and a run number.
the version has two parts the major and the minor numbers (ex : 3.1), which are increased
at user request. When the major version is incremented, the minor version number is set
to 1
the run number is increased after each successful run made with the model (provided the
results are saved). This run number is reset at each new major and minor version
In addition, you can add comments to document the changes. You can also merge or delete the
comments associated with past versions
Attention: it is possible to prohibit the appearance of the history window using the corresponding
check box or through the user settings in the Options|Configure Notebook.
FIGURE 14 - THE PROJECT HIS TORY WINDOW
4.5 THE DEFAULT PLANT
Each tag of a model must be associated to a Plant. This enables to easily track the tags at the License
Server level. The notion of Plant is also used by ValiLink to communicate with external systems.
The default plant is used by default when creating new tags.
To change the default plant, use the Tools|Plants command. The Add enables to create new plants.
The other properties of the plants must be set though the LicenseManager.
FIGURE 15 - THE S ELECT DEFAULT PLANT WINDOW
SECTION 5: THE PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAMS (PFD)

Each model file consists of a number of Process Flow Diagrams (PFD).
Those PFDs are organized recursively, in a way similar to directories under Windows operating
system: any PFD can contain other PFDs.
The main PFD, called by default MAIN, can contain other PFDs, but no UNITS (process equipment).
The main PFD also contains special objects which allows you to change the report lay-out or
mathematical options of the model like the maximum number of iterations (OPTVAL), the precision
of the thermodynamic calculations (PRECIS), the default bounds on variables (BNDVAL) or the
settings of the Gross Error elimination system (GROSSERR).
The other PFDs can contain:
PFDs
UNITS which describe the pieces of equipment of the process
STREAMS which connect the UNITS
The PFDs are listed in the Browse Tree window. The current PFD is displayed in the View Screen. To
modify a PFD you need to be in Edit Mode and to Open the PFD.
For consistency reasons, any UNIT and any PFD can appear in only one PFD. In the same way, any
STREAM can connect a maximum of two different UNITS. However these two UNITS can be located
in two different PFDs.
Attention: ValiModeller can be used to build models for ValiEngine but also for different
applications like SIMU (sequential process simulator). However different types of PFDs are then
used (SIMU PFDs in place of VALI PFDs).
5.1 CREATING A NEW VALI PFD
To create a new PFD:
open the PFD where this new PFD must be created (you must be in Edit Mode)
click the right mouse button anywhere in the PFD
select the Add VALI PFD command
point to the place where the PFD must be created and click the mouse
Alternatively you can use the Menu command Edit|Add PFD.
PFDs are automatically named in a sequential way : PFD1, PFD2, etc. You can however rename them
as you wish. You can also change the automatic prefix in the Options|Configure window.
Attention: PFD names are maximum 32 characters long and are case insensitive. They must be
unique with respect to other PFDs but also with respect to UNITS.
5.2 OPENING A PFD
To open a PFD:
double-click the PFD symbol in its opened parent PFD
click or double-click the PFD name in the Browse tree
right-click the PFD symbol in its parent PFD and select the Open command from the Object
menu
right-click the PFD name in the tree and select the Open command from the Object menu
click the PFD button in a UNIT or STREAM notebook
use the Show Parent PFD from a UNIT or PFD Object Menu
The Windows command shows the list of opened PFDs.
Several PFDs can be opened at the same time. They are handled following the MDI (Multiple
Document Interface) concept of Windows. You can switch between the opened PFDs using the CTRL-
Tab key.
5.3 RENAMING A PFD
To rename a PFD:
open the PFD
right-click in any empty region of the PFD to activate the PFD object menu
select the Rename command
enter the new name of the PFD
You can also:
right click the PFD to be renamed (in the PFD view ofr in the Browse tree)
5.4 DELETING A PFD
To delete a PFD:
open the PFD where this PFD is referenced
select the PFD to be deleted by clicking the mouse (or dragging a selection window)
press the Delete key
You can also:
right click the PFD to be deleted (in the PFD view ofr in the Browse tree)
right click the PFD to be deleted
select the Delete command
Attention: All the contents of the PFD will be deleted at the same time.
5.5 MOVING A PFD TO ANOTHER PFD
To move a PFD:
open the PFD where this PFD is referenced
right click the PFD
select the Move to Other PFD command
Click in another PFD to move the UNIT into this PFD
5.6 CHANGING THE STATUS OF A PFD (ON, OFF, OUT)
To change the status of a PFD:
right click on the PFD symbol (or name in the Browse tree and select the DATA command
this opens a Dialog window where the unit status can be changed
Setting a PFD OFF sets all the units and streams of the PFD (and sub-PFDs) OFF. The whole section is
considered as shutdown (no flows going through the entire section).
Setting a PFD OUT sets all the units of the PFD (and sub-PFDs) OUT. The whole section is considered
as not existing at all.
The order of units is also shown in this Dialog window. This order is not relevant for ValiEngine at
calculation time but will affect the order of TABLES in the user defined reports (see section "Using
Measurement Files").
The ZONE field is used when generating Product Balances by zones. If left blank the PFD will inherit
its zone from its parent PFD. The keyword EMPTY specifies that the PFD is not included in any zone
and is thus considered as being outside the overall balancing envelope.
Attention: The main PFD of a model does not have a notion of zone, so that the PFDs appearing in
that main PFD will be part of the EMPTY zone, except specified otherwise trhough the zone field.
FIGURE 16 - THE PFD NOTEBOOK
5.7 USING EXTERNAL PFDs
When a PFD is empty, its DATA dialog box enables linking this PFD to a PFD defined in another
model file.
When using external files, you should pay attention to the following points:
the external model files will not be saved after a successful ValiEngine run
objects having the same name as objects that are already defined are ignored:
duplicate UNITS, REACTIONS, COMPOUNDS and TAGS will be discarded
a STREAM can appear in two different models provided they have only one origin and
only one destination unit. In addition the STREAM must use a compatible THERMOD
in both file
if a THERMOD with the same name appears at different places, the first occurrence will
be used. The duplicate thermod(s) must however be compatible with this first
occurrence: referring to the same compounds in the same order
5.8 ZOOMING A PFD
Use the zooming buttons to zoom in, out or adjust the viewing area so that the whole PFD
fits into it.
5.9 PRINTING A PFD
Use the command File|Print to print the current PFD. Additional information like the PFD name or
the date and time will be printed, according to the settings of the Configuration Notebook.
You can preview the print File|Print Preview or print to a file with File|Print to File…
You can also print all PFDS in one shot (File|Print all PFDs).
SECTION 6: THE UNITS

The concept of UNIT covers several aspects:
the UNIT TYPE defines the way an equipment is modelled by ValiEngine : EEXVAL and
HTXVAL are for example two types of UNITS allowing to model heat exchangers. The
UNIT TYPE is selected at creation time; it cannot be changed afterwards, except by deleting
the UNIT and creating a new one
the UNIT SYMBOL is the way the UNIT is shown in a PFD. According to the type of UNIT,
one or several symbols can be used. The choice of a UNIT symbol also defines the number
and type of connections that the UNIT can have. For example, several heat exchangers
symbols can be used for UNITS of type EEXVAL, with a various number of connected
STREAMS (up to ten inlets and outlets)
the HOT-SPOTS of a symbol are its possible connections and are identified by a little
square that shows up when creating or reconnecting STREAMS. The HOT-SPOTS also
defines the type of connection that can be created: inlet, outlet or both; and type of
STREAM : material, mechanical or thermal
the symbol used for a UNIT can be changed at any time (when in EDIT Mode On).
However, you can only select between the symbols that are compatible with the already
existing connections
6.1 UNIT STATUS : ON/OFF/OUT
Each UNIT has a STATUS that can be set (from ValiModeller or from MEA files) as:
ON: the unit is operated normally (default status)
OFF: the UNIT does exist but is currently shutdown so that nothing flows to or from it. As
a consequence, the streams connected to that unit will be shutdown as well. In turn the
fact that some streams are OFF can propagate to other units, and so forth
OUT: The UNIT is considered as not existing at all. STREAMS connected only to units that
are OUT becomes OUT themselves, which means that they will not be part of the model
during the next run
6.2 UNIT NOTEBOOK
The UNIT Notebook has several pages: General, Parameters, Tags and Flex code. Depending on the
UNIT type, some other pages may be accessed: Control Tags, REACTIONS, Others, Composition and
Strapping.
The General page displays the UNIT name, type and comment, its status (On, Off or Out) for the next
and for the last run, as well as its graphical information: symbol, position, size and orientation.
On the right side a number of drop-down boxes define various UNITS settings like the type of
equations that will be generated (parameter MODE).
Clicking on the PFD button opens the PFD containing the UNIT.
FIGURE 17 - THE GENERAL PAGE OF A UNIT NOTEBOOK
The Parameters page allows you to edit the operating conditions of the UNIT like the load or heat
transfer coefficient of a heat exchanger.
On the lower part of the page, two tables show the incoming and outgoing streams. Some
parameters that are linked to the inlet or outlet streams are sometimes displayed in these tables, like
for example the pressure drop setting for the outlet streams. Clicking on the stream names opens
their notebook.
The UNIT parameters have various roles. They can be:
Input: this parameter is defined by the user
Measurable: a measurement can be defined on this parameter
Measured: a measurement is defined on this parameter
Result: the value is calculated by ValiEngine
Attention: Some unit parameters also appear as drop down boxes in the General page.(MODE: type
of equations) or in the table of the REACTIONS or Others page.
FIGURE 18 - THE PARAMETERS PAGE OF A UNIT NOTEBOOK
The Tags page is used to display and update the values of the measurements associated with the
unit.
When in Edit mode, the New, Copy, Move, Edit, Rename and Delete buttons allow modifying the
definitions of the tags (See section "The tags" below for more information on the handling of tags).
The Details button toggles the display of the tags details in the bottom part of the screen freeing more
room to display additional tags in the main table.
The Mask combo-box combo box allows displaying only tags where filters, compensations or
bounds are defined.
The whole tag line will be highlighted in color if the measurement is either significantly corrected,
suspicious, has been filtered or has been eliminated by the Gross Error Elimination procedure (If the
color highlighting is activated).
The Tags page is divided into seven sub-pages:
Measurement: values associated to the tags. Use the "Data" combo box to switch between
Default, Measured and Used values
Definition: plant name, Database name and definition of measurement: related object and
corresponding parameter
Bounds:.bounds defined on the tag (SL, LL, L, H, HH, SH)
Filters: filtering settings
Compens: compensation settings
KPI: used to define a tag as a KPI
Historian: settings for the import and export to historians and to ValiDatabase
Attention: You can click on the fields of the table header to change the sorting order of the list of
tags.
FIGURE 19 - THE TAGS |MEAS UREMENTS PAGE OF A UNIT NOTEBOOK
The REACTIONS page is used for the reactors of type RCTVAL, RLVVAL, RKPVAL and RKIVAL.
You modify the list of reactions by transferring them between the "Used" list and the "Defined" list
through the use of the buttons. Multiple select is supported.
Use the buttons to reorder the reactions.
FIGURE 20 - THE REACTIONS PAGE OF A UNIT NOTEBOOK
The Others page is used to display and update the values of some more parameters, like the
characteristics of the three different regions of a steam condensing preheater.
FIGURE 21 - THE OTHERS PAGE OF A UNIT NOTEBOOK
The Flex code page is used to display and update additional user equations defined in Flex code.
On units of type FLXVAL the calculated value is stored in one of the parameters of the unit, which
can then be "measured".
On other units, the calculated value will be set to zero, defining an additional constraint.
A detailed description of the Flex code can be found in chapter "Flex language description". See also
the description of unit FLXVAL.
FIGURE 22 - THE FLEX CODE PAGE OF A UNIT NOTEBOOK
The Composition page is used only for storage tanks with variable composition.
The table displays the composition (on weight basis) at the beginning and at the end of the validation
time window.
FIGURE 23 - THE COMPOS ITION PAGE OF A UNIT NOTEBOOK
The Strapping page is used only for storage tanks.
The strapping table enables to convert tank dips (expressed in level or level %) to inventories (on
volume or mass basis).
FIGURE 24 - THE S TRAPPING PAGE OF A UNIT NOTEBOOK
6.3 CREATING A UNIT
To create a UNIT, you must be in Edit mode On (Options|Edit mode) and have opened the PFD
where the UNIT must be created.
select the Edit|Add UNIT menu command, or right-click in the PFD and select Add UNIT
click at the place where you want to create the UNIT
in the Define New UNIT dialog box, select the category and type of equipment and
optionally update the name of the unit
FIGURE 25 - THE DEFINE NEW UNIT DIALOG BOX
press the OK button
the UNIT NOTEBOOK is then activated
select the appropriate symbol and its orientation
you can optionally review the parameters of the UNIT or define reactions and tags if
relevant
click the OK button to confirm the creation of the UNIT or the CANCEL button to abort the
operation
Attention:
1. Pressing the Escape key while creating a UNIT aborts the operation.
2. You can copy some (or all) settings from another unit of the same type via the Copy From button
in the unit Notebook.
3. If you have activated the Add Multiple Objects option, then the Define new UNIT dialog box will
open again.
You can also create a UNIT by replicating an existing unit.
right click the existing unit
select the Copy command
click at the place where you want to create the UNIT (in the same or in another PFD)
a unit is automatically created with a default name (based on the prefix)
The measurements on the unit will be copied as well.
6.4 MOVING AND SIZING UNITS
You move a UNIT by:
selecting the UNIT and dragging its symbol (with the mouse or the arrow keys). You can
select several objects in one shot by including them in a rectangle
changing its position in the General page of its Notebook
right-clicking the UNIT Symbol and selecting the Move to other PFD command. Click in
another PFD to move the UNIT into this PFD
You re-size UNITS symbols by:
selecting the UNIT, clicking on the edge of the button and dragging the border
changing the X and Y size in the Notebook. The default check box allows you to restore the
default size of the symbol
You can move the UNIT name as follows:
select the unit name by clicking on it (or by selecting the Select Name command in the unit
right-click menu)
drag the unit name with the mouse or with the arrow keys
or:
change the X and Y name position in the Notebook. The default check box allows you to
restore the default position of the name
or you can reset its default position:
right-click the UNIT Symbol or Name and select the Auto position Name command
6.5 DELETING UNITS
To delete a UNIT:
select the UNIT
Alternatively you can also select the Delete option from the Menu activated by right clicking on the
unit.
Attention:
1. When deleting a UNIT, all the STREAMS that are connected only to this UNIT are also deleted.
2. Depending of your configuration settings, you will be asked to confirm the deletion.
unit.
6.6 RENAMING UNITS
To delete a unit:
right-click the UNIT
select the Rename option
enter the new name
check the auto-rename tag definitions box to automatically rename the tags associated
with the unit
press the OK button
Alternatively you can also use the Rename button from the UNIT Notebook.
6.7 CREATING A FLEX PROGRAM FROM AN EXTERNAL FILE
The Flex code associated to a unit is normally edited directly in the Flex code page of the unit
notebook.
However, the Flex code can also be defined in an external file as follows:
define the unit of type FLXVAL
write your FLEX program in a separate file and encapsulate it between the following two
lines:
&&&COMMENT <unit>
&&&END
where <unit> is the unit name
when starting your model with ValiEngine enter the name of the file into the
corresponding field
Attention:
1. When ValiEngine saves the results after a successful run, the Flex program is written into the
MODEL FILE file. The program is then kept for further runs and the option -rea does no longer
have to be used anymore.
2. To modify the Flex program of a unit, you must reload it or edit it from the Flex code page.
SECTION 7: THE STREAMS

There are three types of STREAMS: material, mechanical and thermal. As for UNITS, STREAM data
are accessed via a Notebook.
Each STREAM can connect a maximum of two UNITS, going from one UNIT to the other one. Three
cases are therefore possible:
the STREAM is an inlet of one UNIT
the STREAM is an outlet of one UNIT
the STREAM is an outlet of one UNIT and an inlet of an other UNIT. These two UNITS can
be in two different PFDs
7.1 STREAM NOTEBOOK
The Notebooks of thermal and mechanical STREAMS have a General and a Tags page. In addition,
material STREAMS have a Composition page. The top line of the Notebook indicates the origin and
destination of the STREAMS.
The General page presents the STREAM name and status (ON, OFF or OUT) and its parameters. For
material STREAMS, the page also displays the associated THERMOD, the STREAM state and
initialization mode as well as information relevant to products balancing:
Product code to be used for the following run and used during the previous run.
Movement type.
Sub-Movement type.
The movement type can be any of the following:
NONE: the stream will not be considered in any product balance.
AUTO: the stream will be part of the product balance and considered as production,
consumption etc… depending on the units it is connected to.
TANK_CHARGE, TANK_RUNDOW, PRODUCTION, CONSUMPTION, IMPORT, EXPORT,

TRANSFER : selects the corresponding movement type.
When a stream goes from Zonefrom to Zoneto, its Movement Type (unique) results in multiple
actions:
ZONEFROM/TO MVT_TYPE ACTION
X/Y PRODUCTION Add to TRAN-OUT(ZoneFrom)
Add to TRAN-IN (ZoneTo)
Add to PRODUCTION (ZoneFrom)
X/Y CONSUMPTION Add to TRAN-OUT(ZoneFrom)
Add to CONSUMPTION (ZoneTo)
X/Y TANK_CHARGE Add to TRAN-OUT(ZoneFrom)
Add to TANK_CHARGE (ZoneTo)
X/Y TANK_RUNDOWN Add to TRAN-OUT(ZoneFrom)
Add to TANK_RUNDOWN (ZoneFrom)
X/Y IMPORT Add to IMPORT (ZoneTo)
X/Y EXPORT Add to EXPORT (ZoneFrom)
X/Y TRANSFER Add to TRAN-OUT(ZoneFrom)
TABLE 1 - MOVEMENT TYPES
The sub-movement type is linked to a movement type. For instance, a Movement of type EXPORT,
defined as a stream going out to nowhere, from a unit or a tank, could be split into 3 sub-movements,
for example: SHIPMENT, LOSSES and other real EXPORT.
The sub-movement must be defined manually through ValiModeller or through a measurement file.
Clicking on the PFD button(s) with the origin and destination PFDs opens the corresponding PFDs.
FIGURE 26 - THE GENERAL PAGE OF A S TREAM NOTEBOOK
For material STREAMS, the Composition page displays the composition in terms of partial rates and
fractions, on a molar and on a weight basis.
The molar and weight fractions as well as the total rates can be modified by the user and will be used
as starting point for the next run.
The total flow rates can also be edited from the General page.
FIGURE 27 - THE COMPOS ITION PAGE OF A S TREAM NOTEBOOK
The Tags page is used to display and update the values of the measurements associated with the
stream.
When in Edit mode, the New, Copy, Move, Edit, Rename and Delete buttons allow modifying the
definitions of the tags.
The Mask combo-box combo box allows displaying only tags where filters, compensations or
bounds are defined.
The whole tag line will be highlighted in color if the measurement is either significantly corrected,
suspicious, has been filtered or has been eliminated by the Gross Error Elimination procedure (If the
color highlighting is activated).
The Tags page is divided into seven sub-pages:
Measurement: values associated to the tags. Use the "Data" combo box to switch between
Definition: plant name, Database name and definition of measurement: related object and
corresponding parameter
Historian: settings for the import and export to historians and to ValiDatabase
Attention:
1. You can click on the fields of the table header to change the sorting order of the list of tags.
2. See section "The Tags" for more information on the handling of tags.
FIGURE 28 - THE TAGS /MEAS UREMENTS PAGE OF A S TREAM NOTEBOOK
7.2 CREATING A STREAM
To create a STREAM, you must be in EDIT mode and have already opened the PFD(s) where the
STREAM must be created.
Depending on the status of the Add multiple objects option, you can either create the streams one by
one via the Edit|Add STREAM menu (add single stream) or create a number of streams in one shot.
In the latter case, the Define New STREAM dialog box re-appears after each stream creation.
select the Edit|Add STREAM command
FIGURE 29 - THE DEFINE NEW S TREAM DIALOG BOX
select the Type of STREAM: material, mechanical or thermal
if creating a material STREAM, select the THERMOD
press the OK button
the outlet hot-spots which are compatible with that type of STREAM are then activated in
the current PFD and the mouse pointer is replaced by a cross
enter the stream connections as indicated below:
for a STREAM coming out of a UNIT:
click on a unit outlet hot-spot.
click again at the same place, to terminate the stream creation or, if needed add
fixed points to the stream by clicking at the required points in the PFD and
terminate the stream creation by double clicking on the last point
for a STREAM going from one unit to another UNIT:
click on a hot-spot of the origin unit
if needed add fixed points to the stream by clicking at the required points in the PFD
if needed activate the PFD containing the destination unit
click on a hot-spot of the destination unit
for a STREAM going into a UNIT
toggles destination hot-spots by pressing the space bar
if needed add fixed points to the stream by clicking at the required points in the PFD
click on a hot-spot of the destination unit
the STREAM NOTEBOOK is then activated
you can copy the stream settings from another stream, using the Copy From button
you can also review the parameters and measurements of the STREAM
click the OK button to confirm the creation of the STREAM or the CANCEL button
to abort the operation
Attention: Pressing the Escape key while creating a STREAM aborts the operation.
A STREAM name box is automatically created. The STREAM name box can be moved by selecting it
and dragging it (with the mouse or the arrows) to any place. Once moved, the button becomes static.
This means that it does not move when moving the UNITS where the STREAM is connected. Use the
Autodraw or the Auto position name command to restore the automatic STREAM Button
positioning.
7.3 REDRAWING AND RECONNECTING STREAMS
Attention: Take care that reconnecting streams to units can affect their connection order. This can in
turn change the meaning of unit parameters such as REFDP, DPi, VFRACi, etc.
To redraw a STREAM automatically, keeping its existing connections:
right-click the STREAM box or any section of the stream line
select the Auto-draw option: all points entered for the STREAM are deleted and the
STREAM is redrawn
To redraw a STREAM manually, keeping its existing connections, or changing its final connection:
right-click the STREAM button
select the Disconnect To option
right-click again and select the Autodraw option: all points entered for the STREAM are
deleted
enter new points
terminate your input by clicking on the hot-spot where the STREAM must be connected
To add a connection for a STREAM:
select the Connect From or the Connect To option
enter fix points (if needed)
click on the hot-spot where the STREAM must be connected
To reconnect a STREAM:
select the Reconnect To or Reconnect From option: the corresponding connection and the
points of the STREAM are deleted; you can then enter the new connection
To Disconnect a STREAM:
select the Disconnect To or Disconnect From option
7.4 DELETING STREAMS
To delete a STREAM:
select the STREAM by clicking its box or any section of its line
stream.
7.5 RENAMING STREAMS
To rename a stream:
right-click the STREAM box or any section of its line
select the Rename option
enter the new name
with the stream
press the OK button
7.6 NAVIGATING BETWEEN PFDs
When a stream has connections in two different PFDs, you can easily go from one PFD to another:
right-click the STREAM button or any section of its line
select the From PFD (or the To PFD) option
SECTION 8: THE TAGS

Tags can be defined either:in the model itself, using the New, Copy, Move and Edit buttons of the
Tags page of the UNITS and STREAMS Notebooks or in a separate file, called a TAG file (see Using
TAG Files). You must be in Edit mode to create or modify Tags in the model itself.
The Tags Notebook is divided into seven pages:
Measurements: values associated to the tags. Use the "Data" combo box to switch between
Definition: related object and corresponding parameter; failure probability, bound control
settings
Historian: plant name, DB name and other settings for the import and export to historians
and to ValiDatabase
Attention:
1. See Process Measurements for more information on measurements
2. See also section Viewing and editing Measurements Values below
8.1 SETS OF VALUES ASSOCIATED TO A TAG
In a model, four sets of values and precisions are attached to each tag:
the default value and its precision, which are the values as defined in the model (or in the
tag file) by the user
the measured value and its precision, which are initially set to the default values but can
be overwritten by values coming from measurement files (MEA files) by ValiEngine
the used value and its precision, which are the values actually used during the
reconciliation step. They are initialized to the measured values but can be overwritten by
filters, compensation algorithms or control strings
the reconciled value and its precision as validated by ValiEngine
FIGURE 4 - THE TAG VALUES
In addition, ValiEngine will calculate for each tag:
the apparent penalty: calculated on the basis of the measured value:
the penalty: calculated on the basis of the used value, can be selected (through the
mathematical unit OPTVAL) as being either the measurement penalty, the correction
penalty or the measurement impact:
Impact = decrease in total penalty when setting the measurement OFF
the gain: which expresses the accuracy improvement and is calculated on the basis of the
reconciled and the used accuracies:
8.2 CREATING NEW TAGS
To create a new tag, press the New key in the Tags page of the corresponding unit or stream.
FIGURE 30 - THE NEW PAGE OF THE TAGS NOTEBOOK
To create a new tag:
select the type of Tag in the table labeled "Available in…"
if necessary, complete the information from the secondary table, like for example the
compounds for composition measurements
press the button to confirm the creation of the Tag or press the button to confirm
the creation of the Tag and to open the edition window and update values
Attention: if a Tag with the same name already exists, a new unique name is automatically
generated.
You can create several tags in a row. When all tags have been defined, press the OK button to close
the window.
8.3 EDITING TAGS
You access the Edit window by clicking on the Edit button of the Tags page of the UNITS and
STREAMS Notebook or by double-clicking the tag name in the Tag Notebook.
The Edit window displays all the values associated to a tag:
name of the tag
name to be used when acquiring the tag value through ValiLink
related plant
definition of the tag
physical units
default value, accuracy and failure probability factor. The failure probability is a
weighting factor for the gross error elimination procedure. Use higher factor to increase
the probability that the measurement will be removed. Use a failure probability of 0 to
prevent any elimination
filter settings (see more information below)
bounds: 3 levels are considered for both High and Low bounds:
warning (L -> H): a warning message will be issued if the measured or the validated
values are outside this range
error (LL -> HH): an error message will be issued if the measured or the validated
values are outside this range. (ValiFilter uses these bounds)
solver (SL -> SH): a fatal error occurs if the measured value is outside this range. The
validated value will be kept between these bounds
compensation settings (see more information below)
KPI settings: all tags specified as "KPI" will be printed out in the html report with their
reconciled and their target value. The settings also enable calculating the raw value and
precision of the KPI, as calculated on basis of measured values
tag comment
The Tag Comment will be printed out in the html (or r4v) reports. This comment can also be used to
define control strings, to carry out various actions depending on the measured values, and
sometimes validated value, of a given Tag: issuing messages, replacing the measured value by
another value or changing its accuracy. (See more information in the section Using Control Strings
below).
FIGURE 31 - THE EDIT PAGE OF A TAG
FILTER SETTINGS
Filters are configured as follows:
Measured defines the action on the measured value and can be:
NONE: no action is taken
BND: the measured value is replaced by the activated bound
DEF: the measured value is replaced by the default value
MID: the measured value is replaced by the average of the bounds (LL+HH)/2
LAST: the measured value is replaced by the validated value (as obtained during the last
successful and saved run)
Value: the measured value is replaced by the given value
Accuracy and Type defines the action on the accuracy and can be:
OFF: the tag is set OFF
DEF: the accuracy is replaced by the default value
MID: the accuracy is replaced by half the difference between the bounds (HH-LL)/2
Value: the accuracy is replaced by the given value
Failure Probability defines the action on the Failure probability and can be:
Value: the failure probability is replaced by the given value
CutOff: if the measured value is below the specified value, the corresponding object (STREAM
orUNIT) will be set OFF.
COMPENSATION SETTINGS
The compensation mechanism corrects measured values which are known to be deviating:
because of varying operating conditions of the sensor against reference conditions
be cause of an ide ntifie d bias of the me asure d value
The compensation factor is defined as follows:
Yused = Ymeasured . COMPENS + BIAS
Where:
Yused: is the compensated value
Ymeasured: is the measured value
COMPENS: is a proportional compensation factor
BIAS: is a constant bias
Depending on the compensation mode, COMPENS can be a constant user given value or can be
calculated from a compensation correlation in function of operating and reference conditions (AREF,
BREF and CREF).
COMPENSATION MODE DESCRIPTION
NONE No compe nsation (de fault)
Use r give n COMPENS and BIAS

BIAS
Can be use d for any type of me asure me nt
Differential Pressure Flow Meter
(Orifice, Venturi, Nozzle, etc.)
COMPENSATION MODE DESCRIPTION
COLDVOLF
MASSF MOLF
CONVVOLF
DP_D15 (liquid flow)
AREF=re f. de nsity at 15°C (kg/m3)
BREF=re f. de nsity at flow T,p
CREF=re f. MW
DP_D0 (gas flow)
AREF=re f. de nsity at 0°C (kg/Nm3) Not available
DP_TPD0 (gas flow)
AREF=re f. te mpe rature (K)

Not available
BREF=re f. pre ssure (bara)
CREF=re f. de nsity at 0°C (kg/Nm3)
DP_TPMW (gas flow)
AREF=re f. te mpe rature (K)

Not available
BREF=re f. pre ssure (bara)
CREF=re f. MW (kg/kmol)
Volumetric flow meter
(Vortex, Turbine, etc.)
COLDVOLF
MASSF MOLF
CONVVOLF
VOL_D15 (liquid flow)
AREF=re f. de nsity at 15°C (kg/m3)
CREF=re f. MW
TABLE 2 - COMPENS ATION MODES
8.4 COPYING TAGS FROM EXISTING OBJECTS
The Copy Tags page presents in the left table (Defined in…) the existing tags and in the right table the
tags defined in the object specified as "Origin".
FIGURE 32 - THE COPY TAG DEFINITIONS DIALOG BOX
select the object from which you want to copy the tags
select the tags to be copied (multiple select is supported)
press the button or press the button to edit the copied tag
Default names will automatically be given to the copied tags. If needed, you can then rename them
with the Rename button.
You can use the other buttons, to adjust the selection of tags to be copied:
to copy all tags
to remove a tag that has been copied
to remove all tags that have been copied
8.5 MOVING TAGS FROM EXISTING OBJECTS
The Move Tags page presents in the upper left table (Defined in…) the existing tags and in the upper
right table the tags defined in the object specified as "Origin".
FIGURE 33 - THE MOVE TAG DEFINITIONS DIALOG BOX
select the object from which you want to move the tags
select the tags to be moved (multiple select is supported)
press the button OR press the button to edit the moved tag
You can use the other buttons, to adjust the selection of tags to be moved:
to move all tags
to remove a tag that has been moved
to remove all tags that have been moved
8.6 VIEWING AND EDITING MEASUREMENTS VALUES
The Tools|Measurements command displays the list of tags that are currently defined in the model.
When in Edit mode, the New, Copy, Move, Edit, Rename and Delete buttons allow to modify the
definitions of the tags as described here above. You can also Edit a tag by double-clicking its name.
The Mask combo box allows you to display only tags where filters, compensations or bounds are
defined.
The fields on the second line of the window are masks that you can use to reduce the number of tags
that are presented in the table (in the example below only the temperature measurements are
shown):
Name: this mask applies on the tags name
Type: the type of the tags (pressure, temperature, etc.)
PFD: the name of the PFD containing the object
Strem/Unit: the name of the object where tags are specified
You can also click on the column headers to change the order in which the tags are listed
THE MEASUREMENTS PAGE

This is the main page where you can define and display the values associated to a tag. The "Data"
combo box is used to switch between Default, Measured and Used values.
FIGURE 34 - THE MEAS UREMENTS PAGE OF TAGS WINDOW
THE DEFINITION PAGE

You can update here the failure probability and the bounds control settings.
Bound Control is used to activate bound control mechanism on one or both bounds:
SL: bound control on the lower solver bound
SH: bound control on the upper solver bound
BOTH: bound control on the both solver bounds
Criteria is the minimum distance at which the variable must be kept wit respect to the bound. It can
be specified as a value or as AUTO in which case, the minimum distance is automatically selected
according to the type of variable.
FIGURE 35 - THE DEFINITION PAGE OF TAGS WINDOW
THE BOUNDS PAGE

This page enables to modify the bounds. 3 levels are considered for both high and low bounds:
warning (L -> H): a warning message will be issued if the measured or the validated values
are outside this range
error (LL -> HH): an error message will be issued if the measured or the validated values
are outside this range. (ValiFilter uses these bounds)
solver (SL -> SH): a fatal error occurs if the measured value is outside this range. The
validated value will be kept between these bounds
FIGURE 36 - THE BOUNDS PAGE OF TAGS WINDOW
THE FILTERS PAGE

This page defines the Filter settings (a ValiFilter license required) as described in paragraph Filters
Settings above.
FIGURE 37 - THE FILTERS PAGE OF TAGS WINDOW
THE COMPENSATIONS PAGE

This page defines the Compensation settings as described in paragraph Compensation Settings
above.
FIGURE 38 - THE COMPENS PAGE OF TAGS WINDOW
THE KPI PAGE
FIGURE 39 - THE KPI PAGE OF TAGS WINDOW
Tags defined as KPI (Mode = "ON" or "CALC") are gathered in a specific table in the html report. The
target value is only used as an indication of the KPI expected value.
Setting the mode as "CALC" indicates you want ValiEngine to calculate what would be the value and
accuracy of the KPI when calculated on basis of the measured values. This mode can only be used for
tags calculated through a Flex code involving only measured values (using the function CALL
GTVARTAG (…)).
This enables to quantify the benefit of the reconciliation on the correctness and uncertainty of the
KPI.
FIGURE 40 - THE KPI TABLE IN THE HTML REPORT
THE HISTORIAN PAGE

The Historian page defines tags settings related to ValiLink and ValiDatabase:
Plant: Plant defining the direct access historian server
DB name: Name of the tag in the historian server
ReadDB: Aggregation for the tag value to be acquired from the historian:
None: no acquisition
Average: average over the validation time window
BeginDate: value at the beginning of the validation time window
EndDate: value at the end of the validation time window
Min: minimum value over the time window
Max: maximum value over the time window
Mean: arithmetic average of all the stored values over the time window
WriteDB: Tags to be written back to the historian:
None: no value returned
Suffix_V: the validated value will be returned to the historian, adding the suffix _V to
the tag name
ValiDB: Che ck-box to se le ct the tags to be e xporte d to ValiDabase through the arc file
Aggre gation: consolidation mode for ValiRe port:
AVG: average over the validation time window
Sum: sum over the validation time window
Begin: value at the beginning of the validation time window
End: value at the end of the validation time window
FIGURE 41 - THE HIS TORIAN PAGE OF TAGS WINDOW
8.7 USING CONTROL STRINGS
INTRODUCTION TO CONTROL STRINGS

The Control Strings are used to carry out various actions depending on the measured, and sometimes
validated value of a given Tag. The syntax is:
&1"STRING1"to define a control string for messages
&2"STRING2"to define a control string for the measured value
&3"STRING3"to define a control string for the accuracy
The three control strings have the same syntax:

ACTION1(CONDITION1), ACTION2(CONDITION2), ETC.
The string is processed sequentially. If Condition1 is satisfied then Action1 is taken. The second pair
Action2(Condition2) is then normally processed. If Condition2 is met then Action2 is taken, etc.
Actions defined without Condition are always performed.
The CONDITION can be:
(<number): satisfied if measured value < number (Number can also be SL,LL, or L)
(>number): satisfied if measured value > number (Number can also be SH, HH or H)
(number): satisfied if measured value = number ± e (e is taken as the maximum of 1.10 -6 and
|measurement|.10 -6 )
(num1,num2): satisfied if num1 < measured value < num2
(OFF): satisfied if measurement is off
(CST): satisfied if measurement is considered constant
The ACTION commands depend on the type of control string.
CONTROL STRINGS FOR MESSAGES

Message control strings are processed twice:
before the resolution, using measured values to evaluate the Condition
afte r the re solution, using validate d value s to e valuate the Conditions
The ACTION can be:
'message': print message in <model>.r1v and <model>.r4v files
OK: stop processing string. This interrupts the normal sequential processing of the string.
Further conditions are no more evaluated and their actions are ignored.
Example:
&1"'VERY LOW'(<380),'LOW'(380,400),'HIGH'(460,480),'VERY HIGH'(>480)"
Assuming the measured value of this Tag (named TI-001) is 378.4 °c and the validated value is 383.2 °
c.
The message: "TI-001 (378.4 C): VERY LOW " is printed at the beginning of the files
The message :"TI-001 (383.2 C): LOW " is printed at the end of the files
CONTROL STRINGS FOR MEASURED VALUE

Control strings for measured value are processed before the resolution. The conditions are processed
by using the measured value, and when a condition is satisfied, its associated action is activated and
modifies the used value of the Tag.
The ACTION can be:
number: set measurement value to number
DEF: set measurement value to the default value (as defined in the model)
VAL: restore original measured value
CUTOFF: the stream or unit is set OFF
OK: stop processing the string. This interrupts the normal processing of the string.
Further conditions are no more evaluated and their actions are ignored
Example:
&2"DEF(<380),400(380,400),460(460,480),DEF(>480)"
This would replace the measured value by the default value whenever the measurement value is
below 380 or above 480. If the measured value lies between 380 and 400, it will be replaced by 400. If
it lies between 460 and 480, it will be replaced by 460.
If the measured value of this Tag (named TI-001) is 378.4 °C, the default value of the Tag TI-001 will be
used in place of the actual value.
CONTROL STRINGS FOR ACCURACY

Control strings for accuracy are processed before the resolution. The conditions are processed using
the measured value of the Tag, and when a condition is satisfied, its associated action is activated
and modifies the used accuracy.
The ACTION can be:
number: set the accuracy to number (a negative number corresponds to a relative

precision expressed in %)
DEF: set accuracy to the default value
VAL: restore original accuracy
OFF: turn measurement off
CST: consider measurement as a constant
OK: stop processing string. This interrupts the normal sequential processing of the string.
Further conditions are no more evaluated and their actions are ignored
Example:
&3"OFF(<380),50(380,400),50(460,480),OFF(>480)"
This will turn off the measurement if its measured value lies outside the range 380 to 480. It also puts
an accuracy of 50 if the measured value lies between 380 and 400 or 460 and 480.
An equivalent syntax would be: &3"OFF,50(380,480),VAL(400,460)"
The measurement is first turned off. Then, if the measured lies between 380 and 480, it is turned on
again with accuracy of 50. Finally, if the measured value lies between 400 and 460, the measured
accuracy is restored.
A third equivalent syntax would be: &3"OK(400,460),50,OFF(<380),OFF(>480)"
The OK action stops the processing of the string if the measured value lies between 400 and 460.
Otherwise, it applies a value of 50 to the accuracy and turns the measurement off if it is below 380 or
above 480.
Attention: the action OK with no (condition) allows to temporarily de-activate a string without
having to retype it when you want to reactivate it : OK,OFF(<380),50(380,400),50(460,480),OFF(>480)
In this case, the action OK is always processed which stops processing the string that is thus de-
activated. To reactivate the string, simply remove the OK action.
COLOR HIGHLIGHTING AND TAGS

The Command Tools|Highlight Measurements enable to flag the PFDs, UNITS and STREAMS with
different colors:
None/All/Active ones: objects for which tags are defined (and active or not)
Pe nalty: obje cts for which some tags are e ithe r significantly corre cte d, suspicious, e liminate d or
filte re d
The coloring follows the following order: eliminated, filtered, suspicious, significant, measurement
active or existing. For example, a tag that has been filtered and eliminated will be colored as
eliminated.
The coloring system for penalty automatically propagates through PFDs containing the
corresponding objects.
SECTION 9: THE THERMODS

Each material STREAM refers to a THERMOD, which indicates:
the list of chemical components that can, but not necessarily do, appear in the STREAM
the the rmodynamic me thods that must be use d for various calculations
de pe nding on the the rmodynamic me thods, binary inte raction parame te rs
9.1 ACCESSING THE THERMODS NOTEBOOKS
To access the notebook of a THERMOD, double-click it in the Browse Tree or use the Find facility
The THERMOD Notebook has three active pages:
Compounds: to modify the list of compounds of the THERMOD
Methods: to modify the methods used for calculating STREAM properties
Binary Parameters: to modify the binary parameters of the THERMOD.
FIGURE 42 - THE COMPOUNDS PAGE OF A THERMOD NOTEBOOK
9.2 MODIFYING THERMODS
You modify the list of COMPOUNDS by transferring compounds between the "Used" list and the
"Defined" list through the use of the buttons. Multiple select is supported.
Use the to reorder the compounds.
You modify the Methods by using the drop-down list boxes for each phase property. The default
method button allows to reset the default methods.
FIGURE 43 - THE METHOD PAGE OF A THERMOD NOTEBOOK
To add new binary parameters, select the compounds, the method and the parameter, specify a value
and press the Add button.
The values of existing binary parameters can be changed directly in the table.
FIGURE 44 - THE BINARY PARAMETERS PAGE OF A THERMOD NOTEBOOK
9.3 CREATING THERMODS
To create a new THERMOD, select the Edit|Add THERMOD menu command.
FIGURE 45 - CREATING A THERMOD
The compounds page of the THERMOD notebook is then displayed. You can use the Copy From
button to copy the list of compounds, methods and binary parameters from another THERMOD.
9.4 RENAMING THERMODS
You can rename a THERMOD via the Rename button of its notebook or by right-clicking in the
Browse Tree and selecting the Rename command.
9.5 DELETING THERMODS
To delete a THERMOD, right-click it in the Browse Tree and select the Delete command.
Attention: you can only delete unused THERMODS. If some STREAMS are referring to this
THERMOD, then it cannot be deleted.
SECTION 10: THE COMPOUNDS

COMPOUNDS data can be accessed via the COMPOUNDS section of the Browse Tree.
The General page of the COMPOUNDS notebook lets you review the data associated with the
compounds. Changing the values is however prohibited.
FIGURE 46 - THE GENERAL PAGE OF THE COMPOUND NOTEBOOK
10.1 ADDING COMPOUNDS TO A MODEL FILE
To add new compounds to the model, select the Edit|Add COMPOUND command.
Before adding a compound, you can first modify the default list of Available COMPOUNDS:
select another library of compounds. Five standard libraries are available:
Fluids.som: most common fluid compounds
Fluids.all: fluid compounds (complete Belsim data base)
Solids.all: solid compounds
Fuels.all: pseudo-compounds for fuel-oil and coal
Petrol.all: pseudo-compounds for petroleum fractions
Depending on your installation, one or several additional data bases might be available.
limit the number of available compounds by selecting a given Family (e.g. Paraffins or
Sulphur derivatives) in the Family field.
limit the number of available compounds by entering a given text in the Mask field. Only
the compounds which include that string will be shown.
modify the order in which the compounds are shown, by checking one of the check boxes
above the list. By default, compounds are sorted by their chemical formula.
FIGURE 47 - THE ADD COMPOUND NOTEBOOK
To add a compound:
click on one of the compounds shown in the list of Available compounds
press the Load key
Attention: if you want to compound with the same name as an existing one, you need first to
rename that compound.
10.2 REMOVING COMPOUNDS FROM A MODEL FILE
Only compounds that are not referenced in any REACTION or THERMOD can be removed. To remove
a compound:
right click on one of the compounds shown in the Browse Tree
10.3 RENAMING COMPOUNDS IN A MODEL FILE
To rename a compound:
right click on one of the compounds shown in the Browse Tree
with the compound
enter its new name
press the OK button
SECTION 11: THE REACTIONS

Reactors of type RCTVAL, RLVVAL, etc. refer to REACTIONS. Each REACTION is a separate object
and has:
a name
a comment
a stoichiometry: list of reactants and products with stoichiometric coefficients
further parameters describing the kinetics of the reaction (only used by RKIVAL unit)
Attention: REACTIONS are by default considered as reversible by VALI (when no kinetics is

involved). REACTIONS can be set as irreversible by setting adequate bounds on the corresponding
reaction extents variables. In this case you must use the new SQP solver.
11.1 ACCESSING REACTIONS NOTEBOOK
To access the notebook of a REACTION, double-click the reaction in the Browse Tree. Alternatively
you can also access the REACTIONS notebooks through the Find facility.
The REACTION Notebook has two active pages:
General: to modify the REACTION name, its comment and the list of reactants and
products and their stoichiometric coefficient
Parameters: to modify the kinetic parameters of the reactions. (These parameters are only
used by RKIVAL units)
FIGURE 48 - THE GENERAL PAGE OF THE REACTIONS NOTEBOOK
11.2 MODIFYING THE STOICHIOMETRY OF REACTIONS
To change the stoichiometry of a reaction:
transfer compounds between the list of available compounds, reactants and products with
the and buttons
modify the stoichiometric coefficient by changing the value in the coefficient field
The equation with the coefficients and compounds is automatically updated. At your convenience
you can copy and paste it in the comment field of the reaction.
Use the buttons to reorder the variables.
11.3 MODIFYING THE KINETICS OF REACTIONS
To modify the kinetics of a reaction:
activate the Parameters page of the REACTION Notebook
modify the various parameters
press the OK button
FIGURE 49 - THE REACTION PARAMETERS NOTEBOOK
The description of the kinetics of a reaction is only taken into account by the RKIVAL unit. This
description can be partially overwritten by a Flex code attached to the unit (see section "Using Flex
for defining kinetics").The actual reaction velocities are defined as the product of two terms: a
velocity term Vi and an equilibrium term EI:
Ri Vi .E i
The equilibrium term Ei is expressed as:
n
X bjj
1 j 1
Ei 1 n
Ki
X ajj
j 1
Where:
aj and bj are respectively the stoichiometric coefficient of the reactants and of the products
Ki is the equilibrium constant of the reaction
Xj signification depends on the value of the parameter ETYPE:
ETYPE=1: Xj is the fugacity. The equilibrium constant is calculated from compound

properties.
ETYPE=2: same as 1, but the fugacity is calculated at the reactor inlet and kept constant
afterwards
ETYPE=3: Xj is the fugacity. The equilibrium constant is given by the user
ETYPE=4: same as 3, but the fugacity is calculated at the reactor inlet and kept constant
afterwards
ETYPE=5: Xj is the partial pressure. The equilibrium constant is given by the user.
ETYPE=6: Xj is the molar fraction. The equilibrium constant is given by the user.
ETYPE=7: Xj is the concentration (mole/l). The equilibrium constant is given by the user.
ETYPE=8: Ei = 1 (No equilibrium term)
When given by the user, the equilibrium constant has the following form:
ln (Ki) = KAi - KBi / T
Where:
T is the temperature (expressed in K) and KAi and KBi are given by the user
The velocity term Vi is expressed as:
n
Vi ki X cjj
j 1
Where:
cj is the order of the reaction of the different compounds
ki is the equilibrium constant of the reaction
Xj signification depends on the value of the parameter VTYPE:
VTYPE=1: Xj is the fugacity
VTYPE=2: same as 1, but the fugacity is calculated at the reactor inlet and kept constant
afterwards
VTYPE=3: Xj is the partial pressure
VTYPE=4: Xj is the molar fraction
VTYPE=5: Xj is the concentration (mole/l)
The velocity constant has the following form:
ln (ki) = K0i - ACT.ENi / R / T
Where:
T is the temperature (expressed in K), R the ideal gas constant and K0i and ACT.ENi are
given by the user.
The parameters DHR and TREF can be used to specify the heat of reaction in place of calculating it
from the heat of formation of the compounds.
Attention: In a given reactor, all reactions must be based on the same type of equilibrium equation
and of velocity equation (parameters ETYPE and VTYPE). Some reactions can however be
individually specified as type 8 (no equilibrium term).
11.4 CREATING REACTIONS
To create a new REACTION select the Edit|Add Reaction Menu command.
You can copy the data from another reaction with the Copy From button.
11.5 RENAMING REACTIONS
To rename a REACTION you can either use the Rename button in the REACTION notebook or right-
click the REACTION in the Browse Tree and select the Rename command.
11.6 DELETING REACTIONS
To delete a REACTION, right-click the REACTION in the Browse Tree and select the Delete command.
Attention: you can only delete unused REACTIONS. If some UNITS are referring to a given
REACTION, then it cannot be deleted.
SECTION 12: HANDLING PHYSICAL UNITS

Each parameter has its own Physical Units, which can be changed individually, via drop down
boxes.
12.1 CHANGING PHYSICAL UNITS
Clicking on the Physical UnitS section in the Browse Tree or selecting the Tools|Physical UnitS menu
command opens the Physical UnitS Notebook. In this notebook, you can modify the default physical
units for all the UNITS and STREAMS parameters and measurements. You can also modify the
number of digits to be shown after the decimal separator when displaying values in the Result boxes
.
FIGURE 50 - THE PHYS ICAL UNIT NOTEBOOK
The table displays the current defaults physical units used for each type of variable, as well as the
number of digits for result boxes. Any new object you will create will use the default physical units.
On the right side, a number of check boxes are presented:
Change Defaults: when checked, the new settings will apply to the new objects you will
create
Convert Values: when checked, the existing objects (unit and stream parameters) will be
converted to the new default physical units, if they are currently expressed in the previous
default units
Convert Tags: when checked, the existing tags will be converted to the new default
physical units, if they are currently expressed in the previous default units
Change Decimals: when checked, the existing result boxes values will be redisplayed using
the new default number of decimals
Attention: When using the Convert Values, only the variables that were using the old default
physical units will be updated. For example, when changing the default for pressure from bar to
atm, the pressures that are defined in bar will be converted in atm, but pressures defined in Pa,
mmHg or any other unit will be left unchanged.
12.2 CREATING NEW PHYSICAL UNITS
You can create your own physical units by pressing the New button in the Physical Unit Notebook.
FIGURE 51 - CREATING NEW PHYS ICAL UNIT
Enter the Physical Unit Name and the Conversion Factors to be used to convert the value from the
new physical unit to the default physical unit.
Check the Save as User Physical Unit check-box to save the settings in the user defaults file (usr/pud.
cfg file in VALI installation folder) and share it through different models and users.
User physical units are always saved in the model file as well, to ensure portability through different
installations.
SECTION 13: RESULT BOXES

Result boxes can be associated to PFDs units and streams to display their values directly in the flow-
sheet.
FIGURE 52 - THE RES ULT BOXES
13.1 RESULT BOXES NOTEBOOK
The Notebook is similar for PFDs, UNITS and STREAMS. In the example below a Result box linked to
a stream is shown.
In any Result box, you can display values related to the object to which the Result box is linked but
also values related to any other UNIT or STREAM.
For streams, you can display values related to parameters, composition (partial molar flow rates)
and measurements. For units, you can display values related to parameters and measurements.
The left side shows the Result box name, the PFD where it is located as well as the name of the object
to which it is linked. When the link check box is checked, the result box will be moved together with
the object. Otherwise its location is static.
The middle of the notebook ("What to show") indicates what information will be shown for each of
the selected variables listed below.
The right side of the notebook ("What to select") enables to add more variables to the result box.
Use the buttons to add or remove variables to the list of selected variables. Use the
buttons to reorder the variables.
FIGURE 53 - THE RES ULT BOX NOTEBOOK
13.2 CREATING RESULT BOXES
To create a new Result box:
open the PFD where the result box must be created
right click on a stream, unit or PFD
select the Create Results command
click at the place where you want to create the Result box
the Result notebook is then activated
select the values to be shown
press the OK button
13.3 DELETING RESULT BOXES
To delete a Result box:
right click the Result box
or:
click the Result box
press the Del key
SECTION 14: A PRACTICAL EXAMPLE

Before starting this example, you should be familiar with the basic functioning of ValiModeller, as
explained in the preceding sections.
14.1 THE EXAMPLE : A GAS TURBINE
The gas turbine is shown below.
FIGURE 54 - FLOW-S HEET OF THE EXAMPLE
It consists of the following devices :
a compressor: C-1
a burner: R-1
a turbine: T-1
a generator: G-1
The gas burned will be assumed to be pure methane. The other assumptions are summarized in
following table.
UNIT DATA VALUE ACCURACY PHYSICAL UNITS
R-1 DP 0.1 0.01 bar
C-1 EFFIC 77 5% %
T-1 EFFIC 80 5% %
TABLE 3 - AS S UMPTIONS OF THE EXAMPLE
Table below lists the available plant measurements and their accuracy.
STREAM DATA VALUE ACCURACY PHYSICAL UNITS
AIR.1 MF O2 21 CST mol%
AIR.1 MOLF 215000 5% Nm3/h
AIR.1 P 1.013 2% bar
AIR.1 T 15 1 C
AIR.2 P 20 2% bar
AIR.2 T 500 2 C
NG MOLF 6000 2% Nm3/h
NG P 20 2% bar
NG T 15 1 C
FUME.2 MF O2 14 2% mol%
FUME.2 P 1.02 2% bar
FUME.2 T 600 2 C
POWER POWER 16.1 1% MW
TABLE 4 - MEAS UREMENTS OF THE EXAMPLE
14.2 PRELIMINARY WORK
THE THERMODS
In this example, we need three different THERMODS:
Air
Gas (natural gas)
Fumes
These 3 THERMODS are defined by default in the file empty.bls. Therefore, no additional THERMOD
or compound that needs to be defined.
CHEMICAL REACTIONS
In our example, chemical REACTIONS could be defined for the combustion. We do not need however
to define them as the burner will be modeled by a BATVAL where atomic balances are considered
(balance by elements: C, H, O, N).
SELECTING THE UNITS MODELS

Our model will be made of four UNITS:
NAME TYPE DESCRIPTION
C-1 COMVAL compre ssor
R-1 BATVAL combustion chambe r
T-1 TURVAL turbine
G-1 BBXVAL black-box splitting the turbine powe r into a ne t powe r and the powe r
ne e de d for the compre ssor
TABLE 5 - UNITS OF THE EXAMPLE
14.3 DEFINING THE MODEL WITH VALIMODELLER
CREATING THE MODEL FILE

open (File|Open) the file Empty.bls
select the File|Save As command
enter a new name for the model, for example gt.bls
check that Edit mode is On to enable model modifications
activate also Options|Add Multiple Objects
CREATING THE PFD

select the Edit|Add PFD command to create a PFD
click anywhere in the MAIN to indicate the position
change the default name PFD1 by GT
press the OK button
CREATING THE UNITS

Figure below shows where to place the UNITS
FIGURE 55 - DEFINING THE UNITS
COMPRESSOR C-1
double-click the PFD GT to open it
select the Edit|Add Unit command
click in GT to specify the position of the Unit
select the Compressor COMVAL Unit and press OK
select symbol Compressor Up/Down
check the Mirror Horizontal and Vertical boxes
go into the Tags page
click the New button
select the EFFIC measurement in the right table
activate the measurement with the button
change the measured value to 77 %
click OK to accept changes in the Edit Window
click OK to create the Tag
click OK to create the Unit
COMBUSTION CHAMBER R-1

click in GT to specify the position of the Unit R-1
select the Reactor BATVAL Unit and press OK
select symbol Horizontal Reactor
select the pressure equation: DP variable
select the DP measurement in the right table
change the measured value to 0.1 bar
and the accuracy to 0.01 bar (Type A for absolute)
TURBINE T-1
select the Turbine TURVAL Unit and press OK
select symbol Turbine-Up/Down
check the Mirror Horizontal box
select the EFFIC measurement in the right table
change the measured value to 80 %
BLACK BOX G-1

select the Black box BBXVAL Unit, change the Unit name by G-1 and press OK
select symbol Black box
press ESC to stop the creation of units
SAVE YOUR WORK

select the File|Save command
should the History window appears (depending on your configuration settings), press the
Cancel button
CREATING THE STREAMS

Figure below will help you to create your Streams.
FIGURE 56 - DEFINING THE S TREAMS
STREAM AIR.1
select the Edit|Add Stream command
select Material stream and Thermod Air
change the name to AIR.1 and press OK
press the Space Bar key on your keyboard to activate the input hotspots
click on the inlet of the compressor C-1
In the Stream notebook go to the Tags page
select the T measurement in the right table
measured value: 15 C, accuracy: 1 C (Type A for absolute)
select the P measurement in the right table
measured value: 1.013 bar, accuracy: 2 % (Type % for relative)
select the MOLF measurement in the right table
measured value: 215000 Nm3/h, accuracy: 10 % (Type % for relative)
select the MF measurement in the right table and the compound O2
measured value: 21 % , accuracy: 0
click OK to create the Tags
click OK to create the Stream
STREAM AIR.2
select Material stream and Thermod Air
change the name to AIR.2 and press OK
click on the outlet of the compressor C-1
click on an inlet of the reactor R-1
In the Stream notebook go to the Tags page
measured value: 20 bar, accuracy: 2 % (Type % for relative)
STREAM NG
select Material stream and Thermod GAS
change the name to NG and press OK
press the Space Bar key on your keyboard to activate the input hotspots
click on an inlet of the reactor R-1
in the Stream notebook go to the Tags page
measured value: 20 bar, accuracy: 2 % (Type % for relative)
select the MOLF measurement in the right table
measured value: 6000 Nm3/h, accuracy: 2 % (Type % for relative)
select the MF measurement in the right table and the compound C1
measured value: 100 %, accuracy: 0 (Type % for relative)
STREAM FUME.1
select Material stream and Thermod FUMES
change the name to FUME.1 and press OK
click on the outlet of the reactor R-1
click on the inlet of the turbine T-1
STREAM FUME.2
select Material stream and Thermod FUMES
change the name to FUME.2 and press OK
click on the outlet of the turbine T-1
click again on the turbine
measured value:600 C, accuracy: 2 C (Type A for absolute)
measured value: 1.02 bar, accuracy: 2 % (Type % for relative)
select the MF measurement in the right table and the compound 02
measured value: 14 %, accuracy:2 % (Type % for relative)
STREAM W-1
select Mechanical stream and press OK
click on an outlet of the black box G-1
click on the compressor C-1
STREAM W-2
click on the mechanical outlet of the turbine T-1
click on an inlet of the black box G-1
STREAM POWER
click on an outlet of the black-box G-1
click again on the black-box
select the POWER measurement in the right table
measured value:16 100 kW, accuracy: 1 % (Type % for relative)
click CANCEL to stop creating new streams.
SAVE YOUR WORK

select the File|Save command
You are now ready to run your model as shown in following chapter.
CHAPTER 5
HOW TO RUN
YOUR DATA
VALIDATION
V
MODEL
In the previous chapter, you were introduced to ValiModeller GUI, which allows you to set-up and
prepare the data validation model.
In this chapter, you will now learn how to run this model.
Section 2 Running the model
This se ction shows how to start ValiEngine from ValiMode lle r GUI and to re vie w the
re sults. This se ction also shows how to run ValiEngine inde pe nde ntly from
ValiMode lle r GUI.
Section 3 Using TAG Files
The TAG file s are use d to de fine the me asure me nts by giving the m a name ,
indicating to which variable the y re fe r and de fining the ir pre cision.
Section 4 Using Measurement Files
MEA file s allows to e xchange information be twe e n your VALI mode l and the outside
words: ge tting on-line value s of the me asure me nts, changing starting point, se tting
OFF or OUT parts of a mode l, e xtracting re sults, writing re ports, e tc.
Section 5 The Sensitivity Analysis
Using the Se nsitivity Analysis tool, you can ide ntify how various me asure me nts
value s and pre cisions influe nce e ach othe r.
This se ction also de scribe s the mathe matical basis of VALI and its compliance to the
VDI-2048 guide line .
Section 6 Tricks and Tips
This se ction tackle s some typical proble ms e ncounte re d while using VALI like how to
initialise a mode l or how to solve conve rge nce proble ms.
Section 7 VALI Error Messages
The e rror and information facility handling of VALI is de scribe d. Additional

comme nts and re comme ndations are give n for some of those me ssage s.
SECTION 2: RUNNING THE MODEL

This section shows you how to run the model directly from the ValiModeller GUI or as a stand alone
application. It also indicates how to browse VALI result files and how to load VALI results back in
the interface.
2.1 STARTING VALIENGINE FROM VALIMODELLER GUI

To start VALI:
select the Application|Calculate menu command or click button
fill-in the fields of the Specify runtime options dialogue box
press the OK button
then optionally fill-in the Project history window
ValiEngine is then launched in a separate window (see below)
FIGURE 1 THE RUN VALI DIALOG BOX
Model selection: Name of the PFD or UNIT defining the model.
Measurements file: Name of the file containing the values of the measurements, as well as
unit parameters, initial values, report specifications, etc. (optional)
TAG file: Name of the TAG file (optional). When using a TAG file, the tags defined in the
model are ignored
Flexcode file: Name of the file containing flex code to be imported (optional)
A number of Runtime options can be specified through check boxes:
Use SQP solver (-SQP) (activated by default): ValiEngine will invoke the SQP-IP solver.
Allow additional iterations (-ITM) : ValEngine will ask for additional iterations if not
converged after the number of iterations specified in the OPTVAL - ITMAX parameter.
Mass Balance Only (-MBO): Only mass balances equations will be generated, for all units,
whatever the user has selected for the equations (parameter MODE, for example).
Additional equations created by OPXVAL units and Flex code will be kept.
VDI2048 compliant (-VDI): This option activates the VDI compliant mode of VALI (use of
95% confidence level, penalty defined on correction accuracy, sensitivity analysis for all
flagged variables, reports according to VDI 2048 guideline).
Sensitivity report (-SNS): After the run, a Sensitivity Analysis report will be generated.
Generate HTML file (-HTM) (activated by default): VALI will create HTML (Hyper Text
Meta Language) formatted files for the reports. A number of active fields allow to navigate
between the various sections of the reports, from streams to units, from and to TAG
definitions, etc.
Generate PRN file with stream data (-PRN): Vali will generate an Excel compatible file
with stream data.
Generate file for ValiReport (-ARC): VALI will produce a default ARC output file with the
measured and validated value and accuracy and the comments of all tags as well as the
date and time, the total penalty, the chi-square test value and sum of square of residues. If
defined, the contents of RUNDATE and INFOi records will be printed as well. This file can
directly be imported into ValiReport (see Output and Archive Files for more details about
Archive (ARC) files).
Don't save results (-NOS): The results will not be saved in the model file even if the run is
successful (-NOS).
Save reports in sub-directory (-SUB): The report files are generated in a sub-directory
called results.
Close VALI window automatically (-BAT): The VALI window will automatically be closed
after the run. This option is useful for unattended processing in an online environment.
Don't show summary of events (-R2V): VALI does not display any message on the screen,
but writes them in the <model>.r2v file.
Always generate output files (-NOC): VALI will generate output files specified in the mea
file even if the run is not successful. This option has the same effect as placing the keyword
NOCONVER in the mea file.
Generate debug files (-DBG): Setting this option will generate three additional files when
running the model, with a trace of the convergence process through the iterations:
r6v_itr.tmp: tags in decreasing order of penalty
resi_itr.tmp: equation residues by decreasing (absolute) value
vari_itr.tmp: values of the variables by decreasing relative change from preceding

iteration
The same option followed by a unit name (-DBG unit) will generate a fourth file (unit.dbg) giving the
derivatives of the equations units at each iteration.
User options
Additional options are:
-ARA: same as -ARC but all the precisions are printed in absolute
-COM: commentaries are commentaries only (without this option, some commentaries can
be used during computation; eg tanks may use commentaries as product)
-DIF: to print the difference ( mea.val. - rec.val ) for each tag in a dedicated file (<model>.dif)
-HTO: create html reports with the lay-out of version 4.3
-ITF: automatically register new tags appearing in the TAG file
-JAC: print the Jacobian in the r3v file (requires the -R3V option to work)
-NLV: skip the verification, made in the report phase, that L and V streams are actually in
L or V state at the validated temperature and pressure
-NOR: reduces r4v and r6v reports to simple run information, thereby accelerating the
calculation
-R3V: writes mathematical details in r3v file
-SA2: the results will be saved as a separate model file named <model>_lastrun.bls
-2SL: if the selected solver fails to converge, ValiEngine will automatically restart the
calculations using the alternate solver
-FLT: VALI stops after the verification phase. A specific report containing information
about the filtering results is generated. If -ARC is used, a filtering ARC file is created as
well
Attention: When starting ValiEngine from ValiModeller GUI, the file pc.vif is created with the
settings you specify in the Run VALI dialogue box. The Runtime options appear as special
keywords as indicated between brackets.
ValiEngine will go through the following steps:
Phase 0: TAG reading
Phase 1: Verification
Phase 2: Analysis
Phase 3: Resolution
Phase 4: Report
Phase 5: Output
If fatal errors are encountered during one of these phases, VALI will stop before starting the next
step. You should then look for more information on the errors in the file <model>.r1v.
If the run is successful, then the results are saved in the model file (the -NOS runtime option disables
this saving).
FIGURE 2 - VALIENGINE WINDOWS
2.2 INTERACTING WITH VALIENGINE
While running ValiEngine, four menus are available at the top of the window with submenu entries.
File
Save As: saves the window content as a bitmap file at the location selected by the user
Print: prints the window content
Exit: closes the window and stops the execution after releasing the licence. After
execution, you can also use the keyboard shortcut CTRL+C
Edit
Select All: this allows selecting the content of the window. This action also results in
Pausing the application. The execution will resume after copying in the clipboard
(menu Copy). It can also be resumed through the command Execution|Resume
Copy: this menu item is greyed until activating Select. This command will copy the
content of the window to the clipboard
Execution
Abort: Closes the window of the application and stops the execution after releasing the
licence. The difference with Exit is that a confirmation will be requested.
Pause: Pauses the application. When the programme is paused, this menu item is
toggled to Resume. You can also use the keyboard shortcut CTRL+S to pause and
CTRL+Q to resume the execution.
Stop: Stops the application and generates reports available at that stage when the
current calculations will be finished. It is possible to invoke this during the first three
phases or between two iterations.
More Iterations: Activates/deactivates the option to have more iterations during

resolution. This is equivalent to setting or not the -ITM option. A check mark is
showing the state of the option.
Try Other Solver: Activates/deactivates the option to switch to the other solver if
resolution fails. This is equivalent to setting or not the -2SL option A check mark is
Sensitivity Analysis: Activates/deactivates the option to run the sensitivity analysis

after resolution. This is equivalent to setting or not the -SNS option. A check mark is
Save Results: Activates/deactivates the option to save the solution found by solver in
the BLS file after resolution. This is equivalent to setting or not the -NOS option. A
check mark is showing the state of the option.
File for ValiReport: Activates/deactivates the option to have more iterations during
resolution. This is equivalent to setting or not the -ARC option. A check mark is
Close Window Automatically: Activates/deactivates the option to close automatically

the window after resolution. This is equivalent to setting or not the -BAT option. A
check mark is showing the state of the option.
Help
About: Opens an information window with the version of the ValiEngine
Help: Invokes the Help facility
Attention: The menu Execution is grayed after completion of the run.
2.3 BROWSING RESULT FILES
You can browse VALI result files directly from the interface:
select the Application|Results menu command
select the report you want to see
the corresponding file is then loaded in your web browser (for html reports) or text editor
(by default WordPad)
Alternatively you can access directly access the result files from Windows explorer.
VALI creates several files, whose names are derived by adding an extension to the model name (The
extension htm is added to the file names when generating html files). These files can be created in a
sub-directory called results through runtime option -SUB.
<MODEL>.HTM: GENERAL INFORMATION (HOME)

This file is only created when the HTM option is checked. It gives a first overview of the results. The
links on the top (Home, Summary, etc.) give access to the different reports, while the links on the left
side give a direct access to the different sections of the reports. The greyed sections are not available,
according to the reporting options selected through unit REPVAL.
FIGURE 3 - GENERAL INFORMATION (HOME PAGE)
<MODEL>.SUM.HTM: SUMMARY
This file is only created when the HTM option is checked. It replicates most of the information
provided in ValiEngine windows during the run.
FIGURE 4 - S UMMARY
<MODEL>.R1V.HTM: LOG FILE

Summary of the run with various warning and error messages from the various phases.
<MODEL>.R2V.HTM: RUNTIME MESSAGES

This file is created only when running with -R2S option (Don't show summary of events) and
contains the messages that are usually sent to the screen.
<MODEL>.R3V.HTM: MATHEMATICAL DETAILS

This file is created only when running with -R3V option and contains the list of equations and
variables as well as a trace of the convergence algorithm.
<MODEL>.R4V.HTM: GLOBAL REPORT

This is the main report file. Its contents can be customized through the unit REPVAL. It contains for
example variables report, units report, tags report, etc.
<MODEL>.R5V.HTM: SUSPECTED TAGS

List of measurements that are suspected, i.e. tags for which one of the following problem has been
detected:
acquisition issue: tags that was not acquired correctly (read several times, not found in
mea file, read as BAD)
filtered
eliminated ,flagged or relaxed as suspicious because their correction is bigger than

expected
out of range: reconciled value is outside the filtering bounds
FIGURE 5 -S US PECTED TAGS
<MODEL>.R6V.HTM: TAGS REPORT

This file contains information about all the measurements in the model, i.e.:
number of equations, variables, etc.
total penalty
list of measurements with their measured and validated values and accuracies
After a successful run, VALI will also create a back-up file called from the model and PFD name as
<model>_<PFD>.bls.bak. This file is a copy of the model file as it was when VALI was started. This
gives you the opportunity of re-importing the last running version of a model, by removong the bak
extension from the backup file name.
Attention: When running in batch mode, you can specify your own name for the back-up file by
changing line 7 of the pc.vif file.
<MODEL>.FLT.HTM: FILTERING REPORT

This file is only generated when the option -FLT is used. It contains information about the filtering
phase, i.e.:
list of acquisition issues
number of acquisition issues by PFD
list of filtered tags
list of objects set OFF and OUT in measurement files
list of objects set OFF by cutoff
list of objects set OFF by FLEX filtering
table of comparison between default and measured value
sequences of propagation of OFF status
2.4 LOADING VALI RESULTS BACK IN VALIMODELLER GUI
After running VALI (or when any other application has changed the model file), ValiModeller GUI
will propose:
to reload the results: only the data are read from the file, assuming the model structure has
not changed. This operation might fail if some structural changes have been made to the
model by the external application
to take no action: the results are not loaded and the next run will restart form the initial
point presented by ValiModeller GUI
The latter option allows you to first look at the results before loading them. Depending on these
results you can decide later on to load the results back in ValiModeller GUI and use the calculated
results as a new initial point for the next run, through the command Application|Load Results (or
its corresponding button ).
Attention:
1. When running VALI, the results are saved in the file only if the run is successful. Only the
measured values coming from measurement files will be saved in the model file if the run is not
succesfull.
2. Even if the run is successful, the runtime option -NOS allows you to suppress any saving of the
results by VALI in the model file.
3. In these two cases, the Application|Load results command will restore the starting point as it was
before the last run.
2.5 USING VALI IN BATCH MODE
STARTING VALI
Provided you have a ValiOnlineEngine license, you can start the VALI.EXE application as any other
Windows applications:
by defining a short-cut to VALI.EXE on your desktop (or elsewhere) and clicking on it. Do
not forget to indicate in the properties of the short-cut in which directory it must start
by associating VALI.EXE to all files of type "vif" and clicking on any of these files (see below
for the contents of these files). It is also recommended to define an "edit" option on the vif
files. This allows to open them in a text editor (right click|edit) for modifications or to start
Vali.exe (double-click)
by opening a DOS Command windows, going in the appropriate directory and entering
the command: [InstallDir]\bin\vali.exe [file] where the optional file keyword is the name
of the vif file described below (by default pc.vif) and [InstallDir] stands for the name of the
folder where Vali has been installed
Attention:
1. You can also include the start-up command in a DOS batch file.
2. Running VALI in an automated manner (meaning without human intervention) requires a

ValiOnlineEngine, which is made available separately from the ValiModeller.
3. You can also run the VALIAUTO.exe application, which is strictly equivalent to VALI.EXE except
it does not produce any output on the screen.
USING THE "LASTRUN" MODEL FILE

As any equation solver based tool, Vali convergence properties may depend on the initial point.
When running online (e.g. every hour), the best initial point is usually the validated data of the
preceding run as the operating conditions usually do not change drastically from run to run. In some
cases however, like in start-up conditions after a shut-down, starting from the last run data might
not be appropriate.
The notion of Lastrun model file has been developed to maximize convergence rate using the
following strategy:
the calculations are first started with the model as saved after the last successful run
if the model fails to converge, then the calculations are restarted on basis of a reference
model, saved with typical operating conditions data
This strategy is launched through the combined use of the runtime options -NOS (which disables
results writing in the reference model file) and -SA2 (which saves the converged results in a separate
file - the so-called Lastrun model).
The Lastrun model file is named after the name of the reference model, followed by the suffix _lastrun.
If you use a separate folder for the results (-SUB) then the lastrun file will be created there as well.
VALI INFORMATION FILE

When starting, VALI needs to know the model to be run as well as the TAG and MEA files to be used.
This information is normally defined in a Vali Information File (default extension vif). If not given as
argument, VALI will look by default for a file named pc.vif. If this file is not present in the current
directory, the information will be requested interactively.
line 1: name of the mode l file
line 2: name of the mode l (PFD)
line 3: runtime options
line 4: name of the Fle x file
line 5: name of the MEA file
line 6: name of the TAG file
line 7: name of the mode l back-up file
line 8: name of se cond MEA file
line 9: name of third MEA file
Example:
gt.bls
GT
-htm
GT.MEA
GT.TAG
RUN STATUS (ERRORLEVEL)

At the end of a run, VALI indicates as an exit code the run status. This status can be checked through
the DOS command "IF ERRORLEVEL". The following codes are used:
-3: System error - no connection to the license server or licence issue
-2: System error - installation issue: missing directory, wrong version number
-1: Fatal error
0: The run was successful
1: The run was successful but gross errors are suspected to be present (according to Chi-
square test)
A file named valiexit.log is also created with one line containing the keyword EXITCODE followed by
the same code. (Example: EXITCODE 0)
SECTION 3: USING TAG FILES

TAG files allow to define the TAGS (i.e. the measurements) to be taken into account for your
model.
TAGS can be defined either inside the model with ValiModeller GUI or in a separate file called a TAG
file. When using a separate TAG file, the TAGS defined in the model (if any) will simply be ignored.
Attention: Using the command File|Import|TAG file you can import into your model TAGs
defined in a TAG file. After this command you must re-open the file.
A TAG file contains the definitions of your TAGS (or measurements): tag name, associated process
variable, default measurement value and accuracy, default physical units and control strings.
Several TAG files can be used to define your measurements. The main TAG file must then include (by
using the INPUT keyword) the other TAG files. Control strings are optional and are used:
to issue various messages depending on the measured and validated values of

measurements
to change the accuracy of measurements depending on their range
to provide default value when measurements are not available or out of range
3.1 GENERAL SYNTAX OF A TAG FILE
All keywords should be in Uppercase, except comments and messages.
NUMBERS
The decimal point can be either "." or ",".
COMMENT SYMBOL "!"

Blank lines and anything appearing on a line after the comment symbol "!" are ignored. Each TAG
definition starts on a new line.
CONTINUATION CHARACTER "&"

Each TAG definition starts on a new line. When a TAG definition does not fit on one line, the
continuation symbol "&" must be used at the end of the line that must be continued.
INPUT FILES
The INPUT command may be used to include TAG definitions from within other TAG files. INPUTs
may be nested up to 15 levels.
Example:
INPUT list2.tag ! this includes the contents of list2.tag in the current file.
3.2 TAG DEFINITION
The syntax for a TAG definition is:

TAG TYP NAM VAR VAL ACC PU ["STR1" ["STR2" ["STR3"]]]
Where:
TAG: the TAG name (the name of the sensor) limited to 32 characters
TYP: the type of the object (STREAM or UNIT) that owns the measured variable
NAM: is the name of the object (STREAM or UNIT) that owns the measured variable
VAR: is the name of the measured variable:
UNIT:
DPi: pressure drop
A: area of a HTXVAL unit
EFFIC: efficiency of a turbine, compressor or pump
any measurable parameter of a UNIT
Material STREAM:
T: temperature
P: pressure
H: enthalpy:
any measurable parameter of a STREAM
Thermal STREAM:
LOAD: heat load
Mechanical STREAM:
POWER: mechanical power
RPM: rotations per minute
VAL: is the default value for the measurement
ACC: is the default accuracy for the measurement
PU: are the default physical units for the measurement
STR1: is the optional control string for messages and must be enclosed between double
quotes
STR2: is the optional control string for measured value and must be enclosed between
double quotes
STR3: is the optional control string for accuracy and must be enclosed between double
quotes
3.3 CONTROL STRINGS
The Control Strings are used to carry out various actions depending on the measured and sometimes
validated value of a given TAG: issuing messages, replacing the measured value by another value or
changing its accuracy.
The syntax is described in chapter "How to build your data validation model".
Please note that you must not include the &1 &2 and &3 characters. The string type is detected from
its position in the list of strings.
3.4 DEFINING DUMMY TAGS
You can also define dummy TAGS which will be ignored by VALI. This is useful when the values of
your measurements are coming from a process control computer and contain also values of TAGS
that are not relevant for the data validation model. Defining these TAGS as dummy will avoid
getting numerous VALI warning messages about undefined TAGS.
The syntax is:

NAME DUMMY
where:
NAME: the tag name
Example:
T101 DUMMY
3.5 EXAMPLE OF A TAG FILE

T101 STREAM S101 T 10 5 C
P101 STREAM S101 P 3.5 0.1 bar
T117 STREAM S117 T 25 5 C &
"'VERY LOW'(<15),'LOW'(15,20),'HIGH'(30,35),'VERY HIGH'(>35)" &
"20(<20),30(>30)" &
"OFF(<15),50(15,20),50(30,35),OFF(>35)"
P117 STREAM P117 P 2 0.1 bar
INPUT list2.tag
INPUT list3.tag
SECTION 4: USING MEASUREMENTS FILES

Measurement files are used to exchange information between VALI and the outside world . They are
primarily used to enter the actual values of the measurements. They can also be used to modify
various model parameters, to enter initial values of UNITS and STREAMS or to set them OFF or OUT.
Finally, measurements files can also be used to produce result files with validated values for
reporting purpose.
The Measurement file facility is a very flexible and powerful way of exchanging information between
VALI and the outside world: yourself as a user, but also process control computer, LIMS, archiving
systems, etc. Based on ASCII files of simple structure, this system allows easy cross-platform
communication with various hardware systems.
A measurements file can contain:
actual measurement values, coming for example from the plant or from the lab
descriptive information about the run
updated values of tags: accuracies, control strings, bounds
settings of ValiFilter
unit parameters
initial values of measured or unmeasured variables
lists of STREAMS and/or UNITS to be set OFF
lists of UNITS to be set OUT
compound data
values of the binary parameters of THERMODS
tags to be generated in the output files
variables to be written in the output files
report specifications
4.1 SYNTAX OF A MEASUREMENTS FILE
Each command in a measurements file starts on a new line. All keywords should be in Uppercase,
except comments and strings.
NUMBERS
The decimal point can be either "." or ",".
COMMENT SYMBOL "!"

Blank lines and anything appearing on a line after the comment symbol "!" are ignored.
INPUT FILES
The INPUT command may be used to include TAG definitions from within other TAG files. INPUTs
may be nested up to 15 levels.
Example:
INPUT list2.mea ! this includes the contents of list2.tag in the current file.
Attention: when creating OUTPUT and ARCHIVE files, the use of INPUT files is restricted.
4.1.1 STRAP AND TABINPUT FILES

The STRAP and TABINPUT files are used to include tabular data related to model units, like
strapping tables of storage tanks (TNKVAL units) and trajectories of wells and pipes (PIPEVAL unit).
STRAP and TABINPUT keywords are synonyms and can be used indifferently for any table.
Example:
TABINPUT L01-WELL.txt ! imports the trajectory defined in L01-WELL.txt
The tabular data must be entered with the following syntax (keywords are in bold):
UNITNAME L01-WELL ! Name of a PIPEVAL/TNKVAL unit
NUMTABLE 1 ! Table ID (currently only 1 table is supported on a unit)
MAXCOL 2 ! Number of columns of the table
PHYSUN LG m ! Physical units definition for each column
300.0 -2349.5 ! Tabulated values
186.0 -2463.4
43.0 -2606.3
0.0 -2649.3
Attention: Physical units definition include the type of units (see a complete list of units types in
section User-defined Physical UNITS in this Chapter) as well as the engineering units that are used
for the data. In the above example, the keywords LG indicate that the data correspond to a Length.
4.1.2 DICTIONARY FILES

Dictionary files define or overwrite default definitions of various VALI keywords dealing with:
Status of active and inactive streams (STATUS tags)
Products codes and IDs
Movement types
Sub-Movement types
Suffix of tags to be written back to historian
Dictionary definitions are given in one or several separate text file that are referred to in your
measurement files through the following syntax:
DICTIONARY somefile.mea ! imports the definitions listed in somefile.mea
In the dictionary file itself, the keywords used with STATUS tags to indicate an active or inactive
status are listed line by line after the keywords OPEN or CLOSED.
Example:
OPEN "Open"
OPEN "On"
CLOSED "Closed"
CLOSED "Off"
CLOSED "Shutdown"
Product codes and IDs are defined through PRODUCT syntax.
Example:
PRODUCT CRUDE 101
PRODUCT KERO 102
PRODUCT LGO 103
For movement types, names to be used and corresponding tag names are defined through the
following keywords:
KEYWORD DEFAULT NAME DESCRIPTION
TANK_CHARGE CHARGE Amount loade d to tank
TANK_RUNDOWN RUNDOWN Amount unloade d from tank
PRODUCTION PRODUCT Amount produce d
CONSUMPTION CONSUMP Amount consume d
IMBALANCE IMBAL Product imbalance
OPENING_INVENTORY OPINVENT Ope ning inve ntory
CLOSING_INVENTORY CLINVENT Closing inve ntory
TRANSFER_IN TRAN-IN Amount transfe rre d into the zone
TRANSFER_OUT TRAN-OUT Amount transfe rre d out of the zone
IMPORT IMPORT Amount importe d (re ce ipts)
EXPORT EXPORT Amount e xporte d (shipme nts)
TRANSFER TRANSFER Amount transfe rre d out of Zone From

and transfe rre d into Zone To
Example:
TANK_CHARGE "TANK-IN"
When necessary, the Sub-Movements will be defined: SHIPMENT, LOSSES, EXPORT…

Example:
MOVEMENT STREAM Stream0001 EXPORT
SUBMOVEMENT STREAM Stream0001 LOSSES
If no sub-movement is specified, the default movement name will be used as sub-movement name. In
that case, the sub-movement name will be the default movement name (even if the movement name
is changed by the dictionary, see further).
When generating a file with reconciled values of tags to be written back to an historian, based on the
settings SUFFFIX_V in the historian page of the tags, the actual suffix that will be used can be set
through SUFFIX_V syntax.
Example:
SUFFIX_V “VALI”
4.1.3 INTERNAL VARIABLES AND IF THEN ELSE

Internal variables can be set using the syntax:
@SET VAR VALUE
@SET VAR "STRING"
@SET VAR TAGNAME
@SET VAR = VALUE OPERATION VALUE
@SET VAR = VAR1 OPERATION VAR2
Where:
VAR: the internal variable name
value:a numeric value (integer or real)
string:an alphanumeric value
TAGNAME: the name of a tag. (Attention: The value of the tag will be expressed in Belsim
internal units: K, bar, kg/s, kmol/s, etc.)
VARi: a previously defined variable name
Operation: one of the 4 arithmetic operations ( + or - or / or x ) ( as * is considered as a joker,

x is the multiplication sign)
These internal variables can then be used in the following commands:

@IF ( CONDITION ) THEN
SOME COMMANDS
@ELSE
SOME OTHER COMMANDS
@ENDIF
where condition can be:
VAR = "STRING"
VAR =, <,<=, >,>= VALUE
VAR =, <,<=, >,>= TAGNAME
Where:
VAR: the name of an internal variable.

Attention:
1. The parentheses and the spaces around them are mandatory.
2. The ELSE clause is optional.
3. IF THEN ELSE clauses can be nested up to 10 levels.
Examples:
! Activates or deactivates some stream and uses a secondary file according to the
! operation mode
!
@SET SEC1 "ACTIVE"
@IF ( SEC1 = "ACTIVE" ) THEN

STREAM Sec1_IN ON
Input section1.mea
@ELSE
STREAM Sec1_IN OFF
@ENDIF
!
! Shuts-down heat exchanger E-1 if outlet temperature below 100 C.
!
@SET T1 TI-001
@IF ( T1 < 373 ) THEN

UNIT E-1 OFF
@ENDIF
!
! Assumes stream s1 is active only if DT > 0.5 C
!
@SET DT = TI001 - TI002
@IF ( DT > 0.5 ) THEN

STREAM s1 ON
@ELSE
STREAM s2 OFF
@ENDIF
4.1.4 TEMPORARY SECTION

Sections of measurement files that will only be used during a specific time period can be defined
using the syntax:
BEGIN_TEMPORARY "BEGINDATE" "ENDDATE"
TEMPORARY COMMAND
END_TEMPORARY
BEGINDATE and ENDDATE define the time period for which the temporary command is active. If
RUNDATE (TAG used to store the date of the run) is comprised between BEGINDATE and ENDDATE,
the temporary command lines will be executed.
Example:
BEGIN_TEMPORARY "2010-01-01 00:00:00" "2011-01-01 00:00:00"
AIR.1_MOLF 220000 Nm3/h
AIR.1_T OFF
INPUT TempCommand.mea
END_TEMPORARY
Attention: Dates (BEGINDATE, ENDDATE and RUNDATE) must be expressed in the following
format “yyyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ss”
4.2 CHANGING VALUES OF TAGS
Measurements files (or MEA files) are a simple way to change the measured values of the TAGS
defined in the model or through a TAG file. Most of the modern Process Control Systems and DAHS
can automatically generate this type of file with current values of the plant measurements. Lab data
can also be sent to VALI via this kind of files.
Attention: ValiLink enables to automatically create these files by interacting with various
information systems and/or databases.
The following syntax can be used:

TAGNAME VALUE [ACC] [PU]
TAGNAME VALUE CST [PU]
TAGNAME [VALUE] OFF [PU]
TAGNAME [VALUE] BAD [PU]
whe re :
TAGNAME: is the TAG name
VALUE: is the measurement value
ACC: is the accuracy (optional)
PU: are the physical units (optional)
BAD: means no value is currently available for that tag. If a filter is defined on the
corresponding tag, it will be activated. Otherwise, the default tag value will be taken in
place of the measured one
The default values for ACC and PU are the default values defined in the model file (or the TAG file) for
the corresponding TAG.
Attention:
1. TAGS for which no value are given in the mea files will keep their default value (as introduced in
the TAG definition).
2. The default values of the TAG in the model file remains unchanged.
3. For STATUS tags, the value can be 1 (or OPEN) or 0 (or CLOSED), or any string value (enclosed
between single quotes) defined through DICTIONARY syntax.
You can also change the failure probability through the syntax:
TAGNAME FAILPROB VALUE [PU]
Another syntax can also be used to change properties (default value, default accuracy, bounds,
failure probability and control strings) of several tags in one shot. In this case the tag values in the
model file will be updated.

UPDATETAG TYPE SOMETYPE APROPERTY VALUE [PU]
UPDATETAG NAME SOMENAME APROPERTY VALUE [PU]

UPDATETAG TYPE SOMETYPE CONTROL_STRINGS [PU]
UPDATETAG NAME SOMENAME CONTROL_STRINGS [PU]
where:
SOMETYPE and SOMENAME are strings defining which tags are to be changed (based on
their type or name) and can contain wildcards
APROPERTY is the name of the property to be changed (MEA.VAL, MEA.ACC, DEF.VAL,

DEF.ACC, RAW.VAL, RAW.ACC, SL, LL, L, H, HH, SH, FAILPROB, COMMENT, IS.BAD, IS.
FLAT1, IS.FLAT2)
VALUE is the new value or OFF or CST
PU is optional physical units,
CONTROL_STRINGS are the control strings of the tags (a series of 3 strings enclosed by
double quotes)
Attention: see DEFINING FILTER SETTINGS paragraph for a variant of UPDATETAG syntax
enabling to change ValiFilter settings.
The third syntax enables to change the value of the tag. The tag will not be considered as filtered if a
valid value is given.

FILTERED TAGNAME VALUE [ACC] [PU]
FILTERED TAGNAME [VALUE] BAD [PU]
where:
VALUE: the filtered measurement value
ACC: the filtered accuracy (optional)
PU: are the physical units (optional)
BAD: means no value is currently available for that tag. If a filter is defined on the
corresponding tag, it will be activated. Otherwise, the default tag value will be taken in
place of the measured one.
You can also change the PLANTNAME of a tag using the following syntax:
TAGNAME PLANT PLANTNAME
Examples:
!
! Defines some measured values (no change of default values in the model file)
!
PI-001 20 bar
PI-002 34.23 -3 kg/cm2
PI-003 OFF
PI-004 21.23 CST
!
! Sets the default precision of all pressure measurements at 3%

! (changed in the model file)
!
UPDATETAG TYPE P MEA.ACC -3
!
! Changes the "measurement" control string (defining a CUTOFF value) of some tags
! (changed in the model file)
!
UPDATETAG NAME 01*FF* " " "CUTOFF(<0.1)" " "
!
! Filters the value of tag PI-005
!
FILTERED PI-005 2 bar
4.3 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION ABOUT THE RUN
A number of pseudo-tags are also available to store some information (80 characters each) which can
then be reprinted in the output files and in ValiReport:
RUNDATE: to store the date of the run (free format)
INFOi (i=1..9): to store some other text
4.4 SETTING THE REFERENCE ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE
Pressure measurements can be specified in absolute (bar, atm, Pa, etc) or relative - to atmospheric
pressure - basis (barg, MPag., etc.). The reference atmospheric pressure is 1.0 bar by default. This
value can be overwritten by including the following syntax in a measurement file:
ATMOPRES VALUE
where:
VALUE: the current atmospheric pressure expressed in bar (absolute)
The atmospheric pressure can also be set through a tag defined on a ATMOPRES unit.
4.5 DEFINING BOUNDS ON TAGS
The handling of solver bounds only works with the new SQP solver. Do not forget to use the -SQP
Vali runtime option.
Setting bounds of variables is done via the bounds specified on the TAGS. These bounds can also be
set through measurements files using the following syntax:
TAGNAME [SL VALUE] [LL VALUE] [L VALUE] [H VALUE] [HH VALUE] [SH VALUE] [PU]
where:
TAGNAME: the TAG name
VALUE: the bound value
PU: the physical unit
Examples:
TI-001 SL 200 C ! The variable defined by TI-001 has a lower bound of 200C
TI-002 SL 150 SH 400 C ! The variable defined by TI-002 must fall in the range 150-400 C
Attention:
1. The tags on which you set the bounds can be OFF. This allows to specify bounds on unmeasured
variables as well.
2. To introduce inequality constraints between two variables (e.g. TI-001 > TI-002), you must use a
unit of type OPXVAL to calculate the difference TI-001 - TI-002 and then set a bound on this
difference. Alternatively you can also a FLXVAL unit.
4.6 DEFINING BOUND CONTROL
Attention: Bound Control settings are usually defined through ValiModeller GUI.
Bound control mechanism keeps selected variables (defined through a TAG) at a specified distance
from their solver lower and/or upper bound.

TAGNAME BND_CONTROL ACTION CRITERIA [PU]
where:
ACTION: the bound control mechanism:
SL: bound control on the lower solver bound
SH: bound control on the upper solver bound
BOTH: bound control on the both solver bounds
Value Physun: the measured value is replaced by the given value
CRITERIA: the minimum distance at which the variable must be kept wit respect to the
bound. It can be specified as a value or as AUTO in which case, the minimum distance is
automatically selected according to the type of variable.
PU: optional physical units
Example:
C-1_EFFIC BND_CONTROL Both 0.1 %
4.7 DEFINING FILTER SETTINGS
Attention: ValiFilter is available under a separate licence agreement.
ValiFilter detects measured values that are outside ERROR bounds (LL-HH interval) and updates
their value, precision and failure probability according to user settings. These settings are defined in
the model file. They can be updated using one of the two following syntaxes.
TAGNAME FILTER MEASURED ACCURACY FAILPROB

where:
TAGNAME: the Tag name
MEASURED: the action on the measured value and can be:
LAST: the measured value is replaced by the validated value of the corresponding tag
(as obtained during the last successful and saved run)
ACCURACY: the action on the accuracy and can be:
Value: the accuracy is replaced by the given value (a negative value corresponds to a
relative accuracy expressed in %)
FAILPROB: defines the action on the Failure probability and can be:
Value %: the failure probability is replaced by the given value
Example:
POWER_POWER LL 10 HH 17 MW
POWER_POWER FILTER DEF -5 50 %
AIR.1_T LL -20 HH 40 C
AIR.1_T FILTER BND 10 NONE
The second syntax allows to update several tags in one shot by using wildcards:
UPDATETAG TYPE TAGTYPE FILTER MEASURED ACCURACY FAILPROB
UPDATETAG NAME TAGNAME FILTER MEASURED ACCURACY FAILPROB
where:
TAGTYPE and TAGNAME are strings defining which tags are to be changed (based on their
type or name) and can contain wildcards
Example:
! Changes
01LCQ01CF001 FILTER 0.1 t/h -5 NONE
! Sets the filter settings of all tags starting by TI to MID MID NONE
!
UPDATETAG NAME TI* FILTER MID MID NONE
Attention:
1. The penalty reported in the model and in the result files will be calculated both on basis of the
raw measured value as on basis of the filtered value.
2. The control strings and test on CUTOFF value are based on the raw measured value
It is also possible to specify a CUTOFF value on the filter settings of an individual tag (ValiFilter
license required). If the value of the measurement is below the specified value, the corresponding
object (STREAM or UNIT) will be set OFF. The syntax is:
TAGNAME CUTOFF VALUE PU
TAGNAME CUTOFF NONE
where:
VALUE: is the value under which the stream will be set OFF
PU: is the physical unit
Attention: It is also possible to specify a CUTOFF value on an individual tag via control strings (see "
Using control strings").
Remember also that the STATUS measurement enables a binary tag value to set a stream OFF.
4.8 DEFINING COMPENSATION SETTINGS
You can update compensations settings of tags through the following syntax
TAGNAME COMPENS ID COMPENS BIAS AREF BREF CREF
where:
TAGNAME: is the tag name
ID: specifies the compensation mode:
0: none
1: BIAS: bias compensation (using parameters Compens and Bias)
2: DP_TPMW: flow - differential pressure - Ref: T,P,MW
3: DP_TPD0: flow -differential pressure - Ref: T,P,Dens.@0°C
4: VOL_D15: flow -volumetric - Ref: Dens.@15°C,Dens.@T&P,MW
5: DP_D15: flow-differential pressure - Ref: Dens.@15°C,Dens.@T&P,MW
6: DP_D0 : flow-differential pressure - Ref: Dens.@0°C,Dens.@T&P,MW
COMPENS: is the proportional compensation factor (input in BIAS mode only)
BIAS: an additive bias
AREF: first reference parameter (meaning depends on compensation mode)
BREF: second reference parameter (meaning depends on compensation mode)
CREF: third reference parameter (meaning depends on compensation mode)
4.9 DEFINING COVARIANCES BETWEEN TAGS
The covariance between two tags allows you to take into account the fact that errors on two different
measurements are somehow related, for example because the same sensor is used to measure two
different temperatures. In place of defining the covariance, you will define the correlation factors
defined as:
The value of this correlation factor must fall between -0.9 and 0.9. On a theoretical basis, the range of
values is between -1 and 1. However, on a practical basis values outside -0.9…0.9 are not significant.
The syntax is:

CORREL TAG1 TAG2 VALUE
where:
TAG1, TAG2: two distinct tag names
VALUE: covariance value
Example:
CORREL TI-001 TI-002 0.1
4.10 UNIT PARAMETERS AND INITIAL VALUES OF VARIABLES
Measurements files can also contain values of unit parameters as well as initial values of measured
or unmeasured variables.
This allows for example to easily update the MODE parameters of several units without having to
click on each of them with ValiModeller GUI.
This feature is also particularly useful when parts of a model have been set OFF and are reset ON. In
such cases all streams that where previously OFF have lost their values and must be reinitialised.
Another typical use of this feature is when the plant operates in very different operating conditions.
Having different sets of initial conditions might then be necessary to insure a smooth convergence of
the model.
The syntax is the following:

UNIT NAME PARAMETER VALUE [PU]
STREAM NAME PARAMETER VALUE [PU]
where:
NAME: the name of the STREAM or UNIT
PARAMETER: the name of the parameter
VALUE: the new value
PU: optional physical units
The default physical units are the standard BELSIM physical units (K, bar, kmol/s, etc.).
Some useful parameters are:
UNIT:
MODE: calculation mode
DP: pressure drop
any parameter used by the unit
MATERIAL STREAM:
T: temperature
P: pressure
VAPF: vapour fraction
H: enthalpy
xxx: partial molar flow rate of compound xxx
THERMAL STREAM:
LOAD: heat load
MECHANICAL STREAM:
Attention: The parameter MODE must be entered as a numerical value and not as a string. Also for
the REFDP parameter (reference stream for pressure drop), the stream connection number must be
given (positive for an inlet and negative for an outlet stream) and not the stream name.
4.11 PRODUCT ATTRIBUTES
A product attribute must be given to all streams connected to a unit of type NETVAL (see NETVAL :
PIPES NETWORK FOR MASS BALANCE for more information about the representation of networks
of pipes through units of type NETVAL).
This attribute (one word of maximum 8 characters) can be set :
by propagation of the product attribute associated to a tank (TNKVAL) to both its inlet
and outlet streams
by directly specifying the product attribute of the stream in a MEA file
if no product attribute is specified the 8 first characters of the comment of the stream will
be used as an attribute (the comment can be set through ValiModeller GUI or through the
COMMENT syntax in a MEA file)
The syntax to set the attribute is:

UNIT NAME PRODUCT ATTRIBUTE
STREAM NAME PRODUCT ATTRIBUTE
where:
NAME: the name of the TSREAM or UNIT
ATTRIBUTE: the product attribute
A specific syntax enables setting OFF all units associated with a given product attribute.
Default properties can also be set on products through the following syntax:
PRODUCT NAME PROPERTY LL HH "COMMENT"
where:
NAME: the product name
PROPERTY: the property (e.g. CONVDENS)
LL, HH: the lower and higher filter bounds of the product property
COMMENT: a descriptive test of the product, which will be displayed in the product
balances in default reports
These default properties of the product can be used to define default values of density measurements
set on storage tanks (see section TNKVAL : STORAGE TANK).
4.12 PRODUCT BALANCES AND IMBALANCES
You can select in which basis the product balances are written in the html report through the
syntax:
BALANCE_REPORT TYPE
where:
TYPE can be MASSF, MOLF, COLDVOLF, CONVVOLF or VOLF
When using product attributes with NETVAL and TNKVAL units, additional tags summarizing the
product balances can automatically be created and written to the ValiReport ARC file using the
following syntax:
BALANCE PRODUCT ATTRIBUTE TYPE
where:
ATTRIBUTE: is the product attribute
TYPE: describes the type of tags to be generated and can be:
MASSF: mass flow rate
MOLF: molar flow rate
COLDVOLF: cold volumetric vlow rate (15C)
CONVVOLF: conventional volumetric flow rate
The following tags are then generated:
ATTRIBUTE_CHARGE_TYPE: total amount of product sent to storage tanks
ATTRIBUTE_RUNDOWN_TYPE: total amount of product taken from storage tanks
ATTRIBUTE_PRODUCT_TYPE: total internal production of product
ATTRIBUTE_CONSUMP_TYPE: total internal consumption of product
ATTRIBUTE_IMPORT_TYPE: total import of product
ATTRIBUTE_EXPORT_TYPE: total export of product
ATTRIBUTE_OPINVENT_TYPE: opening inventory of product
ATTRIBUTE_CLINVENT_TYPE: closing inventory of product
If balances are activated by zones (see REPVAL unit), the same kind of tags will be defined for each
zone, starting by the zone name. In addition two additional movements type will be defined for the
zones: TRAN-IN and TRAN-OUT enabling to trace the transfer between zones.
Attention: the movement names used for these tags can be customized in a DICTIONARY section.
Example:
BALANCE PRODUCT C4 MASSF
will automatically generate the following tags:
C4_CHARGE_MASSF
C4_RUNDOWN_MASSF
C4_PRODUCT_MASSF
C4_CONSUMP_MASSF
C4_IMPORT_MASSF
C4_EXPORT_MASSF
C4_OPINVENT_MASS
C4_CLINVENT_MASS
If zone balancing is activated (and assuming one of the zone is named A1), the following tags will also
be generated:
A1_C4_CHARGE_MASSF
A1_C4_RUNDOWN_MASSF
A1_C4_PRODUCT_MASSF
A1_C4_CONSUMP_MASSF
A1_C4_IMPORT_MASSF
A1_C4_EXPORT_MASSF
A1_C4_OPINVENT_MASS
A1_C4_CLINVENT_MASS
A1_C4_TRAN-IN_MASSF
A1_C4_TRAN-OUT_MASSF
The above is available when no sub-movement is defined anywhere in the application.
When at least one stream has a specific sub-movement, all tag names use the sub-movement
convention described below, even for movements without sub-movements.
Assuming the balance is requested in MASSF and the Product is C4, the *.arc file will include some
lines like:
C4_EXPORT_SHIPMENT_MASSF
C4_EXPORT_LOSSES_MASSF
C4_EXPORT_EXPORT_MASSF
When balances by zone are enabled, the following tags will also be generated for each Zone (e.g.A1)::
A1_C4_EXPORT_SHIPMENT_MASSF
A1_C4_EXPORT_LOSSES_MASSF
A1_C4_EXPORT_EXPORT_MASSF
Note that it is possible to change the movement type name through a dictionary (*.mea) file. When
replacing EXPORT by EXPORTA through the dictionary, the tags become:
without sub-movement:
A1_C4_EXPORTA_MASSF
with sub-movements:
A1_C4_EXPORTA_SHIPMENT_MASSF
A1_C4_EXPORTA_LOSSES_MASSF
A1_C4_EXPORTA_EXPORT_MASSF
The EXPORT in bold here above is the default name of the movement and must be kept as it is.
You can also allow an imbalance on a given product by using the following syntax:
IMBALANCE PRODUCT ATTRIBUTE TYPE
In such a case, the balance of the selected product will not be closed and an additional tag
(ATTRIBUTE_IMBAL_TYPE) is created giving the identified imbalance.
Example:
IMBALANCE PRODUCT C4 MASSF
will automatically generate the following tags:
C4_IMBAL_MASSF
And if zone balancing is activated:
A1_C4_IMBAL_MASSF
4.13 COMMENTS OF OBJECTS
Most objects can have a comment, which can be defined either through ValiModeller GUI or through
measurement files.
The syntax is the following:

COMMENT UNIT NAME "COMMENT"
COMMENT STREAM NAME "COMMENT"
COMMENT THERMOD NAME "COMMENT"
COMMENT COMPOUND NAME "COMMENT"
COMMENT REACTION NAME "COMMENT"
COMMENT TAG NAME "COMMENT"
where:
NAME: the name of the object
COMMENT: the comment to insert

Attention:
1. If no product attribute is specified on a stream connected to a NETVAL, the 8 first characters of
the stream comments are used in place. This feature is kept in the present release by
compatibility with older versions.
2. The comments of TAGS (and the control strings they contain if any) can also be updated through
the UPDATETAG command
4.14 SETTING UNITS, STREAMS OR PRODUCT "OFF"
Setting a unit or a stream OFF indicates that this element is not operating and that nothing flows
through it. The corresponding equations are therefore not generated by VALI. Setting OFF a unit
automatically sets OFF all streams connected to that unit. Also any unit (except units of type
TNKVAL) having all its inlet material streams or all its outlet material streams OFF is automatically
set OFF. Setting OFF a PFD automatically sets OFF all units of the PFD.
Finally setting OFF a PRODUCT (see section "NETVAL") sets off all units (typically tanks) referring to
this product attribute.
Attention: It is also possible to set UNITS OUT, in which case the UNIT is considered by VALI as
not existing at all (see below).
The syntax is:

UNIT NAME OFF
STREAM NAME OFF
where:
NAME: the unit (or PFD) or stream name
Another possibility to set OFF units and streams is to use the syntax:
PRODUCT ATTRIBUTE OFF
which will set OFF all tanks associated with the corresponding product Attribute as well as their
inlet and outlet streams.
It is also possible to set streams off when a measured value on the streams is below a so-called
CUTOFF value. The TAG cannot be related to a compound partial flow rate or fraction but it can be
any total rate, temperature or pressure. The CUTOFF values can be set through unit CUTOFF,
through the CUTOFF filter setting on individuals tag or through the following syntax is:
CUTOFF VAR [VALMIN] VALUE [PU]
where:
VAR: is the name of the measured variable (e.g. MASSF, MOLF, T, etc.)
VALMIN: is an optional minimum value under which no action is taken
PU: is the optional physical unit
Examples:
CUTOFF MASSF 0.01 kg/s
! sets OFF any stream for which the measured rate is below 0.01 kg/s
CUTOFF MOLF -1 1 Nm3/h
! sets OFF any stream for which the measured rate is between -1 and 1 Nm3/
See "Defining filter settings" to define CUTOFF on individual tags.
4.15 SETTING UNITS OR PRODUCTS "OUT"
Setting a unit OUT indicates that the UNIT is to be considered as not existing. STREAMS connected to
this UNIT only are then ignored, while streams connected to other units as well become global inlets
or outlets of the model. A complete PFD can also be set OUT. All sub-PFDs and units of this PFD are
then ignored by VALI.
This feature is very useful to exclude some parts of a model, which are not yet completed or which
are for some reasons creating problems.
Setting a product OUT enables to exclude all import and export streams from the validation model
and to validate each storage tank independently. This is useful for example when import and export
streams measurements are not yet available.
The syntax is:

UNIT NAME OUT
PRODUCT NAME OUT
where:
NAME: the name of the unit (or PFD) or product
4.16 THERMOD BINARY PARAMETERS
Measurements files can also contain the values of the binary parameters of the THERMODS.
THERMOD NAME PARAMETER COMPOUND1 COMPOUND2 VALUE
where:
NAME: the THERMOD name
PARAMETER: the binary parameter name
COMPOUND1: the name of the first compound of the binary
COMPOUND2: the name of the second compound of the binary
VALUE: the new value
4.17 COMPOUND DATA
The MEA files can also be used to change the data of Compounds. The syntax is the following:
COMPOUND NAME PARAMETER VALUE
where:
NAME: is the name of the Compound
PARAMETER: is the name of the parameter
VALUE: is the new value
The physical units are the standard BELSIM physical units (K, bar, kmol/s, etc.).
4.18 ELECTRO-NEUTRALITY CONSTRAINTS
The electrical charge of the Compounds (ions) is specified as a Compound property. The following
syntax can be used:
COMPOUND NAME ELECTRO VALUE
where:
NAME: is the name of the Compound
VALUE: is the new value of the electric charge
The electro-neutrality constraint of a STREAM is activated through the syntax:
STREAM NAME ELECTRO VALUE
where:
NAME: the name of the STREAM
VALUE: the new value of the electric charge
4.19 OUTPUT AND ARCHIVE FILES
PRINCIPLES
Output and Archive files are automatically created by VALI after a successful run and will contain
validated values of selected measurements and model variables.
When the run is not successful, the files will by default not be created. If they were already existing
before the run they will be deleted.
Attention: It is however possible to force the generation of the file even when the run is not
successful by introducing the keyword NOCONVER in any of the measurement files.
To create such a file you must introduce file a first line indicating the type of report (Output or
Archive) to be created as well as the name of this report in your measurement. Then, you specify
either line by line or as Tables which values must be written to the Output or Archive file.
The only difference between Archive and Output files is the number of values produced for each
selected TAG. Output files will include only the validated value while Archive files will include
several values for each tag its measured value, measured accuracy, validated value, a posteriori
accuracy, physical units, penalty and status.
For other variables (not TAGS), Output and Archive files are the same.
You can generate several Output and/or Archive files in a single measurements file.
Attention:
1. In a given file, all INPUT statements must come before any OUTPUT or ARCHIVE statement.
2. Archive files have been designed to operate with the ValiReport facility.
3. Several OUTPUT/ARCHIVE commands can refer to the same outfile. The different reports will
simply be concatenated.
4. The number of different output files may not exceed 16.
COMBINED USE OF INPUT AND OUTPUT OR ARCHIVE FILES

There are some limitations in the combined used of the INPUT and OUTPUT (or ARCHIVE)
commands. It is not possible, in a given measurements file, to include files with an INPUT statement
after any OUTPUT or ARCHIVE statement.
Examples:
1.
INPUT somedata.mea ! This is a valid combination of INPUT and OUTPUT
INPUT moredata.mea
OUTPUT myreport.res
TI-001
TI-0002
2.
INPUT somedata.mea ! This is an invalid combination of INPUT and OUTPUT
OUTPUT myreport.res
TI-001
TI-0002
INPUT moredata.mea
In Example 1, it is however perfectly valid to have some OUTPUT sections in the included files
(somedata.mea and moredata.mea).
DEFINING THE OUTPUT OR ARCHIVE FILE

The syntax is the same for OUTPUT and ARCHIVE files:
OUTPUT [OPTIONS] OUTFILE OR ARCHIVE [OPTIONS] OUTFILE
ELEMENT1
ELEMENT2
"STRINGS"
TABLES
...
where:
OUTFILE: the name of the Output or Archive File that will be created
Attention: Special characters are not allowed in the name of the Output or Archive File.
OPTIONS: optional formatting commands:
-T: fields will be separated by a TAB character
-B: fields will be separated by a SPACE character
-C: fields will be separated by a comma (,)
-S: fields will be separated by a semicolon (;)
-A: alphanumeric fields will be enclosed between double quotes (")
-D: uses a comma (,) as decimal symbol
ELEMENT1,2,ETC.: the various elements to be written in the report (see below): TAG
values and UNIT, STREAM, Compound and/or THERMOD data
STRINGS: comments that must be included in the report. The double quotes (") will be
removed before writing in the report
TABLES: table specifications (see section "Writing Tables" below)
MODIFY THE NUMBER OF DECIMALS IN ARCHIVE FILE

By default, ValiEngine prints Tag values in the Archive file with 6 significant digits. In some
applications, you may want to retrieve Tag values with more decimals.
This can be defined through a specific text file that will be understood by ValiEngine.
This feature comes with the following limitations:
1. The text file must have the exact name: "DigitsFile.txt",
2. "DigitsFile.txt" must be stored next to the model file (*.bls),
3. You can define the number of digits for the following types of Tags only:
MASS, MASSF
CONVVOLF, VOL1, VOL2
CONVDENS, DENS1, DENS2
4. The maximal number of digits is limited to 9,
5. When writing this file, be advised that the Measurement Type, the Physical Unit and the
number of digits columns must be separated by 8 to 16 space characters (see example here
below).
Note: tabular characters are not supported.
Example:
!-----------------------------
!Mass Flowrate
MASSF t/h 7
MASSF t/d 6
MASSF T/H 7
!-----------------------------
!Material Mass
MASS t 6
MASS TON 6
MASS T 6
!-----------------------------
!Volumetric Flowrate
CONVVOLF m3/d 6
CONVVOLF MBD 6
CONVVOLF m3/h 6
CONVVOLF bbl/h 6
CONVVOLF Nm3/h 6
!-----------------------------
!Volume
VOL1 m3 6
VOL1 bbl 6
VOL1 BBL 6
VOL2 m3 6
VOL2 bbl 6
VOL2 BBL 6
!-----------------------------
!Density
CONVDENS D60/60 6
CONVDENS Air_SG 6
CONVDENS AIR_SG 6
CONVDENS SG60/60 6
DENS1 SG60/60 6
DENS1 D60/60 6
DENS1 SPGR 6
DENS2 SG60/60 6
DENS2 D60/60 6
DENS2 SPGR 6
4.20 WRITING TAG VALUES IN THE REPORT
The values to be written can either be specified one by one (syntax 1), or globally for a number of tags
specified using wildcards (syntax 2).
NAME [PU]
DATA TAG [NAME]
where:
NAME: the name of the TAG to be written
PU: the physical units for the output (optionnal). The default physical units defined in the
TAG file are used if PU is not given
Attention: TAGS which are off can be specified in the report. A value will be given provided that
this TAG can be calculated from the results of the data validation run. A posteriori accuracy will
also be given when the TAG is defined on a variable which was actually part of the model.
4.21 WRITING VARIOUS INFORMATION ITEMS IN THE REPORT
A number of keywords can be used to get some values relevant to the run. The syntax is the same for
OUTPUT and ARCHIVE files:
KEYWORD ["STRING"]
where:
KEYWORD: one of the following keywords:
PENALTY: the total sum of penalty
CHISQU: the chi square value
SSR: the sum of square of the residues of the constraint equations
ITER: the number of iterations
DATE: the current date
TIME: the current time
PDB: the model file name
PROBLEM: the name of the PFD that has been used for the validation problem
MEAFILE: the name of the (main) measurement file name
USER: the user name
VERSION: the version number of VALI
RUNDATE: the run data as defined in the input files
INFOI (i=1..9): some textual information as given in the input files.
NACTBND: number of active bounds
NREDTOT: total number of redundancies
NREDTRIV: number of trivial redundancies
NRED: number of redundancies
NEQ: number of equations
NUNMEAS: number of unmeasured variables
NMEAS: number of measured variables
NCST: number of constants
NTAGS: number of tags (in the model file)
NFLAG: number of flagged tags
NELIM: number of eliminated tags
NFILT: number of filtered tags
NINF: number of INF (info) messages
NWRN: number of WRN (warning) messages
NERR: number of ERR (error) messages
NERS: number of ERS (severe error) messages
NERF: number of ERF (fatal error) messages
PROJVERS: the project version as defined in the history
"STRING": a string to be written in place of the keyword name when writing the keyword
value.
You can also get the list of units that were part of the validation model by the following syntax:
LIST
4.22 WRITING UNIT, STREAM, COMPOUND AND THERMOD

VALUES
The Values to be written can either be specified one by one (syntax 1), or globally for a number of
objects of the same type (syntax 2). The first syntax allows to define the contents of your report very
precisely. The second syntax is more often used to save the values of all variables so that you can
reuse them as starting point. In each case the report produced can generally be reused as an input
file.
SYNTAX 1:
UNIT NAME PARAMETER [PU] ["STRING"]
STREAM NAME PARAMETER [PU] ["STRING"]
COMPOUND NAME PARAMETER
THERMOD NAME PARAMETER COMPOUND1 COMPOUND2
where:
NAME: the name of a UNIT, STREAM, COMPOUND or THERMOD
PARAMETER: the parameter of the UNIT, STREAM, COMPOUND or THERMOD
COMPOUND1: the name of the first COMPOUND of the binary
COMPOUND2: the name of the second COMPOUND of the binary
PU: the physical units for the output (optional)
STRING: a string to be written in front of the parameter value (optional)
Some useful parameters are:
UNIT:
DP: pressure drop
any parameter of the UNIT
MATERIAL STREAM:
T: temperature
P: pressure
H: enthalpy
xxx: partial flow rate of component xxx
VOLF: volumetric flow rate
MOLF: molar flow rate
MASSF: mass flow rate
GMOLF: molar flow rate on a dry basis
GMASSF: mass flow rate on a dry basis
D15: gravity D15/4
D25: gravity D25/4
D60: gravity D60/60
API: API gravity
WFxxx: weight fraction of component xxx
MFxxx: molar fraction of component xxx
WGxxx: weight fraction of component xxx on dry basis
MGxxx: molar fraction of component xxx on dry basis
property: derived property (viscosity, specific heat ,etc.)(see section "CALL PROPTY")
THERMAL STREAM:
LOAD: heat load
MECHANICAL STREAM:
COMPOUND:
any compound parameter
THERMOD:
any binary parameter
Attention: The report created can be reused as an input file when you do not use any derived stream
value (like VOLF and the following) and you do not use "strings".
SYNTAX 2:
DATA UNIT [NAME [PARAMETER]]
DATA STREAM [NAME [PARAMETER]]
DATA COMPOUND [NAME [PARAMETER]]
DATA THERMOD [NAME]
where:
NAME: the name of the UNIT, STREAM, COMPOUND or THERMOD. This name can include
wildcards (*, ?) in which case all objects matching the string will be selected. If no name is
given, all objects are selected
PARAMETER: the parameter of the UNIT, STREAM, COMPOUND or THERMOD. The

parameter name can include wildcards (*, ?) in which case all parameters matching the
string will be selected
Valid parameters are:
UNIT:
DP: pressure drop
any parameter used by the unit
MATERIAL STREAM:
T: temperature
P: pressure
VAPF: vapour fraction
H: enthalpy
xxx: partial molar flow rate of compound xxx
property: derived property (viscosity, specific heat ,etc.)(see section "CALL PROPTY")
THERMAL STREAM:
LOAD: heat load
MECHANICAL STREAM:
COMPOUND:
any compound parameter
THERMOD:
any binary parameter
4.23 WRITING TABLES
With the TABLE concept, the user can group data of various objects into Tables. To specify the
contents of a TABLE several information must be defined:
the basic layout of the tables. Horizontal tables are tables where one line of information is
generated for each selected object. Vertical tables are tables where one column of
information is generated for each selected object
the class of object (UNITS, STREAMS or TAGS) for which the table must be generated
the order in which objects will be displayed
criteria for the selection of the objects, typically based on their names or type
various formatting options
selection of values (or other type of information) to be produced for each selected object
Although the way the Table information is specified is similar for all classes of objects, some
particular features are only available for some classes. The syntax is therefore described per object
class.
Some examples including tables are given at the end of this chapter. See also the coal example
(directory examples/coal on the distribution CD).
4.23.1 WRITING UNIT TABLES

The syntax is:
TABLE {HORIZONTAL|VERTICAL} UNIT
[ORDER_BY {NAME|PFD}]
[SELECTION COMMANDS]
[FORMATTING COMMANDS] OR [VALUE COMMANDS] OR [SUBTABLE COMMANDS]
ENDTABLE
Attention: The order command must precede any selection command. All selection commands
must appear before any formatting, value or sub-table command
SELECTION COMMANDS
SELECT TYPE NAME
SELECT NAME NAME
where:
name: either the type of the UNIT or the name of the UNIT. This name can include
wildcards (*, ?) in which case all objects matching the string will be selected. If no name is
given, all objects are selected
Selection commands can be combined. Selection based on type must appear before any selection
based on name. All objects satisfying any of the type selections and any of the name selections will
be selected.
FORMATTING COMMANDS
MAXCOL I: maximum number of columns in a vertical table is set to I
COLWIDTH I: minimum width of the columnsis set to I. When necessary the width of a
column will be automatically increased
UNDERLINE "U": generates a separation line based on the character U in an horizontal

table
SEPCHAR "S": specifies the character S as the separator between columns
NOHEADER: prohibits the printing of the header line in horizontal tables
VALUE COMMANDS
These commands allow the user to specify which values are to be printed in the table. These
parameters can be a parameter of the unit (PARAM) or a parameter of an inlet (INi) or outlet (OUTi)
streams, the name of the unit (NAME), its comment (COMMENT),the name of the PFD where the unit is
located (ORIGPFD), and its mass balance based on measured values (MASSBAL).
PARAM PARAMETER ["STRING"] [PU] [FORMAT]
INi PARAMETER ["STRING"] [PU] [FORMAT]
OUTi PARAMETER ["STRING"] [PU] [FORMAT]
NAME
COMMENT
ORIGPFD
MASSBAL
where:
PARAMETER: parameter of the UNIT or STREAM
STRING: string to be written in place of the parameter name (optional)
PU: physical units for the output (optional)
FORMAT: any valid FORTRAN format specification (ex: (F7.2) prints the value using 7 digits
in total, with 2 digits after the decimal point, (G12.4) prints the values in scientific notation
using 12 digits in total, with 4 digits after the decimal point) (optional, default format is
G12.6)
"i" = 1, 2, 3, 4,... (in INi and OUTi) : the order of the inlet or outlet streams
Example: In the following example, we will print the temperature parameter of the first 3 inlet and
outlet streams of every unit in the model, to a file called "runs-units.txt".
OUTPUT RUNS-UNITS.TXT
TABLE VERTICAL UNIT
NAME
IN1 T
IN2 T
IN3 T
OUT1 T
OUT2 T
OUT3 T
ENDTABLE
4.23.2 WRITING UNIT SUB-TABLES

The concept of sub-table is a way to produce for each unit selected in the unit table section, a
secondary report relative to the streams connected to the unit, to its reactions or to the
measurements defined on the unit.
A sub-table definition can appear in place of (or in addition to) Value commands in a UNIT Table.
The presence of a sub-table in a Vertical UNIT Table limits to 1 the maximum number of columns of
this main Table. The syntax is as follows:
SUBTABLE {VERTICAL|HORIZONTAL} {STREAM|INLET|OUTLET|REACTION|TAG}
[FORMATTING COMMANDS] OR [VALUE COMMANDS]
ENDSUBTABLE
SUBTABLE COMMAND
The sub-table commands specifies the table orientation and the objects on which a sub-table will be
generated:
STREAM: all connected streams
INLET: all inlet streams
OUTLET: all outlet streams
REACTIONS: reactions
TAG: tags
SELECTION COMMANDS
SELECT TYPE NAME
SELECT NAME NAME
where:
NAME: either the type or the name of the STREAM, REACTION or TAG. This name can
include wildcards (*, ?) in which case all objects matching the string will be selected. If no
name is given, all objects are selected
Selection commands can be combined. Selections based on type must appear before any selection
based on name. All objects satisfying any of the type selections and any of the name selections will
be selected.
FORMATTING COMMANDS

table
SUFFIX "S": specifies the character S as a suffix for all tag names
STREAM VALUE COMMANDS

These commands allow the user to specify which stream values are to be printed in the table. These
values can be a parameter of the stream (PARAM) , its NAME, its COMMENT, its origin (FROM, PFDFROM)
or destination unit or PFD (TO, PFDTO), its STATE or associated THERMOD. The following syntax can
be used:
NAME ["STRING"]
FROM ["STRING"]
TO ["STRING"]
PFDFROM ["STRING"]
PFDTO ["STRING"]
STATE ["STRING"]
THERMOD ["STRING"]
COMMENT ["STRING"]
where:
G12.6)
REACTION VALUE COMMANDS

These commands allow the user to specify which reaction values are to be printed in the table. These
values can be a parameter of the stream (PARAM) , its NAME, its COMMENT, its origin (FROM) or
destination unit (TO), its STATE or associated THERMOD.
EXTENT ["STRING"] [PU] [FORMAT]
DTEQ ["STRING"] [PU] [FORMAT]
NAME ["STRING"]
COMMENT ["STRING"]
where:
G12.6)
TAGS VALUE COMMANDS

These commands allow the user to specify which TAGS values are to be printed in the table.
KEYWORD ["STRING"] [FORMAT]
NAME ["STRING"]
COMMENT ["STRING"]
where:
MEA.VAL: the measured value
MEA.ACC-: the measured accuracy (with a negative value when relative)
MEA.ACC%: the measured accuracy (with a % sign when relative)
REC.VAL: the validated value
REC.ACC-: the validated accuracy (with a negative value when relative)
REC.ACC%: the validated accuracy (with a % sign when relative)
PENALTY: the penalty
CORRFACT: the correction factor = REC.VAL / MEA.VAL
ATTNFACT: the attenuation factor = REC.ACC% / MEA.ACC%
FLAGSTAR: a * is printed if the measurement is flagged
FLAGNUM: 0 for unflagged measurement, 1 for flagged measurement
PHYSUN: the physical units
TYPE: the type of measurement
OBJTYPE: the object type (type of unit or stream)
OBJNAME: the object name
OBJCLASS: the object class (UNIT / STREAM)
STATUS: status of the tag (used by ValiReport)
FIL.VAL: the filtered value
FIL.ACC-: the filtered accuracy (with a negative value when relative)
FIL.ACC%: the filtered accuracy (with a % sign when relative)
FIL.PEN: the filtered penalty
MEA.ACCA: the measured accuracy (absolute)
REC.ACCA: the validated accuracy (absolute)
FIL.ACCA: the filtered accuracy (absolute)
STRING: a string to be written in place of the parameter name (optional)
FORMAT: is any valid FORTRAN format specification (ex: (F7.2) prints the value using 7
digits in total, with 2 digits after the decimal point, (G12.4) prints the values in scientific
notation using 12 digits in total, with 4 digits after the decimal point) (optional, default
format is G12.6)
4.23.3 WRITING STREAM TABLES

The syntax is:
TABLE {HORIZONTAL|VERTICAL} STREAM
ENDTABLE
must appear before any formatting, value or sub-table command
SELECTION COMMANDS
SELECT TYPE NAME
SELECT NAME NAME
where:
NAME: either the type (MAT, MECSTRM or THERSTRM) of the STREAM or the name of the
STREAM. This name can include wildcards (*, ?) in which case all objects matching the
string will be selected. If no name is given, all objects are selected
based on name. All objects satisfying any of the Type selections and any of the Name selections will
be selected.
FORMATTING COMMANDS

table
VALUE COMMANDS
These commands allow the user to specify which stream values are to be printed in the table. These
values can be a parameter of the stream (PARAM) , its NAME, its COMMENT, its origin (FROM, PFDFROM)
or destination unit or PFD (TO, PFDTO), its STATE or associated THERMOD. The following syntax can
be used:
NAME ["STRING"]
FROM ["STRING"]
TO ["STRING"]
PFDFROM ["STRING"]
PFDTO ["STRING"]
STATE ["STRING"]
THERMOD ["STRING"]
COMMENT ["STRING"]
where:
G12.6)
4.23.4 WRITING TAGS TABLES

The syntax is:
TABLE {HORIZONTAL|VERTICAL} TAG
[UNITOFF]
[STREAMOFF]
[STREAMOUT]
[DUMMY]
ENDTABLE
must appear before any formatting, value or sub-table command.
The UNITOFF, STREAMOFF and STREAMOUT commands allow to include the tags related to streams
and units that are OFF or OUT.
The DUMMY command allows to include the dummy tags.
SELECTION COMMANDS
SELECT TYPE NAME
SELECT UNIT NAME
SELECT STREAM NAME
SELECT NAME NAME
where:
NAME: either the type or name of the TAG or the name of UNITS or STREAMS. This name
can include wildcards (*, ?) in which case all objects matching the string will be selected. If
no name is given, all objects are selected
based on unit or stream, which in turn must appear before any selection based on TAG name. All
objects satisfying any of the Type, UNIT or STREAM selections and any of the TAG Name selections
will be selected.
FORMATTING COMMANDS

table
SUFFIX "S": specifies the character s as a suffix for all tag names
VALUE COMMANDS
These commands allow the user to specify which TAGS values are to be printed in the table.
KEYWORD ["STRING"] [FORMAT]
NAME ["STRING"]
COMMENT ["STRING"]
where:
MEA.ACC-: the measured accuracy (with a negative value when relative)
MEA.ACC%: the measured accuracy (with a % sign when relative)
REC.VAL: the validated value
REC.ACC-: the validated accuracy (with a negative value when relative)
REC.ACC%: the validated accuracy (with a % sign when relative)
PENALTY: the penalty
CORRFACT: the correction factor = REC.VAL / MEA.VAL
ATTNFACT: the attenuation factor = REC.ACC% / MEA.ACC%
FLAGSTAR: a * is printed if the measurement is flagged
FLAGNUM: 0 for unflagged measurement, 1 for flagged measurement
PHYSUN: the physical units
TYPE: the type of measurement
OBJTYPE: the object type (type of unit or stream)
OBJNAME: the object name
OBJCLASS: the object class (UNIT / STREAM)
STATUS: status of the tag (used by ValiReport)
FIL.VAL: the filtered value
FIL.ACC-: the filtered accuracy (with a negative value when relative)
FIL.ACC%: the filtered accuracy (with a % sign when relative)
FIL.PEN: the filtered penalty
MEA.ACCA: the measured accuracy (absolute)
REC.ACCA: the validated accuracy (absolute)
FIL.ACCA: the filtered accuracy (absolute)
STRING: a string to be written in place of the parameter name (optional)
FORMAT: is any valid FORTRAN format specification (ex: (F7.2) prints the value using 7
digits in total, with 2 digits after the decimal point, (G12.4) prints the values in scientific
notation using 12 digits in total, with 4 digits after the decimal point) (optional, default
format is G12.6)
Attention: When a TAG is set constant (or OFF), the keyword CST (or OFF) will appear in place of
CORRFACT and ATTNFACT. If the measured value is 0, the correction factor CORRFACT has no
meaning and is replaced by a question mark "?".
4.24 USING IOFILE.EXE TO PROCESS MEASUREMENT FILES
The separate application IOFILE.EXE can be used to process measurements files independently of
VALI application. This enables extracting various data from a model or uploading other data into
the model without the need to solve any validation problem.
You can start IOFILE.EXE:
by opening a DOS Command windows, going in the appropriate directory and entering
the command:
<belsim_dir>\bin\vali.exe [<file>]
where <belsim_dir> is the path to your belsim installation directory (by default c:
\belsim2001) and the optional <file> keyword is the name of the vif file (pc.vif by default)
by including this command into a DOS batch file
Attention: The structure and contents of the vif files are described above in the section Using VALI
in Batch Mode.
4.25 USING IOFILE.EXE TO CHANGE DEFAULT VALUES

Default values in bls files can be overwritten using IOFILE.EXE, using the option is –DEF. When it is
used, the default values of tags are replaced by the values defined in mea files, and status of units or
streams are updated according what is defined mea files, and the new bls file is saved after the run.
The following mea file syntax is accepted to change the default values
Tag_name value accuracy/CST/OFF [Physical_unit]
The default value of the tag Tag_name and its accuracy will be modified.
Unit_paramater_name value Physical_unit
The value of the parameter Unit_parameter_name will be modified.
Stream_paramater_name value Physical_unit
The value of the parameter Stream_parameter_name will be modified.
UNIT Unit_name ON/OFF/OUT
The unit Unit_name will be set ON/OFF/OUT.
STREAM Stream_name ON/OFF/OUT
The stream Stream_name will be set ON/OFF/OUT.
UNIT Unit_name Parameter_name value
The parameter Parameter_name of the unit Unit_name will be modified.
STREAM Stream_name Parameter_name value
The parameter Parameter_name of the stream Stream_name will be modified.
COMPOUND Compound_name Parameter_name value
The parameter Parameter_name of the compound Compound_name will be modified.
UPDATETAG TYPE sometype aproperty value [Physical Unit]
Or
UPDATETAG NAME somename aproperty value [Physical Unit]
If aproperty is DEF.VAL, DEF.ACC, RAW.VAL, RAW.ACC, SL, LL, L, H, HH, SH, FAILPROB,
COMMENT, IS.BAD, IS.FLAT1 or, IS.FLAT2, the property is changed; if aproperty is MEA.
VAL, DEF.VAL is changed; if aproperty is MEA.ACC, DEF.ACC is changed.
Remarks:
The option –DEF with VALI.EXE is not taken into account;
If –DEF and –NOS are used in the same time, the BLS file will not be saved;
4.26 EXAMPLE OF MEASUREMENT FILES
Example 1
UNIT HTX2 OFF ! Set unit HTX2 as not operating
UNIT HTX1 MODE 1 ! Set unit HTX1 mode parameter to 2
UNIT HTX1 DP1 0.5 bar ! Set unit HTX1 first pressure drop to 0.5 bar
UNIT HTX1 DP2 0.3 bar ! Set unit HTX1 second pressure drop to 0.3 bar
STREAM S102 T 15 C ! Initialise temperature of stream S102 to 15 C
T101 13.2 C ! Set Tag T101 measurement value to 13.2 C
P101 3.5 CST ! Set Tag P101 measurement value to 3.5 (bar)
! and consider the variable as a constant
T117 27.5 C ! Set Tag T117 measurement value to 27.5 C
P117 2 CST ! Set Tag P117 measurement value to 2 (bar)
! and consider the variable as a constant
INPUT list2.mea ! Read measurements file 'list2.mea'
INPUT list3.mea ! Read measurements file 'list3.mea'
OUTPUT list3.out ! Generate output file 'list3.out'
"Results for March 24th, 1997" ! Output "Results for March 24th, 1997"
T101 F ! Output "T101 ... F"
P101 atm ! Output "P101 ... atm"
T117 F ! Output "T117 ... F"
STREAM S101 VOLF m3/h "Cooling water:" ! Output "Cooling water: ... m3/h"
UNIT HTX1 A m2 "Cooler 1 area:" ! Output "Cooler 1 area: ... m2"
ARCHIVE list3.arc ! Generate output file 'list3.arc'
"Results for March 24th, 1997" ! Output "Results for March 24th, 1997"
T101 F ! Output "T101 ... F"
T117 F ! Output "T117 ... F"
STREAM S101 VOLF m3/h "Cooling water:" ! Output "Cooling water: ... m3/h"
UNIT HTX1 A m2 "Cooler 1 area:" ! Output "Cooler 1 area: ... m2"
OUTPUT list4.out ! Generate output file 'list4.out'
DATA UNIT * MODE ! Writes all MODE parameters
DATA STREAM ! Writes all Stream data
The resulting output file 'list3.out' could be:
Results for March 24th, 1997
T101 54.355 F
P101 3.4542 atm
T117 81.772 F
P117 1.9738 atm
Cooling water: 542.17 m3/h
Cooler 1 area: 119.56 m2
The resulting output file 'list3.arc' could be:

Results for March 24th, 1997
T101 55.760 3.6000 54.355 1.3654 F
P101 3.4542 0.0000 3.4542 0.0000 atm
T117 81.500 3.6000 81.772 1.0354 F
P117 1.9738 0.0000 1.9738 0.0000 atm
Cooling water: 42.17m3/h
Cooler 1 area: 119.56 m2
The resulting output file 'list4.aout' could look like:
UNIT HTX1 MODE 10
UNIT HTX2 MODE 10
...
STREAM S101 T 12.419 C
STREAM S101 P 3.4991 bar
STREAM S102 H ...
...
STREAM S101 T 27.6511 C
STREAM S101 P 2.00000 bar
Example 2
The following 'measurement' file creates a file with the definition of all tags relevant to the model.
The generated file could be reused as a TAG file. (See in the coal example).
OUTPUT tagdef.out
! Beginning of the table of tags
TABLE HORIZONTAL TAG
! Selection commands
UNITOFF
STREAMOFF
SELECT NAME *
! Formatting commands
NOHEADER
COLWIDTH 8
SEPCHAR " "
! Value commands
OBJCLASS
OBJNAME
TYPE
MEA.VAL (G15.6)
MEA.ACC- (G11.3)
PHYSUN
! End of the table
ENDTABLE
SECTION 5: THE SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS

This section shows you how to use the tools available for statistical analysis of the results provided
by ValiEngine
A default Sensitivity Analysis is performed by setting the VALI Runtime option -SNS. The
sensitivity analysis is also generated when -VDI option is selected. The Sensitivity Analysis tool can
however be used on a stand-alone basis to generate more specific results. The files generated by the
sensitivity analysis are best exploited through ValiAnalytics GUI.
The sensitivity analysis processes the information available in the validation results to answer the
following questions:
what is the precision of the validated values of the measured and unmeasured variables ?
This is called the validated accuracy (or uncertainty). Note that the validated accuracy of
measured variables is directly calculated by VALI and shown in the html (or r4v), r5v and
r6v files
what are the measurements that have an effect on the validated uncertainty of variables?
These are the contributors
how much a given variable will change if the value of a measurement is changed? This is
called the sensitivity
what is the interaction between the measurements: this information is provided by the
covariance analysis
Having answered these questions allows you to answer a second set of questions:
what are the measurements that are really improved by the validation? The
measurements that have a significant improvement of their accuracy
what are the measurements that should be improved to improve the accuracy of a given
variable? The measurements that have a high contribution to uncertainty of the selected
variable
what is the level of dependency of the measurements ? The measurements that will show a
significant covariance factor are with a strong link
This section shows:
some important preliminary remarks
the layout of the reports that can be created
how to start the default Sensitivity Analysis from VALI
how to use the Sensitivity Analysis independently of VALI
some theoretical background
5.1 PRELIMINARY REMARKS
The validated accuracy values are based on the accuracy values set on the measurements. Validated
accuracy values are not directly affected by the correction applied on some of the measurements.
When gross errors are present in the validated values, the validated accuracy estimations are no
longer valid.
The analysis should also been considered with caution when bounds are activated. It is probably
better to check the pertinence of bounds and take corrective actions: relax bounds or set variables
constants to get a model converging without activation of bounds.
The validated accuracy should not be interpreted (nor used) as the validated precision of a
measurement sensor. The validated accuracy relates to the validated value of the variable on which
the measurement is made and this accuracy takes into account the precision of the sensor itself and
the precision of all other measurements defined on other variables that have an effect on this
variable. The validated accuracy is in fact the "real" knowledge you have about the variables of the
process when all the information (measurements + model) are considered at the same time.
Variables set as constants are not considered in the Sensitivity Analysis. If you want to perform
sensitivity analysis on these variables, you must first relax them. Setting a very low uncertainty
(but not zero) on the constant will have nearly the same effect as setting it constant.
The bounds activated by the solver (SQPIP) are affecting the results of the sensitivity analysis
because they are considered as additional constraints of the system. This means that bounded
variables will show a validated accuracy of zero. They will also decrease the uncertainty of related
variables.
Attention: Some of the measurements, like rates and compositions, that are specified on STREAMS
relate in fact to their Rates record and are handled as such by VALI. You will therefore find
measurements on Rates in the sensitivity analysis.
5.2 REPORTS OF THE SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS
Several reports are generated by the Sensitivity Analysis:
<model>.res: the report you specify
<model>.sum: a summary report
<model>.vcv: the report of the covariances between validated values of variables and
measurements
<model>.dcv: the report of the covariances between corrections on measurements and the
measurements themselves
<model>.sds
<modell>_xml.res: xml global report, containing all results. This file is meant to be read by
ValiAnalytics
When running the sensitivity analysis from VALI, using the -SNS runtime option, the report
<model>.res will consist of the Variables and Measurements Analysis Reports as described below.
The <model>.vcv will also been generated for the Variables and Measurements. And the <model>.dcv
will be generated for all the validated variables.
In case of VDI mode, only the measured variables flagged because of a big difference between
measured value and validated value will be considered in the different reports. No <model>.res file
will be generated.
The covariance information is useful to identify the cause of gross error because they can be due not
to the flagged measurement but to some other which are strongly correlated with those ones.
Afterwards you can also run the Sensitivity Analysis as a stand alone tool, to get some customised
reports.
All the examples found in this section are extracted from a modified version of GT example provided
with the Release.
VARIABLES ANALYSIS REPORT (<MAIN>.RES)

This report displays for each variable:
its validated value and accuracy (absolute and relative)
its measured values and accuracies (absolute and relative) if measurements are defined
a list of contributors (sorted by decreasing contributions) to its validated inaccuracy
its sensitivity to the values of his contributors
the relative gains of accuracy and the penalties of his contributors
Attention: the list of contributors and the corresponding sensitivities can be removed from the
report when using the tool in stand-alone mode.
Example of a "Variables analysis" report:
If the variable is not measured, the term validated will be changed in 'Computed' and the list of
associated measurements will be empty.
In the case of a variable activating one of its bounds, the term "validated" of the first line will be
replaced by 'High Bound' or 'Low Bound'. In this case, the list of variables that are related to the
considered variable and have a zero validated accuracy will be listed. The table will report for each
identified variable:
its validated sensitivity to the bound of the variable
its penalty if the variable was measured
In the case of a variable that has a zero validated accuracy, the contributors identification will be
replaced by the identification of the bounds that are influencing the validated value.
MEASUREMENTS ANALYSIS REPORT (<MAIN>.RES)

This report displays for each measurement:
its validated value and accuracies (absolute and relative)
its measured value and accuracies (absolute and relative)
a list of variables the inaccuracy of which is significantly explained by the selected

measurement
the sensitivity of these variables to the value of the selected measurement
the relative gains of accuracy and the penalties of the variables when they are associated
with measurement(s)
Attention: the list of variables and the corresponding sensitivities can be removed from the report
when using the tool in stand-alone mode.
Example of a "Measurements analysis" report:
replaced by 'High Bound' or 'Low Bound'. In this case, the list of variables that are related to the
considered variable and have a zero validated accuracy will be listed. The table will report for each
identified variable:
its validated sensitivity to the bound of the variable
its penalty if the variable was measured
In the case of a variable that has a zero validated accuracy, the contributors identification will be
replaced by the identification of the bounds that are influencing the validated value.
COVARIANCE REPORT
The validated accuracies reported for each variable by VALI in its report files and in the reports
described in the previous sections are in fact a sub part (the diagonal) of the statistical covariance
matrix.
The covariance report is providing the other terms of this matrix.
In all the cases, the measured variables are located at the top of the list and are sorted in decreasing
order of penalties. This is done in order to ease the use of the covariance analysis to identify the cause
of gross error in a set of measurements. In case of -VDI option, only the flagged variables will be
reported.
The problem of gross error detection is that the responsible is not necessary one of the flagged
variable, but it can be due to another one set with a higher accuracy which is not moving but is
forcing the other measured variables of the system to show big deviations. In that case, they will be
identified because they will show high correlation level with the flagged variables (Cor.Coef ~ 1).
It is possible to consider two kind of correlation coefficient analysis. The first one is based on
identification of correlation coefficient between the validated values and the measurements values
provided to the system. The second kind of analysis is to identify the correlation coefficient between
the deviation shown by the measured variables with the measurement values provided to the
system. This second kind of analysis is the one suggested by the VDI-2048 recommendation to
identify the gross errors.
COVARIANCE ANALYSIS OF VALUES (<MAIN>.VCV)

For each variable value, the covariances with the measurements are provided in tables containing:
its measured values and accuracies (absolute and relative) if measurements are defined
a list of correlated measurements (sorted by decreasing correlation coefficient) with the

value of the correlation coefficient and the value of the covariance itself
the relative gains of accuracy and the penalties of correlated measurement
Example of a "Covariance analysis" report for value of variables:
If the variable is not measured, the term validated will be changed in 'Computed' and the list of
associated measurements will be empty.
replaced by 'High Bound' or 'Low Bound'.
In the case of a variable that has a zero validated accuracy, the table of related measurements will be
removed because a trivial value of zero is associated with all the measurements.
The trivial correlation factor of 1 of the variable with itself has been removed from the table.
COVARIANCE ANALYSIS OF DEVIATIONS (<MAIN>.DCV)

For each measurement correction, the covariances with the measurements are provided in tables
containing:
its measured value and accuracy (absolute and relative) if measurements are defined
a list of correlated measurements (sorted by decreasing correlation coefficient) with the

value of the correlation coefficient and the value of the covariance itself
the relative gains of accuracy and the penalties of correlated measurements
Attention: Only measured variables are possible in this report file.
Example of a Covariance Analysis report for correction of measurements:
SUMMARY REPORTS (<MAIN>.SUM)

The default report displays for each variable, starting with the measured ones:
the number of measurements (Mea.)
its measured value and accuracies (absolute and relative), plus relative gain of accuracy
and penalty if measurements are defined
Example of a "Summary" report:
In case of a variable fixed by one of its bound, 'H' or 'L' will appear in the column for measurements
count (first line of variable) to show the active bound.
SPREAD-SHEET COMPATIBLE SUMMARY REPORT

This displays for each variable, starting with the measured ones:
the number of measurements (Mea.)
its measured value and accuracies (absolute and relative), plus relative gain of accuracy
and penalty if measurements are defined
Example of a "Spread-sheet compatible" report:
The main difference with the normal report is that all the information is now on one single line.
In case of variable fixed by one of its bound, flag 'H' or 'L' will be raised in the column following the
physical units.
5.3 HOW TO PERFORM A SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS
To generate the Sensitivity Analysis reports, you must first run your Validation model with the
option -SNS. The intermediate file required for the sensitivity analysis will also be generated when -
VDI option is used.
VALI then generates <model>.fmt where <model> is the name of the main PFD of your model. This
file contains the information required for the Sensitivity Analysis
. It also generates several default reports:
<model>.res: variables and measurements analysis (not generated with -VDI option)
<model>.vcv: variables values covariance analysis
<model>.dcv: measurements corrections covariance analysis
<model>.sum: summary report
<model>.sds
<modell>_xml.res: xml global report, containing all results. This file is meant to be read by
ValiAnalytics
If you want to customize the report contained in <model>.res, you must then use the programme
called Sensiv.exe located in the \bin directory of Belsim installation. The following steps must be
completed:
specify the model you want to analyse
define the settings of the analysis:
variables to be analysed
measurements to be analysed
options
run the Sensitivity Analysis
browse your report
STEP 1 : SPECIFYING THE MODEL TO BE ANALYZED

The model to be analysed is either specified in the file sensiv.vif or directly when running the
sensitivity analysis.
The file sensiv.vif has 4 lines:
line 1: S to define the analysis from the screen (step 2), F to read the settings of the analysis
from the file <model>.com
line 2: name of the model to be analysed
line 3: code for the spreadsheet settings: code = SEP + DEC + ALP:
SEP: the ASCII code of the fie ld se parator (from 0 to 127)
DEC:
1000 if the de cimal characte r is the comma
0 if the de cimal characte r is the dot
ALP:
2000 if te xt fie lds must be e nclose d be twe e n quote s
0 othe rwise
line 4: line for options, actually, the only option re cognize d is the -VDI which can be use d in orde r
to ge ne rate a se t of re port similar as whe n -VDI option is use d to run the mode l in VALI. The
de fault is to ke e p a blank line to ge t the de fault re ports cove ring all the variable s.
STEP 2 : DEFINING THE SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS

The settings of the analysis can be specified either in the file <model>.com or directly when running
the sensitivity analysis . (<model> stands for the main PFD of the model.)
Depending on the selections you have made, three different reports are produced:
selecting neither variables nor measurements produces the default report with measured
and validated values and accuracies of all variables
selecting only variables generates the variables analysis report with measured and
validated values and accuracies of the selected variables. On request, measurements
contributing to the validated variances are listed with optionally the sensitivity of
selected variables to the measurements value
selecting only measurements produces the measurements analysis report with the list of
variables that have a significant part of their validated variance due to the accuracy of the
selected measurements
selecting both variables and measurements allows you to get a variable analysis report
showing the sensitivities of variables to measurements values even when their
contribution are low (or zero)
In all the cases, the summary report file (<model.sum>) and the covariance report files (<model>.vcv
and <model>.dcv) will be filled at the end of the process taking into account the relevant options used
for the definition of the last section of the command file.
In the case of existing command file in the directory used to run VALI, the file is not replaced
allowing the use of personal settings to overwrite defaults.
The file <model>.com can contain the following commands:
:INCLUDE <FILENAME>: includes commands from the file <filename>
:OUTPUT <FILENAME>: print the analysis results of the current section in the file
<filename>. By default, the report file is <model>.res
:SPREAD: when following the definition of an output file leads to generation of all the
following reports if spreadsheet format
Trick : modify the default <model>.com file introducing the line :SPREAD after the line :OUTPUT
<model>.res will lead to reports in spreadsheet format.
VARIABLE TYP NAME VAR: defines the variables to be analysed (one line per
variable):
TYP: the type of object (UNIT, STREAM)

NAME: the name if the object
VAR: the name of the parameter of the object (T, P, MASSF, etc.)
Wildcards (*, ?) can be used in any of the fields.
Example:
VARIABLE STREAM IN MASSF
MEASUREMENT TAGNAME: defines the measurements to be analysed (one line per

measurement)
TAGNAME: the name of the TAG defining the measurement. Wildcards (*, ?) can be used
Example:
MEASUREMENT IN_MASSF
NUMCONT N
N: the maximum number of contributors to be shown for each measurement or

variable. This parameter will also been considered for the covariance analysis
MINCONT VAL: contributors with a value lower than VAL are excluded from the list.
This parameter will also be considered for the covariance analysis
SENSCONT Y: forces the display of the sensitivities for each contributor
END: identifies the end of a section and initiates the analysis
STEP 3: RUNNING THE SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS

To run the sensitivity analysis, you must run the program Sensiv.exe located in the \bin directory of
your Belsim installation. The easiest way to use it is to define a short-cut to it on your desktop and to
specify your work directory as the Start-up directory.
If you have not defined the model in step1, Sensiv will prompt you for the relevant information.
If you have not defined the analysis in step2, Sensiv will also prompt you for the relevant
information. You can at this stage ask to create the file defining the analysis so that you can reuse it
later on.
STEP 4: BROWSING THE REPORT FILES

The results files can be browsed directly with any text editor. The spread-sheet formatted files can
also be imported in any commercial spread-sheet package.
5.4 THEORETICAL BACKGROUND
The following theory is developed for a single measurement on each measured variable. It can be
extended to multiple measurements cases by first computing weighted average values for measured
data (both measurement's value and measurement's accuracy).
In case of non diagonal covariance matrix (a priori covariance coefficients provided by user), the
multiple measurements are avoided by creating additional variable and link equation.
NOTATIONS
Y array of the MES corrected or validated measurements.
array of the MES average measured values.
σ² array of the MES average variance associated with each measurement.
X array of the NMES unmeasured variables to be calculated.
F(X,Y) array of NEQ constraint equations (balance, equilibrium and link equations).
SOLVING THE VALIDATION PROBLEM

The constraint equations will iteratively be linearised around kth successive approximation of (Xk, Yk)
and can thus be expressed as:
where:
is a (NEQ x MES) constant coefficient matrix
is a (NEQ x NMES) constant coefficient matrix
is a (NEQ) constant coefficient vector
The validation problem can be expressed as a constrained minimisation problem:
s.t
with the weighting matrix which enables the relative precision of the MES measurements to be
quantified.
As a matter of fact, this matrix is the inverse of the a priori covariance matrix
If the covariance elements are equal to 0, the matrix is diagonal and its elements are the inverse of
variance s2i of the measurements:
The definition of the covariance matrix is made according to the VDI 2048 specification.
The constrained problem can be transformed into an unconstrained one by using Lagrange
formulation (equivalent to the formula 114 of VDI specifications):
where is a (NEQ) vector (Lagrange multipliers).
Stationary conditions are:
These conditions can be formally expressed as:
by defining the total Jacobian matrix J and the array E and D:
Both Y and X arrays appear as linear combinations of array of measurement data .
In these expressions, matrices A and B (hidden in J-1) are calculated after convergence (solution) of
the validation problem.
THE COVARIANCE MATRIX OF VALIDATED MEASUREMENTS

Considering a function (or array of function) defined from the linear combination of the different
variables measured and known with a defined uncertainty, it is possible to estimate the variance of
the result values :
and
where:
is the matrix of linear coefficient, which can also be called sensitivity matrix
Ss is the covariance matrix of the measurements
Sg is the covariance of the derived functions
This relation is similar to the equation 192 of the VDI 2048 specifications which has been used for
computation of the guarantee conditions.
Now, if we consider the functions linking the validated values of measured variables with the values
of measurements (see above), the covariance matrix of validated values can be expressed as:
where:
J-1 1,MES is built from the 1 to MES first lines and contains MES columns
The formula is also taking into accounts the fact that both J-1 and P are symmetrical matrices, and
that P is the inverse of the a priori covariance matrix.
With this procedure, it is possible to define a posteriori accuracy for measured and variables.
Actually, VALI is computing only a posteriori variances (s2) which are converted to standard
deviation (s) and reported to the user. This means that VALI is computing only diagonal elements of
the a posteriori covariance matrix.
Extension to off diagonal elements has been made in the external programme SENSIV and is reported
in a separate report file available only when sensitivity analysis is made. In fact, we are reporting the
covariance factor defined from the following formula:
where:
ρ is the matrix of the correlation coefficients
The values are in the range -1, +1. Absolute value close to 1 means a strong interaction between the
variables. This can help for detection of gross error by showing which measurements are conflicting.
It is possible to identify the covariance matrix of the deviation of the measured variables considering
the following definition for the deviations:
In VALI default mode, the a posteriori values reported for the correlation coefficients are relative to
the validated values of the measurements. When the VDI mode is selected, the a posteriori
covariances reported are relative to the deviations between the validated value and the value of the
measurement.
The covariance matrix of the deviations can be calculated from the following relationships coming
from formulas 130 & 132 of VDI 2048 specifications:
and
where:
is the improvement vector
The test suggested by formula 129 of the VDI 2048 specifications is based on the same definition of the
correlation coefficient which leads to:
Another main difference between the VALI and the VDI mode is that only measured variables
suspected to be linked with gross error are reported. In the latter case the criterion used for the
detection of measured variables to be reported is coming from the formula 141 of the VDI 2048
specifications:
The value of the chi-square with a statistical certainty of 95 % is reported (in case of VALI mode, the
certainty level can be changed). When the value of the objective function is greater than this value, a
flag is raised.
The criteria is (VDI 2048 specifications formula 126):
where :
r is the redundancy of the problem defined as the number of measurements coming in

addition to the number strictly necessary to get a calculable system. When bounds are
activated, the number of active bounds is added to the redundancy
It is then possible to identify the suspected measurements from reports and to generate a covariance
analysis to identify the correlated variables (VDI 2048 formulas 141 and 129).
HANDLING OF BOUNDS
When using SQPIP solver, it is possible to handle bounds on a rigorous way. The solver is an
optimiser designed to handle bounds for all the variables of the system. The problem solved is now:
For the calculation of the a posteriori covariance matrix, we consider that the variables that are
activating the Interior Point procedure of the solver can be considered as constant fixed to the bound
value.
This means that for the a posteriori analysis, we are considering that the following equivalent
problem is solved:
The additional set of constrains expresses that the corresponding variables can be considered as
constant and are equal to the activated bound (upper or lower). Practically, this means that we add a
new line to the matrix (for a bound on measured variable) or matrix (for a bound on
unmeasured variable).
THE COVARIANCE MATRIX OF UNMEASURED VARIABLES

The calculation of a posteriori covariance matrix can be extended to unmeasured variable
considering the linearised relationship with the measurement.
Considering the equation 192 of the VDI 2048 specifications for the previous functions linking the
unmeasured variables with the values of measurements, the covariance of the unmeasured variables
can be expressed as:
where:
is built from the MES+1 to MES+NMES first lines and contains MES
columns
The formula is also taking into accounts the fact that P is symmetrical matrix and is inverse of a
priori covariance matrix.
VALI is reporting the a posteriori variances (σ²) which are converted to standard deviations (σ). The
off diagonal elements are representing the a posteriori covariance matrix between the umeasured
variables.
The overall a posteriori covariance matrix can be expressed by the following formula:
where:
is a square matrix of dimension MES + NMES.
This formula is obtained considering that unmeasured variables have a standard deviation equal to
infinite (This leads to the zero values around the matrix). We can define a priori covariance
matrix equal to and we can also consider the limit following behaviour:
It is therefore possible to express the covariance matrix of the unmeasured variables with the
measured ones according to the following formula:
This formula is used in the external application, which is performing the extended sensitivity
analysis (SENSIV). Once again, the programme is reporting the correlation coefficients.
MULTIPLE MEASUREMENTS ON A SINGLE VARIABLE

The theory described here above can be extended to multiple measurements cases by first computing
weighted average values for measured data (both measurement's value and measurement's standard
deviation).
In case of non diagonal covariance matrix (a priori covariance coefficients provided by user), the
multiple measurements are avoided by creating additional variable and link equation.
Weighted average values differ from the usual arithmetic average. The formula below gives more
weight to the most accurate measurements.
with nti the number of measurements associated with the measured variable i and j the index of this
measurement in the subset of measurements corresponding to the variable.
SPECIFICITY OF VDI MODE

When VALI is running in VDI mode, the precision given to each measurement is expressed in terms
of 95% confidence interval, rather than in terms of standard deviations. The 95% confidence interval
size is used for both input and outputs by the programme. The relationship between the two values
is a simple conversion factor:
The second specific point is that all the covariance analysis is made for the deviations of the
measured variables (ν). The analysis with the VALI mode is made for the covariances between the
validated values.
The two cases are identified by the titles of the tables presented in the report.
With the VDI mode, the first table is named 'Measurement' and the second is named 'Corrections'. In
VALI mode, the title of the first table is 'Variable' and the title of the second one is 'Measurement'.
The last difference between values reported in the tables is the definition of the penalties. In case of
VDI mode, the penalty is defined from the following definition that has been provided by the VDI
2048 specifications (formula 141 is using the square root of the penalty reported):
In VALI mode, the penalty reported is corresponding to the following definition:
When VDI mode is selected, the covariance analysis is always performed but only for suspect
measurements for which penalties are biggest than (1.96)2 according to the VDI 2048 specifications
(formula 141).
Another main difference is that VALI approach is making connection between the measured values
and the resulting validated values (measured and unmeasured) considering all of them as functions
resulting from linear combination of measurement values when solution is reached. In the VDI2048,
all the mathematical developments are made considering the deviations (n) following detailed
statistical developments.
The table below details the difference in notation between VALI formulation and VDI formulation.
On the other side a number of abbreviations are used in VALI report files. Their correspondence to
VDI nomenclature is described in the following table:
SECTION 6: TRICKS AND TIPS

6.1 HOW TO INITIALIZE A MODEL ?
As VALI is based on an equation solver approach, an initial value must be set to all its variables.
Adequate initial values are taken by VALI from the results of preceding runs and from user given
initial values. If such a value is not available, then default values are given to the variables.
However, in some cases these initial values are not adequate to ensure model convergence.
VALI VARIABLES INITIALISATION PROCEDURES

VALI has two default procedures to generate the starting values of the variables. You can change the
behaviour of this procedure thanks to the parameter INIT of the OPTVAL unit:
INIT=1: Priority is given to the measurements. Whenever it is possible, measured values

will be used to determine the initial values. For unmeasured variables which cannot be
determined on basis of other measurements, the initial variables values are kept if they are
feasible. Otherwise, arbitrary values are used
INIT=0: The initial variables values are kept if they are feasible. Otherwise, arbitrary
values are used
By default INIT=1.
The arbitrary values are:
T = 500 K for the temperature,
P = 10 bar for the pressure,
MIXF = 1 / number of outlet STREAMs in the case of a SPLVAL UNIT,
Partial flowrates = 1 / number of Compounds kmol/s.
The default procedure based on the measurements is recommended when creating a new model.
When the model has been run successfully, using the initial variables values is usually better.
METHODOLOGY FOR AN EASY MODEL INITIALISATION

An efficient way to initialise a model is to proceed as follows :
validate each PFD separately, using only mass balances (set MODE to 1 or use the -MBO
runtime option). This will usually require the addition of some pseudo-measurements
that you can remove later
validate each PFD separately, adding progressively the other balances (heat balances,
liquid/vapour equilibrium, efficiencies, etc.)
validate progressively the full model by progressively activating the various PFDs
Attention: Part of a model can be set OUT by setting units or PFDs OUT via the measurements files.
Reasonable starting points must be provided for the composition of the liquid and vapour streams
that are outlets of liquid/vapour separators (LVEVAL).
6.2 SOLVING CONVERGENCE PROBLEMS
REASONS FOR NO CONVERGENCE

After a successful verification and analysis phase, a failure to solve the model can happen in various
ways:
the Jacobian matrix can be structurally singular
the Jacobian matrix can be numerically singular
the model cannot be converged after the maximum number of iterations
a thermodynamic calculation fails
In case of a structurally singular matrix Vali can detect what equations are introducing the
singularity. These equations are listed in the file <model>.r1v.
When reaching a numerically singular matrix, Vali starts a Post-Mortem Analysis Phase, which
sometimes, but not always, allows to detect the equations and variables linked to the problem.
Again, the information will be provided in the file <model>.r1v.
When not reaching convergence after the specified maximum number of iterations, Vali will anyway
generate a report with the best solution found so far. If at least one feasible solution (that is a
solution that satisfies the constraints) has been found, then the "best solution" will be the feasible
solution that minimises the total penalty. If no feasible solution has been found, then the "best
solution" will be the solution that minimises the sum of residues of the constraints.
Failing to converge the validation model is in most cases due either to a wrong problem definition or
to a bad initialisation point. Applying the method proposed in the section "How to initialise a model"
here above should solve most of the problems due to a wrong initialisation point.
LOOKING IN VALI REPORT FILES

A first step is to look for more information into the various results file of Vali.
The file <model>.r1v will indicate, for example, inadequate initial values which are replaced by
default values. You should check whether these default values are meaningful. You can look after the
variables that have violated their bounds several times (search for string VIOL). These variables are
often (but not always) sources of convergence problems.
You can also look in the full report (<model>.r4v ) for measurements that are extensively corrected
by Vali.
You can also request the generation of debugging files (-dbg runtime option), with a trace of the
equation residues, variables values and measurements values though the iterations.
6.3 HOW TO CHECK THE COHERENCE OF A MODEL ?
To check the coherence of a model, you can:
review the inlets and outlets of streams of your model in the global balance table of the
report file (<model>.r4v or htm)
look in the table of unmeasured variables and check their a posteriori accuracy. Variables
with a very high a posteriori accuracy are a source of convergence problems. Additional
measurements should be defined in order to reduce this uncertainty. Candidates for new
measurements can be found by looking at the contributors listed in the sensitivity
analysis report
look at the constants of your model and verify whether these variables are really to be
considered constant
6.4 HOW TO DEAL WITH CLOSED LOOPS ?
The modelling of a closed loop, without any purge stream leads to a singular Jacobian matrix because
of inappropriate mass balances that are generated when closing loop. This problem can be solved in
two ways :
the preferred method is to open the loop and to add temperature and pressure equalities
between the two corresponding streams (use unit CUTVAL)
another solution is to add a purge and an inlet stream to the loop and to fix one of these
two flow rates to a small value
6.5 DEALING WITH NEGATIVE FLOW RATES
By default, VALI does accept to reach a solution with negative flowrates when the corresponding
streams are not involved in Heat balances or LVE constraints. Getting negative flow rates as a
solution is usually the indication of an incoherence in the structure of your model or of major errors
in your measurements.
Setting the parameter NEGATFLR of OPTVAL to 1, will avoid getting negative flow rates in any case.
However, this can sometimes also prohibit convergence of the model.
Note also then when using the new SQP-IP solver, negative flow rates are never accepted.
6.6 HOW TO SWITCH BETWEEN OPERATING POINTS?
In some cases a given process can be operated in very different modes. For example, a power plant
can be operated at full load or at partial load, in summer or winter conditions. The same validation
model can normally be used for these various operating modes. When necessary, parts of the model
can be switched off or not depending on the operation mode.
When used in on-line operation, the variations between two operating points are usually small and
do not cause any convergence problem.
However, when used in off-line mode, the difference between two consecutive points can be very
important and can cause convergence problems. In such a case, it is recommended to save typical
operating conditions of the various modes using the DATA UNIT and DATA STREAM keywords in an
output section of a measurements file. You can then re-use those typical operating conditions files as
new starting point for a corresponding mode.
6.7 CUSTOMIZING REPORTS
The following topics are covered in this sub-section:
modifying the <model>.r4v report
requesting the <model>.prn report
producing reports with data and measurements files
The preferred tool to build customized reports is ValiReport.
CUSTOMIZING THE R4V REPORT

The REPVAL unit can be used to change the lay-out of the r4v report created by VALI.
Each section can be activated or de-activated independently and the section REPVAL for more
information.
REQUESTING THE <MODEL>.PRN REPORT

The <model>.prn report is activated via the -PRN Vali Runtime option. This report contains all the
data of all streams and is designed to be imported in an Excel (or any other) work-sheet.
PRODUCING REPORTS WITH MEASUREMENT FILES

The TABLE commands of the Output section of the measurement files can be used to generate various
customised reports.
Alternatively measurement files can be used to extract data related to unit and streams on a "one
value per line" basis. These reports can be used as input of a spreadsheet to produce dedicated
reports.
Prepare the output section of your data file to extract the required information. Then, insert the
result file in your spreadsheet. Define in another section of your spreadsheet the report as required
by referencing the values in the section when you imported the data file.
For a detailed description of measurements files see section "Using measurement files".
6.8 USER-DEFINED PHYSICAL UNITS
You can easily add your own physical units by introducing them in the file pud.cfg in the \usr
directory of your installation. Each line defines a new physical on basis of the following syntax:
UT CF1 CF2 D NAME
where:
UT: the unit type (see table below for units types and default Belsim units)
CF1: a multiplying correction factor
CF2: an adding correction factor
D: a the number of digits after the decimal point in the result boxes
NAME: a name of the physical units.(This name cannot contain any blank character)
CF1 and CF2 must be such that when multiplying the value expressed in user-defined units by CF1
and adding the term CF2 one gets the value expressed in Belsim default physical units.
Bls_Value = CF1*User_Value + CF2
For example, the definition of °F is as follows:
TE 5.5555555556E-01 2.5537222222E+02 2 F
AD - adime nsional MS kJ/kmol/C molar he at capacity
AR m2 are a MT kmol/m2/s molar diffusion coe fficie nt
CO kW/m/K conductivity MV m3/kmol molar volume
CT kW/K he at transfe r factor MW kg/kmol mole cular we ight
DE d60/60 de nsity at 60°F vs wate r at 60°F PC Euro curre ncy unit
DF m2/s diffusivity coe f./surface PO kW powe r

ve locity
DP bar pre ssure diffe re nce PR bar pre ssure
DT K/m te mpe rature gradie nt RE m2*s*K/kJ the rmal re sistance
FX - use r parame te rs RS RPM rotation spe e d
GL 1/m 1/le ngth SP m/s ve locity
HC kJ/K he at capacity SW kg/m3 spe cific we ight
HT kW/m2/K he at transfe r coe fficie nt TC kW/C conduction coe fficie nt
HW kJ/kg we ight e nthalpy TE K te mpe rature
IT 1/s 1/time TI s time
K1 kmol cata/m3 mol of catalyst pe r volume TR K re lative te mpe rature
K2 kg cata/m3 we ight of catalyst pe r volume VF m3/s volume tric flow
LG m le ngth VO m3 volume
MF kmol/s molar flow rate WF kg/s mass flow
MH kcal/mol molar e nthalpy WS kJ/kg/K he at capacity on mass basis
MM kg mass WV m3/kg mass volume
Attention:
1. The names of physical units should be unique, even for different types of physical units.
2. The physical unit configuration file is read when starting ValiModeller application. After any
change in this file, you must therefore restart ValiModeller application.
3. User physical units can also be defined through ValiModeller.
SECTION 7: VALI ERROR MESSAGES

7.1 VALI ERROR HANDLING FACILITY
VALI error handling facility has been developed in order to give the most relevant information on
the correctness of your model and to help you in case of problems.
VALI error messages are identified by an alphanumeric code of the following form:
*COD* NUM MESSAGE
where:
COD: the level of gravity of the error:
INF: Information: this is a simple information message
WRN: Warning: a particular situation that could be a source of error in the model is
detected. A corrective measure has been taken, but it should not affect the quality of
the results
ERR: Error: an error has been detected. A corrective measure has been taken. Vali
should run correctly but the results could be affected
ERS: Severe Error: a severe error has been detected. A corrective action has been taken.
Calculation will proceed but the results are probably wrong
ERF: Fatal Error: a fatal error has been detected for which no corrective action could be
taken. The calculation will stop
NUM: the error number (4digits)
MESSAGE: the error that has been detected
Example:
*INF*2472 MEASUREMENT T STREAM FUME.1 SHOWS A
STANDARD DEVIATION > 1.E+8 AND IS NOT TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT.
A summary of the errors detected in each phase is produced in the Run VALI windows and at the
end of the Log file (<model>.r1v).
FIGURE 6 - S UMMARY OF THE ERRORS
*ERF* 1003 NUMBER OF TAGS EXCEEDS I

You have defined too many tags. Please contact Belsim S.A.
*ERF* 2436 SINGULAR SUBSET OF EQUATIONS

This fatal error occurs when a subset of equations contains one or more equations which are linear
combinations of the other equations.
As the equations generated by VALI for each UNIT cannot be linearly dependant, the origin of this
fatal error lies in the topology of the model.
A typical case is discussed below.
The process includes a loop whose material flow contains a chemical Compound which does not
enter or exit this loop. To overcome the fatal error generated by this situation, remove the
Compound from the THERMOD used in the STREAMS which constitutes the loop, or introduce this
Compound in the THERMOD of the incoming and outgoing STREAMS.
In the <model>.r1v file, you will find:
the list of the equations belonging to the singular subset of equations
the list of variables (whether measured or not) as well as the constants involved in these
equations
*ERF* 2512 RATES MEASUREMENT TYPE OBJECT PARAMETER HAS NO

MEANING BECAUSE THE RATES CONTAINS ONLY ONE NON ZERO
COMPOUND
Due to the model definition, VALI has detected that all but one partial flowrate of this STREAM are
equal to zero. Therefore, any measurement of composition has no meaning and VALI cannot consider
it.
For example, a BBXVAL UNIT could have two inlet STREAMS whose associated THERMOD contains
one Compound CH1 and one outlet STREAM whose associated THERMOD contains two Compounds
CH1 and CH2. During the model analysis, VALI detects that CH2 cannot exist at the outlet and
generates a measurement which specifies that the partial flowrate of CH2 equals zero with a zero
accuracy for the outlet STREAM. The outlet stream has therefore only one component and any
composition measurement has no meaning. In this case, you must introduce the Compound CH2 in
the THERMOD associated to the inlet STREAMS.
Another situation similar to the first one is when the THERMOD associated to the inlet STREAMS
contains also CH2 and you have specified that the inlet partial flowrates equal zero with a zero
accuracy. VALI will again identify that the outlet stream has only one component and that any
composition has no meaning. In this case, you must remove some CH1 composition measurements.
In general, to overcome this error, you must redefine correctly your measurements or introduce the
Compound in some THERMODS.
*ERF* 2523 MEASUREMENT ... CANNOT BE EQUAL TO ZERO WITH A ZERO

STANDARD DEVIATION
This fatal error occurs when you request that a total flowrate should be equal to zero.
To overcome this error, replace the measurement value by a 1.D-6, for instance, while keeping its
standard deviation equal to zero or preferably set the STREAM OFF.
*ERF* 2553 UNDETERMINED RECYCLE

This fatal error occurs if VALI identifies a loop whose flowing stream contains at least one chemical
compound for which there is no associated measurement to calculate its recycle flowrate.
Undetermined pressure loops can also occur.
7.2 ERRORS PRODUCED IN THE "MODEL ANALYSIS" PHASE
These fatal errors are due to a poor definition of your model and consist mainly in:
a lack of measurements
wrong measurement values
Overcoming these fatal errors generally requires to look for more details in the file <model>.r1v file.
*ERF* 2424 NOT ENOUGH MEASUREMENTS TO SOLVE WHOLE PROBLEM

This error occurs when there are not enough measurements to reach a positive level of redundancy
in all parts of the model. This error can occur even when the global level of redundancy is positive if
there are not enough measurements in a sub-section of the process.
In such a case a list of supplementary measurements is produced in the <model>.r1v file, together
with the list of variables and equations that can be validated or at least calculated.
There are three ways to overcome this situation:
add new measurements
simplify the description of the process
add new equations
Add new measurements
You can directly cut and paste some of the TAG definitions proposed by VALI in the <model>.r1v
file.. Select one TAG definition in each group of supplementary measurements
*ERF*2424 NOT ENOUGH MEASUREMENTS TO SOLVE WHOLE PROBLEM
SUPPLEMENTARY MEASUREMENT ( 1 ) OUGHT TO BE CHOSEN AMONG VARIABLES:

POWT_POWER STREAM POWT POWER 31710. -5.0 kW
COMP_EFFIC UNIT COMP EFFIC 0.76000 -5.0 -
POWC_POWER STREAM POWC POWER 15610. -5.0 kW
FUME.2_T STREAM FUME.2 T 1009.3 -5.0 C
AIR.1_T STREAM AIR.1 T 15.000 -5.0 C
AIR.2_P STREAM AIR.2 P 14.932 -5.0 bar
FUME.1_P STREAM FUME.1 P 14.832 -5.0 bar
SUPPLEMENTARY MEASUREMENT ( 2 ) OUGHT TO BE CHOSEN AMONG VARIABLES:

POWT_POWER STREAM POWT POWER 31710. -5.0 kW
COMP_EFFIC UNIT COMP EFFIC 0.76000 -5.0 -
POWC_POWER STREAM POWC POWER 15610. -5.0 kW
FIGURE 7 - LIS T OF S UPPLEMENTARY MEAS UREMENTS TO BE S ELECTED
Simplify the description of the process
To help you, VALI lists the equations which cannot be considered during data validation.
The names of the equations which are in this list gives you an idea on the UNITs involved in at least
one process subsection which suffers from lack of information. A careful analysis of these UNITs
may sometimes indicate the possibility of grouping several UNITs into a single one.
Add new equations
If the variables and the equations which appear in the lists are related to a liquid-vapour separator,
you could add the liquid-vapour relationships. Anyway, you must be aware that the quality of the
results will depend upon the ability of the thermodynamic model you are using to describe the liquid
and vapour fugacities of the mixture.
It is also possible to introduce your own modelling constraints with OPXVAL or FLXVAL type of
units.
*ERF* 2436 SINGULAR SUBSET OF EQUATIONS

This fatal error occurs when a subset of equations contains one or more equations which are linear
combinations of the other equations.
As the equations generated by VALI for each UNIT cannot be linearly dependant, the origin of this
fatal error lies in the topology of the model.
A typical case is discussed below.
The process includes a loop whose material flow contains a chemical Compound which does not
enter or exit this loop. To overcome the fatal error generated by this situation, remove the
Compound from the THERMOD used in the STREAMS which constitutes the loop, or introduce this
Compound in the THERMOD of the incoming and outgoing STREAMS.
In the <model>.r1v file, you will find:
the list of the equations which belong to the singular subset of equations
the list of variables (whether measured or not) as well as the constants involved in these
equations
*ERF* 2483 UNFEASIBLE MEASUREMENT VALUES

This fatal error occurs when some of the measurement values are not physically possible.
Typical situations are:
a temperature (K) lower than 0
a composition (-) higher than 1
a composition or flowrate lower than 0
a composition or flowrate equal to 0 with an accuracy which differs from 0
*ERF* 2489 OVERSPECIFICATIONS

In the list of measurements, you set the accuracy to zero of some of them to consider them constants.
The error occurs when the number of constants is so high that the number of equations in which
they occur is bigger than the number of involved variables. The solution of these equations is then
impossible.
*ERF* 2490 THE VARIABLE ... DOES NOT OCCUR IN THE EQUATIONS
This error will be issued for all pressure variables that are only appearing in heat balances equations
where their influence is assumed to be negligible in the analysis phase.
This fatal error could also appear if you are using a new type of UNIT. In that case, contact BELSIM S.
A to overcome the error.
*ERF* 2491 THE EQUATION ... DOES NOT CONTAIN ANY VARIABLE
This fatal error could only appear if you are using a new type of UNIT. Contact BELSIM S.A to solve
this error.
*ERF* 2493 PARTIAL FLOWRATE MEASUREMENT ... CANNOT BE CONSIDERED

BECAUSE VALI HAS DETECTED THAT IT IS EQUAL TO ZERO
This fatal error occurs when you provide a partial flowrate measurement while VALI detected that
this partial flowrate should be equal to zero.
A typical situation refers to a mixer whose outlet STREAM contains a Compound which is not
present in the inlet STREAMS. In this case, VALI generates a measurement which specifies that the
related partial flowrate is equal to zero with an accuracy equal to zero. The measurement you
provide enters into conflict with the measurement generated by VALI.
To overcome this error, you must redefine correctly the THERMODs involved in the model.
*ERF* 2506 COMPOSITION MEASUREMENT ... CANNOT BE CONSIDERED

BECAUSE VALI HAS DETECTED THAT THE RELATED PARTIAL FLOWRATE IS
EQUAL TO ZERO
This fatal error occurs when you provide a composition measurement with a non zero accuracy
while VALI has detected that the associated partial flowrate is equal to zero.
A typical situation refers to a mixer where you have measured at the outlet a significant composition
for one Compound which is not present in the THERMOD associated with the inlet STREAMS.
VALI will, in this case, eliminate the mass balance equation and add a measurement which specifies
that this outlet partial flowrate is equal to zero with an accuracy equal to zero.
To overcome this error, introduce the Compound in the appropriate THERMOD in order to make
your measurement consistent with your model definition.
*ERF* 2512 RATES MEASUREMENT ... HAS NO MEANING BECAUSE THIS

RATES CONTAINS ONLY ONE NON ZERO COMPOUND
Due to the model definition, VALI has detected that all but one partial flowrates of this STREAM are
equal to zero. Therefore, any measurement of composition has no meaning and VALI cannot consider
it.
For example, a BBXVAL UNIT could have two inlet STREAMs whose associated THERMOD contains
one Compound CH1 and one outlet STREAM whose associated THERMOD contains two Compounds
CH1 and CH2. During the model analysis, VALI detects that CH2 cannot exist at the outlet and
generates a measurement which specifies that the partial flowrate of CH2 equals zero with a zero
accuracy for the outlet STREAM. The outlet stream has therefore only one component and any
composition measurement has no meaning. In this case, you must introduce the Compound CH2 in
the THERMOD associated to the inlet STREAMs.
Another situation similar to the first one is when the THERMOD associated to the inlet STREAMs
contains also CH2 and you have specified that the inlet partial flowrates equal zero with a zero
accuracy. VALI will again identify that the outlet stream has only one component and that any
composition has no meaning. In this case, you must remove some CH1 composition measurements.
In general, to overcome this error, you must redefine correctly your measurements or introduce the
Compound in some THERMODs.
*ERF* 2523 MEASUREMENT ... CANNOT BE EQUAL TO ZERO WITH A ZERO

STANDARD DEVIATION
This fatal error occurs when you request that a total flowrate should be equal to zero.
To overcome this error, replace the measurement value by a 1.D-6, for instance, while keeping its
standard deviation equal to zero or preferably set the STREAM OFF.
*ERF* 2535 ALL THE VARIABLES OCCURRING IN EQUATION ARE

MEASUREMENTS WITH A ZERO STANDARD DEVIATION
This fatal error occurs when all the variables occurring in the specified equation are considered as
constants because of measurements with a standard deviation equal to zero.
To overcome this error, identify the occurring variables and provide a non zero value for the
standard deviation of one of them.
*ERF* 2553 UNDETERMINED RECYCLE

This fatal error occurs if VALI identifies a loop whose flowing stream contains at least one chemical
compound for which there is no associated measurement to calculate its recycle flowrate.
Undetermined pressure loops can also occur.
7.3 ERRORS PRODUCED IN THE "MODEL RESOLUTION" PHASE
As VALI works as an equation solver, it is often necessary to examine the residuals of each equations
at each iteration as well as the values of the occurring variables.
These results can be looked at in the <model>.r3v file or in the trace files produced through the -DBG
runtime option.
Whether you run your model for the first time or not, VALI automatically generates starting values
for all the variables. No convergence situations may of course be due to poor estimates of these
variables. The procedure used in VALI is explained in section "How to initialize a model".
*ERF* 2501 MAXIMUM CAPACITY OF JACOBIAN MATRIX IS REACHED

This error occurs when the maximum number of non zero elements in the Jacobian matrix is reached.
A way to overcome this situation is to split your model into smaller models that can be run
successively.
If you cannot proceed in this way, contact BELSIM S.A to get a copy of VALI with a larger size for the
arrays. The maximum size depends upon the size of core memory of your computer.
*ERF* 2509 ALL PARTIAL FLOWRATES OF RATES ... BECOME EQUAL TO ZERO
This error occurs when all the partial flowrates of a STREAM become equal to zero.
In most cases, this STREAM corresponds to a process purge and the flowrates and composition
measurements which have been provided are of poor quality.
To overcome this error, we advise you to specify a small value for the incriminated flowrate together
with a zero accuracy and to run again VALI. The analysis of the measurement correction should
help you to identify the poor measurements.
*ERF* 2540 THE JACOBIAN MATRIX IS SINGULAR

This is certainly one of the most difficult error to overcome.
Two common situations may generate this fatal error.
The first one concerns the case where you have measured the temperature of a one component
stream which is in the liquid-vapour state.
The second one deals with recycling streams where you do not provide any measurement to fix their
flowrate.
We advise you to decompose your model into smaller ones and to run them separately in order to
identify the process section which causes the error. It will then be easier to discover its origin.
*ERF* 2551 NO CONVERGENCE DURING THERMODYNAMIC STATE

CALCULATION OF STREAM ... FOR T ... AND P ...
This error occurs when the state calculation, of the given STREAM for the given temperature and
pressure, do not converge.
This can be due to the fact that the starting values for these variables are poor. We advise you to
provide better ones as explained in section "How to initialize a model".
A second way to overcome this error is to provide realistic STREAM states for each stream in order
to simplify the calculations.

CALCULATION OF STREAM ... FOR H ... AND P ...
This error occurs when the state calculation of the given STREAM for the given enthalpy and
pressure do not converge. The related STREAM contains only one Compound so that the basic
variable is the molar enthalpy and not the temperature.
This can be due to the fact that the starting values for these variables are poor.
We advise you to provide better ones as explained in section "How to initialize a model".
*ERF* 2303 THERMODYNAMIC INCOHERENCE FOR THE ZONE - MPL AND

MPV EQUAL : INSTEAD OF 0 ET 1
A critical review of the results indicates that the outlet streams of a unit involving phase equilibrium
are not really in equilibrium.
This can occur when the trivial solution (same composition in all phases) is obtained.
A better starting point must be given by initializing the compositions of the outlet streams to more
realistic values.
This error can also occur when the streams are in super-critical state, in which case Liquid/Vapour
phase separation is meaningless.

CALCULATION OF STREAM NAME. FOR H ... AND P ...
This error occurs when the state calculation of the given STREAM for the given enthalpy and
pressure do not converge. The related STREAM contains only one Compound so that the basic
variable is the molar enthalpy and not the temperature.
This can be due to the fact that the starting values for these variables are poor.
We advise you to provide better ones as explained in section "How to initialize a model".
CHAPTER 6
DATA VALIDATION
UNITS VI
SECTION 1: SELECTING UNIT TYPES

The type of a UNIT determines what type of equipment is modeled and what equations are
generated.
Black-box/Mixer:
BBXVAL: mixes up to 10 Streams and splits them into up to 10 Streams of different

compositions
EFFVAL: mechanical/thermal Stream efficiency box
CUTVAL: allows breaking the material or pressure loops that can appear when dealing
with closed cycles
NETVAL: network of pipes where Streams are mixed and split up on basis of a product
code
Column:
COLVAL: saturation state of outlet Streams (saturated liquid or vapor) can be specified
DISVAL: tray by tray distillation column calculation model
CRUVAL: same as BBXVAL but petroleum fractions can be identified
Compressor:
COMVAL: includes isentropic efficiency equation
Controllers (user-equations):
ATMOPRES: specifies atmospheric pressure (used a reference for pressure gauges)
EQUVAL: equality of composition between 2 streams
FLEXLIB: user-defined functions
FLXVAL: user-defined equations
OPXVAL: simple equations involving 2 variables
VARVAL: additional variables
Heat exchanger:
ECOVAL: detailed simulation of a heat exchange section in an HRSG.
EEXVAL: can model any heat exchange, no performance equation
HEXVAL: heat exchange between two Streams with performance equation
PRHVAL: heat exchange between a vapor that is condensed and a cold stream
SATVAL: allows you to set any saturation state on a Stream
WALVAL: estimation of heat losses through walls of vessels
Pump:
PUMVAL: useful if one wants to identify pump power or if its power is known or
related to another equipment (driven by a turbine). In many case, pumps are not
modeled.
Reactor:
BATVAL: any Reaction can occur (atomic mass balance)
BWHVAL: as BATVAL but with chemical equilibrium
CND-HNO3: Nitrous Gas Condenser
HEX-HNO3: Nitrous Gas Cooler
RCT-HNO3: NH3 Oxidation
RCTVAL: the possible Reactions are specified
RKIVAL: as RCTVAL but based on kinetics
RKPVAL: as RCTVAL but some reactions can be at (some distance of) chemical
equilibrium
RLVVAL: as RCTVAL but with 2 outlet Streams in L/V equilibrium
Separator:
LLEVAL: Liquid/Liquid equilibrium
LLVVAL: Liquid/Liquid/Vapor equilibrium
LVEVAL: Liquid/Vapor equilibrium
WLEVAL: Water/Liquid equilibrium
WLVVAL: Water/Liquid/Vapor equilibrium
Splitter:
SPLVAL: splits a Stream into up to 10 Streams of same composition
Storage:
TNKVAL: material balance of storage tank (involves accumulation and de-

accumulation)
Turbine:
TURVAL: includes isentropic efficiency equation
Valves:
DPVAL: pressure drop in valves (can be function of rate)
PIPEVAL: models the pressure drop along pipes
MATHEMATICAL UNITS
Mathematical units can only be included in the Main PFD. They determine various global settings at
the model level.
BNDVAL: overwrites the default bounds set on variables.
CRUOPT: defines options used in petroleum fractions, TBP and ATSM handling
CUTOFF: defines the threshold values for the generic CUTOFF on various types of
measurements
GROSSERR: specifies the settings of the Gross Error Elimination algorithm
OPTVAL: defines various mathematical and reporting settings
PRECIS: defines the precision criteria use for thermodynamic calculations
REPVAL: controls the amount and the type of information printed out in the main report
file (r4v)
SECTION 2: ATMOPRES: SETTING ATMOSPHERIC

PRESSURE
PURPOSE
The ATMOPRES unit allows you to introduce one or several measurements of the atmospheric
pressure. All pressure gauges expressed on a relative basis will be converted to absolute pressure
according to the so defined atmospheric pressure.
If several measurements are defined on the atmospheric pressure, the actual reference pressure will
be set to an weighted average value according to the respective uncertainties of the measurements:
where:
atmo_pres: the atmospheric pressure
MEAi: the atmospheric pressure measurements
σi: the relative standard deviation. If the measurement accuracy is absolute, relative
accuracy is recalculated
Attention: Only one ATMOPRES unit can appear in model file. Its name should start with the letters
ATMOP and no other unit should have a name starting by ATMOP.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 1 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT ATMOPRES
CONNECTION RULES
No connections are allowed on the ATMOPRES unit.
UNIT PARAMETERS (SUMMARY)
NAME TAB TYPE DESCRIPTION
PATMO Parame te rs Me asurable Atmosphe ric Pre ssure
SECTION 3: BATVAL: REACTOR WITH ATOMIC

BALANCES
PURPOSE
The BATVAL unit allows you to model reactor and takes the atomic balances, energy balance and
pressure drop into account.
It is well suited for reactors with unknown reaction stoichiometry.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 2 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT BATVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
Type: material (at least one), thermal, mechanical
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
Type: one material as the first outlet (as shown on the symbols), thermal, mechanical
MODE Ge ne ral Input Se le ction of e quations to be take n into account
COMPMODE Ge ne ral Input Compound balance mode
MODEDP Ge ne ral Input Pre ssure e quation
DP Parame te rs Me asurable Pre ssure drop
DPX Parame te rs Input Nominal pre ssure drop
MASSFX Parame te rs Input Nominal flow rate
CFDP Parame te rs Me asurable DP corre ction factor
REFDP Parame te rs Input Re fe re nce stre am for pre ssure drop
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
Selection of equations to be taken into account (type: Input)
0 Atomic and Energy Balance Atomic and energy balances are taken into account
1 Atomic Balance only Only atomic balances are taken into account
COMPMODE (General)
Compound balance mode (type: Input).
1 Enabled Atomic balances are taken into account
3 None Only global mass balance (without atomic balances)

is taken into account.
MODEDP (General)
Pressure equation (type: Input).
0 None No pressure drop equation will be generated
1 DP variable A pressure drop equation will be generated
2 DP=F(MASSF) A pressure drop equation will be generated and the

pressure drop will be a function of the mass flow rate
according to an equation having the following form:
DP = CFDP * DPX * ( MASSF / MASSFX )²
where:
CFDP: a measurable parameter that accounts

for the deviation from the calculated value
(typically measured at 1 with a precision of 20
to 30%)
DPX: the nominal pressure drop
MASSFX: the nominal flow rate
MASSF: the actual flow rate
DP (Parameters)
Pressure drop (type: Measurable).
Calculates pressure drop through the unit, according to following equation:
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
Pref: the pressure of the referece inlet stream
Pout: the pressure of the outlet stream
This equation is not generated if MODEDP = 0.
DPX (Parameters)
Nominal pressure drop (type: Input).
Used in the pressure drop equation when MODEDP = 2.
MASSFX (Parameters)
Nominal flow rate (type: Input).
CFDP (Parameters)
DP correction factor (type: Input).
REFDP (Parameters)
Reference stream for pressure drop (type: Input).
0 All inlets All inlet streams are set at the same pressure
1, 2, 3, etc. <stream> Indicates which inlet stream is used as reference for

the pressure drop equation. The pressures of the inlet
streams are not related
EXAMPLE : COMBUSTION OF NATURAL GAS

Attention: see model batval.bls in the directory "examples\batval". A unit of type BATVAL is also
used in the example coal.bls (coal fired power plant).
A pressure drop of 0.05 bar is taken into account between the air inlet and the fumes outlet.
The atomic and energy balances are taken into account simultaneously and a heat loss is modeled.
FIGURE 3 - BATVAL EXAMPLE: COMBUS TION OF NATURAL GAS
There is 1 UNIT :
BURN:
type=BATVAL
Symbol=Horizontal Reactor
MODE='Atomic and Energy balance'
MODDP='DP variable'
REFDP=AIR
4 STREAMS must be defined:
STREAMS THERMOD CONNECTIONS
AIR AIR to BURN
GAS GAS to BURN
HOTFUM FUMES from BURN
LOSSES THERMAL STREAM from BURN
The Compounds associated to each THERMOD are respectively:
GAS=C1, C2, N2
AIR=N2, O2
FUMES=N2, O2, H2O, CO2
The list of measurements is given in table below.
TABLE 1 - MEAS UREMENTS FOR BATVAL EXAMPLE
The composition of Streams GAS and AIR is assumed to be known perfectly.
The O2 content of the fumes is given on a dry basis.
The results are (Tags Report):
TABLE 2 - RES ULTS OF BATVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 4: BBXVAL: BLACK BOX WITH MOLAR

BALANCES
PURPOSE
This type of UNIT allows you to consider mass balances, energy balance and pressure drops for any
process unit where no chemical reaction occurs. It is used to model mixers, distillation, absorption
and stripping towers and process sections that are globally taken into account. It acts like a black box
satisfying the balance equations.
The BBXVAL type can also be used to mix or split thermal and mechanical streams, for example to
mix (add) the power produced by several turbines on the same shaft.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 4 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT BBXVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
Type: material, thermal, mechanical
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
Type: material, thermal, mechanical
Attention: The Horizontal and Vertical headers only support Material Streams.
If one or more material Streams are connected as inlet, then at least one material Stream must be
connected at the outlet, and vice versa.
MODEDP Parame te rs Input Pre ssure e quation
MODETOEQ Ge ne ral Input Te mpe rature e qualitie s
DPi Parame te rs Me asurable Pre ssure drop
DPXi Parame te rs Input Nominal pre ssure drop
MASSFXi Parame te rs Input Nominal flow rate
CFDPi Parame te rs Me asurable DP corre ction factor
FLOWFILT Ge ne ral Input Automatic flow rate filte ring
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
Selection of equations to be taken into account (type: Input).
0 Mass and Energy Balance Mass and energy balances are taken into account
1 Mass Balance only Only mass balances are taken into account
COMPMODE (General)
1 Enabled Compound balances are taken into account
3 None Only global mass balance (without compound

balances) is taken into account.
MODETOEQ (General)
Temperature equalities (type: Input).
0 None no temperature equality equation will be generated
1 between all outlet stream all outlet streams will be set at the same temperature
2 between first inlet and all all outlet streams and the first inlet stream will be set
outlet stream at the same temperature
Temperature equalities are only added when the unit is calculated in mass balance only. When the
energy balance is activated, these additional equations will never be generated.
REFDP (Parameters)

MODEDP (Parameters)

where:

to 30%)
A value of MODEDP has to be given for each outlet stream, although it is only meaningful for material
streams.
DP (Parameters)
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
DP is calculated independently for each stream.
DPX (Parameters)
MASSFX (Parameters)
CFDP (Parameters)
These parameters are defined independently for each stream.
FLOWFILT (Parameters)
Automatic flow rate filtering (type: Input).
0 Disabled The automatic flow rate filtering is not activated
1 Enabled The automatic flow rate filtering is activated
When all but one of the connected streams are measured, there is a risk that the unmeasured stream
hits its lower bound.
This in particular the case on products routing in production accounting applications where the
main production flow rate is measured and the product routing is specified though manual inputs on
the flows that are redirected from the normal route (on-spec product) to slop tanks or recirculation
lines.
The automatic filtering (when enabled) creates an estimate on the unmeasured flow rate based on the
measured inlet and outlet flow rates. Should the estimated flow rate fall below a given cutoff value,
the unmeasured stream will be set off.
EXAMPLE : CO2 REMOVAL FROM NH3 FEED GAS

Attention: see model bbxval.bls in the directory "\examples\bbxval". Units of type BBXVAL are also
In this example, the BBXVAL type of unit is used to model the removal of CO2 from a stream
containing Nitrogen, Hydrogen and Helium. Only the mass balances are taken into account. The
FLXVAL unit RECOVERY calculates the recovery of CO2 in the vent stream.
FIGURE 5 - BBXVAL EXAMPLE: CO2 REMOVAL
There are 2 Units :
CO2R:
type=BBXVAL
MODE='Mass Balance only'
MODEDP1='None'
MODEDP2='None'
RECOVERY:
type=FLXVAL
NEQU=1
PG.IN PGMOD to CO2R
PG.OUT PGMOD from CO2R
VENT VENTMOD from CO2R
The Unit RECOVERY uses the following Flex code:

FUNCTION EQ1
!
CALL GTVARTAG ('PG.IN_MOLF', pgin)
CALL GTVARTAG ('PG.IN_MFCO2', co2in)
co2in=co2in*pgin
!
CALL GTVARTAG ('VENT_MOLF', vent)
CALL GTVARTAG ('VENT_MFCO2', co2vent)
co2vent=co2vent*vent
!
RES=co2vent/co2in
END
The thermodynamic calculation methods are the ones used by default, as we are only concerned with
the mass balances of the unit.
The compounds associated to each THERMOD are respectively:
PGMOD= H2, N2, HE, CO2
VENTMOD=H2, CO2
Table below gives the list of measurements.
TABLE 3 - MEAS UREMENTS FOR BBXVAL EXAMPLE
The tag RECOVERY_CO2 is defined as a KPI (Mode CALC) with a target value of 98.8%
The results are (file r6v + section KPI of r4v):
TABLE 4 - RES ULTS OF BBXVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 5: BNDVAL: DEFAULT BOUNDS ON

VARIABLES
PURPOSE
This type of UNIT allows you to overwrite the default bounds set on variables. The bounds specified
on the variables themselves through the Tags will nevertheless be used when they are more
restrictive than the default bounds.
Only one unit of type BNDVAL can be created. It must always be created in the Main PFD.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 6 - S YMBOL FOR UNIT BNDVAL
CONNECTION RULES
No connections are allowed on a BNDVAL.
MODE Ge ne ral Input MODE (0: BNDVAL is ignore d, 1: BNDVAL is use d
EFFICBND Ge ne ral Input De fault Bounds on Efficie ncie s (0: No, 1 : YES)
MinT Parame te rs Input Minimum for Te mpe rature s (de fault = 230 K)
MaxT Parame te rs Input Maximum for Te mpe rature s (de fault = 4000 K)
MinP Parame te rs Input Minimum for Pre ssure s (de fault = 0.01 bar)
MaxP Parame te rs Input Maximum for Pre ssure s (de fault = 1000 bar)
MinMR Parame te rs Input Minimum for Partial Molar Rate s (de fault = 0 kmol/s)
MaxMR Parame te rs Input Maximum for Partial Molar Rate s (de fault=100 000 kmol/
s)
MinH Parame te rs Input Minimum for Enthalpie s (de fault = -1E+10 kJ/kmol)
MaxH Parame te rs Input Maximum for Enthalpie s (de fault = 1E+10 kJ/kmol)
MinLOAD Parame te rs Input Minimum for Loads (de fault = -1E+7 kW)
MaxLOAD Parame te rs Input Maximum for Loads (de fault = 1E+7 kW)
MinPOWER Parame te rs Input Minimum for Powe rs (de fault = -1E+7 kW)
MaxPOWER Parame te rs Input Maximum for Powe rs (de fault = 1E+7 kW)
MinDP Parame te rs Input Minimum for Pre ssure Drops (de fault = 0 bar)
MaxDP Parame te rs Input Maximum for Pre ssure Drops (de fault = 1000 bar)
MinMOLF Parame te rs Input Minimum for Molar Flowrate s (de fault = 0 kmol/s)
MaxMOLF Parame te rs Input Maximum for Molar Flowrate s (de fault = 100 000 kmol/s)
MinMASSF Parame te rs Input Minimum for Mass Flowrate s (de fault = 0 kg/s)
MaxMASSF Parame te rs Input Maximum for Mass Flowrate s (de fault = 1 000 000 kg/s)
MinMF Parame te rs Input Minimum for Molar Fractions (de fault = 0)
MaxMF Parame te rs Input Maximum for Molar Fractions (de fault = 1)
MinWF Parame te rs Input Minimum for We ight Fractions (de fault = 0)
MaxWF Parame te rs Input Maximum for We ight Fractions (de fault = 1)
MinVOLF Parame te rs Input Minimum for Volume Flowrate s (de fault = 0 m3/s)
MaxVOLF Parame te rs Input Maximum for Volume Flowrate s (de fault = 1E+5 m3/s)
MinDENS Parame te rs Input Minimum for De nsitie s (1E-6 D60/60)
MaxDENS Parame te rs Input Maximum for De nsitie s (20 D60/60)
MinAPI Parame te rs Input Minimum for API De nsitie s (0.0 API)
MaxAPI Parame te rs Input Maximum for API De nsitie s (de fault = 2000 API)
MinHUMID Parame te rs Input Minimum for Humidity (de fault = 0)
MaxHUMID Parame te rs Input Maximum for Humidity (de fault = 2000)
MinTBPV Parame te rs Input Minimum for TBPV (de fault =0 K)
MaxTBPV Parame te rs Input Maximum for TBPV (de fault =2000 K)
MinTBPW Parame te rs Input Minimum for TBPW (de fault = 0 K)
MaxTBPW Parame te rs Input Maximum for TBPW (de fault = 2000 K)
MinAREA Parame te rs Input Minimum for Are as (de fault = 1E-6 m2)
MaxAREA Parame te rs Input Maximum for Are as (de fault = 1E+6 m2)
MinK Parame te rs Input Minimum for K (de fault = 1E-6)
MaxK Parame te rs Input Maximum for K (de fault = 1E+6)
MinU Parame te rs Input Minimum for U (de fault = 1E-8 kW/m2 K)
MaxU Parame te rs Input Maximum for U (de fault = 1E+8 kW/m2 K)
MinDT Parame te rs Input Minimum for DT (-2000 K)
MaxDT Parame te rs Input Maximum for DT (2000 K)
MinDMASS Parame te rs Input Minimum for DMass (de fault =-1E+8 kg), and for MASS1
(initial mass inve ntory of tanks)
MaxDMASS Parame te rs Input Maximum for Dmass (de fault = 1E+8 kg), and for MASS2
(final mass inve ntory of tanks)
SECTION 6: BWHVAL: EQUILIBRATED REACTOR

WITH ATOMIC BALANCES
PURPOSE
The BWHVAL unit allows you to model a reactor and takes the atomic balances, energy balance and
pressure drop into account. The reactor can set at equilibrium or at a given distance of equilibrium.
It is well suited for reactors with unknown or complex reaction stoichiometry.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 7 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT BWHVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
All material streams must use the same Thermod.
EQ Ge ne ral Input Se le ction of e quilibrium e quation
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
MODEDP (General)

where:

to 30%)
EQ (General)
Selection of equilibrium equation (type: Input).
0 None No e quilibrium e quation
1 Ye s White e quilibrium e quation is activate d.
REFDP (Parameters)

DP (Parameters)
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
DPX (Parameters)
MASSFX (Parameters)
CFDP (Parameters)
DTEQ (Parameters)
Temperature deviation from equilibrium (type: Measurable).
The DTEQ parameter allows you to account for a deviation from equilibrium by calculating the
equilibrium constant at a temperature different (T + DTEQ) from the outlet stream temperature T.
Attention: When DTEQ > 100 C, no equilibrium constraint is generated. This has the same effect as
setting the parameter EQi to 0.
EXAMPLE : NH3 SYNTHESIS REACTOR

Attention: see model bwhval.bls in the directory "\examples\bwhval".
The same basic example is taken for the following unit types: BWHVAL, RCTVAL, RKPVAL
This example deals with a chemical reactor for the synthesis of NH3.
FIGURE 8 - BWHVAL EXAMPLE: S YNTHES IS OF NH3
There are 2 UNITS :
R-1:
type=BWHVAL
MODE='Atomic and Energy Balance'
MODEDP='DP variable'
White Equilibrium=Yes
REFDP=IN.RCT
DP=1.1 bar
DTEQ=25 K
V-1:
type=DPVAL
MODE='Mass and Energy Balance'
K=-1
4 Streams must be defined:
IN.RCT RCMOD To R-1
OUT.RCT RCMOD From R-1 To V-1
LOSS.RCT THERMAL STREAM From R-1
1 RCMOD From V-1
The Thermod RCMOD uses the default methods and the following compounds: NH3, N2, H2, AR.
TABLE 5 - MEAS UREMENTS FOR BWHVAL EXAMPLE
The results are (file r6v):
TABLE 6 - RES ULTS OF BWHVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 7: CND-HNO3: NITROUS GAS CONDENSER
PURPOSE
This UNIT models the cooling and partial condensation of a nitrous gas mixture, taking into account
reactions in the gas phase:
peroxidation:
NO + O2=>2 NO2
dimerization:
2 NO2<=>N2O4
as well as at the liquid-vapor interface :
absorption:
3 NO2 + H2O<=>2 HNO3 + NO
The extents of these reactions are calculated on basis of BODENSTEIN kinetic equations.
The condensed liquid is a mixture of nitric acid and water and is assumed to be in L/V equilibrium
with the remaining gas.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 9 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT CND-HNO3
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS (2)
shell side, nitrous gas mixture (state V, LV, LLV or WLV)
tube side, cooling media (any state)
OUTLET STREAMS (3)
shell side, remaining nitrous gas mixture (state V)
shell side, nitric acid aqueous mixture (state L)
THERMOD:
Both nitrous gas material streams must use the same THERMOD, which must contain the following
compounds in any order : NO, NO2, N2O4, O2, N2, H2O, HNO3. Any other compound is considered
as inert.
The THERMOD of the nitric acid mixture must contain the following compounds in this order: H2O,
HNO3.
Both coolant streams(inlet and outlet) must use the same THERMOD.
REACTIONS:
The reactions are part of the model and must not be defined in the Reactions page.
LOAD Parame te rs Re sult He at load of the e xchange r
VOL Parame te rs Me asurable She ll volume
HA Parame te rs Me asurable Transfe r coe fficie nt
DTSIDE1,2 Parame te rs Me asurable Te mpe rature diffe re nce on e ach side
ACTi Parame te rs Me asurable Activity coe fficie nt (Wate r, Nitric acid)
MODEDPi Parame te rs Input Pre ssure e quation
EXTENTi Parame te rs Me asurable Exte nt of re actions and conde nsations
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
LOAD (Parameters)
Heat load of the exchanger (type: Result).
This parameter is the amount of heat transferred by the unit.
VOL (Parameters)
Shell volume (type: Measurable)
The shell volume is taken into account into the Bodenstein kinetics.
HA (Parameters)
Transfer coefficient (type: Measurable)
The heat transfer coefficient is defined as follows:
LOAD = HA . LNTD
DTSIDE1 DTSIDE2
LNTD =
ln DTSIDE1 / DTSIDE2
where:
DTSIDE1,2 (Parameters)
Temperature difference on each side (type: Measurable)
These parameters define the temperature difference of the streams at each side of the exchanger:
DTSIDE1 = Ti1-To2
DTSIDE2 = To1-Ti2
ACTi (Parameters)
Activity coefficient (Water, Nitric acid) (type: Measurable)
The activity coefficients are defined as:
PPi
ACT i
x i Pi*
where:
PPi: the partial pressure of compound i
xi: the molar fraction of compound i in the liquid phase
Pi*: the saturation pressure of compound i
i: 1=HNO3, 2=H2O
These activity coefficients can be determined according to the following formulas :
A 1T 2 B1T C1 x 2 D1T 3 E 1T 2 F1T G1

ACT1
x 1 P1*
A 2 exp (B 2 T ) exp ( C 2 T D2 E 2T 2 ) x 2
ACT 2
x 2 P2*
where:
the temperature T is expressed in °C
the pressure is expressed in mmHg
the coefficients Ai …Gi have the following values:
i=1 (H2O) i=2 (HNO3)
Ai -0.082377958 0.000095684
Bi 1.271367016 0.087355345
Ci -9.039063345 -0.002051086
DI 0.000563725 12.648391590
Ei 0.016013187 -0.000441081
Fi -0.058557541
Gi 8.991622939
Actual activity coefficients might differ from these predicted values due to the limited performance of
the condensor. It is therefore recommended to use the difference between the actual and predicted
values as a KPI (Key Performance Indicator) of the condenser efficiency.
EXTENT (Parameters)
Extent of reactions and condensations (type: Measurable).
The Extents are defined (on molar basis) as follows:
Extent1: amount of O2 consumed in peroxidation
Extent2: amount of N2O4 produced by dimerization
Extent3: amount of HNO3 produced by absorption
Extent4: amount of condensed H2O
Extent5: amount of condensed HNO3
MODEDP (Parameters)
A value of MODEDPi has to be given for both outlet streams.
DP (Parameters)
DP = Pin- Pout
where:
Pin: the pressure of the inlet stream
EXAMPLE : NITRIC ACID PROCESS

Attention: see model nitric.bls in the directory "\examples\nitric.
SECTION 8: COLVAL: DISTILLATION COLUMN
PURPOSE
This type of UNIT allows you to consider mass balances, heat balance and saturation equations for
the outlet streams.
It is especially useful to model distillation columns or any other operation unit where some outlet
streams are saturated liquid or vapor.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 10 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT COLVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
The outlet STREAMS can be in L, V or LV state. You must use the L state for each outlet stream that is
specified at the bubble point, and the V state for each outlet stream that is specified at the dew point.
VFRACi Parame te rs Input Saturation state
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
0 All equations Mass, energy balances and saturation constraints are

taken into account
2 Mass and Energy balance Mass and energy balances are taken into account
3 Mass Balance and Saturation Mass balances and saturation constraints are taken
into account
COMPMODE (General)

REFDP (Parameters)

VFRACi (Parameters)
Saturation state (type: Input).
A value of VFRAC must be given for each outlet Stream, although it will only be meaningful for
material STREAMS:
-1 - No saturation constraint for the corresponding outlet

stream
0 - The corresponding stream is at bubble point. It must

be defined as Liquid
1 - The corresponding stream is at dew point. It must be

defined as Vapor
MODEDP (Parameters)
DP (Parameters)
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
EXAMPLE : TWO INTERCONNECTED COLUMNS

Attention: see model colval.bls in the directory "\examples\colval". A unit of type COLVAL is also
used to model a de-aerator in the example coal.bls (coal fired power plant).
In this example, a mixture of propane, pentane and heptane is distilled into three streams of high
purity.
FIGURE 11 - COLVAL EXAMPLE: TWO INTERCONNECTED COLUMNS
There are 2 UNITS:
C-1
type = COLVAL
MODE='All equations'
VFRAC1=0 (PROD1 is a saturated liquid)
VFRAC3=0 (SL5 is a saturated liquid)
VFRAC4=1 (SV15 is a saturated vapor)
C-2
type = COLVAL
VFRAC2=0 (L11 is a saturated liquid)
VFRAC3=1 (V1 is a saturated liquid)
PFEED VENTMOD to COLUMN
PROD1 VENTMOD from COLUMN
PROD3 VENTMOD from COLUMN
SL5 VENTMOD from COLUMN
SV15 VENTMOD from COLUMN to COLUMN1
PROD2 VENTMOD from COLUMN1
L11 VENTMOD from COLUMN1 to COLUMN
V1 VENTMOD from COLUMN1 to COLUMN
PQB THERMAL STREAM to COLUMN
PQC THERMAL STREAM from COLUMN
The thermodynamic calculation methods are the ones used by default.
The compounds associated to the THERMOD VENTMOD are: C3, N-C5, N-C7.
TABLE 7 - MEAS UREMENTS FOR COLVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 8 - RES ULTS OF COLVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 9: COMVAL: GAS COMPRESSOR
PURPOSE
This type of UNIT allows to take the mass and energy balances of a gas compressor into account.
Information on the isentropic (or polytropic) efficiency and the mechanical power can be given as
measurements.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 12 - SYMBOLS FOR UNIT C OMVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
1 material
1 mechanical
OUTLET STREAMS
1 material
THERMOD
Both material streams must use the same THERMOD.
EFFIC Parame te rs Me asurable Ise ntropic e fficie ncy
POLYEFFI Parame te rs Me asurable Polytropic e fficie ncy
DP Parame te rs Me asurable Pre ssure incre ase
PRATIO Parame te rs Me asurable Pre ssure ratio
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
0 All equations Mass and energy balances are taken into account. The
isentropic efficiency equation is generated as well
MODEDP (Parameters)
EFFIC (Parameters)
Isentropic efficiency (type: Measurable).
This parameter is only relevant in MODE 0.
POLYEFFI (Parameters)
Polytropic efficiency (type: Measurable).
When negative, this parameter is ignored. When positive, an additional equation is generated to
calculate the polytropic efficiency.
Attention: the formulation of the polytropic efficiency assumes that the mixture behaves like an
ideal gas.
DP (Parameters)
Pressure increase (type: Measureable).
DP = Pout- Pin
PRATIO (Parameters)
Pressure ratio (type: Measurable)
PRATIO = Pout/Pin
EXAMPLE : AIR COMPRESSOR

Attention: see model comval.bls in the directory "\examples\comval".
FIGURE 13 - COMVAL EXAMPLE: AIR COMPRES S OR
There is 1 UNIT:
CMP:
type=COMVAL
MODEDP='DP Variable'
POLYEFFI = 80 %
ASP AIR to CMP
POWER MECHANICAL STREAM to CMP
OUT AIR from CMP
The THERMOD AIR uses the default thermodynamic methods and two compounds: N2, O2
The list of measurements is given in table below:
TABLE 9 - MEAS UREMENTS FOR COMVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 10 - RES ULTS OF COMVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 10: CRUOPT: OPTIONS FOR CRUDE

FRACTIONS IDENTIFICATION
PURPOSE
The CRUOPT unit is a mathematical unit used to specify various parameters of the procedure used
to identify petroleum fractions properties and to link distillation curves and stream compositions.
If no CRUOPT unit is defined, the default settings are used.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 14 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT CRUOPT
CONNECTION RULES
No connections are allowed on a CRUOPT.
MODECURV Ge ne ral Input D86/TBP continuity curve mode
MODEELIM Ge ne ral Input Auto e limination of TBP/ASTM points
MODEIPFP Ge ne ral Input IBP/FBP e xtrapolation mode
SMOOTH Parame te rs Input Pre cision for Smooth e quation
RKUOP Parame te rs Input Pre cision for KUOP e quation
PLFLOW Parame te rs Input Pre cision for LF Low
PLFHIGH Parame te rs Input Pre cision for LF High
PLFTRESH Parame te rs Input LF Thre shold
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODECURV (General)
D86/TBP continuity curve mode (type: Input).
The MODECURV parameter selects the interpolation method for matching the stream composition to
the distillation curve.
0 Linear Smoothing The Linear Smoothing identifies the composition by

adding continuity factors between successive
compound fractions so as to insure a smooth
evolution of the distillation curve. This method tends
to slightly flatten the curve and is kept for
compatibility reason
1 Compositional Interpolation The Compositional Interpolation identifies the

(default) composition by adding compound fractions
estimated on basis of the distillation curve
MODEELIM (General)
Auto elimination of TBP/ASTM points (type: Input)
0 No automatic elimination. the automatic elimination will not remove the

(default) distillation points that exhibits a decrease of the
temperature but will stop the calculation
1 Automatic elimination. the automatic elimination will remove the

(ValiFilter license required) distillation points that exhibits a decrease of the
temperature
MODEIPFP (General)
IBP/FBP extrapolation mode (type: Input).
0 Linear extrapolation The following rules are applied to extrapolate the

Initial and Final boiling points from the TBP curve:
1. Initial Boiling Point (IBP):
If the lowest measured point from the TBP curve

is less than 10%, VALI uses a linear
extrapolation from the 2 first measured points:
Otherwise, VALI assumes that IBP = 273.15 K
2. Final Boiling Point (FBP):
If the largest measured point from the TBP curve

is more than 90%, VALI uses a linear
extrapolation from the 2 last measured points:
Otherwise, VALI assumes that FBP = 2273.15 K
1 Gaussian Approximation Approximation of the TBP distribution with a

Cumulative Gaussian distribution function is a good
alternative to extrapolate incomplete TBP curves.
This approach allows here to predict the Initial and

Final boiling points.
SMOOTH (Parameters)
Precision for Smooth equation (type: Input).
Default value = 0.30 (30 %)
The SMOOTH parameter is only used in Linear Smoothing mode (MODECURV = 0). It represents the
precision associated to each smoothing factor.
RKUOP (Parameters)
Precision for KUOP equation (type: Input).
Default value = 0.01 (1 %) - In releases until 2004, the default precision was 5%.
When identifying pseudo-compounds, continuity factors are automatically introduced on the KUOP
(also known as Watson factor) of successive compounds. These factors are calculated as the ratio of
the KUOPs and measured as 1 +/- RKUOP %.
PLFLOW (Parameters)
Precision for LF Low (type: Input).
PLFHIGH (Parameters)
Precision for LF High (type: Input).
PLFTRESH (Parameters)
LF Threshold (type: Input).
These three parameters control the precision used for the Composition Interpolation (MODECURV =
1).
The precision of compound fraction is set to PLFLOW for small amounts (fraction below PFLTRESH)
and to PLFHIGH for higher amounts.
The default values are:
PLFLOW = 0.10 (10%)
PLFHIGH = 0.30 (30 %)
PLFTRESH = 0.01 (1 %)
SECTION 11: CRUVAL: CRUDE FRACTIONS

IDENTIFICATION
PURPOSE
The CRUVAL unit is devoted to the identification of petroleum fractions (or pseudo-compounds) to
be used for the adequate modeling of petroleum cuts. Measurements of density and distillation
curves (TBP or D86) are usually defined on the streams connected to the unit.
The CRUVAL is basically a black box like the BBXVAL, but when used in Mass balance mode, it also
allows identifying the properties of the pseudo-compounds used in the streams connected to the unit.
A typical way of using the CRUVAL is to perform two steps:
mass balance and identification of the pseudo-compounds
complete heat and mass balance using the pseudo-compounds identified in the first step
The way distillation curves and compounds/composition identification are handled can be adjusted
though the mathematical unit CRUOPT.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 15 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT CRUVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
Type: material, thermal
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
Type: material, thermal
Attention: At least one inlet and one outlet material streams must be defined.
IDENT Ge ne ral Input Ide ntification mode
MODEDPi Parame te rs Input Pre ssure e quations
MODE (General)
COMPMODE (General)

IDENT (General)
Ide ntification mode (type : Input)
0 No Identification No identification is performed
1 Identification Identification is performed
2 Identification with parabolic Identification is performed using KUOP parabolic

KUOP curve cruve
REFDP (Parameters)

MODEDP (Parameters)
Pressure equation (type: Input)

where:

to 30%)
A value of MODEDPi has to be given for each outlet stream, although it is only meaningful for
material streams.
DP (Parameters)
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
DPX (Parameters)
MASSFX (Parameters)
CFDP (Parameters)
EXAMPLE : CRUDE DISTILLATION COLUMN

Note: see model cruval.bls in the directory "\examples\cruval".
In this example, the CRUVAL type of unit is used to model an atmospheric crude distillation column.
Only the mass balances are taken into account.
FIGURE 16 - CRUVAL EXAMPLE: CDU
There is 1 UNIT:
COL:
type=CRUVAL
MODE='Mass Balance only'
MODEDPi='None'
CRUDE CRUDE to COL
NAPHTHA CRUDE from COL
JET CRUDE from COL
KERO CRUDE from COL
GASOIL CRUDE from COL
DIESEL CRUDE from COL
RESIDU CRUDE from COL
The thermodynamic calculation methods are the ones used by default, as we are only concerned with
the mass balances of the unit.
The compounds used in the Thermod CRUDE are:
C3, I-C4, N-C4, 22MC3, N-C5, FR050, FR060, FR070, FR080, FR090, FR100, FR120, FR140, FR160,
FR180, FR200, FR220, FR240, FR260, FR280, FR300, FR330, FR360, FR390, FR420, FR450, FR500, FR600,
FR700
TABLE 11 - MEAS UREMENTS FOR CRUVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 12 - RES ULTS OF CRUVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 12: CUTOFF: OPTIONS FOR GENERIC

CUTOFF
PURPOSE
The CUTOFF unit is a mathematical unit used to define the threshold values for the generic CUTOFF
on various types of measurements. Keeping the default value of zero for the CUTOFF indicates no
cut-off will be performed.
Any stream on which a measurement is defined with a measured value below the CUTOFF value is
automatically set OFF.
Attention: the CUTOFF value defined on a particular tag overrides the generic value provided here.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 17 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT CUTOFF
CONNECTION RULES
No connections are allowed on a CUTOFF unit.
MODE Ge ne ral Input Mode
T Parame te rs Input Thre shold for Te mpe rature
P Parame te rs Input Thre shold for Pre ssure
MIXF Parame te rs Input Thre shold for Mixture fraction
MOLF Parame te rs Input Thre shold for Molar flow rate
MASSF Parame te rs Input Thre shold for Mass flow rate
VOLF Parame te rs Input Thre shold for Volume tric flow rate
COLDVOLF Parame te rs Input Thre shold for Volume tric flow rate at 15 C
CONVVOLF Parame te rs Input Thre shold for Conve ntional Volume tric flow rate
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
0 CUTOFF not used CUTOFF is not used
1 CUTOFF used CUTOFF is used
T (Parameters)
Threshold for Temperature (type: Input).
P (Parameters)
Threshold for Pressure (type: Input).
MIXF (Parameters)
Threshold for Mixture fraction (type: Input).
MOLF (Parameters)
Threshold for Molar flow rate (type: Input).
MASSF (Parameters)
Threshold for Mass flow rate (type: Input).
VOLF (Parameters)
Threshold for Volumetric flow (type: Input).
COLDVOLF (Parameters)
Threshold for Volumetric flow rate at 15 C (type: Input).
CONVVOLF (Parameters)
Threshold for Conventional Volumetric flow rate (type: Input).
SECTION 13: CUTVAL: TEAR UNIT FOR LOOPS
PURPOSE
The CUTVAL unit allows breaking the material or pressure loops that can appear when dealing with
closed cycles like for example the steam/water cycle in a power plant or a refrigeration cycle.
This type of unit can also be used to link a part of a model with compound balances to a part where
only total mass balances are carried out.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 18 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT CUTVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
1 material stream
OUTLET STREAMS
1 material stream
MODECOM Ge ne ral Input Composition

P
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
0 The rmal Balance The rmal balance of the unit is conside re d.
1 No The rmal Balance No the rmal balance ge ne rate d for the unit.
MODEDP (Parameters)
0 None No pre ssure drop e quation will be ge ne rate d
1 Equality An e quality for pre ssure be twe e n inle t and outle t will be
ge ne rate d
MODECOMP (Parameters)
Composition (type: Input)
0 Compounds compatibility is A check that compounds in inlet and outlet streams

che cke d are the same will occur
1 Compounds compatibility is NOT No check occurs

che cke d
In the first case, any compound not present in the inlet or outlet stream - because of a measurement
or because it does not appear in its Thermod - is also set to zero in the other stream, in a similar way
to other VALI unit models. In the second case, no check is made, which means that some compounds
may appear or disappear through the unit.
This is useful when connecting two parts of a model with a different modeling approach (total mass
balance versus compound balance). It is up to the user to add (for example through a Flex code) the
equations linking the two parts (e.g. equality of total mass flow rates).
EXAMPLE : CLOSED LOOP

The goal will be to generate a closed loop by connecting black-boxes together (B-1, B-2, B-3). The loop
is then broken by introducing the CUTVAL unit C-1.
FIGURE 19 - CUTVAL EXAMPLE
There are 4 UNITS:
B-1:
type=BBXVAL
MODE='All Equations'
MODETOEQ='None'
MODDP1='DP variable'
B-2:
type=BBXVAL
MODETOEQ='None'
B-3:
type=BBXVAL
MODETOEQ='None'
C-1:
type=CUTVAL
MODE='Thermal Balance'
MODDP='None'
1 WATER from C-1 to B-1
2 WATER from B-1 to B-2
3 WATER from B-2 to B-3
4 WATER from B-3 to C-1
Q-1 THERMAL STREAM from B-1
Q-2 THERMAL STREAM to B-3
The Thermod WATER uses a single compound: H2O.
The list of measurements is given in table below.
TABLE 13 - MEAS UREMENTS FOR CUTVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 14 - RES ULTS OF CUTVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 14: DISVAL: TRAY-BY-TRAY DISTILLATION

COLUMN
PURPOSE
This type of UNIT allows you to model a distillation (or absorber) column based on a tray by tray
Liquid/Vapor equilibrium. Non equilibrium can be considered through the Murphree efficiency.
This new unit is delivered as is and requires a reasonable estimate of the composition and state of the
outlet streams in order to get convergence of the calculations.
Care should also be taken that the thermodynamic model is adequate to represent with sufficient
accuracy the Liquid/Vapor equilibrium of the corresponding mixtures. Using an inadequate
thermodynamic model may strongly bias the results.
Care should also be taken with compounds that do not appear in the column feed (but are defined in
the thermod) . These compounds should also be set to zero in the other inlet streams of the column
(reflux and reboiled stream) to avoid convergence problems.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 20 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT DIS VAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
Type: material (at least one), thermal
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
Type: material (at least two), thermal
The STREAMS can be of L, V or LV state. It is however recommended to use the L state for each outlet
stream that is specified as liquid, and the V state for each outlet stream that is specified as vapor.
This will lead to a much simpler equation system and, thus, to better convergence.
INIMOD Ge ne ral Input Initialization Mode
EFFIMOD Ge ne ral Input Efficie ncy Mode
NBRPLT Parame te rs Input Numbe r of plate s
EFFIC Parame te rs Me asurable Plate Efficie ncy
DPPLATE Parame te rs Me asurable Plate Pre ssure drop
DPTOTAL Parame te rs Me asurable Total Pre ssure drop
PLT.IN Parame te rs Input Plate numbe r
PLT.OU Parame te rs Input Plate numbe r
TYP.OU Parame te rs Input Stre am Type
DP.IN Parame te rs Me asurable Pre ssure drop at e ntrance
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
0 All equations Mass, energy balances and L/V equilibrium of each

plate are taken into account
1 Mass Balance only Only global mass balances of the column are taken
into account
2 Mass and Energy Balances Global mass and energy balances of the column are
taken into account
INIMOD (General)
Initialization Mode (type:Input).
0 Top/bottom linear profile the column profile is initialized by a simple

interpolation between the top and bottom outlet
streams. Input and side draw streams are not taken
into account
1 Top/bottom profile + flash at same as 0, but the profile is further corrected by a

vapf = 10..90% flash calculation made on basis of the plate pressure
and an increasing vapor fraction (from 10 to 90 %)
2 Constant profile between all constant profile between two successive inlet and/or
streams outlet streams
3 Linear profile between all arithmetic interpolation between two successive

streams inlet and/or outlet streams
4 Geometric profile between all geometric interpolation between two successive inlet
streams and/or outlet streams
10 From file (Simu profile) the column profile is initialized from a file (generated
by SIMU software or by VALI in a preceding run)
The column profile (temperature, pressure and composition) can be initialized from the inlet and/or
outlet streams, with various correction and interpolation options, or from a profile saved in a file.
EFFIMOD (General)
Efficiency Mode (type: Input).
0 None the plates are assumed to be at L/V equilibrium
1 Murphree's Efficiency the plates are assumed to be non-equilibrated on

basis of Murphree's Efficiency
Murphree efficiency is expressed as:
yi yi 1
Ei
K i .x i y i 1
where:
yi and yi+1: the vapor composition on plates i and i+1
xi: the vapor composition on plates I
Ki: the K value on plate i
NBRPLT (Parameters)
Number of plates (type: Input).
The plates are numbered from the top of the column.
EFFIC (Parameters)
Plate Efficiency (type: Measurable).
The plate efficiency defines the distance
This parameter is only used if the efficiency mode is set to 1 (Murphree's Efficiency).
DPPLATE (Parameters)
Plate Pressure drop (type: Measurable).

Pressure drop per plate.
DPTOTAL (Parameters)
Total Pressure drop (type: Measurable).
Total pressure drop of the column. The variable is only created when all pressure drops are
considered as variables (i.e. the parameter PRESMODE of unit OPTVAL is set to the default value of
2).
PLT.IN (Parameters)
Plate number (type: Input).
Indicates the plate destination of the inlet STREAMS. Plate 1 designates the top of the column, while
the special value 999 indicates the last (bottom) plate.
PLT.OU (Parameters)
Plate number (type: Input).
Indicates the plate destination of the outlet STREAMS. Plate 1 designates the top of the column, while
the special value 999 indicates the last (bottom) plate.
TYP.OU (Parameters)
Stream Type (type: Input).
0 Not Defined Undefined status; needs to be changed
1 Liq Side Draw Liquid Side Draw
2 Vap Side Draw Vapor Side Draw
3 Liquid Liquid (usually the bottom stream)
4 Vapor Vapor (usually the top stream)
5 Thermal Thermal stream
6 Water Draw Water Draw-off
Indicates the type of each outlet stream.
Attention: When connecting a new stream to a DISVAL unit, the corresponding parameter TYP.OU
is set as "Not defined" and must be updated by the user.
DP.IN (Parameters)
Pressure drop at entrance (type: Measurable).
For each inlet stream a pressure drop can be specified between the stream pressure and the pressure
of the corresponding plate.
EXAMPLE : METHYL ACETATE/METHANOL DISTILLATION

The example is in the directory "\examples\disval" and shows the interconnection of two columns at
different pressure enabling to break the azeotrope between methyl acetate and methanol.
SECTION 15: DPVAL: PRESSURE DROP (VALVE)
PURPOSE
The DPVAL is used to model pressure drop through lines and valves. The pressure drop can be
linked to the stream rate and conditions as well as to the valve stem position.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 21 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT DPVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
1 material STREAM
OUTLET STREAMS
1 material STREAM
Both streams must use the same THERMOD.
METHODDP Ge ne ral Input Multiphase flow me thod for DP
K Parame te rs Me asurable Pre ssure drop factor
EXP Parame te rs Input Expone nt of the mass flow rate
X Parame te rs Me asurable Valve ste m position
CVMAX Parame te rs Me asurable Maximum value of the valve coe fficie nt
RANGE Parame te rs Me asurable Valve range
CVFIT Othe rs Input Coefficients for the sigmoid Cv curve
AFIT Othe rs Input Coefficients for the sigmoid port area curve
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
MODEDP (General)

where:

to 30%)
3 K factor a pressure drop equation will be generated and the

pressure drop will be a function of the flow
conditions according to:
where:
VW: the inlet stream volumetric weight (m3/

kg)
K: a measurable factor
EXP: a constant value
This equation has been developed for compressible

fluids. However, it can also be used for liquids. In
any case, the flow regime must remain the same.
4 Cv line ar Cv X
5 Cv square root Cv X
6 Cv e qual pe rce ntage Cv RANGE (X -1)
7 Cv hype rbolic 1
Cv
RANGE - RANGE - 1) * X
8 Cv Fle x Cv will be given through a Flex equation written in

the DPVAL “Flex code” tab
9 Cv correlation Cv will be a sigmoid shaped function of stem travel

percentage; the equation parameters have to be
provided to Vali by introducing them into the CVFIT
column found under the “Others” tab in DPVAL
10 Area Flex Area will be given through a Flex equation written in

the DPVAL “Flex code” tab
11 Area correlation Port area will be a sigmoid shaped function of stem

travel percentage; the equation parameters have to
be provided to Vali by introducing them into the
AFIT column found under the “Others” tab in the

DPVAL
For all these modes, a pressure drop equation will be generated and the pressure drop will be a
function of the flow conditions according to an equation having the following form:
where:
MOLF: the stream molar flowrate (kmol/s)
MV: the stream molar volume (m³/kmol)
MOLV: the mean molecular weight of the mixture (kg/kmol)
Cv: related to the dimensionless stem position X
X: the normalized valve stem position (X=Xactual/Xmax)
Cvmax: the Cv of valve at maximum opening and is related to the conventional Cv

(expressed in US terms) by: Cv=2.40273 10-5 CvUS
METHODDP (General)
Multiphase flow method for DP (type: Input).
This mode models pressure drop for multiphase water/oil/gas mixes flowing across choke valves,
found in upstream applications. It is intended to be applied exclusively to WLV mixes. The
multiphase correlations can only be used with MODEDP Area Flex or Area Correlation if port area is
to be defined as a function of stem position.
1 Sachdeva A pressure drop equation will be generated. The

according to the following equation:
where:
M2 : mass flow rate (lbm/s)
A: downstream hydraulic flow area (ft2 - port

area at a given opening)
cd: valve discharge coefficient (valve parameter)
gc: acceleration due to gravity (32.17 ft2/s)
p1 : pressure upstream of valve (psi)
ρm2 : mixture density downstream (lbm/ft3)
x1 : gas in-situ quality at upstream (mass

fraction)
y: downstream to upstream pressure ratio
k: specific heat ratio (Cpg/Cvg)
V G1 : gas specific volume upstream (ft3/lbm)
V G2 : gas specific volume downstream (ft3/lbm)
ρL : liquid density (lbm/ft3)
A critical pressure ratio equation, y c, will be

generated:
where:
y c: critical downstream to upstream pressure

ratio
n: polytropic exponent for the gas
V L : liquid specific volume upstream (ft3/lbm)
V G2 : critical gas specific volume downstream

(ft3/lbm)
The calculated value of y c will be compared with the

actual pressure drop value, y, to check for sonic flow
conditions. If y < y c gas flow rate reaches its
maximum value and yc will be used in the DP=F
(MASSF) equation.
2 Perkins A set of equations will be generated and the pressure

drop will be a function of the mass flow rate.
The downstream mixture fluid velocity, u2, can be

calculated by:
where:
λ: group parameter
n: polytropic exponent for the gas
xo: oil in-situ quality at upstream (mass

fraction)
xw: water in-situ quality at upstream (mass

fraction)
ρo: oil density upstream (lbm/ft3)
ρw: water density upstream (lbm/ft3)
p1 : pressure upstream of valve (psi)
A1 : upstream hydraulic flow area (ft2)
A2 : downstream hydraulic flow area (ft2 - port

xg: gas in-situ quality at upstream (mass

fraction)
α 1 : group parameter
Mass flow rate for the mixture, M2 (lbm/s), is then

given by:
where:
ρ2 : mixture density downstream (lbm/ft3)
u2 : mixture fluid velocity downstream (ft/s)
with group parameters:
where:
cvg: gas specific heat (BTU/lbm.R)
cvo: oil specific heat (BTU/lbm.R)
cvw: water specific heat (BTU/lbm.R)
MW: molecular weight of gas (lbm/mol)
z: gas compressibility factor
R: universal gas constant (10.73 psi.ft3/mole.R)

generated:

maximum value and y c will be used in the DP=F
(MASSF) equation.
3 Sun et al. A pressure drop equation will be generated and the

according to the following equation:
where:
M2 : mass flow rate (lbm/s)
A2 : downstream hydraulic flow area (ft2 - port

cd: valve discharge coefficient (valve parameter)
P1 : pressure upstream of valve (psi)
n: polytropic exponent
xg: gas in-situ quality at upstream (mass

fraction)
xo: oil in-situ quality at upstream (mass

fraction)
xw: water in-situ quality at upstream (mass

fraction)
ρo: oil density upstream (lbm/ft3)
ρw: water density upstream (lbm/ft3)
β: upstream-downstream fluid velocity ratio
where:
where:
A1 : upstream hydraulic flow area (ft2)

generated by:

maximum value and y c will be used in the DP=F
(MASSF) equation.
DP (Parameters)
DP = Pin- Pout
where:
K (Parameters)
Pressure drop factor (type: Measurable).
EXP ( Parameters)
Exponent of the mass flow rate (type: Input).
These two parameters are only use when MODEDP = 3 ('K factor').
X (Parameters)
Valve stem position (type: Measurable).
CVMAX (Parameters)
Maximum value of the valve coefficient (type: Measurable).
RANGE (Parameters)
Valve range (type: Measurable).
The valve range is equal to the ratio between the maximum controllable flow and the minimum
controllable flow
These three last parameters are only used in some cases (depending on the value of MODEDP).
DIAM (Parameters)
Internal pipe diameter (type: Input).
This parameter is only used when METHODDP is not equal to 0.
AREAMIN (Parameters)
Minimum value for port area (type: Measurable).
AREAMAX (Parameters)
Maximum value for port area (type: Measurable).
ACTAREA (Parameters)
Actual value of port area for a given opening (type: Measurable).
YC (Parameters)
Critical downstream-to-upstream pressure ratio for sonic flow across the valve for WLV mixes
(type: Result).
YP (Parameters)
Actual downstream-to-upstream pressure ratio for sonic flow across the valve for WLV mixes (type:
Result).
Y (Parameters)
Downstream-to-upstream pressure ratio used in the selected WLV pressure drop equation (type:
Result).
M2 (Parameters)
Mass flow rate calculated using WLV pressure drop equation (type: Result).
CD (Parameters)
Valve discharge coefficient (type: Measurable).
CVFIT (Others)
Coefficients 1 thorough 7 (in increasing order) for the sigmoid Cv curve (type: Input).
AFIT (Others)
Coefficients 1 thorough 7 (in increasing order) for the sigmoid port Area curve (type: Input).
Attention: The example on BWHVAL unit also includes a DPVAL unit.
SECTION 16: ECOVAL: BOILER ELEMENT
PURPOSE
This type of UNIT is dedicated to the detail modeling of tube layers in vertical and horizontal heat
recovery steam boilers (HRSG). It includes predictions of heat transfer coefficients and pressure drop
on fumes and steam side. The same UNIT type can be used for the modeling of economizers,
vaporizers and super-heaters.
Attention: This type of unit is not part of the standard VALI installation. It is available as an add-in
to VALI under a special license agreement.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 22 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT ECOVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
2 material STREAMS: fumes in and steam/water in
OUTLET STREAMS
2 material STREAM: fumes out and steam/water out
THERMODS:
Corre sponding inle t and outle t STREAMS must use the same THERMOD.
Fumes can go up or down (both fumes hot-spots can be either inlet or an outlet).
The water/steam comes in from the upper left side to either the down right or down left side.
Mirroring the symbol will generate alternate configurations.
SECTION 17: EEXVAL: HEAT EXCHANGER
PURPOSE
This type of UNIT allows you to model the heat and mass balances of heat exchangers of various lay-
outs. Up to ten different fluids may be considered as well as some thermal streams.
This unit does not check for temperature crossing between hot and cold streams during calculation.
To prohibit this behavior use units of type HEXVAL or PRHVAL. During the report phase,
temperature crossing will be detected and reported when the EEXVAL is modeling the heat exchange
between 2 material streams.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 23 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT EEXVAL
CONNECTION RULES
The streams indicated in above figure must be material. Corresponding inlet/outlet streams must
use the same THERMOD. The unused hot-spots are optional.
The symbols of the second row allow you to handle any number of streams up to 10. The upper and
lower hot-spots can be used for any type of stream. The horizontal lanes can only be used for
material streams. The direction of these streams is free.
MODE Ge ne ral Input Se le ction of e quations to be take n into account (0,1)
LOAD Parame te rs Re sult Load of the e xchange r
UA1,UA2 Parame te rs Re sult He at transfe r coe fficie nts
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
No equations are considered for the heat exchanger performance (use HEXVAL instead).
LOAD (Parameters)
Load of the exchanger (type: Result).
This parameter shows the amount of heat transferred by the unit. It does not need to be initialized
and is calculated after validation (only when the exchange concerns 2 material streams only).
UA1,UA2 (Parameters)
Heat transfer coefficients (type: Result).
UA1: calculated on basis of counter-current flow
UA2: calculated on basis of co-current lay-out

These values do not need to be initialized and must be calculated after validation.
MODEDP (Parameters)

where:

to 30%)
A value of MODEDP has to be given for each outlet stream, although it is only meaningful for material
streams
DP (Parameters)
DP = Pin- Pout
where:
DPX (Parameters)
MASSFX (Parameters)
CFDP (Parameters)
EXAMPLE : HEAT EXCHANGE BETWEEN GAS AND WATER.
FIGURE 24 - EEXVAL EXAMPLE: GAS /WATER EXCHANGE
There is 1 UNIT :
UNIT : EEX
Type=EEXVAL
MODEDP1='DP=F(MASSF)'
MODEDP2='DP=F(MASSF)'
FIN FMOD to EEX
GIN STEAM to EEX
FOUT FMOD from EEX
GOUT STEAM from EEX
LOSS.EEX THERMAL STREAM from EEX
The THERMODS are:
FMOD: H2, N2, CO2, H2O
STEAM: H2O
The THERMOD STEAM is readily available in the file Empty.bls. The THERMOD FMOD can easily be
derived from the THERMOD FUMES.
TABLE 15 - MEAS UREMENTS FOR EEXVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 16 - RES ULTS OF EEXVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 18: EFFVAL: EFFICACITY AND LOSSES
PURPOSE
The EFFVAL is used to model mechanical and/or thermal efficiencies and/or losses.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 25 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT EFFVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number : 10
Type : mechanical, thermal
OUTLET STREAMS
Number: 2
Type: mechanical, thermal
The second stream corresponds to the losses.
MODE Ge ne ral Input Se le ction of e quations to be take n into account (0,1)
EFFIC Parame te rs Me asurable Efficie ncy
LOSSES Parame te rs Me asurable Re lative Losse s
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
0 Default Efficiencies and losses are taken into account
1 Mass Balance only No equation
Effic (Parameters)
Efficiency (type: Measurable).
The efficiency is the ratio between the first outlet heat load or mechanical power and the sum of the
inlet heat load and/or mechanical power.
Losses (Parameters)
Relative Losses (type: Measurable).
The relative losses are the ratio between the second outlet heat load or mechanical.
SECTION 19: EQUVAL: COMPOSITION EQUALITY
PURPOSE
The EQUVAL is used to link the composition of 2 material streams.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 26 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT EQUVAL
CONNECTION RULES
No connections are allowed on an EQUVAL.
ALPHA Parame te rs Re sults Inte rnal parame te r
>SNAME1 Othe rs Input Name of first stre am
>SNAME2 Othe rs Input Name of se cond stre am
UNIT PARAMETERS
>SNAME1 (Others)
Name of first stream (type: Input).
>SNAME2 (Others)
Name of second stream (type: Input).
The names of 2 streams that must have the same composition is specified in the Others page.
FIGURE 27 - THE OTHERS PAGE OF AN EQUVAL UNIT
EXAMPLE: COMPOSITION EQUALITY BETWEEN 2 GAS STREAMS

In this example, two gas streams are mixed. The main natural stream has a known composition but
not the recycle gas stream. The two compositions are linked together through a EQUVAL unit
FIGURE 28 - EQUVAL EXAMPLE
There are 2 UNITS:
B-1
type=BBXVAL
MODEDP='DP variable' on outlet stream
EQU1
type=EQUVAL
pointing to NAT_GAS and RECYCLE
NAT_GAS NG to B-1
RECYCLE NG to B-1
OUT NG from B-1
The list of measurements is given and results are given in tables below.
TABLE 17 - MEAS UREMENTS LIS T FOR EQUVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 18 - RES ULTS OF EQUVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 20: FLXVAL: USER DEFINED EQUATIONS
PURPOSE
The FLXVAL unit allows to :
perform advanced filtering operations (ValiFilter license required)
add user defined constraints
add user defined measurements
calculate user defined functions of the validated values
calculate results and generate reports
Using FLEX language, you can access values of streams and units and perform calculations.
Thermodynamic routines can be used to calculate various thermodynamic properties and perform
physical equilibrium compositions. The results of these calculations (up to 9 values) are then stored
in the parameters VAR1 ... VAR9 of the unit. These parameters are dimensionless.
You can then:
enter a "perfect" measurement (deviation=0) on the calculated value. This will define an
additional constraint
enter a measurement on the calculated value. This is then a user defined measurement
not enter any measurement. The calculated values will simply be available in the various
reports
Attention: A flex code can be associated to any equipment unit, defining additional constraints (all
residuals of the corresponding equations are assumed to be zero).
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 29 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT FLXVAL
CONNECTION RULES
No stream can be connected to a unit of type FLXVAL.
NEQU Ge ne ral Input Numbe r of e quations (1..9)
VARi Parame te rs Me asurable Re sults of the calculations
UNIT PARAMETERS
NEQU (General)
Number of equations (1..9) (type: Input).
NEQU is the number of equations to be handled by the module and can range from 1 to 9. When
more equations are defined in the Flex program attached to the unit, only the first NEQU equations
are actually used.
VARi (Parameters)
Results of the calculations (type: Measurable).
These variables will contain the results of the equations defined in the Flex program. Measurements
can be defined on these variables. Note that these parameters are dimensionless.
DEFINING THE FLEX PROGRAM

The Flex code attached to a Unit of type FLXVAL can define up to 9 equations. It can also contain
user-defined routines called from other Flex codes
Each equation must be defined in a separate FUNCTION (EQ1, EQ2, ...) and the result of the
calculations must be stored in the variable RES. The value of RES will automatically be available in
the variables VARi,. of the unit (VAR1 for equation EQ1, etc.).
Typically, each FUNCTION consists in:
a declaration section: defines Variables and Arrays that will be necessary
selection of a Thermod: defines the thermodynamics methods to be used
selection of variables: defines which variables will be used in the equation
calculations: defines the calculations
Comments can be entered anywhere after the exclamation mark "!".
Flex syntax is similar to FORTRAN Code. Syntax is described in chapter "Flex code".
Example:
FUNCTION EQi ! This the header for the first equation
! Declaration
REAL ...
! Selection of thermodynamic methods
CALL SELECT('Astream')
! Selection of variables
CALL GETALL(...)
CALL GETVAR(...)
CALL GETUVA(...)
CALL GTVARTAG(...)
CALL GTTAGVAL( )
! Calculations
...
RES = ...
END
EXAMPLE OF FLEX PROGRAM

In this example, steam is superheated in the radiation part of a boiler (HTX) and expanded in a
turbine (TUR). Flex code is used to model the radiation heat transfer in the boiler and to link the
steam rate going through the turbine to the pressure drop.
FIGURE 30 - FLXVAL EXAMPLE
There are 3 UNITS:
HEX
type=HEXVAL
TUR
type=TURVAL
FLX-01
type=FLXVAL
'2 equations'
6 STREAMS must be defined (pay attention to their state !) :
VAP.1 STEAM (Liquid/Vapor) to HTX
VAP.2 STEAM (Vapor) from HTX to TUR
VAP.3 STEAM (Liquid/Vapor) from TUR
FUME.1 FUMES (Vapor) to HTX
FUME.2 FUMES (Vapor) from HTX
WTURB Me chanical from TUR
The flex code introduces two constraints:
radiation zone of the boiler
LOAD 10 9 VAR1 TFume.2

4 4
TVap.2
pressure drop through boiler:
p 2Vap.2 p 2Vap.3 VAR 2 G Vap.2 p Vap.2 v Vap.2

FUNCTION EQ1
! radiation effect
REAL LOAD
CALL GETVAR ('Fume.2', 'T', T1)
CALL GETVAR ('vap.2', 'T', T2)
CALL GETUVA ('hex', 'LOAD', LOAD)
RES = LOAD * 1.0E09 / (T1**4 - T2**4)
END
!
FUNCTION EQ2
! Pressure drop
CALL SELECT ('vap.2')
CALL GETALL ('vap.2','ALL')
CALL PROPTY ('TOTMAS', T, P, ratespar(3), G1)
CALL PROPTY ('VG', T, P, ratespar(3), VG)
CALL GETVAR ('vap.2', 'P', P1)
CALL GETVAR ('vap.3', 'P', P2)
RES = G1 * P1 * VG / (P1*P1 - P2*P2)
END
The list of measurements and results given in table below.
TABLE 19 - MEAS UREMENTS LIS T FOR FLXVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 20 - RES ULTS OF FLXVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 21: FLEXLIB: USER DEFINED FUNCTIONS
PURPOSE
The FLEXLIB unit has been designed to contain Flex user-defined functions which can be referred to
in any Flex code. The functions are available throughout the complete model, even if you run only
selected PFDs that do not include that FLEXLIB unit or if the FLEXLIB unit is included in a PFD that
is OFF.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 31 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT FLEXLIB
CONNECTION RULES
No stream can be connected to a unit of type FLEXLIB.
MODE Ge ne ral Input FLEXLIB use d / not use d
When set to "FLEXLIB not used", the functions defined in the unit are ignored. This enables to keep
different versions of user-defined functions in a single model.
SECTION 22: GROSSERR: GROSS ERRORS

ELIMINATION
PURPOSE
The GROSSERR unit is used to specify the settings of the Gross Error Management system, which
deals with suspect measurements that may bias the results of the data reconciliation problem. The
Gross Error Management system includes:
the detection of gross errors based on quality criteria
the identification or selection of "suspect" measurements
the correction to be applied for the selected "suspect" measurements
Three approaches are proposed for the selection of "suspect" measurements:
the "Highest impact" method evaluates successively the impact on the total penalty of
removing each measurement. The measurement which as the highest impact is then
selected and the procedure iterates as the quality criteria is satisfied. This method is
recommended
the "Highest measured penalty" method simply selects the measurements according to
their penalty, calculated on basis of the measurement accuracy
the "Highest correction penalty" method selects the measurements according to their
penalty, calculated on basis of the correction accuracy (VDI recommendation)
For all approaches, the "Failure probability factor" is a (multiplying) weighting factor that is used to
favor or un-favor the selection of measurements. Setting the Failure probability of a measurement to
0 will simply prevent the selection of the measurement in any case.
The criteria of quality can be either:
that the Chi2 test is satisfied
that the Chi2 test is satisfied and no measurement are flagged
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 32 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT GROS S ERR
CONNECTION RULES
No connections are allowed on a GROSSERR unit.
MODE Ge ne ral Input Mode
CRITERIA Ge ne ral Input De te ction Crite rion
PENALTY Ge ne ral Input Individual Crite rion
TYPEELIM Ge ne ral Input Type of se le ction
NOCONV Ge ne ral Input Be havior whe n no conve rge nce
MODE2SL Ge ne ral Input Mode for solve r switch
MODEREME Ge ne ral Input Mode for gross e rror corre ction
MODEBND Ge ne ral Input Bounds on variable s
FAILPROB Parame te rs Input Failure Probability
MAXELIM Parame te rs Input Maximum Numbe r of ite rations
MAXFAIL Parame te rs Input Maximum failure s for gross e rror corre ction
EVOCRIT Parame te rs Input Thre shold for individual crite rion
EQUICRIT Parame te rs Input Equivale nt gross e rrors crite ria
CORCRIT Parame te rs Input Corre lation crite ria
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
0 Gross Errors are not the Gross Error management procedure is not
eliminated activated
1 Gross Errors are eliminated the Gross Error management procedure is activated
CRITERIA (General)
Detection Criterion (type: Input).
1 Chi-Square Test Gross errors are eliminated until the Chi2 test is
satisfied
2 Chi-Square & Individual Test Gross errors are eliminated until the Chi2 test is
satisfied and no individual measurement is flagged
any more
PENALTY (General)
Individual Criterion (type: Input).
1 Based on measured penalty The penalty calculated on each measurement is based

on the accuracy of the measurement
2 Based on impact The penalty calculated on each measurement is based

on its impact on the weighted sum of penalty
3 Based on correction penalty The penalty calculated on each measurement is based

on the accuracy of the correction applied to the
measurement (according to VDI recommendation)
TYPEELIM (General)
Type of selection (type: Input).
1 Highest measured penalty Highest penalty: the measurements with the highest
penalty (weighted by the failure probability) are
removed first
2 Highest impact Highest impact: the measurements with the highest

impact on the total penalty (weighted by the failure
probability) are removed first
3 Highest correction penalty Highest correction penalty: the measurements with

the highest correction penalty (weighted by the
failure probability) are removed first
NOCONV (General)
Behavior when no convergence (type: Input).
0 No Elimination when no No correction when no convergence

convergence
1 Elimination allowed when Correction allowed when near convergence

near convergence
MODE2SL (General)
Mode for solver switch (type: Input).
0 Allow switch between solvers Allow switch between solvers (when -2SL runtime
when -2SL option selected)
1 No switch between solvers No switch between solvers during gross errors

management
MODEREME (Parameters)
Mode for gross error correction (type: Input).
0 Serial elimination Serial elimination
1 Serial Relaxation of Serial relaxation of uncertainties of equivalent gross

equivalencies errors (combined with serial elimination of gross
errors)
2 Serial Relaxation of all Gross Serial relaxation of uncertainties of all gross errors
Errors
MODEBND (General)
Mode for solver switch (type: Input).
0 Solver Bounds Solver bounds (SL or SH) are considered for gross
error selection
1 Error Bounds Error bounds (LL or HH) are considered for gross
error selection
FAILPROB (Parameters)
Failure Probability (type: Input).
FAILPROB defines the default probability of tags defined from tag files. This parameter is not used if
the tags are directly defined in the ValiModeller.
MAXELIM (Parameters)
Maximum Number of iterations (type: Input).
MAXELIM defines the maximum number of iterations of the gross error algorithm. A value of 0 is
equivalent to set the default value (10).
MAXFAIL (Parameters)
Maximum failures for gross error correction (type: Input).
MAXFAIL defines the maximum number of convergence failure that can happen during correction of
a tag by the gross error algorithm. A value of 0 is equivalent to set the default value (10).
EVOCRIT (Parameters)
Threshold for individual criterion (type: Input).
Default value = 6.6349
EVOCRIT is the threshold value used for the individual criterion. The default value corresponds to
the penalty created by a single measurement when it gets out of its 99% confidence interval.
EQUICRIT (Parameters)
Equivalent gross errors criteria (type: Input).
Default value = 0.05
EQUICRIT is the threshold value used for the identification of equivalent gross errors. Gross errors
are considered as equivalent if their impacts differ by less than EQUICRIT.
CORCROT (Parameters)
Correlation criteria (type: Input).
Default value = 0.8
CORCRIT is the threshold value used for the identification of correlation between equivalent gross
errors. Equivalent gross errors are considered as correlated if their impact variation is greater than
CORCRIT
SECTION 23: HEX-HNO3: NITROUS GAS COOLER
PURPOSE
This UNIT models the cooling a nitrous gas mixture, taking into account reactions in the gas phase:
peroxidation:
NO + O2=>2 NO2
dimerization:
2 NO2<=>N2O4
The extents of these reactions are calculated on basis of BODENSTEIN kinetic equations.
The reactions are part of the model and must not be defined in the reactions page of the unit.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 33 - S YMBOL FOR UNIT HEX-HNO3
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS (2)
shell side, nitrous gas mixture (state V, LV, LLV or WLV)
OUTLET STREAMS (2)
shell side, remaining nitrous gas mixture (any state)
THERMOD:
Both nitrous gas material streams must use the same THERMOD, which must contain the following
compounds in any order : NO, NO2, N2O4, O2, N2, H2O, HNO3. Any other compound is considered
as inert.
Both coolant streams(inlet and outlet) must use the same THERMOD.
REACTIONS:
The reactions are part of the model and must not be defined in the Reactions page.
LOAD Parame te rs Re sult He at load of the e xchange r
VOL Parame te rs Me asurable She ll volume
HA Parame te rs Me asurable Transfe r coe fficie nt
EXTENTi Parame te rs Me asurable Exte nt of re actions
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
LOAD (Parameters)
Load of the exchanger (type: Result).
VOL (Parameters)
Shell volume (type: Measurable).
The shell volume is taken into account into the Bodenstein kinetics.
HA (Parameters)
Transfer coefficient (type: Measurable).
The heat transfer coefficient is defined as follows:
LOAD = HA . LNTD
DTSIDE1 DTSIDE2
LNTD =
where:
Temperature difference on each side (type: Measurable).
These parameters define the temperature difference of the streams at each side of the exchanger:
DTSIDE1 = Ti1-To2
DTSIDE2 = To1-Ti2
EXTENTi (Parameters)
Extent of reactions (type: Measurable).
The extents are defined (on molar basis) as follows:
Extent: amount of O2 consumed in peroxidation
Extent2: amount of N2O4 produced by dimerization
MODEDP (Parameters)

where:

to 30%)
A value of MODEDP has to be given for both outlet streams.
DP (Parameters)
DP = Pin- Pout
where:
DPX (Parameters)
MASSFX (Parameters)
CFDP (Parameters)

SECTION 24: HEXVAL: RIGOROUS HEAT EXCHANGER
PURPOSE
This type of UNIT allows you to consider heat and mass balances of heat exchangers involving two
inlet and two outlet streams. The following equations can be handled:
heat transfer linked to the difference of temperature between the streams
pressure drop equations can also be generated
saturation state of the outlet streams
The area and heat transfer coefficients as well as the temperature difference on both sides can be
entered as pseudo-measurements. The heat transfer can be due to convection and/or radiation and
can be made dependant on the flow rates.
The shell side and tubes side of the unit can be modeled separately as 2 different units (possibly in
two different PFDs).
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 34 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT HEXVAL
The symbols Left/Right and Up/Down can be used to model the complete exchanger or only its shell
side. In the latter case the tubes side will be modeled via one of the two "Tubes side" symbols and the
two parts of the heat exchanger will be connected by a thermal stream.
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
1 or 2 material STREAMS, possibly one thermal stream
OUTLET STREAMS (2)
1 or 2 material STREAMS, possibly one thermal stream
Corresponding inlet and outlet STREAMS must use the same THERMOD.
The shell side is always considered as the first connections when modeling the unit in a single piece.
CONNECT Ge ne ral Input Conne ction rule
MODEU Ge ne ral Input Mode for calculation of he at transfe r coe fficie nt
MODEPASS Ge ne ral Input Numbe r of passe s on both side s
METHOD Ge ne ral Input Calculation me thod (DTLN or NTU)
OPERMODE Ge ne ral Input NTU Ope ration mode
LOAD Parame te rs Me asurable He at load of the e xchange r
AREA Parame te rs Me asurable Exchange r surface are a
UGLOB Parame te rs Me asurable He at transfe r coe fficie nt
RTUB Parame te rs Input Tube re sistance
CFH Parame te rs Me asurable He at transfe r corre ction factor
FF Parame te rs Me asurable Fouling factor
CORDTLN Parame te rs Re sult DTLN corre ction factor
G Parame te rs Me asurable Ge ome tric factor for radiation
DTLN Parame te rs Re sult Logarithmic ave rage of the te mpe rature diffe re nce
MASSFXi Parame te r Input Nominal flow rate
VFRACi Parame te rs Input Vapor fractions of outle t stre ams
Ui Parame te rs Me asurable Film he at transfe r coe fficie nt
REFERUi Parame te rs Input Nominal Ui
MASSUi Parame te rs Input Nominal flow rate
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
1 Mass Balance only Only the mass balances are taken into account
10 Counter-current exchanger Counter-current performance equation is added
20 Co-current exchanger Co-current performance equation is added
50 Radiative exchanger Heat transfer through radiation
60 Conv + Rad Counter-current Heat transfer through radiation and counter-current

convection
70 Conv + Rad Co-current Heat transfer through radiation and co-current

convection
If the DTLN method is selected (see METHOD), the performance equation (for MODE 10 to 70) is:
LOAD 10 9 VAR1 TFume.2

4 4
TVap.2
DTSIDE1 DTSIDE2
LNTD =
where:
DTSIDE1 and DTSIDE2: the temperature differences on each side of the heat exchanger
σ: the constant of Boltzmann (5.667 10-8 W/m2K4)
Thot: the outlet temperature of the hot stream
Tcold: the outlet temperature of the cold stream
Uglob: the heat transfer coefficient
CORDTLN: a correction factor that accounts for the deviation from true counter-
configuration (only for multi-passes exchangers, see parameter NPASSES)
If the NTU method is selected, only convective heat transfer can be modeled (MODE 10 or 20). The
NTU method is based on the notion of efficiency, the efficiency being defined by the ratio between the
actual heat load of the exchanger and the maximum heat load achievable assuming an infinite heat
transfer surface area.
EFF = LOAD / LOADMAX
The efficiency is calculated on basis of the number of transfer unit NUT according to various
formulas depending on the exchanger configuration and operation mode.
COUNTER-CURRENT CO-CURRENT
Single phase on both side s C = Cmin/Cmax 1 e NUT (1 C ) 1 e NUT (1 C)

EFF EFF
1 C . e NUT (1 C ) 1 C
Vaporization or Conde nsation C=0 EFF 1 e NUT

EFF 1 e NUT
NUT = Uglob * A /Cmin
C = Cmin/ Cmax
where:
Cmax and Cmin: the total heat capacities of the streams (Massf * Cp)
With either methods (DTLN or NTU), you can define measurements on temperature differences
(DTSIDE1, DTSIDE2), heat load (LOAD), heat exchange area (A) and heat exchange coefficients (by
convection Uglob and by radiation G). Among these three latest variables (A, Uglob and G), at least
two of them must be, either measured, or set constant. Alternatively the heat transfer coefficient
Uglob can be calculated in function of the flow rates of the streams via the parameter MODEU.
CONNECT (General)
Connection rule (type: Input).
0 Automatic detection the hot and cold stream positions will be

automatically detected on basis of the stream
temperature data
1 Cold in Shell the cold stream is assumed to be in the Shell side
2 Cold in Tubes the cold stream is assumed to be in the Tubes side
MODEU (General)
Mode for calculation of heat transfer coefficient (type: Input).
0 Only Uglob is variable No other equation is generated
1 Ushell and Utubes variables Uglob will be calculated in function of the film
heat transfer coefficients according to:
1/Uglob = FF + 1/(CFH.Uclean)
where:
FF: a fouling factor
CFH: a tuning parameter
Uclean: the clean heat transfer coefficient

calculated from:
1/Uclean = (1/U1 + RTUB + 1/U2)
where:
U1: the film heat transfer coefficient on

shell side
RTUB: the tubes thermal resistance
U2: the film heat transfer coefficient on

tubes side
2 U=F(MASSF) In addition to the above equations, the film heat

transfer coefficients are related to the flow rates:
Ui = REFERUi * (MASSFi / MASSFUi)0.7
where:
REFERUi: the film heat transfer coefficient

at nominal conditions
MASSFi: the actual flow rate
MASSFUi: the flowrate at nominal

conditions
MODEPASS (General)
Number of passes on both sides (type: Input).
0 1/1 or 2/2 passes perfect counter-current configuration. The parameter

CORDTLN will be equal to 1
1 1/(2 or more) one pass on shell side, 2 or more passes on tubes side
2 2/(4 or more) two passes on shell side, 4 or more passes on tubes

side
LOAD (Parameters)
Load of the exchanger (type: Measurable).
AREA (Parameters)
Exchanger surface area (type: Measurable).
This parameter is the area of the exchanger used for heat transfer.
UGLOB (Parameters)
Heat transfer coefficient (type: Measurable).
This parameter is the heat transfer coefficient of the exchanger. It is only relevant when heat transfer
through convection is taken into account.
Attention: When a convection equation is used (MODE=10, 20, 60 or 70) it is necessary to define at
least one pseudo-measurement on AREA or on UGLOB.
If the heat exchanger area is unknown, you can set the surface area to 1 (Measurement with
expected deviation set to zero), and use the UGLOB parameter as a global UA factor.
Temperature difference on each side (type: Measurable).
These parameters define the temperature difference of the streams at each side of the exchanger.
Streams used for definition depend on the type of exchanger.
DTSIDE1 = Ti1-Ti2 and DTSIDE2 = To1-To2 for co-current arrangement
DTSIDE1 = Ti1-To2 and DTSIDE2 = To1-Ti2 for counter-current arrangement
Attention: The definition of the difference of temperatures leads to positive values only if the
connection is set appropriately through the parameter CONNECT. This is also the case for the heat
load parameter.
RTUB (Parameters)
Tube resistance (type: Input).
CFH (Parameters)
Heat transfer correction factor (type: Measurable).
FF (Parameters)
Fouling factor (type: Measurable).
CORDTLN (Parameters)
DTLN correction factor (type: Result).
These parameters are used in the performance equations describe above.
G (Parameters)
Geometric factor for radiation (type: Measurable).
This factor is only re le vant whe n radiation is take n into account (Mode = 50, 60 or70). It include s the e ffe ct of
e missivity as we ll as the ge ome tric factor.
Attention: When the radiation equation is used (MODE=50, 60 or 70) it is necessary to define at least
one pseudo-measurement on A or on G.
If the heat exchanger area is unknown, you can set the surface area to 1 (Measurement with
expected deviation set to zero), and use the G parameter as a global GA factor.
DTLN (Parameters)
Logarithmic average of the temperature difference (type: Result).
MODEDP (Parameters)

where:

to 30%)
A value of MODEDPi has to be given for each outlet stream, although it is only meaningful for
material streams.
DP (Parameters)
DP = Pin- Pout
where:
DPX (Parameters)
MASSFX (Parameters)
CFDP (Parameters)
VFRAC1,2 (Parameters)
Saturation state (type: Input).
A value of VFRAC must be given for each outlet STREAM, although it will only be meaningful for
material STREAMS:
-1 - no saturation constraint for the corresponding outlet

stream
0 - the corresponding stream is at bubble point. It must

be defined as Liquid
1 - the corresponding stream is at dew point. It must be

defined as Vapor
These parameters define the vapor ratio in the outlet stream. The value of this parameter has to be
set in the range of 0 to 1 : if the value is out of this range, saturation constraint is not considered. This
parameter is always a constant for the model.
Attention:
1. A Value of 0 corresponds to a saturated liquid (bubble point); a value of 1 corresponds to a

saturated vapor (dew point).
2. If you want to fix bubble or dew point with VFRAC, it is highly recommended to define the
corresponding Streams with L or V type instead of LV. This avoids mathematical instabilities due
to proximity of saturation.
Ui (Parameters)
Film heat transfer coefficient (type: Measurable).
REFERUi (Parameters)
Nominal Ui (type: Input).
MASSUi (Parameters)
Parameters used to calculate the film heat transfer coefficients in function of flow rates
EXAMPLE : EXCHANGER WITH STEAM VAPORIZATION

Attention: see model hexval.bls in the directory "examples\hexval".
This example is a heat exchange between fumes and steam in a vaporizer.
FIGURE 35 - AN EXAMPLE OF HEXVAL TYPE UNIT
There is 1 UNIT:
E-1:
type=HEXVAL
SYMBOL='Exchanger Left/Left'
MODE=''Counter-current exchanger'
CONNECT='Cold in Tubes'
MODEU='U=F(MASSF)'
MODEPASS='1/1 or 2/2 passes'
VFRAC1=1 (stream HOT2 at dew point)
MODEDP1 = 'DP=F(MASSF)', DPX1 = 2 bar, MASSFX1 = 500 t/h
MODEDP2 = 'DP=F(MASSF)', DPX2 = 1 bar, MASSFX2 = 80 t/h
1 FUMES to E-1
2 FUMES from E-1
3 STEAM to E-1
4 STEAM from E-1
The THERMODS STEAM and FUMES are defined in the file Empty.bls.
The list of measurements and the results are given below.
TABLE 21 - MEAS UREMENT LIS T FOR HEXVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 22 - RES ULTS OF HEXVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 25: LLEVAL: LIQUID-LIQUID-SEPARATOR
PURPOSE
The LLEVAL unit handles mass balances, energy balance and liquid-liquid equilibrium relationships
of a liquid-liquid separator. Heat can be extracted or provided to the separator via Thermal streams.
The temperature and the pressure of the liquid outlets are equal and it is possible either to consider a
pressure drop in the separator or to consider isobaric behavior.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 36 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT LLEVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number:
Material: 8
Thermal: 2
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number:
Material: 2 streams of state L, LL or WL
Thermal: 2
THERMODS
Both outlet streams must use the same THERMOD.
Attention:
1. The state of the outlet material streams can also be LV, LLV and WLV provided that there is more
than one component in the stream.
2. It is essential to initialize the composition of the outlet streams before attempting to activate the
L/L equations. Failure to do so can induce convergence problems or lead to a trivial solution
where both outlet streams have the same composition. The initialization can be performed
manually or automatically via the parameter FLASH.
define the split of solids between the two liquid phases.
FLASH Ge ne ral Input Flash initialization
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
0 All equations Mass, energy balances and liquid-liquid equilibrium

relationships are taken into account
3 Mass and L/L equilibrium Mass and liquid-liquid equilibrium relationships are
taken into account
Attention:
1. The outlet streams are always set at the same pressure and temperature except in Mode 1 (Mass
balance only).
2. If the partial flow rate of some of the compounds is detected as being equal to zero in one of the
Streams, the related equilibrium relationship is not considered.
MODEDP (General)
FLASH (General)
Flash initialization (type: Input).
0 None no initialization of outlet streams (keep values of last

run)
1 Always initialization in all cases on basis of input streams

data
2 When needed initialization on basis of input streams data in the

following cases:
one of the flow rates of the two first outlet

streams is equal to 0
the temperature of one of the two first outlet

streams is equal to 0°C
REFDP (Parameters)

MODEDP (General)
FLASH (General)

run)

data

following cases:


REFDP (Parameters)

DP (Parameters)
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
SECTION 26: LLVVAL : LIQUID-LIQUID-VAPOR

SEPARATOR
PURPOSE
This type of UNIT handles mass balances, energy balance and liquid-liquid-vapor equilibrium
relationships of a 3 phase separator. Heat can be extracted or provided to the separator via Thermal
streams.
The temperature and the pressure of the liquid and vapor outlets are equal and it is possible either to
consider a pressure drop in the separator or to consider isobaric behavior.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 37 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT LLVVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number:
Material: 6
Thermal: 2
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number:
Material:
2 streams of state L, LL or WL for the liquids
1 stream of state V
Thermal: 2
THERMODS
All outlet streams must use the same THERMOD.
Attention:
L/L/V equations. Failure to do so can induce convergence problems or lead to a trivial solution
where all outlet streams have the same compositions. The initialization can be performed
define whether solids are going with the liquid or vapor phases.
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
0 All equations Mass, energy balances and liquid-liquid-vapor

equilibrium relationships are taken into account
3 Mass and L/L/V equilibrium Mass and liquid-liquid-vapor equilibrium

Attention:
balance only).
MODEDP (General)
FLASH (General)

run)

data

following cases:


REFDP (Parameters)

DP (Parameters)
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
SECTION 27: LOFUNIT (PFD): LIST OF UNITS
PURPOSE
The purpose of a LOFUNIT (or PFD) is to define a List OF UNITs which are modeled together.
A maximum of 99 units are allowed in a LOFUNIT. A LOFUNIT may itself contain other units of
type LOFUNIT, up to a maximum level of embedding of 9.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 38 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT LOFUNIT
CONNECTION RULES
No connections are allowed on a LOFUNIT.

This unit has no parameter.
SECTION 28: LVEVAL : LIQUID-VAPOR SEPARATOR
PURPOSE
The LVEVAL unit handles mass balances, energy balance and liquid-vapor equilibrium relationships
of a liquid-vapor separator. Heat can be extracted or provided to the separator via Thermal Streams.
The temperature and the pressure of the outlets are equal and it is possible either to consider a
pressure drop in the separator or to consider isobaric behavior.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 39 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT LVEVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number:
Material: 8
Thermal: 2
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number:
Material:
1 stream of state V as vapor outlet (upper stream)
1 stream of state L as liquid outlet (lower stream)
Thermal: 2
THERMODS
Attention:
L/V equations. Failure to do so can induce convergence problems or lead to a trivial solution
where both outlet streams have the same composition. The initialization can be performed
define whether solids are going with the liquid or vapor phase.
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
0 All equations Mass, energy balances and liquid-vapor equilibrium

3 Mass and L/V equilibrium Mass and liquid-vapor equilibrium relationships are
taken into account
Attention:
balance only).
MODEDP (General)
FLASH (General)

run)

data

following cases:


REFDP (Parameters)

DP (Parameters)
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
EXAMPLE : FLASH OF A MIXTURE OF O2, N2, AR

Attention: see model lveval.bls in the directory "examples\lveval".
FIGURE 40 - EXAMPLE OF LVEVAL TYPE UNIT
A stream made of O2, N2 and AR is cooled down and flashed in a drum.
There is 1 UNIT :
DRUM:
type=LVEVAL
FEED STEAM to DRUM
HEAT THERMAL STREAM to DRUM
FV STEAM (Vapor) from DRUM
FL STEAM (Liquid) from DRUM
The THERMOD is defined in the model file Empty.bls.
The list of measurements and the results are given in tables below.
TABLE 23 - MEAS UREMENT LIS T FOR LVEVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 24 - RES ULTS OF LVEVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 29: NETVAL : PIPES NETWORK FOR MASS

BALANCE
PURPOSE
This unit type has been primarily developed to model the complex network of pipes connecting
process units and a tank farm where the various tanks can be used on various products.
All units of type NETVAL ( in a given model) behave like a single Black Box where all streams coming
in or going out participate to different mass balances depending on a product attribute. This product
type is defined as a PRODUCT attribute via a MEA file. It can also be set by the first 8 characters of
the stream comments. A PRODUCT attribute can also be set on a Tank (TNKVAL unit) in which case
both inlet and outlet streams will receive the corresponding attribute.
The BALANCE PRODUCT syntax in a mea file automatically generates tags for each specified
products giving the opening and closing inventory, the charge and rundown from tanks, the import
and export as well as the production and consumption per product.
In addition, the IMBALANCE PRODUCT syntax enables an imbalance on the selected product and
generates an additional tag giving the identified product imbalance.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 41 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT NETVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
Type: material
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
Type: material
Each connected stream must have an attribute.
EQUAMOD Ge ne ral Input Outle t Compositions Equalitie s

E
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
1 Mass Balance only Only the mass balance is considered.
EQUAMODE (General)
Outlet Compositions Equalities (type: Input).
0 None The compositions of outlet streams are free
1 Outlet All outlet streams having the same attribute will have the same
Compositi composition
ons
Equalities
EXAMPLE : GAS RECOVERY UNIT

Attention: see model netval.bls in the directory "examples\netval"
FIGURE 42 - AN EXAMPLE WITH NETVAL AND TNKVAL UNITS
This example shows the use of Netval units (NET-1 and NET-2) to interconnect a process unit (GRU1,
Gas Recovery Unit) to five storage tanks (T-1 to T-5).
There are 8 UNITS:
MIX
type=BBXVAL,
MODE='Mass Balance Only'
MODEDP='None'
NET-1, NET-2
type=NETVAL
Outlet Compositions Equalities='None'
T-1 to T-5
type=TNKVAL,
MODE='No simultaneous Input and Output'
There are 20 Streams connecting the units as indicated in the flow-sheet. They all use the same
Thermod Steam. (In fact, any thermod involving a single compound could be used as only global
mass balances are to be performed).
The comments of the streams and the list of measurements and the results are given in tables below.
Attention:
1. It is assumed that tags have been defined for Mass Flow Rate on each process (feed, s1, s2, etc.)
and export stream (1os, 2os, …) and on the initial and final levels of each tank.
2. The comments and measurements must be given as a measurement file.
3. The CUTOFF unit automatically sets OFF the streams for which the measured flow rate is below
0.01 t/h.
4. Stream LPGF (LPG failed) is automatically switched off because no tank contains failed LPG.
COMMENT STREAM 1I "C3"

COMMENT STREAM 1O "C3"

COMMENT STREAM 1OS "C3"

CUTOFF MASSF 0.01 t/h
FEED_MASSF 100 -5 t/h

S1_MASSF 60 -5 t/h
S2_MASSF 30 -5 t/h
S3_MASSF 20 -5 t/h
1OS_MASSF 500 -0.5 t/d

2OS_MASSF 1000 -0.5 t/d
T-1_MASS1 1000 5 t
T-1_MASS2 1500 5 t
T-2_MASS1 2000 5 t
T-2_MASS2 1500 5 t
T-3_MASS1 2000 5 t
T-3_MASS2 3000 5 t
T-4_MASS1 2000 5 t
T-4_MASS2 1000 5 t
T-5_MASS1 1000 5 t
T-5_MASS2 1500 5 t
TABLE 25 - MEAS UREMENT FILE FOR NETVAL/TNKVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 26 - RES ULTS OF NETVAL/TNKVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 30: OPTVAL : VARIOUS VALI PARAMETERS
PURPOSE
The OPTVAL unit allows to define various mathematical and reporting settings
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 43 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT OPTVAL
CONNECTION RULES
No connections are allowed on an OPTVAL.
RESPRINT Ge ne ral Input Trace in r3v re port
INIT Ge ne ral Input Type of initialization
NEGATFLR Ge ne ral Input Handling of ne gative flow rate s
EQUASOLV Ge ne ral Input Unvalidable me asure me nts
PRESMODE Ge ne ral Input De fine s the way stre am pre ssure s are handle d
FLEXMODE Ge ne ral Input Fle x code proce ssing
SPLMODE Ge ne ral Input SPLVAL proce ssing for single compound mixture s
SIGOR95C Ge ne ral Input Accuracy de finition
PENALSTD Ge ne ral Input Pe nalty de finition
TRIVRED Ge ne ral Input Trivial re dundancie s
CSTKEEP Ge ne ral Input Constants
UNCTHER Ge ne ral Input Unce rtaintie s on the rmodynamics
ITMAX Parame te rs Input Maximum numbe r of ite rations
EPS Parame te rs Input Pre cision re quire d on re sults
VALIDITY Parame te rs Input Thre shold for flagging corre cte d me asure me nts
JACFREQU Parame te rs Input Jacobian computation fre que ncy
CONSTR Parame te rs Input Algorithm for out of bounds variable s
CHI2CRIT Parame te rs Input Crite rion for Chi square te st
BNDTEST Parame te rs Input Thre shold for flagging active bounds
BNDCTRLU Parame te rs Input Bound Control Unce rtainty
UNIT PARAMETERS
RESPRINT (General)
Trace in r3v report (type: Input).
0 0: No Values of variables and equation residues are not printed in the r3v
report at each iteration
1 1: Yes Values of variables and equation residues are printed in the r3v report at
each iteration
INIT (General)
Type of initialization (type: Input).
0 0: Use data Starting values for the state and link variables are the value available in
the data. If these starting values are not coherent, arbitrary values are
chosen
1 1: Use Starting values for variables and the link variables are the measured
measured values. For the unmeasured variables, the default values are used. When
values the initial values are not valid, arbitrary values are chosen (example:
negative flow rate)
INIT < 0 selects INIT = 0.
Attention: When the variables are initialized with the available measurements, composition and
total flow rate measurements are used to initialize the partial flow rates.
NEGATFLR (General)
Handling of negative flow rates (type: Input).
0 0:accepted When a partial flow rate is not used in thermodynamic calculations, the
(Soldog program accepts a negative value for this variable (no thermal balance on
only) the corresponding streams)
1 1:refused Negative values are not accepted

(Soldog
only)
If NEGATFLR different from 1 or 0, it selects 1. This parameter is only relevant for the solver
SOLDOG.
EQUASOLV (General)
Unvalidable measurements (type: Input).
0 0:are kept All measurements are taken into account

variable
1 1:are set Measured variables which cannot be validated will be considered

constant constant and will no longer be taken into account in the validation
problem
If EQUASOLV < 0 (or > 1), it selects 0.
PRESMODE (General)
Defines the way stream pressures are handled (type: Input).
0 0:DP Stream pressures are handled as any other variable. Pressure drops are
constant if considered constant if not measured
not
measured
1 1:P and DP Stream pressures are considered constant when no measurement are
constant if defined on them. This was the behavior of VALI II
not
measured
2 2:P and DP Stream pressures and the unit pressure drops are always considered as
are variables
variable
FLEXMODE (General)
Flex code processing (type: Input).
0 Interpreted Flex code is interpreted at each execution of the code (slower)
1 Compiled Flex code is interpreted and compiled during the verification phase
(faster)
Attention:
1. FLEXMODE 0 is available only to insure 100% compatibility with preceding versions. The
compilation of the code is however not expected to cause problems of any order.
2. The use of user-defined routines is only possible when the code is compiled.
SPLMODE (General)
SPLVAL processing for single compound mixtures (type: Input).
0 Normal Streams coming from a SPLVAL always share the same record for their
behavior partial flow rates
1 Optimized Single compounds streams do not share their rates, which diminishes the
behavior non-linearity of the system of equations
Attention: SPLMODE 0 is available to insure 100% compatibility with preceding versions. The
optimized behavior is however not expected to cause problems of any order.
SIGOR95C (General)
Accuracy definition (type: Input).
0 Standard Accuracy of measurements is based on their standard deviation

deviation
1 95% Accuracy of measurements is based on their 95% confidence level (VDI

Confidence mode)
level (VDI-
2048)
PENALSTD (General)
Penalty definition (type: Input).
0 based on Penalty of individual measurements is calculated on basis of the

measured measured accuracy
accuracy
1 based on Penalty of individual measurements is calculated on basis of the accuracy

correction of the correction (VDI mode)
accuracy
(VDI-2048)
2 based on Penalty of individual measurements is calculated on basis of their impact

impact to the total penalty of the model, which is the decrease of the total penalty
when the corresponding measurement is removed from the data set
TRIVRED (General)
Trivial redundancies (type: Input).
0 based on Trivial redundancies are kept into the system

measured
accuracy
1 based on Trivial redundancies are removed from the optimization problem at

correction calculation time. All reports are still produced as if the trivial
accuracy redundancies were kept.
(VDI-2048)
Removing trivial redundancies can significantly improve the convergence properties of the model.
CSTKEEP (General)
Constants (type: Input).
0 are set as Constants are removed from the system. The corresponding variables are
constants directly set to their appropriate values
1 are set via Constants (except partial rates that are set to zero) are kept as variables of
an the system and set constant through a link equation
equation
2 are set as Constants (except partial rates that are set to zero) are kept as variables of
measurem the system and set a measurements with an uncertainty of 10 -6 %
ents
(accuracy:
1E-06%)
Setting the constants via equations or via measurements with a low uncertainty can sometimes
improve the convergence properties of a model.
Setting the constants as measurements enables them to be eliminated by the gross error algorithm.
They will also appear in the results of the sensitivity analysis tool.
UNCTHER (General)
Uncertainties on thermodynamics (type: Input).
0 none Uncertainties of thermodynamics are neglected
1 activated Uncertainties of thermodynamics are taken into account, according to

(VDI-2048) VDI-2048. Adequate values are only available in VALI for IAPWS-97
methods
ITMAX (Parameters)
Maximum number of iterations (type: Input).
ITMAX =< 0 selects 100 iterations.
EPS (Parameters)
Precision required on results (type: Input).
Default value = 1.e-06
EPS =< 0 selects 1.e-06
This value is used to evaluate the value of the sum of the squares of the residues, for which
convergence is considered. The default value is appropriate for molar rates in the range 0.01 to 1
kmol/s. If you work with significantly lower flow rates, you may have to reduce the value of this
parameter.
VALIDITY (Parameters)
Threshold for flagging corrected measurements (type: Input).
Tags for which the validated value is outside the corresponding confidence interval will be flagged.
For the default value of 95%, this corresponds to a difference (between measured and validated
values) of about twice the expected deviation.
JACFREQU (Parameters)
Jacobian computation frequency (type: Input).
If JACFREQU =< 0 , it selects 5.
The Jacobian is estimated after JACFREQU iterations, as long as this value is satisfactory for the
resolution routine. This parameter is only relevant when using the solver SOLDOG.
CONSTR (Parameters)
Algorithm for out of bounds variables (type: Input).
This parameter defines the action on variables when one of these variables violates the constraints
submitted to iteration (SOLDOG solver only).
If CONSTR =< 0 , it selects 2.1
Fractional part = 0 selects the fractional part 1
Whole part of CONSTR = 2 :
The array of variations to which variables should be submitted is multiplied by a scalar, so as to

keep variables within an agreed scope at a distance from the constraints. This is equal to :
maximal variation * fractional part of CONSTR
Whole part of CONSTR = 1 :
Only the variables that violate the constraints are brought back within agreed space at a distance
from the constraints, which is equal to :
maximal variation * fractional part of CONSTR.
CHI2CRIT (Parameters)
Criterion for Chi square test (type: Input).
This parameter determines the level of confidence for the chi-square test. The chi-square is a
statistical that gives, for the given confidence level, a threshold for the total sum of measurements
errors. When the sum of penalty is above this threshold, there is suspicion that gross errors exist.
BNDTEST (Parameters)
Threshold for flagging active bounds (type: Input).
This parameter controls the generation of warning messages for active bounds. Bounds are
considered active when the distance between the bound and the variable value is less than a
threshold defined as BNDTEST*REC.ACC. By default, this threshold corresponds to the validated
accuracy. Setting a higher value for BNDTEST will flags more variables as being on their bounds.
BNDCTRLU (Parameters)
Bound Control Uncertainty (type: Input).
This parameter controls the uncertainty set on the bound control auxiliary variable which is
activated when a variable gets close to its bound.
SECTION 31: OPXVAL : USER DEFINED EQUATIONS
PURPOSE
This type of UNIT allows to add up to 9 simple user's equations, involving process variables.
These equations are of the form:
VAR = X1 # X2
where X1 and X2 are any Unit or Stream variable and # is one of the four basic mathematical
operators (+, -, *, /). Variables X1, X2, X3, etc. are designed by a TAG.
The result VAR is stored in the parameters VAR1..9 of the unit and can be measured. These
parameters are dimensionless.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 44 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT OPXVAL
CONNECTION RULES
No connections are allowed on an OPXVAL.
MODE Control Tags Input Type of ope ration
NEQU Control Tags Input Numbe r of e quations
VARi Parame te rs Me asurable Re sults of the e quations (i=1..9)
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (Control Tags)
Type of operation (type: Input).
0 <undefined Not defined. A proper value must be set

>
1 + Addition
2 - Substraction
3 * Multiplication
4 / Division
NEQU (Control Tags)
Number of equations (type: Input).
This parameter represents the number of equations to be considered (ranges from 1 to 9).
In the same page you will specify the tags that are to be used for the equations. These tags do not
need to be defined, provided their name does follow the syntax used for building default tag names
from the stream or unit name and the parameters. For example the temperature of the stream LA11
can be defined through a tag as LA11_T.
If you want to use existing tags, you can simply drag them from the Tags defined table to the
Controlled variables table. Use the Mask to limit the number of tags shown in the Tags defined
table.
If you want to create a virtual tag, enter its name in the Mask and drag it to the Controlled variables
table.
FIGURE 45 - THE CONTROL TAGS PAGE OF AN OPXVAL UNIT
VARi (Parameters)
Results of the equations (i=1..9) (type: Measurable).
EXAMPLE : SETTING STEAM TO METHANE MOLAR RATIO

Attention: see model opxval.bls in the directory "examples\opxval".
FIGURE 46 - AN EXAMPLE WITH OPXVAL TYPE UNIT
This example deals with a mixer of methane and steam for which it is requested that the molar ratio
of steam to methane is equal to a specific value.
There are 2 UNITS:
MIX:
type=BBXVAL
MODE='Mass Balance onl'y
MODEDP='None'
RATIO:
type=OPXVAL
Equations: 1
Action: division (/)
Controlled variables: OUT_MRH2O, OUT_MRC1
STEAM MIX to MIX
C1 MIX to MIX
OUT MIX from MIX
The THERMOD MIX can be derived from the THERMOD AIR available in Empty.bls and contains: C1,
N2 and H2O.
The list of measurements and results are given in tables below.
TABLE 27 - MEAS UREMENT LIS T FOR OPXVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 28 - RES ULTS OF OPXVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 32: PIPEVAL : PIPELINES AND WELLS
PURPOSE
The PIPEVAL unit models:
the pressure drop along lines and wells according to various equations (Blasious, Von
Karmann, Colebrook). It also takes into account pressure changes according to the initial
and final elevations of the pipe
the heat transfer to an external media of given temperature profile
The trajectory of the pipe/well can be straight or not.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 47 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT PIPEVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
1 material STREAM
OUTLET STREAMS
1 material STREAM
Inlet and outlet STREAMS must use the same THERMOD.
MODEFRIC Ge ne ral Input Friction Coe fficie nt Equation
MODETOE Ge ne ral Input Te mpe rature e quality

Q
MODETRAN Ge ne ral Input He at Transfe r Mode
PHASES Ge ne ral Input Numbe r of phase s
TPROFILE Ge ne ral Input Te mpe rature Profile
TRAJECT Ge ne ral Input Pipe Traje ctory
MODETIME Ge ne ral Input Re side nce Time Mode
MODERHO Ge ne ral Input Ave rage Rho Mode
MODECFDP Ge ne ral Input Unce rtainty on Pre ssure drop e quation
MASSFX Parame te rs Input Nominal mass flow rate
ZIN Parame te rs Input Inle t Pipe He ight
ZOUT Parame te rs Input Outle t Pipe He ight
DIAM Parame te rs Input Inte rnal Pipe Diame te r
LENGTH Parame te rs Input Pipe le ngth
ROUGH Parame te rs Me asurable Pipe roughne ss
REYNOLDS Parame te rs Re sult Re ynolds
VISC Parame te rs Re sult Viscosity
SPEED Parame te rs Me asurable Ve locity
FRICTION Parame te rs Me asurable Friction coe fficie nt
NSTEPS Parame te rs Input Numbe r of ste ps for ste pwise inte gration
U Parame te rs Me asurable Ove rall He at Transfe r coe fficie nt
EFFICNTU Parame te rs Me asurable NTU Efficie ncy
TEXTIN Parame te rs Me asurable Outside me dia Te mpe rature at pipe inle t
TEXTOUT Parame te rs Me asurable Outside me dia Te mpe rature at pipe outle t
DTEXT Parame te rs Me asurable Outside me dia Te mpe rature gradie nt
RESTIME Parame te rs Me asurable Re side nce Time
RHO Parame te rs Re sult Ave rage de nsity
DPGRAV Parame te rs Me asurable Gravity Pre ssure drop
DPFRIC Parame te rs Me asurable Friction Pre ssure drop
CFDGRAV Parame te rs Me asurable DP Gravity corre ction factor
CFDPFRIC Parame te rs Me asurable DP Friction corre ction factor
TFLOWi Othe rs Inte rme diate Te mpe rature
PFLOWi Othe rs Inte rme diate Pre ssure
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
MODEDEP (General)

where:
CFDP: a measurable parameter that accounts for

the deviation from the calculated value (typically
measured at 1 with a precision of 20 to 30%)
3 DP=F(MASSF,friction) a pressure drop equation will be generated and the

pressure drop will be a function of the flow rate
according to flow conditions (laminar, turbulent, etc.):
where:
Zin: the elevation at pipe inlet
Zout: the elevation at pipe outlet
r: the stream density [kg/m3]
g: the acceleration of gravity = 9.81 m/s2
f: the friction factor (see below)
v: the stream velocity [m/s]
L: the pipe length [m]
D: the pipe diameter [m]
4 DP=F(MASSF,Friction,...) a pressure drop equation will be generated and the

Stepwise pressure drop will be a function of the flow rate. The
pressure drop will be calculated for each section of the
pipe (NSTEPS). This mode is only valid if the unit is
heat and mass balance (MODE = 0) and MODETRAN = 3
MODEFRIC (General)
Friction Coefficient Equation (type: Input).
0 Constant Friction Coefficient Friction coefficient defined manually
1 Laminar Flow (Re < 2000)
2 Turbulent Flow
(Blasius)
(2000<Re<70000)
3 Turbulent Flow
(70000<Re<1E27)
(Von Karman)
4 Turbulent Flow with

Roughness
(Colebrook)
MODETOEQ (General)
Temperature equality (type: Input)
0 None No additional equation will be generated
2 Inlet and outlet streams The inlet and outlet streams will have the same
temperature
MODETRAN (General)
Heat Transfer Mode (type: Input).
Heat transfer equations are only available when the unit is calculated mass and energy balance.
Three different methods are available.
0 None No additional equation will be generated
1 NTU method Flat temperature of external media (TEXTIN). The heat load is
calculated using the Number of Transfer Units method. The
NTU method is based on the notion of efficiency, the efficiency
being defined by the ratio between the actual heat load and the
maximum heat load achievable assuming an infinite heat
transfer surface area, that is when the stream reaches the

temperature of the outside media.
LOAD = EFFICNTU . LOADMAX
The efficiency is itself related to the heat transfer coefficient by:
where:
U: the heat transfer coefficient [kW/m2.K]
A: the pipe inside area [m2]
C: the total heat capacity of the stream (Massf * Cp) [kW/

K]
2 Stepwise integration The pipe is divided into a number of steps of equal length
(constant Cp on each (parameter NSTEPS). It is assumed that the pressure profile
step) inside the pipe is linear versus pipe length and that there is no
phase change in the pipe.
The heat transfer is integrated step by step from pipe inlet to

pipe outlet according to the following formula:
which can be rewritten as:
where:
Hi and Hi+1 are the enthalpy flow at the inlet and outlet
of step i [kW]
Ti and Ti+1 are the temperature at the inlet and outlet of

step i
DP = (Pout - Pin)/NSTEPS is the incremental pressure

difference on a step
reflects the impact of pressure on enthalpy
C is the average heat capacity over the step (average of

Massf*Cp between inlet and outlet conditions of the step)
[kW/K]
DA is the incremental heat exchange area per step [m2]:
Text is the average external media temperature in the

step
U is the heat transfer coefficient [kW/m2.K]
3 Stepwise integration The pipe is divided into a number of steps of equal length
(rigorous) (parameter NSTEPS).
The heat transfer is integrated step by step from pipe inlet to

pipe outlet according to the following formula:
where:
Hi and Hi+1 are the enthalpy flow at the inlet and outlet
of step i [kW]
Ti and Ti+1 are the temperature at the inlet and outlet of

step i
C is the average heat capacity over the step (average of

Massf*Cp between inlet and outlet conditions of the step)
[kW/K]
DA is the incremental heat exchange area per step [m2]:
Text is the average external media temperature in the

step
U is the heat transfer coefficient [kW/m2.K]
The relation between temperature and enthalpy is rigorously

calculated at each step during the integration.
PHASES (General)
Number of phases (type: Input).
This parameter is only used when MODETRAN=3. It indicates which phases have to be considered
when calculating the enthalpy from temperature and pressure.
0 According to stream state state inside the pipe is the same as stream state
1 V stream is considered as vapour inside the pipe
2 L stream is considered as liquid inside the pipe
4 LV (2 phases flow) stream is considered as liquid/vapour inside the pipe
5 LL (2 phases flow) stream is considered as liquid/liquid inside the pipe
6 LLV (3 phases flow) stream is considered as liquid/liquid/vapour inside

the pipe
10 WL (2 phases flow) stream is considered as water/liquid inside the pipe
11 WLV (3 phases flow) stream is considered as water/liquid/vapour inside

the pipe
TPROFILE (General)
Temperature Profile (type: Input).
TPROFILE defines the shape of the temperature profile of the external media.
0 Constant Temperature the external media is given by TEXTIN
1 Linear Profile versus Depth the external media is interpolated between TEXTIN
and TEXOUT
2 Profile given through a table the temperature profile is given with the trajectory
TRAJECT (General)
Pipe Trajectory (type: Input).
0 Straight the pipe is straight (but not necessarily horizontal or

vertical)
1 Given through a table the pipe coordinates are given through an external
file
The table used to define pipe trajectory and/or temperature profile must be entered through a flat file
which is referenced in a mea file though the syntax:
TABINPUT SOMEFILE.TXT
where somefile.txt is the name of the flat file.
Example of a trajectory file without temperature profile:

UNITNAME L01-WELL-L ! Name of the PIPEVAL unit
NUMTABLE 1 ! Table ID
MAXCOL 2 ! 2 columns (x,z) are given
PHYSUN LG m LG m ! Physical units for x and z
300.0 -2349.5 ! x, z coordinates
186.0 -2463.4
43.0 -2606.3
0.0 -2649.3
Example of a trajectory file with temperature profile:

UNITNAME L01-WELL-L ! Name of the PIPEVAL unit
NUMTABLE 1 ! Table ID
MAXCOL 3 ! 3 columns (x,z,T) are given
PHYSUN LG m LG m TE C ! Physical units for x and z
0.0 0.0 24.4 ! x, z and T values
41.4 -39.9 20.4
122.4 -120.4 12.3
213.3 -210.8 4
306.0 -302.9 4
392.5 -388.8 4
MODETIME (General)
Residence Time Mode (type: Input).
0 Calculated after convergence residence time will be calculated after convergence is

achieved
1 Calculated during convergence residence time is calculated at each iteration
MODERHO (General)
Average Rho Mode (type: Input).
0 Rho not variable of the Rho is not calculated at each iteration, value is
problem calculated after convergence is achieved
1 Rho variable of the problem Rho is calculated at each iteration
MODECFDP (Genreral)
Uncertainty on pressure drop equation (type: Input).
0 No uncertainty CFDP=1 constant
1 Global uncertainty (CFDP) CFDP variable
2 Uncertainty on Gravity and CFDPGRAV and CFDPFRIC variables

Friction DP
DP (Parameters)
DP = Pin- Pout
where:
DPX (Parameters)
MASSFX (Parameters)
CFDP (Parameters)
ZIN (Parameters)
Inlet Pipe Height (type: Input).
ZOUT (Parameters)
Outlet Pipe Height (type: Input).
DIAM (Parameters)
Internal Pipe Diameter (type: Input).
LENGTH (Parameters)
Pipe length (type: Input).
ROUGH (Parameters)
Pipe roughness (type: Measurable).
REYNOLDS (Parameters)
Reynolds (type: Result).
VISC (Parameters)
Viscosity (type: Result).
SPEED (Parameters)
Velocity (type: Measurable).
FRICTION (Parameters)
Friction coefficient (type: Measurable).
NSTEPS (Parameters)
Number of steps for stepwise integration (type: Input).
U (Parameters)
Overall Heat Transfer coefficient (type: Measurable).
EFFICNTU (Parameters)
NTU Efficiency (type: Measurable).
TEXTIN (Parameters)
Outside media Temperature at pipe inlet (type: Measurable).
TEXTOUT (Parameters)
Outside media Temperature at pipe outlet (type: Measurable).
DTEXT (Parameters)
Outside media Temperature gradient (type: Measurable).
DTEXT = (TEXTOUT - TEXTIN) / (ZOUT - ZIN)
RESTIME (Parameters)
Residence Time (type: Measurable).
RHO (Parameters)
Average density (type: Result).
DPGRAV (Parameters)
Gravity Pressure drop (type: Measurable).
DPFRIC (Parameters)
Friction Pressure drop (type: Measurable).
CFDPGRAV (Parameters)
DP Gravity correction factor (type: Measurable).
CFDPFRIC (Parameters)
DP Friction correction factor (type: Measurable).
TFLOWi (Others)
Temperature (type: Intermediate).
PFLOWi (Others)
Pressure (type: Intermediate).
EXAMPLE : PRESSURE DROP IN A LINE

Attention: see model pipeval.bls in the directory "examples\pipeval".
FIGURE 48 - PIPEVAL EXAMPLE
There is 1 UNIT:
PIPE
type=PIPEVAL
MODE= 'Mass Balance only'
MODEDP= 'DP=F(MASSF,Friction,...) '
MODEFRIC=' Turbulent Flow with Roughness'
MODETOEQ= 'Temperature equality Inlet and Outlet streams '
DIAM= 0.1 m
LENGTH= 1000 m
ROUGH= 0.0001 m
IN WATER to PIPE
OUT WATER from PIPE
TABLE 29 - MEAS UREMENTS FOR PIPEVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 30 - RES ULTS OF PIPEVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 33: PRECIS: PRECISION OF

CALCULATIONS
PURPOSE
The PRECIS unit allows to define precision on calculations.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 49 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT PRECIS
CONNECTION RULES
No connections are allowed on a PRECIS.
KPRINT (none ) Hidde n Printout le ve l
EPSLV1 Parame te rs Input Tole rance for e quations of state
EPSLV2 Parame te rs Input Tole rance for LVE at P,T (inte rnal)
EPSLV3 Parame te rs Input Tole rance for LVE at P,T (e xte rnal)
EPSLV4 Parame te rs Input Tole rance for LVE at P,VAPF or T,VAPF (inte rnal)
EPSLV5 Parame te rs Input Tole rance for LVE at P,VAPF or T,VAPF (e xte rnal)
EPSTHERM Parame te rs Input Pre cision LVE at H or S (e xte rnal)
EPSTRACE Parame te rs Input Crite ria of de te rmination of trace
EPSLLV1 Parame te rs Input Pre cision LLVE crite ria for K of 2 liquids
EPSLLV2 Parame te rs Input Pre cision LLVE conve rge nce crite ria
EPSLLV3 Parame te rs Input Pre cision LLVE stabilisation for composition
EPSLLV4 Parame te rs Input Pre cision LLVE at P,VAPF or T,VAPF (inte rnal)
EPSLLV5 Parame te rs Input Pre cision LLVE at P,VAPF or T,VAPF (e xte rnal)
EPSLLV6 Parame te rs Input LLVE initialization be fore re solution
EPSLLV7 Parame te rs Input Pre cision LLVE at T,P, calc. V/L+V and L1/L1+L2
EPSLLV8 Parame te rs Input Pre cision LLVE at T,P, calc. V/L+V
EPSLLV9 Parame te rs Input Pre cision LLVE at T,P, calc. L1/L1+L2
EPCHM1 Parame te rs Input Pre cision molar flowrate in che mical e quilibria
EPCHM2 Parame te rs Input Pre cision e nthalpy in che mical e quilibria
ITMLV1 Parame te rs Input Maximum numbe r of ite rations for the rmodynamical
calculation of volume
ITMLV2 Parame te rs Input Maximum numbe r of ite rations for alf computation
be twe e n 0 and 1 (alf is the solution of S(alf)=0)
ITMLV3 Parame te rs Input Maximum numbe r of ite rations for isothe rmal flash
calculation whe n the re is more than 1 substance
ITMLV4 Parame te rs Input Maximum numbe r of ite rations for s(p/t) stabilization
ITMLV5 Parame te rs Input Maximum numbe r of ite rations for s(p/t)=1 re solution
ITMTHERM Parame te rs Input Maximum numbe r of ite rations for h or s computation
ITMLL2 Parame te rs Input Maximum ite rations
ITCHM1 Parame te rs Input Maximum ite rations
ITCHM2 Parame te rs Input Maximum ite rations
EPFABS1 Parame te rs Input Equilibria of plate s (inte rnal loop)
EPFABS2 Parame te rs Input Equilibria of plate s (e xte rnal loop)
XWAT0 Parame te rs Input Solubility of wate r in Oil
XWAT1 Parame te rs Input Solubility of wate r in Oil
WLVMODE Parame te rs Input WLV mode
UNIT PARAMETERS
EPSLV1 (Parameters)
Tolerance for equations of state (type: Input).
EPSLV2 (Parameters)
Tolerance for LVE at P,T (internal) (type: Input).
EPSLV3 (Parameters)
Tolerance for LVE at P,T (external) (type: Input).
EPSLV4 (Parameters)
Tolerance for LVE at P,VAPF or T,VAPF (internal) (type: Input).
EPSLV5 (Parameters)
Tolerance for LVE at P,VAPF or T,VAPF (external) (type: Input).
EPSTHERM (Parameters)
Precision LVE at H or S (external)
EPSTRACE (Parameters)
Criteria of determination of trace
EPSLLV1 (Parameters)
Precision LLVE criteria for K of 2 liquids
Precision LLVE convergence criteria (type:Input).
Precision LLVE stabilisation for composition (type:Input).
Precision LLVE at P,VAPF or T,VAPF (internal) (type:Input).
Precision LLVE at P,VAPF or T,VAPF (external) (type:Input).
LLVE initialization before resolution (type:Input).
Precision LLVE at T,P, calc. V/L+V and L1/L1+L2 (type:Input).
Precision LLVE at T,P, calc. V/L+V (type:Input).
Precision LLVE at T,P, calc. L1/L1+L2 (type:Input).
EPCHM1 (Parameters)
Precision molar flowrate in chemical equilibria (type:Input).
EPCHM2 (Parameters)
Precision enthalpy in chemical equilibria (type:Input).
ITMLV1 (Parameters)
Maximum numbe r of ite rations for the rmodynamical calculation of volume (type:Input).
ITMLV2 (Parameters)
Maximum numbe r of ite rations for alf computation be twe e n 0 and 1 (alf is the solution of S(alf)=0) (type:
Input).
ITMLV3 (Parameters)
Maximum numbe r of ite rations for isothe rmal flash calculation whe n the re is more than 1 substance (type:
Input).
ITMLV4 (Parameters)
Maximum numbe r of ite rations for s(p/t) stabilization (type:Input).
ITMLV5 (Parameters)
Maximum numbe r of ite rations for s(p/t)=1 re solution (type:Input).
ITMTHERM (Parameters)
Maximum numbe r of ite rations for h or s computation (type:Input).
ITMLL2 (Parameters)
Maximum iterations (type:Input).
ITMLL4 (Parameters)
ITMLL5 (Parameters)
ITMLL6 (Parameters)
ITMLL7 (Parameters)
ITMLL8 (Parameters)
ITMLL9 (Parameters)
ITCHM1 (Parameters)
ITCHM2 (Parameters)
EPFABS1 (Parameters)
Equilibria of plates (internal loop) (type:Input).
EPFABS2 (Parameters)
Equilibria of plates (external loop) (type:Input).
XWAT0 (Parameters)
Solubility of water in Oil (type:Input).
XWAT1 (Parameters)
Solubility of water in Oil (type:Input).
WLVMODE (Parameters)
WLV mode (type: Input).
1 1 Complete mode
2 2 Simplified mode (considers that water is not soluble in oil)
SECTION 34: PRHVAL : PREHEATER WITH

CONDENSATION
PURPOSE
The PRHVAL unit allows you to model preheaters where a vapor stream (typically steam) is de-
superheated, condensed and possibly sub-cooled to preheat a cold stream, without phase change.
Three different zones are considered: de-superheating, condensing and sub-cooling, with different
areas and heat transfer coefficients.
The sub-cooling zone can be merged with the condensing zone, in which case the possible sub-
cooling is not evaluated. The outlet stream is assumed to be liquid, but the distance from the bubble
point is not calculated.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 50 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT PRHVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
2 or 3 material STREAMS
OUTLET STREAMS
2 material STREAMS
Corresponding inlet and outlet STREAMS must use the same THERMOD. The third inlet stream is
optional and represents a drain inlet. The same THERMOD must be used for the first and the third
inlet streams. The first inlet stream (going into the shell) is the hot vapor stream, while the cold
stream goes through the tubes.
MODEDRDP Ge ne ral Input Mode for drain pre ssure drop e quation
MODESUB Ge ne ral Input Mode for subcooling
TOTLOAD Parame te rs Me asurable Total he at load
TOTA Parame te rs Me asurable Total surface are a
DRAINDP Parame te rs Me asurable Pre ssure drop at drain inle t
DRDPX Parame te rs Input Nominal drain pre ssure drop
DRMASSFX Parame te rs Input Nominal drain flow rate
DRCFDP Parame te rs Me asurable DP corre ction factor
DTSC Parame te rs Me asurable Le ve l of sub-cooling
LOAD1,2,3 Othe rs Me asurable He at load of the 3 se ctions (de -supe rhe ating,
conde nsing, sub-cooling)
A1,2,3 Othe rs Me asurable Surface are a of the 3 se ctions
U1,2,3 Othe rs Me asurable He at transfe r coe fficie nt in the 3 se ctions
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
10 Performance equations Mass, Ene rgy and Pe rformance e quation (he at transfe r
coe fficie nts)
The performance equation is for each of the three sections (1=desuperheating, 2=condensing,
3=subcooling) of the heat exchanger:
LOADi= Ai . Ui . LNTDi
DTSIDE1 DTSIDE 2
LNTDi =
ln DTSIDE1 / DTSIDE 2
where:
DTSIDE1 and DTSIDE2 are the temperature differences on each side of the section
MODEDRDP (General)
Mode for drain pressure drop equation (type: Input)

DRDP = DRCFDP * DRDPX * ( MASSF / DRMASSFX )²
where:
DRCFDP: a measurable parameter that

accounts for the deviation from the calculated
value (typically measured at 1 with a precision
of 20 to 30%)
DRDPX: the nominal pressure drop
DRMASSFX: the nominal flow rate
MASSF: the actual flow rate of the stream at

drain inlet
This parameter determines how to calculate the pressure drop between the drain inlet stream and
the condensing zone pressure of the preheater.
MODESUB (General)
Mode for subcooling (type: Input).
0 With subcooling Calculation of the subcooling zone
1 Without subcooling No calculation of the subcooling
TOTLOAD (Parameters)
Total heat load (type: Measurable).
This is the total heat transferred in the three sections of the exchanger:
TOTLOAD = LOAD1 + LOAD2 + LOAD3
TOTA (Parameters)
Total surface area (type: Measurable).
This is the total surface area of the preheater:
TOTA = A1 + A2 + A3
DRAINDP (Parameters)
Pressure drop at drain inlet (type: Measurable).
DRAINDP = Pin- Pcondensing zone
where:
Pcondensing zone : the pressure of the outlet stream
DRDPX (Parameters)
DRMASSFX (Parameters)
DRCFDP (Parameters)
DTSC (Parameters)
Level of sub-cooling (type: Measurable).
This parameter indicates the temperature difference between the outlet condensate and its
saturation temperature.
MODEDP (Parameters)

where:

to 30%)
A value of MODEDPi has to be given for each outlet streams.
DP (Parameters)
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
DPX (Parameters)
MASSFX (Parameters)
CFDP (Parameters)
LOAD1,2,3 (Others)
Heat load of the 3 sections (de-superheating, condensing, sub-cooling) (type: Measurable).
A1,2,3 (Others)
Surface area of the 3 sections
U1,2,3 (Others)
Heat transfer coefficient in the 3 sections (type: Measurable).
EXAMPLE : TWO CONDENSERS IN SERIES

Attention: see model prhval.bls in the directory "examples\prhval". Units of type PRHVAL are also
FIGURE 51 - PRHVAL EXAMPLE
There are 2 UNITS:
PRHA,PRHB
type=PRHVAL
MODE='Performance equations'
MODESUB='With sub-cooling'
MODEDP1/2='DP variable'
S30 STEAM to PRHB
S31 STEAM from PRHB to PRHA
S32 STEAM from PRHA
S41 STEAM to PRHA
S42 STEAM from PRHA to PRHB
S43 STEAM to PRHB
S44 STEAM from PRHB
TABLE 31 - MEAS UREMENTS FOR PRHVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 32 - RES ULTS OF PRHVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 35: PUMVAL : LIQUID PUMP
PURPOSE
The PUMVAL unit allows you to model pumps.
Measurements can be defined on the efficiency and the mechanical power as well as the distance
from performance curves.
Note: When the Mechanical Stream is OFF, VALI will consider that the Material Stream go through
the pump with a pressure drop equal to 0.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 52 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT PUMVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
1 material
1 mechanical
OUTLET STREAMS
1 material
MODEPERF Ge ne ral Input Pe rformance mode
EFFIC Parame te rs Me asurable Volume tric e fficie ncy
DP Parame te rs Me asurable Pre ssure incre ase
RPMR Parame te rs Input Re fe re nce pump spe e d
RPMMIN Parame te rs Input Minimum pe rformance spe e d
VOLFMIN Parame te rs Input Minimum volume tric flow rate
NSTAGES Parame te rs Input Numbe r of stage s
EFFi Parame te rs Input Polynomial coe fficie nts for e fficie ncy curve
HEADi Parame te rs Input Polynomial coe fficie nts for he ad curve
DEFF Parame te rs Me asurable Distance from e fficie ncy curve
CFEFF Parame te rs Me asurable Re lative e fficie ncy factor
EFFC Parame te rs Me asurable Efficie ncy from curve
DHEAD Parame te rs Me asurable Distance from he ad curve
DHEADR Parame te rs Me asurable Distance from he ad at nominal spe e d
HEAD Parame te rs Me asurable Actual he ad
HEADR Parame te rs Me asurable Re duce d he ad (at nominal spe e d)
HEADC Parame te rs Re sult He ad from curve
HEADCR Parame te rs Re sult Re duce d he ad from curve (at nominal spe e d)
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
volumetric efficiency equation is generated as well
MODEDP (Parameters)
MODEPERF (General)
Performance mode (type: Input).
0 None No pe rformance e quation will be ge ne rate d
1 Efficie ncy Efficie ncy curve will be ge ne rate d
2 He ad He ad curve will be ge ne rate d
3 Efficie ncy & He ad Efficie ncy & he ad curve s will be ge ne rate d
EFFIC (Parameters)
Volumetric efficiency (type: Measurable).
This parameter is only relevant in MODE 0 and is defined by:
where:
POWER: the pump power
VOLF: the volumetric flow rate in the inlet conditions
Pout and Pin: the inlet and outlet pressures
DP (Parameters)
Pressure increase (type: Measureable).
DP = Pout- Pin
PRATIO (Parameters)
Pressure ratio (type: Measurable)
PRATIO = Pout/Pin
RPMR (Parameters)
Reference pump speed (type: Input).
The reference pump speed corresponds to the pump speed for which the performance curves have
been identified.
RPMMIN (Parameters)
Minimum performance speed (type: Input).
When the measured pump speed is below RPMMIN, the head curve equation is deactivated and the
efficiency is calculated for the minimum rotation speed.
VOLFMIN (Parameters)
Minimum volumetric flow rate (type: Input).
VOLFMIN defines the lower bound of the validity range of the performance curves at the reference
rotation speed. When the flow rate is below VOLFMIN, the efficiency and head are calculated at
VOLFMIN.
NSTAGES (Parameters)
Number of stages (type: Input).
NSTAGES is used to calculate the overall head curve of a pump made of several stages.
EFFi (Parameters)
Polynomial coefficients for efficiency curve (type: Input).
The theoretical efficiency of the pump is defined by the following curve:
where:
VolfR is the reduced volumetric flow rate = Volf RPMR / RPM
EFFC is the calculated efficiency from curve
HEADi (Parameters)
Polynomial coefficients for head curve (type: Input).
The theoretical head of the pump is defined by the following curve:
where:
VolfR is the reduced volumetric flow rate = Volf RPMR / RPM
DEFF (Parameters)
Distance from efficiency curve (type: Measurable).
This parameter represents the distance between the actual pump efficiency and the theoretical
efficiency defined by the pump theoretical curve.
DEFF = EFFIC - EFFC
Typically, a tag will be defined on DEFF with an estimated value of 0 and an uncertainty
corresponding to the allowed distance between the actual and theoretical efficiency.
CFEFF (Parameters)
Relative efficiency factor (type: Measurable).
This parameter represents the actual efficiency relative to curve efficiency, as the ratio of actual
efficiency on curve efficiency:
EFFC (Parameters)
Efficiency from curve (type: Measurable).
This parameter represents the efficiency calculated from theoretical curve. See EFFi above for more
information.
DHEAD (Parameters)
Distance from head curve (type: Measurable).
This parameter represents the distance between the actual pump head and theoretical head defined
by the pump theoretical curve.
where:
g is the is the gravity acceleration (9.81 m/s 2 )
ρ is the outlet stream density (kg/m 3 )
Typically, a tag will be defined on DHEAD with an estimated value of 0 and an uncertainty
corresponding to the allowed distance between the actual and theoretical efficiency.
DHEADR (Parameters)
Distance from head at nominal speed (type: Measurable).
This parameter represents the difference between head at nominal speed and head from curve at
nominal speed:
DHEADR = HEADR - HEADCR
HEAD (Parameters)
Actual head (type: Measurable).
This parameter represents the actual head, calculated as:
HEADR (Parameters)
Reduced head (at nominal speed) (type: Measurable).
This parameter represents the reduced head, i.e. the actual head at nominal speed.
HEADC (Parameters)
Head from curve (type: Result).
This parameter represents the head from theoretical curve, at actual speed.
HEADCR (Parameters)
Reduced head from curve (at nominal speed) (type: Result).
This parameter represents the head calculated from the theoretical curve, at nominal speed. See
HEADi above for more information.
EXAMPLE : BOILER FEED WATER PUMP

Attention: see model pumval.bls in the directory "examples\pumval". Units of type PUMVAL are
also used in the example coal.bls (coal fired power plant).
FIGURE 53 - PUMVAL EXAMPLE
There is 1 UNIT:
PUMP
type=PUMVAL
MODEDP='None'
IN.PU STEAM to PUMP
POWER MECHANICAL STREAM to PUMP
OUT.PU STEAM from PUMP
The THERMOD STEAM is defined in the file Empty.bls.
The list of measurements and results are given in tables below:
TABLE 33 - MEAS UREMENTS FOR PUMVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 34 - RES ULTS OF PUMVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 36: RCT-HNO3 : NH3 OXIDATION
PURPOSE
The RCT-HNO3 unit models the conversion of NH3 according to the following reactions:
2 NH3 + 3/2 O2=>N2 + 3 H2O
2 NH3 + 5/2 O2=>2 NO + 3 H2O
The conversion of the NH3 is complete. The percentage of NH3 which is converted to NO (according
to the second reaction) is defined by the SELECT parameter (selectivity).
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 54 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT RCT-HNO3
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
1 material (any state)
OUTLET STREAMS
1 material (state LV)
THERMOD
The Thermod of the inlet stream must contain, in any order, at least the following compounds: NH3,
O2, N2, H2O.
The Thermod of the outlet stream must contain, in any order, at least the following compounds: NO,
NO2, N2O4, O2, N2, H2O, HNO3.
REACTION
The reactions are part of the model and do not need to be defined in the Reactions page.
MODEDP Ge ne ral Input Pre ssure drop balance
SELEC Parame te rs Me asurable Se le ctivity
EXTENTi Parame te rs Me asurable Exte nts of the re actions
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
MODEDP (General)

where:

to 30%)
SELEC (Parameters)
Selectivity (type: Measurable).
The selectivity is defined as the percentage of NH3 which is converted to NO.
DP (Parameters)
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
DPX (Parameters)
MASSFX (Parameters)
CFDP (Parameters)
EXTENT1,2 (Parameters)
Extents of the reactions (type: Measurable).
The Extents are defined (on molar basis) as follows:
Extent1: amount of N2 produced
Extent2: two times the amount of NO produced

SECTION 37: RCTVAL : REACTOR WITH DEFINED

REACTIONS
PURPOSE
The RCTVAL unit allows you to model reactors and takes the atomic balances, energy balance and
Contrary to the BATVAL unit, the chemical reactions must be defined. All reactions are considered
reversible.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 55 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT RCTVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
THERMOD
All chemical compounds involved in the chemical reactions must be present in the outlet THERMOD.
REACTIONS
Maximum number: 30
EXTENTi Re actions Me asurable Exte nts of the re actions
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
MODEDP (General)

where:

to 30%)
REFDP (Parameters)

DP (Parameters)
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
DPX (Parameters)
MASSFX (Parameters)
CFDP (Parameters)
EXTENTi (Reactions)
The EXTENT of a reaction is the amount of reference product (with stoechiometric coefficient equal to
1) produced in the associated reaction.
For a particular component, the amount produced in a given reaction is the result of the
multiplication of the EXTENT of the reaction by the stoechiometric coefficient of the component (thus
value is negative for reagents).

Attention: see model rctval.bls in the directory "examples\rctval".
FIGURE 56 - AN EXAMPLE OF RCTVAL TYPE UNIT
This example deals with a chemical reactor for the synthesis of NH3.
There is 1 UNIT:
SYNT
type=RCTVAL
The reaction SYNT must be defined as: 3 H2 + 2 N2 <=> 2 NH3
IN.RCT RCMOD to SYNT
OUT.RCT RCMOD from SYNT
LOSS.RCT THERMAL STREAM from SYNT
The THERMOD RCMOD can be derived from the THERMOS AIR available in Empty.bls and contains:
H2, N2, NH3 and Ar.
The list of measurements is:
TABLE 35 - MEAS UREMENT LIS T FOR RCTVAL EXAMPLE
And the results are (r6v):
TABLE 36 - RES ULTS OF RCTVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 38: REPVAL : REPORT SETTINGS
PURPOSE
The REPVAL unit allows controlling the amount and the type of information printed out in the main
report file (r4v).
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 57 - S YMBOL FOR UNIT REPVAL
CONNECTION RULES
No connections are allowed on a REPVAL.
SEQREP Ge ne ral Input Re port on Se que nce
GLOBBAL Ge ne ral Input Global balance
UNIPAR Ge ne ral Input Unit parame te rs
UNISTR Ge ne ral Input Unit inle ts/outle ts
STRREP Ge ne ral Input Stre ams
TAGREP Ge ne ral Input Tags
REACREP Ge ne ral Input Re actions
THERREP Ge ne ral Input The rmods
COMPREP Ge ne ral Input Compounds
VARREP Ge ne ral Input Variable s/Constants
BNDREP Ge ne ral Input Variable Bounds
COBAREP Ge ne ral Input Compounds Balance
INDREP Ge ne ral Input Inde xe s at the bottom
IMAGE Ge ne ral Input Image s
ORDVAREP Ge ne ral Input Orde r of unme asure d variable s
ZONEBAL Ge ne ral Input Balance s by zone
ORDTAREP Ge ne ral Input Orde r of Tags
UNIT PARAMETERS
SEQREP (General)
Report on Sequence (type: Input).
0 0: (none) No sequence report
1 1: Yes The sequence report is the list of units that are in the
current model (only with text reports or with the
HTO runtime option):
GLOBBAL (General)
Global balance (type: Input).
0 0: (none) No global balance report
1 1: Yes The global balance report summarizes the mass

balance of the complete flow-sheet, presenting all the
material inlets and outlets of the model. Tanks
inventory changes are included:
2 2: Balances by PFD In addition to the global balance report, a similar

report is issued for each PFD of the model
UNIPAR (General)
Unit parameters (type: Input).
0 0: (none) No report on unit parameters
1 1: Yes The Unit parameters report includes all the

parameters of the units:
UNISTR (General)
Unit inlets/outlets (type: Input).
0 0: (none) No report on unit inlet/outlet streams
1 1: Streams Mass Balance Includes the measured and validated mass flow rates
of the streams connected to the unit:
2 2: Streams Thermal Balance Includes the temperature, pressure, vapor fraction,

Report mass flow rate and enthalpy flow of each connected
stream:
3 3: Streams in Molar flow rates Includes (in vertical table) the parameters and
composition (molar flow rates) of each connected
stream:
************* ************* *************

* Inlet 1 * * Inlet 2 * * Outlet 1 *
************* ************* *************
Stream AIR.2 GN FUME.1
Type/State MAT/LV MAT/LV MAT/LV
From COMP BURNER
To BURNER BURNER TURB
Thermod AIR GAS FUMES
T C 499.856
15.0020 1198.36
P bar 20.0650
VAPF % 100.000 20.0000
100.000 19.9650
100.000
MIXF % 100.000 100.000 100.000
H kJ/kmol 14494.0 -352.389 39069.7
S kJ/kmol/C 8.30863 -26.0002 33.2809
A kJ/kmol 12016.8 7399.56 29147.0
V m3/kmol 3.20309 1.19789 6.12769
MOLW kg/kmol 28.8503 16.0430 28.4506
HW kJ/kg 502.386 -21.9653 1373.25
MOLF kmol/s 2.35611 0.759138E-01
MASSF kg/s 67.9744 1.21788 2.43202
69.1923
O2 kmol/s 0.494782 ... 0.342955
N2 kmol/s 1.86132 0.00000
1.86132
H2 kmol/s ... 0.00000
...
H2S kmol/s ... 0.00000
...
CO2 kmol/s ... 0.00000
0.759138E-01
C1 kmol/s ... 0.759138E-01
...
C2 kmol/s ... 0.00000
...
C3 kmol/s ... 0.00000
...
I-C4 kmol/s ... 0.00000
...
N-C4 kmol/s ... 0.00000
...
N-C5 kmol/s ... 0.00000
H2O kmol/s ... ... ...
0.151828
SO2 kmol/s ... ... 0.00000
4 4: Streams in Mass flow rates Includes (in vertical table) the parameters and
composition (mass flow rates) of each connected
stream.
5 5: Streams in Molar fractions Includes (in vertical table) the parameters and
composition (molar fractions) of each connected
stream (only with text reports or with the –HTO
runtime option)
6 6: Streams in Mass fractions Includes (in vertical table) the parameters and
composition (mass fractions) of each connected
stream (only with text reports or with the –HTO
runtime option)
7 7: Streams Thermal Balance Similar as 1 but the enthalpy flow is based on

(HFLOW) HFLOW and not on the enthalpy flow by reference to
594 the idealtogas
document is not to be reproduced. It is provided at 25°C: under a special license agreement.
C ustomers
STRREP (General)
Streams (type: Input).
0 0: (none) No report on streams
1 1: Full Report For each stream, a complete report is printed with

the compositions expressed in partial rates and
fraction, on both molar and weight basis:
2 2: VDI-2048 For each stream, a complete report is printed with

the measured and validated value and accuracy of all
related variables. Whenever possible, the total mass
flow rate and the enthalpy flow are estimated on
basis of available measurements:
TAGREP (General)
Tags (type: Input).
0 0: (none) No Tags report
1 1: Tags definitions Table with the definitions of all the tags:
2 2: Tags values Table with the measured and validated values of all
the tags:
3 3: Full Report Both tables are printed
4 4: VDI-2048 Same as 3, but the following values are printed:

measured value, correction, validated value, relative
correction penalty and physical units:
5 5: No r5v,r6v No Tags report and no r5v and r6v files
REACREP (General)
Reactions (type: Input).
0 0: (none) No report on reactions
1 1: Stoichiometry Table with the stoichiometry of the reactions:
2 2: Full Table with the stoichiometry and kinetic data of the

reactions
THERREP (General)
Thermods (type: Input).
0 0: (none) No report on THERMODS
1 1: Yes Table with the definitions of the THERMODS

(methods, compounds and binary parameters):
COMPREP (General)
Compounds (type: Input).
0 0: (none) No report on COMPOUNDS
1 1: One column report Table with the parameters of the COMPOUNDS in

one column:
C1
**
C 1 H 4
COMPOUND Comment: METHANE
H0F -74835.0000
G0F -50785.2656
MOLW 16.0429993
TB 111.657989
TC 190.549988
PC 46.0420685
VC 0.989999771E-01
OMEGA 0.719999895E-02
CPLA 82.5483856
CPLB -0.693272591
CPLC 0.483209919E-02
CPLD -0.720117441E-05
TMIN(PV) 81.6999970
TMAX(PV) 186.787842
PVAPA 13.0173359
PVAPB -1192.28540
...
VARREP (General)
Variables/Constants (type: Input).
0 0: (none) No Variables/Constants report
1 1: Unmeasured Variables Table with the values and a posteriori accuracy of

unmeasured variables
2 2: Constants Table with the values of all the constants
3 3: Unmeasured Variables & Both tables are printed

Constants
4 4: idem 3 + Hidden variables Same as 3, but intermediate variables are also

printed
BNDREP (General)
Variable Bounds (type: Input).
0 0: (none) No report on the bounds
1 1: Active Bounds Table with all the active (solver) bounds defined on
the variables:
2 2: Bounds on all the variables Table with all the (solver) bounds defined on the
variables:
COBAREP (General)
Compounds Balance (type: Input).
0 0: (none) No compounds balance
1 1: Molar basis Table with the partial molar rates of all compounds
in the global inlet and outlet streams of the flow-
sheet:
2 2: Mass basis Table with the partial mass rates of all compounds in
the global inlet and outlet streams of the flow-sheet:
3 3: Molar and Mass basis Both tables are printed
INDREP (General)
Indexes at the bottom (type: Input).
These indexes give an easy access to the units and streams information.
0 0: (none) No index
1 1: Units Index Alphabetically sorted table with the units, number of

equations, and mass balance:
2 2: Streams Index Alphabetically sorted list of streams:
3 3: Units and Streams Indexes Both indexes are printed
IMAGE (General)
Images (type: Input).
0 0: No images in HTML No images are included in the html, which insures

full portability of the report to other computers
1 1: Images in HTML Some images are include in the html. These images
are located in belsim/dat directory and will only be
correctly shown if present on the computer where
the report is browsed
2 2: Local Dir Images in HTML Some images are include in the html and are copied
in the local directory. When moving or copying the
html report you should also move or copy the
corresponding GIF files
ORDVAREP (General)
Ordering of variables in variables table (type: Input).
0 0: Alphabetical order Variables are sorted alphabetically
1 1: decreasing relative rec.acc. Variables are sorted by decreasing relative

ordering uncertainty
ZONEBAL (General)
Balances by zone (type: Input).
0 0: Disabled Product balances are generated globally
1 1: Enabled Product balances are generated globally and by zone
When generating balances by zone, product balance tags are generated for each zone (starting by the
name of the zone as defined in the parent PFD).
Example:
A1_IMPORT_CRUDE_MASSF will be the total imported amount (in mass) of crude into zone A1.
ORDTAREP (General)
Ordering of tags in Tags table (type: Input)
0 0: Alphabetical order Tags are sorted alphabetically
1 1: Decreasing penalties Tags are sorted by decreasing penalty

ordering
SECTION 39: RKIVAL : REACTOR WITH KINETICS
PURPOSE
The RKIVAL unit allows you to model reactors and takes the atomic balances, energy balance and
The chemical reactions must be defined and you can give the kinetic equations of these reactions.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 58 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT RKIVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 2
Type: 1 material (mandatory) and 1 thermal (optional)
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 2
Type: 1 material as the first outlet (mandatory) and 1 thermal (optional)
THERMOD
REACTIONS
Maximum number: 30
FLOWMOD Ge ne ral Input Se le ction of the re actor's type

E
REACTYPE Ge ne ral Input Se le ction of the re actions type
FLEXMODE Ge ne ral Input Flag to spe cify the fle x utilization
DIREAC Parame te rs Me asurable Diame te r of the re actor
HREAC Parame te rs Me asurable He ight of the re actor
ROCATA Parame te rs Me asurable Spe cific mass of the catalyst
PHASE Parame te rs Input De viation from 0 or 1 on vapor fraction
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
0 All equations All equations (including kinetics) are taken into

account
2 Mass and Energy balance Atomic and energy balances are taken into account
FLOWMODE (General)
Selection of the reactor's type (type: Input).
1 Perfectly Mixed Flow Reactor is considered as perfectly mixed
2 Plug Flow Plug Flow
REACTYPE (General)
Selection of the reactions type (type: Input).
1 Homogeneous reactions Homogeneous reactions
2 Heterogeneous reactions Heterogeneous reactions
MODEDP (General)

where:

to 30%)
FLEXMODE (General)
Flag to specify the flex utilization (type: Input).
1 With Flex The kinetics defined in the Flex code are used
2 Without Flex The kinetics defined in the Flex code are not used
REFDP (Parameters)

DIREAC (Parameters)
Diameter of the reactor (type: Measurable).
HREAC (Parameters)
Height of the reactor (type: Measurable).
ROCATA (Parameters)
Specific mass of the catalyst (type: Measurable).
DP (Parameters)
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
DPX (Parameters)
MASSFX (Parameters)
CFDP (Parameters)
PHASE (Parameters)
Deviation from 0 or 1 on vapor fraction (type: Input).
In the interval [0 , PHASE], stream is considered as liquid.
In the interval [1 - PHASE , 1], stream is considered as vapor.
In the interval [PHASE, 1 - PHASE], there is no calculation and program stops.
EXTENTi (Reactions)

Attention: see model rkival.bls in the directory "examples\rkival".
SECTION 40: RKPVAL : EQUILIBRATED REACTIONS
PURPOSE
The RKPVAL unit allows you to model reactors where some of the reactions are equilibrated and
takes the atomic balances, energy balance and pressure drop into account.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 59 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT RKPVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
THERMOD
REACTIONS
Maximum number: 30
DTEQi Re actions Me asurable Te mpe rature de viation from e quilibrium
EQi Re actions Input Indicate s whe the r the re action is e quilibrate d
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
MODEDP (General)

where:

to 30%)
DP (Parameters)
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
DPX (Parameters)
MASSFX (Parameters)
CFDP (Parameters)
REFDP (Parameters)

EXTENTi (Reactions)
DTEQi (Reactions)
Temperature deviation from equilibrium (type: Measurable).
The DTEQi parameter allows you to account for a deviation from equilibrium by calculating the
equilibrium constant at a temperature different (T + DTEQi) from the outlet stream temperature T.
Attention: When DTEQ > 100 C, no equilibrium constraint is generated. This has the same effect as
setting the parameter EQi to 0.
EQi (Reactions)
Indicates whether the reaction is equilibrated (type: Input).
0 Conversion The reaction is not equilibrated
1 Equilibrium The reaction is equilibrated

Attention: see model rkpval.bls in the directory "examples\rkpval".
FIGURE 60 - AN EXAMPLE OF RKPVAL TYPE UNIT
This example deals with the same chemical reactor for the synthesis of NH3 as in the example for
RCTVAL. We use here the RKPVAL to determine the distance from the equilibrium composition.
This difference expressed in C can be considered as an indication of catalyst ageing.
There is 1 UNIT:
RCT
type=RKPVAL
MODE='Atomic and Energy Balance'
MODEDP='DP Variable
EQ1='Equilibrium' (reaction page)
The reaction SYNT must be defined as: 3 H2 + 2 N2 <=> 2 NH3
IN.RCT RCMOD to RCT
OUT.RCT RCMOD from RCT
LOSS.RCT RCMOD from RCT
The THERMOD RCMOD can be derived from the THERMOD AIR available in Empty.bls and contains:
H2, N2, NH3 and Ar.
The list of measurements and the results are given below:
TABLE 37 - MEAS UREMENT LIS T FOR RKPVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 38 - RES ULTS OF RKPVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 41: RLVVAL : REACTOR IN L/V

EQUILIBRIUM
PURPOSE
UNIT RLVVAL is a unit modeling a reactor where outlet streams are at liquid-vapor equilibrium.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 61 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT RLVVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number:
material: 8
thermal: 2
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number:
material:
1 stream of state V as vapor outlet (upper stream)
1 stream of state L as liquid outlet (lower stream)
thermal: 2
THERMODS
REACTIONS
Maximum number: 30
The state of the outlet material streams can also be LV, LLV and WLV provided that there is more
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
0 All equations Atomic and energy balances are taken into account
3 Mass Balance and Saturation Atomic balances and liquid-vapor equilibrium

MODEDP (Parameters)
REFDP (Parameters)

DP (Parameters)
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
EXTENTi (Reactions)
SECTION 42: SATVAL : SATURATION UNIT
PURPOSE
This type of UNIT allows you to set the degree of saturation of a streams. It is possible to fix any
vapor fraction (between 0 and 1) with a possible temperature departure from the temperature
corresponding to a specified vapor fraction. Heat can be extracted or provided to this unit.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 62 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT S ATVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
1 material
1 thermal or mechanical (optional)
OUTLET STREAMS
1 material
1 thermal or mechanical (optional)
The outlet Stream can be set in state L, V or LV. It is however recommended to use the L state when
the outlet stream that is specified at the bubble point, and the V state when the outlet stream is
specified at the dew point.
VFRAC Parame te rs Input Saturation state
DT Parame te rs Input Le ve l of supe rhe ating or subcooling
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
0 All equations Mass, energy balances and saturation constraints are

taken into account
3 Mass Balance and Saturation Mass and energy balances are taken into account
MODEDP (General)

where:

to 30%)
DP (Parameters)
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
DPX (Parameters)
MASSFX (Parameters)
CFDP (Parameters)
VFRAC (Parameters)
Saturation state (0..1) (type: Input).
This parameter defines the ratio of vapor in the mixture. The value of this parameter has to be set in
the range from 0 to 1: if the value is out of this range, it will be corrected to the closer value.
This parameter is always a constant.
DT (Parameters)
Level of superheating or subcooling (type: Input).
This parameter defines the temperature difference between the temperature of the thermodynamic
state defined from the vapor fraction parameter and the temperature of the real thermodynamic
state of the STREAM.
With this parameter, it is possible to define how much a liquid is subcooled or a vapor is
superheated.
This parameter is always a constant.
EXAMPLE : SUB-COOLED WATER OF FLOW

Attention: see model satval.bls in the directory "examples\satval".
FIGURE 63 - S ATVAL EXAMPLE
There is 1 UNIT:
E-1:
type=SATVAL
DT= -5 K
IN.SAT STEAM to E-1
OUT.SAT STEAM from E-1
The Thermod STEAM is defined in the file Empty.bls.
The list of measurements are given in tables below:
TABLE 39 - MEAS UREMENTS FOR S ATVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 40 - RES ULTS OF S ATVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 43: SPLVAL : SPLITTER
PURPOSE
This UNIT is used to consider heat and mass balances of a splitter where the outlet STREAMS have
the same composition.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 64 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT S PLVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
1 material
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number: 10
Type: material
THERMOD
Inlet and outlet streams must use the same THERMOD.
MODETOE Ge ne ral Input T e qualitie s (mass balance only)

Q
FRACi Parame te rs Me asurable Split Fractions
FLOWFILT Ge ne ral Input Automatic flow rate filte ring
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
MODEDP (Parameters)
MODETOEQ (General)
Temperature equalities (type: Input).
0 None no temperature equality equation will be generated
1 between all outlet stream all outlet streams will be set at the same temperature
2 between first inlet and all all outlet streams and the first inlet stream will be set
outlet stream at the same temperature
Temperature equalities are only added when the unit is calculated in mass balance only. When the
energy balance is activated, these additional equations will never be generated.
DP (Parameters)
DP = Pin- Pout
where:
FRACi (Parameters)
Split Fractions (type: Measurable).
Each FRACi parameter represents the fraction of the inlet flow going in the corresponding outlet
stream.
FLOWFILT (Parameters)
Automatic flow rate filtering (type: Input).
0 Disabled The automatic flow rate filtering is not activated
1 Enabled The automatic flow rate filtering is activated
When the inlet flow rate of a splitter is measured as well as all but one of its outlet streams, there is a
risk that the unmeasured outlet stream hits its lower bound.
This in particular the case on products routing in production accounting applications where the
main production flow rate is measured and the product routing is specified though manual inputs on
the flows that are redirected from the normal route (on-spec product) to slop tanks or recirculation
lines.
The automatic filtering (when enabled) creates an estimate on the unmeasured flow rate based on the
measured inlet and outlet flow rates. Should the estimated flow rate fall below a given cutoff value,
the unmeasured stream will be set off.
SECTION 44: TNKVAL : STORAGE TANK
PURPOSE
This type of UNIT allows you to consider the material balance of a storage tank. Different modes can
be selected to model the tank: mass, volume or level basis, use of strapping tables, tracking of
composition change over the time window. In any case, the heat balance of the tank is never taken
into account.
Typically, storage tanks models are most often used in daily production balance models. In such a
case, the recommended approach is to use as initial inventory (measured as constants) the validated
inventory of the preceding period (usually day).
Attention: Unaccounted losses (or surpluses) will then be evidenced by a progressive drift between
the validated and measured inventory of the tank. From time to time (for example at the end of a
monthly period), validated tank inventories can be reset to measured inventory by enabling an
imbalance on the tank inventory (parameter IMBMODE).
The inventory change can be expressed on a mass basis or a volume basis
In case of a mass basis, you can measure
directly the mass inventory change (parameter DMASS),
the initial and final mass inventories (parameters MASS1 and MASS2)
or the initial and final tank levels, using a strapping table to convert levels in mass
inventories
When dealing with volume basis, you will measure:
the initial and final volume inventories (parameters VOL1 and VOL2)
or the initial and final tank levels and use a strapping table to convert them volume
inventories
at least the density of the initial contents of the tank
In such cases, volumes need to be converted into mass terms to correctly calculate the material
balance. The density will be calculated either on basis of the composition of the tank contents
(COLDDENS approach) or on basis of a so-called conventional density which will be a measured
property independent of the tank composition (CONVDENS approach).
Several approaches are also possible to track the composition of the tank inventories:
assuming that the composition of the tank and of the connected streams are not related
assuming that the composition of the tank remains constant over the validation time
window
assuming that the composition of the tank can change over time
In the latter case, the initial composition of the tank needs to be measured. As for the inventory, the
usual approach is to use as initial composition (measured as constants) the validated composition of
the preceding period (usually day).
There is also the possibility to specify that the tank is used only in charge or rundown operation (no
simultaneous input and output) during the validation period of time, which avoids the
indetermination introduced by tanks used in parallel.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 65 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT TNKVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
1 optional material STREAM
OUTLET STREAMS
1 optional material STREAM
At least one STREAM must be connected to the unit (inlet or outlet).
THERMOD
Inlet and outlet streams must use the same THERMOD.
VOLMODE Ge ne ral Input Volume mode
COMPMOD Ge ne ral Input Compound balance mode

E
NTABLE Ge ne ral Input Strapping Table
MODECUR Ge ne ral Input Inte rpolation me thod

V
OPTMODE Ge ne ral Input Validation me thod
INITDENS Ge ne ral Input De nsity initialization mode
IMBMODE Ge ne ral Input Imbalance mode
DMASS Parame te rs Me asurable Accumulation (De lta Mass)
DTIME Parame te rs Input Time ste p (De lta Time )
WIMBAL Parame te rs Me asurable We ight Imbalance
VIMBAL Parame te rs Me asurable Volume Imbalance
MASS1,2 Othe rs Me asurable Mass in tank at time t1 and t2
VOL1,2 Othe rs Me asurable Volume in tank at time t1 and t2
DENS1,2 Othe rs Me asurable De nsity in tank at time t1 and t2
LEVEL1,2 Othe rs Me asurable Le ve l at time t1 and t2
LVLFRA1,2 Othe rs Me asurable Le ve l Fraction at time t1 and t2
Additional measurements available when dealing with variable composition:
LG1,2 Compound dry liquid volume fraction at time t1 and t2
MG1,2 Compound dry molar fraction at time t1 and t2
WG1,2 Compound dry we ight fraction at time t1 and t2
LF1,2 Compound liquid volume fraction at time t1 and t2
CC1,2 Compound mass conce ntration at time t1 and t2
MF1,2 Compound molar fraction at time t1 and t2
WF1,2 Compound we ight fraction at time t1 and t2
WQ1,2 Compound we ight quantity at time t1 and t2
VIi Compound volume imbalance during the validation pe riod
WIi Compound we ight imbalance during the validation pe riod
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
1 Mass Balance Only the mass balance is considered.
10 No simultaneous Input and If the measured initial and final inventories indicate
Output that the tank is filling up, then the outlet stream is set
OFF, and vice versa.
The measured initial and final inventories that are
checked are:
1. MASS1 and MASS2
2. DMASS
3. VOL1 and VOL2
4. LEVEL1 and LEVEL2
5. LVLFRA1 and LVLFRA2
VOLMODE (General)
Volume mode (type: Input).
0 None Volumes are not taken into account, only masses are
considered
1 Volume Basis Volumes are taken into account
The density and volume variables are taken into account, assuming that the tank is at 15°C. The
densities used by the unit must be linked to the streams densities by setting the unit comment to
either COLDDENS (density calculated from composition) or CONVDENS (density based on
conventional density as measured on the stream).
COMPMODE (General)
0 Composition is constant Composition is constant through the time window.
1 None The composition of the inlet and outlet streams are

not related.
2 Composition is variable (outlet Composition is variable over the time window. The
= final) composition of the outlet stream is assumed to be
equal to the composition of the tank at the end of the
time window.
3 Composition is variable (outlet Composition is variable over the time window. The
is free) composition of the outlet stream is not assumed to be
equal to the final composition at the end of the time
window. The user has to specify the final
composition or the outlet composition to calculate
the balance.
The Composition page allows keeping track of the initial and final composition of the tank. This page
is only used when COMPMODE = 2:
TABLE 41 - THE COMPOS ITION PAGE OF A TNKVAL UNIT
NTABLE (General)
Strapping Table (type: Input).
0 None No strapping table
1 Used A strapping table is used
TABLE 42 - THE S TRAPPING PAGE OF A TNKVAL UNIT
MODECURV (General)
Interpolation method (type: Input).
0 Linear interpolation Linear Interpolation between the points of the

strapping table
1 Spline function Interpolation through a spline function between the

points of the strapping table
OPTMODE (General)
Validation method (type: Input).
0 Level used as variable The tank level will be defined as a variable and linked
to the tank volume or mass by interpolation into the
strapping table all along the calculation
(reconciliation) phase
1 Volume/Mass used as variable The measured tank level will be converted into a
measured volume or mass before the calculation
(reconciliation) phase. This measured volume or
mass will be used for the calculation and converted
back into a reconciled level after the reconciliation
phase. This approach tends to be more stable as it
avoids possible discontinuity in the derivatives of
the tank volume or mass versus the level because of
the interpolation process. You need to create the
corresponding volume of mass tag and set it OFF
before using this mode
INITDENS (General)
Density initialization mode (type: Input).
0 Based on tag data
1 Based on product code When based on product codes, the LL and HH filter
bounds on density tags will set on product default
values (set by the PRODUCT syntax in measurement
files)
IMBMODE (General)
Imbalance mode (type: Input).
0 No Imbalance No imbalance is considered
1 Imbalance computed This mode enables an imbalance on the storage tank,

so that a systematic bias between the validated and
measured value can be suppressed by acting a loss or
surplus of the tank
DMASS (Parameters)
Accumulation (Delta Mass) (type: Measurable).
DMASS = MASS2 - MASS1
DTIME (Parameters)
Time step (type: Input).
DTIME = t2 - t1
This parameter must always be specified.
WIMBAL (Parameters)
Weight Imbalance (type: Measurable).
VIMBAL (Parameters)
Volume Imbalance (type: Measurable).
These parameters are the computed imbalances on the tank. They will always be zero when the
parameter IMBMODE is set to zero (No Imbalance).
MASS1,2 (Others)
Mass in tank at time t1 and t2 (type: Measurable).
VOL1,2 (Others)
Volume in tank at time t1 and t2 (type: Measurable).
DENS1,2 (Others)
Density in tank at time t1 and t2 (type: Measurable).
LEVEL1,2 (Others)
Level at time t1 and t2 (type: Measurable).
LVLFRA1,2 (Others)
Level Fraction at time t1 and t2 (type: Measurable).
When the volume mode is activated, all inventory variables (masses, volumes and densities) can be
measured.
The level variables are only used when a strapping table is defined (NTABLE = 1 ). Depending on the
way you define the strapping table, the level will be measured as a height (LEVEL)or as a percentage
(LVLFRA).
SECTION 45: TURVAL : TURBINE
PURPOSE
This type of UNIT allows to consider the energy balance of a turbine.
Information on the isentropic (or polytropic) efficiency and the mechanical power can also be
considered as measurements. Moreover a Stodola coefficient can be defined (or measured) to link the
flow rate through the turbine to the driving pressure drop.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 66 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT TURVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
1 material
OUTLET STREAMS
1 material
1 mechanical
THERMOD
MODESTOD Ge ne ral Input Se le ction of Stodola e quation
MODEDP Ge ne ral Input Se le ction of pre ssure e quation
EFFIC Parame te rs Me asurable Ise ntropic e fficie ncy
POLYEFFI Parame te rs Me asurable Polytropic e fficie ncy
STODOLA Parame te rs Me asurable Stodola coe fficie nt
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
isentropic efficiency equation is generated as well
MODESTOD (General)
Selection of Stodola equation (type: Input).
0 (none) No Stodola equation
1 Classical Equation
where:
Gin: is the stream mass flow rate (kg/s)
pin , pout: are the inlet and outlet stream pressure

(bar)
vin: is the inlet stream volumetric weight (m3/kg)
Stodola: is the Stodola coefficient
EXP=2:
2 CMI's equation Simplified equation (valid when outlet pressure is

negligible):
The Stodola equation links the pressure drop around the turbine to the flow rate.
MODEDP (General)
EFFIC (Parameters)
Isentropic efficiency (type: Measurable).
This parameter is only relevant in MODE 0.
POLYEFFI (Parameters)
Polytropic efficiency (type: Measurable).
When negative, this parameter is ignored. When positive, an additional equation is generated to
calculate the polytropic efficiency.
Attention: the formulation of the polytropic efficiency assumes that the mixture behaves like an
ideal gas.
STODOLA (Parameters)
Stodola coefficient (type: measurable).
DP (Parameters)
DP = Pin- Pout
where:
PRATIO (Parameters)
Pressure ratio (type: Measurable).
EXAMPLE : STEAM TURBINE

Attention: see model turval.bls in the directory "examples\turval". Units of type TURVAL are also
FIGURE 67 - TURVAL EXAMPLE
There is 1 UNIT:
TUR
type=TURVAL
IN.TUR STEAM to TUR
OUT.TUR STEAM from TUR
POWER MECHANICAL STREAM from TUR
The THERMOD STEAM is defined in the file Empty.bls.
TABLE 43 - MEAS UREMENTS FOR TURVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 44 - RES ULTS OF TURVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 46: VARVAL : USER DEFINED VARIABLES
PURPOSE
A unit of type VARVAL gives access to 9 user defined variables which can be used in a Flex code or in
an OPXVAL unit.
The values of these variables are available in the parameters VAR1...9 of the unit and can be
measured. These parameters are dimensionless.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 68 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT VARVAL
CONNECTION RULES
No connections are allowed on a VARVAL.
VARi Parame te rs Me asurable Additional variable s (i=1..9)
SECTION 47: WALVAL : HEAT LOSSES THROUGH

UNIT WALLS
PURPOSE
This type of UNIT is used to account for heat losses through external walls of a vessel. The losses are
estimated on basis of the external or internal wall temperature. In the latter case, the wall thermal
resistance must be provided. In both cases, the wall temperatures will be validated.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 69 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT WALVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
1 thermal stream
TAMB Parame te rs Input Ambie nt te mpe rature
AVERT Parame te rs Input Ve rtical surface are a
RVERT Parame te rs Input The rmal re sistance of Ve rtical wall
AHU Parame te rs Input Horizontal surface are a, facing up
RHU Parame te rs Input The rmal re sistance of Horizontal wall, facing up
AHD Parame te rs Input Horizontal surface are a, facing down
RHD Parame te rs Input The rmal re sistance of Horizontal wall, facing down
TWVEX Parame te rs Me asurable Ve rtical Wall e xte rnal te mpe rature
TWHUEX Parame te rs Me asurable Horizontal wall (facing up) e xte rnal te mpe rature
TWHDEX Parame te rs Me asurable Horizontal wall (facing down) e xte rnal te mpe rature
TWV Parame te rs Me asurable Ve rtical Wall te mpe rature
TWHD Parame te rs Me asurable Horizontal wall (facing down) te mpe rature
TWHU Parame te rs Me asurable Horizontal wall (facing up) te mpe rature
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)
0 Energy Balance The energy balance is calculated
1 No Equation No equation is generated
TAMB (Parameters)
Ambient temperature (type: Input).
This is the ambient temperature to be used for the heat loss calculation.
This value will not be validated during the run : it is a constant.
AVERT (Parameters)
Vertical surface area (type: Input).
AHU (Parameters)
Horizontal surface area, facing up (type: Input).
AHD (Parameters)
Horizontal surface area, facing down (type: Input).
These parameters respectively represent the vertical, horizontal facing up and horizontal facing
down areas considered in order to calculate the heat loss.
RVERT (Parameters)
Thermal resistance of Vertical wall (type: Input).
RHU (Parameters)
Thermal resistance of Horizontal wall, facing up (type: Input).
RHD (Parameters)
Thermal resistance of Horizontal wall, facing down (type: Input).
These parameters represent the thermal resistance associated to each area and only have to be
provided if the heat loss is calculated from the internal wall temperature.
TWVEX (Parameters)
Vertical Wall external temperature (type: Measurable).
TWHUEX (Parameters)
Horizontal wall (facing up) external temperature (type: Measurable).
TWHDEX (Parameters)
Horizontal wall (facing down) external temperature (type: Measurable).
These parameters are displayed for information and represent the external wall temperature.
They are useful when the thermal wall resistance is considered.
TWV (Parameters)
Vertical Wall temperature (type: Measurable).
TWHD (Parameters)
Horizontal wall (facing down) temperature (type: Measurable).
TWHU (Parameters)
Horizontal wall (facing up) temperature (type: Measurable).
These parameters are either the external or the internal wall temperatures. In the latter case
parameters TW.xxEX and Rxx are used.
EXAMPLE: HEAT LOSSES IN A VERTICAL PIPE

Attention: see model walval.bls in the directory "examples\walval".
This example deals with the heat loss of a vertical pipe. This heat loss is estimated from the external
wall temperature, so that the thermal resistance does not have to be provided.
FIGURE 70 - AN EXAMPLE OF WALVAL TYPE UNIT
There are 2 UNITS:
PIPE
type=EEXVAL
WALL
type=WALVAL
AVERT=40 m2 (Vertical plate area)
TAMB=25 C (Ambient Temperature)
IN STEAM to PIPE
OUT STEAM from PIPE
LOSSES THERMAL STREAM from PIPE to WALL
The THERMOD STEAM is available in the model file Empty.bls.
TABLE 45 - MEAS UREMENT LIS T FOR WALVAL EXAMPLE
TABLE 46 - RES ULTS FOR WALVAL EXAMPLE
SECTION 48: WLEVAL : WATER-LIQUID ORGANIC

SEPARATOR
PURPOSE
The WLEVAL unit models water decanting from an organic solution.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 71 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT WLEVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number:
Material: 8
Thermal: 2
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number:
Material: 2 streams of state L, LL or WL
Thermal: 2
THERMODS
Attention:
2. Water is assumed to be pure and to be the heavy liquid stream and is therefore going through the
lower outlet stream. The solubility of water in the organic phase is based on the solubility in
kerosene.
3. Solids that would be present in the inlet streams will always end up in the organic phase.
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)

3 Mass and W/L equilibrium Mass and water-liquid equilibrium relationships are
taken into account
Attention:
balance only).
2. The water solubility in the organic phase is a function of temperature:
XWAT1
XWAT0
EXP
T
MODEDP (General)
FLASH (General)

run)

data

following cases:


REFDP (Parameters)

DP (Parameters)
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
SECTION 49: WLVVAL : LIQUID-LIQUID-VAPOR

SEPARATOR
PURPOSE
This type of UNIT handles mass balances, energy balance and water-liquid-vapor equilibrium
relationships of a 3 phase separator with decantation of water as one of the liquid phases.
SYMBOLS
FIGURE 72 - S YMBOLS FOR UNIT WLVVAL
CONNECTION RULES
INLET STREAMS
Maximum number:
Material: 6
Thermal: 2
OUTLET STREAMS
Maximum number:
Material:
2 streams of state L, LL or WL for the liquids
1 stream of state V
Thermal: 2
THERMODS
All outlet streams must use the same THERMOD.
Attention:
L/L/V equations. Failure to do so can induce convergence problems or lead to a trivial solution
where all outlet streams have the same compositions. The initialization can be performed
3. Water is assumed to be pure and to be the heavy liquid stream and is therefore going through the
lower outlet stream. The solubility of water in the organic phase is based on the solubility in
kerosene.
define whether solids are going with the liquid (organic) or vapor phase.
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE (General)

3 Mass and W/L/V equilibrium Mass and water-liquid-vapor equilibrium

Attention:
balance only).
MODEDP (General)
FLASH (General)

run)

data

following cases:


REFDP (Parameters)

DP (Parameters)
DP = Pref- Pout
where:
CHAPTER 7
FLEX LANGUAGE
DESCRIPTION VII
1.1 WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH FLEX
Flex is a programming language, which allows users to define and obtain the computation of
mathematical expressions. In a VALI application, Flex programs can be used:
in the filtering phase:
to define advanced filtering operations (ValiFilter license required)
in the calculation phase:
to add user-defined constraints
to add user-defined measurements (Unit FLXVAL, VARVAL or FLEXLIB)
to calculate user defined functions of the validated values
to specify user defined kinetics (Unit RKIVAL)
in the report phase:
to write specific reports
Using Flex language, you can access values of streams and units and perform various calculations.
physical equilibrium compositions. You can define your own subroutines and refer them from
different units.
For VALI application, Flex programs can be associated to:
any units representing an equipment, for adding filtering operations, constraints and
reports
units of type FLXVAL for adding filte ring ope rations, calculating value s of the parame te rs of the
unit (var1, var2, e tc) which can the n be me asure d by cre ating a tag on the m, and ge ne rating
re ports
The section about the UNITS indicates how to access the Flex program.
The section dealing with "FLXVAL" describes how to use such units and gives a practical example.
This chapter describes the general syntax of the language Flex as well as the specific functions
available in the VALI implementation of Flex.
1.2 INTERPRETED OR COMPILED
A Flex program is either:
interpreted at runtime, each time the program is executed during a run of a model
interpreted at runtime during the verification phase and executed each time the program
is executed during a run
The latter mode is quicker and is used by default. The first mode is only kept for compatibility reason
and can be reactivated using the parameter FLEXMODE of unit OPTVAL.
SECTION 2: FLEX LANGUAGE OBJECTS

FLEX programs are built by using character strings defining words, instructions and lines.
The length of a Flex line is limited to 510 characters, while words and instructions are limited to 32
characters.
A line is made with a variable number of characters. It may contain one or more instructions,
separated by a ";". Instructions may not be split over different lines.
The exclamation mark "!" means the beginning of a comment, then carrying on up to the end of the
line. A "!" in a line forces (means) the end of the preceding instruction.
The character set used by FLEX is defined by :
letters : capital and lower-case, which are differentiated only in printed text.
UPPER-CASE :A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
lower-case :a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
numbers :0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
special characters :+ - * / ^ = > < # & | ? ' ( ) , .\ ; ! $
space (ASCII 32 characters)
separator function (not ignored as in FORTRAN)
SECTION 3: LANGUAGE ELEMENTS

Instructions are made up with 5 types of elements:
separators
constants
variables
operators
keywords
Operators are represented by particular characters or reserved keywords.
3.1 SEPARATORS
Separators are particular characters or spaces.
The BLANK (spaces). You may have more than one space as a separator between two elements of
code. Blank is significant in character string constants (i.e. in string 'Results table').
The SEMICOLON is used to separate instructions written on the same line. An instruction may not
be split between lines.
The COMMA is used to separate elements of a function arguments list, or the elements of a printing
list (WRITE instruction).
The BRACKETS surround a function arguments list or a table index. The brackets also permit
changes in the order of calculation of complex relations.
The EXCLAMATION MARK means that the end of the line is a comment.
The EQUALS SIGN (=) or COLON (:) is used for the affectation instruction. It separates the name of
the target variable and the result to be stored.
X=3 ; X:3;
Both instructions store 3 in X .
3.2 CONSTANTS
Constants can be numerical values, elements for reference to an object (NAME), or character strings.
FLEX recognizes and represents numerical constants, as in the programming language FORTRAN:
optional sign, integer, decimal point, decimal, "E" symbol to define exponent to 10 and
integer exponent which may be preceded by a sign and have a range from -35 and up to
+35
integer, or decimal part is optional. When the decimal part is omitted, the decimal point
could then be omitted. Exponent is optional
Thus, the following numbers are recognized numerical constants:

1 +1 1 2. .2 +2. .2
1.2 2.03 2.E+03 2.5E 4 +2.E3 .2E 5 2E4
FLEX is written in FORTRAN and all of the computations are with real numbers (at least 12
significant digits).
Numerical constants are stored in variables of such a precision.
Character strings may only be in the FLEX program if they are constant. They consist in an arbitrary
number of characters between two apostrophes. Therefore, the apostrophe is the only character,
which cannot be in a string of characters.
Constants of the NAME type are strings with 1 to 32 characters, without any spaces.
Inte ge r_ = numbe r [numbe r]

not_signe
d
Inte ge r_c = [+ | -] Inte ge r_without_sign

onstant
Re al_not = Inte ge r_not_signe d.[Inte ge r_not_signe d] |. Inte ge r_not_signe d

_signe d
Re al_basi = [+ | -] Re al_not_signe d
c
Re al_con = Re al_basic [E Inte ge r_constant]

stant
Characte = ' Characte r_Ele me nt [Characte r_Ele me nt ] '

r_consta
nt
3.3 VARIABLES
A variable is identified by its name, which is a string of 32 characters maximum (letters or numbers).
The first character must be alphabetic, but the code is not case-sensitive: capitals and lower-cases are
not distinguished in names.
Variables and operators may not share the same names.
Valid names for variables are: A12B, GHIJKLMN, PI314
There are three different types of variables:
real (REAL)
inte ge r (INTEGER)
re fe re nce to an obje ct by its name (NAME)
Variables may be scalar or of an array type (table with one index).
The type of variable and its potential index are notified to FLEX by non-executable declaration
instructions.
These instructions are made up with a keyword defining the type of variable (INTEGER, REAL or
NAME), followed by a list of variable names to be assigned.
Every variable not explicitly declared is supposed to be a real scalar variable and is created when
first used.
The initial values of numerical variables are zero and as far as character strings and variables of type
NAME are concerned, it is ' '.
Logical states are stored in temporary numerical variables:
TRUE state corresponds to 1
FALSE state corresponds to 0
Program variables can be accessed by all called functions.
Variables created (explicitly or implicitly) in a function are eliminated after the execution of that
function.
Existing variables cannot be declared again.
To declare real variables, following syntax can be used:

REAL XXX(N), YYY
where:
XXX(N) declares an array. XXX can be any name, N will be the size of array XXX
YYY declares a scalar. YYY can be any name
Example:
REAL VAP(3),LIQ(3),T,P
To declare integer variables, following syntax can be used:
INTEGER XXX(N), YYY
where:
Example:
INTEGER INDEX(3),LISTE(3),S1,K3(3*2-4)
To declare string variables, following syntax can be used:
NAME XXX(N), YYY
where:
Example:
NAME NAMES(3),ANAME
3.4 OPERATORS AND INTERNAL FUNCTIONS
Operators define basic operations that can be made with variables and constants. Expressions are
made up of one or more operator applied on variables, constants or expressions:
logical operators:
? or .NOT.: logical negation
& or .AND.: logical AND
| or .OR.: logical OR
numerical comparison operators:
= or .EQ.: equal
# or .NEQ.: not equal
> or .GT.: greater than
< or .LT.: lesser than
>= or .GE.: greater or equal
<= or .LE.: lesser or equal
numerical operators:
+: addition
-: subtraction
*: multiplication
/: division
^ or **: power
numerical functions:
FRAC(X): fractional part
INT(X): entire part
ABS(X): absolute value
SQRT(X): square root
EXP(X): exponential
LOG(X): natural logarithm
LOG10(X): logarithm base 10
SIN(X): sine (argument in radian)
COS(X): cosine (argument in radian)
TAN(X): tangent (argument in radian)
TANH(X): hyperbolic tangent
ASIN(X): inverse sine
ACOS(X): inverse cosine
ATAN(X): inverse tangent
LEN(X): dimension of array variable
3.5 OPERATIONS EXECUTION ORDER
The functions are evaluated in the following order:
functions calls
power (^)
multiplication and division (* /)
addition and subtraction (+ -)
comparisons (> < = # <= >=)
logical negation (?)
logical AND (&)
logical OR (|)
Operations of the same priority are evaluated from left to right.
The use of brackets allows users to modify the evaluation order, as the contents of inner brackets are
evaluated before the others. In any expression, the number of open brackets must be equal to the
number of closed ones.
Examples:
1
A+3
(-B+sqrt(B**2-4*A*C))/2/A
a=b&c>D.or.x(5)>=b^2-4*A*C
Terms of logical operators could be numerical expressions.
Expressions equal to zero are interpreted as FALSE logical expressions, else, TRUE.
Results of a logical expression could be used as numerical variables:
TRUE conditions are represented by a value of 1
FALSE conditions are re pre se nte d by a value of 0
3.6 RESERVED KEYWORDS
FLEX uses some reserved keywords that cannot be used to name variables. These keywords are used
to build executable instructions and declarations.
Reserved keywords are:
type declaration (non-executable):
REAL
INTEGER
NAME
FUNCTION
input-output instructions (executable):
READ
WRITE
TAB
EDIT
control of the computation sequence (executable):
CALL
RETURN
END
WHILE
ENDWHILE
UNTIL
ENDUNTIL
IF
THEN
ELSEIF
ELSE
ENDIF
internal functions:
OPENIN
OPENOUT
DEBUG
TSTFUN
internal functions defined by the application associated with FLEX
SECTION 4: EXECUTABLE INSTRUCTIONS

Executable instructions are simple instructions or blocks of instructions.
FLEX executes instructions sequentially, but it is possible to pack the instruction into blocks with a
control instruction. These instructions also allow you to control the sequence by using logical tests.
Instruction blocks are surrounded by couples of associated keywords:

WHILE ... ENDWHILE
UNTIL ... ENDUNTIL
IF ... THEN ... ELSEIF ... ELSE ... ENDIF
4.1 AFFECTATION
Stores the result of expression computation in a variable. FLEX is able to compute complex
expressions, syntax and priority in computation, which has already been discussed.
Examples:
A=2
B(2*j+5)=3*(A-6*C/B(3)+SQRT(D-4))
4.2 READ
Reads the value of a variable in a file or with a request on screen; in this case, a message with the
name of the variable to set is printed on screen. It is also possible to define a file to enter that value
with the use of OPENIN function.
Examples:
READ A
READ B(2*j-5)
4.3 WRITE
Prints the value of a variable or expression in a file or on screen. The destination of a write
instruction could be changed with the OPENOUT function. All the values of the same WRITE
instruction are printed on the same line if possible. The defaults for FLEX are the elimination of
redundant zeros of numerical values and the introduction of a space after each value. Each WRITE
instruction is followed by a jump to the next line, except if the list is ended by a colon (:).
A WRITE instruction without any arguments leads to a blank line.
TAB and EDIT keywords are used to modify the presentation of results.
TAB(Expression) prints the next variable in the column corresponding to the value of that expression.
EDIT(format), followed by an expression to be printed, prints the value of the expression with the
FORTRAN FORMAT, without elimination of the redundant zeros by FLEX.
EXAMPLES RESULT ON SCREEN
A=2.5
WRITE A 2.5
WRITE 2*A 5
WRITE A :
WRITE 2*A 2.5 5
WRITE 'Re sult :',3*A,'/',10.00 Re sult : 7.5 / 10
WRITE A,TAB(4*A),1/A 2.5 0.4
WRITE EDIT(E12.5)A 0.25000E+01
WRITE tab(3),EDIT(E12.5)A 0.25000E+01
WRITE tab(3),EDIT(2X,E12.5)A 0.25000E+01
4.4 WHILE BLOCK
Following syntax is used for WHILE block:

WHILE LOGICAL EXPRESSION
{INSTRUCTIONS}
ENDWHILE
If the logical expression test is TRUE, the instructions contained in the WHILE and ENDWHILE
keywords are executed and restarted "while" the condition is TRUE.
If the logical expression test is FALSE, go to the next instruction following ENDWHILE.
Blocks might never be used.
4.5 UNTIL BLOCK
Following syntax is used for UNTIL block:

UNTIL LOGICAL EXPRESSION
{INSTRUCTIONS}
ENDUNTIL
Flex EXECUTES the instructions ONCE until the ENDUNTIL keyword; then it estimates the logical
expression.
If the result is TRUE, it goes to the instruction which follows the ENDUNTIL keyword.
If the result is FALSE, it returns to the first instruction of the UNTIL block.
Thus, the instruction block is executed once at least.
4.6 IF BLOCK
Following syntax is used for IF block:

IF LOGICAL EXPRESSION THEN
{INSTRUCTIONS}
[ELSEIF LOGICAL EXPRESSION THEN
{INSTRUCTIONS}]
[ELSE
{INSTRUCTIONS}]
ENDIF
ELSEIF and ELSE are optional commands. The ELSEIF instruction can be repeated.
FLEX estimates the logical expression following IF:
if it is TRUE, then it executes the instructions preceding the next ELSEIF, ELSE or ENDIF
and then proceeds to the next instruction following the corresponding ENDIF keyword
if the logical expression is FALSE, it looks for an ELSEIF statement with a true logical
expression to proceed in the same way
if no IF or ELSEIF statement with a true logical function is encountered, FLEX then looks
for the ELSE instruction and executes the instructions until the ENDIF keyword is found
if no ELSE instruction is found, FLEX continues until the next ENDIF instruction is reached
Please note that instructions following keywords THEN or ELSE have to be separated by a semicolon
or to be written on the next line, i.e.:
IF A>0 THEN;RES='positive';ELSEIF A=0 THEN
RES='null';ELSE;RES='negative';ENDIF
4.7 END
Ends the execution of a function and returns to the next instruction of the calling function.
END also terminates the function definition.
4.8 RETURN
Ends the execution of a function and returns to the next instruction of the calling function.
4.9 SYNTAX OF EXECUTABLE INSTRUCTIONS
Exe cutabl = Simple _instr| Block_inst

e _instr
Simple _in = Affe ctation | Re ad_inst | Write _inst | Call_inst | Re turn_inst | End_inst
str
Affe ctatio = Ele m_variable = Expre ssion

n
Ele m_vari = Variable _name | Variable _name ( Inde x)

able
Variable _ = Le tte r [ Le tte r | Numbe r ]

name
Inde x = Arith_e xp
Arith_e xp = [+ | -] Arith_te rm{<+|-> Arith_te rm}
Arith_te r = Arith_factor{<*|/> Arith_factor}

m
Arith_fact = Arith_prim{ ^ Arith_prim}

or
Arith_pri = Ele m_variable | Re f_function | Arith_constant |Arith_e xp| Logical_e xp

m
Arith_con = Inte ge r_constant | Re al_constant

stant
Re ad_inst = READ Ele m_variable
Write _inst = WRITE Write _list
Write _list = Write _e le m[, Write _e le m
Write _e le = Arith_e xp | TAB(Arith_e xp ) | EDIT(Format)Arith_e xp

m
Format = any list of FORTRAN format acce ptable to tre at the "Arith_e xp"
Re turn_in = RETURN
st
End_inst = END
Block_inst = Block_if | Block_while | Block_until

SECTION 5: FLEX FUNCTIONS

5.1 USING FLEX FUNCTIONS
TYPES OF FLEX FUNCTIONS

There are three types of FLEX functions:
internal FLEX functions
application dependant functions: VALI, SIMU or other FLEX compatible programs give
access to a number of specific functions. These functions are discussed in a separate section
user defined functions: you can define your own functions and reuse them in different
places
CALLING A FUNCTION
These three types of functions are called using the same syntax:
CALL A_FUNCTION (ARGUMENTS)
If the name of the function is recognised, FLEX computes the parameters (which might be constants,
scalar variables, parts of arrays, or expressions), the number of these arguments is checked, and their
type has to be in agreement with those used in the function called.
FLEX stops the program if an inconsistency is found.
After the execution of the function, the program continues with the next instruction within the
calling module.
Examples:
CALL TSTFUN(A)
CALL OPENIN('MYFILE')
CALL REPORT(3,A(8), 3*B-4,EXP(1.5))
ARGUMENTS
Arguments are transferred to the function either by address or by value.
If the argument is a variable or an element of an array, then the address of the argument is
transferred to the function. If the function modifies the argument contents, then theses changes will
be reflected in the variable of array element after the call of the routine.
If the argument is an expression, then FLEX creates temporary variables to store the results of the
expressions. In such a case if the called function changes the value of an argument, the result will not
be retrieved by the calling program.
In the following example, where TEST is a function affecting a value of 3 to its argument, it shows
that:
CALL TEST(A)
WRITE A :
A=5
CALL TEST(-A)
WRITE A
END
FUNCTION TEST(X)
X=3
END
Printed result: 3 5
The variable A is modified during the first call. In the second call, whose argument is -A : an
expression, thus FLEX creates a temporary variable to store the value -5 and use it as a parameter.
This temporary variable is modified by the function, but A is not modified.
5.2 FLEX INTERNAL FUNCTIONS

5.2.1 DEBUG
This function is used to trace part of a program.

CALL DEBUG(I)
This is used along with a numerical argument.
If the argument is less than 1: no trace is printed.
If the argument is between 1 and 2, FLEX prints each instruction before execution.
If it is bigger than 2, a complete trace, with coding of the expressions in inverse polish notation, is
printed.
Thus, it is possible to ask for a trace for part of the program.
Example:
CALL DEBUG(1)
5.2.2 TSTFUN
This function allows to test a function.

CALL TSTFUN(VAR)
This function is useful to check a program: it allows the user to print the name and the value of a
scalar variable or of all the elements of an array.
Example:
CALL TSTFUN(A)
5.2.3 OPENIN
This function allows to open a file from which data can be read.

CALL OPENIN(FILE_NAME)
Uses a character string as its argument, in order to define the name of an existing file to be open for
reading
In the following READ instructions, the values will be read in that file.
To reset the read target to the screen, call OPENIN with numerical argument equal to zero.
Example:
CALL OPENIN('MYFILE.DAT')
...
CALL OPENIN(0)
5.2.4 OPENOUT
This function allows to open a file to which data can be written.
CALL OPENOUT(FILE_NAME)
Uses a character string as its argument, in order to define the name of the file to print all WRITE
instructions.
To reset the written target to the screen, call OPENOUT with a numerical argument equal to zero.
Example:
CALL OPENOUT('REPORT.LIS')
...
CALL OPENOUT(0)
5.2.5 CONCAT
This function allows to concatenate two strings.

CALL CONCAT(TEXT1, TEXT2, RESULT)
Joins the text strings text1 and text2 into one text string Result.
5.2.6 NAMEISEQUAL
This function allows to compare two strings.
CALL NAMEISEQUAL(TEXT1, TEXT2, RESULT)
TEXT1 and TEXT2 are the input strings you want to compare; RESULT is the output, it is a real. Its
value will be 1 if the strings are equal and 0 otherwise.
RESULT can then be used as a condition in a block: a RESULT of 1 will be evaluated as "true", and a
result of 0 will be evaluated as "false".
Notice that strings in flex are case-insensitive.
Example:
...
CALL NAMEISEQUAL(TEXT1, TEXT1, RESULT)
IF (RESULT) THEN
WRITE 'these strings are equal'
ELSE
WRITE 'these strings are not equal'
ENDIF
5.2.7 FLXDLL
This function allows the user to call user-defined subroutines in a FLEX code.
To use it, the user can replace the dynamic linked library flx.dll with his own library; the dll must
contain the following subroutine:
SUBROUTINE(VARIN,VAROUT,PARAM,NUM,NIN,NOUT,NPAR)
It is then possible to call the subroutine in a FLEX code by using the command:
CALL FLXDLL(VARIN,VAROUT,PARAM,NUM,NIN,NOUT,NPAR)
where,
VARIN: input, double precision array, dimension (NIN); The array of input variables for
the user-defined subroutine
VAROUT: output, double precision array, dimension (NOUT); The array of output
variables for the user-defined subroutine
PARAM: input, double precision array, dimension (NPAR); An array of parameters used
by the user-defined subroutine
NUM: An input integer; it can be used to allow the user to select the subroutine used
between several (eg, with NUM=1, FLXDLL will compute the numerical derivative of the
input array, and with NUM=2, it will compute the FFT of the input array)
NIN: input, integer; Size of the array VARIN
NOUT: input, integer; Size of the array VAROUT
NPAR: input, integer; Size of the array PARAM
5.3 USER-DEFINED FUNCTIONS
In VALI, only functions can be defined (up to 9 functions generating equations per unit), each function
defining the residual of one equation.
These functions can call other functions defined by the user. These user-defined functions can appear
in the Flex code page of any unit where a Flex code can be defined. They can be called from any other
Flex code of the same model, when the compiled Flex option is activated, which is the case by default.
If not, only functions defined in the same Flex code unit can be used. It is recommended to code user-
defined functions in a Flexlib unit, so that the functions are available anywhere in the model.
Functions have the following lay-out:

FUNCTION NAME [ ( ARGUMENTS) ]
FLEX INSTRUCTIONS…
END
where:
NAME: the function name
ARGUMENTS: the list of arguments, separated by a comma
When defining the functions calculating the residuals in VALI (FLXVAL units), the function name
must respectively be EQ1, EQ2, etc. In that case, no argument is used
The type of arguments cannot de defined in the user-defined function but will instead take the type
and dimension previously declared in the calling routine.
The function also inherits the entire environment defined in the calling routine. For example,
routines used to get values from streams (GETVAR, GETALL, etc) can refer to the streams by their
name or by their number. A positive (negative) number will correspond to an inlet (outlet) stream of
the calling module.
This makes the writing of generic user-defined functions quite easy, ensuring maximum reusability
of the code.
Return to the calling routine will be initiated by the RETURN command or when encountering the
END of the function.
Recursive calls are allowed within the limits of available memory.
Example:
! Calling the function POLYNOM to calculate fx = 0.1 + 0.3 x - 0.5 x2
!
CALL POLYNOM (0.1, 0.3, -0.5, 0.1, fx)
FUNCTION POLYNOM (a, b, c, x, fx)

! User defined function to calculate a polynomial expression
Fx = a + b*x + c*x*x
RETURN
END
SECTION 6: EXAMPLE OF A FLEX PROGRAMME

This example is to show the principal control structures of FLEX, and does not claim to be a model of
clarity or efficiency to estimate a factorial computation.
! FLEX test
! Factorial computation; reserved keywords are in capital
INTEGER n,j
REAL fac(50)
n=1
UNTIL n=0
WRITE ' Enter a number, 0 to end' ; READ n
IF n<0 THEN
WRITE(' Positive please')
ELSEIF n>0 THEN
fac(1)=1.
j=1
WHILE j<n
j=j+1
IF j<= 50 THEN
fac(j)=fac(j-1)*j
WRITE ' The factorial of',J,' is',fac(j)
ELSE ; WRITE ' Maximum 50'
j=n
ENDIF
ENDWHILE
ENDIF
ENDUNTIL
END
SECTION 7: VALI IMPLEMENTATION OF FLEX

7.1 INTRODUCTION
FILTERING
In the filtering phase, you can define specific actions to deactivate parts of a model or flex equations,
or to change the measured value or precision of any measurement.
The corresponding Flex code can be defined on any unit and must follow the following syntax.
The specific functions available for the filtering are described in the paragraph FLEX SUBROUTINES
USED IN FILTERING below.
FUNCTION FILTER
…your filtering code …
END
FLEX EQUATIONS DURING CALCULATION PHASE

When using FLEX equations in calculation phase, each equation must be defined in a separate
FUNCTION (EQ1, EQ2, ...) and the result of the calculations must be stored in the variable RES. The
value of RES will automatically be available in the variables VARi of the unit (VAR1 for equation
EQ1, etc.) on FLXVAL units or will be set to zero on other units.
The following internal variables are available:
PFDNAM: name of the PFD where the unit is located (type NAME)
ITERFLEX: number of iterations performed so far (type INTEGER)
Typically, each FUNCTION consists in:
a declaration section: defines variables and arrays that will be necessary
selection of a THERMOD: defines the thermodynamics methods to be used
selection of variables: defines which variables will be used in the code
calculations: defines the calculations and actions
Example:
FUNCTION EQi ! This the header for the first equation
! Declaration
REAL ...
! Selection of thermodynamic methods
CALL SELECT('Astream')
! Selection of variables
CALL GETALL(...)
CALL GETVAR(...)
CALL GETUVA(...)
CALL GTVARTAG(...)
CALL GTTAGVAL( )
! Calculations
...
RES = ...
END
Attention: By default, if one of the units or streams referred by you flex code is OFF, then the
equation is not generated at all. However, if you use the function GTSTATUS, the equation is not
suppressed. It is then your responsibility to check each unit or stream that can be OFF. Indeed,
calling any function related to an object which is OFF will generate a fatal error.
REPORT PHASE
You can also use FLEX in report phase to design your own reports. The syntax is:
FUNCTION REPORT
…your reporting code …
END
7.2 USER DEFINED MEASUREMENTS
Flex language can be used to define your own type of measurements on streams. The definition is
carried out in two steps:
defining the measurement type in ValiModeller
coding the Flex function describing how the measured property is to be calculated
DEFINING THE MEASUREMENT TYPE IN VALIMODELLER

You must first define the new measurement type, so that ValiModeller can recognize this new type of
measurement when creating new tags on streams.
select the menu command Options|Configure
select the Model Measurements tab
click the Add button
define the measurement properties:
FIGURE - 1 - DEFINING A NEW S TREAM MEAS UREMENT TYPE
click twice the OK button (once in the Define New Model Measurement and once in the
Configuration window)
a message window is then displayed mentioning that you must now close the model file
and re-open it.
press again the OK button
click Yes to save your modifications
re-open you model
CODING THE FLEX FUNCTION

In any Flex page (for example in a FLEXLIB type unit), define now how to calculate the property
corresponding to this new measurement type.
The result must be stored in the pre-defined variable RESUSR. The name of the stream on which the
measurement is defined us available in the pre-defined string variable STRNAM.
Example:
FUNCTION H_N
!================================
! Calculates H/N molar ratio

!================================
CALL GETVAR (STRNAM, 'H2', h2)
CALL GETVAR (STRNAM, 'N2', n2)
RESUSR = h2 / n2
END
You can now define a tag of type H/N on any stream that has both H2 and N2 in its corresponding
THERMOD.
7.3 FLEX FUNCTIONS TO SELECT VARIABLES AND DATA

7.3.1 GETALL
This function loads the variables of the given STREAM in the arrays STRPAR (stream parameters)
and RATESPAR (rates parameters).

CALL GETALL('NAME' OR I,'VARIABLES')
where:
'NAME': the name of the stream
I: number of the stream (positive for inlet stream, negative for outlet stream)
'VARIABLES': one of the reserved keywords:
'S': loads only STRPAR (stream parameters).
'R': loads only RATESPAR
'ALL': loads STRPAR and RATESPAR
Examples:
CALL GETALL('FM','ALL')
! 'FM' is the STREAM inlet name, and must be placed between quotes
! 'ALL': to initialize STRPAR and RATESPAR arrays
CALL GETALL('FM','S') or CALL GETALL('FM','STREAM')

! 'S' or 'STREAM' to initialise the state variables in STRPAR.
CALL GETALL(3,'R') or CALL GETALL(3,'RATES')

! 'R' or 'RATES' to initialise RATESPAR from the third inlet stream
For non-material streams, the STRPAR array contains the variables of the stream and the
RATESPAR is undefined.
For material streams, STRPAR and RATESPAR have the following structure:
STRPAR array:
(1): T: temperature (K)
(2): P: pressure (bar)
(3): not used (set to 0)
(4): RATEFRAC: rates fractions (mixf) (-)
(5): H: enthalpy (kJ/kmol)
(6): not used (set to 0)
Attention:
1. Only state variables are initialised. For material streams, state variables are usually: T, P,
RateFrac. For material streams involving a single compound and of LV, WLV or LLV, the state
variables are H, p, RateFrac. For these latter streams, the variable T can however be accessed by
using the GETVAR function. For non-material streams, state variables are the stream variables
that appear in an equation.
2. The structure of STRPAR allows you to use it directly to call EQPHYS.
RATESPAR ARRAY: contains the partial flow rates of the STREAM (the others elements of
the array are set to zero) in the following form:
(1): total molar flow rate (kmol/s)
(2): total mass flow rate (kg/s)
(3,4,...): partial molar flow rate of COMPOUND 1,2,... (kmol/s)
Attention: The array may be used as an argument for EQPHYS and PROPTY by giving RATESPAR
(3) as an argument.
7.3.2 GETVAR
This function retrieves values associated with a STREAM.

CALL GETVAR('NAME' OR I, 'VARIABLES', MYVAR)
where:
'VARIABLES': one of the reserved keywords:
'STREAM' or 'S': copies the state variables of the STREAM into the MYVAR array. For a
material STREAM:
MYVAR(1): temperature (K)
MYVAR(2): pressure (bar)
MYVAR(3): not used (set to 0)
MYVAR(4): rates fraction (MIXF) (-)
MYVAR(5): molar enthalpy (kJ/kmol)
MYVAR(6): not used (set to 0)
'RATES' or 'R': copies the partial molar flow rates of the stream in the MYVAR array.
Its size must be at least the same as the number of components. The MYVAR array
may be used as an argument for the EQPHYS and PROPTY functions.
'XXX': where xxx is the variable name:
state variable of material stream (xxx = P for pressure, VAPF for the vapour
fraction, T for the temperature, H for the enthalpy, MASSF for mass flow rate, MOLF
for molar flow rate)
name of a compound to get the stream compound partial flow rate
any parameter from non material stream
any variable of the stream, provided a tag is defined on this variables (e.g.
COLDVOLF, COLDDENS, etc.)
MYVAR: variable to store the result (type REAL)
Examples:
CALL GETVAR('FM','H',MYVAR(2))
!'FM' is the Stream Name.
!'H': reserved keyword for a material stream enthalpy.
!MYVAR(2): result array named MYVAR, cell 2.
CALL GETVAR(-3,'S',MYVAR)
CALL GETALL(-3,'STREAM',MYVAR)
!'to copy the Stream State variables (of the third outlet stream) in MYVAR array.
CALL GETVAR('FM','R',MYVAR)
CALL GETALL('FM','RATES',MYVAR)
!to copy the partial molar flow rates in MYVAR array.
CALL GETVAR('FM','WATER',MYVAR(1))
!'WATER' to copy the partial flow rate of Compound named WATER in MYVAR(1).
CALL GETVAR('FM','MFWATER',MYVAR(1))
!'WATER' to copy the molar fraction of Compound named WATER in MYVAR(1), assuming such a tag has been d
7.3.3 GETUVA
This function retrieves values associated with a UNIT.

CALL GETUVA('NAME' OR ' ', 'VARIABLE', MYVAR)
where:
' ': the unit itself
'VARIABLES': one of the UNIT parameters
Attention: Only measurable variables of a unit can be accessed through GETUVA. This means that
referring to unit parameters such as a MODE type parameter or an Input parameter will not work
correctly.
Example
CALL GETUVA('SPLIT','DP', dp_split)
!'SPLIT' is the UNIT Name.
!'DP': reserved keyword for pressure drop of the unit.
!dp_split is the local variable
7.3.4 GTVARTAG
This function retrieves the validated value associated with a TAG. This is the actual variable
associated with the TAG and its value will change between iterations until convergence.

CALL GTVARTAG('NAME',MYVAR)
where:
'NAME': the name of the TAG
Example:
CALL GTVARTAG('TI-001',TI)
!'TI-001'' is the TAG Name
!TI: result variable
7.3.5 GTTAGVAL
This function retrieves the requested value associated with a TAG. This value does not change
between iterations.

CALL GTTAGVAL('NAME','VALUE',MYVAR)
where:
'NAME': the name of the TAG
'VALUE': one of the reserved keywords:
MEA.VAL: the used value, i.e. value after filtering, compensation and CUTOFF
MEA.ACC: the used accuracy, i.e. accuracy after filtering, compensation and CUTOFF
SL: the solver lower bound
LL: the alarm lower bound
L: the warning lower bound
H: the warning upper bound
HH: the alarm upper bound
SH: the solver upper bound
DEF.VAL: the default value, i.e. value entered manually in the model
DEF.ACC: the default accuracy, i.e. accuracy entered manually in the model
RAW.VAL: the raw measured value, i.e. value coming from measurement file. If no value
in mea file, the default value
RAW.ACC: the raw measured accuracy, i.e. accuracy coming from measurement file. If
no accuracy in mea file, the default accuracy
FILT.VAL: the filtered value
FILT.ACC: the filtered accuracy
USED.VAL: the used value, i.e. value after filtering, compensation and CUTOFF. Same as
MEA.VAL
USED.ACC: the used accuracy, i.e. accuracy after filtering, compensation and CUTOFF.
Same as MEA.ACC
IS.OWNER.OFF: 1 if object (UNIT or STREAM) on which object is defined is OFF, 0

otherwise
IS.OWNER.OUT: 1 if object (UNIT or STREAM) on which object is defined is OUT, 0

otherwise
IS.BAD: 1 if tag value is BAD in measurement file, 0 otherwise. Refer to Bad data
handling for more information
IS.FLAT1: 1 if tag is FLAT1, 0 otherwise. Refer to Flat data detection for more
information
IS.FLAT2: 1 if tag is FLAT2, 0 otherwise. Refer to Flat data detection for more
information
IS.FILTERED: 1 if tag is filtered by simple filtering (raw value is outside LL HH

bounds), 0 otherwise
IS.FILTERED.FLEX: 1 if tag is filtered by FLEX, 0 otherwise
Example:
CALL GTTAGVAL('TI-001','MEA.VAL',TI_MEAS)
!'TI-001'' is the TAG Name,
!'MEA.VAL' selects the measured value
!TI_MEAS: result variable.
7.3.6 CONVER
This function converts a value from a physical unit to another.

CALL CONVER(VAL1,'PHYSUN1',VAL2,'PHYSUN2')
where:
VAL1: value to be converted and expressed in physical units defined by PHYSUN1
'PHYSUN1': physical units of the value to be converted (VAL1)
VAL2: value converted to the physical units defined by PHYSUN2
'PHYSUN2': physical units to which the value VAL1 must be converted
7.3.7 ENTRY
This function returns the name of the object stored in location NUM of the dictionary of the model file.

CALL ENTRY(NUM,MYVAR)
where:
NUM: the number of the entry to retrieve
MYVAR: variable to store the result (type NAME)
7.3.8 GTSTATUS
This function returns the status of a given object (UNIT or STREAM): If the object is ON, the local
variable STAT will be set to 1, otherwise it will be set to 0.

CALL GTSTATUS ('NAME', 'TYPE' , MYVAR)
where:
'NAME': the name of the object
'TYPE': the type of object ('U' for UNIT, 'S' for STREAM)
MYVAR: variable to store the result (type INTEGER)
This function is particularly useful to adapt the formulation of equations depending on the state of
some UNIT or STREAM. If you don't use the GTSTATUS function, then the equation will not be
generated if any of the objects referred by your code is OFF. This default behaviour can be
deactivated by calling the function NOSTACHK.
7.3.9 GETINFO
This function returns the content of any of the INFOi (i=1...9).

CALL GETINFO ('INFOI', MYVAR)
where:
'INFOI': the info to retrieve (i=1...9)
MYVAR: variable to store the result (type NAME)
Attention: INFOi strings are 80 characters long while NAME variables are only 32 characters long.
Only the 32 first characters will be returned by GETINFO.
7.3.10 PUTINFO
This function sets the content of any of the INFOi (i=1...9).

CALL PUTINFO ('INFOI', MYVAR)
where:
'INFOI': the info to set (i=1...9)
MYVAR: variable that contains the text to set (type NAME). A string can be directly
provided
Attention: PUTINFO cannot be used in report phase.
7.3.11 NOSTACHK
This function deactivates the automatic removal of Flex equations which are referencing a unit or
stream which is OFF.

CALL NOSTACHK
7.3.12 REMOVEEQ
This function removes the current equation, and can only be used for debugging. This is useful
when some equations are linked to a stream or unit which has been set OFF for some reason.

CALL REMOVEEQ
Attention: when ValiEngine analyzes the Flex Code (function by function, line by line), if it sees CALL
REMOVEEQ, the equation is removed in any case, even if there is a "IF" before.
7.3.13 LOCATE
2 functions are available to access internal data of an external model file.
Attention: these functions must be manipulated with great care. We recommend that only highly
experienced VALI users work with those.
LOCATE1:
This function extracts a scalar value described by 4 input parameters from an external model file and
modifies the dictionary of the model file, so that the memory address points to the extracted value.

CALL LOCATE1(RESULT,'INFO','TYPE','ID','NAME')
where
RESULT: the scalar value described by the 4 input parameters
'INFO': one of the reserved keywords:
'STRUCTUR' or 'S': the list of values ; this keyword can only be used with numerical
values of input parameter 'NAME'.
Note: Using the keyword 'STRUCTUR' with the function LOCATE1 has not a lot of
sense, because the function only returns a scalar value (see example below). This
keyword will be useful with the second function.
'DATA' or 'D': the value
'VAL.DAT' or 'VAL.D': the value after validation
'FO.D': the parameter's name
'TYPE': the type of object ('U' for UNIT, 'S' for STREAM, 'R' for RATES or 'C' for
COMPOUND)
'ID': the name of the object
'NAME': either the name of the parameter (i.e. 'T' for Temperature, 'P' for Pressure, 'H'
for Enthalpy,...), or a number corresponding to the index of the parameter in the section of
the model file defined by the 'INFO', 'TYPE' and 'ID' parameters.
Examples:
CALL LOCATE1(TEMP,'D','S','STREAM.1','T')
TEMP=300
In this example, the LOCATE1 function will not only extract the value of the Temperature parameter
of the Stream called "STREAM.1" from a model file, but it will also point to the memory address of the
extracted value. As a result, you can replace the Temperature value in the model file using the second
command.
CALL LOCATE1(TEMP,'D','S','STREAM.1',2)
In this example the LOCATE1 function will return the value of the second parameter of the Stream
called "STREAM.1" (which is the Pressure for a Material Stream for example), together with its
memory address.
CALL LOCATE1(TEMP,'S','S','STREAM.1',2)
This command is exactly the same than the previous one. In this example the LOCATE1 function will
return the second parameter of the list of values of the Stream called "STREAM.1" (which is the
Pressure for a Material Stream for example), together with its memory address.
LOCATEN:
This function extracts a vector of values described by 3 input parameters from an external model file
and modifies the dictionary of the model file, so that the memory address points to the extracted
vector.

CALL LOCATEN(RESULT,'INFO','TYPE','ID')
where
RESULT: the vector described by the 3 input parameters
'INFO': one of the reserved keywords:
'STRUCTUR' or 'S': the list of values ; this keyword can only be used with numerical
values of input parameter 'NAME'.
Attention: When using this keyword, the vector returned by the function LOCATEN has
a predefined structure depending on the type of object selected with input parameter
'TYPE' (see details below)
'DATA' or 'D': the value
'VAL.DAT' or 'VAL.D': the value after validation
'FO.D': the parameter's name
'TYPE': the type of object ('U' for UNIT, 'S' for STREAM, 'R' for RATES or 'C' for
COMPOUND)
'ID': the name of the object
Example:
REAL Struct(60)
CALL LOCATEN(Struct,'S','U',UniNam)
NFI = Struct(1)
CALL ENTRY(Struct(10+1),StrName)
CALL GETVAR(StrName,'T',t1)
CALL ENTRY(Struct(NFI+10+1),StrName)
CALL GETVAR(StrName,'T',t2)
When using the LOCATEN function, it is mandatory to declare the output parameter as a vector
first. Here, we initialize Struct as a vector of real numbers of length 60.
We use the LOCATEN function to extract the vector of parameters of the UNIT which name is stored
in the keyword UniNam , together with their memory address. We define the variable NFI as the first
element of the vector Struc , which is the number of inlet streams when using LOCATEN with inputs
'INFO'='S' and 'TYPE'='U'.
We use the ENTRY function to retrieve the name (StrName is the output of the function) of the 10+1
element of the vector Struct, which is the first inlet stream when using LOCATEN with inputs
'INFO'='S' and 'TYPE'='U'. Then, we use the GETVAR function to retrieve the Temperature of
this stream.
Finally, we use the ENTRY function to retrieve the name (StrName is the output of the function) of the
NFI+10+1 element of the vector Struct, which will be the first outlet stream when using LOCATEN
with inputs 'INFO'='S' and 'TYPE'='U'. Then, we use the GETVAR function to retrieve the
Temperature of this stream.
Content of the vector returned by the LOCATEN function when using the keyword 'STRUCTUR' or
'S' as 'INFO' input, depending on the 'TYPE' of object:
Notes:
When the ">" symbol appears in the table below, it means that the vector's cell contains
the specified value AND its memory address. Otherwise, it just contains the value.
For the UNIT vector, the 14th index doesn't always correspond to the number of Reactions,
it depends on the number of streams connected to the UNIT. For example, if the UNIT has 2
inlets streams and 3 outlets, indexes 11 to 15 will correspond to the streams, and index 16
will be the number of Reactions.
Inde x in ve ctor UNIT STREAM RATE (MIXDAT) COMPOUND
1 Nb of inle t stre ams Nb of parame te rs Nb of parame te rs Nb of parame te rs
2 Nb of outle t - - -
stre ams
3 Nb of parame te rs Nb of parame te rs - > DATA format
4 - - - DATA Rcd
5 Fle x flag (=0 if no Nb of parame te rs - Ind BDTHER

code , =1 if code )
6 > DATA format > DATA format > DATA format Nb Rcd Form
7 DATA Rcd - - Formula Rcd
8 NINF - DATA Rcd Casno
9 INFO Rcd DATA Rcd - Ind CHKTHR
10 FLEX Rcd > Mixdat - Ind CHKTHR
11 > Stre am1 TEXT Rcd > The rmod Ind CHKTHR
12 > Stre am2 - Attribute s AW Rcd Ind CHKTHR
13 ... DATA Rcd Attribute s W Rcd -
14 Nb of Re actions Attribute s AW Rcd Le nght of the -

attribute s re cord
15 > Re action1 Attribute s W Rcd Nb of use d -

attribute s
16 > Re action2 Le nght of the Nb of Re actions -

attribute s re cord
17 ... Nb of use d Re action Rcd -

attribute s
18 - > Granul Nva Re actions -
19 - - TEXT Rcd -
7.4 FLEX FUNCTIONS FOR THERMODYNAMIC CALCULATIONS

7.4.1 SELECT
This function selects a reference stream defining which methods to use for thermodynamic functions.
A reference stream must be defined before functions, like EQPHYS and PROPTY, can be used.

CALL SELECT('NAME' OR I)
where:
The following FLEX variables and arrays are initialized when using the SELECT function:
STRNAM: inlet STREAM name (type NAME)
STTYPE: inlet STREAM type (type NAME)
STRPARNM: inlet STREAM parameters names (array) (type NAME(I))
RATESNAM: associated RATES name.(type NAME)
RATESTYPE: associated RATES type (i.e. : MOL or MASS) (type NAME)
RATPARNM: associated RATES names of the components (array) (type NAME(I))
NUMSUB: number of compounds(type REAL)
SUBTYPE: compounds type (i.e. : EPIC or SOLID) (type NAME(I))
THERMOD: thermodynamic model of STREAM (type NAME)
Example:
CALL SELECT('AFLX-3') ! loads stream AFLX-3 as the reference stream.
7.4.2 EQPHYS
This function computes phase equilibrium. It is necessary to select a reference stream (with the
SELECT function) previously.

CALL EQPHYS(VEC1, VEC2, VAP, LIQ, SOL, LIQ2, 'TYPE')
where:
VEC1: array with stream variables:
VEC1(1): temperature (K)
VEC1(2): pressure (bar)
VEC1(3): vapour fraction (VAPF= (V/V+L))
VEC1(4): not used
VEC1(5): enthalpy flow rate (kW)
VEC1(6): entropy flow rate (kW/K)
VEC2: array with partial molar flow rates of each compound. This array may be initialise d
with a call to GETALL or to GETVAR
VAP: array with a size of at least the number of compounds of the STREAM, including the
partial molar flow rates of the vapour phase after computation (kmol/s)
LIQ: array with a size of at least the number of compounds of the STREAM, including the
partial molar flow rates of the (first) liquid phase after computation (kmol/s)
SOL: array with a size of at least the number of compounds of the STREAM, including the
partial molar flow rates of the solid phase after computation (kmol/s)
LIQ2: array with a size of at least the number of compounds of the STREAM, including the
partial molar flow rates of the (second) liquid phase after computation (kmol/s)
'TYPE': a reserved KEYWORD that defines the type of equilibrium (flash) to perform:
EPT: equilibrium at a given P and T
EPA: equilibrium at a given P and vapour fraction
ETA: equilibrium at a given T and vapour fraction
EHP: equilibrium at a given P and enthalpy
ESP: equilibrium at a given P and entropy
EPTA: Extension of EPT with vapour ratio given as an argument but only used in the
saturation zone of a single component stream, where T and P do not uniquely define
the stream state
The number of phases to be taken into account for the equilibrium computation is set with the
variable STTYPE, initialised by SELECT from the type defined for the stream in the model file.
It is possible to change it to compute other flash types: V, L, S, LV, LL, LLV, WL, WLV.
Attention:
1. It is mandatory to give initial values to variables used with the flash type defined; others can be
given as initial values.
2. The STRPAR array created by the GETALL (or GETVAR) subroutine has the same structure and
may be used as the first argument for EQPHYS.
7.4.3 PROPTY
This function computes physical and thermodynamic properties. It is necessary to select a reference
stream (with the SELECT function) previously.
CALL PROPTY('FUNCTION', T, P, VEC1, MYVAR)
where:
'FUNCTION' : one of the reserved keywords that defines the requested computation:
TOTMAS: total mass flow rate (kg/s)
TOTMOL: total molar flow rate (kmol/s)
MOLFRA: molar ratios (mol/mol)
MASFRA: mass ratios (kg/kg)
MOLDRY: molar ratios of dry gases
MASFLW: partial mass flow rates (kg/s)
HFLOW: enthalpy flow (kW)
HFLOWTOT: enthalpy flow including upper heating value (kW)
LHVWT: lower heating value (weight basis) (kJ/kg)
LHVMOL: lower heating value (molar basis) (kJ/kmol)
HFORM: standard enthalpy of formation on molar basis (kJ/kmol)
HFORMTOT: standard enthalpy of formation (kW)
for vapour phase properties:
VG: volumetric flow rate (m3/s)
HG: enthalpy flow rate (kW)
GG: free energy flow rate (kW)
SG: entropy flow rate (kW/K)
CPG: thermal capacity of stream (kW/K)
CONG: thermal conductivity (kW/m/K)
VISG: dynamic viscosity (kg/m/s)
SONG: speed of sound (m/s)
FUGG: fugacity of components (bar)
for liquid phase properties:
VL: volumetric flow rate (m3/s)
HL: enthalpy flow rate (kW)
GL: free energy flow rate (kW)
SL: entropy flow rate (kW/K)
CPL: thermal capacity of stream (kW/K)
CONL: thermal conductivity (kW/m/K)
VISL: dynamic viscosity (kg/m/s)
SONL: speed of sound (m/s)
FUGL: fugacity of components (bar)
for solid phase properties:
VS: volumetric flow rate (m3/s)
HS: enthalpy flow rate (kW)
GS: free energy flow rate (kW)
SS: entropy flow rate (kW/K)
CPS: thermal capacity of stream (kW/K)
CONS: thermal conductivity (kW/m/K)
FUGS: fugacity of components (bar)
T: temperature (K)
P: pressure (bar)
VEC1: array with partial molar flow rates of compounds (kmol/s). When calculating
properties for a given phase of a multiphase flow, the array VEC1 must contain the rates of
the corresponding phase. These rates can be calculated using the EQPHYS function
MYVAR: variable to store the result (type REAL). It is an array with a size of at least the
number of compounds when requesting for function of composition or fugacity.
7.5 FLEX FUNCTIONS USED IN FILTERING
The following functions are only available in the filtering phase. They cannot be used in the
calculation or report phase.
7.5.1 SETOFF
This routine sets an object (UNIT or STREAM) to OFF.

CALL SETOFF('NAME', 'TYPE')
where:
'NAME': the name of the object to set OFF
'TYPE': the type of object ('UNIT' or 'U' for a unit, 'STREAM' or 'S' for a STREAM)
7.5.2 SETAGVAL
This function changes values linked to a tag. The tag will be considered as filtered.

CALL SETAGVAL('TAGNAME','VALUE',MYVAR OR VALUE)
where:
'TAGNAME': the name of the tag
MEA.ACC: the measured accuracy (a negative value can be used, indicating relative
uncertainty)
COMPENS: the compensation factor
BIAS: the compensation bias
AREF, BREF, CREF: the compensation parameters Aref, Bref and Cref
7.5.3 PUTAGVAL
This routine works similarly as the SETAGVAL routine but the tag will not be considered as filtered.

CALL PUTAGVAL('TAGNAME','VALUE',MYVAR OR VALUE)
where:
'TAGNAME': the name of the tag
MEA.ACC: the measured accuracy (a negative value can be used, indicating relative
uncertainty)
COMPENS: the compensation factor
BIAS: the compensation bias
AREF, BREF, CREF: the compensation parameters Aref, Bref and Cref
7.5.4 SETNOEQ
This routine removes the corresponding equation from the Flex code associated to a FLXVAL units.

CALL SETNOEQ('NAME', 'EQI')
where:
'NAME': the name of the object
'EQI': the name of the e quation (i=1 9)
Example:
FUNCTION FILTER
CALL GTTAGVAL('TI-001','MEA.VAL',T1)
IF ( T1 < 283 ) THEN
CALL SETOFF('E-1','UNIT')
CALL SETNOEQ('FLX-1','EQ1')
ELSE
T2=T1+10
CALL SETAGVAL('TI-004','MEA.VAL',T2)
CALL SETAGVAL('TI-004','MEA.ACC',5)
ENDIF
END.
SECTION 8: USING FLEX FOR DEFINING KINETICS

The FLEX language can also be used to define the kinetic equation and the reaction enthalpy by using
a program linked to the reactor's model. To avoid any interference with other FLEX applications, this
kinetic description has to be given in a FLEX function that has the same name as the simulated
reactor. This function can appear in after an another FLEX program associated to the reactor.
There are two ways to use FLEX program. It can be used interpreted or compiled. The choice has to
be made in the OPTVAL module. If compiled is chosen it still possible to use interpreted FLEX. For
that, the comment !NOCOMPILE has to be included just under the instruction FUNCTION
identifying the kinetic. The compiled FLEX is faster than the interpreted one.
Before the execution of the FLEX program, some variables (like temperature, pressure and
composition) are created and initialised. They allow data exchange between the reactor resolution
module and the FLEX program that will evaluate the kinetic. The reactions are first calculated using
the kinetic parameters defined with the reaction. The FLEX code is then executed, giving the chance
to the user to change some or all the reaction velocities.
The following variables are automatically created and are available as input for the calculations:
TK: absolute temperature (K)
PBAR: absolute pressure (bar)
NCOMP: number of compounds
NREA: number of reactions
F, Z, PPART, X or C: composition variables (dimension NCOMP); only the variables

selected for the Equilibrium and Velocity methods (parameters ETYPE and VTYPE) of the
first reaction are available (see also the section "The Reactions")
KEQ: equilibrium constants Ki (dimension NREA)
Kin: kinetic constants Ki' (dimension NREA)
The following variables are automatically created and can be overwritten by the Flex code:
R: reaction velocities Ri (kmol/m³/s or kmol/kgcata/s) (dimension NREA)
DHR: reaction enthalpies at the system temperature (kJ/kmol) (dimension NREA)
An example is shown with the RKIVAL example.
CHAPTER 8
SIMULATION
UNITS VIII
SECTION 1: COL010 : DISTILLATION COLUMN
PURPOSE
This is an approximate calculation method for a distillation column based on the Fenske, Underwood
and Gilliland equations. This model can be used in simulation or in design mode.
SYMBOLS AND CONNECTION RULES
Inle t STREAMS 1 Fe e d: Mate rial Stre am of any state (Liquid, Liquid/Vapour, …)
2 Re boile r duty: optional the rmal stre am
Outle t STREAMS 1 Distillate : Mate rial Stre am with LV state
2 Bottoms: Mate rial Stre am with LV state
3 Conde nse r duty: optional the rmal stre am
All material streams must be based on the same Thermod.
KPRINT Input Print-out Level
MODE Input Calculation Mode
COND Input Condenser Type
KEYi Input Key Compounds (i=1,2)
FRACi Measurable Key Compound Fractions (can be manipulated by a controller)
REFLRAT Input/Result Reflux Ratio
RSRMIN Input Actual/Min Reflux ratioC
THPLAT Input/Result Theoretical plates Number
MINPLAT Result Min. plates # (Total reflux)
FEEDPLAT Input/Result Feed plate
CONDLOAD Result Condenser Load
REBLOAD Result Reboiler Load
UNIT PARAMETERS
Controls the amount of information printed in the trace file.
1 Simulation mode .
2 De sign by the e quations of Fe nske , Unde rwood and Gilliland, fe e d plate chose n by the Fe nske
e quation.
3 De sign by the e quations of Fe nske , Unde rwood and Gilliland, fe e d plate chose n by the Kirbride
e quation.
4 De sign by the e quations of Fe nske , He ngste be ck and McCabe -Thie le .
COND Input Condenser Type
0 Total conde nse r.
1 Partial conde nse r.
KEYi Input Key Compounds (i=1,2)
FRACi Measurable Key Compound Fractions (can be manipulated by a controller)
These parameters are displayed in the Others page. They indicate the fractions of the key compounds
that are recovered in the distillat.
In simulation mode only the FRAC1 parameter is used as input.
REFLRAT Input/Result Reflux Ratio
The reflux ratio is defined as the ratio between the reflux and the distillate molar flow rates.
RSRMIN Input Actual/Min Reflux ratioC
This is the ratio between the actual and the minimum reflux ratio
THPLAT Input/Result Theoretical plates Number
The number of theoretical is used as input in simulation mode. It will be calculated in the design
modes
MINPLAT Result Min. plates # (Total reflux)
This parameter is the minimum number of plates (at total reflux)
FEEDPLAT Input/Result Feed plate
The feed plate number is used as input in simulation mode. It will be calculated in the design modes
CONDLOAD Result Condenser Load
REBLOAD Result Reboiler Load
SECTION 2: CTL010 : SINGLE VARIABLE

CONTROLLER
PURPOSE
The CTL010 unit is a controller involving one controlled variable and one manipulated variable.
These variables must be defined as Tags. For the controlled variable, the measured value of the Tag
will be used as set points.
For control loops involving several variables, you should use units of type CTL020 or OPT070.
Please note that, as any other convergence unit, the CTL010 unit should be the last unit of the
sequence defined by a Simulation PFD.
You cannot connect any stream to a CTL010 unit.
FLASH Input Stream Initialisation Mode
ITMAX Input Maximum number of iterations
EPSX Input Precision asked on the manipulated variable
EPSF Input Precision asked on the controlled variable
TEST Input Threshold value between relative and absolute precision tests on
variables
DXMAX Input Maximum variation (absolute value) of the variable at an iteration
DX0 Input Initial variation of the variable (for 1st iteration)
DFMAX Input Maximum ratio of the functions at two points for the secant method
DF0 Input Ratio used when the function ratio at two points is higher than DFMAX
DEFINING THE CONTROL LOOP

The controlled and manipulated variables are defined via the Control Tags page of the Unit
Notebook. The list of existing Tags is shown in the Tags Defined list. You can use the Mask field to
limit the number of tags displayed in this list. A simple control loops involves two variables:
the controlled variable , for which a se t-point is spe cifie d via the Tag associate d to the variable . The
following type s of Tags are supporte d:
Mate rial Stre ams T, P, VAPF, MIXF, H, MOLF, MASSF, VOLF, Partial Flowrate s, MF, WF, MG,
WG
The rmal Stre ams LOAD
Me chanical Stre ams POWER
Units Any me asurable output parame te r
the manipulated variable which will be tune d in such a way that the controlle d variable re ache s the give n
se t-point. The me asure d value associate d to the TAG de fining the manipulate d variable is not use d, but its
safe ty bounds (SL and SH) will be use d as lowe r and uppe r bounds. The following type s of Tags are
supporte d:
Mate rial Stre ams T, P, VAPF, MIXF, H, MOLF, MASSF, Partial Flowrate s
Note: Some of the unit parameters can be either input (given) or output (result) depending on their
MODE of operation.
UNIT PARAMETERS
FLASH Input Stream Initialisation Mode
When the manipulated variable belongs to a material stream, the parameter FLASH indicates how to
reinitialise the stream:
-1 Stre am state is not calculate d
0 Mate rial balance only; the stre am e nthalpy is se t to -1
1 Stre am state is base d on its pre ssure and te mpe rature (EPT)
2 Stre am state is base d on its pre ssure and vapour fraction (EPA)
3 Stre am state is base d on its te mpe rature and vapour fraction (ETA)
4 Stre am state is base d on its e nthalpy and pre ssure (EPH)
5 Stre am state is calculate d according to its own initialisation mode
Maximum number of iterations.
If ITMAX = 0 the n ITMAX is se t to 30.
If ITMAX > 0 the n ITMAX is the maximum numbe r of ite rations : The simulation is stoppe d if
conve rge nce is not achie ve d within ITMAX ite rations.
If ITMAX < 0 The simulation proce e ds e ithe r at conve rge nce , or afte r |ITMAX| ite rations.
EPSX Input Precision asked on the manipulated variable
If EPSX <= 0 , default value is 1.D-04
EPSF Input Precision asked on the controlled variable
If EPSF <= 0 , default value is 1.D-05
TEST Input Threshold value between relative and absolute precision tests on
variables
If TEST < 0, default value = .01
DXMAX Input Maximum variation (absolute value) of the variable at an iteration
If DXMAX <= 0 , a default value=.75*(TEST+X).
DX0 Input Initial variation of the variable (for 1st iteration)
If DX0 = 0 , a default value =.25*(TEST+X).
Sugge ste d value s : molar flowrate : -0.15
pre ssure : 0.02
DFMAX Input Maximum ratio of the functions at two points for the secant method
If DFMAX <= 0 , a default value is considered.
DF0 Input Ratio used when the function ratio at two points is higher than DFMAX
If DF0<= 0, a default value is considered.
SECTION 3: CTL020 : MULTI-VARIABLES

CONTROLLER
PURPOSE
The CTL020 unit is a controller involving up to five controlled variables and the same number of
manipulated variable. These variables must be defined as Tags. For the controlled variables, the
measured values of the Tag will be used as set points.
For single variable control loops, you should use units of type CTL010.
Please note that, as any other convergence unit, the CTL020 unit should be the last unit of the
sequence defined by a Simulation PFD.
You cannot connect any stream to a CTL020 unit.
NVAR Input Number of variables
DX0i Input Value of the disturbance of the variable (i=1,5)
FLASHi Input Stream Initialisation Mode (i=1,5)
EPSi Input Precision required for the controlled variable (i=1,5)
DEFINING THE CONTROL LOOP

The controlled and manipulated variables are defined via the Control Tags page of the Unit
Notebook. The list of existing Tags is shown in the Tags Defined list. You can use the Mask field to
limit the number of tags displayed in this list. A simple control loops involves two variables:
the controlled variable , for which a se t-point is spe cifie d via the Tag associate d to the variable . The
following type s of Tags are supporte d:
Mate rial Stre ams T, P, VAPF, MIXF, H, MOLF, MASSF, VOLF, Partial Flowrate s, MF, WF, MG,
WG
the manipulated variable which will be tune d in such a way that the controlle d variable re ache s the give n
se t-point. The me asure d value associate d to the TAG de fining the manipulate d variable is not use d, but its
safe ty bounds (SL and SH) will be use d as lowe r and uppe r bounds. The following type s of Tags are
supporte d:
Mate rial Stre ams T, P, VAPF, MIXF, H, MOLF, MASSF, Partial Flowrate s
MODE of operation.
UNIT PARAMETERS
ITMAX = 0 the n ITMAX is se t to 20.
ITMAX > 0 The simulation is stoppe d if conve rge nce is not achie ve d within ITMAX ite rations.
ITMAX < 0 The simulation proce e ds e ithe r at conve rge nce , or afte r |ITMAX| ite rations.
Specifies the number of variables actually controlled. If more tags are defined in the Control Tags
page, they will be ignored.
DX0i Input Value of the disturbance of the variable (i=1,5)
If DX0i < 0 |DX0i| is the fraction by which the variable will be varie d for calculating the de rivative
If DX0i > 0 |DX0i| is the value by which the variable will be varie d for calculating the de rivative
When the manipulated variable belongs to a material stream, the parameter FLASHi indicates how
to reinitialise the stream:
EPSi Input Precision required for the controlled variable (i=1,5)
EPSi = 0 de fault value is 1.D-04
EPSi < 0 the pre cision is give n on a re lative basis (fraction)
EPSi > 0 EPSi is the pre cision on an absolute basis
SECTION 4: CUT010 : UTILITY TO CUT STREAMS
PURPOSE
Utily that handles the cuts for OPT070 convergence promoter.
Up to 10 streams can be handled simultaneously.
Convergence promotion on molar enthalpy is preferred to promotion on temperature, so as to avoid

problems in case of a phase change in a single component mixture (pure compound). Estimated
values for the torn variables are provided in the outlet STREAMS according to the situation. The
process is then calculated to generate process answers that are available in the inlet STREAMS.
The CUT010 UNIT must be the last UNIT in a Simulation PFD. This simulation PFD must be a sub-
PFD of the PFD containing the OPT070 optimiser unit.
The maximum number of torn variables is equal to 100.
Inle t STREAMS Maximum numbe r : 10.
Any type may be use d.
Outle t STREAMS Maximum numbe r : 10.
Any type may be use d.
Corresponding inlet and outlet streams must be of the same type. In addition, corresponding
material streams must use the same Thermod.
TEARTYi Input Tear type for inlet stream i
UNIT PARAMETERS
1 Only the total molar flowrate is torn.
2 Only the molar e nthalpy is torn.
3 The total molar flowrate and molar e nthalpy are torn.
4 The molar compositions are torn.
5 The partial molar flow rate s and the molar e nthalpy are torn.
6 The partial molar flow rate s and the te mpe rature are torn.
7 The partial molar flow rate s are torn.
8 LOAD
9 POWER
SECTION 5: FUR010 : FURNACE
PURPOSE
FUR010 calculates the heat and mass balances of a burner. Optionally a stream can be heated up by
the fumes. Various modes are available to determine the air flow rate.
Inle t STREAMS 1 Air Fe e d: mate rial stre am bringing the oxyge n
2 Fue l Fe e d: mate rial stre am bringing the fue l
3 optional mate rial stre am to be he ate d up by the fume s
Outle t STREAMS 1 Fume s: mate rial stre am
2 optional mate rial stre am he ate d up by the fume s
MODEXC Input Air Flow Calculation Mode
MODECAL Input Calculation Mode
SETPOINT Measurable Air excess or fumes O2/CO2 contents(can be manipulated)
TFUMES Measurable Outlet temperature of the fumes (can be manipulated)
TOUT Measurable Outlet temperature of the fluid (can be manipulated)
ALFOUT Measurable Fluid outlet vapour fraction (can be manipulated)
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODEXC Input Air Flow Calculation Mode
0 The air flow rate is give n in the Air inle t stre am
1 SETPOINT on the air e xce ss
2 SETPOINT on the O2 conte nt in fume s
3 SETPOINT on the CO2 conte nt in dry fume s
4 SETPOINT on the CO2 conte nt in fume s
For MODEXC = 1..4, the flow rate of the Air inlet stream will be calculated.
MODECAL Input Calculation Mode
BURNER MODES
MODECAL = 0 The fue l and air compositions, the ir te mpe rature s and the fue l flowrate s are give n.
The adiabatic te mpe rature and the composition of the fume s are calculate d
according to the spe cifie d Air Flowrate Calculation Mode .
MODECAL = 3 Mass balance mode .
The fue l and air composition, and the fue l flow rate are give n.
The composition of the fume s is calculate d according to the spe cifie d Air Flowrate
Calculation Mode .
FURNACE MODES
MODECAL = 1 The fue l and air compositions, and the ir te mpe rature s are give n. The flowrate of the
stre am to be he ate d is also give n along with its inle t and outle t te mpe rature s. The
fume s outle t te mpe rature is spe cifie d.
The fume s composition and fue l flowrate , are calculate d according to the spe cifie d
Air Flowrate Calculation Mode .
MODECAL = 2 The fue l and air compositions, and the ir te mpe rature s are give n. The flowrate of the
stre am to be he ate d is also give n along with its inle t te mpe rature and its outle t
vapour fraction. The fume s outle t te mpe rature is spe cifie d.
The fume s composition and fue l flowrate are calculate d according to the spe cifie d
Air Flowrate Calculation Mode .
SETPOINT Measurable Air excess or fumes O2/CO2 contents(can be manipulated)
The SETPOINT is used for controlling the air flow rate, according to the Air Flow Rate Calculation
Mode defined by the MODEXC parameter. When MODEXC = 0, the air flowrate is given in the air
Stream.
TFUMES Measurable Outlet temperature of the fumes (can be manipulated)
Outlet temperature of the fumes (MODCAL=1,2)
TOUT Measurable Outlet temperature of the fluid (can be manipulated)
Outlet temperature of the fluid (MODCAL=1)
ALFOUT Measurable Fluid outlet vapour fraction (can be manipulated)
Fluid outlet vapour fraction (MODCAL=2), the state corresponds to the bubble point or dew point
respectively if ALFOUT is equal to 0 or 1.
SECTION 6: HTX010 : HEAT TRANSFER
PURPOSE
Calculates the energy balance and the heat transfer of a heat exchanger using a global HA factor:
LOAD = HA.DTLM
Where: DTLM is the logarithmic average temperature difference between the two streams.
There are two inlet streams and two outlet streams. The temperatures, pressures and compositions
of both inlets are known. Various design and simulation modes are available. In simulation mode,
the heat transfer coefficient and the pressure drops can be made linked to the flow rates.
Inle t stre ams 2 Mate rial stre ams (any state )
Outle t stre ams 2 Mate rial stre ams (any state )
Corresponding inlet and outlet streams must use the same Thermod
HA0 Input Tube resistance (Conduction coefficient)
EPST Input Precision on T
EPSHA Input Precision on HA
HACALC Result Overall heat transfer
LOAD Result Computed Heat Load
DP_i Measurable Reference pressure drop for side i
DPMASSi Input Reference mass flow rate for side i
DPEXPi Input Exponent for flow rate dependence in side i
DPROi Input Reference density for side i
HA_i Input Reference heat transfer coefficient for side i
HMASSi Input Reference mass flow rate for side i
HEXPi Input Exponent for flow rate dependence in side i
TOUTi Measurable Outlet temperature of stream i
ALFOUTi Measurable Outlet vapour fraction of stream i
UNIT PARAMETERS
In design modes, the Heat Transfer Factor HA is calculated in order to match various set-points:
The flow rate of the first inlet stream is always kept.
MODE=1 Specified: Flow2, Tout1 Calculated: Tout2, HA
MODE=2 Specified: Flow2, ALFout1 Calculated: Tout2, HA
MODE=7 Specified: Tout1, ALFout2 Calculated: Flow2, HA
MODE=8 Specified: Tout1, Tout2 Calculated: Flow2, HA
MODE=9 Specified: Flow2, ALFout1 Calculated: Tout2, HA
MODE=10 Specified: ALFout1, ALFout2 Calculated: Flow2, HA
MODE=11 Specified: ALFout1, Tout2 Calculated: Flow2, HA
In simulation mode, the Heat Transfer Factor HA is calculated on basis of the following formula:
1 1 1 1
------ = ----- + ----------------------------- + -----------------------------
HACALC HA0 HA_1 (MASSF1/HMASS1)HEXP1 HA_2 (MASSF2/HMASS2)HEXP2
In all cases, except MODE=0 (true simulation), the flow rate of the second stream will be adjusted in
order to match various conditions on the first or second outlet stream state.
MODE=0 Specified: HA, Flow2 Calculated: Tout1, Tout2
MODE=3 Specified: HA, Tout1 Calculated: Flow2, Tout2
MODE=4 Specified: HA, ALFout1 Calculated: Flow2, Tout2
MODE=5 Specified: HA, Tout2 Calculated: Flow2, Tout1
MODE=6 Specified: HA, ALFout2 Calculated: Flow2, Tout1
HA0 Input Tube resistance (Conduction coefficient)
This parameter is used as input in simulation mode
If HA0 <= 0, the tube thermal resistance is neglected
EPST Input Precision on T
Relative precision on temperature.
If EPST <= 0, the default value 1.D-04 is used.
EPSHA Input Precision on HA
Relative precision on HA.
If EPSHA <= 0, the default value 1.D-04 is used.
If ITMAX <= 0, the default value 30 is used.
HACALC Result Overall heat transfer
In design mode, this parameter is adjusted to get the required stream outlet conditions.
In simulation mode, this parameter is calculated on basis of the various thermal resistances.
LOAD Result Computed Heat Load
This parameter is always calculated.
DP_i Measurable Reference pressure drop for side i
DPMASSi Input Reference mass flow rate for side i
DPEXPi Input Exponent for flow rate dependence in side i
DPROi Input Reference density for side i
These parameters are used in all modes to calculate the pressure drop on each side, according to the
following rules:
If DP_i < 0 the oule t stre am pre ssure is se t to |DP_i|
If DP_i = 0 the oule t stre am pre ssure is e qual to the inle t pre ssure
If DP_i > 0 the oule t stre am pre ssure is calculate d as:
POUTi = PINi - DP_i (MASSFi/DPMASSi)DPEXPi (DPROi/ROi)
HA_i Input Reference heat transfer coefficient for side i
HMASSi Input Reference mass flow rate for side i
HEXPi Input Exponent for flow rate dependence in side i
These parameters are used in the simulation modes to calculate the heat transfer factor.
TOUTi Measurable Outlet temperature of stream i
ALFOUTi Measurable Outlet vapour fraction of stream i
Depending on the calculation MODE, these parameters will be used to specify the required conditions
for the outlet streams.
SECTION 7: HTX040 : HEAT EXCHANGER
PURPOSE
The HTX040 UNIT simulates a heat exchanger where fumes going through the heating flue are
heating a gas or a liquid flowing through tubes (co-current or counter current flow exchanger).
Vaporisation can be performed in the tubes. These can either be smooth or finned tubes.
Inle t STREAMS 1 Fume s: mate rial stre am (V or LV state )
2 Fluid to be he ate d up (any state )
Outle t STREAMS 1 Fume s: mate rial stre am (LV)
2 He ate d up fluid (LV)
Corresponding inlet and outlet streams must use the same Thermod.
BANKTYP Input Bundle Type
HTXTYP Input Exchange type
FINTYPE Input Type of Fins
NTUBES Input Number of Tubes
NTUBPASS Input Number of Tubes Passes
LENGTH Input Layer Length
DEXT Input Tube Outside Diameter
DIN Input Tube Inside Diameter
CONDTUB Input Thermal Conductivity of Tubes
HPITCH Input Horizontal Pitch
FT Input Fin Thickness
NFM Input Number of Fins Per Unit Length
FD Input Fin External Diameter
CFH Input Correction Factor For Heat Transfer Coefficient
CFDPFLUE Input Correction Factor For Pressure Drop on Fumes Side
CFDPTUBE Input Correction Factor For Pressure Drop in Tubes
NLAYER Input Number of Layers
EPS Input Relative Precision
UNIT PARAMETERS
BANKTYP Input Bundle Type
1 Smooth tube s se t out in a row
2 Smooth tube s se t out in alte rnate rows
3 Finne d tube s se t out in a row
4 Finne d tube s se t out in alte rnate rows
HTXTYP Input Exchange type
1 Co-Curre nt Flow Exchange r
2 Counte r-Curre nt Flow Exchange r
FINTYPE Input Type of Fins
1 Fins of Constant Thickne ss
2 Fins of Variable Thickne ss
Total amount of tubes.
Tubes are assembled in parallel planes called LAYERS.
NTUBPASS Input Number of Tubes Passes
The ratio NTUBES/NTUBPASS must be an integer.
The number of tube passes is equal to 1 if the tubes are independent. When the tubes go through
different layers through connections between layers, then the number of tube passes will then be
equal to the number of connections + 1.
LENGTH Input Layer Length
DEXT Input Tube Outside Diameter
DIN Input Tube Inside Diameter
Attention:
1. The number of inlet tubes in the exchanger = NTUBES / NTUBPASS
2. The total length of a tube is equal to LENGTH * NTUBPASS
3. The total exchange surface area is equal to PI * DEXT * LENGTH * NTUBES.
CONDTUB Input Thermal Conductivity of Tubes
If CONDTUB <= 0, then the tubes thermal resistance is neglected.
HPITCH Input Horizontal Pitch
FT Input Fin Thickness
NFM Input Number of Fins Per Unit Length
FD Input Fin External Diameter
CFH Input Correction Factor For Heat Transfer Coefficient
CFDPFLUE Input Correction Factor For Pressure Drop on Fumes Side
CFDPTUBE Input Correction Factor For Pressure Drop in Tubes
These parameters allow tuning the correlations so as to match the actual operation of the equipment.
If a negative value is entered, then the default value 1.0 will be used.
The number of layers must always be such that the ratio NLAYER/NTUBPASS is an integer value.
Relative precision required at convergence between the actual exchange surface and the calculated
surface.
If EPS <= 0, the default value 1.E-3 is used.
SECTION 8: HTX050 : FURNACE TO HEAT UP A GAS
PURPOSE
The HTX050 UNIT is a furnace simulation model used to heat up a gas.
The fuel is liquid or gaseous and its combustion is complete.
The necessary air flowrate is calculated according to the calculation mode for the excess air
(MODEXC).
Fuel combustion is described by chemical reactions.
The fuel is assumed to be fully burned.
Inle t STREAMS A minimum of 3 inle t stre ams is re quire d (maximum 10).
The re type must be MAT.
Any STREAM State may be use d.
(1) : Air fe e d.
(2) : Fue l.
(3) to (10) : Gas(e s) to be he ate d up.
Outle t STREAMS A minimum of 2 outle t stre ams is re quire d (maximum 9).
The ir type must be MAT.
Any STREAM State may be use d.
(1) : Fume s
(2) to (9) : He ate d gas.
The THERMOD associated with the fumes must be made up of all the Compounds which are present
in the air as well as in the fuel.
The THERMOD associated to the nth inlet STREAM must be identical to the one associated to the (n-1)
th outlet STREAM.
UNIT PARAMETERS
LTUB Input TUBE LENGTH
DEXT Input TUBE OUTSIDE DIAMETER
DINT Input TUBE INSIDE DIAMETER
COND Input THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY
If COND <= 0, then the tubes thermal resistance is ignored.
FCHINT Input CORREC. FACTOR FOR TRANSFER COEFFICIENT
MODEXC Input AIR Flow calculation mode
AIREXC - Exce ss of air in re lation to ne utral combustion.
O2 - O2 conte nt in the fume s.
MGO2 - O2 conte nt in the fume s on dry-basis.
CO2 - CO2 conte nt in the fume s.
MGCO2 - CO2 conte nt in the fume s on dry-basis.
SETPOINT Input SETPOINT FOR AIR EXECESS
MODECAL Input COMPUTATION MODE
Since the objective is to determine :
The outlet temperature of the gas produced by a fixed fuel feed
or the fuel feed required to heat a gas at a given temperature,
two calculation (Computation) modes are available :
MODECAL = 1 - Se t fue l flowrate .
MODECAL = 2 - Se t one gas outle t te mpe rature .
PARCAL1 Input Order of the outlet stream
if MODECAL = 2
PARCAL2 Input Outlet temperature
if MODECAL = 2
GEOMFACT Input GEOMETRIC FACTOR FOR HEAT TRANSFER COEFFICIENT
The heat exchange occurs by radiation and depends on the furnace type which is expressed by the
GEOMFACT parameter defined by the equation :
Q = GEOMFACT . SIGMA . AREA . (TFUMES^4 . TWALL^4)
SIGMA = 5.667E-11 (kJ/S/m2/K^4)
EPS Input RELATIVE PRECISION
Relative precision required with regard to thermal load of exchanger.
If EPS <= 0, EPS = 1.D-04 is taken.
DATA FOR THE DIFFERENT GASES TO BE HEATED TABLE :
Tube s - Total numbe r of tube s for input STREAM i+2.
Fe e d - Numbe r of inle t tube s for input i+2.
Pre s. Drop - Re fe re nce pre ssure drop for input stre am (i+2).
DPi<0 -
DPi=0 - no pre ssure drop
DPi<0 - Pouti = Pini - DPi * (MASSFi/DPMASSi)² * DPROi/ROi
Mass Flow - Re fe re nce mass flowrate for pre ssure drop (kg/s).
If DMASSi = 0 - no flowrate de pe nde ncy.
If DMASSi < 0 - first value of mass flowrate will be save d as re fe re nce value for ne xt
simulation.
Spe cif. Mass - Re fe re nce spe cific mass (kg/m3) for Pouti.
If DROi = 0 - no de nsity de pe nde ncy.
If DROi < 0 - the first value of spe cific mass will be save d as re fe re nce value for
the ne xt simulation.
Wall Te mp. - Tube wall te mpe rature for input STREAM i+2.
He at Load - He at load give n to input STREAM i+2.
SECTION 9: HTX060 : BOILER WITH ASSOCIATED

DRUM
PURPOSE
The HTX060 UNIT is simulation model for a boiler with an associated drum.
The fuel is liquid or gaseous and its combustion, as defined in the chemical reactions, is complete. The
necessary air flowrate is calculated according to the calculation mode of the excess of air (MODEXC).
The vapour fraction at the outlet of the vaporiser loop or the circulation flow rate in the vaporiser
loop is a simulation parameter to be set. The heat transfer is calculated on basis of radiation between
the fumes and the tubes.
Inle t STREAMS 1 Air Fe e d: mate rial stre am bringing the oxyge n (any state )
2 Fue l Fe e d: mate rial stre am bringing the fue l (any state )
3 Fe e d Wate r to be vaporise d
Outle t STREAMS 1 Fume s: mate rial stre am
2 Saturate d vapour stre am: mate rial stre am
3 Purge : mate rial stre am
The THERMOD associated with the fumes must, at least, contain all compounds that are present in
the air as well as in the fuel.
The water feed stream, the saturated vapour stream and the purge must use the same THERMOD
and this THERMOD must contain only one compound.
MODEXC Input Air flow calculation mode
MODECAL Input Computation mode
NTUBES Input Number of tubes
NPASSES Input Number of passes
LENGTH Input Tubes length
DEXT Input Tube outside diameter
DINT Input Tube inside diameter
COND Input Tube Thermal conductivity
GEOMFACT Input Geometric factor for heat transfer coefficient
STEAMP Input Drum pressure (can be manipulated)
CIRCFLOW Input Flow rate in the vaporiser (can be manipulated)
ALF Input Outlet vapour fraction (can be manipulated)
SETPOINT Input Air excess or fumes O2/CO2 contents (can be manipulated)
PURGE Input Purge as a fraction of feed water (can be manipulated)
CFH Input Heat transfer correction factor (can be manipulated)
EPS Input Relative precision for thermal balance
UNIT PARAMETERS
1 Air e xce ss (vs. stoichiome tric combustion)
2 O2 conte nt in the fume s
3 CO2 conte nt in the fume s
4 CO2 conte nt in the fume s on dry-basis
MODECAL Input Computation mode
1 Fixe d fe e d wate r flow rate
2 Fixe d fue l flow rate
NPASSES Input Number of passes
DEXT Input Tube outside diameter
DINT Input Tube inside diameter
Note: The total exchange surface AREA is equal to PI * DEXT * LENGTH * NTUBES.
COND Input Tube Thermal conductivity
If COND <= 0, then the tubes thermal resistance is ignored.
GEOMFACT Input Geometric factor for heat transfer coefficient
The heat exchange is controlled by radiation:
LOAD = CFH . GEOMFACT . σ . AREA . (TFUMES^4 - TWALL^4)
Where : σ is the Boltzmann constant (5.667 10-8 W/m2 K4)
STEAMP Input Drum pressure (can be manipulated)
If STEAMP <= 0, the feed water pressure is used.
CIRCFLOW Input Flow rate in the vaporiser (can be manipulated)
If CIRCFLOW <= 0, or if it is too low, the flow rate in the vaporiser loop is calculated in order to
match the specified outlet vapour fraction (ALF).
ALF Input Outlet vapour fraction (can be manipulated)
This parameter is used only if CIRCFLOW is too low or <= 0.
If ALF <= 0, the default value 0.5 is used.
SETPOINT Input Air excess or fumes O2/CO2 contents (can be manipulated)
The SETPOINT is used for controlling the air flow rate, according to the air flow calculation mode
defined by the MODEXC parameter.
PURGE Input Purge as a fraction of feed water (can be manipulated)
Fraction of the feed water flow rate which is extracted through the purge outlet stream.
CFH Input Heat transfer correction factor (can be manipulated)
This parameter is a correction factor of the heat transfer coefficients inside the tubes.
EPS Input Relative precision for thermal balance
If EPS <= 0, the default value 10-4 is used.
SECTION 10: HTX070 : SHELL AND TUBES HEAT

EXCHANGER
PURPOSE
The HTX070 is a rigorous simulation model of a shell and tubes heat-exchanger device used in
vaporiser, condenser or traditional heat exchange mode. The exchanger is basically a counter-current
exchanger with possibly several tube passes and/or baffles. The heated fluid can either go through
the tubes or through the shell.
When a shift phase does occur, the exchanger is divided up into 4 sections (a section being defined as
a zone without phase change) and is calculated section after section. The heat load in each zone is
calculated as:
Q = Ui.Ai.F.DTLMi
Whe re : Ui Transfe r coe fficie nt for the conside re d se ction de fine d by :
1/Ui = FF + 1/(CFH.Uci)
Uci Cle an he at transfe r coe fficie nt as compute d from corre lations (kW/(K.m²))
FF Fouling factor to be ide ntifie d.
CFH Corre ction coe fficie nt to be ide ntifie d.
Ai He at Transfe r are a for the conside re d se ction (compute d).
F Factor of de viation from counte r-flow rate , according to the numbe r of passe s
at the tube s and she ll.
DTLMi Log Me an Te mpe rature Diffe re nce for the conside re d se ction.
Inle t STREAMS 1 Material stream (any state) circulating through the shell
2 Material stream (any state) circulating through the tubes
Outle t STREAMS 1 Material stream (Liquid/Vapour) exiting from the shell
2 Material stream (Liquid/Vapour) exiting from the tubes
The corresponding inlet and outlet streams must use the same Thermod.
TUBLAYOU Input Tube layout
DISPHV Input Position of device
BAFLAYOU Input Longitudinal baffle layout
NTUBPASS Input Number of tubes passes
TD Input Tubes outside diameter
TDIN Input Tubes inside diameter
COND Input Tubes thermal conductivity
TUBPITCH Input Tube pitch
SHELLDIA Input Shell diameter
BAFPITCH Input Baffle pitch
CFH Input transfer correction factor
FF Measurable Fouling factor
CFDPSHL Measurable Shell pressure drop correction factor
CFDPTUB Measurable Tubes pressure drop correction factor
EPSA Input Relative precision on used area
USEDAREA Input Fraction of area actually used
UNIT PARAMETERS
TUBLAYOU Input Tube layout
TUBLAYOU = 1 - Pitch type = square
TUBLAYOU = 2 - Pitch type = triangular
TUBLAYOU = 3 - Pitch type = square rotate d
TUBLAYOU = 4 - Pitch type = triangle with cle aning lane s
DISPHV = 0 horizontal
DISPHV = 1 ve rtical.
BAFLAYOU Input Longitudinal baffle layout
BAFLAYOU = 0 No horizontal baffle .
BAFLAYOU = 11 One horizontal baffle with ve rtically cut se gme ntal baffle s.
BAFLAYOU = 12 One horizontal baffle with horizontally cut se gme ntal baffle s.
NTUBPASS Input Number of tubes passes
If BAFFLE LAYOUT = 0 NTUBPASS must be e ve n or e qual to 1.
If BAFFLE LAYOUT >< 0 NTUBPASS must be e ve n.
TD Input Tubes outside diameter
TDIN Input Tubes inside diameter
If COND <= 0, then the tubes resistance is ignored.
TUBPITCH Input Tube pitch
SHELLDIA Input Shell diameter
BAFPITCH Input Baffle pitch
CFH Input transfer correction factor
If CFH < 0, then 1 is chosen as the default value.
1/Ui = FF + 1/(CFH.Uci)
Whe re : Ui he at transfe r coe fficie nt for the conside re d se ction.
Uci he at transfe r coe fficie nt for cle an e xchange r compute d from corre lations (kW/
(K.m²)).
FF Measurable Fouling factor
The fouling factor enables you to account for the presence of adhering film or scale onto the surfaces.
This value may be negative.
CFDPSHL Measurable Shell pressure drop correction factor
If CFDPSHL < 0, then no correction is applied.
CFDPTUB Measurable Tubes pressure drop correction factor
If CFDPTUB < 0, then no correction is applied.
EPSA Input Relative precision on used area
If EPSA <= 0, the default value 10-3 is used.
USEDAREA Input Fraction of area actually used
SECTION 11: HTX100 : HEAT EXCHANGER (ONE

SIDE)
PURPOSE
Calculates the energy balance on one side of a heat exchanger where a stream is heated up or cooled
down. Different calculation modes are available. The temperature and composition of the inlet
stream is always known.
Inle t STREAMS 1 mate rial stre am of any state
Outle t STREAMS 1 mate rial stre am of any state , but using the same The rmod as the inle t stre am.
In addition one thermal stream can be connected to the unit either as inlet or outlet stream. If the
stream is connected as inlet (or outlet) stream, but heat is produced (or used), the thermal stream
load will be negative. If no thermal stream is connected, then the heat load will be zero.
MODE Input Calculation mode
TOUT Measurable Outlet temperature
ALFOUT Measurable Outlet vapour fraction
DP Measurable Reference pressure drop
DPMASS Input Reference mass flow rate
DPEXP Input Exponent for flow rate dependence
DPRO Input Reference density for side
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE=1 Specified: Flow,Tout Calculated: Load
MODE=2 Specified: Flow,Tout,Alfout Calculated: Load
MODE=3 Specified: Flow,Load Calculated: Tout
MODE=4 Specified: Load,Tout Calculated: Flow
MODE=5 Specified: Load,Tout,Alfout Calculated: Flow
TOUT Measurable Outlet temperature
Depending on the MODE, these parameters will be used to fix the state of the outlet stream.
DP Measurable Reference pressure drop
DPMASS Input Reference mass flow rate
DPEXP Input Exponent for flow rate dependence
DPRO Input Reference density for side
If DP < 0 the outle t stre am pre ssure is se t to |DP|
If DP = 0 the outle t stre am pre ssure is e qual to the inle t pre ssure
If DP > 0 the outle t stre am pre ssure is calculate d as:
POUT = PIN - DP (MASSF/DPMASS)DPEXP (DPRO/RO)
SECTION 12: HTX110 : STREAM STATE TOOLBOX
PURPOSE
The HTX100 allows modifying the state of the outlet stream, either by setting directly a combination
of its temperature, pressure or vapour fraction or by specifying a state variation (pressure drop or
enthalpy change) between the inlet and the outlet stream.
In addition one thermal or mechanical stream can be connected to the unit either as inlet or outlet
stream. If the stream is connected as inlet (or outlet) stream, but heat or energy is produced (or used),
the thermal or mechanical stream load or power will be negative.
T Measurable Outlet temperature
P Measurable Outlet pressure
DT Measurable Temperature difference
DP Measurable Pressure difference
DH Measurable Enthalpy difference
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE=1 Specified: DT,DP Calculated: DH
MODE=2 Specified: DP,DH Calculated: DT
MODE=3 Specified: T,P Calculated: DH
MODE=4 Specified: P,DH Calculated: DT
MODE=5 Specified: P,ALFOUT Calculated: DT,DH
MODE=6 Specified: T,ALFOUT Calculated: DP,DH
MODE=7 Specified: DP,T Calculated: DH
MODE=8 Specified: DP,ALFOUT Calculated: DT,DH
MODE=9 Specified: DT,P Calculated: DH
MODE=10 Specified: DT,ALFOUT Calculated: DP,DH
T Measurable Outlet temperature
P Measurable Outlet pressure
DT Measurable Temperature difference
DP Measurable Pressure difference
DH Measurable Enthalpy difference
When MODE=1,4,7,9, the parameter ALFOUT is also used for single compound stream, as the
temperature and pressure dot not explicitly define its state in the liquid/vapour region.
SECTION 13: INCREM : LOOP CONTROLLER
PURPOSE
The INCREM unit enables to calculate several times in a row a given PFD, while incrementing some
variables (maximum 10) at each iteration. This is particularly useful to make a parametric
sensitivity analysis on a model. If more than 10 variables must be modified or for non standard
incrementation strategies, you can use a FLEX program associated to the INCREM unit (or any other
unit).
As other convergence units, the INCREM unit must be the last unit of the PFD.
The unit INCREM is usually combined with a REPORT unit that prints some key values in a separate
file (1 line per iteration) for subsequent printing or plotting.
If no unit of type REPORT is used, you can follow the results at each iteration by browsing the trace
file (r3s). The amount of information printed in this trace file varies with the value of the KPRINT
parameter of the different units included in the PFD.
You cannot connect any stream to an INCREM unit.
TYPE Input Type of incrementation
ITMAX Input Number of iterations
SPECIFYING THE VARIABLES TO BE INCREMENTED

The variables to be incremented are defined via the Control Tags page of the Unit Notebook. The list
of existing Tags is shown in the Tags Defined list. You can use the Mask field to limit the number of
tags displayed in this list. The following types of Tags are supported:
Mate rial Stre ams: T, P, VAPF, MIXF, H, MOLF, MASSF, Partial Flowrate s
The rmal Stre ams: LOAD
Units Any me asurable input parame te r
The measured value of the Tags will be used for incrementing the corresponding variables at each
iteration.
MODE of operation
UNIT PARAMETERS
TYPE Input Type of incrementation
1 : + (addition) at e ach ite ration the se le cte d variable s will be incre ase d by a give n value
2 : * (multiplication) at e ach ite ration the se le cte d variable s will be multiplie d by a give n value
ITMAX Input Number of iterations
The parameter ITMAX determines how many times the PFD will be executed.
The parameter NVAR determines the number of variables that are incremented at each iteration.
When the manipulated variable belongs to a material stream, the parameter FLASHi indicates how
to reinitialise the stream:
SECTION 14: MAT010 : CONVERGENCE PROMOTER
PURPOSE
Promotes the convergence of the torn variables of STREAMS using the WEGSTEIN method.
Several streams can be handled simultaneously.
Convergence promotion on molar enthalpy is preferred to promotion on temperature, so as to avoid

problems in case of a phase change in a single component mixture (pure compound).
Estimated values for the torn variables are provided in the outlet STREAMS according to the
situation. The process is then calculated to generate process answers which are available in the inlet
STREAMS.
The MAT010 UNIT compares the starting values and the results and checks that convergence has
been obtained. If convergence is not obtained, new values for the unknowns are proposed and the
process calculation is then resumed. This process is repeated until convergence is achieved.
The MAT010 UNIT must be the last UNIT in a simulation sequence (SEQUEN UNIT).
The number of torn variables is limited to 20.
Type MAT.
Any state may be use d.
Type MAT.
Any state may be use d.
Associate d THERMODs : Must be ide ntical for inle t and outle t i.
ITER Result Iteration in progress
ITCON Result Convergence indicator
FREQ Input Frequency of the WEGSTEIN algorithm
RELAX Input Relaxation factor
ANG1 Input Angular coefficient
EPSH Input Absolute precision for "molar enthalpy" tears
EPSZ Input Relative precision for "flowrate" or "composition" tears
UNIT PARAMETERS
1 Only the total molar flowrate is torn.
2 Only the molar e nthalpy is torn.
3 The total molar flowrate and molar e nthalpy are torn.
4 The molar compositions are torn.
5 The partial molar flow rate s and the molar e nthalpy are torn.
6 The molar compositions and the molar e nthalpy are torn.
7 The partial molar flow rate s are torn.
ITER Result Iteration in progress
Iteration in progress (initial value has no influence on simulation).
If ITMAX = 0, then ITMAX is set to 30.
If ITMAX > 0, then ITMAX is the maximum number of iterations :
The simulation is halted if convergence is not achieved within the ITMAX number of iterations.
If ITMAX sign is negative :
The simulation proceeds either at convergence, or after the ITMAX number of iterations has been
reached.
Convergence indicator.
ITCON = 1 if conve rge nce is achie ve d.
ITCON = 0 while conve rge nce is not achie ve d.
The initial value has no influence on the calculation
FREQ Input Frequency of the WEGSTEIN algorithm
Application frequency of the WEGSTEIN algorithm. Successive (relaxed) substitution is applied for
other iterations.
Advice : use FREQ = 1
RELAX Input Relaxation factor
Relaxation factor :
XCOR = X * (1-RELAX) + F(X) * RELAX.
Advice : use RELAX = 1
Angular coefficient.
If the angular coefficient of the WEGSTEIN segment lies between ANG1 and 1, it is set to ANG1 in
order to avoid abnormal extrapolation.
Advice : use ANG1 = 0.9
Angular coefficient.
If the angular coefficient of WEGSTEIN segment lies between 1 and ANG2, it is set to ANG2 in order
to avoid abnormal extrapolation.
Advice : use ANG2 = 1.1
EPSH Input Absolute precision for "molar enthalpy" tears
Absolute precision for "molar enthalpy" tears.
If ABS (F(Hmol) - Hmol) <= EPSH (kJ/kmol) convergence is achieved.
Advice : use EPSH = 0.5
EPSZ Input Relative precision for "flowrate" or "composition" tears
Relative precision for "flowrate" or "composition" tears.
If ABS (F(X) - X) <= EPSZ * X. convergence is achieved.
If EPSZ * X is smaller than 1.D-10, EPSZ * X is replaced by 1.D-10.
Advice : use EPSZ = 1.d-04
SECTION 15: MAT020 : CONVERGENCE PROMOTER
PURPOSE
This UNIT performs simultaneous convergence promotion, on a maximum of 10 STREAMS.
According to the value of the MODE parameter, tears are :
Total (they concern molar enthalpy, pressure and partial molar flow rates),
OR
Material (only molar flow rates are concerned).
The mathematical algorithm is based on the BROYDEN method, which takes into account the
interactions in the systems of non-linear equation systems.
As this UNIT is a convergence promotion UNIT, it must be the last in a group of UNITs gathered into
a SEQUEN type UNIT.
Prior to starting the simulation, outlet STREAMS and MIXDATs must provide a feasible
approximation of the solution.
WARNING
The NDIM's (number of torn variables) first iterations are used to calculate the Jacobian matrix by
altering the variables one after the other.
Type MAT.
Type MAT.
Associate d THERMODs : Must be ide ntical for inle t and outle t i.
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE Input Computation Mode
MODE = 0 - If te ars only conce rn flow rate s, e nthalpy is se t to -1 whilst T and P

re main unchange d.
MODE = 1 - If te ars are total (e nthalpy, pre ssure and flow rate s). An ise nthalpic
calculation is pe rforme d with the ne w value s of the variable s.
DMIN,DMAX,TMIN,TMAX,PMIN,PMAX Input LOWER,UPPER BOUNDS
Partial molar flow rates, temperatures and pressures, lower and upper bounds.
If T minimum <= 0, the de fault value of 100 K is take n by the program.
If T maximum <= 0, the de fault value of T Min + 500 K is take n by the program.
If P minimum <= 0, the de fault value of 1.D-02 bar is take n by the program.
If P maximum <= 0, the de fault value of P Min + 100 bar is take n by the program.
ITER Input Iteration in progress
Iteration in progress (initial value has no influence on simulation).
If ITMAX = 0, then ITMAX is set to 30.
If ITMAX > 0, then ITMAX is the maximum number of iterations :
The simulation is halted if convergence is not achieved within the ITMAX number of iterations.
If ITMAX sign is negative :
The simulation proceeds either at convergence, or after the ITMAX number of iterations has been
reached.
Convergence indicator.
ITCON = 1 if conve rge nce is achie ve d.
ITCON = 0 while conve rge nce is not achie ve d.
The initial value has no influence on the calculation
EPS Input Precision required for convergence criteria
Precision required for convergence criteria.
Sum of square residue <= EPS
If EPS <= 0 default value 1.10 -06 is taken by the program.
DELTA Input Value used at first call to calculate the research direction
Value used at first call to calculate the research direction :
Newton if it is high,
steepest descent if low value.
If DELTA <= 0, the default value of 10 is taken by the program.
SECTION 16: MEC010 : GAS COMPRESSOR
PURPOSE
The MEC010 unit is a simulation model of a gas compressor, based on a given isentropic efficiency.
Various calculation modes are available (specified outlet pressure, compression ratio or power). The
stream flow rate can also be adjusted to match a given outlet pressure and compressor power.
Inle t STREAMS 1 Mate rial stre am (any state )
2 Me chanical stre am
Outle t STREAM 1 Mate rial stre am (Liquid/vapour state ) using the same The rmod as the
mate rial inle t stre am
ISENTEFF Measurable Isentropic efficiency
PRATIO Measurable Compression ratio
POUT Measurable Outlet pressure
UNIT PARAMETERS
The inlet stream composition, pressure and temperature are always known, as well the compressor
isentropic efficiency.
MODE=1 Specified: Flow,PRATIO Calculated: Tout,Power
MODE=2 Specified: Flow,POUT Calculated: Tout,Power
MODE=3 Specified: Flow,Power Calculated: Tout,Pout
MODE=4 Specified: Power,POUT Calculated: Tout,Flow
SECTION 17: MEC030 : TURBINE
PURPOSE
The MEC030 unit is a simulation model of a turbine, based on a given isentropic efficiency. Various
calculation modes are available (specified outlet pressure, expansion ratio or power). The stream
flow rate can also be adjusted to match a given outlet pressure and expansion power.
Outle t STREAM 1 Material stream (Liquid/vapour state) using the same Thermod
as the material inlet stream
2 Mechanical stream
PRATIO Measurable Expansion ratio
UNIT PARAMETERS
The inlet stream composition, pressure and temperature are always known, as well the compressor
isentropic efficiency.
MODE=1 Specified: Flow,PRATIO Calculated: Tout,Power
MODE=2 Specified: Flow,POUT Calculated: Tout,Power
MODE=3 Specified: Flow,Power Calculated: Tout,Pout
MODE=4 Specified: Power,POUT Calculated: Tout,Flow
SECTION 18: MEC050 : LIQUID PUMP
PURPOSE
The MEC050 unit is a simulation model of a pump, taking into account its volumetric efficiency. The
pump can be calculated for a given outlet pressure or a given pressure increase.
2 Me chanical stre am
Outle t STREAM 1 Mate rial stre am (any state involving a Liquid phase) using the
same The rmod as the mate rial inle t stre am
POUT Measurable Outlet pressure or pressure variation
EFFI Measurable Pump efficiency
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE = 1 Outle t pre ssure is give n.
Outle t te mpe rature and pump powe r are calculate d.
MODE = 2 Pre ssure incre ase is give n.
The outle t te mpe rature and the pump powe r are calculate d.
POUT Measurable Outlet pressure or pressure variation
The signification of this parameter depends on the value of MODE.
EFFI Measurable Pump efficiency
PURPOSE
UNIT MEC110 simulates a gas compressor with a constant rotation speed.
The calculation depends upon :
1. The characteristic curve for isentropic efficiency, as a function of the flowrate factor.
2. The characteristic curve for isentropic head, as a function of the flowrate factor.
The flowrate factor is an undimensional parameter function of the inlet volumetric flowrate.
These curves are computed from the available information :
compression ratio and
power supplied to the compressor shaft.
Compressor control is done by a throttle valve controlled by the outlet pressure.
Inle t STREAMS Numbe r : 2.
Type (1) MAT, and (2) MECSTRM.
State : V or LV.
Outle t STREAM Numbe r : 1.
Type MAT.
State : V or LV.
Associate d THERMOD First Inle t and outle t STREAMS must have the same THERMOD.
RISEN Result COMPUTED ISENTROPIC EFFICIENCY
ETAORG Input ORGANIC EFFICIENCY
VITNOM NOMINAL OPERATING SPEED
VITMAX MAXIMUM ALLOWED SPEED
PHINOM NOMINAL FLOWRATE COEFFICIENT
DIAM WHEEL DIAMETER
EFFIC MECHANIC EFFICIENCY
PHI Result COMPUTED VALUE FOR FLOWRATE COEFFICIENT
PSIC Result COMPUTED VALUE FOR HEAD COEFFICIENT
ALARM WARNING FOR COMPRESSOR STATE
RIS1,RIS2,RIS3,RIS4 Input ISENTROPIC EFFICIENCY PARAMETER
PSI1,PSI2,PSI3,PSI4 Input Parameters to define the head factor curve
EPS Input Precision required at convergence
PHIMIN.1 & PSIMIN.1
PHIMIN.2 & PSIMIN.2
UNIT PARAMETERS
RISEN Result COMPUTED ISENTROPIC EFFICIENCY
Isentropic efficiency, for more information see Miscellaneous Parameters Table.
ETAORG Input ORGANIC EFFICIENCY
The Organic Efficiency is the correction factor for the Isentropic Efficiency used to adjust the
calculated outlet temperature.
VITNOM NOMINAL OPERATING SPEED
Nominal operating speed measured in rpm.
VITMAX MAXIMUM ALLOWED SPEED
Maximum allowed speed measured in rpm.
PHINOM NOMINAL FLOWRATE COEFFICIENT
This coefficient is not necessary in every case.
DIAM WHEEL DIAMETER
Wheel diameter in meters (not necessary in every case).
EFFIC MECHANIC EFFICIENCY
The mechanical efficiency is a correction on the head factor.
PHI Result COMPUTED VALUE FOR FLOWRATE COEFFICIENT
Computed value for flowrate coefficient is measured in m3/hr.
PSIC Result COMPUTED VALUE FOR HEAD COEFFICIENT
Computed value for isentropic head coefficient.
PSIC = PSI * EFFIC
ALARM WARNING FOR COMPRESSOR STATE
Warning parameter for compressor state.
In compressors, there is a minimum capacity at every speed, below which operation is unstable. This
instability (called pumping or surge) is to be avoided if possible:
if surging mode then Warning is set to 1,
if operation is safe Warning is set to 0.
Parameters to define the isentropic efficiency curve.
RIS1,RIS2,RIS3,RIS4 Input ISENTROPIC EFFICIENCY PARAMETER
RIS1 RIS 2 * PHI RIS3 * PHI 2

RISEN
PHI RIS 4
Where : PHI = Flowrate Coefficient.
PSI1,PSI2,PSI3,PSI4 Input Parameters to define the head factor curve
PSI1 PSI 2 * PHI PSI 3 * PHI 2

HEADCOEFFICIENT
PHI PSI 4
g
HEADCOEFFICIENT His*
U2
Whe re : PHI = Flowrate Coe fficie nt.
U = Radial ve locity of whe e l (m/s).
DN
U
60 N : rpm D : m
EPS Input Precision required at convergence
Precision required at convergence :
The default value is 1. 10-05
relative precision on pressure if EPS > 0,
absolute precision on pressure if EPS < 0.
PHIMIN.1 & PSIMIN.1
Define the point 1 of the compressor surge line.
PHIMIN.2 & PSIMIN.2
Define the point 2 of the compressor surge line.
PURPOSE
Simulates a gas compressor on the basis of the following knowledge :
its characteristic curves e.g. flowrate-mechanical power, flowrate-compression ratio or outlet

pressure,
its outlet conditions at the nominal point i.e. the point where the compressor works at its
maximum efficiency that is with the minimum losses.
These conditions are :
The pre ssure ,
The te mpe rature ,
The we ight flowrate ,
The re quire d powe r and
The rotation spe e d.
The characteristic curves are converted to curves defined by the variables of the polytropic efficiency
and the pressure factor as a function of the flowrate factor.
ETAPI = f(PHI) = A + B.PHI + C.PHI2 + _F(D;PHI) + E.lnPHI
PSY = f(PHI) = A' + B'.PHI + C'.PHI + _F(D';PHI) + E'.lnPHI
Whe re : ETAPI Is the polytropic e fficie ncy.
PHI Is the flowrate factor.
PSY Is the pre ssure factor.
The flowrate factor PHI is defined from the equation :
PHI = Q/N
and the pressure factor PSY from the equation :
PSY = Hp/N2
Whe re : N = Rotation speed (rps).
Q = Volumetric flowrate (m³/s).
Hp = Polytropic head (kJ/kg).
The polytropic head Hp is determined from the following equation :
Hp = P _F(Q;GKG) _F(m;m-1) _B_bc_((Rc_S_Up5(_F(m-1;m);) -1)
Whe re : P = Inle t pre ssure (kPa).
GKG = Mass flowrate (kg/s).
Rc = Pre ssure ratio (discharge pre ssure /inle t pre ssure ).
m = Polytropic e xpone nt.
The m value is a function of the polytropic efficiency np
_F(m;m -1) - _F(k;k -1) . np
Whe re : k = The ratio of specific heats (Cp/Cv).
Furthermore, the polytropic efficiency must satisfy the gas-power requirement equation given by :
PWR = _F(Hp . GKG;np . nmec)
Whe re : PWR = Re quire d powe r (kW).
nme c = Me chanical losse s factor.
So for each point of the power - discharge pressure characteristic curves, a polytropic head and
polytropic efficiency must be calculated that will result in the discharge pressure and power
requirements shown on the curves.
TOPOLOGY
Inle t STREAMS Numbe r : 2.
Type (1) MAT, and (2) MECSTRM.
Outle t STREAMS Numbe r : 1.
Type MAT (LV or V).
Associate d THERMODs : Must be ide ntical.
UNIT PARAMETERS
POLYTROPIC EFFICIENCY (ETAPIC)
This polytropic efficiency field cannot be accessed since its value is being computed from the given
PHI and the coefficient values on the simulation mode. Only the physical unit field can be accessed for
a percentage or an absolute value to be chosen.
NOMINAL MECHANICAL EFFICIENCY (KMECNOM)
Not a necessary field. It already exists in nominal point conditions.
COMPUTATION MODE (MODE)
There are two computation modes available :
MODE = 1 Simulation Mode .
The ETAPI and PSY coefficients are given in the MEC130 UNIT as well as the mechanical losses (if
any) and the rotation speed on the nominal point. The outlet pressure and temperature, the required
power and polytropic efficiency are calculated. The rotation speed of the actual conditions should
also be given in the mechanical stream of the compressor.
Attention: If there are large variations in the inlet conditions of the compressor, the accuracy of the
developed efficiency curve may deteriorate substantially due to the volume ratio effects (for
multiple compression).
In order to check the validity of the curve for the new conditions a variable Q (TETA) is calculated
where :
Q = _B_bc_((_F( µ ; k ))_S_up9(0.5)
for referenced and new inlet conditions, µ being the molecular weight of the gas stream (kg/kmol). If
the value of Q for the new conditions is within 5 % of its value for the old or reference conditions the
efficiency curve developed by this procedure is likely to be valid for the new conditions. So, the
efficiency curve has the advantage over the characteristic curves of the compressor, in that it can be
used for gas streams with different molecular weight.
MODE = 2 Identification Mode.
For the coefficients of the functions (1) and (2).
The coefficients are identified by a PID010 UNIT containing ONLY the MEC130 UNIT.
The EXPDAT object associated to the PID010 UNIT contains :
PHI as an independent (I) variable,
and PSY, ETAPI as measured (M) ones.
The outlet pressure and the compressor's power in the MECSTRM should be given.
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES COEFFICIENTS TABLE :
Col. 1(blank) Variable for which the coe fficie nts are to be e nte re d. It contains two variable s :
the polytropic e fficie ncy ETAPI and
the pre ssure factor PSY.
A-E The value s of the corre sponding coe fficie nts are to be e nte re d.
This table is only take n into conside ration for the simulation mode (MODE = 1).
ETAPI ADJUSTMENT
This value represents an adjustment coefficient for the calculated polytropic efficiency.
PSY ADJUSTMENT
This value represents an adjustment coefficient for the calculated variable PSY.
LIMIT CONDITIONS
Limit working conditions are needed in order to define the limit line and surge line of the
characteristic curves.
These are defined from the following variables :
MINIMAL AND MAXIMAL RPM (RPMMIN & RPMMAX)
Rotation speed limits of the compressor.
SURGE LINE and LIMIT LINE
Weight flowrate (physical units can be chosen) and pressure ratio.
Two sets of values are needed to define each line. They are optional, but if given a verification of the
compressor being within function boundaries is permitted in simulation mode.
CONDITIONS AT NOMINAL POINT
Working conditions taken into consideration are the following :
OUTLET TEMPERATURE (TOUTNOM)
OUTLET PRESSURE (POUTNOM)
WEIGHT FLOWRATE (MASSFNOM)
POWER (PWRNOM)
RPM (RPMNOM)
MECHANICAL LOSSES (LOSNOM)
MECHANICAL EFFICIENCY (KMECNOM)
TETA (Q) (TETA)
These also depend on the MODE :
MODE = 1 Simulation Mode .
These values are not necessary except for the mechanical losses and the rotation speed at the nominal
point that are needed for the calculation of the mechanical losses at the given conditions. Also, if a
value for TETA is given, the program will perform a test on the validity of the curves for the inlet
conditions.
MODE = 2 The first 5 values i.e. the highlighted ones are needed and the rest calculated.
CALCULATION INDICATIONS
PRECISION FOR PRESSURE (EPS)
Defines the precision for outlet pressure estimation.
PRINT-OUT LEVEL (KPRINT)
Defines the Print-out options.
SECTION 21: MIS010 : UTILITY MODEL
PURPOSE
This unit is obsolete. Use unit HTX110 instead.
SECTION 22: MIX010 : MATERIAL STREAMS MIXER
PURPOSE
Calculates the mass and energy balances of a mixer. The outlet stream pressure will be the minimum
of the inlet streams pressure.
Different calculation modes are available: straight forward mixing of the inlet streams or control of
some inlet flow rates to reach a required flow rate and/or temperature of the outlet stream.
A special mode is also available for simple mass balance.
Inle t STREAMS From 1 up to 10 Mate rial stre ams of any state
Outle t STREAMS 1 Mate rial stre am of any state
Associate d THERMODs The The rmod of the outle t stre am must contain all compounds that actually
appe ar in any of the inle t stre ams.
ALFOUT Measurable Outlet stream vapour fraction (can be controlled by a controller)
UNIT PARAMETERS
The temperature and the composition of every inlet streams are known. Different calculation modes
can be selected:
1 Mass and e ne rgy balance
2 Mass balance only. In this case the state of the outle t stre am is le ft unchange d.
3 The flow rate of the se cond inle t stre am is calculate d to obtain the te mpe rature spe cifie d in the
outle t stre am data.
4 The flow rate of the se cond inle t stre am is calculate d to obtain the flow rate spe cifie d in the outle t
stre am data.
5 The flow rate s of both inle t stre ams are calculate d to obtain the te mpe rature and flow rate
spe cifie d in the outle t stre am data.
When the set-points given in the outlet streams can not be met (Mode =3, 4 and 5), the simulation is
stopped.
ALFOUT Measurable Outlet stream vapour fraction (can be controlled by a controller)
Calculated vapour fraction of the outlet stream.
SECTION 23: MIX020 : MECHANICAL/THERMAL

STREAMS MIXER
PURPOSE
Calculates the heat load or the mechanical power of one of the connected STREAMS so that the energy
balance is verified.
Inle t STREAMS From 1 up to 10 Me chanical or The rmal stre ams
Outle t STREAMS From 1 up to 10 Me chanical or The rmal stre ams
IPOSIT Input Stream to be calculated
UNIT PARAMETERS
Controls the amount of information printed in the trace file
IPOSIT Input Stream to be calculated
Indicates which stream will be calculated to match the energy balance.
SECTION 24: PERMEA : PERMEATOR
PURPOSE
UNIT PERMEA is a model for a device separating gas across a membrane. Two modes are available:
Counter-Current and Cross Plug Flow.
Inle t STREAMS 1 Material stream (V or LV) (I)
2 Material stream (V or LV) (only in counter-current mode) (II)
Outle t STREAMS 1 Material stream for the retentat (I)
2 Material stream for the permeate (II)
All the streams must use the same Thermod
TYPE Input Permeator type
KPRINT Input Print-out level
NCELL Input Number of cells or number of integration steps
SURFACE Measurable Total surface area
DPH Measurable Pressure drop (HP side)
DPB Measurable Pressure drop (BP side) (not used in Cross Plug Flow)
EPS Input Convergence criteria
RDTR Measurable Molar ratio for retentate
RDTP Measurable Permeation molar ratio
UNIT Input Permeances measurement units
PERM1-10 Measurable Membrane Values
UNIT PARAMETERS
TYPE Input Permeator type
1: Counte r-curre nt
2: Cross plug flow
TYPE = 1: 10*n+k
Whe re : k = impre ssion coe fficie nt (0 to 5) : controls the amount of information printe d in the trace
file
n = orde r numbe r of the compound for which an e volution profile is wante d in re te ntate
and pe rme ate stre ams. The total molar flowrate is also printe d.
TYPE = 2: If KPRINT is gre ate r than 0 the n the compounds molar flowrate , total molar flowrate and
pre ssure profile s are printe d.
Only if ITYPE = 1
0: Simulation : Inle t flowrate s and pe rme ance s are known. Outle ts are calculate d.
N: Re gulation : The "fe e d_in" stre am flowrate is adjuste d to obtain an impose d molar
fraction for the Nth compound in the re te ntate . (Re te ntate
composition must be initialise d).
-N : Re gulation : The "fe e d_in" stre am flowrate is adjuste d to obtain an impose d molar
fraction for the Nth compound in the pe rme ate . (Pe rme ate
composition must be initialise d).
100 : Adjustme nt : Pe rme ance s are calculate d to obtain flowrate and compositions fixe d
in re te ntate .
NCELL Input Number of cells or number of integration steps
TYPE = 1: Numbe r of ce lls use d in the de vice mode l
TYPE = 2: Numbe r of inte gration ste ps
(By default = 50, maximum = 100)
SURFACE Measurable Total surface area
Total surface area of the membrane (By default = 100 m²)
DPH Measurable Pressure drop (HP side)
Pressure drop (bar) HP (By hypothesis : linear profile)
DPB Measurable Pressure drop (BP side) (not used in Cross Plug Flow)
Pressure drop (bar) BP (By hypothesis : linear profile)
Maximum number of allowed iterations (By default = 50)
EPS Input Convergence criteria
Convergence criteria (By default = 50)
Retentate molar flowrate/ Sum of inlet molar flowrates
Permeate molar flowrate/ Sum of inlet molar flowrates
UNIT Input Permeances measurement units
-1 : kmol/s/m²/bar
-2 : Nm³/h/m²/bar
>0: pe rme ance s [kmol/s/m²/bar] = UNIT * following parame te rs
PERM1-10 Measurable Membrane Values
Membrane permeance for the different compounds (unit defined by UNIT parameter). These
parameters must always be initialised even if MODE = 100.
SECTION 25: OPT070 : OPTIMIZER
PURPOSE
Optimises a user defined objective function subject to equality and non-equality constraints while
solving recycle convergence loops at the same time.
As any convergence unit, this Unit must be the last one in the sequence defined by a simulation PFD.
Only one unit of type OPT070 should be active in the simulated PFD and its sub-PFDs.
The objective function will be defined through a flex program pointing to the parameter FOBJ of the
unit.
The variables to be optimised are selected by the tags listed in the manipulated tags window. The
Safety lower and upper bounds defined on these tags will be taken into account. Up to 100 variables
can be handled.
In addition to the recycle constraints defined by the units CUT010 defined in the sub-PFDs,
additional constraints can be defined by tags pointing to variables that must be equal to (equality
constraints) or greater than (inequality constraints) the measured value of the tags. These tags must
be listed in the controlled tag table displayed in the Control Tags page.
No stream can be connected to this unit.
MODE Input Precision Mode
STEPDB Input Initial Step
EPS Input Relative tolerance
NEQ Input Number of equality constraints
NINEQ Input Number of inequality constraints
AUTOSCAL Input Automatic SCALING
STEPDX Input Step for derivatives
EPSDER Input Estimate of Noise
FOBJ Input Objective Function
FOBJSCAL Input SCALING of objective function
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE Input Precision Mode
0: High pre cision
1: Shortcut
2: the unit parame te rs are printe d at e ach ite ration
3: as 2 + the list of variable s and constraints is printe d at e ach major ite ration
4: as 2 + the list of variable s and constraints is printe d at e ach ite ration
If ITMAX = 0 the n ITMAX is se t to 30.
If ITMAX > 0 the n ITMAX is the maximum numbe r of ite rations :
The simulation is stopped if convergence is not achieved within ITMAX iterations.
If ITMAX < 0 The simulation proceeds either at convergence, or after |ITMAX| iterations.
STEPDB Input Initial Step
Default value 0.1
Smaller values will generate smaller initial steps
EPS Input Relative tolerance
Default value 10-7
NEQ Input Number of equality constraints
The first NEQ tags defined in the controlled tags table will be considered as equality constraints. At
convergence the variables pointed by these tags will be equal to the value specified on the Tags.
NINEQ Input Number of inequality constraints
The next NINEQ tags defined in the controlled tags table will be considered as inequality constraints.
At convergence the variables pointed by these tags will be greater than or equal to the value
specified on the Tags.
The first NVAR tags defined in the manipulated tags table will indicate the variables on which the
optimiser will act to minimise its objective function while satisfying the specified constraints. The
Safety bounds defined on these tags will be taken into account as the maximum range of values for
the variables.
The remaining TAGS, if any, will be ignored.
AUTOSCAL Input Automatic SCALING
0: Use r de fine d scaling factors
1: Automatic scaling
Depending on the problem, an appropriate scaling of the objective function, of the constraints and of
the optimised variables might be necessary. A dedicated scaling parameter exists for the objective
function (SCALOBJ). For the variables and the constraints, the scaling factor can be entered via
measurement files using the syntax.
SCALING <TAG> scaling_value
The scaling factors should be set in such way that the range of values obtained by multiplying the
variables and constrained values by one is about 1.
STEPDX Input Step for derivatives
Relative perturbation for calculating derivatives
EPSDER Input Estimate of Noise
Estimation of the maximum noise present in the residuals and the objective function.
FOBJ Input Objective Function
The value of the objective function (to be minimized) is usually defined by a Flex code attached to the
unit.
FOBJSCAL Input SCALING of objective function
SECTION 26: RCT010 : CHEMICAL REACTOR
PURPOSE
The RCT010 is a general-purpose reactor model where the outlet stream composition is calculated on
basis of a combination of equilibrated reactions and fixed conversion reactions. A mode is also
available where a White equilibrium is calculated (no reaction scheme specified). In each case, a
distance from equilibrium can be considered, through a Delta T parameter. When equilibrated
reactions are used, the reactor effluent MUST be gaseous.
The maximum number of reactions is 20, from a maximum of 10 can be equilibrated.
In addition one thermal stream must be connected to the unit either as inlet or outlet stream. If the
load will be negative.
METH Input Calculation Method
TOUT Measurable Outlet Temperature
HEATLOAD Measurable Heat load
GLOBDTEQ Measurable Temperature deviation from equilibrium (WHITE)
DPREF Measurable Reference Pressure Drop
REFFLOW Measurable Reference Mass Flow rate
TYPEi Input Reaction i Type
EXTENTi Measurable Reaction i Extent
CONVERi Measurable Reaction i Conversion
CORDERi Input Reaction i Key compound
DTEQi Measurable Reaction i DT from equilibrium
UNIT PARAMETERS
0 Mass Balance only (Che mical e quilibrium cannot be handle d)
The outle t stre am state and the the rmal stre am are le ft unchange d.
1 Set-point on Outlet Stream Temperature
The outle t te mpe rature of the re actor is give n (parame te r TOUT) and the he at to be re move d or to
be supplie d is calculate d toge the r with the outle t composition.
3 Set-point on Thermal Stream Load
The he at to be re move d or to be supplie d is give n and the outle t te mpe rature is calculate d toge the r
with the outle t composition
1 BROYDEN method (using given reaction schemes).
The KPs of the che mical re actions are calculate d from the compounds data. The che mical
compounds involve d in the se re actions must be gase ous and a de viation from the e quilibrium may
be conside re d for e ach re action.
2 WHITE Method (ignoring given reaction scheme)
The fre e e ne rgy of the outle t gas, calculate d on basis of compounds data, is minimise d by the
WHITE me thod. This me thod can only be use d with gase ous che mical compounds. A unique
te mpe rature de viation from the e quilibrium may be conside re d
Set-point on outlet temperature (used only when Mode = 1)
Calculated heat load. A positive value corresponds to heat supplied to the reactor.
GLOBDTEQ Measurable Temperature deviation from equilibrium (WHITE)
For White Method only (if METH=2): temperature deviation from equilibrium. The equilibrium is
calculated at the following temperature: TOUT + GLOBDTEQ
DPREF Measurable Reference Pressure Drop
DPREF < 0 No pre ssure drop
DPREF = 0 The pre ssure of outle t stre am is ke pt
DPREF < 0 Pre ssure drop is calculate d as follows:
REFFLOW < 0 Pout = Pin - DPREF
REFFLOW = 0 Pout = Pin - DPREF and REFFLOW is se t to the curre nt mass flow rate (ide ntification
mode )
REFFLOW > 0 Pout = Pin - DPREF . (MASSF / REFFLOW)
DTEQi Measurable Reaction i DT from equilibrium
For each reaction (see Reactions page of the unit notebook), you specify the TYPEi of calculation:
Extent the parame te r EXTENTi se ts the re action e xte nt
Conversion the parame te r CONVERi se ts the conve rsion of the compound indicate d by CORDERi
Equilibrium the re action is calculate d at che mical e quilibrium for the te mpe rature TOUT + DTEQi
Attention:
1. The equilibrated reactions must appear (and will be calculated) together after all reactions
calculated at a given extent or conversion.
2. The reactions at given conversions or extents are calculated successively. For example,
specifying 50% conversion on a given compound for the second reaction means that 50% of the
remaining amount of this compound, after calculation of the first reaction will be converted in the
second reaction.
3. If an extent or conversion specified on a reaction exceeds the maximum extent achievable in

view of the remaining compound rates, this maximum extent will be used in place
4. For equilibrated reactions, the corresponding EXTENTi parameter will be calculated and
reused as starting point in the subsequent calculations
SECTION 27: RCT110 : NH3 SYNTHESIS REACTOR
PURPOSE
The RCT110 is a NH3 synthesis reactor, with four catalytic beds and inter bed quenches.
The feed of the first bed is preheated in a feed/effluent exchanger, which is integrated in the RCT110.
Temperature control is achieved by a by-pass of the exchanger on the feed side.
The reaction is defined internally and uses the following kinetic equation:
r = ACTIVj (k1.PN2.PH2^1.5/PNH3 - k2.PNH3/PH2^1.5) (kmol/m³ cata/s)
Whe re : k1 = 4.97094 e xp (-10468 / T)
k2 = 7.1428 1012 e xp(-23855/T)
PN2, PH2, PNH3 are the partial pre ssure of the re spe ctive compounds (bar)
ACTIVj is the catalyst activity in the corre sponding be d
Outle t STREAMS 1 mate rial stre am with LV state
Both streams must refer to the same Thermod, which in addition must use N2, H2 and NH3 as the
three first compounds.
BEDDIAM Input Diameter of catalytic bed
INTSTEP Input Integration step
HA Input Heat transfer factor
TIN Input Set-point on 1st bed inlet temperature
REFFLOW Input Reference mass flow rate
REFDP Input Reference pressure drop
EPSHA Input Relative precision on heat balance
FRACi Measurable Fraction of inlet flow rate going to bed i (see Others page)
LENGTHi Input Length of catalyst bed i
ACTIVi Input Catalyst activity in bed i
UNIT PARAMETERS
BEDDIAM Input Diameter of catalytic bed
HA Input Heat transfer factor
Overall heat transfer factor of the feed/effluent exchanger. The heat transfer is calculated as
Q = HA . DTLN
TIN Input Set-point on 1st bed inlet temperature
The by-pass on the feed/effluent exchanger will be controlled so as to reach the set temperature.
REFFLOW Input Reference mass flow rate
REFDP Input Reference pressure drop
Pout = Pin - DPREF . (MASSF / REFFLOW)²
If REFFLOW or REFDP are negative, the pressure drop will be zero.
EPSHA Input Relative precision on heat balance
FRACi Measurable Fraction of inlet flow rate going to bed i (see Others page)
LENGTHi Input Length of catalyst bed i
ACTIVi Input Catalyst activity in bed i
These parameters are to be defined for each of the four beds.
SECTION 28: RCT141 : FURNACE TYPE CHEMICAL

REACTOR
PURPOSE
The RCT140 is a model simulating a furnace where the fluid flowing through the tubes undergoes
chemical reactions.
The reactor outlet stream composition is calculated on basis of a combination of equilibrated

reactions and fixed conversion reactions. A mode is also available where a White equilibrium is
calculated (no reaction scheme specified). In each case, a distance from equilibrium can be
considered, through a Delta T parameter.
When equilibrated equations are used, the reactor outlet must be gaseous.
The fuel can be either a gaseous or liquid substance. Combustion is considered to be complete and the
necessary air flow rate can be calculated according to the air excess or the percentage of O2 or CO2 in
the fumes.
The heat exchange occurs by radiation. The heat transfer coefficient and the pressure drop inside the
tubes is calculated through internal correlations.
The unit can be calculated for a given fuel flow rate or for a given reactor effluent temperature.
The maximum number of reactions is 10.
Inle t STREAMS 1 Air Fe e d: mate rial stre am bringing the oxyge n
2 Fue l Fe e d: mate rial stre am bringing the fue l to be burne d
3 Re actor Fe e d
4 Optional air le akage stre am
Outle t STREAMS 1 Fume s: mate rial stre am with combustion products
2 Re actor Efflue nt (LV state ), using the same The rmod as the Re actor
fe e d
3 Optional The rmal Stre am for he at losse s
The Thermod used by the Fumes streams must contain at least all the components that are present in
the air and the fuel feed streams.
MODCAL Input Furnace calculation mode
METH Input Reactor calculation mode
NRC Input Number of combustion reactions
NTUBPASS Input Number of passes
LTUB Input Tubes length
DEXT Input Tubes outside diameter
DINT Input Tubes inside diameter
GEOMFACT Input Radiation chamber geometric factor
TGOUT Input Set point on outlet gas temperature
GLOBDTEQ Measurable Delta T at equilibrium (White)
SETPOINT Measurable Air excess or fumes O2/CO2 contents
CFDP Input Pressure drop correction factor
EPS Input Relative precision on heat balance
CFH Input Heat transfer correction factor
HLOSSF Measurable Heat losses (as a fraction of load)
TYPEi Input Reaction i calculation type
EXTENTi Measurable Extent of reaction i
CONVERi Measurable Conversion of key compound
CORDERi Input Key compound
DTEQi Measurable Delta T from equilibrium
UNIT PARAMETERS
0 The air flow rate is give n in the Air inle t stre am
1 SETPOINT on the air e xce ss
2 SETPOINT on the O2 conte nt in fume s
3 SETPOINT on the CO2 conte nt in dry fume s
4 SETPOINT on the CO2 conte nt in fume s
For MODEXC = 1..4, the flow rate of the Air inlet stream will be calculated.
MODCAL Input Furnace calculation mode
1 Fue l flow rate is se t
The te mpe rature re actor outle t stre am is calculate d from the he at balance
2 Re actor outle t te mpe rature (TGOUT) is se t
The fue l flow rate is calculate d in orde r to ge t the spe cifie d re actor outle t te mpe rature
In this case , the optional air le ak stre am cannot be use d.
METH Input Reactor calculation mode
NRC Input Number of combustion reactions
The corresponding first reactions are used to describe the combustion. Complete combustion is
always assumed.
NTUBPASS Input Number of passes
LTUB Input Tubes length
DEXT Input Tubes outside diameter
DINT Input Tubes inside diameter
If COND <= 0, the tube thermal resistance is neglected
GEOMFACT Input Radiation chamber geometric factor
The heat exchange is controlled by radiation:
LOAD = CFH . GEOMFACT . σ . AREA . (TFUMES^4 - TWALL^4)
Where : σ is the Boltzmann constant (5.667 10-8 W/m² K4)
TGOUT Input Set point on outlet gas temperature
This parameter is only used when MODCAL=2.
GLOBDTEQ Measurable Delta T at equilibrium (White)
For White Method only (if METH=2): temperature deviation from equilibrium. The equilibrium is
calculated at the following temperature: TOUT + GLOBDTEQ
SETPOINT Measurable Air excess or fumes O2/CO2 contents
The SETPOINT is used for controlling the air flow rate, according to the air flow calculation mode
defined by the MODEXC parameter.
CFDP Input Pressure drop correction factor
This multiplying factor can be used to tune the pressure drop correlation equation to actual plant
conditions. If CFPD <= 0, no correction is applied
EPS Input Relative precision on heat balance
If EPS <= 0, the default value is 10-4.
CFH Input Heat transfer correction factor
This multiplying factor can be used to tune the heat transfer correlation equation to actual plant
conditions. If CFPD <= 0, no correction is applied.
HLOSSF Measurable Heat losses (as a fraction of load)
The corresponding fraction of the furnace heat load is a considered as heat losses and put in the
optional thermal outlet stream when present.
TYPEi Input Reaction i calculation type
EXTENTi Measurable Extent of reaction i
CONVERi Measurable Conversion of key compound
CORDERi Input Key compound
DTEQi Measurable Delta T from equilibrium
Combustion use d for the first NRC re actions. For the se re actions the othe r parame te rs are not
use d
Conversion the parame te r CONVERi se ts the conve rsion of the compound indicate d by
CORDERi
Equilibrium the re action is calculate d at che mical e quilibrium for the te mpe rature TOUT + DTEQi
Attention:
second reaction.

reused as starting point in the subsequent calculations.
PURPOSE
Calculates the outlet composition, taking into account specifications such as :
the conversion or extent is given for some of the reactions,
the conversion or extent is given for some of the components,
the user can give his own values for chemical equilibrium ratio and
the other reactions are at usual chemical equilibrium.
Specifications are optional depending on the user's choice. By default, all the reactions are considered
at chemical equilibrium.
As a principle, all reactions are fluid phase reactions (liquid or vapour). However, it may be possible
to consider reactions involving solids, if we have the right value for the GIBBS' free energy of
formation (for the pure solid at 25 C and 1 atm). It may also be possible to consider reactions in a LV
phase reactor provided ALL reactions are fixed conversion reactions. If the WHITE method is used to
solve the problem, reactions MUST be in the vapour phase without solids.
RCT010 and RCT201 units are similar, but differs on several aspects for the reactions at equilibrium:
RCT010 only supports vapour phase, while RCT020 supports both full vapour and full liquid
phases.
In addition RCT210 also handles solids.
RCT010 allows to set a different temperature deviation for each reaction while RCT201 only allows
a global temperature deviation from equilibrium.
Outle t STREAMS 1 Product: Mate rial Stre am with LV state
GLOBDTEQ Measurable Temperature deviation from equilibrium
REFDP Measurable Reference Pressure Drop
UNIT PARAMETERS
0 Mass Balance only (Che mical e quilibrium cannot be handle d)
The outle t stre am state and the the rmal stre am are le ft unchange d.
The he at to be re move d or to be supplie d is give n and the outle t te mpe rature is calculate d toge the r
with the outle t composition
Calculated heat load. A positive value corresponds to heat supplied to the reactor.
Temperature deviation from equilibrium. The equilibrium is calculated at the following temperature:
TOUT + GLOBDTEQ
REFFLOW < 0 Pout = Pin - DPREF
REFFLOW = 0 Pout = Pin - DPREF and REFFLOW is se t to the curre nt mass flow rate (ide ntification
mode )
REFFLOW > 0 Pout = Pin - DPREF . (MASSF / REFFLOW)
CORDERi
Equilibrium the re action is calculate d at che mical e quilibrium for the te mpe rature TOUT + DTEQ,
the KPs of the re cations be ing calculate d from the compounds data
Kp the re action is calculate d at che mical e quilibrium for the te mpe rature TOUT + DTEQ,
the KPs of the re actions be ing calculate d from the parame te rs KA and KB of the
re action, as give n by the use r: ln(K) = KA - KB/R/T.
Attention:
second reaction.

5. The compounds selected as reference for the conversions must be reagents (negative
stoichiometric coefficients in the reaction.
6. It is not possible to impose a conversion or an extent of a component whose inlet flowrate is

0, even it appears during the reaction.
PURPOSE
Calculates the outlet composition on basis of White method, by minimising the free energy of the
outlet stream at an equilibrium temperature calculated from the actual stream temperature and a
temperature deviation (DTEQ).
The reactions occur in vapour phase. Solid compounds can be taken into account.
The reactor can be calculated at a given outlet temperature or at a given heat input or output.
Outle t STREAMS 1 Product: Mate rial Stre am with LV state
UNIT PARAMETERS
2 Set-point on HeatLoad parameter
The he at to be re move d or to be supplie d is give n in the parame te r HEATLOAD and the outle t
te mpe rature is calculate d toge the r with the outle t composition
The he at to be re move d or to be supplie d is give n in the the rmal stre am and the outle t te mpe rature
is calculate d toge the r with the outle t composition
Calculated or specified (MODE=2) heat load. A positive value corresponds to heat supplied to the
reactor.
Temperature deviation from equilibrium. The equilibrium is calculated at the following temperature:
TOUT + GLOBDTEQ
REFFLOW <=0 Pout = Pin - DPREF and REFFLOW is se t to the curre nt mass flow rate (ide ntification
mode )
REFFLOW > 0 Pout = Pin - DPREF.(MASSF/REFFLOW)²
CORDERi
Equilibrium the re action is calculate d at che mical e quilibrium for the te mpe rature TOUT + DTEQ,
the KPs of the re cations be ing calculate d from the compounds data
Kp the re action is calculate d at che mical e quilibrium for the te mpe rature TOUT + DTEQ,
the KPs of the re actions be ing calculate d from the parame te rs KA and KB of the
re action, as give n by the use r: ln(K) = KA - KB/R/T.
Attention:
second reaction.

5. The compounds selected as reference for the conversions must be reagents (negative
stoichiometric coefficients in the reaction.
6. It is not possible to impose a conversion or an extent of a component whose inlet flowrate is

0, even it appears during the reaction.
SECTION 31: RCT300 : INTEGRAL PLUG FLOW

REACTOR
PURPOSE
UNIT RCT300 is a simulation model for a chemical integral plug flow reactor, and can be used in
simulation (reactor volume is given) or sizing mode (the reactor volume is calculated
Homogeneous and heterogeneous catalytic reactors as well as non-catalytic reactors can be

modelled. However, the feed stream must be in homogeneous phase (fully liquid or fully vapour)
along the reactor. Should a phase change occur, the simulation will be cancelled.
Up to 21 reactions can be defined, while the reactor itself can be divided in up to 5 zones.
Reactions defined in Reactions page + Flex kinetics +
Inle t STREAMS 1 Mate rial inle t stre am (any state )
Outle t stre am 1 Mate rial outle t stre am (LV state ), using the same The rmod as the
inle t stre am.
BETA Input Catalyst density (kmol/m3 or kg/m3) (1 if none)
NZONE Input Number of zones
REFCOMP Input Reference compound
CONVER Input Conversion of reference compound
REFDP Measurable Reference pressure drop
REFFLOW Measurable Reference mass flow rate
TYPZOi Input Type of heat transfer in Zone i
REVOLi Measurable Zone volume
HAi Input Zone HA
TINZOi Input Zone inlet temperature
DTZOi Input Zone temperature drop
INTSTEP Input Initial value of integration step
EPSTIF Input Tolerance for integration routine
EPSHEAT Input Precision on heat balance
ITMHEAT Input Maximum iterations on heat balance
EPSVR Input Precision on reactor volume
ITMVR Input Maximum iterations on reactor volume
EPSVAPF Input Tolerance on vapour or liquid fraction
PROFILE Input Number of steps for profile report
EPSMB Input Precision on mass balance
UNIT PARAMETERS
0-1 No printing
2 Re minde r for he at transfe r mode
3 Ite rations on re actor volume
4 Ite rations on the rmal balance
5 Inte rme diate inte gration value s
BETA Input Catalyst density (kmol/m3 or kg/m3) (1 if none)
The signification of BETA depends on the type of reactor:
Homoge ne ous re actor: BETA = 1
Catalytic re actor in homoge ne ous phase : BETA is e xpre sse d in kmol cata/m³
Catalytic re actor in he te roge ne ous phase : BETA is e xpre sse d in kg cata/m³
The material balance in each reactor zone is calculated as:
dUi/dl = BETA . VOLUME . ri
Whe re : Ui is the e xte nt of re action i (kmole /s)
l is the position in the re actor zone (from 0 to 1)
VOLUME is the zone volume (m³)
ri is the re action rate , which signification is also de pe nding on the type of

re actor:
Homoge ne ous re actor: ri is expressed in kmol/s
Catalytic re actor in homoge ne ous phase : ri is expressed in kmol/(s.kmol cata)
Catalytic re actor in he te roge ne ous phase : ri is expressed in kmol/(s.kg cata)
The reaction rate ri is expressed as a product of two factors:
ri = Vi . Ei
Whe re : Vi is the reaction velocity (in kmole/s or kmol/(s.kmol cata) or kmol/(s.kg cata))
Ei is an equilibrium factor equal to 0 when equilibrium is reached
The way Vi and Ei are calculated is determined in the Parameters page of the Reaction notebook.
Attention:
1. As a general rule, all the reactions should be defined on basis of the same type of
equilibrium and velocity equations.
2. However, it is allowed to use the equilibrium equation of type "8" (Ei = 1) for any reaction
3. When the reaction velocity boils down to a constant (when the overall order is 0) the
equilibrium equation must be set to "8" (Ei = 1).
4. The fugacity coefficients (when used) are calculated on basis of the conditions at the inlet of
each zone.
NZONE Input Number of zones
The reactor may be split into up to 5 of zones.
1 Simulation mode: the re actor volume (in up to 5 zone s) is give n.
2 Sizing mode: the re actor volume (1 zone maximum) is calculate d in orde r to re ach a give n
conve rsion for a re fe re nce compound.
REFCOMP Input Reference compound
CONVER Input Conversion of reference compound
These parameters are only used in Sizing mode and indicate the conversion of a reference compound.
REFDP Measurable Reference pressure drop
The pressure drop is expressed as:
DP = REFDP . (MASSF / REFFLOW)²
Where : G is the mass flow rate.
TYPZOi Input Type of heat transfer in Zone i
REVOLi Measurable Zone volume
HAi Input Zone HA
TINZOi Input Zone inlet temperature
DTZOi Input Zone temperature drop
These parameters must be defined for each zone.
TYPZOi=0: Not used This zone is not used
TYPZOi=1: T.Profile The temperature profile of the zone is given by
Ti = TINZOi + DTZOi * L
Where : L is the normalised length for each zone, and goes from 0 to 1.
Assuming a heat transfer towards or from an isothermal environment at temperature TR, the heat
exchanged with this isothermal environment is computed by the program.
Q > 0 he at supply, Q = -HA*(Max(TOi,TOi+DTZOi)-TR)
Q < 0 he at re moval, Q = -HA*(Min(TOi,TOi+DTZOi)-TR)
TYPZOi=2: Adiabatic No heat transfer in the zone
INTSTEP Input Initial value of integration step
Initial value of the integration step, expressed as a fraction o f reactor length.
If PROFILE = 0, then the value 1/20 is used.
If PROFILE <= 0, then the default attribute 1/PROFILE is taken.
EPSTIF Input Tolerance for integration routine
The parameter EPSVR and ITMV are used only in sizing mode.
EPSVAPF Input Tolerance on vapour or liquid fraction
Deviation from 0 or 1 on vapour fraction for a phase to be regarded as homogeneous.
If EPSVAPF < 0, then the program chooses the default value: 10-4.
The maximum value for this parameter is 0.05.
PROFILE Input Number of steps for profile report
Number of intermediary values for profiles printed in report phase.
If PROFILE <= 0, then the program chooses the default attribute of 10.
The maximum value for this parameter is 100.
EPSMB Input Precision on mass balance
SECTION 32: RCT320 : COOLED PLUG FLOW

REACTOR
PURPOSE
UNIT RCT320 is a simulation model for a chemical integral plug flow reactor with detailed modelling
of a coolant media. The reactor can be split up in three zones with different catalyst activities.
Homogeneous and heterogeneous catalytic reactors as well as non-catalytic reactors can be

modelled. However, the feed stream must be in homogeneous phase (fully liquid or fully vapour)
along the reactor. Should a phase change occur, the simulation will be cancelled.
Up to 21 reactions can be defined.
Inle t STREAMS 1 Mate rial inle t stre am (any state )
2 Inle t coolant stre am
Outle t STREAMS 1 Mate rial outle t stre am (LV state ), using the same The rmod as the
first inle t stre am.
2 Outle t coolant stre am using the same The rmod as the inle t coolant
stre am
EXCHMODE Input Cooling flow configuration
TUBLAYOU Input Tubes Lay-out
ISAVIN Input Print profiles file
FILEFORM Input Profiles File Format
BETA Input Correction factor on Reaction Velocity
REFCOMP Input Reference Compound for Conversion
REFPROD Input Reference Compound for Selectivity
REFDP Input Reference Pressure Drop
REFFLOW Input Reference Mass Flow rate
DCAT Input Catalyst Pellets Diameter
NTUBPASS Input Number of Passes (Tube side)
LENGTH Input Tubes Length
TD Input Tubes Outside Diameter
TDIN Input Tubes Inside Diameter
COND Input Tubes Thermal Conductivity
TUBPITCH Input Tubes Spacing
BUNDLDIA Input Bundle Diameter
SHELLDIA Input Shell Diameter
NBAFFLES Input Number of Baffles
BAFFOPEN Input Baffles opening
FF Input Fouling Factor
CFH Input Heat Transfer Correction factor
EPSTIF Input Precision required for integration
EPSHEAT Input Precision on counter-current transfer
ITMHEAT Input Maximum Number of Iterations

EPSVAPF is notInput
document to be reproduced. ItPrecision on Vapour
is provided Fraction under a special license agreement. 817
to C ustomers
NSTEPS Input Number of values for Profiles

UNIT PARAMETERS
EXCHMODE Input Cooling flow configuration
EXCHMODE = 0 Co-Curre nt
EXCHMODE = 1 Counte r-Curre nt
TUBLAYOU Input Tubes Lay-out
TUBLAYOU = 1 - Pitch type = square
TUBLAYOU = 2 - Pitch type = triangular
TUBLAYOU = 3 - Pitch type = square rotate d
TUBLAYOU = 4 - Pitch type = triangle with cle aning lane s
DISPHV = 0 horizontal.
DISPHV = 1 ve rtical.
ISAVIN Input Print profiles file
Controls whether a separate file (named from the unit name and the extension grf) is created with the
reactor profile (T, P, and molar flow rates). The number of steps is controlled by the parameter
NSTEPS
ISAVIN = 0 No.
ISAVIN = 1 Ye s.
FILEFORM Input Profiles File Format
Defines the field separator for the Profiles file.
FILEFORM = 32 space se parator
FILEFORM = 9 TAB se parator
FILEFORM = 59 se mi colon se parator
0-1 No printing
2 Re minde r for he at transfe r mode
3 Ite rations on re actor volume
4 Ite rations on the rmal balance
5 Inte rme diary inte gration value s
BETA Input Correction factor on Reaction Velocity
The signification of BETA depends on the type of reactor:
Homoge ne ous re actor: BETA = 1
Catalytic re actor in homoge ne ous phase : BETA is e xpre sse d in kmol cata/m³
Catalytic re actor in he te roge ne ous phase : BETA is e xpre sse d in kg cata/m³
The material balance in each reactor zone is calculated as:
dUi/dl = BETA . VOLUME . ri . ACTIVj
Whe re : Ui is the e xte nt of re action i (kmole /s)
l is the position in the re actor zone (from 0 to 1)
VOLUME is the zone volume (m³)
ACTIVj is the catalyst activity factor in zone j.
ri is the re action rate , which signification is also de pe nding on the type of

re actor:
Homoge ne ous re actor: ri is expressed in kmol/s
Catalytic re actor in homoge ne ous phase : ri is expressed in kmol/(s.kmol cata)
Catalytic re actor in he te roge ne ous phase : ri is expressed in kmol/(s.kg cata)
The reaction rate ri is expressed as a product of two factors:
ri = Vi . Ei
Whe re : Vi is the reaction velocity (in kmole/s or kmol/(s.kmol cata) or kmol/(s.kg cata))
Ei is an equilibrium factor equal to 0 when equilibrium is reached
The way Vi and Ei are calculated is determined in the Parameters page of the Reaction notebook.
Attention:
1. As a general rule, all the reactions should be defined on basis of the same type of
equilibrium and velocity equations.
2. However, it is allowed to use the equilibrium equation of type "8" (Ei = 1) for any reaction
3. When the reaction velocity boils down to a constant (when the overall order is 0) the
equilibrium equation must be set to "8" (Ei = 1).
4. The fugacity coefficients (when used) are calculated on basis of the conditions at the inlet of
each zone.
DP = REFDP . (MASSF / REFFLOW)²
Where : MASFF is the mass flow rate.
NTUBPASS Input Number of Passes (Tube side)
LENGTH Input Tubes Length
TD Input Tubes Outside Diameter
TDIN Input Tubes Inside Diameter
COND Input Tubes Thermal Conductivity
TUBPITCH Input Tubes Spacing
BUNDLDIA Input Bundle Diameter
SHELLDIA Input Shell Diameter
NBAFFLES Input Number of Baffles
BAFFOPEN Input Baffles opening
FF Input Fouling Factor
The fouling factor enables you to account for the presence of adhering film or scale onto the surfaces.
This value may be negative.
CFH Input Heat Transfer Correction factor
If CFH < 0, then 1 is chosen as the default value.
1/U = FF + 1/(CFH.Uc)
Whe re : Ui he at transfe r coe fficie nt for the conside re d se ction.
Uc he at transfe r coe fficie nt for cle an e xchange r compute d from corre lation (kW/(K.m²)).
Initial value of the integration step, expressed as a fraction o f reactor length.
If PROFILE = 0, then the value 1/20 is used.
If PROFILE <= 0, then the default attribute 1/PROFILE is taken.
EPSTIF Input Precision required for integration
EPSHEAT Input Precision on counter-current transfer
ITMHEAT Input Maximum Number of Iterations
EPSVAPF Input Precision on Vapour Fraction
Deviation from 0 or 1 on vapour fraction for a phase to be regarded as homogeneous.
If EPSVAPF < 0, then the program chooses the default value: 10-4.
The maximum value for this parameter is 0.05.
NSTEPS Input Number of values for Profiles
DTMAX Input Maximum Temperature Difference
This parameter is used in the external convergence loop on the coolant outside temperature, as an
indicator of inadequate starting point. Should the temperature difference between the coolant and
the reacting mixture be higher than this value, a new loop is then restarted with a lower outside
temperature
FRACj Input Catalyst Fraction in zone j (j =1,3)
ACTIVj Input Catalyst Activity in zone j (j =1,3)
Fraction of catalyst and corresponding relative activity for each of the maximum three zones.
REFCOMP Input Reference Compound for Conversion
REFPROD Input Reference Compound for Selectivity
The corresponding will be used as reference compound to calculate reactor conversion and
selectivity.
SECTION 33: RCT400 : FLUID BED REACTOR
PURPOSE
This unit is obsolete, use RCT420 in place.
SECTION 34: RCT420 : FLUID BED REACTOR
PURPOSE
The unit RCT420 models a fluid bed reactor. The feed stream must be in vapour state at the inlet of
the reactor.
Various cooling modes are possible: adiabatic, cooling through horizontal or vertical tubes or
through the external wall. When present this cooling media can in co-current or counter-current
flow.
The flow pattern is determined from the inlet stream conditions and is not recalculated for the
varying conditions in the reactor.
Inle t STREAMS 1 Mate rial inle t stre am (LV or V state )
2 Inle t coolant stre am (LV, L or V state )
Outle t STREAMS 1 Mate rial outle t stre am (LV or V state ), using the same The rmod as
the first inle t stre am.
2 Outle t coolant stre am using the same The rmod as the inle t coolant
stre am (LV, L or V state )
3 A the rmal stre am for the he at losse s of the re actor
When the reactor is in adiabatic mode then only the first inlet and first outlet streams can be
connected.
FUNCMODE Input Calculation Mode
FLOWMODE Input Reactor Flow Configuration
HEATMODE Input Heat Transfer Mode
EXCHMODE Input Cooling Flow Configuration
REACMODE Input Reacting phases
INIT Input Initialisation mode
DISTTYP Input Gas distributor type
COOLTYP Input Cooling or heating media
HETEREAC Input Number of heterogeneous reactions
DCAT Input Catalyst particles diameter
FCATA Input Fraction of catalyst < 45 µm
DI5WT% Input Diameter of the 5wt% smallest cut
CATAMA Input Catalyst inventory
ROCATA Input Catalyst density
CPCATA Input Catalyst specific heat
BEDDIA Input Bed diameter
WALLTHIC Input Wall thickness
WALLCOND Input Wall thermal conductivity
TLENGTH Input Tubes length
TD Input Tubes diameter
TT Input Tubes Thickness
TUBPITCH Input Tubes pitch
TCOND Input Tubes thermal conductivity
BEDCORR Input Bed side correction coefficient.
COOLCORR Input Cooling side correction coefficient
REFH Input Cooling side reference heat transfer coefficient
REFDP Measurable Cooling side reference Pressure drop

REFDENS is notMeasurable
document to be reproduced. ItReference to C ustomers under a special license agreement. 827
density
is provided
HEXP Input Exponent for H equation

UNIT PARAMETERS
FUNCMODE Input Calculation Mode
1 Pseudo-homogeneous: the be d is conside re d as one homoge ne ous phase
2 Two phase model: two phase s are conside re d in the be d: the de nse phase and the fluid phase
FLOWMODE Input Reactor Flow Configuration
1 Perfectly Mixed Flow (PMF)
2 Plug Flow
HEATMODE Input Heat Transfer Mode
1 Adiabatic reactor
2 Through wall of the vessel
3 Through horizontal tubes
4 Through vertical tubes
EXCHMODE Input Cooling Flow Configuration
1 Counter-Current exchange: an e xte rnal conve rge nce loop is handle d to de te rmine the outle t coolant
stre am te mpe rature
2 Co-Current exchange
REACMODE Input Reacting phases
1 Only heterogeneous reactions
2 Heterogeneous and homogeneous reactions
INIT Input Initialisation mode
1 Initialisation from outlet stream
2 Initialisation from TCATIN
DISTTYP Input Gas distributor type
1 Multiple orifices or tuyere type distributor
2 Porous Plate
COOLTYP Input Cooling or heating media
1 Cooling media
2 Heating media
HETEREAC Input Number of heterogeneous reactions
DCAT Input Catalyst particles diameter
FCATA Input Fraction of catalyst < 45 µm
DI5WT% Input Diameter of the 5wt% smallest cut
CATAMA Input Catalyst inventory
ROCATA Input Catalyst density
CPCATA Input Catalyst specific heat
BEDDIA Input Bed diameter
WALLTHIC Input Wall thickness
WALLCOND Input Wall thermal conductivity
TLENGTH Input Tubes length
TD Input Tubes diameter
TT Input Tubes Thickness
TUBPITCH Input Tubes pitch
TCOND Input Tubes thermal conductivity
BEDCORR Input Bed side correction coefficient.
COOLCORR Input Cooling side correction coefficient
REFH Input Cooling side reference heat transfer coefficient
REFDP Measurable Cooling side reference Pressure drop
REFDENS Measurable Reference density
HEXP Input Exponent for H equation
DPEXP Input Exponent for DP equation
TCATIN Input Initial T of the bed when PMF
DISTAO Input Distributor area per orifice
DIFFG Input Molecular diffusion coefficient
DTMAX Input Max. Temperature difference
EPSHEAT Input Precision on heat balance (Counter-current)
TMIN Input Minimum coolant temperature
TMAX Input Maximum coolant temperature
SECTION 35: RCT500 : CSTR REACTOR
PURPOSE
The unit RCT500 models a perfectly mixed (continuous stirred) reactor.
Inle t stre ams: 1 Vapour mate rial stre am (LV or V state )
2 Liquid mate rial stre am (LV or L state )
3 Inle t coolant stre am
4 Solid re cycle stre am
Outle t stre ams: 1 Liquid product
2 Vapour product
3 Outle t coolant stre am
4 Outle t The rmal stre am (he at losse s)
The Thermod of the liquid outlet stream must contain all compounds, including solids, if any.
The Themod of the vapour outlet stream must contain all fluid compounds. In addition it can also
contain the solid compounds if any.
These two Thermods must use the same thermodynamic methods.
The inlet and outlet coolant streams must use the same Thermod.
The heat of reaction of each reaction must be defined in the reaction parameters (parameters DHR
and REFT).
MODE Input Cooling type
DIREAC Input Reactor Diameter
CATAMA Input Catalyst Inventory
ROCATA Input Catalyst Density
HREAC Input Reactor Height
FF Input Tube Fouling Factor
TD Input Cooling Tubes Diameter
TT Input Cooling Tubes Thickness
TCOND Input Cooling Tubes Thermal Conductivity
NTUBES Input Number of Cooling Tubes
LENGTH Input Cooling Tubes Length
LVAREA Input Liquid/Vapour Heat Transfer Area
HWALL Input Height of Cooled Reactor Wall
REFH Input Heat Transfer Coefficient (Tube side)
REFDENS Input Reference Density
HEXP Input Exponent for Tube side Heat Transfer
DPEXP Input Exponent for Pressure Drop
HLS Input Heat Transfer Coef. (liquid/solid)
TCATIN Input Estimation of Catalyst Temperature
HSGASGAS Input Gas/Gas Diffusion Coef.(L/S interface)
HSGASLIQ Input Liq/Gas Diffusion Coef.(L/S interface)
HSLIQLIQ Input Liq/Liq Diffusion Coef.(L/S interface)
HLGASGAS Input Gas/Gas Diffusion Coef.(Liquid phase)
HLGASLIQ Input Liq/Gas Diffusion Coef. (Liquid phase)
HLLIQLIQ Input Liq/Liq Diffusion Coef.(Liquid phase)

HVGASGAS
document is notInput Gas/Gas
to be reproduced. It Diffusion
is provided phase)a special license agreement. 835
Coef.(Gas under
to C ustomers
HVGASLIQ Input Liq/Gas Diffusion Coef.(Gas phase)

UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE Input Cooling type
1 Tubes: the re actor is coole d down by a coolant flowing in tube s
2 External blanket: the re actor is coole d down by a coolant flowing in an e xte rnal blanke t
DIREAC Input Reactor Diameter
CATAMA Input Catalyst Inventory
ROCATA Input Catalyst Density
HREAC Input Reactor Height
FF Input Tube Fouling Factor
KPRINT Input Print-out Level (0 - 8)
TD Input Cooling Tubes Diameter
TT Input Cooling Tubes Thickness
TCOND Input Cooling Tubes Thermal Conductivity
NTUBES Input Number of Cooling Tubes
LENGTH Input Cooling Tubes Length
These parameters are only used when MODE=1 (Coolant flowing through tubes).
LVAREA Input Liquid/Vapour Heat Transfer Area
HWALL Input Height of Cooled Reactor Wall
These parameters are only used when MODE=2 (Coolant flowing through an external blanket).
REFH Input Heat Transfer Coefficient (Tube side)
REFDENS Input Reference Density
HEXP Input Exponent for Tube side Heat Transfer
DPEXP Input Exponent for Pressure Drop
REFDP > 0 DP = REFDP . (MASSF/REFFLOW)**DPEXP * REFDENS/DENS
REFDP <= 0 DP = 0
The heat transfer coefficient on the tube side is calculated as follows:
H = REFH * (MASSF / REFFLOW)^(HEXP)
When the reference terms (REFFLOW or REFDENS) are negative or zero, then the corresponding
dependence is ignored.
HLS Input Heat Transfer Coef. (liquid/solid)
TCATIN Input Estimation of Catalyst Temperature
HSGASGAS Input Gas/Gas Diffusion Coef.(L/S interface)
HSGASLIQ Input Liq/Gas Diffusion Coef.(L/S interface)
HSLIQLIQ Input Liq/Liq Diffusion Coef.(L/S interface)
HLGASGAS Input Gas/Gas Diffusion Coef.(Liquid phase)
HLGASLIQ Input Liq/Gas Diffusion Coef. (Liquid phase)
HLLIQLIQ Input Liq/Liq Diffusion Coef.(Liquid phase)
HVGASGAS Input Gas/Gas Diffusion Coef.(Gas phase)
HVGASLIQ Input Liq/Gas Diffusion Coef.(Gas phase)
HVLIQLIQ Input Liq/Liq Diffusion Coef.(Gas phase)
SECTION 36: REPORT : REPORT FILE CONTROLLER
PURPOSE
The REPORT unit enables to print-out the value of up to 10 variables at each execution of the unit in
an ASCII file (named from the unit name and the extension rep).
This unit can for instance be used in combination with an INCREM unit for a parametric sensitivity
analysis on a model. It can also be used as a debugging tool in convergence loops.
The first two lines of the report file display the names and the physical units of the variables. The
following lines (1 line per iteration) contain the values of the selected variables. This file can be
imported into Excel for further processing like charts generation.
You cannot connect any stream to an INCREM unit.
UNIT PARAMETERS
This UNIT has no parameter.
SPECIFYING THE VARIABLES TO BE PRINTED

The variables to be printed are defined via the Control Tags page of the Unit Notebook. The list of
existing Tags is shown in the Tags Defined list. You can use the Mask field to limit the number of
tags displayed in this list.
SECTION 37: SEP010 : SPLITTER
PURPOSE
Splits a mixture into a maximum of 10 outlet STREAMS, according to the user specified split
fractions. Temperatures, pressure and the compositions of the outlet streams are identical to those of
the inlets.
This type of UNIT may also be used for mass balance calculations. In this case the contents of the
outlet streams remain unchanged.
Inle t STREAMS : 1 mate rial stre am (any state )
Outle t STREAMS : From 1 to 10 mate rial stre ams (any state )
All streams must use the same Thermod.
FRACi Measurable Split fraction of stream i
UNIT PARAMETERS
0 Heat and mass balance
The outle t stre ams are se t in the same state as the inle t stre am.
1 Mass balance only
The e nthalpy of the outle t stre ams is se t to -1.
FRACi Measurable Split fraction of stream i
If all FRACi are defined (>=0), their sum should be equal to 1.
If only one FRACi is undefined (<0), it is calculated by difference (1-sum of defined fractions). In this
case, the sum of defined fractions has to be lower than 1.
SECTION 38: SEP020 : LIQUID - VAPOUR

SEPARATOR
PURPOSE
This UNIT calculates mass and energy balances of a liquid-vapour separator, together with the
liquid-vapour equilibrium.
Several inlet streams may be considered and their temperatures and compositions are given.
Inle t Stre ams: Mate rial: maximum numbe r = 8.
The rmal: maximum numbe r = 2
Outle t Stre ams:

Mate rial: 1 stre am of state V as vapour outle t (uppe r stre am)
1 stre am of state L as liquid outle t (lowe r stre am)
The rmal: maximum numbe r = 2
The rmods: Both outle t stre ams must use the same The rmod.
Attention:
Q > 0 if heat is supplied to the reactor.
Q < 0 if heat is removed from the reactor.
MODE2 Input CALCULATION MODE
MODE1 Input PRESSURE MODE
ALFOUT Input OUTLET VAPOUR FRACTION
TOUT Input/result OUTLET TEMPERATURE
POUT Input/result OUTLET PRESSURE
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE2 Input CALCULATION MODE
If the vessel pressure is calculated according to the procedure described below, three modes are
available.
MODE2 = 1 - FIXED.LOAD The he at provide d or re move d to the ve sse l is give n.
The te mpe rature , flowrate s of both liquid and vapour stre ams are calculate d
toge the r with both phase compositions.
MODE2 = 2 - FIXED.TOUT The ve sse l te mpe rature is give n. Flowrate s and compositions of
both outle ts are calculate d toge the r with the he at to be re move d or provide d.
MODE2 = 3 - FIXED.ALFOUT The molar vapour fraction is give n (ratio of vapour and liquid
molar flowrate s). The te mpe rature and compositions of both phase s are
calculate d toge the r with the he at to be re move d or provide d.
MODE1 Input PRESSURE MODE
Several calculation modes are available to calculate the vessel pressure.
MODE1 = 0 - The vessel pressure is equal to the smallest inlet pressure.
MODE1 = 1 - The vessel pressure is equal to the smallest inlet pressure multiplied by
the expansion factor (POUT) which is given.
MODE1 = 2 - The vessel pressure is equal to the smallest inlet pressure minus the given
pressure drop (POUT).
MODE1 = 3 - The vessel pressure is equal to the given pressure (POUT).
MODE1 = 4 - The molar vapour fraction is given (ratio of vapour and liquid molar
flowrates) together with the heat to be removed or provided. The
temperature, pressure and compositions of both outlets are calculated.
ALFOUT Input OUTLET VAPOUR FRACTION
TOUT Input/result OUTLET TEMPERATURE
POUT Input/result OUTLET PRESSURE
Vessel pressure (MODE2=3) or Pressure drop (MODE2=2) or expansion factor (MODE2=1)
SECTION 39: SEP030 : BLACK BOX SEPARATOR
PURPOSE
The SEP030 UNIT is a 'black box' ensuring the mixing of inlet streams and the separation of this
mixture into two outlet streams of different compositions, according to user specified compounds
distribution laws. This unit can be used as a short-cut model for any separation equipment.
Inle t STREAMS 1 From 1 to 10 mate rial stre ams (any state )
Outle t STREAMS 1 Bottom (X) mate rial stre am (Liquid/Vapour)
2 Top (Y) mate rial stre am (Liquid/Vapour)
The two outlet streams must use the same Thermod. In addition, this Thermod must contain all
compounds that actually appear in any of the inlet streams.
An additional Thermal stream can be connected either as the last inlet or as the last outlet stream, to
close the heat balance.
Attention: By mirroring the symbol vertically, the Y stream will become the (apparent) bottom
stream allowing to define the compound split fractions on the (apparent) bottom stream.
TYPTH1 Input Y (Top) stream state
TYPTH2 Input X (Bottom) stream state
KEY Input Mode 3: key compound index in Thermod
AKEY Input Mode 3: key compound molar fraction
YTOT Input Mode 4: Y (Top) Total molar rate
FRACi Measurable Split factor for compound i
TOUTj Measurable Temperature difference for stream j (j = 1, 2)
POUTj Measurable Pressure or Pressure difference for stream j (j = 1, 2)
ALFOUTj Measurable Vapour Fraction of stream j (j = 1, 2)
UNIT PARAMETERS
This parameter defines the distribution law to be used :
1 Yi = FRACi . Zi (i = 1,...numbe r of compounds)
The partial flow rate of e ach compound in the Y (top) stre am is e xpre sse d as a fraction of its partial
rate in the (total) fe e d stre am.
2 Yi / YTot = FRACi . Xi / XTot (i = 1,...numbe r of compounds)
The molar fraction of e ach compound in the Y (top) stre am is e xpre sse d in function of its molar
fraction in the X (bottom) stre am.
3 Yi = FRACi . YTot and Xkey = AKEY . XTot ( i = 1,...numbe r of compounds)
The parame te rs FRACi e xpre ss the composition of the Y (top) stre am. In addition the molar
fraction of a ke y compound is give n for the X (bottom) stre am.
4 Yi = FRACi . YTot and Ytot given (i = 1,...numbe r of compounds)
The parame te rs FRACi e xpre ss the composition of the Y (top) stre am. In addition the total molar
flow rate of the top stre am is give n in the parame te r YTOT.
TYPTH1 Input Y (Top) stream state
TYPTH2 Input X (Bottom) stream state
This parameter defines how the state of the corresponding outlet stream is calculated
0 Mass balance only
The stre am inte nsive value s (T,P...) are unchange d
1 Given pressure and temperature
The stre am is se t and the pre ssure and te mpe rature give n in the parame te rs POUTi and TOUTi.
For a single compound mixture the parame te r ALFOUTi will also be use d.
2 Given pressure and vapour fraction
The stre am is se t at the pre ssure and vapour fraction give n in the parame te rs POUTi and ALFOUTi
.
KEY Input Mode 3: key compound index in Thermod
AKEY Input Mode 3: key compound molar fraction
In Mode 3, the parameter AKEY indicates the molar fraction of KEYcompound in the X (bottom)
stream.
YTOT Input Mode 4: Y (Top) Total molar rate
In Mode 4, the parameter YTOT gives the total molar flow rate of the Y (top) stream.
FRACi Measurable Split factor for compound i
For each compound (in the order set in the Thermod) the factor FRACi must be specified.
TOUTj Measurable Temperature difference for stream j (j = 1, 2)
POUTj Measurable Pressure or Pressure difference for stream j (j = 1, 2)
ALFOUTj Measurable Vapour Fraction of stream j (j = 1, 2)
These parameters are used to set the state of the outlet streams as defined by the parameter TYPTHj.
If Pout > 0 se t pre ssure
If Pout = 0 outle t pre ssure = minimum of inle t pre ssure
If Pout < 0 outle t pre ssure = minimum of inle t pre ssure + Pout
Attention: when POUT is used as a pressure drop (POUT < 0), it must be expressed as an absolute
pressure. Specifying POUT in barg or psig would produce wrong results.
SECTION 40: SEP050 : SPLITTER
PURPOSE
The SEP050 unit allows you to draw-off, from a given stream, a secondary stream with the same
composition. This drawn-off stream is the first outlet stream.
Outle t STREAMS 1 Draw-off mate rial stre am
2 Se cond outle t mate rial stre am
All the streams should use the same Thermod and state.
FLOWRATE Measurable Draw-off flowrate (first outlet)
UNIT PARAMETERS
0 Heat and mass balance
The outle t stre ams are se t in the same state as the inle t stre am
1 Mass balance only
The state of the outle t stre ams is le ft unchange d.
FLOWRATE Measurable Draw-off flowrate (first outlet)
FLOWRATE > 0 Se t-point on the flow rate to be draw off.
FLOWRATE = -1 The se t-point on the flow-rate to be draw off is take n from the curre nt flow rate
of the first outle t stre am itse lf.
SECTION 41: SEP060 : LIQUID/LIQUID SEPARATOR
PURPOSE
The unit SEP060 is a separation drum for a liquid/liquid mixture. Entrainment between the 2 phases
can be modelled. Different calculation modes are available (adiabatic or given operating
temperature).
Inle t STREAMS 1-10 Inle t mate rial stre ams. (LL or LLV state , although othe r state s can be
use d for stre ams that do not involve two liquid phase s).
Outle t STREAMS 1 He avy liquid mate rial stre am (LL or LLV state , L is also acce pte d if
the re is no e ntrainme nt be twe e n the two phase s.
2 Light liquid mate rial stre am (LL or LLV state , L is also acce pte d if
the re is no e ntrainme nt be twe e n the two phase s.
3 The rmal stre am (re fuse d in Mode 1, mandatory othe rwise )
All streams must use the same Thermod.

Attention:
1. Should the phase equilibrium calculation result in a single liquid phase, the flow rate of the
light liquid stream (second outlet) is set to zero.
2. If a vapour phase appears, an error message is issued and the simulation is stopped.
TOUT Measurable Operating temperature
HEAVYRAT Measurable Heavy to light phase entrainment rate
LIGHTRAT Measurable Light to heavy phase entrainment rate
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE = 1 Adiabatic se parator.
MODE = 2 The quantity of he at to be transfe rre d is supplie d.
MODE = 3 Isothe rmal se parator. The quantity of he at to be supplie d or to be draw-off is compute d.
TOUT Measurable Operating temperature
Used only when MODE=3
HEAVYRAT Measurable Heavy to light phase entrainment rate
This parameter ranges from 0 up to 1 and indicates the fraction of the heavy liquid phase that is
entrained in the light liquid phase. This allows to model non-ideal separators.
LIGHTRAT Measurable Light to heavy phase entrainment rate
This parameter ranges from 0 up to 1 and indicates the fraction of the light liquid phase that is
entrained in the heavy liquid phase. This allows to model non-ideal separators.
SECTION 42: SEP070 : THREE PHASE SEPARATOR

(L/L/V)
PURPOSE
The unit SEP070 is a liquid/liquid/vapour separation drum.. Entrainment between the phases can be
modelled. Different calculation modes are available (set pressure or vapour fraction).
Inle t STREAMS 1 to 10 inle t stre ams of any standard format
(LV, LLV, WLV, THERSTRM,...).
Outle t STREAMS Outlet Vapour STREAM. (3)
Format V if the re is no e ntrainme nt of the liquid phase s.
Light Liquid STREAM. (2)
Format LL or WL. L is also acce pte d if the re is no e ntrainme nt of the vapour

phase or of the othe r liquid phase re spe ctive ly.
Heavy Liquid STREAM. (1)
Format LL or WL. L is also acce pte d if the re is no e ntrainme nt of the vapour

phase or of the othe r liquid phase .
Attention:
1. All components present in the inlet Streams should also be found in the outlet Streams.
2. Should the phase equilibrium calculation result in foretelling only one liquid phase,
calculations are resumed by setting the flowrate of the second outlet to 0.
UNIT PARAMETERS
MODE Input Pressure mode
MODE = 0 - If the re is no pre ssure drop.
MODE = 1 - PCHANGE is an e xpansion factor.
MODE = 2 - If PCHANGE is a pre ssure drop (DP).
MODE = 3 - If the tank pre ssure is se t to PCHANGE.
MODE = 4 - If you want a vapour fraction VAP.FRAC to be se t (The n the re late d outle t
pre ssure is calculate d).
PCHANGE Input Pressure
if MODE = 1 - Expansion factor (applie d to the lowe st inle t P).
if MODE = 2 - Pre ssure drop (applie d to the lowe st inle t P).
if MODE = 3 - Se t pre ssure .
ITMAX Input MAX NBR OF ITERATIONS
Maximum number of iterations for pressure computation.
20 is the default value.
HEAVYRAT Input ENTRAINMENT RATE OF HEAVY PHASE INTO LIGHT PHASE
This parameter range is from 0 up to 1 (0\H\1) If HEAVYRAT < 0, default value 0 is chosen by
program.
Note : The calculation of equilibrium composition and outlet flow rates is based on the assumption
that separation between liquid phases is perfect. Then a branch fraction equal to the entrainment
rate is added to each outlet branch.
LIGHTRAT Input ENTRAINMENT RATE OF LIGHT PHASE INTO HEAVY PHASE
If LIGHTRAT < 0, then the default value of 0 is chosen.
VAPRAT Input ENTRAINMENT RATE OF VAPOUR INTO LIQUIDS
If < 0, then the default value of 0 is chosen.
LIQRAT Input ENTRAINMENT RATE OF LIQUIDS INTO VAPOUR
If < 0 , then the default value of 0 is chosen.
Note : Entrainment rates are applied to the liquids first, then to the vapour phase.
SECTION 43: SEP080 : SOLID/FLUID PHASE

SEPARATOR
PURPOSE
UNIT SEP080 is a model for a device separating solid phases from fluid phases. Several feed streams
are possible.
Inle t STREAMS 1-10 Mate rial stre ams (any state )
Outle t STREAMS 1 Mate rial stre am for the solids (bottom stre am)
2 Mate rial stre am for the fluid (top stre am). Its state should be se t in
accordance with the inle t stre am.
The two outlet streams must use the same Thermod.
All compounds defined in any of the Thermod of the inlet streams should be defined as well in the
Thermod of the outlet streams.
Attention: by mirroring the symbol vertically, the solid stream will be at the top and the fluid stream
will be at the bottom.
LIQRATE Input Entrainment rate of the fluid phase into the solid phase
SOLRATE Input Entrainment rate of the solid phase into the fluid phase
UNIT PARAMETERS
LIQRATE Input Entrainment rate of the fluid phase into the solid phase
Fraction of fluid compounds that is trapped into the solid stream, expressed as a fraction of the total
inlet flow rate of the fluid compounds.
If LIQRATE < 0, then the default value of 0 is used.
SOLRATE Input Entrainment rate of the solid phase into the fluid phase
Fraction of solids compounds that is entrained into the fluid stream, expressed as a fraction of the
total inlet flow rate of the solid compounds.
If SOLRATE < 0, then the default value of 0 is used.
SECTION 44: SIMFLX : USER-DEFINED

CALCULATIONS
PURPOSE
The SIMFLX unit allows :
adding user defined calculations
adding user defined processing like reporting, printing,
defining up to ten parameters, used by the same unit or by any other unit in the same
model
Using FLEX language, you can access values of streams and units and perform calculations.
physical equilibrium compositions.
A FLEX program can also be added to most of the SIMU units. It is possible to limit to execute the
code before, after or both before and after the code the unit itself is executed.
Tags can be defined on the parameters of the SIMFLX unit, making it possible to use them as either
controlled or manipulated variables of various controllers.
No stream can be connected to a unit of type SIMFLX.
UNIT PARAMETERS
VARi Measurable Multi-purpose parameters
These parameters can be used to store various calculation results or user settings.
44.1 DEFINING THE FLEX PROGRAM
CREATING A FLEX PROGRAM

Define the unit of type SIMFLX.
Write your FLEX program in a separate file.
When starting to calculate your model, enter the name of the file into the corresponding field
Attention: When SIMU saves the results after a successful run, the Flex program is written into the
PDB file. The program is then kept for further runs and it is no longer necessary to reload the Flex
program.To modify the Flex program, you must reload it. It is also possible to add a Flex code to
most of SIMU units.
STRUCTURE OF A FLEX PROGRAM

The Flex program attached to a Unit consists typically of:
a NOCALL string: de fine s whe n the Fle x code should be e xe cute d
a declaration section: de fine s Variable s and Arrays that will be ne ce ssary
selection of a Thermod: de fine s the the rmodynamics me thods to be use d.
selection of variables: de fine s which variable s will be use d in the e quation.
calculations: de fine s the calculations.
Comments can be entered anywhere after the exclamation mark "!".
Flex syntax is similar to FORTRAN Code. Chapter 6 describes this syntax in detail.
Example: &&&COMMENT FLX1 ! File He ade r for fle x code of unit FLX1
NOCALL =
! De claration
REAL ...
! Se le ction of the rmodynamic me thods
CALL CHOOSE('Astre am')
! Se le ction of variable s
CALL LOCATE1(...)
CALL LOCATEN(...)
! Calculations
...
END
...
&&&END ! e nd of fle x code of unit FLX1
...
&&&EOF ! e nd of file
44.2 DEFINING WHEN THE CODE MUST BE EXECUTED
By default the Flex code is processed:
in verification phase (Phase 1),
before and after each calculation of the unit in simulation phase (Phase 3),
before and after calculation of the unit in the report phase (Phase 4).
The NOCALL variable is used to suppress some of these calls, by allocating it a string of up to eight
characters, obtained by concatenating the following strings:
IS suppre ss the code e xe cution be fore unit calculation in simulation phase
OS suppre ss the code e xe cution afte r unit calculation in simulation phase
IR suppre ss the code e xe cution be fore unit calculation in re port phase
OR suppre ss the code e xe cution afte r unit calculation in re port phase
Example: to suppress the flex code execution before unit calculation used the following instruction:
NOCALL = 'ISIR'
44.3 FLEX DECLARATIONS OF VARIABLES
PREDEFINED VARIABLES
IHELP e rror flag: the calculation stops if this variable is se t to a non ze ro value
PHASE indicate s the curre nt phase :
1 ve rification,
3 simulation (be fore unit calculation)
-3 simulation (afte r unit calculation)
4 simulation (be fore unit calculation)
-4 simulation (afte r unit calculation)
NIN numbe r of inle t stre ams of the unit
NOUT numbe r of outle t stre ams of the unit
UNINAM name of the unit
NPAR numbe r of parame te rs of the unit
UNIPAR array with unit parame te rs value s
UNIPARNM array with unit parame te rs name s
NAME XXX(N), YYY

declares characters*8 arrays and scalars.
xxx can be any name, n will be the size of array xxx,
yyy can be any name; yyy will be a single CHARACTER*8.
Example: NAME NAMES(3),ANAME
REAL XXX(N), YYY

declares REAL arrays and scalars.
xxx can be any name, n will be the size of array xxx,
yyy can be any name; yyy will be a scalar.
Example: REAL VAP(3),LIQ(3),T,P
44.4 FLEX ROUTINE TO SELECT THERMODYNAMIC MODEL
CALL CHOOSE('NAME') OR CALL CHOOSE(N)

This subroutine selects a Reference stream defining which methods to use for thermodynamic
functions. A Reference stream must be defined before functions, like EQPHYS and PROPTY, can be
used. The stream can be selected by its name or by a number indicating its position in the inlet
streams (positive number) or in the outlet streams (negative number).
The following FLEX variables and arrays are initialised when using the CHOOSE function:
Name STRNAM Inle t STREAM NAMe .
Name STTYPE Inle t STREAM TYPE.
Name (i) STRPARNM Inle t STREAM PARame te rs NaMe s (array).
Name RATESNAM Associate d RATES NAMe .
Name RATESTYPE Associate d RATES TYPE (i.e . : MOL or MASS).
Name (i) RATPARNM Associate d RATES NaMe s of the compone nts (array).
Re al NUMSUB NUMbe r of compone nts (SUBstance s).
Name (i) SUBTYPE Compone nts (SUBstance s) TYPE (i.e . : EPIC or SOLID).
Re al(i) STRPAR Array with stre am parame te rs
Re al(I) RATESPAR Array with rate s parame te rs.
For non material streams, the STRPAR array contains the variables of the stream and the RATESPAR
is undefined.
For material streams, STRPAR and RATESPAR have the following structure:
STRPAR ARRAY :
(1) T Te mpe rature value (K).
(2) P Pre ssure value (bar).
(3) VAPF VAPour Fraction value (not use d).
(4) RATEFRAC Rate s fraction (MIXF) value .
(5) H Enthalpy value (kJ/kmol).
(6) S Entropy value (not use d).
Attention: The structure of STRPAR allows you to use it directly to call EQPHYS.
RATESPAR ARRAY :
Contains the total and partial flow rates associated to the Stream in the following form.
RATESPAR(1) : total molar flow rate (kmol/s)
RATESPAR(2) : total mass flow rate (kg/s)
RATESPAR(3,4,...) partial molar flow rate of compone nt 1,2,... (kmol/s)
Attention:
1. To obtain the real flow rates of the stream, you must multiply the elements of RATESPAR
by the Rates fraction (RATEFRAC).
2. The array may be used as an argument for EQPHYS and PROPTY by giving RATESPAR(3)
as an argument.
Example : CHOOSE('AFLX-3') ! loads stre am AFLX-3 as the re fe re nce stre am.
CHOOSE(1) ! loads the first inle t stre am as the re fe re nce stre am.
44.5 FLEX SUBROUTINES TO SELECT VARIABLES
INTRODUCTION
The procedure LOCATE1 and LOCATEN create a link between a local variable (or array) of the Flex
code and a variable (or array) corresponding to a unit, stream or compound. After the link is created,
the local Flex variable and the corresponding object variable are pointing to the same physical
memory location. This means that changing the Flex variable value will change the corresponding
object variable and vice-versa.
The procedure ENTRY returns the name of an object from its pointer in the dictionary.
CALL LOCATE1(MYVAR,'INFO','TYPE','OBJECT' OR N,'PAR' OR I)

This function links the local variable MYVAR to the variable defined by 'INFO', 'TYPE', either
'OBJECT' or N, and either 'PAR' or I.
'INFO' can be :
'S' : structure re cord
'D' : data re cord (parame te rs)
'TYPE' can be :
'U' or 'UNIT' : the obje ct is a unit
'S' or 'STREAM' : the obje ct is a stre am
'R' or 'RATES' : the obje ct is the Rate s re cord associate d to a stre am
'C' or : the obje ct is a compound

'COMPOUND'
'OBJECT' is the obje ct name
N for a stre am, indicate s his position as inle t (positive ) or outle t (ne gative ) stre am.
'PAR' is the name of the variable (or parame te r)
I is the position of the variable (or parame te r) in the re cord
Examples CALL LOCATE1(Te mp,'D','S','F1','T')
! The local variable Te mp is now linke d to the te mpe rature of stre am F1
CALL LOCATE1(Pre s,'D','S',1,2)
! The local variable Pre s is now linke d to the se cond variable of the first inle t stre am
! (its pre ssure if a mate rial stre am)
CALL LOCATEN(MYARRAY,'INFO','TYPE','OBJECT' OR N)
This function links the local array MYARRAY to the variable defined by 'INFO', 'TYPE'and either
'OBJECT' or N.
'INFO' can be :
'S' : structure re cord
'D' : data re cord (parame te rs)
'TYPE' can be :
'U' or 'UNIT' : the obje ct is a unit
'S' or 'STREAM' : the obje ct is a stre am
'R' or 'RATES' : the obje ct is the Rate s re cord associate d to a stre am
'C' or : the obje ct is a compound

'COMPOUND'
'OBJECT' is the obje ct name
N for a stre am, indicate s his position as inle t (positive ) or outle t (ne gative ) stre am.
Examples CALL LOCATEN(STREAM,'D','S','F1')
! The local array STREAM is now linked to the data record of stream F1
CALL LOCATEN(STREAM,'D','S',-2)
! The local array STREAM is now linked to the data record of the second outlet
stream
CALL ENTRY(NUM,NOM)
The procedure returns, in the variable NOM (of NAME type), the name of the object stored in location
NUM of the dictionary of the PDB.
CALL GTTAGVAL('NAME','VALUE',MYVAR)
This function copies the requested value associated with the tag into the local variable MYVAR.
These values do not change between iterations.
'NAME' is the Name of the TAG from which the value is to be obtaine d.
'VALUE': re se rve d ke yword with the name of the value of the TAG to acce ss.
MEA.VAL the me asure d value
MEA.ACC the me asure d accuracy
SL the solve r lowe r bound
LL the alarm lowe r bound
L the warning lowe r bound
H the warning uppe r bound
LL the alarm uppe r bound
SL the solve r uppe r bound
MYVAR : Variable to store the re sult.
Example: CALL GTTAGVAL('TI-001','MEA.VAL',TI_MEAS)
'TI-001' is the TAG Name ,
'MEA.VAL' se le cts the me asure d value
TI_MEAS is the re sult variable .
44.6 FLEX SUBROUTINES FOR THERMODYNAMIC

CALCULATIONS
CALL EQPHYS(VEC1, VEC2, VAP, LIQ, SOL, LIQ2, 'TYPE')

This function allows to compute phase equilibrium. It is necessary to select a reference stream (with
the CHOOSE function) previously.
VEC1 array with stre am variable s.
VEC2 array with partial molar flow rate s of e ach compone nt.
VAP array including afte r computation the partial molar flow rate s of the vapour phase .
LIQ array including afte r computation the partial molar flow rate s of the (first) liquid phase .
SOL array including afte r computation the partial molar flow rate s of the solid phase .
LIQ2 array including afte r computation the partial molar flow rate s of the (se cond) liquid phase .
'TYPE' a re se rve d KEYWORD which de fine s the type of e quilibria (flash) to pe rform.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
VEC1 array with stre am variable s.
VEC1(1) te mpe rature (K).
VEC1(2) pre ssure (bar).
VEC1(3) vapour fraction (VAPF= (V/V+L)).
VEC1(4) not use d.
VEC1(5) e nthalpy flow rate (kW).
VEC1(6) e ntropy flow rate (kW/K).
Attention:
1. It is mandatory to give initial values to variables used with the flash type defined, others can
be given as initial values.
2. The STRPAR array created by the GETALL (or GETVAR) subroutine has the same structure
and may be used as the first argument for EQPHYS.
VEC2 : Array with partial molar flow rate s of e ach compone nt (kmol/s).This array may be initialise d
with a call to GETALL or to GETVAR.
VAP : Array with a size of at le ast the numbe r of compone nts of the structure , including afte r
computation the partial molar flow rate s of the vapour phase (kmol/s).
LIQ : Array with a size of at le ast the numbe r of compone nts of the structure , including afte r
computation the partial molar flow rate s of the (first) liquid phase (kmol/s).
SOL : Array with a size of at le ast the numbe r of compone nts of the structure , including afte r
computation the partial molar flow rate s of the solid phase (kmol/s).
LIQ2 : Array with a size of at le ast the numbe r of compone nts of the structure , including afte r
computation the partial molar flow rate s of the (se cond) liquid phase (kmol/s).
'TYPE' : A KEYWORD which de fine s the type of e quilibrium (flash) to pe rform:
EPT: e quilibrium at a give n P and T.
EPA: e quilibrium at a give n P and vapour fraction.
ETA: e quilibrium at a give n T and vapour fraction.
EHP: e quilibrium at a give n P and e nthalpy.
ESP: e quilibrium at a give n P and e ntropy.
EPTA: Exte nsion of EPT with vapour ratio give n as an argume nt but only use d in the
saturation zone of a single compone nt stre am, whe re T and P do not unique ly
de fine the stre am state .
The number of phases to be taken into account for the equilibrium computation is set with the
variable STTYPE, initialised by CHOOSE from the type defined for the stream in the PDB.
It is possible to change it to compute other flash types: V, L, S, LV, LL, LLV, WL, WLV.
CALL PROPTY('FUNCTION', T, P, VEC3, MYVAR)

This subroutine allows to compute physical and thermodynamic properties. It is necessary to
previously select a reference stream (with the CHOOSE function).
'FUNCTION' : A KEYWORD which defines the requested computation.
TOTMAS : total mass flow rate (kg/s).
TOTMOL : total molar flow rate (kmol/s).
MOLFRA : molar ratios (mol/mol).
MASFRA : mass ratios (kg/kg).
MOLDRY : molar ratios of dry gase s.
MASFLW : partial mass flow rate s (kg/s).
For vapour phase properties :
VG : volume tric flow rate (m3/s).
HG : e nthalpy flow rate (kW).
GG : fre e e ne rgy flow rate (kW).
SG : e ntropy flow rate (kW/K).
CPG : the rmal capacity of stre am (kW/K).
CONG : the rmal conductivity (kg/m/s).
VISG : dynamic viscosity (kg/m/s).
SONG : spe e d of sound (m/s).
FUGG : fugacity of compone nts (bar).
For liquid phase properties :
VL : volume tric flow rate (m3/s).
HL : e nthalpy flow rate (kW).
GL : fre e e ne rgy flow rate (kW).
SL : e ntropy flow rate (kW/K).
CPL : the rmal capacity of stre am (kW/K).
CONL : the rmal conductivity (kg/m/s).
VISL : dynamic viscosity (kg/m/s).
SONL : spe e d of sound (m/s).
FUGL : fugacity of compone nts (bar).
For solid phase properties :
VS : volume tric flow rate (m3/s).
HS : e nthalpy flow rate (kW).
GS : fre e e ne rgy flow rate (kW).
SS : e ntropy flow rate (kW/K).
CPS : the rmal capacity of stre am (kW/K).
CONS : the rmal conductivity (kg/m/s).
FUGS : fugacity of compone nts (bar).
T: Te mpe rature (K).
P: Pre ssure (bar).
VEC3: Array with partial molar flow rate s of compone nts (kmol/s).
MYVAR: Variable to store the MYVAR. It is an array with a size of at le ast the numbe r of
compone nts whe n re que sting for function of composition or fugacity.
CHAPTER 9
VALIREPORT
IX
1.1 WHAT CAN YOU DO WITH THIS APPLICATION?
ValiReport allows you:
to store in a database (ACCESS or MS-SQL) the values of a number of Tags for successive
runs you perform with VALI: measurement, measured precision, validated value,
validated precision, filtered value, filtered precision, penalty, gain, status (filtered,
eliminated, etc.) physical unit and comment
to retrieve all the values stored in the database for a given run
to retrieve aggregated values of all the run between two dates
to retrieve selected tag values for a number of runs
to produce charts showing the evolution of selected Tag values with time
to design or import reports and flow-sheets of a process and display selected Tags values
or aggregated values
to colour displayed measurement of a flow-sheet if it is suspicious i.e. with high Penalty
to run and interact with ValiEngine
The application uses Excel Workbooks and a number of procedures stored in an Excel Add-In.
ValiReport is interfaced with ValiEngine, which provides the tags values in a run data file named
from the name of the main PFD (e.g. main.arc) and with ValiModeller, which writes the structure file
(e.g. main.str) which relates each tag to one or two model units.
In an online environment, the tags values will be automatically loaded in the database using the
ValiDBLoader application, while in an offline environment, you will directly load the data in your
database from ValiReport itself.
FIGURE 1 - VALIREPORT ENVIRONMENT
1.2 REQUIREMENTS
For a proper use of ValiReport, you should satisfy the following requirements:
Software requirements:
Microsoft Windows NT4 (SP6a), 2000, XP, 2003, Vista
Microsoft Exce l 97 or highe r ve rsion (including 2007)
For Acce ss database : Microsoft Acce ss 97, 2000, 2002 (part of Office XP) or 2003/2007 (a runtime is
sufficie nt).
For SQL-Se rve r: Microsoft SQL Se rve r 2000 SP4 or Highe r.
Before you can use ValiReport Add-in, you must install it on your computer (see installation
procedure) and then load it in Microsoft Excel. To load ValiReport use the Tools|Add-ins Menu
command and select ValiReport add-in. If it is not listed in the Add-Ins available box, click Browse,
and select it in the ValiReport installation folder. Once loaded, the command ValiReport will appear
in the Tools menu.
1.3 SPECIAL FEATURES AND CONVENTIONS
This Manual uses the following style for Excel menu commands: File|Open . This means that you
pull down the File menu and select the Open command. Depending on the installation language of
your Office applications, some menu commands might appear in a different language. For example in
a French installation, the menu command Tools will be displayed as Outils.
Some menus and menu items have accelerator keys that appear underlined in the menu bar.
The most important tasks can be executed by using either the menu bar or the toolbar.
SECTION 2: HANDLING VALIREPORT WORKBOOKS

2.1 CREATING A VALIREPORT WORKBOOK
You can create as many databases and ValiReport Workbooks as you want. Several Workbooks can
share the same database. However, a given ValiReport Workbook can only access one database at a
time.
Should you use SQL Server to store your data, you need to perform some configuration work before
creating any ValiReport as described in sub-section "SQL-Server database".
You can create a ValiReport Workbook from any Excel Workbook, using the following procedure:
select the Tools|ValiReport menu command
in the Save As dialog box, enter the name you wish to give to your ValiReport workbook
and click Save
By default, ValiReport uses the following sub-folders (starting from the folder where you saved the
workbook):
.\Access: folder where the ACCESS databases are stored
.\Archive: unused at this time
The arc files are assumed to be located in the same folder as the ValiReport excel file. If you want to
use other folders, you will need to change these settings afterwards.
specify the name or IP address of the Belsim LicenseServer and the type of database
(Access or SQL Server) you will use. Click OK to proceed
Attention: The default address of the license server is read from the Belsim.ini file in the dat folder
of the Vali installation
FIGURE 2 - VALIREPORT CREATION S ETTINGS
if you select a SQL Server database, you will be prompted to define the plant name as
defined in Belsim License Manager (e.g. SQLPLANT) and the database name as defined in
the SQL Server (e.g. validata). Click OK to proceed
FIGURE 3 - VALIREPORT DATABAS E CONFIGURATION
if you selected an ACCESS database and if no database exists in the Access folder, you will
be prompted to give a name for the new database.
FIGURE 4 - CREATING A NEW ACCES S DATABAS E
if a database already exists in the Access folder, you will be prompted to select an existing
database.
FIGURE 5 - S ELECTING AMONG EXIS TING DATABAS ES
select a database from the list and click OK
or
enter a new name to create a new Access database and click OK
You are then ready to proceed with your ValiReport application. The next time you will open the
corresponding Excel file, it will be recognised as a ValiReport application. The configuration
information is stored in an ini file with the same name as the ValiReport workbook.
2.2 OVERVIEW OF VALIREPORT
ADDITIONAL MENU ITEMS AND TOOLBAR

The menu bar presents the following items added to the Excel menu bar features:
Database, Runs, Application, ValiReport Help
The most useful commands are also grouped on the ValiReport toolbar:
Database:
Change Active DB…: change the active database
Rename active DB…: rename the active database
Create DB…: create a new database
Delete DB…: delete a database
Compact Active DB: compact the active database (Access only)
Runs:
Load Run…: import a run data file in ValiReport
Insert Run…: insert a new Run in the database
Auto Insert Run: insert a new Run in the database
Retrieve Run…: retrieve a Run from the database
Create Table and Chart: create Tables and Charts
Remove Run…: remove Runs from the database
Application:
Edit VALI Tag…: launch the EDIT tag window
Run Vali…: launch ValiOfflineEngine
Options…: customize your ValiReport application
Unmark ValiReport: convert the ValiReport workbook into a standard excel workbook
Display|ON/OFF Status: display object status in RUN sheet
Display|Struct Sheet: create a structure sheet showing the tags sorted out by units
Options…: customize your ValiReport application
ValiReport Help:
Contents and Index: activate the Help file
Belsim Home page: access the Belsim Home Page
About Belsim S.A.: display Belsim coordinates
THE SHEETS RUN AND STRUCT

In the RUN sheet, you can load the data of a single Vali run before storing it into the database. You
also use this sheet to retrieve a complete run from Vali Database.
By default, when opening a ValiReport, the last run (on basis of its date and time) will be loaded from
the Vali Database.
Optionally, a sheet called STRUCT can be created and presents the tags grouped by units.
See section Working Run by Run for more information.
REPORTS AND FLOW-SHEETS

The application enables to develop customized reports with data coming either from a single run or
aggregated between two selected dates. These tag references can be directly selected within your
worksheet through a dialogue box that you can activate by a double-clicking the cell where you
want to insert the tag reference. Optionally, ValiReport can flag in a different colour the cells
referring to suspect tags.
For more information see section Flow-Sheets and Reports.
TABLES AND CHARTS

The Create Table and Chart dialog box enables creating Tables and Charts with the data of several
tags over several runs. These table and charts are created in individual worksheets of your
workbook.
See section Tables and Charts for more information.
2.3 MOVING AND COPYING A VALIREPORT WORKBOOK
You can copy (or move) your ValiReport workbook as you wish, provided you copy (or move) its
associated ini file at the same time.
Attention: In a given Excel session, you can use only one ValiReport workbook. To work with
several ValiReport workbooks, you need to start several Excel sessions.
2.4 WORKING IN READ-ONLY MODE
Setting the parameter ReadOnly of the ini file to 1, will set the ValiReport workbook in Read-only
mode, deactivating all menu commands related to ValiDatabase as well as the menu commands
enabling to store or delete runs from ValiDatabase.
SECTION 3: HANDLING DATABASES

The operations you can perform from ValiReport depends on the type of database you use: Access or
MS-SQl.
3.1 ACCESS DATABASE
CREATING A DATABASE
You create a new database by choosing the menu item Database|Create DB… . Within the
displayed dialogue box you must enter the name for the new database.
It will initialise the new database with the necessary tables and relationships.
CHANGING THE ACTIVE DATABASE

To change a workbook's active database, execute menu command Database|Change Active DB… .
DELETING A DATABASE
The same way you create a database you can delete an existing one, by giving or by choosing the
database name in the dialog box. Therefore choose Database|Delete DB… from the menu bar and
the same dialogue box, as for creating a database, will appear.
Take care that all data stored in the Database will be lost forever, except if you have a backup.
CHANGING THE NAME OF ACTIVE DATABASE

To rename the active database, execute menu command Database|Rename Active DB from the menu
bar, and give the new name.
COMPACTING THE ACTIVE DATABASE

To compact the active database, execute menu command Database|Compact Active DB from the
menu bar.
If you delete runs from a database, it is recommended to compact it in order to decrease its size.
3.2 SQL-SERVER DATABASE
PRELIMINARY CONFIGURATION
If you wish to use a MS-SQL server database, you will need to create the SQL database using
ValiDatabaseCreator application (accessible from Vali 4 Windows menu).
FIGURE 6 - CREATING A S QL S ERVER VALIDATABAS E
SQL server authentication (mandatory):
IP/UNC: IP/UNC of the SQL server
User name: login name of administrator account used to create the database
Password: password of the administrator account
ValiDataBase (mandatory):
Create Database & Tables: a new Database must be created at the same time
Create Tables: only the tables need to be created
DB Name: name of the SQL database
ValiProduction : tables needed for ValiProduction have to be created
Create Plant (optional): must be checked if you want to create a new plant in Belsim license
server in order to access the database. If not checked, it is assumed you will use a plant
already defined in Belsim license server:
LicenseServer : IP / UNC of Belsim LicenseServer
Plant Name: name of the plant to be created
Create SQL User check-box: if checked the (Login) user will be created in the SQL server:
Login: user name to be used to connect to the SQL database
Password: corresponding password
Confirm password: password confirmation
The Show SQL Script button shows the SQL script code that needs to be executed. This enables to
execute the corresponding script at the SQL server management tool level.
The Plant can also be defined through Belsim LicenseManager under the Plant tab:
FIGURE 7 - CONFIGURING AN S QL S ERVER PLANT
CHANGING THE ACTIVE DATABASE

To change a workbook's active database, execute menu command Database|Change Active DB…
and enter the new database name.
3.3 DATABASE STRUCTURE
The ValiReport database contains 5 tables:
Runs: List of runs with their Date, and the associated model file, problem (main PFD),
model and Vali Engine version, Info strings, exit code and duration of the validation period
Tags: List of tags, with their comment, aggregation mode and a pointer to their Physical
Units
TagValues: Values of the tags for each run
PhysUnit: Auxiliary table with the list of physical units
ValiDatabaseVersion: version ID of the ValiDatabase
FIGURE 8 - VALI DATABAS E S TRUCTURE
SECTION 4: WORKING RUN BY RUN

If you have created flow-sheets with references to various Tag values, these values will always be
updated with active Run (in the RUN work-sheet).
4.1 LOAD RUN DATA FILES INTO VALIREPORT
The RUN sheet will contain all the tags data related to a particular run or aggregated values related
to runs between two selected dates. The data can be either be read from an archive file created by
ValiEngine or from ValiDatabase (see section "Retrieve Run Stored in the Database").
Attention: Run data files are to be created using the ARCHIVE command in a measurement file,
followed by the list of Tags to be included in the RUN or using "-ARC" Vali runtime option.
To read an archive file:
select command Runs|Load Run or click button on ValiReport toolbar
select the arc file to be read
In addition to the tag values the RUN sheet also displays coloured bullets in front of the tag names.
By default the bullet is green. It will be red if the corresponding stream or unit was OFF during the
run. No bullet is displayed for pseudo tags like the number of equations or the name of the model file.
Attention:
1. The default directory where ValiReport will search for the run files can be modified in the Option
dialogue (menu item Application|Options…)
2. The sheet "RUN" is protected, it's therefore not possible to make any change to the table.
3. Excel filters are activated on the top of each column, enabling to filter the data according to
various conditions on the contents of the columns.
4. The bullet colouring is not displayed by default. To activate the option, select the command
Application|Display|ON/OFF Status from the menu bar.
FIGURE 9 - THE S HEET RUN
For each tag the following data are available:
TagName: name of the tag
Units: physical units
Measured: measured value
Mea.Acc: accuracy of the measured value
Validated: validated value
Val.Acc: accuracy of the validated value
Penalty: penalty calculated on basis of the measured value

Note: For a PFD, Penalty is the sum of Penalties of all the Tags defined in the PFD.
Status: bit settings defining whether the tag is eliminated, flagged, filtered, etc.
Value 2 (2nd bit): eliminated or relaxed
Value 4 (3rd bit): filtered
Value 8 (4th bit): compensated
Value 16 (5th bit): BAD
Value 32 (6th bit): FLAT 1
Value 64 (7th bit): FLAT 2
Value 512: tag not used in this run
Used: value used by the reconciliation engine, that if after filtering and compensation
Used.Acc: accuracy used by the reconciliation engine
Used.Pen: penalty calculated on basis of the used value

Note: For Tags, Used Penalty and Penalty are the same values. For a PFD, Used Penalty is
the sum of Used Penalties of all the Tags defined in the PFD, except eliminated Tags.
Used.Gain: gain of accuracy between the used and validated values
VDI.Pen: penalty calculated using VDI formula on basis of the used value
InUse: flag indicating whether the tag was actually used in the current run
Filtered: flag indicating whether the tag was filtered
Compensated: flag indicating whether the tag was compensated
Eliminated: flag indicating whether the tag was eliminated by the gross error detection
mechanism
Aggregation: mode of aggregation (1=Average, 2=Begin date, 3=End Date, 4=Sum)
Comment: tag comment
4.2 STORE RUN DATA INTO A DATABASE
To store a run into a ValiDatabase:
select the command Runs|Insert Run or click
nnter the date and time of the run. If a "RUNDATE" tag has been specified at the creation of
the run file, it will be used by default. Otherwise, "DATE" and "TIME" tag will be used if
present in the run file. If no such information tags are present in the run file, the default
date and time will be the current one
FIGURE 10 - GIVING A DATE AND TIME S TAMP TO A RUN
4.3 AUTOMATICALLY STORE RUNS INTO A DATABASE
To automatically store runs in a ValiDatabase:
select the command Runs|Auto Insert Run….
The auto insert Run stores ALL arc files from the default Input Files directory in the database
without prompting the user. The date and time of the run must be specified in the arc file..
The way runs will be inserted in the database depends on the settings defined in the DB Settings page
of the Application|Options notebook.
FIGURE 11 - DB S ETTINGS
Re place : any e xisting run with the same date and time will be re move d and the ne w data will
be put in place , re using the highe st ID run numbe r.
Add a ne w run is always cre ate d
Appe nd the data will be me rge d with the run with the same date and time and highe st ID. If
some tags are duplicate d the n the ir value will be update d with the ne w data.
4.4 RETRIEVE RUN STORED IN THE DATABASE
If you want to see the contents of a given run that is stored in the database:
select the command Runs|Retrieve Run… or click in the ValiReport toolbar
select the desired run from the dialogue box, from the list of available runs for the active
database and click OK
FIGURE 12 - RETRIEVING A RUN FROM THE DATABAS E
Attention:
1. The runs are normally identified by a run number, which is unique in the database, and a date/
time that you have entered when storing it in the database.
2. The run continues to be stored in the database and all kind of changes do not affect the database
contents. You can however choose the Runs|Insert Run… command from the menu bar to store
it as a new run into the database.
You can also retrieve aggregated data from runs between two selected dates. The type of aggregation
that will be made is specified in ValiModeller in the historian page of the tags.
When using the aggregation mode, the measured, used and validated values of the tags will be
aggregated according to the user selected aggregation mode, the flags (filtered, compensated, …) will
be summed up (giving thus the number of runs in which the tag has been filtered, compensated, …)
and all other values (accuracies, penalties, gain) will be averaged.
4.5 REMOVING RUNS FROM THE DATABASE
To remove runs from the database:
choose the Runs|Remove Run… command, which displays the dialogue box shown in
figure below
select the runs to be deleted and click OK
FIGURE 13 - DELETING RUNS FROM THE DATABAS E
4.6 GROUPING TAGS BY UNITS
If you defined a structure file (see section Working Directory) an additional sheet called STRUCT will
be created. It presents the same king of information as the RUN sheet but the tags will be grouped by
units according to the contents of the structure file.
Attention: The Struct sheet is not created by default. To activate the option, click on the ValiReport
menubar: Application|Display|Struc Sheet. The Struct sheet will be created the next time you insert
a run.
FIGURE 14 - THE S HEET S TRUCT
SECTION 5: TABLES AND CHARTS

With Tables and Charts you can display values of selected tags for a number of runs, either as Tables
in worksheets or as Trend charts
5.1 CREATING A TABLE
To create a table, activate the menu command Runs|Create Table and Chart to open the Create Table
and Chart dialog box. If a table already exists in the current sheet, you need to select the New Sheet
option.
FIGURE 15 - TABLE AND CHART DIALOG BOX
In the left side of the dialog box you will select the tag values to be written in the table. You can use
the mask field to limit the number of tags that are displayed in the selection box.
In the right side of the dialog box, you can select the runs in different ways. You can also request to
select only converged runs avoiding polluting the data with inconsistent data
When you have selected the tag values and the runs click OK to generate the table.
5.2 CREATING A CHART
You create charts using the same dialog box as for creating Tables.
select the Drawchart option at the bottom of the dialog box
select whether you want you chart in a separate Chart sheet or embedded in the same
sheet as the table
define a Title for your graph
Attention: Once charts have been defined you can modify their appearance as you would do for any
Excel chart.
FIGURE 16 - A TYPICAL CHART
5.3 UPDATING TABLES AND CHARTS
To update a Table (and its associated charts), select the corresponding worksheet and click the Runs|
Create Table and Chart menu command. The dialog box will open again with the option Update
Sheet activated. You can modify the selection of runs and tags to be displayed in the Table.
SECTION 6: FLOW-SHEETS AND REPORTS

The application also enables you to design or import flow-sheets and customised reports.
Another feature is to change the colour of the cells containing suspect tags, i.e. with high PENALTY.
If wanted, you can activate this feature only for some cells.
6.1 CREATING A NEW FLOW-SHEET
Add a new worksheet by right-clicking the mouse on the sheet tabs at the bottom of the sheet
window. Select the Insert… item from the list and double-click on the worksheet's icon to create it.
The worksheet is inserted at the left side of the active sheet.
Rename the worksheet, if you wish so, by double-clicking it on the sheet tabs at the bottom of the
sheet window. You can name it for example as Flowsheet1 to distinguish it from the worksheets
that supports the charts.
6.2 DRAWING THE FLOW-SHEET
Use the drawing tools of Excel to draw the objects on your flow-sheet or import an existing drawing.
Display the toolbar by activating the check mark near Drawing in the dialogue box that appears
when selecting the View|Toolbars command. You can then use the different design functions as you
like.
If you already have examples of flow-sheets it is very easy to import them into ValiReport. However
you must ensure that the flow-sheet has a *.wmf (Microsoft Windows MetaFile) extension. This file
extension is, at the moment, the only way to add near your design objects tag references selected
directly from the run in sheet RUN.
On the worksheet where you want to insert it select Insert|Picture|From File… and look, in the
dialogue box, for the directory where it is stored.
Once the object is in the worksheet select Format|AutoShape…, choose the Colors and Lines pad and
activate option button No Fill from Fill group.
Now you have, simultaneously, access to the flow-sheet and to the cells.
To have a better view of your flow-sheet it is possible to customise the columns size as well as the
flow-sheet's zooming factor. Left-click and drag the right border on the columns header of the desired
column to resize it. Change the zoom of the flow-sheet in the dialogue box that you activate by
selecting View|Zoom.
FIGURE 17 - A TYPICAL FLOW-S HEET
6.3 INSERTING TAG REFERENCES: FSTAG
The dialogue box is displayed by double-clicking a cell in the flow-sheet:
FIGURE 18 - WORK WITH A TAG REFERENCE ON A FLOW-S HEET
Select tag name from the drop-down list box and activate any of the types of values you want to
select from the RUN sheet. Click OK and the value will be inserted in the flow-sheet's active cell.
If you also wish to mark the cells containing suspect tags, i.e. high Penalty, activate the check box
near Highlight Cell with PENALTY Value of the Measurement. The cell's colour will change
according to the selected colours and the threshold value in the Options Dialog from the item menu
bar Application|Options.
The default value corresponds to the text displayed when ValiReport don't find a value for the
corresponding tag.
The dialogue box will create a call to the function FSTAG in the corresponding cell:
FSTAG ("TAGNAME", RUNS, IDFIELD, IDCOLOUR, [DEFAULT VALUE])
where:
"TAGNAME" : the name of the tag. Can refer an Excel cell (should not be enclosed in double
quotes in this case)
IDFIELD: field to display:
1: tag name
2: measured value
3: measured accuracy
4: validated value
5: validated accuracy
6: physical unit
7: comment
8: penalty
9: status
10: used value
11: used accuracy
12: used penalty
13: used gain
14: VDI penalty
15: in use flag
16: filtered flag
17: compensated flag
18: eliminated flag
19: aggregation mode
IDCOLOUR: 0: no color highlight; 1: value with a high penalty will be highlighted
DEFAULT VALUE: value displayed if no value is retrieved
6.4 INSERTING AGGREGATED TAG REFERENCES: BLSTAGC
An alternate function enables to display values aggregated over a number of runs:

BLSTAGC ("TAGNAME", "BEGINDATE", "ENDDATE", IDFIELD, "AGGREG", [CONVERSION, DEFAULTVALUE,
where:
"TAGNAME" : the name of the tag. Can refer an Excel cell (should not be enclosed in double
quotes in this case)
"BEGINDATE": begin date of the aggregation
"ENDDATE": end date of the aggregation
IDFIELD: field to display:
1: tag name
2: measured value
3: measured accuracy
4: validated value
5: validated accuracy
6: physical unit
7: comment
8: penalty
9: status
10: used value
11: used accuracy
12: used penalty
13: used gain
14: VDI penalty
15: in use flag
16: filtered flag
17: compensated flag
18: eliminated flag
19: aggregation mode
"AGGREG": aggregation procedure:
BEGIN: value at begindate
END: value at enddate
SUM: sum of all values between begindate and enddate
AVG: average of all values between begindate and enddate
COUNT: count of number of values between begindate and enddate
CONVERSION: an optional multiplying factor
DEFAULTVALUE: an optional default value
CRITERIA: an optional criteria on the selected field (Example: "> 4" will select only values
above 4)
Example:
=blstagc("14A2470";"1/9/2006";"1/10/2006";2;"AVG")
will calculate the average of tag 14A2470 between the 1st September and the 1st October 2006.
6.5 MODIFYING TAG REFERENCES
If you want to change a FSTAG tag reference, double-click on it and make the desired changes on the
displayed dialogue box.
Alternatively you can edit the contents of the cell direclty. This mode also applies for BLSTAGC
function.
6.6 DELETING TAG REFERENCES
To delete a tag reference, click simply the Delete button on the dialogue box.
6.7 CHANGING COLOURS AND THRESHOLD VALUE
By default, the application assigns no colour to the cell if its PENALTY is less than 4, and red if it is
bigger than or equal to 4. The user can modify these default colours and the threshold value in the
Option dialog from the item menu bar Application|Options.
FIGURE 19 - PENALTY COLOURS OPTIONS
Each colour can be manually defined by clicking on the background and/or on the text of the boxes. A
set of predefined couple of colours can be selected in the drop down boxes.
The threshold value defined the colours of an ValiReport cell by comparing the penalty of the
measurement with that value. You can also toggle OFF the colouring of all cells or colour every cells
with the penalty value whatever you selected for each measurement display.
SECTION 7: WORKING DIRECTORY

ValiReport application use default work directories that can be customised.
ValiReport application uses three working directories:
DataBase: folder containing the Access databases
Archive: unused at this time
InputFiles: folder containing the run data files (arc files)
To change the working directories, use the menu bar item Application|Options.
FIGURE 20 - DIRECTORY OPTIONS
All databases must be in the respective working directory. If you change the working directory, the
databases of the former directory will not be accessible from ValiReport interface.
The input files (with the termination "-arc") should be placed in the corresponding directory. When
the user load an "arc" file from the interface, he can however browse for another directory. On the
other hand, the ValiDBLoader application doesn't prompt any question to the user and only look for
available information in that directory.
The structure file is used to group the tags in the Struct page (see sub-section Groupings Tags by
Units).
SECTION 8: VALIDBLOADER APPLICATION

ValiDBLoader application is located in the install directory of ValiReport. It performs the same tasks
as the Auto Insert feature (see section 3, menu item Runs|Auto Insert Run). ValiDBLoader has been
designed for online operation and can easily be automated via ValiScheduler. It receives as
parameter the name of an ini file (e.g. ValiDBLoader.ini) describing where the run data files are
located, the name of the database, etc.
Attention: You can use the ini file associated to your ValiReport as ini file for ValiDBLoader
ValiDBLoader reads all run data files (*.arc) and stores the data into ValiDatabase to be exploited
through ValiReport. The file ValiDBLoader.log contains the log of the operations
FIGURE 21 - VALIDBLOADER
Alternatively you give as second parameter the name of an arc (or mea) file to ValiDBLoader, in
which case only the designated file will be loaded into the ValiDatabase.
8.1 INI FILE FOR AN ACCESS DATABASE
[LicenseServer]
URL of the Be lsim Lice nse Se rve r
Url=localhost
[Parameters]
TypeDataBase=ACCESS
Type of DataBase
Replace=DBReplace
DBRe place , DBMe rge or DBAdd
[Directory]
Input File=D:\Projects\ValiReport_MR\InputFiles\
Input File s folde r
[ACCESS]
Directory=D:\Projects\ValiReport_MR\Access\
Database Folde r
DataBase=test.mdb
Database Name
8.2 INI FILE FOR A SQL SERVER DATABASE
[LicenseServer]
Url=belsim08
URL of the Be lsim Lice nse Se rve r
[Parameters]
TypeDataBase=SQLSERVER
Type of DataBase
Replace=DBReplace
DBRe place , DBMe rge or DBAdd
[Directory]
Input File=D:\Projects\ValiReport_MR\InputFiles\
Input File s folde r
[SQLSERVER]
PlantName=VALIREPORT_OL
Plant Name in Lice nse Se rve r
DataBase=VALIREPORT_OL
Database name
8.3 ADDITIONAL SECTIONS IN THE INI FILE
You can now change the behavior of the program regarding the optional second argument by adding
the following section in the INI file:
[SECOND ARGUMENT]
StoreArcFile=0
Arc File is re name d (1) or not (0)
StoreMeaFile=0
Me a File is re name d (1) or not (0)
If there is no second argument:
[MULTIPLE LOAD]
LoadArcFiles=1
All Arc File s will be loade d (1) or not (0)
LoadMeaFiles=0
All Me a File s will be loade d (1) or not (0)
StoreArcFiles=1
Arc File s are re name d (1) or not (0)
StoreMeaFiles=0
Me a File s are re name d (1) or not (0)
Log system:
[LOGFILE OPTION]
Path=
Path of the log file
File=
Name of the log file
LogLevel=INF
Error Me ssage s Le ve l
Backup Option=BACKUP
MAXSIZE=10
Maximum size of the log file (in MB)
Dictionary MEA file:
Some values that must be interpreted by the program are not constant (in a MEA file). So, a
dictionary file can be specified to interpret these values.
The path can be absolute or relative to the ValiDBLoader INI file:
[DICTIONARY]
Path=Dictionary\Dictionary.mea
Path of the dictionary file
Production Accounting:
For Production Accounting applications, the product movements data can be stored in dedicated
tables.
[PRODUCT]
LoadProduct=
Product move me nts data will be loade d (1) or not (0)
LogDirectory=
Path of the log file spe cific to Production Accounting
LogFile=
Name of the log file
BlsFile=
Name of the VALI 4 mode l file with its path. ValiDBLoade r
will re trie ve the Are as, Move me nts and Sub-Move me nts
from the mode l file .
ProductDictionary=
The Products.dic file with its path. ValiDBLoade r will re trie ve
the list of products from this dictionary file .
8.4 VALIDBLOADER STATUS
At the end of its execution, ValiDBLoader produces a file named ValiDbLoader_log.ini containing the
keyword EXITCODE followed by a numeric code:
-1: a fatal error did occur
0: ValiDBLoader was successful
Example:
[EXITCODE]
ExitCode=0
SECTION 9: RUNNING VALI

From ValiReport you can also run ValiLink and ValiEngine
To activate this option use either the menu command Application|Run Vali or press the button
from the toolbar. This opens a new Notebook where you can specify the Vali runtime options.
FIGURE 22 - VALI DIALOG BOX
In this page you specify the settings of VALI (written in the pc.vif file):
which PFD of your model must be run,
the names of the Measurement, Tag and Flex sheets: each of these sheets will be written
under the name <sheet1>.mea, <sheet2>.tag and <sheet3>.rea and will passed over to VALI,
the runtime options (see Running the model),
the name and location of the VALI model file,
the name and location of the VALI executable.
Clicking on "Run" button will execute VALI once and will use a ValiOffline license.
To access the advanced feature click on the button "Advanced >>"
FIGURE 23 - ADVANCED VALI DIALOG BOX
The Advanced page is used to specify:
whether to run VALI once (default option) or let Excel execute VALI several time in a row
which steps are to be performed:
reading from a PIMS (using an external tool like ValiLink),
executing a Visual Basic Macro before running VALI
running VALI,
executing a Visual Basic Macro after running VALI
writing back result into a PIMS (using an external tool like ValiLink),
importing and saving the results in ValiReport database (ValiDatabase).
Making a back-up of the working directory
the Begin Date and either End Date or Duration period to be considered for the Validation.
These settings are used by ValiLink application,
Executing VALI once uses a ValiOffline Engine license.
Executing VALI several times uses a ValiOnline Engine license. See the MultiRun tab for detailed
configuration explanation.
Clicking on the button "Advanced <<" will send you back to the non advanced settings.
In the page VALI you specify the settings of VALI (written in the pc.vif file):
which PFD of your model must be run,
the names of the Measurement, Tag and Flex sheets: each of these sheets will be written
under the name <sheet1>.mea, <sheet2>.tag and <sheet3>.rea and will passed over to VALI,
the runtime options (see Running the model),
the name and location of the VALI model file,
the name and location of the VALI executable.
FIGURE 24 - VALI PAGE OF THE VALI DIALOG BOX
In the Advanced Configuration page you specify the settings for ValiLink :
the name of the INI file for reading from the PIMS,
the name of the INI file for writing to the PIMS,
the name and location of ValiLink executable.
The Visual Basic macro to execute before VALI
The Visual Basic macro to execute after VALI
The syntax to specify a macro is:
MyVBMacro to execute a macro defined in the ValiReport Workbook
MyWorkbook!MyVBMacro to execute a macro defined in another Excel Workbook named

"MyWorkbook":
FIGURE 25 - ADVANCED CONFIGURATION OF THE VALI DIALOG BOX
In the MultiRun page you specify the settings to execute VALI several times in a row:
First Run [input]: the number ID of the first run, can be linked to an excel cell
Last Run [input]: the number ID of the last run, can be linked to an excel cell
Current Run [output]: the number ID of the current run, must be linked to an excel cell
VALI will be processed several times starting from the First Run ID to the Last Run ID by increment
of 1. The First Run and Last Run can be specified directly in the text box or linked to an Excel cell. The
current run ID will be printed in the linked cell to enable dynamic behaviour of the measurement
sheet.
Example:
First Run = 5
Last Run = 11
=> Current Run will have the values 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11
The syntax to link a text box to a cell is:
C2 for the cell located in the second row and third column if you link the text box to a cell
of the Excel sheet used as measurement file
Sheet1!C2 for the cell located in the second row and third column if you link the text box to
a cell of the Excel sheet "Sheet1":
FIGURE 26 - MULTIRUN
Attention: The Multi Run feature uses a ValiOnline Engine.
CHAPTER 10
VALIANALYTICS
X
ValiAnalytics is an easy to use graphical user interface for sensitivity analysis of your results and
your model. All results for the sensitivity analysis can be accessed through this interface, there is a
graphical view of the results. Navigation between related tags is also easy in this interface. In
addition, general information about the model can be found in this interface.
ValiAnalytics provides important information like:
The error detectability of measurements, which is the maximum error that can occur on a
measured value before the gross error mechanism can detect and remove the error
The maximum bias of measurements, which is the maximum error that will occur on the
reconciled value of the variable just before the error detectability limit for the
corresponding measurement is reached
The robustness of KPIs, which is an indication whether errors on measured values will or
not be detected before some given KPI is biased by an amplitude exceeding its uncertainty
ValiAnalytics can be found in the bin sub-directory of Belsim installation directory. It can also be
opened directly from ValiModeller, using the ValiAnalytics button in the toolbar.
ValiAnalytics offers two different views to display your results:
1. A global view, displaying general results about your model, such as number of redundancies,
value of chi-square test, a distribution of gain on tags in your model, average gain on each
measurement type, etc.
FIGURE 1 - GLOBAL VIEW
2. An individual view, showing information about a selected tag, such as Gaussian distribution of
uncertainty, list of contributors to uncertainty, list of tags dependent on selected tags, etc.
FIGURE 2 - INDIVIDUAL VIEW
SECTION 2: INTEGRATION IN VALISUITE

ValiAnalytics displays sensitivity analysis results from the sensitivity analysis program, that can be
found in bin directory of VALI installation. Details on how to use this program can be found in found
in Sensitivity analysis help.
When processing runs, ValiEngine produces a file called <main>.fmt where <main> is the name of the
pfd or unit which was last run, and containing various information about current run.
If Vali is run with option -SNS (by checking "Sensitivity report"), this file will be processed by the
sensitivity analysis program, which will calculate sensitivity results for each measured value.
Variables set as constants will be shown, but influence of these variables is not shown (impact of
constants can de obtained by setting parameter "Constants" to "are set as measurements" in unit
OPTVAL). The sensitivity analysis program can also be used as a stand-alone program. For more
information, please refer to Sensitivity analysis help.
The sensitivity analysis program produces a file called <main>_xml.res containing all sensitivity
analysis results, as well as some general information about current run (number of measurements,
redundancies, value of chi-square test...). Definition of the different information produced for each tag
can be found in the Tags table description. Definition of the relation between related tags can be
found in the Precedents/dependents tables description. Be aware that this file can be quite big.
Path between the different applications is shown below:
FIGURE 3 - FROM VALIENGINE TO VALIANALYTICS
SECTION 3: GENERALITIES
This section gives general information about ValiAnalytics, and serves as a getting started guide.
Covered topics are:
toolbar
status bar
general functionalities
3.1 TOOLBAR
The toolbar is located at the top of the window and can be used to access ValiAnalytics main
functionalities.
FIGURE 4 - TOOLBAR
Hovering the mouse on any of the button will display a tooltip describing the function of this button.
OPEN FILE
To open a file, simply click on the open file button. Clicking this button will open a file browser
window, allowing you to open sensitivity analysis results file (<main>_xml.res). In the case where
ValiEngine was last executed without sensitivity analysis selected, a prompt window will ask you if
you wish to execute a sensitivity analysis for this later run.
FIGURE 5 - VALI RES ULTS MORE RECENT THAN S ENS ITIVITY RES ULTS
You can open a file by entering a command-line argument to ValiAnalytics.
OPEN HELP
The open help button will open this help. You can also press the F1 key to display the help at any
time.
RELOAD FILE
The reload file button allows you to reload the current file, i.e. to read the last version of the file, for
example in the case where you would execute a sensitivity analysis outside of ValiAnalytics. In that
case there is no need to browse to find the file again. An error message will be displayed if no file has
been opened yet.
PROCEED TO SENSITIVITY ANALYSIS

This button launches the sensitivity analysis program. If no file is opened in ValiAnalytics, you will
be requested to browse to the directory where the model file is located. If a file is opened, sensitivity
analysis results will be recalculated for the current file.
PREVIOUS/NEXT TAG
These buttons enable navigation between previously selected tags. These buttons are disabled when
first starting the application, as no tag has been previously selected. Button previous will be enabled
once a second tag is selected; button next will be enabled after button previous has been clicked.
SWITCH VIEW
ValiAnalytics offers two views. Views can be switched by selecting desired view in the toolbar.
FIT CONTENT
The different parts of the ValiAnalytics window can be resized independently, allowing you to focus
on the zone you're interested in. By pushing the fit content button, the different parts of the window
will be automatically resized to divide the screen in four equal parts.
HIDE/SHOW BUTTON
This button, located at the extreme right of the window, allows to show or hide the right hand part
of the window, offering the possibility to have a better overview of tags table. This button's text
changes according to the action performed when clicked.
3.2 STATUS BAR
The status bar displays general information about the current run, as well as the name of the current
user and the name of the License Server to which you are connected.
FIGURE 6 - S TATUS BAR
The different elements that are displayed in this status bar are (in order, from left to right):
Current status of application, i.e. if application is loading file ("Loading...") or idle ("For
help, press F1")
IP address of the License Server to which application is connected
Name of current user
Version of sensitivity analysis program (Sensiv.exe) used
Date and time of run
Quality of results (value of penalty divided by value of chi-square)
Penalty of run (objective function)
Name of unit or pfd that was processed (<main>)
3.3 GENERAL FUNCTIONALITIES
ABOUT TABLES
Tables can be customized in ValiAnalytics. By right-clicking on a table, you will get access to a list of
optional columns that can be displayed. The options you choose are saved in <user>.ini file, and are
reused each time you open ValiAnalytics.
By right-clicking on tables, it is also possible to export displayed results to Excel, and to print current
table.
ABOUT CHARTS
All presented charts can be viewed in an external window. To open this window, simply double click
on a chart. This operation opens a second window, presenting the chart in bigger size, and enabling
to save this chart in selected format. Saved file will be located next to sensitivity analysis results
(same folder as <main>_xml.res file).
FIGURE 7 - CHART WINDOW
File name is set to tag name by default.This name can be changed using text box located at the bottom
of the window. Format of output file can also be chosen between png, jpg, bmp and gif, using drop-
down menu. Size of saved picture is the same as the display size. To save chart, just click the Save
button. This will close the window.
FIGURE 8 - S AVE CHART PANEL
ABOUT HELP
Help file can be displayed any time, by pressing F1 key, or by clicking on the help button ( ) in the
toolbar.
SECTION 4: GLOBAL VIEW

The global view is the default view that is shown when ValiAnalytics is opened. It displays general
results about your model such as list of tags, gain distribution, number of redundancies, quality of
results, etc.
FIGURE 9 - GLOBAL VIEW
Global view is divided in four main parts:
GLOBAL TAGS TABLE

The global tags table displays the list of tags in the model, and allows filtering these tags in order to
facilitate finding the tag you are looking for.
FIGURE 10 - GLOBAL TAGS TABLE
GAIN DISTRIBUTION CHART

The gain distribution chart gives an overview of the number of tags for each level of gain.
FIGURE 11 - GAIN DIS TRIBUTION CHART
RUN INFORMATION
The run information part gives a general overview of reconciliation results, and a graphical
representation of the chi-square curve, with actual point plotted.
FIGURE 12 - GENERAL RUN INFORMATION
GAIN BY MEASUREMENT TYPE

The gain by measurement type chart shows the average gain for each measurement type.
FIGURE 13 - GAIN BY MEAS UREMENT TYPE
4.1 GLOBAL TAGS TABLE
The global tags table is visible in both global and individual view. It contains all information related
to tags, i.e.:
Measured value and its accuracy (in absolute): actual measured value and the accuracy for
this value
Reconciled value and accuracy (in absolute): value after reconciliation, and accuracy
calculated by error propagation mechanism
Penalty: a value that reflects the difference between the measured and reconciled values
Gain: the gain in uncertainty of the tag
Error detectability: the maximum error that can occur on a measurement before it is
eliminated by gross error elimination mechanism
Maximum bias: the maximum error that will occur on a reconciled value if an error occurs
on the measured value, just before error detectability limit is reached for that measured
value
Measured and reconciled values and accuracies, gain and penalty can also be found in ValiModeller,
html reports, and are available through ValiReport. Refer to VALI help for more information on these
modules.
Error detectability and maximum bias are only available in ValiAnalytics. The error detectability
represents the deviation that can occur on a measured value before it is eliminated by gross error,
assuming there is no error on any other measurement. The maximum bias represents the change on
the reconciled value if an error equal to error detectability occurs on the measured value of this tag, i.
e. just before gross error elimination.
FILTERING
At the top of the table, you can find text boxes allowing to filter the global tags table. This can be used
to search on tags, but also to get information on parts of the model, as global gain charts and gain by
measurement type charts are synchronized with the global tags table.
FIGURE 14 - FILTERS ON TAGS TABLE
Three different types of filtering are available:
Name: filtering the name of tags. Enter the name of the tag(s) you are looking for.
Wildcards can be used (? for one character, * for several consecutive characters)
Type: filtering on measurement type (temperature, pressure...). Types follow VALI

nomenclature (T=temperature, P=pressure, MASSF=mass flow-rate...). Wildcards can be
used (? for one character, * for several consecutive characters)
Drop-down: pre-defined criteria to select tags:
All: displays all tags
OFF: displays only tags that are OFF in the model
CST: displays only constants
Eliminated: displays only eliminated tags
Flagged: displays only flagged tags
At the top-right of the tags table, the number of displayed tags vs. total number of tags is given.
FIGURE 15 - NUMBER OF TAGS DIS PLAYED
TAGS INFORMATION
At the bottom of the table, several boxes give you information about currently selected tag:
Tag name
Owner name: the name of the object (unit or stream) on which the tag is defined
Var. Type: the type of variable.
FIGURE 16 - TAG INFORMATION
RIGHT CLICK
Right clicking on the table offers the possibility to export the table to MS Excel or to wordpad, and to
show hidden columns, which are:
Penalty
Gain
Error detectability
Maximum bias
4.2 GAIN DISTRIBUTION CHART
The chart on the upper right part of the window gives a graphical representation of distribution of
gain in accuracy on tags of the model. This chart is synchronized with tags table, which means that
only tags that are displayed in the global tags table are taken into account in this chart.
FIGURE 17 - GAIN DIS TRIBUTION CHART
This pie chart is divided in four different levels:
Low gain, white: gain is lower than 10%
Acceptable gain, yellow: gain is between 10% and 29%
Good gain, green: gain is between 29% and 42%
Excellent gain, dark green: gain is above 42%
For each zone, the number of tags that have gain in this interval is given in the legend of the chart, as
well as the percentage of tags that this number represents.
4.3 GENERAL INFORMATION
The lower left part of the window contains general information about current run.
On the left, a table displays general information about the model:
Total number of tags defined in the model (can be different than number of tags used for
reconciliation: streams or units OFF...)
Number of equations in the model
Number of variables (measured and not measured) in the model
Number of variables considered constant
Number of redundancy (obvious, trivial and total)
Redundancy by number of tags (average redundancy per tag, expressed in percent)
Objective function (sum of penalties)
Value of chi-square test
Quality of dataset (objective function/value of chi-square; the smaller, the better)
Number of bounds activated by solver
Number of eliminated tags
Number of flagged tags
Number of filtered tags
FIGURE 18 - GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE
Next to this table, a chart shows the chi-square curve, with actual value marked by an orange line
and the value of the objective function is represented by an orange square. This value is below the
curve when quality number is lower than one and above the curve when quality number is greater
than one (the lower quality the better).
FIGURE 19 - CHI-S QUARE CHART
4.4 GAIN IN UNCERTAINTY BY MEASUREMENT TYPE
The lower right part of the window presents the average gain by measurement type. For each
selected measurement type, the average gain on measurement of this type is represented. This chart
is synchronized with the global tags table, which means that only tags that are displayed in the tags
table are taken into account in this chart.
FIGURE 20 - GAIN BY MEAS UREMENT TYPE
The different measurement types available in the model can be displayed by right-clicking on the
chart, and selecting desired type.
FIGURE 21 - S ELECT TYPES TO S HOW
SECTION 5: INDIVIDUAL VIEW

The individual view shows results for currently selected tag. It can be shown by clicking the
Individual view button located in the toolbar.
FIGURE 22 - VALIANALYTICS - INDIVIDUAL VIEW
Individual view is divided in four main parts:
GLOBAL TAGS TABLE

The global tags table displays the list of tags in the model, and allows filtering these tags in order to
facilitate finding the tag you are looking for.
FIGURE 23 - GLOBAL TAGS TABLE
TAG UNCERTAINTY DISTRIBUTION

The uncertainty distribution chart represents the Gaussian distribution of measured and reconciled
values, as well as bars representing the values of gain and penalty.
FIGURE 24 - UNCERTAINTY DIS TRIBUTION
PRECEDENTS/DEPENDENTS TABLES
The precedent and dependent tables show the list of tags contributing to uncertainty of selected tag
and tags of which selected tag contributes to their uncertainty.
FIGURE 25 - PRECEDENTS /DEPENDENTS TABLES
PRECEDENTS/DEPENDENTS CHARTS
The precedents and dependent charts show different charts related to precedent and dependent tags,
that can be switched using drop-down menu.
FIGURE 26 - PRECEDENTS /DEPENDENTS CHARTS
5.1 GLOBAL TAGS TABLE
The global tags table is visible in both global and individual view. It contains all information related
to tags, i.e.:
Measured value and its accuracy (in absolute): actual measured value and the accuracy for
this value
Reconciled value and accuracy (in absolute): value after reconciliation, and accuracy
calculated by error propagation mechanism
Penalty: a value that reflects the difference between the measured and reconciled values
Gain: the gain in uncertainty of the tag
Error detectability: the maximum error that can occur on a measurement before it is
eliminated by gross error elimination mechanism
Maximum bias: the maximum error that will occur on a reconciled value if an error occurs
on the measured value, just before error detectability limit is reached for that measured
value
Measured and reconciled values and accuracies, gain and penalty can also be found in ValiModeller,
html reports, and are available through ValiReport. Refer to VALI help for more information on these
modules.
Error detectability and maximum bias are only available in ValiAnalytics. The error detectability
represents the deviation that can occur on a measured value before it is eliminated by gross error,
assuming there is no error on any other measurement. The maximum bias represents the change on
the reconciled value if an error equal to error detectability occurs on the measured value of this tag, i.
e. just before gross error elimination.
FILTERING
At the top of the table, you can find text boxes allowing to filter the global tags table. This can be used
to search on tags, but also to get information on parts of the model, as global gain charts and gain by
measurement type charts are synchronized with the global tags table.
FIGURE 27 - FILTERS ON TAGS TABLE
Three different types of filtering are available:
Name: filtering the name of tags. Enter the name of the tag(s) you are looking for.
Wildcards can be used (? for one character, * for several consecutive characters)
Type: filtering on measurement type (temperature, pressure...). Types follow VALI

nomenclature (T=temperature, P=pressure, MASSF=mass flow-rate...). Wildcards can be
used (? for one character, * for several consecutive characters)
Drop-down: pre-defined criteria to select tags:
All: displays all tags
OFF: displays only tags that are OFF in the model
CST: displays only constants
Eliminated: displays only eliminated tags
Flagged: displays only flagged tags
At the top-right of the tags table, the number of displayed tags vs. total number of tags is given.
FIGURE 28 - NUMBER OF TAGS DIS PLAYED
TAGS INFORMATION
Tag name
RIGHT CLICK
Penalty
Gain
Error detectability
Maximum bias
5.2 TAG CHART
The upper right part of the individual view shows the Gaussian distribution of measured and
reconciled values, and bars representing the value of gain and penalty of currently selected tag.
FIGURE 30 - TAG CHART
The tag chart is made of 3 different parts: the gain bar, the penalty bar and the Gaussian distribution
of the tag.
GAIN BAR
The gain bar displays the gain (between 0% and 100%). The ability to reconcile the tag can be viewed
directly based on color:
White: gain lower than 10% (low gain)
Yellow: gain between 10% and 29% (acceptable gain)
Green: gain between 29% and 42% (good gain)
Dark green: gain greater than 42% (excellent gain)
FIGURE 31 - TAG GAIN GAUGE
PENALTY BAR
The penalty bar displays the penalty. Quality of measured value can be viewed based on color:
Green: good quality (penalty less than 1)
Orange: medium quality (penalty between 1 and 4)
Red: poor quality (penalty greater than 4)
FIGURE 32 - TAG PENALTY GAUGE
TAG GAUSSIAN DISTRIBUTION

The distribution chart displays Gaussian distribution of measured and reconciled values, (upper
part of the chart). It shows also a Gantt-type view of uncertainty, error detectability and maximum
bias (centered on value)
FIGURE 33 - TAG GAUS S IAN DIS TRIBUTION
When error detectability is too big (i.e. greater than 100*reconciled uncertainty), the distribution's
minimum and maximum axis values will be calculated according to the uncertainty of the tag, and
minimum and maximum values of error detectability will not be visible. In this case, the Expand
button will be enabled; by clicking on this button, minimum and maximum values of error
detectability will be displayed on chart. In this case, the Gaussian distribution can be very narrow.
5.3 PRECEDENTS/DEPENDENTS TABLES
The lower left part of the individual view contains two similar pages that can be accessed using tabs:
the precedents table, containing the list of tags that contribute to the uncertainty of
currently selected tag
the dependents table, containing the list of tags which selected tag contributes to their
uncertainty
FIGURE 34 - PRECEDENTS AND DEPENDENTS TABLES
These two tables contain the same information about each tag. Based on which table you are looking
at, the meaning of some information can differ. Information that can be found in this table is listed
below:
PRECEDENTS TABLE DEPENDENTS TABLE
Measured uncertainty Uncertainty of measured value Uncertainty of measured value

of precedent of dependent
Reconciled uncertainty Uncertainty of reconciled value Uncertainty of reconciled value

of precedent of dependent
PRECEDENTS TABLE DEPENDENTS TABLE
Uncertainty contribution Contribution of current Contribution of selected tag to

precedent to selected tag current dependent uncertainty
uncertainty
Derivative value (sensitivity) Derivative value of selected tag Derivative value of dependent
with respect to current tag with respect to selected tag,
precedent, i.e. how much will i.e. how much will change
change selected tag if precedent dependent tag if selected tag is
is increased by 1 increased by 1
Penalty Penalty of precedent Penalty of dependent
Robustness Robustness of selected tag Robustness of dependent

according to precedent according to selected tag
Gain Gain in uncertainty of Gain in uncertainty of

precedent dependent
Error detectability Error detectability of precedent Error detectability of dependent
Maximum bias Maximum bias of precedent Maximum bias of dependent
Value covariance Value indicating how selected Value indicating how selected
tag value and precedent tag tag value and dependent tag
value are correlated value are correlated
Value correlation coefficient Value covariance weighted by Value covariance weighted by

square-root of product of square-root of product of
reconciled accuracies of tags reconciled accuracies of tags
(between -100 % and 100 %) (between -100 % and 100 %)
Deviation covariance Value indicating how selected Value indicating how selected
error on selected tag value and error on selected tag value and
precedent tag value are dependent tag value are
correlated correlated
Deviation correlation coefficient Deviation covariance weighted Deviation covariance weighted

by square-root of product of by square-root of product of
reconciled accuracies of tags reconciled accuracies of tags
(between -100 % and 100 %) (between -100 % and 100 %)
Refer to tags table to get more information about error detectability and maximum bias.
TAGS INFORMATION
Tag name
This information is similar to the one in the general tags table.
INTERACTION
Gain
Penalty
Maximum bias
Error detectability
Robustness
Value covariance
Value correlation coefficient
Uncertainty covariance
Uncertainty correlation coefficient
FIGURE 36 - PRECEDENTS TABLE - OPTIONAL COLUMNS
By right clicking and selecting "Filter Values...", you also get the possibility to set some filters on
values displayed, i.e. to show only tags that have accuracy contribution, derivative value and
robustness in a chosen interval.
FIGURE 37 - FILTER VALUES WINDOW
Double clicking on a tag will select this tag in the general tags table. If tag is hidden due to filtering, a
window will propose you to remove filtering in order to show requested tag.
FIGURE 38 - REMOVE FILTERING WINDOW
5.4 PRECEDENTS CHARTS
The lower right part of the individual view of ValiAnalytics displays several charts related to
precedent tags.
FIGURE 39 - PRECEDENTS CHARTS
DROP DOWN LIST

The different charts related to precedents and dependents are selected using a drop-down menu
located in the upper left corner of the chart. Description of the represented information can be found
in the concepts table.
FIGURE 40 - PRECEDENTS CHARTS DROP DOWN
The different charts show information related to up to 10 precedents, corresponding to the 10 main
contributors to uncertainty of the selected tag. If the selected tag has more than 10 precedents, these
will be gathered under the term "Others". 9 different charts can be shown:
Contribution Pie chart: Pie chart representing the partition of contribution of precedent
tags to uncertainty of currently selected tag. Contribution to uncertainty, in percentages,
of each precedent is given in the legend of the chart.
FIGURE 41 - PRECEDENTS CONTRIBUTION PIE CHART
Contribution bar graph: Bar graph representing the contribution of precedent tags to
uncertainty of currently selected tag.
FIGURE 42 - PRECEDENTS CONTRIBUTION BAR GRAPH
Value correlation coefficient: Bar graph representing Value correlation coefficient of main
contributors.
FIGURE 43 - PRECEDENTS VALUE CORRELATION COEFFICIENT BAR GRAPH
Accuracy correlation coefficient: Bar graph representing correlation coefficient between

selected tag reconciled value and precedent accuracy
FIGURE 44 - PRECEDENTS ACCURACY CORRELATION COEFFICIENT BAR GRAPH
Penalty bar graph: Bar graph representing the penalty of main contributors.
FIGURE 45 - PRECEDENTS PENALTIES BAR GRAPH
Derivative value bar graph: Bar graph representing derivative values of selected tag with
respect to precedents
FIGURE 46 - PRECEDENTS PENALTIES BAR GRAPH
Gain bar graph: Bar graph representing the gain in uncertainty of main contributors
FIGURE 47 - PRECEDENTS GAINS BAR GRAPH
Error detectability bar graph: Bar graph representing error detectability of main
contributors
FIGURE 48 - PRECEDENTS ERROR DETECTABILITIES BAR GRAPH
Max bias bar graph: Bar graph representing maximum bias of main contributors
FIGURE 49 - PRECEDENTS MAXIMUM BIAS ES BAR GRAPH
Robustness bar graph: Bar graph representing robustness of selected tag according to
main contributors
FIGURE 50 - ROBUS TNES S OF S ELECTED TAG ACCORDING TO PRECEDENTS BAR GRAPH
A definition of all the concepts shown in these charts can be found in the table of description of
parameters.
SHOW/HIDE BUTTON
When opening ValiAnalytics individual view, one chart is displayed. By clicking the Show button
located at the upper right of the chart, a second chart, similar to first will be displayed. These two
parts can be shown independently to show two different charts next to each other. Once the second
chart is displayed, the button is renamed Hide. Clicking this button hides the second chart.
CHAPTER 11
LICENSEMANAGER
XI
The use of Belsim software is controlled by the Belsim LicenseServer, which controls:
the access of the user to the various modules of Belsim software according to the licenses
acquired by the customer and to the rights granted to the users
the list of plants with their links to external systems
the list of tags and their corresponding name in external systems (PIMS, DCS, etc.)
the list of ValiProduction and ValiPerformance applications processed by ValiService
Several LicenseServers can be available on a given network. The server specified in the belsim.ini file
is selected by default.
To configure the LicenseServer and maintain the list of users, plants and tags, you will use the
LicenseManager. It also enables to release licenses held by applications and to make back-up of the
database of registered tags.
SECTION 2: BELSIM LICENSE SERVER

2.1 LICENSING PHILOSOPHY
Different licensing policies are applied on the various modules of Belsim software family. They
combine the notion of:
instance: running module at a given moment
simultaneous users : the total number of instances of a given module at a given moment
cannot exceed the licensed number of "simultaneous users"
tags: the total number of tags used in all models that are maintained cannot exceed the
licensed number of tags
ValiProduction Application: the set of VALI modules (shared or not shared) required to
compute and report on the mass or material balance of a given production facility for the
production accounting of the said facility
FIGURE 1 - ARCHITECTURE OF A MULTI TIER VALI INTEGRATION
2.2 USERS RIGHTS
Any application requesting a license from the LicenseServer has to provide a user name, which by
default is the login name of the user in the operating system. Should this user not been defined in the
LicenseServer he will be granted the rights associated to the special user GUEST. These rights
concern:
the access to the available software licenses
the rights to create, update and delete plants and tags
the number of tags that can be owned by the user
the access authentication to a ValiProduction application with a complete interaction with

Windows Active Directory
User rights are defined through the LicenseManager by administrators. The status of administrator
can be granted to any user by any administrator.
Existing users are by default Active. They can be set as Disabled by an administrator. A Disabled
user cannot perform any action.
2.2.1 The user ADMIN and Administrators

The user ADMIN is predefined and cannot be deleted. It has the status of administrator and can
therefore create, update and delete users from the LicenseServer.
In addition to the rights devoted to all administrators, the user ADMIN is the only user who can
change his own rights as well as the rights of the user GUEST.
The default password of the ADMIN user is "admin". This password should be changed after the
installation of LicenseServer.
Attention: The notion of administrator is completely independent from the administrator status of
Windows operating system.
2.2.2 The user GUEST

The user GUEST is predefined and cannot be deleted. Its rights will be allocated to any user that
would access the LicenseServer without having been defined. For example, GUEST may be allowed to
start a ValiModeller application but not to create any Tag or Plant.
2.2.3 The user SYSTEM

The user SYSTEM is predefined and cannot be deleted. Its rights will be used to execute ValiService
applications (ValiProduction and ValiPerformance). It should have the rights to execute all the VALI
modules (ValiOnlineEngine, ValiLink, ValiDBLoader, etc.)
2.2.4 The user SUBLIC

The user SUBLIC is predefined and cannot be deleted. It will be the owner of the tags imported from a
sub-LicenseServer. Those tags will not be saved and will not count as registered tags of the current
LicenseServer. This user is only used for internal purpose.
2.3 HANDLERS AND TIME-OUT
Each time a user starts an application, the availability of the corresponding license will be checked. If
a license is available, a handler is allocated to the application. The handler is released when quitting
the corresponding application.
If for any reason, the application would be abruptly terminated, its handler will be de-activated after
a configurable time-out (which is by default 15 minutes but can be increased via the
LicenseManager). This de-activation frees up the corresponding license.
Handlers can also be de-activated manually by an administrator through the LicenseManager.
2.4 TAGS
The number of tags you can handle with a given license server is limited in two ways:
at any time, the total number of registered tags cannot exceed the number of tags you have
been licensed
in a given month you cannot import more tags than the number of tags you have been
licensed
2.4.1 Creating and deleting tags

Each time you create tags in your models (using ValiModeller) they will be registered into the
LicenseServer at the time you save your model. When you delete tags from your models, they will
not be deleted from the LicenseServer. Tags can only be removed from the LicenseServer via the
LicenseManager.
2.4.2 Importing tags

Tags can also be imported:
using ValiModeller when loading a model which contains tags that are not yet registered
using the LicenseManager, when importing a list of tags (and possibly their DBname).
Note that only the new tags will be considered as imported. The already existing tags will
simply be updated
The number of imported tags is reset at the beginning of each month.
In case of emergency, you can reset the number of imported tags to zero by contacting Belsim hotline
support.
2.5 PLANTS
Each tag of a model must be associated to a PLANT. This enables to easily track the tags at the
License Server level.
The notion of PLANT is also used by ValiLink to communicate with external systems. For each plant,
you will indicate the type of system (for example PI or MS-SQL) that gives access to this tag as well as
the IP address (or UNC) and the username and password to be used for the connection.
2.6 ValiManager and ValiPerformance
Definition of applications processed by ValiService is stored in the LicenseServer.
ValiManager is the set of VALI modules (shared or not shared) required to compute and report on the
mass or material balance of a given production facility for the production accounting of the said
facility. ValiManager applications are configured through ValiManager client application.
ValiPerformance is the set of VALI modules required to compute and report on a performance
monitoring application. ValiPerformance applications are configured through ValiScheduler
application.
2.7 SUB-LICENSES
The Sub-Licensing features allow the USER to work on models created on other LicenceServers (e.g.
Corporate Servers), with the local LicenceServer installed on the USER own laptop or workstation.
Additional Tags and Plants registration or importation on the local LicenseServer are not required.
The present section aims at describing the Sub-Licensing feature. A typical situation is given as an
example in order to illustrate the Sub-Licensing concept.
2.7.1 THE SITUATION

As illustrated below:
the Corporate LicenseServer (licA) owns 800 Tags out of 1000 allowed
the USER Workstation LicenseServer (licB) owns 100 Tags out of 300 allowed
The licB USER working on his own PC (orange colored), would like to work on the model owning 800
Tags that has been created on licA.
As the USER LicenseServer (licB) maximum Tags allowed is 300, and as 100 Tags have already been
registered, the USER is only allowed to register 200 more Tags. The 800 Tags model can thus not be
imported on the USER workstation and the tags cannot be registered as the number of tags to be
registered exceeds the 200 tags free.
2.7.2 THE SUB-LICENSING

To handle the situation, the sub-licensing procedure is implemented which allows, for a given period
of time, to copy and import the database from licA to licB:
the USER working on his own workstation using licB, is allowed to share the tags defined
on licA while licB still have the 200 tags free
the USER working on his own workstation using licB, is allowed to work and modify the
imported model. The USER can create up to 200 new tags in the imported model
2.7.3 THE PROCEDURE

EXPORT DATABASE FROM LICA
start the LicenseManager and connect on LicenseServer A using “Admin” user
go to the Maintenance Tab
click on the Sub-Licensing button
under Export section, define the location where you want to save the ZIP file
click the Export button
IMPORT DATABASE FROM LICB

start the LicenseManager and connect on LicenseServer B using “Admin” user
click on Sub-Licensing button
under Import section, select “From Zip” option and locate the ZIP file previously exported
click Import button
IMPORT USING A CONNECTION BETWEEN LICA AND LICB

start the LicenseManager and connect on LicenseServer B
under Import section, select “From License Server” option
click Import button
you will be prompted to log on LicenseServer A using “Admin” user
click OK
2.7.4 DELETING SUB-LICENSES

start the LicenseManager and connect using “Admin” user
select the Sub-Licenses to be deleted and click the Delete button
2.7.5 GENERAL INFORMATION

the TAGs/Plants defined in a Sub-License belong to a user called SUBLIC. These TAGs/
Plants cannot be modified or deleted
you must be logged as ADMIN to perform Sub-Licensing import/export/delete
it is not required to launch LicenseManager on the computer where the LicenseServer is

installed to export or import the database. You can do it from your workstation. The
database will be transferred through the network connection
you can define up to 10 Sub-Licenses on the local LicenseServer. When you import a
database already defined as a Sub-License, the TAGs/Plants are automatically overwritten
by the ones defined in the new Zipped database
the database imported is valid only for 15 days
if you add TAGs to the model of a Sub-License, these new TAGs will be saved/registered in
the local database
the Sub-License database is never saved
sub-licensing does not work with Demo version
SECTION 3: BELSIM LICENSEMANAGER

3.1 STARTING LICENSEMANAGER
To start the LicenseManager, you can either:
select LicenseManager Windows Start Menu (Start Menu|Programs|Vali4|

LicenseManager)
double-click the executable "LicenseManager.exe" in the bin sub-folder of Belsim

installation folder
At start up, the application will require your identification (name and password) and the address of
the LicenseServer (IP address or computer name); This address can be selected using the drop-down
list. Leaving the address empty will select the current computer as LicenseServer (localhost).
FIGURE 2 - CONNECTION TO LICENS EMANAGER
IP addresses can be added and removed using Edit button. This will open a new window allowing to
add and remove IP addresses/computer names, and selecting the default IP address, that will be used
by all Belsim applications. ValiScheduler and ValiManager offer the choice of the LicenseServer that
will be connected:
FIGURE 3 - CHOICE OF S ERVER
The settings of LicenseManager are accessed via a notebook that has 8 pages:
General: basic information about available licenses
ValiManager: list of ValiManager applications
ValiPerformance list of ValiPerformance applications
Tag: list of tags that have been defined so far
Plant: list of plants that have been defined so far
User: list of users and their associated rights
Maintenance: back-up, restore and server shut-down
Handler: list of applications that have required a license
3.1.1 Resetting LicenseServer

In case of bad manipulation, the LicenseServer can be locked to prevent abnormal use of the available
licenses. For instance, changing the date time of your computer, restarting the licenseserver without
its database files will lock the LicenseServer.
To unlock your LicenseServer, please contact Belsim hotline support to obtain a password then
follow the next steps:
open Windows Explorer
browse to the installation directory of the LicenseServer ([InstallDir]

\LicenseServer\BelsimWS)
edit the file "LicenseServer.ini",
add at the end of the file the following lines:

[RESTART]
password=************
where ************ is the password provided by Belsim hotline support
save the file
open LicenseManager to test the reset was successful
3.2 THE GENERAL PAGE
FIGURE 4 - GENERAL PAGE OF LICENS EMANAGER
The General page displays the basic information about available licenses:
Tags defined: number of tags registered in the LicenseServer
Tags imported: number of tags imported since the last reset
Next Automatic Reset: date at which the number of imported tags will be reset
Plants defined: number of plants registered in the LicenseServer
License Time Out: time-out after which a license can be reallocated when the application is
inactive
Licenses: List of licensed software modules and number of active applications
ValiLink Plugs: List of licensed ValiLink plugs
Use the Reset button to manually reset the number of imported tags. (A password must be
requested from Belsim).
Use the Refresh button to refresh the information.
3.3 THE VALIMANAGER PAGE
FIGURE 5 - THE VALIMANAGER PAGE OF LICENS EMANAGER
The ValiManager page displays the list of ValiProduction applications to be processed by

ValiService.
The required settings to define a ValiProduction application are:
a name
the plant name giving access to ValiDatabase
the IP/UNC of the computer with the ValiService that will process the application
the path where the application files will be saved (path of the application)
the type of application: [Production|Test]
If the status of the application is set to ON, the application will start to be processed immediately.
After creating a ValiProduction application, the authentication settings must be defined according to
a number of roles:
Master: gives full access to the application including runs approval and changes to official
model but not to configuration panel neither to ValiModeller
Operator: enables to modify settings (ValiMask) and manual corrections on official runs
and to ask for reruns
Configurator: gives access to configuration panels
Modeller: enables to work in manual mode but not to save as Official model or Official run
Reader: can only see results (overview of processed runs and access to ValiReport)
The Add Application button is used to define a new application in the LicenseServer. Some
information must be provided to create a new application:
Application name: a unique name identifying the application
Server name: the name of the computer where ValiService is deployed
Application Type: (Production or Test). A test application doesn't write back values in the
database (ValiLink Out)
Application Path: the path of the application
Starting Date: the start date of the application
Plant Name: the plant name giving access to the ValiDatabase
Status (ON/OFF): if set to OFF, ValiService will not process this application
Folders Creation: if checked, all folders and files needed to run an application will be
created
FIGURE 6 - THE CREATION OF A VALIPRODUCTION APPLICATION
The Refresh key is used to refresh the complete list of ValiProduction application according to their
last modifications at the License Server level.
3.4 THE VALIPERFORMANCE PAGE
FIGURE 7 - THE VALIPERFORMANCE PAGE OF LICENS EMANAGER
The ValiPerformance page displays the list of ValiPerformance applications to be processed by

ValiService.
The required settings to define a ValiPerformance application are:
a name
the plant name corresponding to the ValiDatabase used by the application
the IP/UNC of the computer with the ValiService that will process the application
the path and file name of ValiScheduler configuration file
To add a ValiPerformance, press the Add Application button and enter the required settings:
FIGURE 8 - VALIPERFORMANCE APPLICATION CREATION
The Refresh key is used to refresh the complete list of ValiPerformance application according to their
last modifications at the License Server level.
3.5 THE TAG PAGE
FIGURE 9 - THE TAG PAGE OF LICENS EMANAGER
The Tag page displays the list of tags that have been defined together with:
the plant to which that are associated
the owner of the tag
the Dbname (Data Base Name) associated to the TAG
the date at which the Tag was last referred by an application
The two groups of settings above the Tag list can be used to limit the number of tags displayed in the
Tag list by specifying their name, associated plant or owner, and according by their date of last use.
You can combine the various conditions and use wildcards for the names (tag, plant, owner).
After any change in these settings use the Search Now button or press Enter key to reprocess the list
according the new conditions.
The Owner button enables to reallocate the selected tags to another user.
The Delete button is used to delete the selected tags.
The Export button is used to export the list of selected tags as an ASCII file with the data included in
each column:
the tag name
the plant name
the Dbname (if any)
the owner
the last use date time
The Import key is used to import a similar list. Only the first 3 columns will be used for the import,
they must include the following information:
the tag name
the plant name
the Dbname (if any)
Please note that in a given month you cannot import more tags than the number of tags you have
been licensed.
The Refresh key is used to refresh the complete list of tags according to their last modifications at the
License Server level.
Attention: You will use the Export/Import facility for example to update the tag name / Dbname
association via a Text Editor.
3.6 THE PLANT PAGE
FIGURE 10 - THE PLANT PAGE OF LICENS EMANAGER
The Plant page displays the list of plants together with:
their owner
the type of server (see ValiLink documentation)
the Log name to be used when connecting to the corresponding server
the IP/UNC address of the corresponding server
the DB name
The New and Duplicate button allows creating a new plant either from scratch or by using the data
of an existing plant.
The LogName/Password button is used to modify the log name password associated to a given
plant.
The Delete button enables to delete a plant. You can only delete a plant if no tags are associated to it.
The Refresh key is used to refresh the list of plants according to their last modifications at the License
Server level.
3.7 THE USER PAGE
FIGURE 11 - THE US ER PAGE OF LICENS EMANAGER
The User page displays the list of users together with:
their status:
Admin: the user has administration rights
Active: the user is defined and enabled
Inactive: the user is defined but currently disabled; he will not be authorized to access
any of the licensed software modules
the number of tags they currently own
the maximum number of tags they can define
the network identification (interaction with Windows Active Directory)
their rights (displayed on the right panel)
The Password button is used to modify the password associated to a given user. Administrator
status is required in order to change the password of other users.
The New and Duplicate button allows creating a new user either from scratch or by using the data of
an existing user (administrators only).
The Delete button enables to delete a user (administrators only). You can only delete a user if he does
not own any tag.
When creating a new user, a Network Identifier will be automatically detected using Windows
Active Directory. The Network Identification can be changed manually by clicking on the button
in the "Network Identification" column.
FIGURE 12 - NETWORK IDENTIFICATION S ELECTION
The Edit button is used to modify the rights of a user.
FIGURE 13 - EDITING US ER RIGHTS
3.8 THE MAINTENANCE PAGE
FIGURE 14 - THE MAINTENANCE PAGE OF LICENS EMANAGER
The Maintenance page displays the list of back-up of the database together with:
the path of the back-up file
the data of the back-up
Use the Back-up button to create a new back-up of the database. You can create as many back-up as
you want.
Use the Restore button to restore the selected bac-up. Please note that you can restore only one back-
up per month. A special password must be requested from Belsim to overcome this limitation
through the Reset button
Use the delete key to delete the obsolete back-ups.
Use the Stop LicenseServer button to stop the LicenseServer.
Use the Install License Key button to upload a new license key provided by Belsim.
3.9 THE HANDLER PAGE
FIGURE 15 - THE HANDLER PAGE OF LICENS EMANAGER
The Handler page displays the list of handlers together with:
the corresponding user
the application name
it activity (NO means that the application has not been active for a duration of time
greater than the time-out)
the date and time of the last request to the LicenseServer
The Delete button enables to delete a handler in order to free up the corresponding license
(administrators only).
CHAPTER 12
VALIPERFORMANC
E XII
SECTION 1: VALI Software Suite

VALI is a process oriented software aiming at determining and improving production efficiency,
productivity and energy consumption while reducing production and maintenance costs.
With VALI, you move from data to information, from information to knowledge and finally from
knowledge to action.
FROM DATA TO INFORMATION

Measurements are the essential source of information of VALI (in addition to the process topology
and the process management information) and cover all information coming either from the plant
(temperatures, pressures, rates, on-line analyses, etc.) or from the laboratory (GC, densities, etc.).
VALI converts the raw measurement data into reliable information by applying data validation
technique involving among others heat and mass balances.
FROM INFORMATION TO KNOWLEDGE

From the coherent information, VALI determines accurate and reliable performance indicators for
each equipment of the plant (heat rates, rotating equipment efficiencies, reaction's conversions, etc) as
well as more global KPIs (Key Performance Indicators) like plant efficiency, plant specific product
yields, etc.
VALI pinpoints instrumentation deviation and equipment degradation.
FROM KNOWLEDGE TO ACTION

By generating customised reports for each user (maintenance, control, management, production…),
adequate action will rapidly be undertaken. Using validated data for generating warnings strongly
reduces false alarms. A clear distinction is made between instrumentation problem and equipment
degradation.
1.1 ValiPerformance
ValiPerformance is oriented towards online process performance monitoring, i.e. online reporting of
the key performance information of a process such as process yield, reaction selectivity, delta_T
approach to the equilibrium, energy consumption, equipment efficiency (e.g. heat transfer coefficient,
turbine and compressor efficiency...).
The application calculates detailed heat and mass balances of the units, including utilities (steam and
fuel-gas). These balances are calculated using all available measurement redundancy to determine a
single set of values consistent with conservation of heat and mass. This data represents the most
likely point of actual plant operation.
This information can then be used to, among others:
Detect performance degradation and take corrective action
Identify heat loads, heat transfer coefficients and fouling factors on heat exchangers
Identify heat loads and efficiencies of heaters and furnaces
Identify power and efficiency of rotating equipment
Identify power required for pumps
Identify conversion (and catalyst deactivation when suitable) in reactors
Identify power and efficiency of rotary machines
Calculate various Key Performance Indicators such as (this list is not exhaustive):
Yields
Efficiencies
H2 partial pressure or Steam/Carbon ratios
Sulphur conversion or recovery
Global energy efficiency
Specific energy consumption
Compound mass balances, heat balance and pressure drop balances are generated around each
equipment. Liquid/Vapour separators also include L/V equilibrium constraints. Reactors are
modelled either by atomic balances or according to defined reaction schemes. Chemical equilibrium
constraints are also taken into account where necessary.
1.2 VALI modules
ValiModeller : a multi-purpose modelling tool intended to develop and maintain one or

several process models. ValiModeller can be used for offline validation and engineering
studies
ValiAnalytics, a Graphical User Interface used for sensitivity analysis of your model and
your results
ValiReport : a tool integrated in MS Excel® and designed for the visualisation and
reporting of results and that is configurable according to user needs
ValiOnlineEngine: : designed to be implemented online to generate the results of validation

on the basis of online data sets and for models developed with ValiModeller
ValiFilter : a data filtering module, which ensures an optimal operation of VALI through a
pre-processing of raw measurement data
ValiEvent : an add-on that analyses the online measurement data in a fixed time interval
and reports on the detected events
ValiLink : data connection module between VALI and an external system (can be PIMS,
DCS, LIMS…)
ValiManager : an application that runs on top of VALI and that handles different aspects of
production accounting as access authorizations, periodic runs, database storage, model
versioning, etc. ValiManager deals with total site production accounting on a stated period
of time (typically one day)
CHAPTER 13
VALILINK
XIII
ValiLink is a generic application allowing to transfer information between VALI and external
systems such as PIMS, DCS or more generally data bases. The currently supported systems are:
PI (OSIsoft ©)
PlantConne ct (ABB ©)
InfoPlus21 (Aspe nTe ch ©)
WinIS (Sie me ns ©)
Microsoft SQL Se rve r 7.0 or late r (using SQL Se rve r .NET Data Provide r)
Oracle Database 8.0 or late r (using Oracle .NET Data Provide r)
PHD (Hone ywe ll ©)
any database compliant with the OLE DB .NET Data Provide r.
any database compliant with the ODBC .NET Data Provide r.
any database compliant with the OPC HDA standard
ASCII file s.
ValiLink can be used both for reading or writing data from and to the external system. Typically you
will use ValiLink before starting a ValiEngine (online or offline) to get data from one or several data
sources and you will start it again after the run to store the results.
Attention: WinIS plug only supports reading from WinIS system
ValiLink can be called directly from ValiReport and ValiScheduler. It can also be launched manually
or via another application.
Three different operation modes are available:
ValiLink directly reads the list of tags to be acquired (or written) in the bls file. This
procedure can only be used with direct access system, not with SQL like databases
ValiLink reads the description of operations to be performed in an INI file, which will in
turn refer to ASCII files with the list of tags to be read from (or written to) the external
system
ValiLink reads the description of operations to be performed in an INI file, and reads in the
bls file the list of tags to be read from (or written to) the external system
The INI file can easily be configured using ValiLinkBuilder application or can be edited using a text
editor.
1.1 USING VALILINK TO GET DATA
CONFIGURATION VIA THE MODEL FILE

ValiLink receives as arguments the name of the bls file as well as the operation (IN for
input) and the time window
the name of the server (external system) to be connected to is read from the bls file (defined
through the plant associated to each tag), while the userid and password to be used are
read from LicenseServer
the TAG values are then read from the server and written in a file called Valilink.mea
FIGURE 1 - CONFIGURING VALILINK INPUT VIA A MODEL FILE
CONFIGURATION VIA AN INI FILE AND A MODEL FILE

ValiLink receives as arguments the name of the INI file as well as the time window
the name of the server (external system) to be connected to is read from the INI file, while
the userid and password to be used are read from LicenseServer
the INI file specifies for each action the name of a model file where the list of tags to be
acquired will be read
the TAG values are then read from the server and written in the Output File specified in
the INI file (e.g. ValiLInk.mea)
FIGURE 2 - CONFIGURING VALILINK INPUT VIA AN INI FILE AND A MODEL FILE
CONFIGURATION VIA AN INI FILE

the list of tags to be acquired is read from an ASCII file specified in the INI file
the TAG values are then read from the server and written in the output file specified in the
INI file
FIGURE 3 - CONFIGURING VALILINK INPUT VIA AN INI FILE
1.2 USING VALILINK TO WRITE DATA
CONFIGURATION VIA THE MODEL FILE
FIGURE 4 - CONFIGURING VALILINK OUTPUT VIA A MODEL FILE
ValiLink receives as arguments the name of the bls file as well as the operation (OUT) and
the time window
the name of the server (external system) to be connected to is read from the bls file (defined
as the plant associated to each tag), while the userid and password to be used are read
from LicenseServer
the TAG values are then read from the bls file and written to the external system
CONFIGURATION VIA AN INI FILE
FIGURE 5 - CONFIGURING VALILINK OUTPUT VIA AN INI FILE
the list of tags and their values are read from the InputFile specified in the INI file
the TAG values are then written to the server
1.3 TAGNAMES VERSUS DBNAMES
In some cases the names of the tags in your Vali model will be different from the names of the tags as
defined in the external system.
This is solved by associating to each Vali tag two names:
the tagname which is the usual tag name defined in the VALI model
the Dbname which is the name used in the external system. This second name will be
stored in the LicenseManager and will therefore be available for all models referring to the
same tag
The Dbname is defined when creating the tag with ValiModeller. It can be redefined afterwards using
LicenseManager or ValiModeller.
When getting (writing) values from (to) an external system, ValiLink will use the Dbname (if defined)
in place of the Tagname when communicating with the external system. Moreover, ValiLink will
add any defined prefix or suffix to the Dbname (or tagname if no Dbname is defined) when writing
the values to the external system.
SECTION 2: RUNNING VALILINK

2.1 STARTING VALILINK
ValiLink has been designed to be automated through ValiReport or ValiScheduler. However it can
also be automated through other applications.
To start ValiLink, start ValiLink.exe in <installdir>\bin folder (by default Program

Files\Belsim\bin) with the following arguments.
Specification via the bls file:
the keyword -BLS
the name of the model (bls) file
the keyword IN or OUT
one date with a fixed format
one duration value, which can be negative
the physical units of the duration: S, s, SEC, Sec, sec, M, m, MIN, Min, min, Hour, H, h,
HOUR, Hour, hour, Day, D, d, DAY, Day, day
Specification via an ini file:
the name of an information file (ini file) describing the actions to be performed
one date with a fixed format
one duration value, which can be negative
the physical units of the duration: S, s, SEC, Sec, sec, M, m, MIN, Min, min, Hour, H, h,
HOUR, Hour, hour, Day, D, d, DAY, Day, day
Example:
C:\Program Files\Belsim\bin\ValiLink.exe -BLS C:\Demo\coal.bls IN 20040826_162839 24 H
C:\Program Files\Belsim\bin\ValiLink.exe C:\Demo\SomeActions.ini 20040826_162839 24 H
2.2 SPECIFYING THE VALIDATION TIME WINDOW
The date and time format used in the argument of the command line is YYYYMMDD_hhmmss
Example:
20040826_162839 corresponds to 26 August 2002 at 16:28:39 (4:28:39 pm)
The Time Window of the validation run is delimited by two dates: BeginDate and EndDate.
If the duration value is positive, then the given date is the BeginDate and the EndDate will calculated
as:
EndDate = BeginDate + Duration
If the duration value is negative, then the given date is the EndDate and the BeginDate will calculated
as:
BeginDate = EndDate + Duration
Examples:
C:\Belsim\BinDemo\ValiLink.exe SomeActions.ini 20080327_120000 24 H
The BeginDate will be March 27, 2008 at 12:00:00
The EndDate will be March 28, 2008 at 12:00:00

C:\Belsim\BinDemo\ValiLink.exe SomeActions.ini 20080327_120000 -1 H
The BeginDate will be March 27, 2008 at 11:00:00
The EndDate will be March 27, 2008 at 12:00:00
Attention: The date will automatically be written in the generated output file as RUNDATE field.
2.3 VALILINK STATUS
At the end of its execution, ValiLink produces a file named ValiLink_log.ini containing the keyword
EXITCODE followed by a numeric code:
-1: a fatal error did occur
0: ValiLink was successful
Example:
[EXITCODE]
ExitCode=0
SECTION 3: CONFIGURING VALILINK -

VALILINKBUILDER
3.1 STARTING VALILINKBUILDER
To create a new ValiLink file using ValiLinkBuilder, you can either
Go to Start Menu|Programs|Belsim|Vali4|ValiLinkBuilder
Go to the bin sub-folder of the Belsim installation folder and double-click on

ValiLinkBuilder.exe
First, save the ValiLink file (commonly named ValiLink_IN.INI or ValiLink_OUT.INI for
measurements reading and writing respectively), then choose the Database type from/to which
measurements are read/written:
FIGURE 1 – CHOOS E DATABAS E TYPE
The ValiLinkBuilder main interface displays the data base type that has been previously chosen:
FIGURE 2 – VALILINKBUILDER MAIN WINDOW
To edit an existing ValiLink.INI using the ValiLinkBuilder:
for measurements reading, go to the ValiScheduler - Tab ‘Acquisition’ and press the Edit
button related to the existing ValiLink file
for measurements writing, go to the ValiScheduler - Tab ‘Storage’ and press the Edit
button related to the existing ValiLink file
FIGURE 3 – VALIS CHEDULER ACQUIS ITION TAB
3.2 GENERAL SETTINGS
The main window allows specifying the general settings for ValiLink.
FIGURE 4 – VALILINKBUILDER MAIN WINDOW DES CRIPTION
The Database Type [a] contains the type of database chosen when creating a new ValiLink file. With
PI (OSIsoft ©), there are two ways of querying the database:
through PI Software Development Kit (SDK),
or through PI Advanced Programming Interface (API).
PI API is the default interface. To use PI SDK for connection, the "use PI SDK" checkbox has to be
checked.
The Plant information [b] contains information related to the database server. The Plant Name is to
be selected amongst the plants defined in the LicenseManager and provides information related to
the external database:
the type of external database (PI, IP21, PlantConnect, MS-SQL, OLEDB_MS-SQL,

ODBC_MS-SQL, Oracle, ODBC_ Oracle, OPC_HDA_PHD, OPC_HDA_MATRIKON, FILE)
the Server (TCP-IP/UNC) of the external database or its Windows Network Name
the user name to log in the external database server
the password to log in the external database server
Attention: the database server related to the chosen plant should be of the same type as the one
defined at the ValiLink file creation [a].
The Settings contains the following information:
Database [c] is the database used by default when no database has been defined in the
Actions section [r]
Short Date Format [d] is the format of the date used for SQL transactions
Long Date Format [e] is the format of the date and time used for SQL transactions
Max. Failed Tags [f] is the maximum allowed number of tags for which ValiLink is unable
to retrieve values. If the maximum allowed number is exceeded, the acquisition step status
is failed
Offset Time [g] aims at taking into account the possible time difference in between the
ValiScheduler time zone and the external system time zone. The offset time is the time
added to the time range (begin and end dates) given as an argument to the ValiLink
Number of Retry [h] is the number of trials processed by ValiLink in case of connection
failure with the external system for example
Retry Delay [i] is the time duration in between two trials [h]
Validity File [j] gives the path and name of the Validity file which contains the date and
time from which given measurement data are to be acquired (Syntax of Validity file:
TAGNAME yyyymmdd_hhmmss). Before the mentioned date and time, the specified
measurement data are not valid. Note that the path is relative to the ValiLink
configuration file
Bad Data Mode [k] is the mode selected for handling bad data (i.e. unavailable data, -
999.999, etc.):
NONE: The key word BAD is used as the tag value (Example of outputs: TAGNAME
BAD)
HISTORY: If the data is bad at time T, the values in the database at time T-1 to T-n are
checked (n is expressed as a multiplication factor of the aggregation period set for
calculation and is defined at section Bad Data Max Age [l]). The first valid value that is
found, started from T-1, is retrieved and takes the place of the bad data (Example of
outputs: TAGNAME 10°C BAD)
MEA: If the data is bad at time T, the values in the backup directory at time T-1 to T-n is
checked (n is expressed as a multiplication factor of the aggregation period set for
calculation and is defined at section Bad Data Max Age [l]). The first valid value that is
found, started from T-1, is retrieved and takes the place of the bad data (Example of
outputs: TAGNAME 10°C BAD)
Bad Data Max Age [l] is used when either HISTORY or MEA Bad Mode are selected [k]. It
defines the n parameter used in the Bad Data Mode [k] and is expressed as a multiplication
factor of the aggregation period set for calculation
Compare Mode [m] is the mode selected for handling data comparison and detecting flat
tags (i.e. data that are showing a constant value over time). Tags that are showing a same
value over the previous run is specified as FLAT 1 while tags that are showing a same
value over the previous n run is specified as FLAT 2 (see Nb of Points to Compare [n] for
definition of the n parameter)
NONE: No comparison mode is activated
HISTORY: The acquired measurement data at time T are compared with the ones
coming from the database at time T-1 to T-n (n is expressed as a multiplication factor of
the aggregation period set for calculation and is defined at section Nb of Points to
Compare [n])
MEA: The acquired measurement data at time T are compared with the ones coming
from the backup directory at time T-1 to T-n (n is expressed as a multiplication factor
of the aggregation period set for calculation and is defined at section Nb of Points to
Compare [n])
Nb of Points to Compare [n] is used when either HISTORY or MEA Compare Mode are
selected [m]. It defines the n parameter used in the Compare Mode [m] and is expressed as a
multiplication factor of the aggregation period set for calculation
Max Flat [o] is the allowed percentage of flat tags (expressed in percentage). The percentage
is computed based on valid values only (i.e. bad values are not taken into account). If the
allowed percentage is exceeded then an action will be taken. The action is defined at section
Flat Mode [p]
Flat Mode [p] defines the action to be taken in the case allowed percentage [o] of flat
measurements is exceeded
FAILED: an ERF (error file) is generated and the ValiLink action status is failed
OK: no specific action is taken and the ValiLink action status is considered as succeeded
SERVER: ValiLink action is restarted and ALL tags are acquired on a secondary server.
This action is useful in case flat measurements are due to a replica problem in between
databases, i.e. the database from which we read data is not synchronized with the
database connected to the installation
Dictionary [q] defines the name and path of the Dictionary file which contains the
keywords used for digital tags in the external system. Note that the path is relative to the
ValiLink configuration file
Example of a dictionary.mea file:

OPEN “1”
OPEN “Ouvert”
OPEN “Open”
CLOSED “0”
CLOSED “Ferme”
CLOSED “Closed”
The objective is to either determine the time fraction of a given time period or the time
duration (in seconds), over which a digital tag is OPEN.
In case a dictionary file is referenced, the parameters for either time fraction or time
duration calculation are defined through the Actions section [r] (Fields [43] [49] [50] [53]).
Attention: this request is only applicable for PI plugs.
The Actions [r] allows editing/creating/deleting actions to be carried out, related to the reading/
writing from/to external systems. Please see the Actions section for further information.
The Log File Settings contains the settings of the logging system. This section is not mandatory.
Default data will be used in case fields are left blank.
Path [t] refers to the path where the ValiLink log file is to be stored. By default, the path is
the same as the ValiLink.INI file
File Name [u] gives the name of the ValiLink log file. If the field is left blank, the default
name is ValiLink.log
Error level to log [v] is used to filter the level of information and error messages to be
written in the log file. The log level is to be chosen amongst: NONE, INF, WRN, ERR, ERS
and ERF. Messages of a level higher than the one chosen for the log file are written. For
instance, if the Error level to log is ERR, the ERR, ERS and ERF messages will be printed
only. If the field is left blank, the level INF is used by default
Backup Option [w]
BACKUP: the old file ValiLink.log is renamed as ValiLink_bck.log and messages of the
current run are logged into a new file ValiLink.log. If the field is left blank, BACKUP is
used by default
ARCHIVE: messages are written in a new file Valilink_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.log,

where yyyymmdd_hhmmss is the current date
APPEND: messages of the current run are appended to the old file ValiLink.log
Maximum Size [x] refers to the maximum allowed size of the log file. If the field is left
blank, the default size is 10 Mb
3.2.1 BAD DATA HANDLING

A measurement data is defined as Bad when its value is not available at the level of the external
system or when its value has no physical meaning such as -9999,999.
Bad Data Mode is intended for applications where retrieving and re-using the last valid
measurement values of current faulty sensors is preferable to using default values.
The latest valid measurement values present in the database or backed-up files will be retrieved and
used in the reconciliation step, but marked as BAD in the log and results files.
Bad data mode parameters are defined at fields [k] and [l] of the main page of the ValiLink Builder.
3.2.2 FLAT DATA DETECTION

A measurement data is defined as Flat when its value is the same as the n previous runs (where n is
an integer set through the 'Nb of points to compare' field [n]). Flat measurements can be due to either
frozen sensors or database connection losses, etc.
Two kinds of Flat measurements are distinguished, namely FLAT 1 and FLAT 2:
FLAT 1 is related to measurement data for which the value is the same as the previous run
(n=1)
FLAT 2 is related to measurement data for which the value is the same as the n consecutive
previous runs, where the n parameter is defined by the User (see 'Nb of points to compare'
field [n])
FIGURE 5 – FLAT MODE ILLUS TRATION (FLAT 1 & FLAT 2)
Flat Data detection over the n previous runs (n is set at ‘Nb of points to compare’ field [o]) is intended
to detect flat measurement and taking an action (action is set at ‘Flat mode’ field [p]) in case the
percentage of flat data has exceeded the allowable limit (limit set at ‘Max Flat’ field [o]). Flat data
mode parameters are defined at fields [m], [n], [o] and [p] of the main page of the ValiLink Builder.
Flat data are indicated by the following syntax in the ValiLink output file:
FIGURE 6 – FLAT MODE S YNTAX IN MEA FILE
Note that the flat data syntax is handled by the ValiEngine as if it was a regular tag.
Attention:
Flat mode should not be used for binary tags as those tags can have a same value (e.g.
OPEN) over time
Flat mode is not applicable to the file plug
3.3 READING AND WRITING ACTIONS
Actions section aims at describing how to carry out the reading/writing from/to the external
systems. The actions are defined via the ValiLink Action graphical interface. Several actions can be
defined, each ones having a unique number (Action i where i is a unique incremental number). Note
that the actions will be performed successively according to the order in which they appear in the
ValiLink.INI file and not according to their name numbering i.
To edit/create/delete an action, press the Edit/Add/Remove button of the Actions window [r]
respectively:
FIGURE 7 – VALILINKBUILDER MAIN WINDOW: ACTIONS
Depending on the database type (defined in Database Type), the ValiLink Action window is
automatically adapted.
The description of the fields of the ValiLink Action window are given below. A number is associated
to each field, and their description can be found in the recapitulative table (see Fields Recapitulative
Table). The numbering legend is
FIGURE 8 – VALILINK BUILDER FIELDS LEGEND
3.3.1 FILE PLUG
FIGURE 9 – EDIT VALILINK ACTION WINDOW FOR FILE PLUG
FIGURE 10 – EDIT ROMS S EMAIL CONFIGURATION WINDOW FOR FILE PLUG
The FILE plug can only be configured to read data, as described in following section.
READING DATA FROM FILES
The FILE plug differentiates from other plugs in many ways. It is to be considered as a tool to copy
files from one working directory (possibly located on an external server) [1] to another working
directory [13] rather than getting or writing tag values individually. The plug also enables
interpreting the contents [19] of the source file or backing-up the copied file [3] in a separate folder
[11].
For the specified Begin_Date, ValiLink will search a source folder for a file named according to the
following scheme:
FilePrefixYYYYMMDD_HHMMSSFileSuffix.FileExtension
where:
YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS is the corresponding formatted Begin-Date
FilePrefix [9], FileSuffix [10] and FileExtension [8]
If the file is found, ValiLink will copy the corresponding file in the output directory [13].
The file can be renamed via the FileReplaceName parameter [14].
Please refer to Fields recapitulative table for further information on all fields.
3.3.2 PI, PLANTCONNECT AND OPC/HDA PLUGS
FIGURE 11 – EDIT VALILINK ACTION WINDOW FOR PI, PLANTCONNECT AND OPC HDA PLUGS
The PI, PLANTCONNECT and OPC/HDA plugs can be configured to
read data from a database
write data to a database
READING DATA FROM A DIRECT ACCESS DATABASE
The action aims at acquiring from an external system, N values [36] (set by default at 1) of type
defined at ‘Value Type’ field [30] between BeginDate and EndDate time, for each tags listed in the
InputFile [27].
The input file [27] can be either a model file or a text file. In case a model file is used, the type of values
to be read are to be defined at Tags…Historian Tab of the ValiModeller:
FIGURE 12 - US ING MODEL AS INPUT FILE-TYPE OF VALUE DEFINITION
Tags are classified by Plant Name and by Value Type (ReadDB: BEGINDATE, AVERAGE, etc.).
Consequently, ValiLink will retrieve amongst the tags defined in the model file, only the ones that
correspond to the Value Type [30] defined in the actions.
The results are written in the OutputFile [28].
MANDATORY FIELDS
Action [26]: READDB
Input File [27]
Output file [28]
Value Type [30]
Attention: In case several types of aggregation mode are used, an action should be defined per
aggregation mode.
OPTIONAL FIELDS
Prefix [31]
Suffix [32]
EndofLine [33]
Retrieve Phys unit [34]
Default [35]
Number of Values [36]
DataBase [45]
Delay File [38]
Delay From Backup [39]
Delay Run [40]
Comment [41]
Backup Directory [11]
WRITING DATA TO A DIRECT ACCESS DATABASE
The action aims at writing data to an external system for each tags specified in the InputFile [27].
MANDATORY FIELDS
Action [26]: WRITEDB
InputFile [27]
Value Type [30]
OPTIONAL FIELDS
Prefix [31]
Suffix [32]
DataBase [45]
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Additional information can be configured:
time fraction
duration calculation
TIME FRACTION
ValiLink can detect the time fraction during which a given condition is satisfied for a given tag and
over a given period.
For instance, if a digital tag indicates that a piece of equipment is functioning or not, ValiLink can
detect the time fraction over which this unit has been stopped during a specific time span (e.g. 5
hours before the present run).
This allows taking preventive actions if a transient behavior is expected after the restarting of a piece
of equipment (example: well restart).
ValiLink will output in a mea file, a value in between 0 and 1 associated to a new tag, composed of
the original tag name and the suffix “_TIMEFRAC”. Because of the variation range of those values
[0;1], those tags can directly be used as status tags in ValiModeller.
The condition to be satisfied can be either related to digital, analogical or string tags. In case of a
digital tag, the conditions are 0 or 1 (Note that the mapping to explicit keywords such as OPEN,
CLOSED, etc. is done through the dictionary file [q]).
Attention: For activating the time fraction calculation, the Value Type field [30] has to be defined to
“Time_fraction”.
DURATION CALCULATION
For a specific tag, ValiLink can evaluate the time duration for which a given condition is satisfied.
For instance, a digital tag has 2 values: 0 or 1, meaning that a piece of equipment in functioning or not
respectively. At the current run, the unit is functioning. ValiLink can detect the time duration over
which the piece of equipment has been active.
The output will be written in a mea file and is expressed in seconds. It will be associated with a tag
composed of the original tag name and the suffix “_DURATION”.
Attention: For activating this feature, the Value Type field [30] has to be defined to “Duration”.
3.3.3 SQL, ACCESS, IP21, ORACLE and ODBC plugs
FIGURE 13 – EDIT VALILINK ACTION WINDOW FOR S QL, ACCES S , ORACLE, IP21 AND ODBC PLUGS
The SQL plug can be configured to
read data from a database
write data to a database
READING DATA FROM A MS-SQL DATABASE
The action aims at acquiring from an external system, NValue [36] values (by default 1) for each of
the tags specified in the InputFile [27], through the execution of a SELECT query [46]. The results are
written in the OutputFile [28].
MANDATORY FIELDS
Action [26]: READDB
InputFile [27]
OutputFile [28]
StrSQL_SELECT [46]
OPTIONAL FIELDS
Prefix [31]
Suffix [32]
EndofLine [33]
Default [35]
DataBase [45]
WRITING DATA TO A MS-SQL DATABASE
The action aims at writing data to an external system for each tags specified in the InputFile [27]
through the execution of an INSERT [47] and/or UPDATE [48] query.
MANDATORY FIELDS
Action [26]: WRITEDB
InputFile [27]
Query Order [44]
StrSQL_INSERT [47]
StrSQL_UPDATE [48]
OPTIONAL FIELDS
Prefix [31]
Suffix [32]
QueryOrder [44]
DataBase [45]
3.4 FIELDS RECAPITULATIVE TABLE
Description of the fields is given below:
FIELD FIELD NAME FORMAT DESCRIPTION
Specify the directory where the input source

[1] Input Directory String
files/folders to be copied are stored
Choose to delete or not the input source files/

[2] Delete Input File [YES | NO]
folders once copied or interpreted
Choose to make a backup or not of the input

[3] Backup Input File [YES | NO]
source files/folders being copied or interpreted
Choose to make a backup or not of the output

[4] Backup Output File [YES | NO]
files/folders
Define to either backup the files in the backup

folder directly [11] (FILE) or in a sub-folder of
[5] Backup Mode [FILE | FOLDER]
the backup folder for each input source file
(FOLDER)
Choose to rename or not the backup files. The

[6] Rename Backup [YES | NO]
file replace name is the one defined at field [14]
Specify the date and time format used to

[7] Date & Time Format String determine the name of the input source files/
folders to be copied or interpreted
Specify the extension of the input source file to

[8] File extension String
be copied or interpreted
Specify the strings to be added before a given

date for the input file name search. ValiLink
[9] File Prefix String will search a source folder for a file, named
according to the following scheme:
FilePrefixyyyymmdd-hhmmss.FileExtension[8]
Specify the strings to be added after a given

date for the input file name search. ValiLink
[10] File Suffix String will search a source folder for a file, named
according to the following scheme:
FileSuffixyyyymmdd-hhmmss.FileExtension[8]
Directory path where input [3] and/or output

[11] Backup Directory String
[4] files are backed-up
In case the input files cannot be found in the

[12] Read From Backup [YES | NO] Input Directory [1], use the corresponding one
in Backup Directory [11] if any
Output Directory path where input files are

[13] Output Directory String
copied (destination folder)
Specify the name to be given to the input files

[14] File Replace Name String
that are copied in the Output Directory [13]
Specify the time to be used as a reference for

determining the date and time:
LOCAL use local time as the reference to

[15] Time Reference [LOCAL | UTC]
determine the date time
UTC use UTC time as the reference to

Specify if the date and time used for the input

files are the begin or end date and time:
BEGIN_DATE use the begin date to

[BEGIN_DATE |
END_DATE | END_DATE use the end date to determine
[16] TimeStamp
BEGIN_TIME | the date time
END_TIME]
BEGIN_TIME use the begin date time to
END_TIME use the end date time to

When working with date and time expressed in

number format, the Time Zero gives the date
String
and time corresponding to zero number. If left
[17] Time Zero (yyyyMMdd_HHm
blank, the default Time Zero is 01/01/1970. The
mss)
Zero date time is used to specify the date time
for determining the name of the input file/folder
Tolerance in seconds allowed for the name of

the input files. This option is usefull in case data
[18] Time Tolerance String
bases cannot generate files with exact dates and
times
Specify if the input files are to be either copied

[19] Translate File [YES | NO]
or interpreted
Specify the translation mode:
GENERIC Generic mode of translation

[20] Translate Mode [GENERIC | WINIS]
WINIS Mode of translation specific to
WinIS
[ALL | In case files are interpreted [19], it specifies

[21] Tag Transfer
LICENSESERVER] which tags should be interpreted: either all tags
defined in the input file (ALL) or tags defined in

the LicenseServer only (LICENSESERVER)
Choose to rename or not the tags with the

[22] Tag Rename [NONE | DBNAME]
corresponding DB name
Specify the charachter used as field separator in

[23] Separator Input String
the input files (TAB/;/space/etc.)
Specify the charachter used as field separator in

the output files (Only TAB and Space are
[24] Separator Output String recognized by the Engine). If the field is left
blank, the space is used as the separator by
default
WinIS has 7 possible codes to determine the

quality of the values provided by the system
(byte values):
1 Value OK
String
2 Value failed
[25] Quality Map Quality Map =
01010101 3 Failed with substitute value
4 Value hidden
5 Hidden with substitute value
6 Value defined but not available
[READDB | Specify the type of actions to be performed: read

[26] Action
WRITEDB] data from database or write data to database
Specify the path of and name of the file that

[27] Input File String contains the tags to be transferred (model or
text files) - One tag per line
Specify the path and name of the output file to

[28] Output File String
be written by ValiLink
In case of several actions, choose to either

[29] Output File Append [YES | NO] append the new values at the end of the output
files or to clear the files before writing
[AVG | MEAN |
[30] Value Type Specify the type of values to be transferred:
MIN | MAX |
AVG (for READDB action only [26]) read

average value for the defined time period
(if relevant, a time weighted value will be
provided)
MEAN (for READDB action only [26]) read

arithmetical mean of values available for
the defined time period
MIN (for READDB action only [26]) read

minimum value for the defined time
period
MAX (for READDB action only [26]) read

maximum value for the defined time
period
VALUE_BEGINDATE (for READDB and

WRITEDB action [26]) read instant value
for the beginning of the defined time
VALUE_BEGINDAT period / write value with the time stamp
E | of the beginning of the time period
VALUE_ENDDATE VALUE_ENDDATE (for READDB and
| INTEGRAL | WRITEDB action [26]) read instant value
DURATION | for the end of the defined time period /
TIME_FRACTION | write value with the time stamp of the
STDDEV] end of the time period
DURATION (for READDB action only [26])

determine the time duration over which a
given condition is satisfied. The condition
and reference date are to be defined at
fields [43] and [53], [54] or [55]
TIME FRACTION (for READDB action only

[26]) determine the time fraction of a
given time span, over which a given
condition is satisfied. The condition and
reference date are to be defined at fields
[43], [49] and [50], [51] or [52]
STDDEV (for READDB action only [26])

read the standard deviation for the
defined time period. Note that:
The input file [27] (with the tag list)

has to be a text file (not a model file).
STDDEV is only available with PI

(OSIsoft ©).
Specify the strings to be written before the

[31] Prefix String name of the tags in the ouput files / external
system
Specify the strings to be written after the name

[32] Suffix String
of the tags in the ouput files / external system
Specify the strings to be written at the end of

each line in the ouput files. Usually the string
[33] End of Line String
will be enclosed by double quotes " and start by
a space (Example: ENDOFLINE=" T/HR")
Specify if physical units associated to a tag are

[34] Retrieve Phys Unit [YES | NO] to be read in the external system and written it
in the output file or not
Specify the values to be written in case no value

is retrieved from the external system. If left
Real number or blank, BAD is used by default. Setting the value
[35] Default
string to BAD enables to activate a corrective action
by ValiFilter and to trace the acquisition issue
in ValiEngine html reports
Specify the number of values to be read for each

tag (by default 1). The time window will be
[36] Number of Values Positive integer
divided in Nvalue intervals and a value will be
produced for each interval
Phys Unit
[37] Not used Not used
Concordance
Specify the name and path of the delay file

which is containing the delays to be applied for
each zone (one zone per line, syntax of each line:
ZONE_DELAY 100.012 )
[38] Delay File String The ZONE_DELAY are to be defined in the

model.bls file.
Applicable only in case the input file [27] is a

model file
If no physical unit is specified, seconds will be
used by default
Specify if the delay file is to be read in the

backup directory [11] or not:
YES Delay file is read from Backup

[39] Delay From Backup [YES | NO]
directory
NO Delay file is not read from backup

directory
Specify if the delay file to be read is the one of

[40] Delay Run [0 | -1] the current run (0) or the one of the previous
run (-1)
Provide a description to Action i

[41] Comment string
The description will be displayed in the Action
section of the ValiLinkBuilder main window [r]
Applicable for reading actions [26] in SQL

database only. Enable User's query definition. If
[42] Query Mode [YES | NO]
YES, the query is to be defined at
StrSQL_SELECT [46]
[VALUE_BEGINDA Specify the reference date to be used as the

[43] Reference Date TE | starting point to calculate time fraction and
VALUE_ENDDATE] duration
Specify the query to be performed first in

between INSERT and UPDATE. By default,
INSERT is performed first
[44] Query Order [INSERT | UPDATE] INSERT: StrSQL_INSERT query is

attempted first
UPDATE: StrSQL_UPDATE query is

attempted first
Specify the name of the database to connect to

for the action in case it is different from the one
defined in the plant (note that it overwrites the
[45] Database String SERVER SETTINGS section).
In case of an Access database, the path and

name of the Database should be provided
SQL query for SELECT command to be executed

[46] StrSQL_SELECT String to get the value of the tag. This query can refer
to pre-defined keywords [KeyWords]
SQL query for INSERT command to insert a

[47] StrSQL_INSERT String
new record in the external system
SQL query for UPDATE command to update an

existing record in an external system. By
default (see QueryOrder [44]), an INSERT is
[48] StrSQL_UPDATE String
attempted first. If it fails than an UPDATE is
carried out in place. This query can refer to pre-
defined keywords [KeyWords]
Following keywords can be used:
%BeginDateShort%: date information

related to BeginDate
%BeginDateLong%: date and time

information related to BeginDate
%EndDateShort%: date information

related to EndDate
%EndDateLong%: date and time

Keywords information related to EndDate
%Hour%: number of hours between

BeginDate and EndDate
%INPUT1%: first column from file

InputFile
%INPUT2%: second column from file

InputFile
%INPUT3%: third column from file

InputFile
Specify the time to be substracted to the

reference date [43] to obtain a time period. The
Time fraction -
[49] Positive integer time period will be used to determine the time
Duration
fraction over which a condition is satisfied [50]
[51] [52]. Option available for PI only
Time fraction - Used to specify the condition to be satisfied for

[50] Digital
Filter Expression the Time Fraction determination in case of
(digital tag) digital tag
Used to specify the condition to be satisfied for

Time fraction -
the Time Fraction determination in case of
[51] Filter Expression Numerical
numerical tag - legal operators to be used are <,
(numerical tag)
>, =, <=, >=
Time fraction - Used to specify the condition to be satisfied for

[52] Filter Expression String the Time Fraction determination in case of
(string tag) string tag
Duration - Digital Used to specify the condition to be satisfied for

[53] Digital
State the Duration determination in case of digital tag
Used to specify the condition to be satisfied for

Duration -
[54] Numerical the Duration determination in case of numerical
Numerical State
tag
Duration - String Used to specify the condition to be satisfied for

[55] String
State the Duration determination in case of string tag
Used to specify the FTP Archive directory used

[56] Archive Directory String
with XML_ROMSS Translate mode
Used to specify the FTP Acknowledgment

[57] ACK Directory String directory used with XML_ROMSS Translate
mode
Used to specify the SMTP Server used to send

[58] SMTP Server String advertisement email with XML_ROMSS
Translate mode
Used to specify the SMTP Port of the SMTP

Server used to send advertisement email with
[59] SMTP Port Positive integer
XML_ROMSS Translate mode. Default value is
25
Used to specify the Login of the SMTP Server

[60] Email Login String used to send advertisement email with
XML_ROMSS Translate mode.
Used to specify the Password of the SMTP

[61] Email Password Encrypted string Server used to send advertisement email with
XML_ROMSS Translate mode.
Used to specify the email address of the sender

used to send advertisement email with
[62] Email From String
XML_ROMSS Translate mode. Default value is
noreply@belsim.com
Used to specify the email address of the

recipeints used with email feature of
[63] Email To String
XML_ROMSS Translate mode. ';' character is
used as recipients separator.
[FOLDER]
[64] Server Type Specify the
[FTP]
SECTION 4: INPUT AND OUTPUT FILES FORMAT

4.1 COMMON FORMATTING CONVENTIONS
REPRESENTATION OF REAL NUMBERS

The standard format use '.' as separation character. Using ',' is however also supported.
Examples:
342.524
0.485640E-01
-23813,3
0.244926E+14
SEPARATION CHARACTERS
Tab and Space can be used as separation character.
4.2 FORMAT OF THE INPUT FILES
GETTING DATA FROM AN EXTERNAL SYSTEM

The Input File lists the tags for which one or more values are requested from an external system.
The tags must be listed one per line.
Example:
PI-001
TI-002
FI-001
...
WRITING DATA TO AN EXTERNAL SYSTEM

The Input File contains the list of tags as well as their value. Physical units can be given but are
ignored.
Typically the Input File will have been generated by VALI as an OUTPUT measurement file.
Example:
PI-001 27.3000 barg
TI-001 192.000 C
FI-001 1003.42 t/h
...
4.3 FORMAT OF THE OUTPUT FILES
The tag values acquired from an external system will be written in the Output File in a format
directly readableby VALI as measurement file.
Physical units (also known as engineering units) are written in the output file by the application
when they are provided by the external system. Should a space character appear in these physical
units, it will be replaced by the underscore character: "_". For example, Bar g will be converted into
Bar_g.
The three fields (tag name, value and physical units) are separated by a tab.
Example:
PI-001 <tab> 27.3000 <tab> barg
TI-001 <tab> 192.000 <tab> C
FI-001 <tab> 1003.42 <tab> t/h
...
SECTION 5: CONTENTS OF THE LOG FILE

Error messages are identified by an alphanumeric code of the following form:
[DATE TIME] COD NUM: MESSAGE
where:
DATE: the date
TIME: the time:
COD: the le ve l of se ve rity of the e rror:
INF: Information:
connection to a server or database
successful read or write
sql query message
WRN: Warning:
default value is used when a failure occurred on a tag reading
ERR: Failure at the level of a Tag
tag is not defined in server
failed to get/write value of a tag
ERS: Failure at the level of an Action:
failed to read input file
failed to write output file
ERF: Failure at the level of the application:
failed to read ini file
invalid dates format
connection to server failed
NUM: the error number (4 digits)
MESSAGE: message describing the issue
SECTION 6: PLUGS TECHNICAL INFORMATION

6.1 PI
PI REQUIREMENTS SERVER SIDE

The PI server will be configured to enable reading and receiving data from VALI. In that respect, the
adequate number of TAGs will be made available in the PI database.
For further technical details regarding the PI server configuration, please visit OsiSoft support site at
support.OSIsoft.com.
REQUIREMENTS CLIENT SIDE

There are two ways of querying the PI database:
through PI Software Development Kit (SDK),
or through PI Advanced Programming Interface (API). The PI connector uses the API
routines included in the PIAPI32.dll library. ValiLink is compliant with PIAPI32.dll
version 1.3.8.0 and later.
Any of the following separate installation will enable a working connection on the client side:
the PI-software development kit (PI-SDK version 1.2.0): The PI Software Development Kit
(PI-SDK ) is a programming tool providing access to PI Servers. The software consists of an
ActiveX in-process server, an ActiveX control, and supporting code libraries
PI ProcessBook (PI-PB version 2.31): A graphics package that allows users to create
dynamic, interactive graphical displays featuring real-time PI data
The PI connector must be installed on the computer where VALI software is installed. No further
software is needed.
On top of the requirements described above, the customer will enable the connection at the network
level: generally, customer network security policies do not interfere with the connection between
ValiLink and the PI server.
A working PI connection can be tested thanks to the PI ProcessBook on the computer where VALI is
installed.
ValiLink is compliant with PI Trust to simplify the connection with PI DAHS that are managed
through PI Trust.
Attention:
1. When reading a value, ValiLink will always retrieve the extrapolated value.
2. The value can be a numeric value, a string or a digital point.
6.2 IP21
IP21 REQUIREMENTS SERVER SIDE

ValiLink is fully compliant with Infoplus.21 4.1.1 or higher. The IP21 server will be configured to
enable reading and receiving data from VALI. In that respect, the adequate number of TAGs will be
made available in the IP21 database.
For further technical details regarding the IP21 server configuration, please visit AspenTech support
site at support.aspentech.com.
IP21 REQUIREMENTS CLIENT SIDE

ValiLink requires the following software installed on client computer for IP21 connection:
SQLplus ODBC driver (contained in the installation CD-Rom of IP21)
No further software is needed.
On top of the requirements described above, the customer will enable the connection at the network
ValiLink and the IP21 server.
ODBC CONFIGURATION
ValiLink uses ODBC connection to provide data access to the IP21 Database.
ODBC (Open Database Connectivity) is a standard database access method. The goal of ODBC is to
access data from any application, regardless of which DataBase Management System (DBMS) is
handling the data. ODBC manages this by inserting a middle layer, called a database driver, between
an application and the DBMS. The purpose of this layer is to translate the application's data queries
into commands that the DBMS understands. For this to work, both the application and the DBMS
must be ODBC-compliant that is, the application must be capable of issuing ODBC commands and
the DBMS must be capable of responding to them.
Before connecting to the Database, the user must first create a DSN (Data Source Name) via the "
ODBC Data Source Administrator" program found in the client computer's Control Panel (in
Administrative Tools menu). Make sure to create a SYSTEM DSN (not a USER DSN).
Click "add" in the menu and choose in the list "AspenTech SQLplus" to create a new data source.
FIGURE 6 - ODBC DATA S OURCE ADMINIS TRATOR
FIGURE 7 - CREATE A NEW OBBC DATA S OURCE
The AspenTech IP21 ODBC connection uses the Windows login to connect to the database. There are
no identifying and password to introduce in the configuration.
To configure the data source , provide the following information::
the name of the data source (user defined ID)
a short description
the IP or UNC of the IP21 server
the TCP/IP port of the server (default is 10014)
FIGURE 8 - CREATE A NEW OBBC DATA S OURCE
Press the Test button to test the connection is up before continuing.
DATE TIME FORMAT

AspenTech IP21 uses a fixed date time format "yyyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ss" which is encoded directly in
the ValiLink software. However, in each SQL query, the reserved word TIMESTAMP must be
specified before date field to ensure correct conversion.
REQUEST WORD
The reserved word "request" is used to specify the type of data returned. By default, the value is 1 but
in our case, value must be set to 2 (used for instant value). For more information, please refer to the
SQLplus help.
SELECT QUERIES
ValiLink enables to use all the SQL language detailed in the SQLplus help to read and write data to/
from IP21 Databases.
Here are some typical queries used in ValiLink:
Get one Value at one time:

StrSQL_select=SELECT VALUE FROM HISTORY WHERE NAME = '%INPUT1%' AND
TS = TIMESTAMP'%BeginDateLong%' AND REQUEST = 2;
Get one Value at one time with physical unit:
StrSQL_select=SELECT VALUE,(SELECT IP_ENG_UNITS FROM IP_ANALOGDEF
WHERE NAME = '%INPUT1%')
AS PhysUnit FROM HISTORY WHERE NAME = '%INPUT1%'
AND TS = TIMESTAMP'%BeginDateLong%' AND REQUEST = 2;
Average on one Value:
StrSQL_select=SELECT AVG, (SELECT IP_ENG_UNITS FROM IP_ANALOGDEF WHERE NAME = '%INPUT1%')
AS PhysUnit FROM AGGREGATES WHERE NAME = '%INPUT1%'
AND TS BETWEEN TIMESTAMP'%BeginDateLong%' AND TIMESTAMP'%EndDateLong%'
AND request = 2
AND PERIOD = (TIMESTAMP'%EndDateLong%' - TIMESTAMP'%BeginDateLong%');
Average with time period divided by 10:
StrSQL_select=SELECT AVG, (SELECT IP_ENG_UNITS FROM IP_ANALOGDEF WHERE NAME = '%INPUT1%')
AND request = 2
AND PERIOD =((TIMESTAMP'%EndDateLong%' - TIMESTAMP'%BeginDateLong%')/10);

Maximum on one value:
StrSQL_select=SELECT MAX, (SELECT IP_ENG_UNITS FROM IP_ANALOGDEF WHERE NAME = '%INPUT1%')
AND request = 2
Minimum on one value:
StrSQL_select=SELECT MIN, (SELECT IP_ENG_UNITS FROM IP_ANALOGDEF WHERE NAME = '%INPUT1%')
AND request = 2
INSERT-UPDATE QUERIES
The INSERT commands always insert a new value, even if there is already a record with same data.
It is therefore recommended to always use the UPDATE command first.
Attention:
1. The primary key is fixed on an ID, not on the date time!
2. It is not possible to delete a record from the database.
Insert a new Value:

StrSQL_insert=INSERT INTO "%INPUT1%"(IP_TREND_VALUE,IP_TREND_TIME)
VALUES (%INPUT2%,TIMESTAMP'%BeginDateLong%');
Update a Value:
StrSQL_update=UPDATE "%INPUT1%" SET IP_TREND_VALUE = %INPUT2%
WHERE IP_TREND_TIME = TIMESTAMP'%BeginDateLong%';
By default, it is only possible to write a value with a time stamp falling within the 24 hours period
before execution time. This setting can be modified using the Server application of IP21:
right click in the historical table (under "historian" leaf).
see IP_REPOSITORY in the field structure IP_ANALOG_DEF of the tag.
choose "Properties" and change time value
restart the database must be restarted for changes to take effect
FIGURE 9 - CHANGING PROPERTIES OF IP21 S ERVER
EXAMPLE OF VALILINK INI FILE FOR IP21

[SERVER SETTINGS]
PlantName=CP_IP21
DataBase=FORM05
ShortDateFormat=yyyy-MM-dd
LongDateFormat=yyyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ss
[LOGFILE OPTION]
Path=
LogLevel=0
Backup Option=BACKUP
[Action1]
InputFile=ToSQL_all.txt
OutputFile=FromSQL.mea
StrSQL_select=SELECT VALUE, Phys_Unit FROM db WHERE NAME = '%INPUT1%' AND Date =
'%BeginDateLong%';
[Action2]
QueryOrder=update
InputFile=SQLtest.out
StrSQL_update=Update "%INPUT1%" SET IP_TREND_VALUE = %INPUT2% WHERE IP_TREND_TIME =
TIMESTAMP'%EndDateLong%';
StrSQL_insert=INSERT INTO "%INPUT1%"(IP_TREND_VALUE,IP_TREND_TIME) VALUES
(%INPUT2%,TIMESTAMP'%BeginDateLong%');
6.3 PLANTCONNECT
PLANTCONNECT REQUIREMENTS SERVER SIDE

ValiLink is fully compliant with PlantConnect 3.5 or higher
The PlantConnect server must be configured to enable reading and receiving data from VALI. A
dedicated user with the appropriate rights must be created to enable the access to PlantConnect.
For further technical details regarding the PlantConnect server configuration, please contact ABB
technical support.
PLANTCONNECT REQUIREMENTS CLIENT SIDE

ValiLink requires the following software installed on client computer for PlantConnect connection:
PlantConnect client installation 3.5
On top of the requirements described above, the customer must enable the connection at the network
ValiLink and PlantConnect.
6.4 MS-SQL
MS-SQL REQUIREMENTS SERVER SIDE

ValiLink is fully compliant with MS-SQL 7.0 or higher
The MS-SQL server must be configured to enable reading and receiving data from VALI. A dedicated
user with the appropriate rights must be created to enable the access to the MS-SQL database.
For further technical details regarding the Oracle server configuration, please visit Microsoft support
site at http://www.microsoft.com/sql/support/default.mspx.
MS-SQL REQUIREMENTS CLIENT SIDE

ValiLink can connect to MS-SQL using 3 standard connection plugs:
OLEDB
ODBC
.NET native driver
The .Net native driver gives the best performance.
ValiLink requires the following software installed on client computer for MS-SQL connection:
.NET framework 2.0 (included in VALI4 installation package)
The .NET framework must be installed on the computer where VALI software is installed. No further
software is needed.
ValiLink and MS-SQL.
ValiLink and all Belsim tools support Windows Authentication to connect to SQL server, in addition
to SQL classic authentication.
6.5 ORACLE
ORACLE REQUIREMENTS SERVER SIDE

ValiLink is fully compliant with Oracle Database 8.0 or higher.
The Oracle server must be configured to enable reading and receiving data from VALI. A dedicated
user with the appropriate rights must be created to enable the access to the Oracle database.
For further technical details regarding the Oracle server configuration, please visit Oracle support
site at www.oracle.com.
ORACLE REQUIREMENTS CLIENT SIDE

ValiLink requires the following software installed on client computer for Oracle connection:
Oracle9i Client Release 2 (9.2) or higher installed on client machine
The Oracle 9.2 Client Release must be installed on the computer where VALI software is installed. No
further software is needed.
ValiLink and the Oracle server.
TNSNAMES.ORA FILE CONFIGURATION

First, you need to configure the file tnsnames.ora to allow ValiLink and Oracle client software to
connect to the database server. They are two ways to configure the file: by using the "Net Manager"
tool given with the Oracle Client installation or by editing manually the file tnsnames.ora
Using the "Net Manager" tool given with the Oracle Client installation.
start Oracle NetManager:
FIGURE 10 - S TARTING ORACLE NET MANAGER
FIGURE 11 - ORACLE NET MANAGER
click on the left arrow to create a new alias in the tnsnames.ora file:
FIGURE 12 - DEFINE NAME OF NETWORK S ERVICE
enter the name you want to use for your alias:
FIGURE 13 - TYPE OF COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL
choose the type of communication protocol (TCP/IP by default):
FIGURE 14 - IP ADDRES S OF THE ORACLE S ERVER
enter the IP address or UNC name of the Oracle Database Server:
FIGURE 15 - NAME OF ORACLE DATABAS E TO CONNECT TO
enter the name of your active database or choose the SID:
FIGURE 16 - TES T CONNECTIVITY
finish the configuration by testing the connectivity with the Oracle Database Server
Editing manually the file tnsnames.ora
You can manually edit the file tnsnames.ora to add your own alias. The file is located in the directory
Oracle installed on the client machine:
[InstallationDir]NETWORK\ADMIN\TNSNAMES.ORA
Example of alias in the TNSNAMES.ORA file:
VALIDATA =
(DESCRIPTION =
(ADDRESS_LIST =
(ADDRESS = (PROTOCOL = TCP)(HOST = belsim04)(PORT = 1521))
)
(CONNECT_DATA =
(SID = validata)
)
)
The alias name will be used by ValiLink to connect to the database.
CONFIGURATION IN BELSIM LICENSESERVER

To connect to the Oracle database, ValiLink uses a "Plant" that must be created through Belsim
LicenseManager application
Valilink allows using two types of connections to Oracle Server:
Oracle .NET Data Provider: optimized for .NET application (as ValiLink)
ODBC (Open Database Connectivity)
enter the name of the new plant. (Ex: VALI_PHD)
in Server Type, choose "ODBC_Oracle" or "Oracle
enter the log name and password as defined in Oracle
in IP/UNC, enter the name of the alias as defined in TNSNAMES.ORA
6.6 PHD
PHD REQUIREMENTS SERVER SIDE

The ValiLink plug to PHD is based on the standard OPC-HDA. The OPC server of PHD must be
installed and configured to allow the connection using ValiLink. The PHD administrator must
configure the security settings in PHD to allow connection and read-write access.
For further technical details regarding the PHD server configuration, please contact HoneyWell
technical support.
PHD REQUIREMENTS CLIENT SIDE

If ValiLink is deployed on a computer without an installed OPC server then it may be necessary to
install the OPC Core Components.
Install the core components setup file OPC Core Components 2.00 Redistributable 2.00.msi (available
in [Belsim InstallDir]\SystemNT) on the computer where ValiLink runs and restart the computer.
ValiLink and the PHD OPC server.
CONNECTION TO OPC PHD SERVER

You must create a new plant in Belsim LicenseServer through Belsim LicenseManager.
enter the name of the new plant. (Ex: VALI_PHD)
in Server Type, choose "OPC_HDA_PHD"
leave log name and password blank
in IP/UNC, enter the IP address or name of the computer where the OPC server is installed
Enter the instance name of the server as parameter Database of the Server settings section of the ini
file.
Example:
Database=OPC.PHDServerHDA.1
6.7 MATRIKON OPC HDA SERVER
OPC HDA REQUIREMENTS SERVER SIDE

The OPC HDA server of Matrikon must be installed and configured to allow the connection using
ValiLink. The OPC HDA administrator must configure the security settings to allow connection and
read-write access.
For further technical details regarding the OPC HDA server configuration, please contact Matrikon
technical support.
OPC HDA REQUIREMENTS CLIENT SIDE

If ValiLink is deployed on a computer without an installed OPC server then it may be necessary to
install the OPC Core Components.
Install the core components setup file OPC Core Components 2.00 Redistributable 2.00.msi (available in
[Belsim InstallDir]\SystemNT) on the computer where ValiLink runs and restart the computer.
ValiLink and the OPC HDAserver.
CONNECTION TO OPC HDA SERVER

You must create a new plant in Belsim LicenseServer through Belsim LicenseManager.
enter the name of the new plant. (Ex: VALI_OPC)
in Server Type, choose "OPC_HDA_MATRIKON"
leave log name and password blank
in IP/UNC, enter the IP address or name of the computer where the OPC server is installed
Enter the instance name of the server as parameter Database of the Server settings section of the ini
file.
Example:
Database=OPC.ServerHDA.1
CHAPTER 14
VALIFILTER AND
VALIEVENT XIV
The main purpose of ValiFilter is an intelligent filtering of raw data to give an adequate set of input
measurement data to VALI so that convergence rate is maximized.
ValiFilter analyses and filters raw measurement data before the execution of the validation step of
ValiEngine or ValiOnlineEngine. It provides the following functionality:
filtering measured values falling outside a given range
setting OFF units or streams when a measured value falls under a given CUTOFF value
defining specific filtering strategies using Flex code
ValiEvent aims at:
the detection of process operation mode and logging of changes
the detection and reporting on events on a given period, an event being a scatter, constant
gradient (slope) or discontinuities (sudden changes) in the trend of the corresponding
measured values
SECTION 2: VALIFILTER
ValiFilter is integrated with ValiEngine. It filters measured values, ensuring that they are within the
alarm bounds defined on the Tags. It also enables to cut-off streams or units when the measured
value is below a given cut-off values.
The syntax FILTERED enables to manually filter any measurements (ValiFilter license required) from
a measurement file.
Eventually, specific filtering strategies can be defined through the use of Flex code.
2.1 FILTERING TAGS
When a measured value is outside the alarm bounds (LL, HH) the measured value, the precision and
the failure probability are replaced as indicated by the user. The calculation of VALI will be based
according to these replacement values.
A tag will be considered as filtered if a filter, a control string or a Flex Filter code (SETAGVAL
function) has modified its value or has set it's accuracy to OFF.
You can also filter tags manually, replacing the measured value and optionally the accuracy by some
manual input using the syntax FILTERED in measurement files (see "Using measurement files").
2.2 DEFINING THE FILTERS USING VALIMODELLER
The filter settings are defined in the Filter page of the Tags notebooks.
The LL and HH fields define the acceptable range of values for the measured value.
The Value field defines the action to be performed on the measured value if it is outside its acceptable
range. It can be one of the following keywords:
The Accuracy field defines the action to be performed on the measured accuracy if the measured
value is outside its acceptable range. It can be one of the following keywords:
The Type defines the type of the filtered accuracy when it is specified as a value.
The FailProb field defines the action to be performed on the failure probability if the measured value
is outside its acceptable range. It can be a value or NONE, in which case no action is taken on the
failure probability.
The CUTOFF field defines the threshold value for the measured value under which the
corresponding stream or unit will be set OFF. It can be a value or NONE, in which case no CUTOFF
action is taken.
FIGURE 1 - THE FILTERS OF THE TAGS NOTEBOOK
2.3 DEFINING THE FILTERS USING MEA FILES
Attention: ValiFilter is available under a separate licence agreement.
ValiFilter detects measured values that are outside ERROR bounds (LL-HH interval) and updates
their value, precision and failure probability according to user settings. These settings are defined in
the model file. They can be updated using one of the two following syntaxes.
TAGNAME FILTER MEASURED ACCURACY FAILPROB
where:
TAGNAME: the Tag name
MEASURED: the action on the measured value and can be:
ACCURACY: the action on the accuracy and can be:
FAILPROB: defines the action on the Failure probability and can be:
Value %: the failure probability is replaced by the given value
Example:
POWER_POWER LL 10 HH 17 MW
POWER_POWER FILTER DEF -5 50 %
AIR.1_T LL -20 HH 40 C
AIR.1_T FILTER BND 10 NONE
The second syntax allows to update several tags in one shot by using wildcards:
UPDATETAG TYPE TAGTYPE FILTER MEASURED ACCURACY FAILPROB
UPDATETAG NAME TAGNAME FILTER MEASURED ACCURACY FAILPROB
where:
TAGTYPE and TAGNAME are strings defining which tags are to be changed (based on their
type or name) and can contain wildcards
Example:
! Changes
01LCQ01CF001 FILTER 0.1 t/h -5 NONE
! Sets the filter settings of all tags starting by TI to MID MID NONE
!
UPDATETAG NAME TI* FILTER MID MID NONE
Attention:
1. The penalty reported in the model and in the result files will be calculated both on basis of the
raw measured value as on basis of the filtered value.
2. The control strings and test on CUTOFF value are based on the raw measured value
It is also possible to specify a CUTOFF value on the filter settings of an individual tag (ValiFilter
license required). If the value of the measurement is below the specified value, the corresponding
object (STREAM or UNIT) will be set OFF. The syntax is:
TAGNAME CUTOFF VALUE PU
TAGNAME CUTOFF NONE
where:
PU: is the physical unit
Attention: It is also possible to specify a CUTOFF value on an individual tag via control strings (see "
Using control strings").
Remember also that the STATUS measurement enables a binary tag value to set a stream OFF.
2.4 INTERACTION WITH CUTOFF AND CONTROL STRINGS
The CUTOFF operation whether defined as a filter or through a control string uses the measured
value (before filtering), except in case of manual filtering through a measurement file, in which case
the filtered value is used.
More generally, if a control string is defined on the tag, its operation will be based on the measured
value and it will over-write whatever has been made by the filter.
On the other side, if a control strings changes the value or the accuracy of a tag, the latter will be
considered as filtered.
2.5 REPORTS
VALI flags with a F (in the reports r4v, r5v and r6v) the measurements on which automatic actions
have been taken. The "measured" value is here the used value (as used by ValiEngine for the
calculations).
Example:
FIGURE 2 - TAGS OF THE S YS TEM
A dedicated section in the r4v and r5v reports lists all the tags that have been filtered. The penalty is
there calculated on basis of the original measured value.
Example:
FIGURE 3 - FILTERED TAGS
2.6 ADVANCED FILTERING STRATEGIES
Using Flex code you can define further filtering actions :
to update measured values, accuracies or bounds of tags
to set OFF units and streams
to deactivate user defined equations
Please refer to the Flex Language chapter of ValiModeller Manual for further information.
SECTION 3: VALIEVENT
3.1 OPERATION
The application (ValiEvent.exe) processes trends of measured values used in a VALI model. It aims at
detecting events such as scatter, constant gradient (slope) or discontinuities (sudden changes) in the
trend of the corresponding measured values in order:
to detect process unsteady state (ValiPerformance application)
to detect changes in the operation modes of some production units (ValiProduction

application)
Any event in the trend of one of the selected measurements is reported in an html report which is
linked to the main VALI reports
Three different types of events are detected:
variance (or scatter): this event is detected on basis of an acceptable scatter of the followed
variable around its average value. The comparison is made on an individual standard
deviation of the tag, the estimation being performed on the sample of measured data of the
followed variable. An event is detected when this standard deviation (sigma) is larger
than the threshold value
Attention: The standard deviation (used as threshold) is expressed in absolute (not relative) and is
not necessarily the value used by VALI (which is not known by ValiEvent).
gradient (or slope): this event is detected on basis of an acceptable slope of the linearised
trend ( ) of the followed variable. An event is detected when the absolute value of the slope
|b| is larger than the threshold value
discontinuity (or sudden change): this event is detected by a statistical analysis of the
second derivative of the signal. If the biggest and/or lowest values of the latter function are
away from the average value by more than a configurable number (Criter) of times the
standard deviation, an event is detected. A configurable number of highest (NvalHi) and
lowest (NvalLo) values are eliminated before calculating the average and the standard
deviation
Attention: If all the measured values are within 1 sigma (threshold value) around the average value
of the sample, then the third criterion (discontinuity) is not computed.
For each event detected, an excel readable file (csv file) is created. Opening it with excel enables to
easily create charts of the values of the measurement.
3.2 STARTING VALIEVENT
ValiEvent is usually launched by ValiScheduler. It can also be started manually or by an external

application by starting the application ValiEvent in <installdir>\bin directory (by default C:
\Program Files\Belsim\bin).
It requires as argument the name of the INI file with the configuration settings as well as the list of
tags j'with their acceptable standard deviation and gradient.
Here is the format of the TagList input file (that can be used also as input file of ValiLink):
TAGNAME STDEV [GRADIENT]
where:
TAGNAME: the TAG name
STDEV: the acceptable scatter expressed as a standard deviation (absolute value)
GRADIENT: the acceptable gradient (or slope) expressed as a delta over the dimension of
the time interval
The 2 first columns (TagName and Sigma) are mandatory but the 3rd column (Gradient) is optional:
if there is no Gradient, a default value is taken as: GRADIENT = (2 * STDEV) over the dimension of the
time interval.
The report (html format) is made of three sections:
tags not found: tags for which no value can be retrieved from the external system
interpolations on tags: tags for which not all values can be retrieved from the external
system, missing data are replaced by interpolated values.
events detected: tags for which an event has been detected. The criteria that is not satisfied
is pinpointed in red
Example of ValiEvent report:
3.3 CONFIGURING VALIEVENT
The event detector is configured through the file ValiEvent.ini which is formatted according to
Windows INI files and has two sections [INIT] and [DIR]. It can also be configured directly from
ValiScheduler.
The section [INIT] specifies the settings of the statistical analysis:
CRITER: value of the criteria for detecting an event
NVALHI: number of higher values to be ignored
NVALLO: number of lower values to be ignored
NVALUE: maximum number of values that will be analyzed for each tag
DURATION: the time interval on which the data are taken
DIMENSION: the physical units of the duration: S, s, SEC, Sec, sec, M, m, MIN, Min ,min,
Hour, H, h, HOUR, Hour, hour, Day, D, d, DAY ,Day, day
Attention: Default values for duration and dimension are respectively 1 day
The section [DIR] specifies the name of the input files as well as the working folder for the CSV files:
DATAFILE: name of the input file with the measurement data
CSVDIR: directory where CSV file will be created
TAGLIST: name of the input file with the list of tags to be analyzed including their
acceptable standard deviation and gradient
Example:
[Init]
Criter= 6.0
NvalHi= 4
NvalLo= 4
Nvalue= 100
Duration= 2
Dimension= h
[DIR]
DataFile=events.mea
CsvDir="C:\Vali\PlantA\events"
TagList=input.txt
Attention: If ValiEvent is launched from ValiScheduler, entries marked with a (*) have to be
introduced manually in the initialization file (ValiEvent.ini).
CHAPTER 15
VALI ONLINE
ENGINE XV
ValiOnlineEngine is the online version of the computation tool of VALI. It is optimized to run in an
automated procedure generating online validation results.
There is no difference between the ValiOnlineEngine and the ValiOfflineEngine integrated in

ValiModeller with regard to the performance of the tool or the results of the calculation. The main
difference is that the operation of the ValiOnlineEngine can be automated either through its
associated ValiScheduler or through any external automation procedure.
ValiScheduler controls the sequence of the different VALI components:
getting the measurement data from a DCS, a PIMS or any other databases (ValiLink)
filtering the measurement data (ValiFilter, which is integrated into the ValiOnlineEngine)
analyzing the measurement data in order to detect events (ValiEvent)
running ValiOnlineEngine
writing back the results to a PIMS or any other database (ValiLink)
exporting validation results to ValiDataBase (ValiReport)
backing-up the files generated during the run
Although ValiScheduler is devoted to automated operation it also features a manual mode that can
be used for testing purpose.
FIGURE 1 - VALIONLINEENGINE ENVIRONMENT
SECTION 2: RUNNING VALIONLINEENGINE

2.1 STARTING VALIONLINEENGINE
ValiOnlineEngine has been designed to be automated through its coupled ValiScheduler. However it
can also be automated through other applications.
To start ValiOnlineEngine:
start the application Vali.exe in the <installdir> folder (by default Program
Files\Belsim\bin)
double-click on a pc.vif file containing the settings of the run
2.2 VALI INFORMATION FILE (pc.vif)
When starting, ValiOnlineEngine needs to know which model gas to be run as well as the TAG and
MEA files to be used.
This information is defined in a Vali Information File (default extension vif). If not given as argument,
VALI will look by default for a file named pc.vif. If this file is not present in the current folder, the
information will be requested interactively.
Contents of the VALI information file:
line 1: name of the model file
line 2: name of the model (PFD)
line 3: runtime options
line 4: name of the Flex file
line 5: name of the MEA file
line 6: name of the TAG file
line 7: name of the model back-up file
line 8: name of second MEA file
line 9: name of third MEA file
Example:
gt.bls
GT
-htm -sqp
GT.MEA
GT.TAG
For more information about the runtime options, see "How to run your data validation model".
2.3 RUN STATUS
At the end of a run, VALI produces a file named valiexit.log with one line containing the keyword
EXITCODE followed by a numeric code:
-3: system error - no connection to the license server or licence issue
-2: system error - installation issue: missing directory, wrong version number
-1: fatal error
0: the run was successful
1: the run was successful but gross errors are suspected to be present (according to Chi-
square test)
Example:
EXITCODE 0
SECTION 3: RUNNING VALISCHEDULER

3.1 STARTING VALISCHEDULER
To start the scheduler, you can either:
start the ValiScheduler via the Windows Start Menu: (Start Menu|Programs|Belsim|
Vali4|ValiScheduler)
double-click the executable "ValiScheduler.exe" in the bin sub-folder of Belsim installation

folder
At start up, the application will ask whether to connect to a remote ValiService or to open a local
ValiScheduler configuration file.
FIGURE 2 - S TART-UP PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER (INI FILE)
Using local mode, an INI file will be requested. To create a new application, you simply need to enter
a new name for the INI file. To open an existing file, simply browse to open it.. ValiScheduler also
requires the name of a Plant defining a connection to a ValiDatabase. This allows ValiScheduler to
create all runs in the database when starting to process runs.
FIGURE 3 - S TART-UP PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER (VALIS ERVICE)
Using service mode, ValiScheduler will open a TCP/IP connection with the ValiService application
and retrieve the settings remotely. The IP address of the server where application is defined can be
selected using the drop-down list (see "Belsim LicenseManager" to add new IP addresses).
When using ValiScheduler coupled to ValiService, the tasks will be processed by the computer where
ValiService is installed.
The settings of ValiScheduler are accessed via a notebook that contains 8 pages:
General: settings for scheduling either automated run or manual runs,
Acquisition: options for getting measurement data from a DCS, a PIMS, or other databases,
Reconciliation: ValiOnlineEngine settings,
Storage: options for storing results of the validation process,
Event: settings of the event detector,
Backup: files or folders to be copied for back-up purpose,
Log File: options for logging,
Email: settings for automatic emailing in case of non convergence
3.2 GENERAL PAGE
The General page allows specifying the settings for scheduling either online run, re-run, or manual
run as well as the steps to be performed:
Real Time Run is the fully automated procedure to process real time data
Re-Run is the automated procedure to reprocess runs from the past
Manual Run is used to test the online/rerun procedure or parts of this procedure
Attention: Real Time runs and Reruns can be performed at the same time. Manual run can be started
once Online runs and Reruns are stopped.
The "Overview" table is used to show to the user an overview of the whole process. The top of the
page is divided in three parts:
Real Time Runs
Reruns
Manual Runs
For each option, different information items are displayed:
Status: status of the process:
: process is stopped
: in real time mode, it indicates that some reruns are being processed and that
online runs will be processed further
: process is running. For real-time, the scheduler is online
From: date of the first run to be processed
To: date of the last run to be processed
Last Run: date and time of the last processed run
Progression: progress bar indicating the number of runs already processed compared to
the number of runs to be processed. For real time processing, indicates the number of
reruns to be processed before starting online processing
FIGURE 4 - GENERAL PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER US ED LOCALLY
The table in the bottom of the page displays information about the last runs (Real Time/Rerun/
Manual):
Date: date of the run (based on the beginning of the time period)
Acquisition/Event/Reconciliation/Storage/Backup :status of the step:
: step not executed
: step completed successfully
: step failed
Quality: quality of the run
Penalty: penalty of the run
CPU(sec): time (in seconds) taken to process the run
FIGURE 5 - GENERAL PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER US ED WITH REMOTE CONNECTION TO VALIS ERVICE
Additional buttons are available at the bottom of the page:
ValiForms: this button opens ValiForms. The xml file ("ValiForms.xml") describing the
contents of the Forms has to be located next to the ValiScheduler INI file
Upload: only available when working with ValiService, this functionality allows you to
upload files located on your computer into the application directory located on the
ValiService computer. This window can also be used to download files located in the
application directory of the server
FIGURE 6 - UPLOAD PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER US ED WITH REMOTE CONNECTION TO VALIS ERVICE
Refresh: only available when working with ValiService, this functionality allows you to
manually reload the content of the configuration file (run results, values...) and refresh the
graphical user interface
Queue: this functionality shows you an overview of the process queue list. This allows
you:
to have a general overview of the process queue list
to see if other applications are running
to determine how many runs are waiting in the process queue list
FIGURE 7 - VIEW QUEUE PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER US ED WITH REMOTE CONNECTION TO VALIS ERVICE
Log: When running ValiScheduler locally, the button opens a window that will display
the content of the ValiScheduler log file. When ValiScheduler is used with remote
connection to ValiService, the button opens a window that will display the content of the
ValiService log file located on the remote server
FIGURE 8 - VIEW LOG PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER US ED WITH REMOTE CONNECTION TO VALIS ERVICE
The Validation results will be reloaded automatically every second. You can click on the button
"Refresh" to refresh the results manually.
3.2.1 STARTING REAL TIME

To start the execution of real time tasks, click on "Start Real Time" button. A configuration window
will be opened with the runs settings.
FIGURE 9 - S TART REAL TIME OPERATION PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER
The processing of the runs will start directly when you click on the "OK" button. The "Start Real
Time" button of the general page will be renamed "Stop Real Time". Once official runs are under
processing, you can not change the configuration settings. To stop the official run execution, click on
the button "Stop Real Time". The button will be renamed "Stopping Real Time". If tasks are under
execution, ValiScheduler will wait till the current tasks are finished.
The "Start From" table is used to specify the date of the first run to be processed:
Date: when the first run will be started
Last Processed: the date of the last processed run will be used for the first run
Last Successful Run: the date of the last successful run will be used for the first run
Now: ValiScheduler calculate the next real time date to process. This date will be used for
the first run
Rerun Only non Converged Runs: if selected, ValiScheduler will use the status of the run
specified in the associated ValiDatabase (defined by the Plant) to determine if the run must
be processed or not
If the start date specified is different from "Now", all the runs processed in the past will be considered
as "Reruns". Once ValiScheduler has processed the old runs and is back online, the next processed
run will be considered as "Real Time".
The "Schedule Settings" table is used to specify the settings of the automated procedure:
Run Every: at which frequency successive runs will be scheduled
Agg. period: the time frame for aggregating the data from historian system. For example,
one can be interested to make only one run per day, but based on hourly data (not daily).
In this case, the runs frequency should be set to 24 hour and the aggregation period to 1
hour. Another example is the case where one wants to validate every hour the data from
the past 24 hours. In this case the runs frequency should be set to 1 hour and the
aggregation period to 24 hours
Time Delay: for real time runs, waits the time specified before starting execution of the
tasks. This option is useful to ensure that all data are available in the PIMS before starting
the acquisition
Time Out: time period allowed for each task of the run. If the task lasts for a longer time
period the task is cancelled. No time out will be applied if this value is negative. During the
reconciliation step, ValiScheduler publishes a file next to the model file, called VALI.STOP,
once the timeout is reached. During resolution, ValiEngine will check for the existence of
such a file. If it exists, ValiEngine will stop its resolution, publish the reports and close. If
ValiEngine takes more than 2 minutes between the publishing of VALI.STOP and its
closing, ValiScheduler kills ValiEngine process and free its license (as well as the ValiFilter
license)
The "Steps" table is used to specify the tasks that will be executed in the automated procedure:
Data Acquisition: If selected, ValiScheduler will launch the retrieval of measurement data
from DCS, PIMS, or other databases:
Online Mode: Start acquisition tasks defined in "Acquisition" page with "Online Mode"
selected
Backup Mode: Typically used with "Rerun", start tasks defined in "Acquisition" page
with "Backup Mode" selected and restore backup files (See "backup" page for more
details about restoring backup files)
Event Detection: if selected, ValiScheduler will launch the event detection (ValiEvent) on
measurement data (See ValiEvent documentation)
Data Reconciliation: if selected, ValiScheduler will launch ValiOnlineEngine
Data Storage: if selected, ValiScheduler will launch the storing of results after the
validation step
Backup: if selected, ValiScheduler will back-up the selected files after the validation step
Email: if selected, ValiScheduler will launch the automatic emailing according to the
parameters specified in the "Email" page
The time window of the validation tasks is delimited by two dates: BeginDate and EndDate. The
difference between both dates corresponds to the Time Interval:
EndDate = BeginDate + Interval[IntervalDim]
The Time Interval is equals to the time span value of "Run every".
ValiScheduler will start the tasks execution when the [BeginDate + TimeDelay] is lower than the
current local time. If the [BeginDate + TimeDelay] value is higher, ValiScheduler will wait till the
local time is higher.
After a run is terminated, the next BeginDate will be set as the old EndDate.
When executing ValiScheduler without ValiService (using a configuration file), ValiScheduler needs
to be open to execute tasks automatically. If you close ValiScheduler, the automatic execution of tasks
will be stopped.
When executing ValiScheduler with ValiService, you can close the ValiScheduler application safely
without altering ValiService operation. ValiService will start automatically from the last processed
run in case of computer or network connection to the LicenseServer failure. When coming back in the
graphical interface of ValiScheduler, all the parameters and the status of the process are
automatically refreshed according to ValiService operation.
3.2.2 STARTING RERUN

To start the execution of rerun tasks, click on "Start Rerun" button. A configuration window will be
opened with the runs settings.
FIGURE 10 - S TART RERUN OPERATION PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER
The processing of the runs will start directly when you click on the "OK" button. The "Start Rerun"
button of the general page will be renamed "Stop Rerun". Once runs are under processing, you cannot
change the configuration settings. To stop the run execution, click on the button "Stop Rerun". The
button will be renamed "Stopping Rerun". If tasks are under execution, ValiScheduler will wait till
the current run is finished.
The "Start Rerun" table is used to specify the date of the first run:
From: the date of the first run to be processed
To: the date of the last run to be processed. After this run will be processed, ValiScheduler
(or ValiService) will stop the processing of runs
Rerun Only non Converged Runs: If selected, ValiScheduler will use the status of the run
specified in the associated ValiDatabase (defined by the Plant) to determine if the run must
be processed or not
The "Rerun Date List" table is used to specify in a text file a set of dates that have to be processed
(mainly used for testing purpose). Dates are defined line by line in the input text file (one date per
line). The date format must be YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS. If the "Rerun Date List" option is checked,
then the classical dates selection (From / To) and the frequency of calculation (Run Every) are not used
anymore. Other rerun options are still used.
Agg. period: the time frame for aggregating the data from historian system. For example,
one can be interested to make only one run per day, but based on hourly data (not daily).
In this case, the runs frequency should be set to 24 hour and the aggregation period to 1
hour. Another example is the case where one wants to validate every hour the data from
the past 24 hours. In this case the runs frequency should be set to 1 hour and the
aggregation period to 24 hours
license)
selected
validation step
After a run is processed, the next BeginDate will be set as the old EndDate.
When executing ValiScheduler without ValiService (using a configuration file), ValiScheduler needs
to be open to execute tasks automatically. If you close ValiScheduler, the automatic processing of
runs will be stopped.
When executing ValiScheduler with ValiService, you can close the ValiScheduler application safely
without altering the ValiService operation. ValiService will start automatically from the last
processed run in case of computer or network connection to the LicenseServer failure. When coming
back in the graphical interface of ValiScheduler, all the parameters and the status of the process are
automatically refreshed according to ValiService operation.
3.2.3 STARTING MANUAL RUN

To start the execution of manual runs, click on "Start Manual" button. A configuration window will
be opened with the runs settings.
FIGURE 11 - S TART MANUAL OPERATION PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER
The execution of the tasks will start directly when you click on the "OK" button. The "Start Manual"
button of the general page will be renamed "Stop Manual". Once a run is under processing, you
cannot change the configuration settings. To stop the run execution, click on the button "Stop
Manual". The button will be renamed "Stopping Manual".
Using ValiScheduler without ValiService, ValiScheduler will wait till the current tasks are finished.
Using ValiScheduler with ValiService, if the manual run has not yet been processed by ValiService,
ValiScheduler will remove the run from the process queue of ValiService. Otherwise, ValiScheduler
will wait till the current tasks are finished.
The "Start From" table is used to specify the date of the first run.
Date: the date of the run to be processed
license)
selected
validation step
The BeginDate will be fixed by the field "Date".
When executing a manual run, the application will be locked and will wait till the tasks are finished.
When using ValiScheduler coupled to ValiService, the tasks will be processed by the computer where
ValiService is installed. If ValiService is already processing tasks, the manual run will be processed
after all the tasks currently in processing.
3.3 ACQUISITION PAGE
FIGURE 12 - ACQUIS ITION PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER
The Acquisition page is used to specify the options for getting measurement data from DCS, PIMS, or
other databases.
The "acquisition" table is used to specify the acquisition settings. The first row allows you to launch
ValiLink using the settings define in the Model file (through ValiModeller). For other rows, you can
customize the action to execute:
Action: the kind of action to execute:
ValiLink: Use ValiLink with a configuration file.
Batch File: Use a MS-DOS Batch file
ValiDBLoader: Use ValiDBLoader to store result in ValiDatabase.
Online: if selected, the action will be executed for processing in "Online Mode". To specify
"Online Mode", select "Online Mode" under "Acquisition" in the "Start Operation" page
Backup: if selected, the action will be executed for processing in "Backup Mode". To specify
"Backup Mode", select "Backup Mode" under "Acquisition" in the "Start Operation" page
Path: specify the path and name of the ValiLink configuration file, batch file or
ValiDBLoader configuration file
Edit: allows you to edit the configuration file specified under "Path". Without ValiService,
default editor will be started (notepad,...). With ValiService, a Belsim editor is used to
retrieve content of the file through ValiService, modify it and send it back to ValiService.
This allows to remotely editing the file installed on the application server
Required: if checked, the result of this task is taken into account to determine the final
status of acquisition step. According the status of acquisition, Data Reconcilation will be
launched or not
For the syntax of initialization files of ValiLink, see chapter ValiLink.
3.4 RECONCILIATION PAGE
The Reconciliation page contains a VALI 4 tab and a VALI 5 tab, respectively allowing you to launch
the calculation using the VALI 4 Engine on a VALI 4 model or using the VALI 5 Engine on a VALI 5
application.
FIGURE 13 - VALI 4 RECONCILIATION PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER
In the VALI 4 Reconciliation page you specify the settings of ValiOnlineEngine (written in the pc.vif
file):
the name and location of the VALI model file
which PFD of your model must be run
the names of the auxiliary files (Measurement, Tag and Flex files)
the runtime options (see section "Running the model")
When browsing auxiliary files, the path is relative to model file.
FIGURE 14 - VALI 5 RECONCILIATION PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER
In the VALI 5 Reconciliation page you select the VALI 5 Application on which you wish to run the
calculation, from a drop-down list displaying all the applications defined in the VALI 5 workspace.
The Edit button allows you to edit the calculation settings of your application through VALI 5
ValiStudio.
3.5 STORAGE PAGE
FIGURE 15 - S TORAGE PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER
The Storage page is used to specify the options for storing results of the validation step.
The "Storage" table is used to specify the data storage settings. The first row allows you to launch
ValiLink using the settings defined in the Model file (through ValiModeller). For other rows, you can
customize the action to execute: ValiLink, MS-DOS Batch file, ValiDBLoader or ValiForms.
Any of these steps can be temporarily de-activated (Active check box) and executed or not according
to the status of ValiEngine execution: No Check, Converged, No Gross Error, Failed.
For the syntax of initialization files of ValiLink, refer to ValiLink file.
For the syntax of initialization files of ValiDBLoader, see chapter ValiReport.
For the syntax of configuration files of ValiForms, see chapter ValiForms.
3.6 EVENT PAGE
FIGURE 16 - EVENT PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER
ValiEvent is used to analyze measurement data and detect any sudden change in the gradient of one
of those measurements. ValiEvent works generally with time intervals higher than the validation
process itself in order to have a better insight of the plant operation (steady or unsteady) and detect
efficiently measurement events.
The Event notebook allows to specify options for ValiLink in this particular automated process and
options for ValiEvent itself:
the frequency (Event duration) to be considered for this particular automated process
the Batch File (if any)
the ini files to be used by ValiLink to get the data for ValiEvent
the Data File to be used as input file for ValiEvent
the options for running ValiEvent (see ValiEvent documentation)
the Output Folder for CSV file (output file of ValiEvent)
3.7 BACKUP PAGE
FIGURE 17 - BACKUP PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER
The Back-up procedure is used for example to have a more detailed information of the runs
performed (Vali results files) or to be able to rerun special sets of data.
The settings enable to:
select files or folders to be backed-up (using Add, Browse or Delete buttons)
specify the Backup directory
specify what to backup according reconciliation status (Always, Failed)
The "Restore" column is used to specify what files must be restored during acquisition phase when
running in "Backup Mode".
The listed files are then copied into the Backup folder according as followed:
<BackupDir>\<DateTime>\File
<BackupDir>\<DateTime>\Folder
<DateTime> is the start date and time of the run under the format "yyyymmdd_hhmmss".
3.8 LOG FILE PAGE
FIGURE 18 - LOG FILE PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER
The Log File page allows to specify:
Path: path of the ValiScheduler log file,
File Name : name of the log file (if left blank, the default name is ValiScheduler.log)
Error Level to log: used to filter the level of information and error messages to be written in
the log file. The log level can be one of the following: 0, INF, WRN, ERR, ERS, ERF, NONE,
Only messages with levels higher than the log level are written. For instance, with ERR
specified as log level, only ERR, ERS and ERF message will be printed. NONE means no
message is logged, 0, means all message are logged
Backup option:: ARCHIVE, BACKUP or APPEND:
BACKUP: old file ValisScheduler.log is renamed as ValiScheduler_bck.log, messages of

the current run are logged into a new file ValiScheduler.log
ARCHIVE: messages are written in a new file Valischeduler_20031231_000000.log,

where 20031231_000000 is the current date
APPEND: messages are logged into the old file ValiScheduler.log
3.9 EMAIL PAGE
FIGURE 19 - EMAIL PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER
The Email tab allows to configure the automatic sending of e-mails according to predefined criteria.
Up to 10 different e-mails can be sent, each based on different criteria. Clicking the Edit button
opens a new window for the configuration of an e-mail, where following
parameters can be defined:
the sender of the e-mail
the recipient(s) of the e-mail; several recipients can be specified, and have to be separated
by a semicolon (;)
the subject of the e-mail
the text of the e-mail (pre-defined keywords can be accessed using the Keywords button)
the criterion to send the e-mails:
after a pre-defined number of failed runs
after a pre-defined number of runs
every day at a specified time
files to be sent together with the e-mail; these files can be compressed in a zip file
FIGURE 20 - EMAIL CREATION
SMTP button is used to configure the SMTP information required by the system to send emails. This
button will open a configuration window:
FIGURE 21 - S MTP S ERVER CONFIGURATION PAGE OF VALIS CHEDULER
Through this window, you can set:
Server: address of the smtp server
Port: the port that is used to send e-mails
User: the user name that will be used to send e-mails
Password: the password of the user used to send e-mails
The Test button allows you to test the configuration of each email, by sending selected e-mail.
SECTION 4: VALISERVICE
4.1 INTRODUCTION
ValiService is an application that will interact with ValiScheduler and ValiManager as a client-
server network architecture.
ValiService is a NT Service (Win32 Application without graphical interface). It will act as a TCP/IP
Server on the network and will be managed remotely through ValiScheduler and ValiManager.
ValiService will be used to process online validation with all the other tasks associated such as
ValiLink, ValiDBLoader, ValiEvent, etc.
ValiService can be configured to restart automatically after a computer shutdown and will process
all missing validation tasks to ensure no data is missing.
ValiService integrates security management, using Windows Active Directory, to control the access
authentication to the working VALI directory. These security settings are used with ValiManager
and are configured with LicenseManager (see LicenseManager for more information).
4.2 VALISERVICE ENGINE
ValiService can be configured to restart automatically with the computer it's installed on. When
starting, ValiService will initialize a TCP/IP server and read a configuration file to fix internal
settings. ValiService will then connect to the LicenseServer to get the list of validation application to
process. In case of connection troubles (LicenseServer not started, network failure …), ValiService
will continue trying new connection till it succeeds. It will then initialize the "Processing Queue List"
and retrieve the application settings from the LicenseServer. ValiService will then start its scheduler
and every 5 seconds will check if there is a new validation task to process. The tasks to process are
sent to the "Process Queue List" and ValiService continues its scheduling job.
The Scheduler engine can process several different applications. Stopping the real time run for one
application will remove that application from the scheduling. It will also remove all the associated
tasks from the "Process Queue List". Starting an online validation will add the application to the
ValiService scheduling engine.
FIGURE 22 - VALIS ERVICE ENGINE DES CRIPTION
4.3 PROCESS QUEUE LIST
Whenever ValiService detect a validation application has to be processed, it will send all the required
information to the "Process Queue List". Once a validation tasks is added to the "Process Queue List"
it can not be modified. Stopping ValiService scheduling of one application will remove all the
associated tasks from the "Process Queue List".
"Process Queue List" will check continually if a task has to be processed according to different
priorities. He will process one task at a time. When the tasks are terminated, it will save the
validation results then delete the task from the queue list. It can now process the next task in the
queue list.
FIGURE 23 - PROCES S QUEUE LIS T DES CRIPTION
How priorities are handled in the "Process Queue List"?
The notion of priority is based on three lists, three levels of priority. When ValiService needs to
launch a task, this one is added to the corresponding list according to the type of the task (Manual,
Real Time run,...).
When the "Process Queue list" needs to launch a task, it will look in the list of priority 1, if something
has to be done. If this list is empty it will then look in the list of priority 2 and eventually in the lists
of priority 3.
There will be as many lists of level 3 as ValiPerformance applications handled by ValiService. This
enables load balancing between the reruns of applications, a run being picked up alternatively
between the active lists.
FIGURE 24 - PROCES S QUEUE LIS T PRIORITIES
4.4 CONFIGURATION OF VALISERVICE
To modify properties of ValiService:
in the «Control Panel» of Windows, choose «Administrative Tools»
choose «Services»
in the opened window, select «Belsim ValiService»
FIGURE 25 - S ERVICES WINDOW
to start the application, you just need to click in the arrow of the toolbar
to access the properties of the Service, right click on «Belsim ValiService» and choose
properties
FIGURE 26 - CONFIGURATION OF S ERVICE
ValiService generate a log file (ValiService.log) in the directory «App» of the Belsim installation. The
Service acts as a TCP/IP server and uses the TCP port 4601 by default. It is possible to modify the port
used by the server and the clients. To do that, execute the following steps on the server/clients:
open Windows Explorer
browse to the installation directory of VALI ([InstallDir]\Belsim\dat)
edit the file "Belsim.ini"
add under the section [others] the following line:
ValiServicePort=XXXX where XXXX is the number of the TCP/IP port used
Save the file
If the server uses a firewall, it is mandatory to open the port 4601 to allow connection between
clients' applications and ValiService.
Please refer to LicenseManager help files to have more details on how to define an automatic runs
processing using ValiService.
CHAPTER 16
VALIPRODUCTION
XVI
1.1 VALI SOFTWARE SUITE
VALI is a process oriented software aiming at determining and improving production efficiency,
productivity and energy consumption while reducing production and maintenance costs.
With VALI, you move from data to information, from information to knowledge and finally from
knowledge to action.
FROM DATA TO INFORMATION

Measurements are the essential source of information of VALI (in addition to the process topology
and the process management information) and cover all information coming either from the plant
(temperatures, pressures, rates, on-line analyses, etc.) or from the laboratory (GC, densities, etc.).
VALI converts the raw measurement data into reliable information by applying data validation
technique involving among others heat and mass balances.
FROM INFORMATION TO KNOWLEDGE

From the coherent information, VALI determines accurate and reliable performance indicators for
each equipment of the plant (heat rates, rotating equipment efficiencies, reaction's conversions, etc) as
well as more global KPIs (Key Performance Indicators) like plant efficiency, plant specific product
yields, etc.
VALI pinpoints instrumentation deviation and equipment degradation.
FROM KNOWLEDGE TO ACTION

By generating customised reports for each user (maintenance, control, management, production…),
adequate action will rapidly be undertaken. Using validated data for generating warnings strongly
reduces false alarms. A clear distinction is made between instrumentation problem and equipment
degradation.
1.2 VALIPRODUCTION
ValiProduction monitors consumption of raw material, production and inventory of intermediate

and final products. Using a rigorous and automatic procedure based on closed mass and material
balances and statistical principles, ValiProduction provides a clear view of the production
accounting of a full unit or a whole industrial site. The software allows exploiting as well closed heat
balances and thermodynamic feasibility rules.
On a daily basis all information about production levels of each unit, inventories and receipts and
shipments is reconciled providing a coherent site material balance. Thanks the functional
redundancy provided by the plant model, the validated data set is highly accurate and reliable.
This coherent site material balances, obtained on a daily basis, leads to:
accurate yield accounting
reliable production report on inputs and outputs of each unit
internal cost distribution per unit
quick identification of imbalances improves loss control
accurate and coherent data import in ERP systems, a must for correct working of ERP
systems
1.3 INFORMATION FLOW
ValiProduction consolidates, on a daily basis, the material balances of the different production units
existing on a given site or even on several interconnected sites. These material balances can be
performed either:
on a global mass balance basis : measured mass (or volume) flow rates, in terms of tons
(or m3) entering and tons (or m3) going out of each production unit, are reconciled to
generate a coherent mass balance of the whole site. This approach is typically applied in
refineries and covers the whole site including the tank farm
on a chemical compound basis : additional information is then required on the

composition of the various streams and the reactions schemes. This approach is typically
applied in chemical and petrochemical plants
In both cases, ValiProduction will be fed with data about the shipments and receipts, raw data about
inventories (feedstock, intermediate and final products) and about the production levels.
For yet better performance and profitability, ValiProduction can also be fed with validated data
coming from ValiPerformance applications (see below synergy between ValiPerformance and
ValiProduction).
FIGURE 1- VALIPRODUCTION ENVIRONMENT
The validated production rates, inventories and yields are the most accurate values that can be
obtained using the existing data. The so-produced information corresponds to the most probable
plant operation because the set of corrected values respect coherent (closed) balances (mass,
compounds and sometimes heat and thermodynamic balances).
1.4 SYNERGY BETWEEN VALIPRODUCTION AND

VALIPERFORMANCE
ValiPerformance is a software solution for detailed process performance monitoring of process units:
most often implemented online and based on consistent mass, heat and thermodynamic balances,
this product computes and reports on the key performance indicators of a process such as process
yields, reaction selectivity, delta_T approach to the equilibrium, energy consumption, equipment
efficiency (e.g. heat transfer coefficient, turbine and compressor efficiency, etc.).
Based on the same data validation technology as ValiProduction, it uses more detailed models and
provides more insight about the internal operation of each production unit. Running on a different
time schedule (typically each hour or each 15 min) it takes advantage of the additional information
coming from detailed energy and thermodynamic balance to produce performance indicators of
unequalled quality in terms of reliability and accuracy.
By feeding ValiProduction with validated values from ValiPerformance applications, one benefits at
the global level of this high quality data, making ValiProduction results even more reliable and
accurate.
1.5 VALIPRODUCTION INTEGRATION
By essence, ValiProduction application interacts with other elements of the enterprise. A number of
modules are available to ease the integration and provide the users with a convenient yet efficient set
of tools for the deployment and maintenance of the system.
The access to the different parts of the application is performed through ValiManager application
which provides the necessary framework for multi-users usage with adequate security measures,
model versioning, operations logging, etc.
Authorized users maintain the production model using an efficient graphical user interface
ValiModeller.
Interfacing with external systems (ERP, SQL database, PIMS, LIMS and DCS systems) is performed
through a generic application ValiLink which provides different "plugs" for each system to be
connected. Manual input can also be taken into account, through customized interfaces.
Data provided by ValiLink is then filtered giving an adequate set of input measurement data to
ValiEngine so that convergence rate of the computation engine is maximized.
After validation through the ValiEngine, results are, on one side, sent to external systems using again
ValiLink interfacing application and, on the other side, stored in ValiDatabase for further processing
like analysis, reporting or consolidation.
Customs reports are easily created through the ValiReport extension of Microsoft Excel.
FIGURE 2 - A TYPICAL VALIPRODUCTION ENVIRONMENT
1.6 VALIPRODUCTION WORK-FLOW
The work-flow of each application is different and takes into account the following elements:
multiple users: different users can be involved in the work flow with different roles:
entering or verifying input data
introducing manual corrections to improve results quality
verifying validation results and possibly introducing further corrections
approving the validation results
multiple phases and steps: various tasks have to be performed:
acquiring data, either automatically from a data historian or through manual input
validating the data
exporting validated results to external systems
producing production reports
data synchronization issues:
input data are not available at the same time
input data are not available at the same frequency
The work-flow is defined in the ValiDatabase, according to the concepts of phases and steps.
Phases are used to logically associate a number of steps and have a status (ON HOLD, IN PROGRESS,
COMPLETED) derived form the status of their steps.
The steps are the core elements of the work-flow and correspond to the individual actions that must
be performed to establish the production balance. The steps have various properties:
a frequency of execution: daily, weekly or on specific week or month days
conditions of processing that must be met before the task is executed: availability of data,
completion of other steps in the same daily run or in other runs, conditions on date and
time
control access specifying which users can interact with the step
detailed description of the task to be performed, including configuration files, report files
and log files
a status according to the execution procedure
Depending on the type of action to be performed and to configuration settings, different statuses are
used.
For an automatic step, that is a step without direct user interaction during the execution, the
following statuses are used:
ON HOLD: the conditions of the steps are not yet satisfied
QUEUED: the conditions are now satisfied, the action has been queued
IN PROGRESS: the action is currently executed
DONE: the step has been successfully executed
WARNING: the step has been executed and reported a warning status
FAILED: the execution failed
After the step execution, various user actions can be performed according to the execution status.
If the step was successfully executed ( DONE) or reported some warning ( WARNING), the
following options are available:
the step is automatically set as being approved
designated users are required to approve the results: they can then choose to approve the
results, to rerun the step after some corrections or (depending on the configuration) to skip
the step
If the step failed ( FAILED), the designated users will have the options to rerun the step after some
corrections or (depending on the configuration) to skip the step.
To be considered as completed, the final status of an automatic step must be either:
APPROVED: the step has been either automatically or manually approved
SKIPPED: the step has been manually skipped
For a manual step, where users have to enter data, the following statuses are used:
ON HOLD: the conditions of the steps are not yet satisfied
QUEUED: the conditions are now satisfied, the action has been queued
IN PROGRESS: the action is currently executed
APPROVED: the step has been either automatically or manually approved
SKIPPED: the step has been manually skipped
1.7 VALIMANAGER APPLICATION
ValiManager is designed as the primary portal for the follow-up of the ValiProduction work-flow. It
provides the following features:
user profile: Master, Operator, Modeller, etc. According to the user profiles, different access
rights will be granted: model creation and modification, input of manual data, manual
correction of raw data, approval of validated results, etc.
traceability and versioning: model changes are documented and the evolution of the model
is monitored so that old data can be reprocessed with their corresponding model
environments: training and development environment are available avoiding any

interaction with the official production environment. Export of data to external systems is
only possible through the official production system
task scheduling: authorized users determine when the validation runs are performed.
They verify the relevance of validation results, introduce manual corrections where
necessary and finally approve the results and make them official
system maintenance: comprehensive log files enable to quickly trace failures of the system,
like interfacing problems, networking problems, unavailability of critical data, inadequate
operation modes, etc.
reporting: various reports are issued and can be accessed by the users according to their
needs: production data, inventories, suspect sensors for instrumentation maintenance, etc.
SECTION 2: CONFIGURING A VALIPRODUCTION

APPLICATION
2.1 A FLEXIBLE CLIENT/SERVER SCHEME
ValiProduction is a client/server system that is based on four main components.
ValiManager: client process through which users will use and maintain the
ValiProduction application. Several ValiManager client sessions can be used at the same
time on the same ValiProduction application
a ValiProduction Server: the ValiService application processes automatically daily runs

and gives access (through ValiManager Client) in a controlled way through the various
functionalities of the ValiProduction application
a ValiDatabase: an SQL Database contains the configuration settings of the application, the
status of the daily runs and the validation results
Belsim LicenseServer: server process that handles security related settings like user rights
or license allocation
FIGURE 3 - VALIPRODUCTION CLIENT/S ERVER ARCHITECTURE
Each of these four components can be installed on different computers or on a single computer.
Refer to the "Installation Procedure" for practical details of installation strategy and procedure.
2.2 USER RIGHTS
The user rights are defined through Belsim LicenseManager/Server according to a number of roles:
Master: gives full access to the application including runs approval and changes to official
model but not to configuration panel neither to ValiModeller
Operator: enables to enter manual input data and manual corrections on official runs
(using for example ValiForms) and to ask for reruns of steps
Configurator: gives access to configuration panels
Modeller: enables to work in manual mode but not to save as Official model or Official run
Reader: can only see results (overview of processed runs and access to ValiReport)
Additionally, specific user rights, based on user names, can be specified when configuring the
various steps of the application.
2.3 APPLICATION DIRECTORY STRUCTURE AND PROCESSING
DIRECTORY STRUCTURE
Each ValiProduction application has its own root directory, which must be accessible through a
unique path from ValiService on the ValiProduction server as well as from each ValiManager client.
In particular, if a network drive is used, it must be defined on all computers that need to access the
application.
The following folders are used (MyApplic standing for the ValiProduction application name):
…\MYAPPLIC\: root directory of the application
…\MYAPPLIC\OFFICIAL\: official files (bls, mea, etc) of the application
…\MYAPPLIC\ARCHIVES\YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS\: back-up of old Official files (bls, mea, etc)

of the application
…\MYAPPLIC\RUNSAUTO\YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS\: files of the application copied run per run
…\MYAPPLIC\VALIREPORT\: ValiReport files
AUTOMATIC PROCESSING
According to a user-defined schedule, the runs are automatically processed according to the
following procedure:
at a selected time of the day, new runs are created when necessary. Typically, a new run is
created each day for the preceding day. In case the ValiService has been shutdown for
some days, the missing days will be automatically created. The application files are
automatically copied from the Official folder to the run directory in the RunsAuto folder
and all steps of the new runs are set to ON HOLD.
each step of the workflow is scanned on a regular basis to analyse if some work must be
performed, according to steps status and conditions.
2.4 CREATING A NEW VALIPRODUCTION APPLICATION
To create a new ValiProduction, you must proceed through the following steps on the
ValiProduction server:
install VALI software (including ValiService) and reboot the server,(see installation
procedure)
create a ValiDatabase (MS SQL required) using ValiDatabaseCreator application
create a ValiManager application using Belsim License server setting it OFF and set-up
user rights. The ValiProduction application folders will be automatically created on the
server by ValiService
copy the files of the application (model files, measurement files, configuration files for
ValiLink, etc) in the Official folder of the ValiProduction application folder
configure the application workflow in ValiDatabase using the MS-SQL Enterprise Manager
(Tables Steps_Definition, Steps_Conditions, Steps_Interaction, Phases_Definition)
activate the ValiProduction application using Belsim License Manager (setting it ON)
Steps 2 and 3 are further detailed below.
Step 5 is described in the section "Configuring the workflow".
CREATING A VALIDATABASE (USING VALIDATABASECREATOR)

If you wish to use a MS-SQL server database, you will need to create the SQL database using
ValiDatabaseCreator application (accessible from Vali 4 Windows menu).
FIGURE 27 - CREATING A S QL S ERVER VALIDATABAS E
SQL server authentication (mandatory):
IP/UNC: IP/UNC of the SQL server
User name: login name of administrator account used to create the database
Password: password of the administrator account
ValiDataBase (mandatory):
Create Database & Tables: a new Database must be created at the same time
Create Tables: only the tables need to be created
DB Name: name of the SQL database
ValiProduction : tables needed for ValiProduction have to be created
Create Plant (optional): must be checked if you want to create a new plant in Belsim license
server in order to access the database. If not checked, it is assumed you will use a plant
already defined in Belsim license server:
LicenseServer : IP / UNC of Belsim LicenseServer
Plant Name: name of the plant to be created
Create SQL User check-box: if checked the (Login) user will be created in the SQL server:
Login: user name to be used to connect to the SQL database
Password: corresponding password
Confirm password: password confirmation
The Show SQL Script button shows the SQL script code that needs to be executed. This enables to
execute the corresponding script at the SQL server management tool level.
The Plant can also be defined through Belsim LicenseManager under the Plant tab:
FIGURE 28 - CONFIGURING AN S QL S ERVER PLANT
CREATING A VALIMANAGER (VALIPRODUCTION) APPLICATION

Each ValiProduction application must be defined at Belsim LicenseServer level, through Belsim
LicenseManager.
For each ValiProduction license that you have you can define up to two ValiProduction applications:
one in "Production" mode, which is the official ValiProduction application
one in "Test" mode, which enables to define and use a ValiProduction application without
any interaction with the official application, for example for testing or for training purpose
Attention:
1. A "Test" application will never return any result to external systems (PIMS, databases).
2. You can also set both applications in "Test"mode, but you can never have both applications in
"Production" mode.
To create a new ValiProduction you must have the ValiProduction Admin rights (at Belsim
LicenseServer level):
start-up Belsim LicenseManager
go to the ValiManager page
press Add Application button
fill-in the properties of the application
FIGURE 4 - CREATING A VALIPRODUCTION APPLICATION
set-up user rights by adding authorised users using the Add_User button and specify
their role:
FIGURE 5 - ADDING AUTHORIZED US ERS
FIGURE 6 - PROPERTIES OF VALIPRODUCTION APPLICATIONS
2.5 CONFIGURING THE WORKFLOW
DEFINING THE STEPS: STEPS_DEFINITION TABLE

The Steps_Definition table has the following fields:
Step_ID: ID of the step
Phase_ID: ID of the phase to which the step belongs
Short_Description: step description (32 chars)
Long_Description: step description (128 chars)
Each step has a unique ID, a short and a long description, and belongs to a phase:
NextPosition: order of the step: the next position defines the order of the steps in the
execution sequence
Next_Enabled( 1/0): when set to 0 the step will not be considered. This setting indicates a
step that is not used any more and must therefore not be considered in the work-flow
Action_ID: de finition of the ste p task
The Action_ID defines the action to be executed during the step (see Table below).
Depending on the action, some files used by the task must be defined in the Action_File. The Log_file
is the name of the logging file created by the task, enabling authorized users to review the task
execution while the Results field indicates the name of any result file created by the task.
The Send Mail ini file must contain two sections Message and EMAIL (replace words in italics by
relevant information, use %RUNDATE% to include the run date):
[Message]
From=myname@mycompany.com
To=someone@mycompany.com
CC=
Subject=Information about run %RUNDATE%
Content File=Somefile.txt
[EMAIL]
Server=SMTPSERVER
Port=25
User=
Password=
The Copy Last ini file must contain one section FILES:
[FILES]
From=filetobecopied
To=targetfile
Overwrite=1 or 0
Log=name of log file
ACTION_I DESCRIPTION ACTION_FILE LOG_FILE RESULT FILE

D
1 no action at all
2 N/A
3 ValiLink Input ini file of ValiLink Log file of me a file

ValiLink
4 ValiEngine (Valiauto.e xe ) vif file r1v.htm file htm file
5 ValiDBLoade r ini file [me a file ]
6 ValiEve nt Argume nts of ValiEve nt valie ve nt.htm
7 Batch file (.bat ) Batch file name and Log file (if Re sult file (if any)
argume nts any)
8 ValiForms - xml file |me a me a file

file
9 N/A
10 N/A
11 ValiLink Output Ini file of ValiLink Log file of

ValiLink
12 Se nd Mail Ini File Log file
13 ValiLink Input (bls) Mode l file (bls) Log file of Me a file

ValiLink
14 ValLink Output (bls) Mode l file (bls) Log file of

ValiLink
15 Copy Last: copy a file from Ini File Log File

pre ce ding run
16 Re store Backup - - -
17 ValiForm Background xml file - -

Mode
18 ValiEngine V5 Name of the application r1v.htm file htm file

to proce ss
TABLE 1 - DEFINITION OF THE ACTIONS
Action_File : file (s) use d by the ste p
Log_File : log file of the ste p
Re sults: Name of the re sult file
Use r_type : type of use rs in charge of the ste p (0: no use r de fine d, 1: use r de fine d by role , 2: use r
de fine d by name )
Use r_name : Role or Use r Name s, de pe nding on Use r_type
Roles: Master=0, Operator=1, Config=2, Modeller=3, Reader=4. Several roles can be

entered, and have to be separated by a |
Names: any user name. Several ames can be entered, and have to be separated by a |
if no user is defined, then only the Master can approve, skip or re-run the step
Rerun_at_step: in case of re-run, the procedure is restarted at the corresponding step:
0 (by de fault) me ans the curre nt ste p
a positive value re fe rs to a ste p by its ID
a ne gative value re fe rs to a ste p re lative ly to the curre nt ste p (-1 me ans the pre ce ding ste p)
All steps between the re-run step and the current step are set back to ON HOLD.
Time_Out: Time-out after which an automatic step is cancelled
Should a time-out occurred, the step status is set to FAILED.
Can_Skip (0/1): the step can be skipped by the user
Auto_Complete (0/1): the step is automatically completed if the step executed successfully
Auto_Complete_Wrn (0/1): the step is automatically completed if the step executed with
warning status
Optional (0/1): the step is optional
If a step is optional, its status is not used to determine whether a phase has been completed or not.
Test (0/1): step not processed in a Test environment
When the ValiProduction application is in Test mode, the step is not executed. The step is
automatically set to DONE once its conditions are satisfied (for a manual input step) or when
reaching the In Progress status (for an automatic processing step).
Schedule: defines on which days the step is to be processed
Schedule_Bits: bits settings further defining these days
SCHEDUL DESCRIPTION SCHEDULE_BITS

E
0 Daily proce ssing not use d
1 We e k days The first 7 bits are use d to se le ct the days
(bit 1 is Monday)
2 Month days The first 31 bits are use d to se le ct the days of the month.
(bit 32 indicate s the last day of the month)
TABLE 2 - DEFINITION OF THE S TEP S CHEDULE
Duration: ValiEvent alternate duration (in minutes)
Used by ValiEvent actions to select a duration different then the default run duration.
SYNCHRONISING THE STEPS: STEPS_CONDITIONS TABLE

The Steps_conditions table specifies the conditions to be met for a step to be executed. If several
conditions are set on a given step, then all conditions must be satisfied for the step to execute. The
Steps_conditions table has the following fields:
Condition_ID: unique ID of the condition
Step_ID: ID of the ste p on which the condition applie s
Short_Description: s hort de scription (32 chars)
Long_Description: long de scription (128 chars)
Usually the Short_Description is used to describe the step while the Long_Description is used to
describe the condition.
Condition_Type: inte ge r
Condition_s1: furthe r de scription of the condition (file name )
Condition_i1: ID of the ste p that must be comple te d
Condition_i2: ID of the run
Condition_time: t ime de lay (minute s)
CONDITION_TY CONDITION_S CONDITION_I1 CONDITION_I2 CONDITION_TIM

PE 1 E
1: File e xiste nce Name of the file
2: Ste p comple tion >0 ID of ste p <0 re lative run ID
<0 re lative ste p ID
3: Time e lapse d Elapse d time since

the run e nd time
TABLE 3 - DEFINITION OF THE S TEP CONDITIONS
DEFINING THE INTERACTION WITH VALIDATABASE: STEPS_INTERACTION

TABLE
The Steps_Interaction table defines changes that must be made to ValiDatabase when a step is set to
a particular status. For example, a particular information message can be written in one of the INFOi
fields of the RUNS table when a particular step is completed. The Steps_Interaction table has the
following fields:
ID: unique ID of interaction
Short_Description: short description (32 chars)
Long_Description: Long description (128 chars)
The interaction is defined by a unique ID, a short and a long description.
StepID: ID of the step
Status: status of the step
These fields indicate that an interaction must be made when the step Step_ID is set (manually or
automatically) to the given Status.
STATUS DESCRIPTION STATUS DESCRIPTION
1 ON HOLD 6 WARNING
2 PENDING 7 FAILED
3 QUEUED 8 COMPLETED
4 IN PROGRESS 9 SKIPPED
5 DONE
TABLE 4 - THE S TATUS IDS
Type: type of interaction
Tag: name of the tag to be updated
Value: value to be given to the tag
TYPE DESCRIPTION TYPE DESCRIPTION
1 INFOi 6 Pe nalty
2 Me asure d value 7 Status
3 Me asure d accuracy 8 Use d value
4 Validate d value 9 Use d accuracy
5 Validate d accuracy
TABEL 5 - INTERACTION TYPES
GROUPING THE STEPS INTO PHASES: PHASES_DEFINITION TABLE

Phases are simply a way to group logically linked steps. The phase to which a step belongs is defined
in the Steps_Definition table. The Phases_Definition table has the following fields:
Phase_ID: unique ID of the phase
Short_Description: short description (32 chars)
Long_De scription: long de scription (128 chars)
A phase is described by an ID, a short and a long description.
The status of the phase is linked to the status of the steps that are part of the phase:
ON HOLD: all the ste ps are still ON HOLD
COMPLETED: all the ste ps (e xce pt the one s spe cifie d as optional) are comple te d or skippe d
IN PROGRESS: in all othe r case s
2.6 TRACK CHANGES
STEPS INTERACTION
To track the changes made by the different users in the system, Who changed What and When,
ValiProduction workflow will create a log file called Security.log.
The log file is saved in the subdirectory of the day like this one:
\MYAPPLIC\RUNSAUTO\YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS
For the day in reference, the log file (security.log) is unique and the successive changes are appended
to the previous ones.
Example of security.log file:
[9/02/2012 09:46:04] INF 11085: App: D_000_MEB - Run: 20120116_000000 - User 'bruno' changes stat
[9/02/2012 10:40:47] INF 11086: App: D_000_MEB - Run: 20120116_000000 - User 'bruno' launch repro
MANUAL INPUTS
In the ValiProduction workflow, the User can change the Manual Inputs of the model via ValiForms.
A track changes log file is created in the directory of the ValiForms XML file, enabling to log all
changes made by users.
The log file is created or updated when the ValiForms is “saved” or “saved and approved” and the
name of the file is based on the ValiForms XML file (XML_changes.log).
Example of valiforms_changes.log file:
[12-03-13 17:34:09] INF 18033: User Christophe changed overwrite value of tag 111-FY-0035 from 92
[12-03-13 17:34:17] INF 18039: User Christophe changed product 111-NHT_STATUS from Shutdown to On
[12-03-13 17:34:20] INF 18041: User Christophe changed switch 111-NHT_REACTOR_DOWN from Running t
[12-03-13 17:34:36] INF 18035: User Christophe changed final value of tank 111-NHT-HOLDUP_MASS1 f
[12-03-13 17:35:39] INF 18035: User Christophe changed final value of tank 111-NHT-HOLDUP_MASS2 f
SECTION 3: USING VALIMANAGER

3.1 STARTING VALIMANAGER
To start ValiManager:
start ValiManager by selecting the ValiManager application in the Vali 4 Programs Start
Menu
log in using your user name and password. IP address of the LicenseServer can be changed
using the drop-down list (see "Belsim LicenseManager" to add new IP addresses):
if several applications are defined, ValiManager will present the list of ValiProduction
applications to which you have access, otherwise the ValiProduction application is
directly selected
the list of automatic runs that are available is then displayed starting from the most recent
ones
3.2 RUNS OVERVIEW
The "Overview" table is used to show to the user an overview of the whole process. By default the
runs are displayed starting from the last run until the first day of the current month.
FIGURE 7 - VALIMANAGER - OVERVIEW OF THE RUNS
For rerun option, different information items are displayed:
From: date of the first run to be reprocessed
To: date of the last run to be reprocessed
In addition, two fields give information regarding the last run and the last step that have been
processed:
Last Run: date and time of the last processed run
Last Step: Name of the last processed step
You can change the list of runs that are displayed by changing the start and end dates at the top of
the page and pressing the button.
The overview of the daily runs provides for each run the following information:
Run: run date (starting date of the daily period)
Status: global status of the run:
: the run is still in progress
: the run is approved
Phases status: status of each of the phases of the workflow:
: all steps of the phase are on hold
: the steps are under progress
: all steps have been completed
Penalty: total penalty of the measurement corrections for the last validation of the run
Quality: ratio of the Penalty by the Chi2 test value, a value above 1 indicating a suspicion
of gross error
Comment: comment on the run
Additional buttons are available:
Refresh: manually refresh the graphical user interface. In any case, results are reloaded
automatically every minute
Archive: close and archive runs older than a date to be specified. After archiving, runs can
not be reprocessed anymore
FIGURE 8 – VALIMANAGER - ARCHIVE PAGE
View Queue: ove rvie w of the proce ss que ue list. This allows you:
to see if other applications are running
to determine how many runs are waiting in the process queue list
FIGURE 9 – VALIMANAGER - VIEW QUEUE PAGE
View Log: display the content of the ValiService log file located on the remote server
FIGURE 10 – VALIMANAGER - VIEW LOG PAGE
Configuration: opens the configuration dialog box.
The General tab allows you to define the schedule settings:
Data Time: beginning time of the validation periods
Process Time: time of the day when the new runs are created
Timer Tick: interval to check if an action has to be performed by ValiService
Vali Time Out: time period allowed for the validation run. If the run lasts for a
longer time period, the run is cancelled. No time out will be applied if this value is
negative
FIGURE 11 – VALIMANAGER – S CHEDULE OF AUTOMATIC RUNS
The Log File tab allows you to define properties of ValiService Log file:
Path: path where the Log File will be generated by ValiService (by default
[InstallDir]\belsim\App)
File Name: name of the log file
Error level to log: level of errors to log
Backup: option: type of backup used
Maximum Size: maximum size of the file
FIGURE 12 – VALIMANAGER- LOG FILE OF VALIS ERVICE
These settings are saved in the ValiProduction.ini file located in the App folder of VALI installation.
The use of the different buttons of the ValiManager is restricted depending on user roles:
BUTTON USER ROLES CORRESPONDING

ACTION
MASTE OPERAT CONFIGURAT MODELL READER

R OR OR ER
Re fre sh x x x x x Re fre she s the list of runs
Archive x Close s and archive s runs
Vie w x x x x x Displays an ove rvie w of the

Que ue proce ss que ue list
Vie w Log x x x x x Displays the conte nt of the

ValiSe rvice log file locate d
on the re mote se rve r
Configurati x Displays the configuration

on se ttings
Start Re run x Re proce sse s runs
TABLE 6 - US ER ROLES
3.3 DIGGING INTO RUNS
Clicking on the button at the left of the run date expands the information on the run.
FIGURE 13 – VALIMANAGER - EXPANDED VIEW OF THE RUNS
For each step, the following information is given:
Step Name: short description of the step. Moving the mouse above the short description
displays the long description of the step
Status: status of the step:
: ON HOLD: the conditions of the steps are not yet satisfied
: PENDING: the conditions are now satisfied; the action is pending for user input
: QUEUED: the conditions are now satisfied, the action has been queued
: IN PROGRESS: the action is currently executed
: DONE: the step has been successfully executed
: WARNING: the step has been executed and reported a warning status
: FAILED: the execution failed
: APPROVED: the step has been either automatically or manually approved
: SKIPPED: the user decided to skip the step (if allowed by the configuration)
User status: action of the user. The field can only be modified by authorized users.
Depending on the task status, the user can:
Rerun the task, after some corrections if required
Approve the results, setting the step APPROVED
Skip the task, setting the step SKIPPED
PhaseName: name of the phase to which the step belongs
/ : button to open the log file of the task/button to start ValiForms for manual input
from the user
: button to access the results of the task
: button to reprocess the step. Reprocessing a step will reset to ON HOLD all the steps
that are depending on the current step in the logical execution sequence, according to the
step conditions (in the current run as well as in the following runs)
Right click on the date of a run allows to open the corresponding run directory (where the
application files are located) of the RunsAuto folder. In addition to the application files (model file,
measurement files, reconciliation results, initialization files,...), each run directory contains a log file
("security.log" ) to track activities performed by the different users through ValiManager on a run by
run basis.
Example:
[9/02/2012 09:46:04] INF 11085: App: MYAPPLIC - Run: 20120116_000000 - User 'Bruno' changes statu
[9/02/2012 10:40:47] INF 11086: App: MYAPPLIC - Run: 20120116_000000 - User 'Bruno' launch reproc
3.4 STARTING RERUN
To start the execution of rerun tasks, click on "Start Rerun" button. A configuration window will be
opened with the runs settings. The "Start Rerun" page is used to specify the date of the first run and
the first step that will be reprocessed.
FIGURE 14 – VALIMANAGER- S TART RERUN
From: date of the first run to be reprocessed. The rerun will affect all the runs in between
this starting date and the date of the last created run
Steps: step to be reprocessed. Reprocessing a step will reset to ON HOLD all the steps that
are depending on the selected step in the logical execution sequence, according to the step
conditions (in the current run as well as in the following runs) except the steps that have
been SKIPPED
Synchronize files: if selected, the list of files available in the official directory of your
ValiManager application appears on the left hand side of the window. Selected files will
first be copied from the official directory to the directories of all runs to be reprocessed
Backup: if selected, ValiManager will save the directories of all runs to be reprocessed
FIGURE 15 – VALIMANAGER- S TART RERUN AND S YNCHRONIZE FILES
CHAPTER 17
VALIFORMS
XVII
1.1 VALIFORMS OBJECTIVES
ValiForms is a configurable user interface primarily used to handle manual inputs of a Vali
application through multi-pages forms:
entering manual input numeric data
entering corrections on automatically acquired data
associating products to storage tanks and streams
entering model settings like modes of operation
The manual inputs will be stored in one or several mea file, to be later read by ValiEngine or
ValiDBLoader.
ValiForms is also used to generate pre-configured reports based on the data stored in ValiDatabase:
data extracted from a single run
aggregated data from several runs
graphical trends over several runs
The reports can either be browsed in interactive mode (and possibly printed as PDF file) or directly
generated as PDF files, in background mode.
The Forms are configured using ValiFormsBuilder application.
VALIFORMS USED FOR INPUT

When used as Input user interface, ValiForms uses at minimum two files:
an xml file, generated with ValiFormsBuilder application, describing the contents of the
Forms
a mea file, generated by ValiForms with the user input data
Optionally, ValiForms can use additional information sources:
an auxiliary mea file, giving the initial counter and tank inventory data
an historian file with measured values coming from an external historian (typically
generated by ValiLink)
a ValiDatabase, giving validated values and initial counter and tank inventory data
Aux mea Historian

file mea file ValiDataBase
ValForms
xml file log file
Mea Files
FIGURE 1 - VALIFORMS INPUT ENVIRONMENT
ValiForms can handle several mea files, each mea file being displayed in a separate section (Area 1,
Area 2, etc… in the example below).
Each section is split up in several sub-sections (Unit 1, Raw Materials, Unit 2/3 in the example below),
enabling to logically group and organize related input data.
Each sub-section contains a number of fields defining input data (tags, tanks, counters, switches, etc.)
which will generate one or several lines in the mea files.
FIGURE 2 - A TYPICAL VALIFORMS INPUT FORM
VALIFORMS USED FOR OUTPUT

When used as Output user interface, ValiForms uses:
an xml file, generated with ValiFormsBuilder application, describing the contents of the
Forms
ValiDatabase, from which the output data are extracted
ValiDataBase
ValForms
xml file log file
FIGURE 3 - VALIFORMS OUTPUT ENVIRONMENT
As for input Forms, the report can be split up in several sections (Rapports in the example below)
and sub-sections (Unit1 and Unit 2/3, etc… in the example below).
Each sub-section contains a number of fields defining the report (tag values, tank data, trends, etc.).
FIGURE 4 - A TYPICAL VALIFORMS OUTPUT FORM
1.2 USING VALIFORMS IN A VALIPRODUCTION APPLICATION
When used in a ValiProduction application, ValiForms can be called from ValiManager, presenting
the data related to the currently selected run and step. The user can browse through the data from
different daily runs, but only the data relative to the current run and current section can be edited by
the user.
When saving the data, the user can also approve the step, indicating that the input data have been
entered and checked, so that the current step can be considered as completed.
1.3 USING VALIFORMS IN A VALIPERFORMANCE APPLICATION
ValiForms can be called by ValiScheduler/ValiService to automatically generate PDF reports during

the storage phase of a run. The Path field of ValiScheduler enable to specify the name of the
ValiForms xml file. Optionally, you can also indicate whether the input or output sections must be
printed (options –I and –O) and specify the aggregation period (options –A).
More information is provided on ValiForms arguments in the section Starting ValiForms.
SECTION 2: CONFIGURING VALIFORMS

2.1 USING VALIFORMSBUILDER
ValiFormsBuilder is started by double-clicking the ValiFormsBuilder.exe file in bin directory of VALI

installation folder.
FIGURE 5 - EMPTY VALIFORMS BUILDER WINDOW
Main window is divided in 6 main parts:
The menu at the top
FIGURE 6 - VALIFORMS BUILDER MENU
The toolbar, under the menu bar
FIGURE 7 - VALIFORMS BUILDER TOOLBAR
The objects panel, containing the tree view, located on the left
FIGURE 8 - VALIFORMS BUILDER TREE VIEW
The tabs/sheet view, at the center of the window
FIGURE 9 - VALIFORMS BUILDER TABS VIEW
The properties panel, located on the right
FIGURE 10 - VALIFORMS BUILDER PROPERTIES PANEL
The status bar, located at the bottom
FIGURE 11 - VALIFORMS BUILDER S TATUS BAR
MENU BAR
The menu is located at the top of the window. It provides a quick access to all main functionalities of
the program:
File
New: creates a new file (keyboard shortcut: ctrl+n; drag and drop the General node
of the tree on the left)
Open: open an existing file
Save: saves current file (keyboard shortcut: ctrl+s)
Save All: saves all files opened in current session of the program (keyboard
shortcut: ctrl+shift+n)
Save As: saves current file under a specified name
Exit: closes program (keyboard shortcut: alt+F4). If some files are unsaved, a prompt
invites you to save modified files.
FIGURE 12 - S AVE MODIFICATION WINDOW
View
Full Screen: toggle view to full screen mode (removes window header)/normal view
(keyboard shortcut: F11)
Grid: Shows/hide the grid (keyboard shortcut: ctrl+g)
Fields:
Background: grays background of fields
Border: shows/hide a border around fields
Tools
ValiForms: starts ValiForms application and opens current file
Help
Manual: opens ValiFormsBuilder help
About: displays general information about the application
TOOLBAR
Toolbar is located below menu. It provides quick access to most common functions. A description of
the function is given if the mouse remains on a button.
create a new file
open an existing file
save current file
save all open files
starts ValiForms application and opens current file
OBJECTS PANEL
The objects panel contains the object tree view. All objects that can be added on a ValiForms are
contained in this tree. To add an object, drag it from the tree and drop it on the tab view. The
different types of objects are described in input section fields and output section fields.
The objects panel can be hidden using the pin located at the top-right of the panel. The panel will
then auto-show when th mouse is placed on the tab located on the left of the window.
TABS VIEW
The tabs view is the most important part of the window. This is the area where sections, sub-
sections and fields are placed.
PROPERTIES PANEL
The properties panel is the place where properties of currently selected object are displayed.
Properties can be changed on this panel.
The properties panel can be hidden using the pin located at the top-right of the panel. The panel will
then auto-show when th mouse is placed on the tab located on the right of the window.
STATUS BAR
The status bar displays general information about currently loaded file.
2.1.1 DEFINING VALIFORMS MAIN PROPERTIES

The different properties of current ValiForms file are available on the right-hand part of the window,
when the file tab is selected.
AGGREGATION
The aggregation settings define a default aggregation period for the Form:
Aggregation: use aggregation
Mode: mode of aggregation:
Month to Date
Last Month
Last Week
Week to Date
Last Year
Year to date
Only converged Runs: average

aggregation will be carried out only on
converged runs. Results of non-converged
runs will be excluded from the calculation.
This parameter only affects average FIGURE 13 - AGGREGATION MODE
aggregation
Only converged Runs: average

aggregation will be carried out only when
tags are actually used in the model
(InUse=1). This parameter only affects
average aggregation
DICTIONARY
The dictionary shows the automatic title strings that will be written when generating titles. You can
choose your own naming convention for the listed fields.
FIGURE 14 - VALIFORMS DICTIONARY
LOG FILE
FIGURE 15 - VALIFORMS LOG FILE
The log file settings are only used when ValiForms is called in background mode. This section is not
mandatory; default data will be used in place of any missing information item. Following fields have
to be provided:
Back-up option:
BACKUP: the old log is renamed by appending _log to the filename and the messages of
the current run are logged into a new file (default setting)
ARCHIVE: messages are written in a new file named by appending the current run
date to the selected file name
APPEND: messages are written at the end of the existing log file
File Name: name of the log file (the extension .log will be automatically added)
Level: used to filter the level of information and error messages to be written in the log file.
The log level can be one of the following: INF, WRN, ERR, ERS, ERF. Only messages with
levels higher than the log level are written. For instance, with ERR specified as log level,
only ERR, ERS and ERF message will be printed
Size: the maximum size of the log file expressed in Mb
Path: path of the log file (by default, path of the xml file)
PDF
PDF options allow you to specify options when generating PDF files using ValiForms in background
mode:
Output directory: the directory wher the

output file will be placed
With rundate: rundate will be appended

to the PDF file name
FIGURE 16 - PDF
PRODUCTS LISTS
Products allows you to define list of products that will be used in products fields.
Products list: define the list of products
FIGURE 17 - PRODUCTS
To edit the products list, click on the button that appears when clicking on (Collection). This
button will open a new window that allows you to create new products list:
FIGURE 18 - PRODUCTS LIS T EDITOR
To add a new products list, click on the Add button. To remove a list, click on the Remove button. The
Name of the collection is defined in the right part of the window. To define the list of Products in a
list, click on the button that appears when clicking on (Collection). A new window appears that
allows you to define the list of products (one per line):
FIGURE 19 - LIS T OF PRODUCTS IN A PRODUCTS LIS T
SETTINGS
Setting allows to define some other general settings linked to the configuration of ValiForms.
A has the following properties:
Bls File: associated bls model file
Browse Date: a date field will be displayed

at the bottom of the Form, enabling to
change the run date
Bypass Forms for undefined tags: when

checked, the Undefined Tags Mea file will
be created.
Comment: displayed in the window title

bar of ValiForms
Counter Suffix: suffix added to counter

names when converting counter values to
rates
Decimals: default number of decimals for

numeric values
Fit to print: the print-out will be scaled to

fit the printing area
Frequency: frequency of the runs

expressed in days. Use to get initial
counter and tank inventories in daily
mode
Maximize Window: ValiForms window

will be maximized at application start-up
Plant name: associated plant name

(defining ValiDatabase)
Portrait: the form will be printed in

portrait mode (default is landscape) FIGURE 20 - VALIFORMS S ETTINGS
Products Dictionary: path of Products

dictionary file
Track Changes: will create a _changes.log

file in the directory of the ValiForms XML
file, enabling to log all changes made by
users.
Undefined Tags Mea: name of the file that

will be written with all tags that are in
the historian but not referred to in
ValiForms
ADDING AND DELETING
ValiFormsBuilder is all about drag & drop. To add any kind of objects (open or create file, add a
section, sub-section or field), simply drag it from the tree view and drop it onto the file.
To delete an object, right-click on it and select Delete. Field can also be deleted by right-clicking and
selecting delete.
2.1.2 CONFIGURING AN INPUT SECTION

Input sections enables creating forms where values can be manually input or modified.
To create an input section, drag the Input section node from the tree and drop it on the working sheet.
This will create a new section tab. Input sections are divided in sub-sections where input fields are
placed. An input sub-section is created by dragging the input sub-section from the tree view.
To create an input form, it is required to have at least one input section containing at least one input
sub-section. A field is added by dragging it from the tree view and dropping it on the sub-section
sheet.
Input sub-section is a grid containing two columns and an unlimited number of lines. A field can be
placed on any free space of the grid. The grid can be showed/hidden using keyboard shortcut ctrl+g
or by selecting View|Grid.
The different fields that are available are
Counter Title: line describing the values of a counter field
Counter: data of a counter, from which a rate will be computed
Formula: tag value calculated from other input data
Free Input: freely formatted input data
Product: definition of the product associated to a stream or a unit
ProductTitle: line describing the values of a product field
Switch: definition of a model switch
SwitchTitle: line describing the values of a switch field
Table: definition of a group of input data displayed as a table
TagCalc: calculated tag based on a given value times a predefined coefficient
TagCalcTitle: line describing the values of a TagCalc field
TagInput: tag value
TagInputTitle: line describing the values of a TagInput field
Tank: data associated to a storage Tank
TankTitle: line describing the values of a Tank field
Text Field: text to be displayed in the Form
Title: title text (underlined) to be displayed in the Form
Some fields have a counterpart named FieldNameTitle, that simply represents titles to be displayed
above corresponding field, to give more information above the different parts of a field
PROPERTIES OF AN INPUT SECTION
An input section allows to define input sub-sections.
An input section has the following properties:
Aggreg..mode: default aggregation

mode of the section, used as default
when creating new sub-sections
Approval: data must be approved
Historian File: name of the mea file

extracted form the historian and used
as primary input to create the mea file
of the section
Init From DB: take initial value of

counters and tank inventories from
ValiDatabase rather than from the
auxiliary mea file (Mea aux)
Mea aux: auxiliary mea file giving the

initial value of counters and tank
inventories
FIGURE 21 - INPUT S ECTION PROPERTIES
Mea File: name of the mea file created
by the section
Name: section name displayed in the

main tabs of the Form
Overwrite with historian:

measurements as available in the main
Mea file is always overwritten by the
data from the historian file
PROPERTIES OF AN INPUT SUB-SECTION
An input sub-section allows to define input fields.
An input sub-section has the following properties:
Aggreg.Mode: default aggregation

mode of the sub-section, used as
default when creating new fields
Initial Value: the initial value of

counters and tank inventories must be
taken from the preceding day or
month
Name: sub-section name displayed in

the secondary tabs of the section
Show Date: run date must be shown at

the top of the sub-section. When
aggregating data, the begin and end FIGURE 22 - INPUT S UB-S ECTION PROPERTIES
dates of the aggregation period will be
displayed
Show Quality: run quality indicator

must be displayed at the top of the
sub-section (Red: quality > 2.5, Green:
quality < 1.5, orange otherwise). When
aggregating data, the quality indicator
is not shown
COMMON PROPERTIES
Following properties are common to all fields:
Comment: some text that is displayed in front of the control (not used for title fields)
Name: name of the control, also used as name of the tag associated with the control (tag for
which value will be retrieved, or tag for which output will be written). This property is
mandatory for Free Input field
Location: the location of the control on the grid, indicated by the row and column number
All fields can be duplicated. To duplicate a field, right click it and select Duplicate.
THE DIFFERENT FIELDS

Counter
A counter represents data of a counter, from which a rate will be computed
Counter measurements are converted to an actual measured value using the difference between the
final and initial values of the counter and a conversion coefficient:
Converted = (Final - Initial) * Coefficient
Depending on the section settings (Init from DB and Mea Aux), the initial value will either be read
from ValiDatabase or from the auxiliary mea file.
FIGURE 23 - COUNTER FIELD
A counter field has the following properties:
Coefficient: coefficient to convert the

counter value to a rate
Counter Max: the maximum value the

counter can reach before resetting to zero
Default Value: the default value of the

counter; =BLS to read default value from
bls model file
Init Value: an initial value will be read

from the aux. mea file or from
ValiDabatase. Otherwise, the initial value
is set to 0
Mandatory: a valid value must be

provided to Approve the data
OverWrite: the converted value can be

overwritten by the user
Phys. Units: the physical units of the rate

(after conversion from the counter); =BLS
to read default value from bls model file
Tag Name: name of the converted tag. If

left blank the name of the tag will be built FIGURE 24 - COUNTER FIELD PROPERTIES
from the counter name and the counter
suffix (ValiForms setting)
Validated: the validated value will be

shown
Write Value: the Final counter value can

be edited
Formula
A Formula field allows to calculate a resulting value from operations on other input data.
FIGURE 25 - FORMULA FIELD
A Formula field has the following properties:
Formula: list of operations that will be

defined. To open the formula editor, click
on the button that appears when
clicking on (Collection), or right click on
the control and select properties
Phys. Units: physical units that will be

associated with the result of the formula
FIGURE 26 - FIELD PROPERTIES
The formula is calculated through a succession of elementary operation (+,-,*,/) applied to two
variables, which can refer to any field value, including other formula, in any section. It can also refer
directly to a numeric value or to the result of an elementary operation of the formula itself.
FIGURE 27 - DEFINING A FORMULA (AVERAGE VALUE OF TWO FLOW RATES )
Each variable is defined by two fields: Type and Value.
TYPE VALUE DESCRIPTI

ON
MEASURED Tag name Me asure d

value of a
tag
VALIDATED Tag name Validate d

value of a
tag
USED Tag name Use d value

(afte r
ove rwriting)
of a tag
TANK_MEASURED Tank tag name Me asure d

final
inve ntory

ON
TANK_USED Tank tag name Use d value

(afte r
ove rwriting)
of a tank
final
inve ntory
TANK_DELTA Tank tag name De lta

inve ntory of
a tank
TANK_VALIDATED Tank tag name Validate d

value of a
tank final
inve ntory
COUNTER_CONVERTED Counte r name Conve rte d

value of a
counte r
COUNTER_USED Counte r name Use d value

(afte r
ove rwriting)
of a counte r
COUNTER_VALIDATED Counte r name Validate d

value of a
counte r
TABLE Tag name Value from a

Table Input
fie ld
FORMULA Formula name Re sult of an

othe r
formula
VALUE Nume ric value A nume ric

value
PARAM Row numbe r Re sult of

anothe r line
of the
formula's list
TABLE <%VALIFORMS TABNO++%> - VARIABLES AVAILABLE IN A FORMULA
If a tag value is used, it is mandatory that a Tag Input field is created on this tag.
Free Input
A Free Input field enables to enter a freely formatted text into the measurement file. The only
constraint is of course that this text complies with the various syntaxes available in measurement
files.
FIGURE 28 - FREE INPUT FIELD
A Free Input field does not have particular properties.
The name of the field may not include any space.
Product
A Product field enables to allocate a product to a Vali unit (tank) or stream.
FIGURE 29 - PRODUCT FIELD PROPERTIES
A Product field has the following properties:
Default Value: default value for the

product
DisplayName: product list name will

be displayed

given to the switch to approve the
data
Product: specifies the product list from

which the product must be selected.
See Products lists section to define
products list. The list of available
products depends on the list that is
chosen
Product Type: type: U for Unit , S for

Stream, T for Tag
Unit/Stream/Tag: Unit, Stream or Tag

name
Status
A Status field enables to assign different values to a tag according to a pre-defined status.
FIGURE 31 - S TATUS FIELD
A switch field has the following properties:
Default Value: default value for the switch,

to be selected from the list of values. The
default value will be used if not value is
retrieved from the mea file associated
with the section
Mandatory: a valid value must be given to

the switch to approve the data
Options: possible values for the status. To

edit the list of options, click on :
Switch
A Switch field enables to enter pre-configured mea file commands into the mea file according to a
user selection between a number of values for the switch.
FIGURE 33 - S WITCH FIELD
A switch field has the following properties:
Default Value: default value for the switch,

to be selected from the list of values. The
default value will be used if not value is
retrieved from the mea file associated
with the section
Mandatory: a valid value must be given to

the switch to approve the data
Options: possible values for the switch.

For each of these values, a number of lines
can be defined in the table on the right of FIGURE 34 - FIELD PROPERTIES
the list.
Table
A Table field enables to enter input data in a table form, like for example the amount of materials
used in various operation units.
FIGURE 35 - TABLE FIELD
The input data will be associated to tags that will be defined manually by entering a tag name in a
cell or automatically using an auto-naming strategy. In the first case, only cells associated with a tag
will be editable in ValiForms, and the measured value of the tag will be retrieved. In the second, all
cells are editable.
A table field has the following properties:
Auto Name: defines how to automatically

name the tags for each cell (%1 and %2
stand for the row and column names)
Auto Size: auto-size columns when

required, i.e. if the number of columns can
not fit in the window width. If set to false,
a scrollbar appears at the bottom of the
table
Decimals: maximum number of decimals
Decimals in Table: numbers must be

truncated to the number of decimals
defined in Decimals
Default Value: default value for the cells
Phys. Units: physical units
Total Row: an additional column is

created before or after the table with the FIGURE 36 - TABLE FIELD PROPERTIES
sum of the rows
Total Column: an additional row is

created before or after the table with the
sum of the columns
TagCalc
A TagCalc field allows to recompute a value of a tag based in another tag, using a multiplicating
coefficient
FIGURE 37 - TAGCALC FIELD PROPERTIES
A TagCalc field has the following properties:
Coefficient: multiplier for the calculation
Default Value: default value for the input

data

provided to approve the data
OverWrite: the measured value can be

Phys. Units: physical units (use =BLS to

select the units form the model)
TagName: Name of the tag to be calculated
WriteValue: the measured tag value can FIGURE 38 - FIELD PROPERTIES

be edited
TagFormula
A TagFormula field allows to calculate three consecutive resulting values from operations on other
input data.
FIGURE 39 - TAGFORMULA FIELD
A TagFormula field has the following properties:
Formula1: list of operations that will be

defined in the first cell. To open the
formula editor, click on the button that
appears when clicking on (Collection), or
right click on the control and select
properties

defined in the second cell. To open the
properties

defined in the second cell. To open the
properties
Phys. Units: physical units that will be

associated with the result of the formula
The formula is calculated through a succession of elementary operation (+,-,*,/) applied to two
variables, which can refer to any field value, including other formula, in any section. It can also refer
directly to a numeric value or to the result of an elementary operation of the formula itself.
FIGURE 41 - DEFINING A FORMULA (AVERAGE VALUE OF TWO FLOW RATES )
Each variable is defined by two fields: Type and Value.

ON
MEASURED Tag name Me asure d

value of a
tag
VALIDATED Tag name Validate d

value of a
tag
USED Tag name Use d value

(afte r
ove rwriting)
of a tag
TANK_MEASURED Tank tag name Me asure d

final
inve ntory

ON
TANK_USED Tank tag name Use d value

(afte r
ove rwriting)
of a tank
final
inve ntory
TANK_DELTA Tank tag name De lta

inve ntory of
a tank
TANK_VALIDATED Tank tag name Validate d

value of a
tank final
inve ntory
COUNTER_CONVERTED Counte r name Conve rte d

value of a
counte r
COUNTER_USED Counte r name Use d value

(afte r
ove rwriting)
of a counte r
COUNTER_VALIDATED Counte r name Validate d

value of a
counte r
TABLE Tag name Value from a

Table Input
fie ld
FORMULA Formula name Re sult of an

othe r
formula
VALUE Nume ric value A nume ric

value
PARAM Row numbe r Re sult of

anothe r line
of the
formula's list
TABLE <%VALIFORMS TABNO++%> - VARIABLES AVAILABLE IN A FORMULA
If a tag value is used, it is mandatory that a Tag Input field is created on this tag.
TagInput
A Tag Input field allows to change measured value of a tag.
FIGURE 42 - TAGINPUT FIELD PROPERTIES
A TagInput field has the following properties:
Calculated Value: the tag value will be

calculated according to a formula
Default Value: default value for the tag
Formula: define a formula to calculate a

tag value. Use of formula is described in
section Formula

Max: maximum value for the measured

and overwrite values (selecting =H,=HH or
=SH will select the corresponding bound
from the bls model file)
Min: minimum value for the measured

and overwrite values (selecting =L,=LL or
=SL will select the corresponding bound
from the bls model file)

Phys. Units: physical units (use =BLS to FIGURE 43 - FIELD PROPERTIES


shown
WriteValue: the measured tag value can

be edited
Tank
FIGURE 44 - TANK FIELD PROPERTIES
A Tank field has the following properties:
Default Value: default value for the tag
Imb Mode: a check box will enable the user

to set the tank in "imbalance mode"
Init Value: an initial value will be read

from the aux. mea file or from
ValiDabatase. Otherwise, the initial value
is set to 0


Phys. Units: physical units (use =BLS to

Tag Name: not used

shown
FIGURE 45 - TANK FIELD PROPERTIES
WriteValue: the measured tag value can
be edited
Tank Name: name of the Tank
2.1.3 CONFIGURING AN OUTPUT SECTION

A field can be placed on any free space of the grid. The grid can be showed/hidden using keyboard
shortcut ctrl+g or by selecting View|Grid.
The different fields are:
Calculated: value calculated from other input or output data
PhysUnit: gets the physical units of a tag
TagBlock: block of tag values following the same display format
TagText: text associated to a tag
TagValue: individual tag value
TankBlock: block of tank values following the same display format
Text Field: text to be displayed in the Form
Title: title text (underlined) to be displayed in the Form
Trend: historical trend of tag value
PROPERTIES OF AN OUTPUT SECTION
An output section allows to define output sub-sections.
An output section has the following properties:
Aggreg.mode: default aggregation mode of

the section, used as default when creating
new sub-sections
Approval: specifies that the data must be

approved
Name: section name displayed in the main

tabs of the Form
FIGURE 46 - OUTPUT S ECTION PROPERTIES
Overwrite With Historian: measurements
as available in the main Mea file is always
overwritten by the data from the
historian file
PROPERTIES OF AN OUTPUT SUB-SECTION
An output sub-section allows to define output fields.
An output sub-section has the following properties:
Columns: the maximum number of

columns used in the report
Aggreg.Mode: default aggregation mode of

the sub-section
Initial Value: specifies whether the initial

counter and tank inventory data must be
taken on the preceding DAILY or
MONTHLY period
Name: sub-section name displayed in the

secondary tabs of the section
Show Date: specifies whether the run date

must be shown at the top of the sub-
section. When aggregating data, the begin FIGURE 47 - OUTPUT S UB-S ECTION PROPERTIES
and end dates of the aggregation period
will be displayed
Show Quality: specifies whether a run

quality indicator must be displayed at the
top of the sub-section. (Red: quality > 2.5,
Green: quality < 1.5, orange otherwise).
When aggregating data, the quality
indicator is not shown
COMMON PROPERTIES
Following properties are common to all fields:
Comment: some text that is displayed in front of the control (not used for title fields)
Name: name of the control, also used as name of the tag associated with the control (tag for
which value will be retrieved, or tag for which output will be written). This property is
mandatory for Free Input field
Location: the location of the control on the grid, indicated by the row and column number
All fields can be duplicated. To duplicate a field, right click it and select Duplicate.
THE DIFFERENT FIELDS

Calculated value
A Calculated Value field calculates a value from a formula, using values from other cells in the
ValiForms sheet.
FIGURE 48 - CALCULATED VALUE FIELD
A Calculated Value field has the following

properties:
Mode: operation: SUM, DIF, DIV and MULT
Range: range of values on which operation

is applied. An element is defined by its
location "row.column". The separator to
use is a dot(.)
Example: Range 4.2 represents the value

located in row 4 and column 2
To define a range of values, the first and

the last location are used. The separator to
use is a dash (-).
Example: Range 4.2-6.2 represent these

values: 4.2, 5.2 and 6.2
To define more than one range of values,

FIGURE 49 - CALCULATED VALUE FIELD
one of the separators comma(,) or PROPERTIES
semicolon(;) is to be used.
Example: Range 4.2-6.2;4.3-5.3;4.4

represent these values: 4.2, 5.2, 6.2, 4.3,
5.3 and 4.4
Phys Unit
A Phys Unit field displays the physical units of a tag.
FIGURE 50 - PHYS UNIT FIELD
A Phys Unit field has the following properties:
Width: width of the field
FIGURE 51 - PHYS UNIT FIELD PROPERTIES
TagBlock
A TagBlock field lists various properties of several tags in a single block.
FIGURE 52 - TAGBLOCK FIELD
The first 4 columns define various settings of a selected tag. You can add columns to display various
values of these tags (none, comment, measured, used or validated value or accuracy, penalty)
A TagBlock field has the following properties:
Tag Block: list of tags and properties to

display
FIGURE 53 - TAGBLOCK FIELD PROPERTIES
Click on the button that appears when clicking on (Collection) to select tags and properties to
display:
FIGURE 54 - TAGBLOCK EDITOR
The first four columns define general properties:
TagName: name of the tag
Comment: comment associated to the tag
Aggregation: aggregation mode for the tag
Fac. Mult: multiplier for the tag values
Rows can be added and deleted using buttons located at the bottom right of the table.
To add properties, select Add Col, and then select the property to display in the drop-down menu
(TAGNAME, COMMENT, NONE, Measured, Validated, Penalty, Mea.Acc., Mea.Fil., Val.Acc., Acc.Fil.,
PhysUnit).
Tags for which information will be displayed can be chosen using the tag editor button:
FIGURE 55 - TAG EDITOR
This window allows you to select the tag name from a bls file or from your LicenseServer.
TagText
A TagText Field displays general information associated to a run: file name, model or main PFD name,
model or VALI engine version, any INFOi field.
TagValue
A TagValue Field displays a single value from a tag.
FIGURE 56 - TAGVALUE FIELD
A TagValue field has the following properties:
Fac. Mult: multiplier for the tag values
Mode: aggregation mode
Value: value to be displayed: Acc.Fil.,

Compensated, Eliminated, Filtered, Gain,
In Use, Measured, Mea.Acc., Mea.Fil,
Penalty, Status, Used Penalty, Validated,
Val.Acc., VDI Penalty
Height: height of the field (in number of

rows)
Width: width of the field (in number of

columns) FIGURE 57 - TAGVALUE FIELD PROPERTIES
TankBlock
A TankBlock field lists various properties of several storage tanks in a single block.
FIGURE 58 - TANK BLOCK FIELD PROPERTIES
A TankBlock field has the following properties:
Show Comment: display the comment

value
Show Delta Valid. Value: display the delta

validated value
Show Delta Value: display the delta value
Show Final Value: display the final value
Show Initial Value: display the initial

value
Show Overwrite Value: display the

overwrite value
Show Phys. Unit: display the physical

unit value
Show Tag Name: display the tag name

value
Show Validated Value: display the FIGURE 59 - TANK BLOCK FIELD PROPERTIES
validated value
Tank Block: allows to define list of tanks
Click on the button that appears when clicking on (Collection) to select tags to display:
FIGURE 60 - TANK BLOCK EDITOR
This window allows you to configure tags for tank monitoring by setting:
Comment: comment associated to the tag
Fac. Mult: multiplying factor for the tank values
Sec.Tag: name of the tag giving the initial inventory
TagName: name of the tag giving the final inventory
Text Field
Text field is used to enter free text on the form.
Trend
A Trend field displays historical trends of selected tag values.
FIGURE 61 - TREND FIELD
A Trend field has the following properties:
Axis:
Grid X/Y: shows/hides grid on

horizontal/vertical axis
Label X/Y: label of the axis
Min/Max Y: minimum/maximum
value of the vertical axis
Min/Max Y Enabled: force use of

minimum/maximum values entered. if
set to false, minimum/maximum value
will be adjusted automatically
Visible X/Y: shows/hides horizontal/

vertical axis
Chart area
Color: background color of the trend

area
Maximized: maximized or not
General
Comment
Mode: aggregation mode
Name
Plot:
Background: background color of the

plot area
Tags:
Data: the collection of tags that will be

displayed. Click on the button that
appears when clicking on (Collection),
or right click on the trend and select
properties to select data to display.
Trend:
Background: background color of the

field
Layout: horizontal or vertical FIGURE 62 - TREND FIELD PROPERTIES
Show legend: shows/hides the legend

of the trend
Time Range: DAY, WEEK, MONTH, YEAR

Time Unit: Number of periods in the
trend
Title: title that will be displayed above

When clicking on the button that appears when clicking on (Collection), or right clicking on the
trend and select properties, data to display can be selected:
FIGURE 63 - TREND DATA
This window allows to choose the tag to display, which value to trend (Acc.Fil., Compensated,
Eliminated, Filtered, Gain, In Use, Measured, Mea.Acc., Mea.Fil, Penalty, Status, Used Penalty,
Validated, Val.Acc., VDI Penalty), the color and the style of the lines and symbols, a multiplier for the
value and a legend.
SECTION 3: USING VALIFORMS

3.1 STARTING VALIFORMS
To start ValiForms in interactive mode:
double click the application ValiForms.exe in the bin folder of VALI installation
select the configuration xml file
the ValiForms window is then displayed
To start ValiForms in background mode, start ValiForms in <installdir>\bin folder (by defaut C:
\Program Files\Belsim\bin or C:\Belsim\bin) with the following mandatory arguments:
the keyword –BG
the run date (in format yyyyMMdd_HHmmss, optionally surrounded by double quotes )
the duration value and its physical units (Hours|H|Min|D|Day)
the name of the configuration xml file
Optionally you can use the following arguments:
the keyword –A followed by an aggregation period:
DD: Day to Date
WD: Week to Date
MD: Month to Date
YD: Year to Date
LD: Last Day
LW: Last Week
LM: Last Month
LY: Last Year
the keyword –I (or –O) to print only the input (or output) section. By default, only the
output section is printed
Examples:
C:\Program Files\Belsim\bin\ValiForms.exe –BG 20110314_000000 1 H "D:\Tests\ValiForms\test.xml"
C:\Program Files\Belsim\bin\ValiForms.exe –BG 20110314_000000 1 H "D:\Tests\ValiForms\test.xml" –I
C:\Program Files\Belsim\bin\ValiForms.exe –BG "20110314_000000" 1 H "D:\Tests\ValiForms\test.xml"
Attention:
1. You can also start ValiForms using a short-cut pointing to the application.
2. You can provide the name of the xml file as argument to the application.
3. In a ValiProduction application, ValiForms can be called directly from ValiManager, opening the
section corresponding to active run and step.
4. In a ValiPerformance application, ValiForms can be called directly from ValiService/

ValiScheduler to generate (and possibly e-mail) reports. In such a case, you only need to specify
the xml file name and path and optionally use the options –I, –O and –A.
3.2 USING VALIFORMS IN INTERACTIVE MODE
FIGURE 64 - A TYPICAL VALIFORMS INPUT FORM
Depending on the configuration of the xml file, some of the options described below may be
deactivated. For example, the aggregation and date browsing option will only be operational when
in connection with a ValiDatabase or with a ValiProduction application.
The user can only enter data in the blank fields. All other fields are either static data, read-only data,
calculated or validated values.
Following buttons are available:
Aggregation: aggregate data from consecutive runs between two selected dates
Print: prints the Form contents (see more information below)
Save: saves the input data
Save and Approve: saves the input data and sets the step as being completed (available
only when ValiForms is run from a ValiProduction application)
About: display Belsim coordinates
Help: activate the Help file
Close: closes the application. Take care that input data are not saved when closing the
application
The Print command activates first a selection screen to specify what needs to be printed out.
A preview of the printed report is then displayed.
The menu bar gives access to the following options:
: save the report as a pdf, xls, emf or rtf file
: print the report
: change the page set-up
: toggle the navigation bar
: activate the hand tool, to move the report in the preview window
: activate the zoom tool, to zoom in or out the preview window
: select text in the report
: search text in the report
: go back to the first page
: go to previous page
: go to next page
: go to last page
: go to preceding view
: go to next view
: preview in actual size
: preview a full page
: preview with actual page width
: preview two pages
: preview a selected number of pages
CHAPTER 18
THERMO
XVIII
Thermo is a tool dedicated to thermodynamic calculations, such as:
thermodynamic properties calculations (enthalpy, entropy, etc.)
thermodynamic and state diagrams
phase equilibrium at constant pressure or temperature
thermodynamic equilibrium using the White method
Thermo tool offers various benefits as it allows to:
initialize the starting point of a reconciliation problem
analyze the evolution of the properties of a given stream
determine the dew/bubble point as well as the vapor fraction of a mixture
Thermo handles calculations for both pure components and mixtures. The components can either be
defined by the USER or loaded from the BELSIM database which contains more than 830 compounds
(including acetylene, acids, alcohols, aromatics, olefins etc.). Pseudo-compounds are also available for
petroleum fractions, fuel-oil and coal modeling.
The Thermodynamic methods are
ideal gas/liquid
Peng-Robinson
Soave
Lee-Kesler-Plöcker
LASSC, Redlich-Kwong
Curl-Pitzer
Virial equation of state
NBS, VDI and IAPWS-IF97 models for steam/water
NRTL
UNIQUAC
UNIFAC
Chao-Seader
Grayson-Streed
Braun K10
Please refer to Section 3 of the ValiModeller help file for more information on the thermodynamic
methods.
The necessary input for Thermo is a BELSIM model file <model.bls>. Please refer to Section 4 of the
ValiModeller help file on how to build model files. The model file defines:
the composition of the streams
the stream thermod, i.e. the group of thermodynamic methods that are defined on the
stream
Thermodynamic calculations are performed within the library Thermo4.dll which is the core engine
of Thermo while Thermo.exe is used for the graphical user interface.
FIGURE 1 - THERMO ARCHITECTURE
SECTION 2: USING THERMO

2.1 STARTING THERMO
To start Thermo go to the bin directory of the VALI installation folder and double-click on “Thermo.
exe”.
FIGURE 2 - THERMO EMPTY S CREEN
Thermo opens by default the model file loaded during the last use. If Thermo does not find the model
file or if Thermo is opened for the first time, most functions are disabled until a model file is loaded.
2.2 OVERVIEW OF THERMO
Thermo window is divided in 5 main parts as illustrated in the picture below.
FIGURE 3 - THERMO WINDOW - OVERVIEW
2.3 MENU BAR
The Menu bar provides an access to all main functionalities of the program.
File
use File| Open to load an existing model file
use File| Save model to save current stream properties into the model file
use File| Export to Excel to export the displayed results in an Excel file
use File| Exit to exit the program
Tools
use Tools|Physical Units to define the physical units and the number format of
properties to be displayed
use Tools|Save Results to save parameters and computed values in Thermo
use Tools|Load Results to load results that have been saved previously
Application
use Application| Calculate to compute thermodynamic properties of the selected

stream under given computation mode
use Application| White Equilibrium to perform the thermodynamic equilibrium of

a stream using the WHITE method
use Application| L/V Equilibrium to draw L/V equilibrium curves at constant

pressure or temperature
use Application| Draw Chart to draw customized charts. For a given stream, any of
its properties can be plotted as a function of a state variable or a partial compound rate
Help
use Help| Content to open Thermo help
use Help|About to display general information about the application
2.4 TOOLBAR
The toolbar provides a quick access to main functions of the menu bar described above.
Open (File|Open)
Save model (File|Save model)
Export to Excel (File|Export to Excel)
Calculate (Application|Calculate)
L/V Equilibrium (Application|L/V equilibrium)
Draw Chart (Application|Draw Chart)
White Equilibrium (Application|White Equilibrium)
Help File (Help|Content)
2.5 TABS VIEW
The tabs view contains all the information about the selected stream. There are three major types of
tab:
General tab: it displays the selected stream information and enables to set the
computation mode. It also displays results of the computation
White equilibrium tab: it displays results of the White equilibrium computation
Graph tab: it displays the created graphs. One graph is plotted per Tab
Tab can be closed by middle-clicking on it or by right-clicking to open the context menu and selecting
the Delete button.
It is also possible to rename the tabs by the context menu, as shown below.
FIGURE 4 - CONTEXT MENU OF TABS
Note: the General tab cannot be closed or renamed.
2.6 STATUS BAR
The label on the left side of the status bar indicates the state of the last operation performed by
Thermo.
The second label indicates the current Thermo user’s name.
2.7 OPEN MODEL FILES
To open an existing model file, click on the Open button in Menu|File or in the toolbar.
A dialog box appears for browsing the model file to be loaded.
Attention: model files created with the 4.6 or higher version of VALI can be opened by Thermo.
Models created with an older version of VALI must be converted prior to using Thermo. The model
file will be automatically converted once opened through the upgraded ValiModeller version
FIGURE 5 - OPENING MODEL FILE DIALOG BOX
When a valid model file is loaded, the properties of the first stream (alphabetically ordered) are
automatically displayed in the General tab.
TREEVIEW
On the Thermo window left side, the Tree View shows the following nodes:
the Stream node: it lists all the streams contained in the model file. It enables to load one
stream by double-clicking on it
the Thermod node: it displays the methods used in each Thermod and groups streams that
use the same Thermod. It enables to load a stream by double-clicking on it
the Compounds node: it groups streams by compounds. It enables to load a stream by

double-clicking on it
the Charts node: it groups created charts by stream. It enables to display a chart by
double-clicking on it
Click on the symbol to expand or on the symbol to collapse the corresponding node of the Tree
View.
FIGURE 6 - THERMO WITH A MODEL FILE OPENED
2.8 THERMODYNAMIC PROPERTIES CALCULATION
Thermodynamic properties calculation can be performed once a model file has been correctly loaded.
The Stream information frame in the General tab displays the essential parameters used in the
calculations.
FIGURE 7 - S TREAM INFORMATION FRAME
Stream list: it shows the current stream selected. To select another stream, use the drop
down list or the Tree View.
Thermod: it indicates the Thermod of the selected stream. The Thermods are defined in the
model file and cannot be modified trough Thermo. Modifications of the Thermod have to be
done via ValiModeller
State: it indicates the state of the selected stream. To select another state, use the drop
down list. The State field sets the phases that can be present in the selected stream:
L: Liquid phase only
V: Vapor phase only
LV: Liquid and Vapor phases
LL: two Liquid phases (if the model behavior enables demixing)
LLV: two Liquid phases and one Vapor phase
WL: Water phase and Liquid phase
WLV: Water, Liquid and Vapor phases
Composition: it indicates the type of composition to be displayed. To select another

composition, use the drop down list.
MR: Partial molar flow rate
WR: Partial weight flow rate
MF: Molar fraction
WF: Weight fraction
Mode: it indicates the calculation mode of the selected stream. To select another mode, use
the drop down list. The Mode field sets the two state variables used to determine the
stream properties.
PT: Pressure Temperature
PA: Pressure Vapor fraction
TA: Temperature Vapor fraction
PH: Pressure Enthalpy
PS: Pressure Entropy
The cells containing the values related to the selected calculation mode are highlighted in green.
Double click on the green cells to modify the values of the state variables.
Once stream information and parameters of calculation are selected, click on the Calculate button
in the Menu|Application or in the toolbar to run the calculation. Results are displayed in the data
grids.
Note: Thermo only takes into account the green cells to perform the calculations.
FIGURE 8 - S TREAM INFORMATION FRAME AND DATA GRIDS OF THE GENERAL TAB
DATA GRIDS
The data grid displays the stream properties and rates. These values are classified in five columns
according to the phases of the selected stream. Two liquid phases can be represented if the model
behavior allows demixing. The total phase represents the properties of the whole mixture.
By right-clicking on the data grids, the context menu is displayed.
FIGURE 9 - CONTEXT MENU OF THE DATA GRIDS
Cut: cut the value of the selected cell
Copy: copy the value of the selected cell into the clipboard
Paste: paste the value of the clipboard in the selected cell
Set as Total Column: fill the values of the Total column with the ones of the selected
columns
Show old: when activated, the results of the previous calculation are shown when the
mouse quits the data grid
2.9 CHANGING PHYSICAL UNITS
To change the physical units, click on the Physical Units button in Menu|Tools or in the Tree View.
The physical unit window is displayed and shows the current physical units used and their number
format.
FIGURE 10 - CHANGE PHYS ICAL UNIT WINDOW
to change the physical units, use the drop down list below the Physical Units label
to change number format, use the drop down list below the Decimals label
to hide/show a physical property in the data grids, use the drop down list below the Show
property label
The three check boxes at the bottom of the window enable to respectively:
set the same number of decimal for all elements of data grids at once
take into account the enthalpy of formation for the enthalpy calculation
automatically use the selected stream physical units as defined in the model file when
selecting a stream in the General tab
2.10 SAVE RESULT IN THE MODEL FILE
To save stream properties calculated by Thermo into the currently loaded BLS model file, click on the
Save model button in Menu|Tools or in the toolbar.
A dialog box appears allowing you to select the stream of the model file into which the results are to
be saved. The stream can be selected via the Destination Stream drop down list. The Source Phase
drop down list enables to save the results of a specific phase. The Source Stream shows the stream
results that are to be saved.
FIGURE 11 - S AVING PROMPT
Note: it is not possible to save the displayed results of a stream into another model file than the one
currently loaded by Thermo.
2.11 EXPORT TO EXCEL
To export the displayed results of the data grids in an Excel file, click on the Export to Excel button
in Menu|File or in the toolbar.
A dialog box appears for browsing the directory and the name of the Excel file to be saved.
FIGURE 12 - EXPORT TO EXCEL DIALOG BOX
The structure of the data in the excel file is similar to the one of the data grids.
FIGURE 13 - EXAMPLE OF RES ULTS EXPORTED TO EXCEL
2.12 DRAWING LIQUID – VAPOR EQUILIBRIUM
This method calculates the Liquid Vapor Equilibrium curves of a mixture as a function of one
changing compound rate at constant pressure or constant temperature.
To draw Liquid-Vapor Equilibrium, click on the L/V Equilibrium button in Menu|Application or

in the toolbar. A dialog box prompts you to set the graph parameters.
FIGURE 14 - LIQUID VAPOR EQUILIBRIUM S ETTINGS
The parameters to be chosen are:
Select a changing element: it selects the partial fraction flow rate to be plotted
Selected element range: it sets the range and step of the changing element
Composition Mode: it determines whether the selected element range is represented in

molar or weight fraction
Select imposed property: it enables to choose to either perform Liquid-Vapor equilibrium

at fixed pressure or fixed temperature. A field enables to set the value of the fixed property
Once the parameters are set, click on the OK button. The graph is plotted in a new tab.
By default, the name of this tab is Liquid Vapor.
FIGURE 15 - AN EXAMPLE OF LIQUID VAPOR EQUILIBRIUM (AIR AT 1 ATM)
2.13 DRAW CUSTOMIZED CHART
The function Draw Chart aims at plotting the evolution of any properties in function of either a
linearly changing state variable or a stream compound.
To draw a customized chart, click on the Draw Chart button in the Menu|Application or in the
toolbar. A dialog box prompts you to set the graph parameters.
FIGURE 16 - DRAW CHART S ETTINGS
The parameters to be chosen are:
Basic Option frame: it enables to change the calculation parameters as the Mode, the
Composition and the State
X axis element frame: It enables to choose
the element to be plotted on the horizontal axis
the variation range and step of the horizontal element
The X axis element can only be a state variable, a partial or total rates flow. Note that only
state variables taken into account for calculation are displayed. Change the Mode to
display other state variables
Y elements frame: it enables to choose any property or any of the partial rates to be
plotted on the vertical axis. To select an element to be plotted:
select the element in the Y elements frame (the first box contains the thermodynamics
properties and the second the compounds of the mixture)
select the stream phase in the list box below the State label to get the values of the
selected property related to the specific phase
click on the Add button
Selected Element frame: It shows the selected elements to be plotted in the Y axis. To
remove one of these elements from the list, select it and click on the Remove
button
Important note: the X axis element is chosen depending on the selected mode while the other state
variables of the stream (including composition) are determined through the data grids of the
general tab. Please go to the general tab and double-click on the variable cell to change its value.
Once the graph parameters are set, click the OK button. The graph is plotted in a new
tab. By default, the name of this tab is Chart.
FIGURE 17 - AN EXAMPLE OF CUS TOMIZED CHART (VAPOR FRACTION OF THE AIR IN FUNCTION OF THE
TEMPERATURE)
2.14 GRAPH TAB
A Graph tab is displayed when
a Liquid-Vapor Equilibrium graph is created
a customized graph is created
FIGURE 18 - EXAMPLE OF GRAPH TAB
By right-clicking on the graph, the context menu is displayed.
FIGURE 19 – CONTEXT MENU OF THE GRAPH
use Copy as image to Copy the chart as an image in the clipboard
use Copy as text to Copy the chart data in an Excel format in the clipboard
use Paste to merge a graph that has been previously copied as text with the one currently
displayed
The toolbar on the top of the Graph tab provides access to specific functions
use Show Values to show the values of each point of the graph
use Print to print the graph
use Save as to export the graph in a new image file
use Export to Excel to export the graph data in a new Excel file
use Preferences to open the preference window
use Show Points to show or hide the point of the graph
use Open in new Window to open the graph in a new window
use Show Legend to show or hide the legend of the graph. The legend gives information
about the parameters used to plot the graph such as the composition, the changing
property, the stream or the model file used.
CHART LAYOUT
The preference window is composed of four tabs enabling to customize the graph layout.
The General tab enables setting
the plot color
the background color
the title (text, font, size, color and background color)
FIGURE 20 – CHART S ETTINGS - GENERAL TAB
The Axis tab enables setting
the title of the axis
to shown/hide the grid
to display axis in logarithmic mode
to set the area of the axis
FIGURE 21 – CHART S ETTINGS – AXIS TAB
The Legend tab enables to see the legend of the graph and to set the information to be shown.
FIGURE 22 – CHART S ETTINGS – GRAPHICS TAB
The Graphics tab enables to change the layout of the curves
the line color
the markers of the calculated points
the line style
show or hide the selected curve on the graph
FIGURE 23 – CHART S ETTINGS
By clicking on the Values button, a grid is displayed showing the values of the
calculated points of the selected curve.
FIGURE 24 - AN EXAMPLE OF CALCULATED POINTS OF A CURVE
2.15 WHITE EQUILIBRIUM
The White Equilibrium function performs a thermodynamic equilibrium of a stream using the
WHITE method. It takes into account all the possible chemical reactions in the mixture and
minimizes the free Gibb's Energy in a range of temperature or enthalpy. WHITE method involves
chemical reaction and therefore it uses the formation enthalpy for enthalpy display.
To start the equilibrium computation, click on the White Equilibrium button in Menu|
Application or in the toolbar.
A dialog box prompts you to set the parameters.
FIGURE 25 - WHITE EQUILIBRIUM DIALOG BOX
Two calculation modes are available:
EPH (adiabatic reactor): equilibrium calculated at the enthalpy and pressure set in the
General tab
EPT (isothermal reactor): equilibrium calculated at the temperature and the pressure set in
the General tab
The Delta Temperature (Enthalpy) represents the deviation from the equilibrium. It means that the
Gibb's Enthalpy is minimized at a temperature in a range T +/- DELTA T (enthalpy of H +/- DELTA H)
to find the equilibrium. The mixture properties are shown for the temperature T (enthalpy H).
Note: White equilibrium is designated for VAPOUR phases only and calculations will be done
assuming a vapor phase mixture.
The White Equilibrium tab is displayed once the white equilibrium has been calculated.
FIGURE 26 - WHITE EQUILIBRIUM TAB
The two grids on the left side display the properties before and after the runs for the vapor phase.
The graph on the right side gives an overview of the variation of the composition.
2.16 SAVING, LOADING AND COMPARING RESULTS
SAVING RESULTS
It is possible to save the displayed stream properties in Thermo in order to reload them later on or to
compare them with other computations.
The stream, the model file and the calculation parameters used are saved together with the results.
To save results:
click on the Save results button in the Menu|Tools
enter a name for the saved results in the dialog box
click the OK button
FIGURE 27: S AVE RES ULTS DIALOG BOX
LOADING RESULTS
Once the results are saved, they can be reloaded by clicking on the Load Results button in Menu|
Tools. It opens a dialog box with all the previously saved results. Select the saved results by the check
box on the right side and click on the load button. The model file is automatically loaded and the
saved results are displayed in data grids of the General tab.
FIGURE 28 - LOAD RES ULTS DIALOG BOX
COMPARE RESULTS
The Load Result dialog box also enables to select several results to be compared. Select the saved
results by the check boxes on the right side and click on the Compare button. Under the condition
that selected streams have the same Thermod, a new tab is created with the selected streams.
FIGURE 29 - COMPARIS ON TAB
Stream information frame is similar to the one of the General tab. It contains:
Stream List: it contains the selected streams to be compared
Stream number: it indicates the number of the stream. This number is used as a reference
to the stream in the data grids
State: it indicates the state of the selected stream
Composition: it indicates the composition of the selected stream
Mode: it indicates the calculation mode of the selected stream
The data grids contain the results of the streams comparison. Columns that correspond to those
phases that have all rates equal to zero are not shown to ensure a better readability of the results.
Column header names are composed of the stream phase followed by a number (the Stream number)
that refers to the streams loaded. For example, if the stream number is 0, the Vapor 0 column
designates thermodynamic properties of the stream in the Vapor phase.
Through this window, thermodynamic properties calculation on several streams can be done at
once.
For each stream of the Stream List, set the stream parameters and computation mode in the Stream
information frame. The parameters can be different for each stream.
Enter the state variables and partial compounds rate (green cells) with desired values and click the
Calculate button located under the Stream information frame to launch the computation. The results
are displayed in data grids.
Your performance wizard

ValiHelp PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ValiHelp PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ValiHelp PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

VALI 4.

USER DEFINED EQUATIONS AND CONTROLLERS: OPXVAL, FLXVAL, VARVAL,

SECTION 1: USER'S GUIDE ORGANISATION

INTRODUCTION TO VALIMODELLER: presentation of some important concepts of

THERMODYNAMIC CALCULATION METHODS: presentation of the various

SECTION 2: NEW FEATURES IN RELEASE VALI 4.12

2.2 UPGRADING MODELS FROM RELEASE VALI 4.11 TO

2.3 KNOWN ISSUES

As an example, the recommended parameters for Korean Operating Systems are:

2.5 NEW FEATURES IN VALIMODELLER AND VALIENGINE

USER-DEFINED DIGITS NUMBER IN MAIN.ARC FILE

PRODUCT IMBALANCE FLAGGED AS ERROR

COMPATIBILITY WITH CHINESE AND KOREAN ENVIRONMENTS

2.6 NEW FEATURES IN VALISCHEDULER AND VALISERVICE

NEGATIVE TIME DELAY IN REAL TIME APPLICATIONS

SECTION 1: DVR PRINCIPLES

Section 3 de scribe s VALI Environme nt

Section 8 discusse s compatibility issue s with the VDI-2048

1.2 WHAT IS VALI ?

1.3 WHAT ARE THE BENEFITS OF DVR ?

improvement of measurement layout

decrease of number of routine analyses

reduced frequency of sensor calibration; only faulty sensors need to be calibrated

on-line optimization tools work with more accurate information

systematic improvement of process data

early detection of sensors deviation and degradation of equipment performance

correct plant balances for accounting and performance follow-up

quality at process level

1.4 THE BASICS OF DATA VALIDATION AND RECONCILIATION

Some sources of errors in the balances directly depend on sensors themselves:

intrinsic sensor precision

Mathematically, this can be expressed as:

where : is the validated value of measurement i

is the measured value of measurement i

is the measurement uncertainty or confidence interval

corresponds to the process equality constraints

corresponds to the process inequality constraints

The term is called the penalty of measurement i

SECTION 2: VALIMODELLER ENVIRONMENT

It contains the following modules:

Sensiv.exe: the sensitivity analysis tool of ValiModeller and analyses the

2.2 THE MODEL FILE (BLS) AND OTHER FILES

FIGURE 1 - VALI ENVIRONMENT

ValiEngine is described in a section "How to run your data validation model".

SECTION 3: VALI OBJECTS

The objects available are:

STREAM: conne ction be twe e n units

REACTION: che mical re action de fine d by its stoichiome try

When a tagname is automatically built by ValiEngine, its length may be up to 48 characters.

UNITS, which describe the pieces of equipment of the process

STREAMS which connect the UNITS

There are three types of streams:

MATERIAL: a stream of chemical compounds

THERMAL: heat flow

MECHANICAL: mechanical power transfer

Liquid: liquid only

Vapour: vapour only

Liquid/Vapour: liquid and/or vapour

Liquid/Liquid: up to two liquid phases can appear